JP2019118560A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of improving an amusement to a game of a player.SOLUTION: A game machine executes determination by determination means, based on establishment of a determination condition, and based on a specific determination result of the determination means, executes a privilege game advantageous to a player by privilege game execution means. In a first game state disadvantageous to the player, based on establishment of a specific setting condition different from at least execution of the privilege game, a second game state advantageous to the player is set by second game state setting means. In the second game state, for every time when a predetermined specific condition is established, an acquisition game in which the player can acquire a prescribed privilege, is executed. Therefore, an amusement to a game of the player is improved.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 327

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine.

  Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines shift to the winning state when the result of the lottery performed based on the winning of the gaming ball to the starting winning opening is a win. Among such gaming machines, there are those in which a plurality of types of hitting types different in the number of rounds are provided, and there are those in which the interest in the game is improved by making the obtainable game value different.

Patent 2514417 gazette

  However, in such a conventional game machine, since it is not in an advantageous state unless hit, there is a possibility that the game until it comes to a hit may become monotonous, and it is difficult to improve the interest of the player in the game There was a problem.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of the player in the game.

  In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 plays the game based on the determination means performing the determination based on the establishment of the determination condition and the determination result of the determination means being a specific determination result Between the bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game advantageous to the player and the first game state disadvantageous to the player, the player is determined based on the establishment of at least a specific setting condition different from the execution of the bonus game. Second game state setting means for setting an advantageous second game state, and in the second game state, the player executes an acquired game in which a predetermined privilege can be obtained whenever a predetermined specific condition is satisfied. And an acquired game execution means.

  In the gaming machine according to claim 2, in the gaming machine according to claim 1, a ball entering means capable of entering the game ball, a first position where the game ball can enter the ball into the ball entering means, and A variable that can be changed to a second position where the game ball is difficult to enter than the first position, and a bonus that provides the predetermined benefit based on the game ball entering the ball entry means The acquired game execution means is provided with the award game as the achievement of the specific condition that the determination result of the determination means is a second determination result different from the specific determination result. The variable means is controlled to change from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period.

  In the gaming machine according to claim 3, in the gaming machine according to claim 2, the second game is performed even after the execution of the acquired game is finished when the acquired game is executed at least in the second gaming state. The state is maintained.

  A game machine according to claim 4 is the game machine according to claim 2 or 3, wherein the first ball entry means capable of entering game balls, and the second ball entry means different from the first ball entry means; And the determination condition is a first determination condition established based on the game ball entering the first ball entry means, and that the game ball enters the second ball entry means The second determination condition that is established based on at least the second determination condition, and the determination that is executed based on the establishment of the second determination condition is based on the determination that is performed based on the establishment of the first determination condition Also, the probability that the second determination result is obtained is high, and the first gaming state is determined when the determination is performed based on the establishment of the second determination condition. (2) It is configured such that the discrimination result is less likely to be output than the gaming state.

  The gaming machine according to claim 5 is the gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 4, wherein in the second gaming state, at least until the determination result of the determination means becomes the specific determination result, It is maintained in the same gaming state.

  According to the gaming machine of the first aspect, the discrimination means for performing the discrimination based on the establishment of the discrimination condition, and the advantage advantageous to the player based on the discrimination result of the discrimination means being the particular discrimination result A second game advantageous to the player based on establishment of at least a specific setting condition different from the execution of the bonus game, between the bonus game execution means for executing the game and the first game state disadvantageous to the player. Second game state setting means for setting a state, and acquired game execution means for executing an acquired game in which a player can acquire a predetermined privilege each time a predetermined specific condition is satisfied in the second game state And.

  As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  According to the gaming machine of the second aspect, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine of the first aspect, the ball entering means capable of entering the game ball and the game ball can enter the ball entering means The predetermined position on the basis of the first position and a second position at which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first position, the variable means being variable, and the game ball entering the ball entry means A bonus granting means for granting a bonus of the above, and the acquired game execution means is that the determination result of the determination means is a second determination result different from the specific determination result as the establishment of the specific condition The variable means is controlled so as to change from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period as the acquired game.

  Thereby, in the second gaming state, since it is possible to play the game paying attention to whether or not the game ball enters the ball entering means, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game There is.

  According to the gaming machine of the third aspect, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine of the second aspect, after the execution of the winning game is completed when the winning game is executed at least in the second gaming state Also, since the second gaming state is maintained, the degree of advantage of the second gaming state can be further enhanced. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  According to the gaming machine of the fourth aspect, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine of the second aspect or the third aspect, the first ball entering means capable of entering the game ball, and the first ball entering means different from the first ball entering means 2 ball entering means, and the judging condition is a first judging condition established based on the game ball entering the first ball entering means, and a game ball to the second ball entering means And at least a second determination condition established based on entering the ball, and determination performed based on the establishment of the second determination condition is based on the establishment of the first determination condition The probability that the second determination result is obtained is higher than the determination to be executed, and the first gaming state is determined based on the establishment of the second determination condition. When it is determined that the result of the determination is less likely to be output than in the second gaming state .

  As a result, since the degree of advantage in the second gaming state can be further improved, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  According to the gaming machine of the fifth aspect, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine according to any one of the first to fourth aspects, in the second gaming state, at least the discrimination result of the discrimination means is the particular discrimination result Since the same gaming state is maintained until it becomes, in the second gaming state, there is an effect that it is possible to realize novel game characteristics that are expected not to be a specific determination result.

It is a front view of a pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. (A) is a figure which showed typically area | region division setting and effective line setting of a display screen, (b) is a figure which illustrated the actual display screen. It is the timing chart which showed the flow of the production which is indicated with the 3rd design display device in 1st execution form. (A) is a figure showing an example of the display contents of the ending of the big hit game in a 1st embodiment, and (b) is the figure showing an example of the display contents in a definite change in a 1st embodiment. (A) is a figure showing an example of the contents of a display when the 2nd special symbol is not changed after the change start of the 1st special symbol in the 1st embodiment, and (b) is the 1st execution It is the figure which showed an example of the display content at the time of the 2nd special symbol making a small hit in RUSH in a form. (A) is a figure showing an example of the contents of a display when the 2nd special symbol is in the midst of change after the start of the change of the first special symbol in the 1st embodiment, and (b) is the 1st execution It is the figure which showed an example of the display content at the time of the 2nd special symbol stopping a fluctuation | variation during the hitting | batter fluctuation | variation of the 1st special symbol in a form. (A) is a figure showing an example in the state where the result of change indication of the 1st special symbol became big hit A in RUSH in a 1st embodiment, (b) is RUSH in a 1st embodiment It is a figure showing an example of a state where the result of change display of the 1st special symbol in it is big hit C or big hit D. (A) is a figure showing a card forgetting alert screen in the first embodiment, and (b) to (d) are timing charts showing timings for displaying the card forget alert screen in the first embodiment is there. It is the model which showed typically the game flow of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. FIG. 5 is a schematic view schematically showing a counter and the like provided in a RAM 203 of main controller 110. It is the model which showed typically the structure of ROM of the main control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the first random number table, (b) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the small hit random number table, and (c) is a schematic view It is the model which showed the content of the 2nd per random number table typically. (A) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the jackpot type selection table, and (b) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the small hit type selection table. It is the model which showed the structure of the fluctuation pattern selection table typically. It is the model which showed the content of the table for common use typically. (A) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the time reduction / probability change table, and (b) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the latency confirmation table. It is the model which showed the content of the common drawing fluctuation pattern table typically. It is the model which showed typically the structure of RAM of the main control unit in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of ROM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment, (b) schematically shows the structure of RAM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram shown in FIG. (A) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the stop display mode selection table, and (b) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the additional effect selection table. It is a block diagram of an electrical configuration of a display control device in a 1st embodiment. (A)-(c) is an explanatory view explaining an image at the time of power activation. (A) is explanatory drawing explaining the back surface A, (b) is explanatory drawing explaining the back surface B-D. (A)-(c) is explanatory drawing explaining the back surface E. FIG. It is the model which showed an example of the display data table typically. It is the model which showed an example of the transfer data table typically. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the drawing list typically. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation process performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol variation start process performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special symbol big hit judging processing performed by MPU in a main control device. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special symbol change pattern selection processing performed by MPU in a main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the game state update process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol variation under-execution processing performed by MPU in a main control device. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special symbol change stop processing performed by MPU in a main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol variation start process performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd special symbol big hit judging processing performed by MPU in a main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 2 out-of-variation fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd special symbol variation pattern selection processing performed by MPU in a main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 2 out-of-variation change pattern selection process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol variation under-execution processing performed by MPU in a main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol fluctuation stop processing performed by MPU in a main control device. It is a flow chart which shows a Tokusatsu 2 off stop processing performed by MPU in a main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the starting winning a prize process performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol change process performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the through gate passage process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows NMI interruption processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit control processing performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit end processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the small hitting control processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the small hitting operation setting processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd prize-winning processing performed by MPU in a main control device. It is the flowchart which showed the starting process performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the main processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination processing performed by MPU in an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the stop classification command reception processing which is executed by MPU inside the audio lamp control control equipment. It is the flowchart which showed the state command processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the hit related process performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot related processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the small hitting related processing which is executed by MPU inside the voice lamp control control equipment. It is the flowchart which showed the remaining frequency update process performed by MPU in an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the temporary stop related processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation resumption processing which is executed by MPU inside the audio lamp control control equipment. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation display setting processing which is executed by MPU inside the audio lamp control control equipment. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation | variation display setting process for special figures 1 performed by MPU in an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation | variation display setting process for special figures 2 performed by MPU in an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the various counter update process performed by MPU in an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the main processing performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the boot process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the display control device is there. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination processing performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is a flowchart showing fluctuation pattern command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing stop type command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. (A) is a flowchart showing opening command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing round number command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device . It is the flowchart which showed the ending command processing which is executed by MPU inside the display control. (A) is a flow chart showing rush rush command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flow chart showing additional effect command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device is there. (A) is a flowchart showing the back image change command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the error command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device is there. It is the flowchart which showed the display setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the warning picture setting processing which is run by MPU inside the display control. It is the flowchart which showed the pointer update process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is a flowchart showing transfer setting processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing resident image transfer setting processing executed by the MPU in the display control device is there. It is the flowchart which showed the normal image transfer setting processing performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the drawing process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the timing chart which showed the flow of the game when winning a big hit C in a definite change state in a 2nd embodiment. It is a related figure of the game contents and grant privilege of the special figure 1 game after the probability change state in a 2nd embodiment is set up. (A) is a figure showing an example of the contents of a display when the 2nd special symbol is changing at the time of the hit symbol stop of the 1st special symbol in a 2nd embodiment, (b) is the 2nd execution It is the figure which showed an example of the display content at the time of the 2nd special symbol having stopped during the hit design stop of the 1st special symbol in form. It is the model which showed typically the structure of ROM of the main control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is the model which showed the content of the big hit type selection 2 table typically. (A) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of a small hitting type selection 2 table, and (b) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of a deviation type selecting table. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the contents of time reduction 2 table for probability variation. It is the model which showed typically the structure of RAM of the main control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is the model which showed typically the structure of RAM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special symbol variation processing 2 performed by MPU in the main control device in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special symbol big hit judging processing 2 performed by MPU in the main control device in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special symbol change stop processing 2 performed by MPU in the main control device in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol fixed period setting process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows processing during fixed time performed by MPU in the main control device in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd special symbol big hit judging processing 2 performed by MPU in the main control device in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd special symbol movement stop processing 2 performed by MPU in the main control device in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol fixed period setting process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the Toku-zu 2 deviation stop process 2 performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination processing 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the remaining frequency update process 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the temporary stop related process 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the restart process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the symbol determination related process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the various counter update process 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a related figure of the game contents and grant privilege of the special figure 1 game after the probability change state in a 3rd embodiment is set up. (A) is a figure showing an example of the display content of the big hit end in a 3rd embodiment, and (b) is a figure showing an example of the display content of the 1st change after the big hit. (A) is a figure showing an example of the display content of the third variation after the big hit in the third embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing the display content of the fourth variation after the big hit. (A) is a figure showing an example of the display content of the third variation after the big hit after the third variation after the big hit in the third embodiment, and (b) is between 1 to 3 variations after the big hit It is the figure which showed an example of the display content of the 2nd 2nd fluctuation after the jackpot at the time of winning in the special figure 1 small hit. It is the model which showed typically the structure of ROM of the main control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. (A) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the first random number 3 table, and (b) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the small random number 3 table. (A) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the jackpot type selection 3 table, and (b) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the small hitting type selection 3 table. (A) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the variation pattern selection 3 table, (b) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the probability variation 3 table, (c) is It is a schematic diagram which showed the content of the positive variation A table typically. (A) is a schematic view schematically showing the content of the positive variation B table, (b) is a schematic view schematically showing the content of the positive variation C table, (c) is a positive variation D table FIG. 2 is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of FIG. It is the model which showed the content of 3 tables for latent confirmation typically. It is the model which showed typically the structure of RAM of the main control unit in 3rd Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of ROM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment, (b) schematically shows the structure of RAM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram shown in FIG. It is a schematic diagram which showed the content of the probability variation presentation selection table typically. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol jackpot determination processing 3 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 3rd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 1 out-of-variation fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special symbol change stop processing 3 performed by MPU in the main control device in a 3rd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 1 removal stop process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows small hitting control processing 3 performed by MPU in the main control device in a 3rd embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination processing 3 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which shows the winning a prize information related processing which is executed by the MPU inside the voice lamp control control equipment in 3rd execution form. It is the flowchart which showed jackpot related processing 3 which is executed by MPU inside the voice lamp control control equipment in 3rd execution form. It is the flowchart which showed the big hit end processing which is executed by MPU inside the voice lamp control control equipment in 3rd execution form. It is the flow chart which showed change display setting processing 3 performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device in a 3rd embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation display setting processing for probability change performed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in a 3rd embodiment. It is the model which showed typically the game flow of the pachinko machine in 4th Embodiment. (A) is the timing chart which showed the flow of the game at the time of winning a special figure 1 jackpot during definite variation state in a 4th embodiment, and (b) shows the flow at the time of time-saving during definite variation state It is a timing chart shown. (A) is a figure showing an example of the contents of a display of RUSH rush by arrival of time saving times in a 4th embodiment, (b) is RUSH in special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation in a 4th embodiment It is the figure which showed an example of the display content to alert | report. (A) is a figure which showed an example of the display content at the time of winning a fall lottery in the latent state in 4th Embodiment, (b) is a special figure in the latent state in 4th Embodiment. It is a figure showing the display screen at the time of winning a jackpot by 2. It is the figure which showed an example of the display content in super RUSH in 4th Embodiment. It is the model which showed typically about the counter etc. which are provided in RAM203 of the main control apparatus 110 in 4th Embodiment. It is the model which showed typically the structure of ROM of the main control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is the model which showed typically the content of the jackpot classification selection 4 table in 4th Embodiment. It is the model which showed typically the structure of RAM of the main control unit in 4th Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of ROM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment, (b) schematically shows the structure of RAM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram shown in FIG. (A) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the falling lottery table, (b) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the latent mode selection table, and (c) is the falling It is the model which showed the content of the alerting | reporting selection table typically. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special symbol big hit judging processing 4 performed by MPU in the main control device in a 4th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special symbol change stop processing 4 performed by MPU in the main control device in a 4th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the game state update process 4 performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd special symbol big hit judging processing 4 performed by MPU in the main control device in a 4th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd special symbol change stop processing 4 performed by MPU in the main control device in a 4th embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination processing 4 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the state command process 4 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the latent probability mode setting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the fall production setting processing which is executed by MPU in the sound lamp control control equipment in 4th execution form. It is the flowchart which showed the small hitting related processing 4 which is executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control control equipment in 4th execution form. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation display setting processing 4 which is executed by the MPU inside the voice lamp control control equipment in 4th execution form. It is the flowchart which showed the fall notification process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation | variation display setting process 4 for special figures 1 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation display setting processing 4 for special figures 2 executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in a 4th embodiment. It is a front view of a pachinko machine in a 5th embodiment. It is a front perspective view of a small hitting variable winning prize device. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a small hitting variable winning device. It is the operation figure which looked at the variable winning a prize device for small hits from the back side. It is the timing chart which showed the flow of the game at the time of winning a special figure 1 jackpot during definite variation state in a 5th embodiment. It is the timing chart which showed the flow of the game at the time of shortening in time during definite variation state in a 5th embodiment. (A) is a figure showing an example of display contents when a small hit in the fifth embodiment, (b) is a figure showing an example of display contents during a small hit game. (A) is a figure showing an example of display contents when a ball passes a fall gate during small hitting game in a 5th embodiment, (b) is a ball which falls a falling gate during a small hit game It is a figure showing an example of the contents of a display when not passing. (A) is a figure which showed an example of the display content of the small hit end, (b) is a figure which showed an example of the display content in a latent state (invincible mode). It is the model which showed typically the structure of RAM of the main control unit in 5th Embodiment. (A) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of a small hitting type selection 5 table, and (b) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of an operation scenario storage area. It is the model which showed typically the structure of RAM of the main control unit in 5th Embodiment. It is the model which showed typically the structure of RAM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small hitting entrance passage processing performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the fall gate passage process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small hitting control processing 5 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 5th embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the state command processing 5 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 5th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the hit related process 5 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 5th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the ball passage related processing performed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in a 5th embodiment. It is the model which showed typically the structure of ROM of the main control unit in 6th Embodiment. It is the model which showed typically the structure of RAM of the main control unit in 6th Embodiment. (A) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the jackpot state flag, and (b) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the small hit state flag. It is a flow chart which shows special symbol variation processing 6 performed by MPU in the main control device in a 6th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation | variation condition discrimination | determination process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol variation start process 6 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 6th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd special symbol variation start processing 6 performed by MPU in the main control device in a 6th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the electrically-driven combination thing opening-and-closing process 6 performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit control processing 6 performed by MPU in the main control unit in 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the round execution process performed by MPU in the main control unit in 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit interruption processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the ending execution processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit end process 6 performed by MPU in the main control unit in 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small hitting control processing 6 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 6th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small hitting end processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 6th embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in a 7th embodiment. It is the enlarged view to which the flow-path unit in 7th Embodiment was expanded. (A) is a plan view schematically showing the ball flow when the motorized product in the seventh embodiment is in the closed state (embedded state), and (b) is in the closed state (embedded state) ) Is a perspective view schematically showing the ball flow. (A) is a plan view schematically showing the ball flow when the motorized prize in the seventh embodiment is in the open state (projected state), and (b) is in the opened state (projected state) ) Is a perspective view schematically showing the ball flow. (A) is a figure showing an example of the contents of a display at the time of 2nd design hit during time saving state in a 7th embodiment, (b) is a 2nd entrance hole during a time saving state in a 7th embodiment. It is the figure which showed an example of the display content when a ball | bowl injects into. (A) is a figure showing an example of display contents when a result of a special drawing 2 lottery is out during time saving state in a 7th embodiment, and (b) is during time saving state in a 7th embodiment. FIG. 6 is a diagram showing an example of display contents in the case where the ball flows down the delay passage during the special figure 2 fluctuation. (A) is a figure showing an example of the contents of a display in case a ball flows down a channel normally during special figure 2 change during time saving state in a 7th embodiment, and (b) is the 7th execution. It is the figure which showed an example of the display content at the time of V passing during small hitting game in form. (A) is a figure showing an example of display contents when V does not pass during small hitting game in time saving state in a 7th embodiment, and (b) is shown as time saving state in a 7th embodiment It is a figure showing an example of the contents of a display when time saving state A is set up. (A) is a schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of ROM of the main control apparatus in 7th Embodiment, (b) shows typically the structure of RAM of the main control apparatus in 7th Embodiment. FIG. (A) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the first random number 7 table, (b) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the special symbol 1 random number table, (c) These are the schematic diagrams which showed the content of the special symbol 2 random number table typically. (A) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the first hit type selection 7 table, (b) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the special view 1 jackpot type selection table, (C) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the special figure 2 big hit classification selection table. (A) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the second random number 7 table, and (b) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the small hitting type selection 7 table. It is the model which showed the content of the fluctuation pattern 7 table typically. (A) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the first time variation pattern table, and (b) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the second time variation pattern table. It is the model which showed the content of the open scenario 7 table typically. It is the model which showed typically the flow of transition of the game state of the pachinko machine in 7th Embodiment. It is the timing chart which showed the flow of the game at the time of small hitting V passage in 7th execution form. It is the model which showed typically the structure of RAM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 7th Embodiment in 7th Embodiment. It is the model which showed the content of the delay passage state flag typically. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in the main control unit in 7th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special symbol variation processing 7 performed by MPU in the main control device in a 7th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation start process 7 performed by MPU in the main control unit in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the number-of-times reduction process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit start setting process performed by MPU in the main control unit in 7th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows normal symbol change processing 7 performed by MPU in the main control device in a 7th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows V entrance passage processing performed by MPU in a main control device in a 7th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the V passage process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit control processing 7 performed by MPU in the main control unit in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small hitting control processing 7 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 7th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the electrically-driven combination thing opening-and-closing process 7 performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in 7th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination processing 7 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 7th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the hit related process 7 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 7th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the small hitting start processing which is executed by MPU inside the voice lamp control control equipment in 7th execution form. It is the flowchart which showed the time-saving effect related process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 7th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the finish time processing per common drawing performed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in a 7th embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation | variation display setting process 7 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 7th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation | variation display setting process for special figures 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 7th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the ball passage monitoring processing performed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in a 7th embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in a 8th embodiment. (A) is a top view which showed typically the case where the opening-closing door 3650f which the 2nd attachment 3650 in 8th Embodiment has is an open state, (b) is a 2nd attachment 3650 in 8th Embodiment. It is the top view which showed typically the case where the opening-closing door 3650f which this has is closed state. FIG. 20 is a partial enlarged view of the game board in the eighth embodiment, and is a schematic view schematically showing the flow of balls to a second attacker; It is the elements on larger scale of the game board in 8th Embodiment, and is a mimetic diagram showing typically the flow of the ball to the 2nd ball entrance. (A) is a figure showing an example of the display contents in the jackpot game corresponding to jackpot C in the eighth embodiment, (b) is a ball during jackpot game corresponding to jackpot C in the eighth embodiment It is the figure which showed an example of the display content at the time of entering into a 2nd ball entrance. (A) is a figure showing an example of the display contents of the ending screen of the jackpot game corresponding to jackpot C in the eighth embodiment, (b) is after the jackpot game corresponding to jackpot C in the eighth embodiment FIG. 18 is a diagram showing an example of display contents of the special view 2 game in progress screen of FIG. (A) is a figure showing an example of a display content at the time of being elected to special figure 2 small hitting in the time of a normal state in an 8th embodiment, and (b) is big hit H in special figure 2 in an 8th embodiment. It is the figure which showed an example of the display content at the time of being elected. (A) is a figure showing an example of the display contents in the special figure 2 game in the time saving state in the eighth embodiment, (b) is the final special figure change end in the time saving state in the eighth embodiment It is the figure which showed an example of the display content of time. It is the model which showed typically the flow of transition of the game state of the pachinko machine in 8th Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of ROM of the main control apparatus in 8th Embodiment, (b) has schematically shown the content of the 1st random number 8 table in 8th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram shown. It is the model which showed typically the content of the 1st contact classification selection 8 table in 8th Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the operation scenario 8 table in 8th Embodiment, (b) is the figure which showed the content of each scenario classification in 8th Embodiment. It is the model which showed typically the content of the 2nd random number 8 table in 8th Embodiment. It is the model which showed typically the content of the fluctuation pattern selection 8 table in 8th Embodiment. (A) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of a normal / latency table 8 in the eighth embodiment, and (b) schematically shows the contents of a time shortening / probability table 8 in the eighth embodiment. It is the schematic diagram shown. It is the model which showed typically the structure of RAM of the main control unit in 8th Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of ROM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 8th Embodiment, (b) schematically shows the structure of RAM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 8th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram shown in FIG. It is a flow chart which shows special symbol variation processing 8 performed by MPU in the main control device in an 8th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation start process 8 performed by MPU in the main control unit in 8th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the starting winning process 8 performed by MPU in the main control unit in 8th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the prefetch process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 8th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol change process 8 performed by MPU in the main control unit in 8th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination processing 8 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 8th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the number pending ball related processing performed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in an 8th embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the process at the time of reduction performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 8th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the small hitting control processing 8 which is executed by MPU inside the voice lamp control control equipment in 8th execution form. It is the model which showed typically the structure of RAM of the main control unit in 9th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special symbol big hit judging processing 9 performed by MPU in the main control device in a 9th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the short-time end process performed by MPU in the main control unit in 9th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the game state update process 9 performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 9th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special symbol change stop processing 9 performed by MPU in the main control device in a 9th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd special symbol big hit judging processing 9 performed by MPU in the main control device in a 9th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd special symbol change stop processing 9 performed by MPU in the main control device in a 9th embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in a 10th embodiment. (A) is a figure showing an example of the display contents of the stop screen of the jackpot symbol in the tenth embodiment, (b) is an example of the display contents during the symbol determination period in jackpot C in the tenth embodiment FIG. It is the model which showed typically the structure of ROM of the main control unit in 10th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the contents of the second random number 10 table. It is the model which showed the content of the big hit classification selection 10 table typically. It is the model which showed the content of the specific winning a prize operation pattern table typically. It is the model which showed typically the structure of RAM of the main control unit in 10th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in the main control unit in 10th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special symbol variation processing 10 performed by MPU in the main control device in a 10th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special symbol big hit judging processing 10 performed by MPU in the main control device in a 10th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special symbol change stop processing 10 performed by MPU in the main control device in a 10th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the specific ball-insertion process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 10th Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the modification of 10th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect in the modification of a 7th embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram which showed the 2nd random number 11 table 202ja for high probability in the modification of 7th Embodiment, (b) is the 2nd per low probability in the modification of 7th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram showing random number 11 table 202jb. It is a flowchart which shows the through gate passage process 11 performed by MPU in the main control unit in the modification of 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination processing 11 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the modification of 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the common drawing effect setting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the modification of 7th Embodiment. (A) is a figure which showed an example of the display content at the time of special figure 2 small hitting winning in the latent state in the modification of 4th Embodiment, (b) is a modification of 4th Embodiment It is the figure which showed an example of the display content at the time of winning out of the special figure 2 in the latent state in. (A) is a figure showing an example of big hit contents suggestion production in the modification of a 4th embodiment, (b) shows an example of the production result of big hit contents suggestion production in a modification of a 4th embodiment FIG. (A) is a schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of ROM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the modification of 4th Embodiment, (b) is an audio lamp control apparatus in the modification of 4th Embodiment. It is the model which showed the structure of RAM typically. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the suggestion mode selection table in the modification of 4th Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the suggestion effect selection table in the modification of 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination processing 11 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the modification of 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot related process 11 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the modification of 4th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows small hit related processing 11 performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device in a modification of a 4th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the suggestion production setting processing performed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in the modification of a 4th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows change display setting processing 11 for special figures 2 performed by MPU in an audio lamp control device in a modification of a 4th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the suggestion mode setting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the modification of 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the liquid-crystal presentation execution management process 11 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the modification of 4th Embodiment. (A) showed an example of the display mode of the 3rd symbol display device 81 in the ending production performed in the ending period of the big hit game in which the probability change state or the time saving state is set after the big hit in the 11th embodiment. It is a figure and (b) is a figure showing an example of the display mode of the 3rd symbol display device 81 in a definite change state and a time saving state before a river breakthrough effect is performed in a 11th embodiment. (A) is a figure showing an example of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 at the start of the river breakthrough effect in the eleventh embodiment, and (b) is a river breakthrough effect in the eleventh embodiment It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 in, when the breakthrough of a river is succeeded in and the continuation of a chance zone is alert | reported. (A) shows an example of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 in the eleventh embodiment when the breakthrough of the river is achieved by the river breakthrough effect and the transition to the latent state (RUSH) is notified (B) is an example of a display mode of the third symbol display device 81 in the eleventh embodiment in the case where failure to break through a river is reported and transition to a normal state is notified in the eleventh embodiment. FIG. (A), (b) is a figure showing transition of a game state and a presentation mode in a case where a chance zone is set up after an end in a 11th embodiment in a 11th embodiment. In the eleventh embodiment, the display aspect of the third symbol display device 81 when the small hit effect of the second special symbol is executed which suggests that the lottery result of the first special symbol is highly likely to be a big hit It is a figure showing an example. (A) is a schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the 1st random number table in 11th Embodiment, (b) showed typically the content of the small hitting random number table in 11th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram. It is the model which showed typically the content of the jackpot classification selection table in 11th Embodiment. (A) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the time reduction / probability change table in the eleventh embodiment, and (b) schematically shows the contents of a latency determination table in the eleventh embodiment It is a schematic diagram. It is the model which showed typically the structure of RAM of the main control unit in 11th Embodiment. It is the model which showed typically the flow of transition of the game state of the pachinko machine in 11th Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of ROM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 11th Embodiment, (b) schematically shows the structure of RAM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 11th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram shown in FIG. (A) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of a small hitting effect selection table in the eleventh embodiment, and (b) schematically shows the contents of a winning sound selection table in the eleventh embodiment It is a schematic diagram. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special symbol big hit judging processing 12 performed by MPU in the main control device in an 11th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the game state update process 12 performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 11th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd prize-winning process 12 performed by MPU in the main control unit in 11th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the state command process 12 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 11th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit related process 12 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 11th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation | variation display setting process 12 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 11th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting processing during time-short which is performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 11th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation display setting process 12 for special figures 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 11th Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in a 12th embodiment. (A) is a figure showing an example of a display mode of the 3rd symbol display device 81 in a normal mode in a 12th embodiment, and (b) is a figure showing the number of definite variations in a normal mode in a 12th embodiment. It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode of 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 in, when it is made to progress and it transfers to a normal state. (A) is an example of a display mode of the 3rd symbol display device 81 in a preparation state until it will be in a state where it can actually acquire a prize ball, after shifting to continuous tile mode in a 12th embodiment And (b) is a diagram showing a game ball entering the second entrance in the preparation state in the twelfth embodiment, and (b) being a second in the case where the player wins a small hit in the second special symbol lottery It is a figure showing an example of a display mode of 3 symbol display 81. In (a), in the twelfth embodiment, the holding ball of the first special symbol at the time of transition from the normal mode to the continuous mode goes out, and twice in the drawing of the second special symbol in the preparation mode It is a figure showing about a time-dependent change of the production mode in the case of becoming a small hit in the third lottery of the second special symbol, (a) is from the normal mode to the continuous mode in the twelfth embodiment It is the figure shown about the time-dependent change of the production | presentation aspect in, when the holding ball of the 1st special symbol at the time of having shifted to is a lottery result corresponding to "big hit D12." (A) is a schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of ROM of the main control apparatus in 12th Embodiment, (b) shows typically the content of the 1st random number table in 12th Embodiment typically, FIG. (A) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of a small hitting random number table in the twelfth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of a variation pattern scenario table in the twelfth embodiment FIG. It is the model which showed typically the content of the jackpot classification selection table in 12th Embodiment. It is the model which showed typically the content of the table at the time of the probability change / latent positive start in 12th Embodiment. It is the model which showed typically the content of the table for time saving start time in 12th Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the table for normal start in 12th Embodiment, (b) is the schematic which showed typically the content of the table for RUSH in 12th Embodiment FIG. FIG. 33 is a schematic view schematically showing the flow of transition of the gaming state of the pachinko machine in the twelfth embodiment. It is the model which showed typically the structure of RAM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 12th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special symbol big hit judging processing 13 performed by MPU in the main control device in a 12th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 1 out-of-variation change process performed by MPU in the main control unit in 12th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special symbol change pattern selection processing 13 performed by MPU in the main control device in a 12th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special symbol change stop processing 13 performed by MPU in the main control device in a 12th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 1 removal stop process performed by MPU in the main control unit in 12th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation | variation display setting process 13 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 12th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the production | presentation aspect setting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 12th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the ceiling production setting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 12th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the production | presentation setting process for normals performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 12th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows change display setting processing 13 for special figures 2 performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device in a 12th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the preparation state setting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 12th Embodiment. FIG. 44A is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of a first random number table in the thirteenth embodiment, and FIG. 56B schematically showing the contents of a second random number table in the thirteenth embodiment FIG. It is the model which showed typically the content of the jackpot classification selection table in 13th Embodiment. It is the model which showed typically the content of the table at the time of the probability change / latent positive start in 13th Embodiment. FIG. 33 is a schematic view schematically showing the flow of transition of the gaming state of the pachinko machine in the thirteenth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol change process 14 performed by MPU in the main control unit in 13th Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the modification of 13th Embodiment. (A) is a figure which showed the flow-down path of the game ball in the state by which the electrically-driven accessory was closed in the modification of 13th Embodiment, (b) is an electrically-driven combination in the modification of 13th Embodiment It is the figure which showed the flow down course of the game ball in the state where the thing was opened. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in 14th Embodiment. It is the model which showed typically the content of the fluctuation pattern scenario table in 14th Embodiment. It is the model which showed typically the content of the jackpot classification selection table in 14th Embodiment. It is the model which showed typically the content of the table A for probability change in 14th Embodiment. It is the model which showed typically the content of B table for probability change in 14th Embodiment. It is the model which showed typically the content of the table for usual in 14th Embodiment. FIG. 44 is a schematic view schematically showing the flow of transition of the gaming state of the pachinko machine in the fourteenth embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in 15th Embodiment. (A) is a diagram showing the flow-down path of the gaming ball in the time saving state in the fifteenth embodiment, and (b) shows the flow-down path of the gaming ball in the latent state in the fifteenth embodiment FIG. In 15th Embodiment, it is the figure shown about the game state in, and the transition of an effect | play mode in the case of winning a jackpot of a 1st special symbol during a definite change state. (A) is a figure which showed an example of the display mode of the 3rd symbol display device 81 at the time of a change start per special figure 1 in a definite variation state in a 15th embodiment, and (b) is a fifteenth embodiment It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 in, when time reduction frequency passes during jackpot fluctuation. It is the model which showed typically the content of the 2nd hit random number table in 15th Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the table for time shortening and probability variation in 15th Embodiment, (b) has shown typically the content of the table for latent probability in 15th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram. (A), (b) is the figure which showed an example of the display mode of the 3rd symbol display apparatus at the time of the river breakthrough effect in the modification of 11th Embodiment being started.

First Embodiment
Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the attached drawings. First, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as a "pachinko machine") 10 will be described as a first embodiment with reference to FIGS. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a substantially rectangular combination of wooden frames, and an outer frame 11 having substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. In the outer frame 11, metal hinges 18 are attached to upper and lower two places on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1) to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis A frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front side.

  In the inner frame 12, the game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails and winning openings 63, 64 and the like is detachably mounted from the back side. A ball (game ball) flows down the front of the game board 13 to play a ball game. In the inner frame 12, a ball emitting unit 112a (see FIG. 12) for emitting balls to the front area of the game board 13 and a ball for guiding balls emitted from the ball emitting unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13 Rails (not shown) and the like are attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the upper front side and a lower tray unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to upper and lower two places on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 19 is provided is used as an open / close shaft. The lower tray unit 14 and the lower tray unit 15 are supported so as to be able to open and close to the front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is an assembly of a resin part for decoration, an electric part, and the like, and a window portion 14 c having an opening formed in a substantially elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass plates 16 a is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front of the game board 13 can be viewed on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

  In the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box-like shape with the upper surface opened and protruding upward, and prize balls, lending balls, etc. are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right in a front view (see FIG. 1), and the inclination thereof guides the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 to the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 12). Further, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the content of the effect of super reach. Ru.

  The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around its periphery (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means are controlled to change the light emission mode by lighting up or flashing according to the change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit, a predetermined reach time, etc., and play a role of enhancing the rendering effect during the game. The electric decoration parts 29-33 which incorporated light emission means, such as LED, are provided in the periphery of the window part 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these electric decoration parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as a big hit lamp, and at the time of big hit or reach production etc., each electric decoration part 29 to 33 is lit by lighting and blinking of the built-in LED. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that it is in the middle of a jackpot, or that it is in reach before the jackpot. Further, at the upper left portion of the front surface frame 14 in a front view (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is incorporated and provided with a display lamp 34 capable of displaying a payout ball and an error occurrence time.

  A small window 35 is formed on the lower side of the right side of the electric decoration 32 so that a transparent resin is attached from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be seen. 2) is made visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin plated with chromium is attached to the area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 in order to create more refreshingness.

  Under the window portion 14c, a ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed. The rental ball operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball rental button 42, and a return button 43. When the rental ball operation unit 40 is operated with a bill, a card, etc. being inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is A loan will be made. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information of a card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up and the remaining amount is displayed as a number as remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded in the card etc. (recording medium), and the lending ball supplies the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present in the card etc. Be done. The return button 43 is operated when it is requested to return a card or the like inserted in the card unit. In the case of a pachinko machine in which a ball is lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without passing through a card unit, a so-called cash machine does not require the ball operating unit 40. In this case, the ball operating unit 40 is used. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation part of to make the part configuration common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower tray unit 15 located below the upper tray 17, a lower tray 50 for storing the balls that can not be stored in the upper tray 17 is formed in a substantially box shape whose upper surface is opened at the central portion thereof There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive a ball into the front of the game board 13 is disposed.

  Inside the operation handle 51, there are a touch sensor 51a for permitting driving of the ball emission unit 112a, an emission stop switch 51b for stopping emission of the ball during the pressing operation, and rotation of the operation handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) or the like for detecting the amount of movement operation (rotational position) by a change in electrical resistance is incorporated. When the operation handle 51 is turned clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on, and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the amount of the turning operation, and the resistance value of the variable resistor is changed. The ball is fired with a strength corresponding to (ballistic strength), whereby the ball is struck to the front of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, in a state where the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the emission stop switch 51b are off.

  At the front lower portion of the lower plate 50, a ball removing lever 52 for operating when discharging the balls stored in the lower plate 50 downward is provided. The ball release lever 52 is always urged in the right direction, and by sliding it in the left direction against the urging, the bottom surface opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. A ball falls naturally from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball release lever 52 is usually performed with a box (generally referred to as a "seven box") for receiving the ball discharged from the lower plate 50 below the lower plate 50. The operating handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the gaming board 13 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, a large number of nails (not shown) for guiding balls, a windmill, and rails 61 and 62. Port 63, the first entrance 64, the second entrance 640, the variable winning device 65, the out port 66, the through gate 67, the variable display unit 80, etc. It is attached to the back side of FIG. The base plate 60 is made of wood laminated with thin plate materials, and various structures disposed on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side are formed so as to be invisible to the player. The general winning opening 63, the first entrance 64, the second entrance 640, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display unit 80 are disposed in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and the game board It is fixed by a tapping screw etc. from the front side of 13.

  The front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a belt-like metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front of the game board 13, and at the inside position of the outer rail 62, a belt-like metal plate like the outer rail 62 is formed. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in the above is planted. The front outer periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rails 61 and the outer rails 62, and the front and back are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of the game. The game area is a front area of the game board 13 and is divided by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails (a prize opening and the like are provided and launched). Area where the ball flows down).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 12) to the top of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to the end portion (upper left part in FIG. 2) of the inner rail 61, and the situation in which the ball guided to the upper part of the game board 13 once comes back into the ball guide passage is prevented. Be done. At the end of the outer rail 62 (the upper right part in FIG. 2), the rubber return 69 is attached to a position corresponding to the largest flying portion of the ball, and the ball fired with a predetermined momentum strikes the rubber return 69 Is bounced toward the central part while being attenuated.

  A first symbol display device 37 (37A, 37A, 37A, 37B, 37C) provided with a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display along the outer peripheral surface of the outer rail 62 on the upper right side of the game area 37B) is provided. The first symbol display device 37 (37A, 37B) displays information according to each control performed by the main control unit 110 (see FIG. 12), and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 It will be. In the present embodiment, in the first symbol display device 37 (37A, 37B), a ball enters the first entrance 64 (upper first entrance 64b1, lower first entrance 64b2), or It is configured to be used properly depending on whether or not the second ball entrance 640 has entered the ball. Although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 2, in the present embodiment, an upper first ball entrance 64 b 1 and a lower first ball entrance 64 b 2 are provided as lottery triggers for the first special symbol. In the following description, when both the upper first ball entrance 64b1 and the lower first ball entrance 64b2 are shown, the description will be made using only the term of the first ball entrance 64.

  Specifically, when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, and when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640, The first symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

  In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the probability changing state, the time saving state, or the normal state by the lighting state with the LED, or the lighting state whether the fluctuation is in progress. Indicated by whether the stop symbol is a symbol corresponding to a certain variation jackpot or a symbol or an outlier symbol corresponding to a normal jackpot, or a small hit symbol by a lighted state, and indicates the number of holding balls by a lighted state The seven-segment display device displays the number of rounds in the jackpot and an error display. In addition, a plurality of LEDs may be configured to have different emission colors (for example, red, green, blue) of the respective LEDs, and the combination of the emission colors may suggest various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. it can.

  In the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed when one of the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640 enters a ball. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not the jackpot is successful (jump lottery), and when it is determined that the jackpot is made, the jackpot type is also determined. As jackpot types to be determined here, 15R probability variation jackpots, 2R probability variation jackpots, 15R hour minors, 2R hour minors are prepared. Not only is it shown whether or not the result of the lottery is a big hit as the stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation in the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B, and if it is a big hit, a symbol according to the big hit type is shown .

  Here, "15R probability variation jackpot" is the jackpot that the maximum number of rounds transitions to a high probability state of special symbols after a jackpot of 15 rounds, a probability state of being a normal symbol high probability state (setting) Yes, "2R probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot that sets the transition to a probability change state in which the maximum number of rounds transitions to the high probability state after the jackpot of 2 rounds. In addition, “15 R hour shorts hit” is the low probability state of special symbol after maximum hit number of 15 rounds, the time short state in which the normal symbol is high probability state, for a predetermined number of fluctuation (for example, 50 times) ) A jackpot to be set, "2R hour jackpot" is a jackpot for which the time saving state is set for a predetermined number of fluctuation times (for example, 50 times) after the jackpot of 2 rounds .

  In addition, the "special symbol high probability state" is a state in which the jackpot probability of the special symbol is increased, in other words, a gaming state in which it is easy to shift to the special gaming state. The "normal symbol high probability state" is a state in which the probability of hitting the normal symbol (the second symbol) is increased, in other words, a gaming state in which the motorized role 64a can be easily opened.

  In addition, in the gaming state (probable change state, time saving state) in which the "normal pattern high probability state" is set, not only the hitting probability of the normal symbol (the second symbol) is increased, but also the lower first entry ball slot 64b2 As the time when the motorized accessory 64a attached to is released, a long time is set in comparison with the gaming state (latency state, normal state) in which "a low probability state of a normal symbol" is set. When the motorized part 64a is in the open state (opened state), the ball is moved to the lower first entrance 64b2 in comparison with the case where the motorized part 64a is closed (closed state). It becomes easy to win a prize. Therefore, during the definite change state or the time reduction state, the ball is likely to be won to the lower first entrance 64b2, and it is possible to increase the number of times the jackpot lottery is performed.

  In addition to changing the opening time of the motorized accessory 64a attached to the lower first entrance 64b2 or changing the opening time thereof during the definite change state or the short time state, it is performed once. The number of times the motorized accessory 64a is opened may be changed to be larger than that in the normal state. In addition, during probability change state or time saving state, the probability of hitting the second symbol is not changed, and the electric symbol 64a attached to the lower first ball entrance 64b2 is opened and the electric symbol is open for one time and once At least one of the number of times of opening 64a may be changed. Further, during the definite change state or the short time state, the time for which the motorized accessory 64a attached to the lower first ball entry port 64b2 is opened or the number of times the motorized accessory 64a is opened per one operation does not change, Only the hit probability of the second symbol may be changed to be higher than that in the normal state.

  In the game area, there are provided a plurality of general winning openings 63 in which five to fifteen balls are paid out as winning balls by winning balls. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The variable display unit 80 is triggered by the ball entering the ball into either the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 (start winning) in the first symbol display device 37A, 37B. The third symbol display device 81 configured of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as “display device”) that performs the variable display of the third symbol (decorative symbol) while synchronizing with the variable display, and the ball to the through gate 67 The 2nd symbol display device (not shown) comprised with LED which carries out the fluctuation | variation display of the normal symbol (2nd symbol) by using passage as a trigger is provided.

  Further, a center frame 86 is disposed in the variable display unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol display device 81 is visible from an opening opened at the center of the center frame 86.

  The third symbol display device 81 is configured of a large 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 12). For example, the upper, middle and lower 3 One symbol column is displayed. Each symbol row is constituted by a plurality of symbols (third symbol), and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 by horizontally scrolling these third symbols for each symbol row It is supposed to be. While the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment displays the gaming state in accordance with the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 12) on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the first symbol display device 81 A decorative display is performed according to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B. The third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, a reel instead of the display device.

  Thus, the decorative third symbol is dynamically displayed to correspond to the dynamic display of the first symbol (special symbol) displayed on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, and the third symbol is dynamically moved. By displaying the display mode to the player, the display mode during the dynamic display period is unified with respect to the dynamic display of the first symbol (special symbol) whose operation is controlled by the main control device 110 ( For example, even if the processing load of the main control unit 110 is reduced by blinking on and off in units of 0.1 seconds, the movement of the third symbol set by the sound lamp control unit 113 Dynamic display mode that can suggest that the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot for the player by variably setting the dynamic display mode, for example, based on the lottery result of the first symbol (special symbol) 3) The presentation aspect using the design It can be displayed on the symbol display device 81.

  The second symbol display device alternately turns on the symbol of "o" and the symbol of "x" for a predetermined time as a normal symbol (the second symbol (not shown)) every time the ball passes through gate 67 It is a variable display. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. If it is a result of the winning lottery, if it is a hit, the symbol of "o" is stopped and displayed after the variation display of the second symbol in the second symbol display device. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is out of alignment, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed after the variation display of the third symbol in the second symbol display device.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display in the second symbol display device is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, a symbol of "o"), the motorized prize 64a attached to the lower first ball entry port 64b2 It is configured to be activated (activated) for a predetermined time.

  The time taken for the variation display of the second symbol is shorter in the high probability state (probability state, time saving state) of the normal symbol than in the low probability state (normal state, latent state) of the normal symbol as the gaming state Is set to be Thereby, since the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time during the high probability state of the normal symbol, the winning lottery can be performed more than the low probability state of the normal symbol. Therefore, since the chance of becoming a win in the winning lottery increases, it is possible to give the player many opportunities for the motorized accessory 64a attached to the lower first ball entrance 64b2 to be in the open state.

  Therefore, it is possible to set the gaming state in which the ball is likely to be won to the lower first entrance 64b2 in the probability changing state and the time saving state. In the present embodiment, the dynamic display mode of the third symbol and the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 when the definite variation state is set as the gaming state and when the time saving state is set. The same display mode is set as the background mode displayed on the screen to make it difficult for the player to grasp the current game mode. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to provide the player with fun inferring the current game situation.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, in a plurality of gaming states in which the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, the same as the dynamic display aspect of the third symbol or the background aspect displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 Are configured to set the display mode of. Therefore, when the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is unified, it is suppressed that the player can easily grasp what the current gaming state is by the operation state of the motorized role 64a. be able to.

  The probability change state may be increased during the definite change state or the short time state, or the open time or the open frequency of the motorized combination 64a per contact may be increased, or the like. When the ball is in a state where it is easy for the ball to enter the ball entrance 64b2, the time taken for the variable display of the second symbol (normal symbol) may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time taken for the variable display of the second symbol (normal symbol) is set shorter than in the normal state during the definite change state or in the short time state, the hit probability may be constant regardless of the gaming state Also, the opening time and the opening number of the motorized accessory 64a for one hit may be made constant regardless of the gaming state.

  The through gate 67 is assembled to the game board in the right area (right area) of the variable display unit 80. The through gate 67 is configured such that a part of the balls that flow down the gaming board can pass through among the balls fired to the gaming board. When the ball passes through gate 67, a lottery for winning the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, the variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a hit, the symbol of "○" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and the result of the winning lottery is out For example, the symbol of "x" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display.

  The number of times the ball passes through gate 67 is held up to a total of four times, and the number of balls held is indicated by the above-mentioned first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the second symbol hold lamp (not shown) Is also displayed. Four second symbol holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  In addition, as in the present embodiment, the variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching on and off of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device, as well as the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third A part of the symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol holding lamp may be performed by part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of holding balls for the passage of the ball of the through gate 67 is not limited to four times, and may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (for example, eight times). Further, the number of through gates assembled is not limited to one, and may be two or more. Further, the assembly position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the right side of the variable display unit 80, and may be, for example, below the variable display unit 80. Further, since the number of balls held is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol holding lamp may not perform the lighting display.

  Next, the playability of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment will be briefly described. In the first embodiment, the normal state (the low probability state of the special symbol and the normal state of the normal symbol), the positive change state (the high probability state of the special symbol and the high probability state of the normal symbol), the short time state (special There are four gaming states: low probability state of symbol, high probability state of normal symbol) and latent state (high probability state of special symbol and normal state of normal symbol). Then, the latent state is configured to be the most advantageous game state for the player.

  That is, when the latent state is set, the variation time for showing the lottery of the second special symbol which is more likely to be a lottery result more advantageous to the player than the lottery of the first special symbol is set to another gaming state By defining the length to be shorter than that in the case where it is set, it is possible to most efficiently execute the lottery advantageous to the player.

  In the first embodiment, in order to make the lottery of the second special symbol more advantageous to the player than the lottery of the first special symbol, in the lottery of the second special symbol, the first variable is partially changed The first specified winning opening 65a of the winning device 65 is opened for a predetermined period (1.5 seconds × 1 time, 0.2 seconds × 6 times, or 0.06 seconds × 8 times). For this reason, in the second special symbol lottery, even if you do not win the jackpot, you will be given many opportunities to get the ball into the first specified winning opening 65a and obtain the winning ball, so the first special symbol It will be more advantageous than the lottery. Hereinafter, in order to simplify the description, the result of the loose lottery where the first specified winning opening 65a is opened is referred to as "small hit".

  In the second special symbol lottery, in addition to the big hit, it is configured to open the first specified winning opening 65a also when it becomes a small hit, in the latent state with a short variation time of the second special symbol prize ball Can continue to increase. Therefore, the game can be played in anticipation of being in the latent state. In a general game machine, the probability change state is the most advantageous game state, but in the present embodiment, since the latent state is more advantageous than the probability change state, novel game characteristics can be provided.

  Further, in the first embodiment, the variable display based on the lottery of the first special symbol and the variable display based on the lottery of the second special symbol can be executed simultaneously (in parallel) (so-called simultaneous) Adopts a fluctuation method). As a result, even while the variation display of one special symbol is being executed, the variation display of the other special symbol can be executed without waiting for the end of the variation display, so that the lottery of the special symbol can be executed more efficiently it can. In addition, when the first special symbol and the second special symbol are changing at the same time, if one of them stops changing with a stop symbol of big hit or small hit, the other change display shows the remaining change time or lottery Regardless of the result, it is stopped and displayed with the stop stop pattern. In this way, it is possible to prevent the other variable display from being determined and displayed as a win or small hit during the execution of the big hit or the small hit, and the jackpot or the small hit may be repeatedly started.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 2, various configurations provided in the game area in the first embodiment and a flow of balls fired toward the game area will be described. As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 of this embodiment is configured to divide the game area into the left area and the right area by the variable display unit 80 disposed in the central part of the game area. .

  In the present embodiment, the fired ball does not pass the far ball prevention valve 68 until the operating handle 51 is rotated 20 degrees (clockwise) from the initial position (the state where the player is not rotated). The ball is fired with a certain degree of firing strength. Therefore, the fired ball finally flows back through the discharge channel formed between the outer rail 62 and the inner rail 61 to become a far ball. The fowl ball that has flowed back backwards passes through the start position of the discharge flow path (the lower left end of the outer rail 62 shown in FIG. 2) and communicates with the upper plate 17 (see FIG. 1). (Not shown) is allowed to flow down to the upper plate 17. By configuring in this way, even if a foul ball is generated when the player operates the operation handle 51 in order to cause the ball to be fired with a desired firing intensity, the foul ball remains in the firing path and Can be used to prevent problems.

  Next, when the operation amount (rotation amount) of the operation handle 51 is in the range of 20 to 80 degrees from the initial position (the state where the player is not turned), the ball is fired with a firing intensity that flows down the left area described above. In the range of 81 degrees to 120 degrees (81 degrees to 120 degrees which is the maximum amount of rotation of the operation handle 51), the ball is fired with a firing intensity that flows down the above-mentioned right side region.

  That is, the present embodiment is configured to be able to vary the area in which the ball flows down based on the operation amount of the operation handle 51, that is, based on the operation of the player. Furthermore, although details will be described later, in the first embodiment, when the gaming state that is advantageous to the player is set as the gaming state, the amount of operation of the operation handle 51 is set so that the ball flows down the left area. It is not a game to be adjusted and performed (hereinafter referred to as a left-handed game), but a game performed by adjusting the operation amount of the operation handle 51 so that the ball flows down the right area is played (hereinafter referred to as right-handed game) It is configured as follows. By configuring in this manner, while the gaming state advantageous to the player is set, the player may maintain the state where the operation handle 51 is rotated to the upper limit (the state rotated 120 degrees). Thus, the player can easily play an appropriate game.

  Next, the left side area of the game board 13 will be described with reference to FIG. Details will be described later, but in the first embodiment, the game state is a normal state (special symbol low probability state: normal symbol low probability (normal) state), short time state (special symbol low probability state: normal symbol high probability (time short) )), Definite variation state (special symbol height probability (probability variation) state: normal symbol height probability (time reduction) status), latent state (special symbol height probability (probability variation) state: ordinary symbol low probability (normal) status) Is configured to be set. Also, the jackpot gaming state to be executed when the lottery result of the special symbol is won for the big hit, and the small hitting gaming state to be executed when the lottery result for the special symbol is won for the small hit are set. It is configured.

  Among them, when the game state is set to the normal state, the time reduction state, the probability change state, the variable display unit 80 is made to perform the left strike game to make the ball flow down to the left area of the game board 13 The game method is guided to the player using the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 provided, and the ball is allowed to flow down to the left area of the game board 13 when the latent state is set. In order to play the game, the player is guided to the game method using the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. Further, during the jackpot gaming state or the small hitting gaming state, the game method (left-handed game, right-handed game) of the player is configured to be guided in accordance with the gaming state before the winning.

  In addition, as a guidance method of each game method (left strike game, right strike game), for example, it is configured to always display a game method suitable for the current game state, or only after switching when the game method is switched The game method may be configured to be displayed. In addition, when the game method (left-handed game in this embodiment) which is easily set for a long period among the left-handed game and the right-handed game is a normal game, and a game method other than the normal game (right-handed game) is performed. A guidance may always be displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 so that the guidance display is not performed when the left hitting game is performed.

  As in the present embodiment, in the case where there are two types of gaming methods to be selected by the player, the other gaming method can be guided by not displaying the display mode for guiding one of the gaming methods. That is, it becomes possible to guide a plurality of gaming methods depending on whether or not one display mode is displayed. In the present embodiment, the display mode displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is used to introduce the gaming method to the player, but the present invention is not limited to this. As described above, by not displaying a specific display mode, a configuration may be used to notify the player of the gaming method, or may be configured to notify the player using sound or a lamp.

  In the left area of the game board 13, a through gate 67 and a general winning hole 63 are disposed. Further, an upper first ball entrance 64b1 is provided at a lower position of the variable display unit 80 so that a ball flowing down the left side area can enter the ball. Then, a lower first ball entrance 64b2 to which the electric accessory 64a is attached is provided below the upper first ball entrance 64b1. When the electric winning object 64a is hit in the normal symbol (second symbol) lottery executed upon the passage of the ball through the through gate 67, the ball enters the lower first entrance 64b2. It is configured to be variably operated from the ball difficult (impossible) closed state (first state) to the open state (second state) in which the ball can easily enter the lower first ball entrance 64b 2 (enabled). ing.

  As described above, in the first embodiment, the state in which the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) can be executed (the variation of the special figure 1 is not executed, and the big hit game and the small hit game are executed When a ball enters the upper first ball entrance 64b1 or the lower first ball entrance 64b2 in a state where it is not set), the lottery of the special view 1 is executed. That is, entry of a ball into the upper first entry port 64b1 or the lower first entry port 64b2 is an opportunity to execute the drawing of the first special symbol.

  In addition, in the state where it is not possible to newly execute the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) (the variation of special figure 1 is already executed, or the big hit game and the small hit game are being executed) When the ball enters the upper first entrance 64b1 or the lower first entrance 64b2, it has memory means to store the right of the ball entering the ball, with a predetermined number (four) as the upper limit ing.

  Therefore, since the player can continuously play the game while the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is being executed, the operation of the game can be improved. In addition, in this embodiment, it is provided only in the memory | storage means which memorize | stores the right which the ball | bowl entered, and the 1st special symbol.

  Eighty percent of the balls flowing down the left side area by the left-handed game pass through the through gate 67, and approximately 8% of the fired balls (8 balls per 100 balls) enter the upper first entrance 64b1. A ball channel is formed by a structure such as a plurality of nails and a windmill so as to ball. Also, when the motorized accessory 64a is in the closed state, the ball entering the lower first ball entrance 64b2 is about 0%, and when the motorized accessory 64a is in the open state, the lower first ball inlet The ball flow path is formed so that approximately 25% of the balls enter 64b 2. That is, it is difficult for the ball to enter the ball in the order of the lower first ball entry port 64b2 (motorized item 64a open state), the upper first ball inlet 64b1, and the lower first ball inlet 64b2 (motorized item 64a closed state) It is configured to be

  As described above, the upper first ball entrance 64b1 and the lower first ball entrance 64b2 are configured to give the player the privilege of paying out the prize balls, in addition to the benefit of executing the drawing of the first special symbol. It is configured to pay out four prize balls to the player every time one ball enters the ball. In the present embodiment, the same number (four) of award balls is awarded when the ball enters the upper first ball entrance 64b1 and when the ball enters the lower first ball entrance 64b2. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and different numbers of winning balls may be set for each.

  On the other hand, in the right area of the game board 13, a second entrance 640 and a first variable winning device 65 are provided. The second entrance port 640 is configured such that the lottery of the second special symbol is executed when the ball enters the ball, and a plurality of approximately 50% of the balls flowing down the right area enter the ball. The nail forms a ball channel. Here, the ball that has not entered the second ball entrance 640 flows downward toward the first variable winning device 65 provided below the right area.

  Although the detailed description will be described later, in the embodiment, in the state where the normal state is set as the gaming state, it is long as a time (variation time) from when the lottery of the second special symbol is performed until the lottery result is displayed The variation time of time (10 minutes) is set, and in the state where the latent state is set, a short variation time (1 second) is set.

  That is, when the normal state is set as the gaming state, it is possible to make a right-handed game rather than entering a ball into the first entrance 64 to perform a left-handed game and perform a first special symbol lottery. It is easier to enter the ball into the second entrance 640 to perform the drawing of the second special symbol, but it is easier to enter the ball, but since the fluctuation time of a long time (10 minutes) is set, gaming efficiency is It will be very bad. Therefore, in the normal state, the player performs a left hitting game and executes the lottery of the first special symbol.

  In addition, since the second ball entry port 640 is set with one winning ball, the right hitting game is performed with the normal state set, and the ball fired in the right hitting game at a rate of about 50% Even if the second ball entrance 640 is made to enter the ball, the ball does not increase.

  Furthermore, when the time saving state or the probability variation state is set as the gaming state, the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, and the electric combination 64a is easily released. However, since the through gate 67 serving as the lottery trigger for the ordinary symbol for opening the electric part 64a is provided only in the left side area, the lower first ball entry port 64b2 where the ball can enter the ball easier than in the normal state In order to cause the ball to enter, the player is made to play a left strike game.

  On the other hand, in the state where the latent state is set as the gaming state, the normal symbol becomes a low probability state and the electrically operated part 64a becomes difficult to open, and as described above, the second special symbol changes for a short time Since a fluctuation time of (one second) is set, it is appropriate to play a right-handed game and execute a lottery of a second special symbol. Here, in the first embodiment, only the lottery of the second special symbol is configured to win a small hit (win probability about 1/2). When the player wins a small hit, the first variable winning device 65 opens for a predetermined period (for example, 1.5 seconds) as a small hitting game, and 10 for one ball entering the first variable winning device 65. It is configured to be awarded an award ball.

  That is, when the latent state is set as the gaming state, the player performs the right-handed game continuously to draw the second special symbol aiming for the small hit, the small hit game, and the like. Can be run continuously.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the second variable winning device 650 is disposed at the lowermost position of the game area. The second variable winning device 650 is opened so that the pivoting door 650f is actuated to the front side and the second specified winning opening 650a is in an open state where the ball can be won when the jackpot is won by the special symbol lottery. It is The second variable winning device 650 is configured such that a ball which has flowed down the left area by the left hitting game and a ball which has flowed down the right area by the right hitting game can uniformly enter the ball. Therefore, when the jackpot game in which the second variable winning device 650 is opened is executed, the game method before the jackpot game is executed may be continued, and the game method for the player may be performed. Can be suppressed from being complicatedly changed.

  When the ball enters the first entrance 64 (upper first entrance 64b1, lower first entrance 64b2) mentioned above, the first entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 Is turned on, and the main control unit 110 (see FIG. 12) draws a jackpot due to the turning on of the first entrance switch, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37A. Be

  On the other hand, when the ball enters the second entrance 640 and the second entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, the second entrance switch is turned on. The main controller 110 (see FIG. 12) makes a lottery for a big hit, and the display corresponding to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37B.

  In addition, the first entry ball slot 64 is a winning opening where four balls are paid out as a winning ball when the ball enters the ball, and the second entry ball hole 640 has one ball when the ball enters the ball. It is one of the winning openings to be paid out as a winning ball. In the present embodiment, the number of winning balls to be paid out when the ball enters the first upper ball entrance 64b1, and the number of winning balls to be paid out when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 Are the same (4 for both) and different from the number of prize balls (one) to be paid out when the ball enters the second entry ball opening 640, but the ball enters the upper first entry ball opening 64b1 The number of winning balls to be paid out in the case where they are paid may be different from the number of winning balls to be paid out when the balls enter the lower first entrance 64b2.

  In this case, for example, the number of winning balls in the first upper ball entry 64b1 is set to 4 and the number of winning balls in the lower first ball entry 64b2 is set to 2, and a normal state in which the balls are difficult to enter is set. The bonus for the ball entering the upper first ball entrance 64b1 is enlarged in the case where the ball is easy to enter the ball when a specific gaming state (probability change state, time saving state) is set. 1 Even if the ball enters the ball slot 64b2 frequently, the player may not be allowed to excessively earn the winning ball, or the number of balls on the upper first ball slot 64b1 is four, the lower first The number of award balls of the entrance 64b2 may be set to five so that the player can be provided with a large bonus when a specific gaming state (probable change state, time reduction state) is set.

  In addition, the same number as the number of winning balls to be paid out when the ball enters the first entrance 64 and the number of winning balls to be paid out when the sphere enters the second entrance 640 (for example, 5 both) S) may be configured.

  The lower first ball entrance 64b2 is accompanied by a motorized jack 64a. The motorized symbol 64a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the motorized symbol 64a is in the closed state (restricted state), and the ball is difficult to enter the lower first ball entry port 64b2. There is. On the other hand, when the symbol of "o" is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the fluctuation display (lottery of the normal symbol) of the second symbol performed triggered by the passage of the ball to the through gate 67, the motorized role thing 64a is in the open state (permissible state), and the ball is likely to enter the lower first ball entry port 64b2.

  As described above, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than that in the normal condition, and the time taken for the variable display of the second symbol is shorter than in the normal condition, and the second symbol is displayed as a variation in the second symbol. In this case, the symbol of “o” is easily displayed, and the number of times the motorized accessory 64a is in the open state (permissible state) is increased. Furthermore, during the definite change state or the short time state, the time during which the motorized accessory 64a is opened is also longer than that during the normal state. Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the ball can easily enter the lower first ball entry port 64b2 during the definite change state or the short time state as compared with the normal state.

  As described above, the lower first ball entry port 64b2, ie, the ball entry port accompanied by the electric part 64a, is a state (first state) in which the ball is likely to enter the ball according to the set gaming state. A state (second state) in which the ball is difficult to enter can be set. That is, from the viewpoint of the ease of entering the ball, the first state is an advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous, and the second state is disadvantageous to the player (in comparison to the first state). It becomes.

  Here, when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 (when the first special symbol lottery is executed) and when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640 (second special symbol lottery And the probability of becoming a big hit is the same, and if a low probability state of a special symbol is set, a drawing that makes a big hit is executed with a predetermined low probability (for example, 1/280) When the high probability state of the special symbol is set, the lottery that is a big hit is executed with a predetermined high probability (for example, 1/30) which is easier to hit than the low probability state. However, the type of jackpot selected (set) when jackpot is set is set to be different between the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment causes the player to shoot the ball in the manner (gaming method) according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 as "left strike (left strike game)" and "right strike". It is possible to make it change to "strike (right strike game)". Therefore, the player can enjoy the game because it can change the way of hitting the ball.

  In the lower right corner of the game board 13, a sticking space K1 for sticking a certificate stamp, an identification label or the like is provided, and a seal paper stuck to the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front frame 14. It can be viewed through 35 (see FIG. 1).

  The game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. The balls which flow down the game area, and which have not won any of the winning openings (ball entry) 63, 64b 1, 64 b 2, 65 a, 640, 650 a are shown through the out opening 66. Not be guided to the ball discharge path. The out port 66 is disposed below the lower first ball entrance 64b2. In the first embodiment, the game area is configured to have one out slot 66, but other configurations may be used, and a plurality of two or more out ports 66 may be provided.

  Thus, by providing a plurality of out-ports 66, it is necessary to form a ball flow path for finally collecting the balls fired in the game area at one place (the place where the out-ports 66 are disposed) Since it lose | eliminates, the arrangement | positioning freedom degree of the various apparatuses which comprise a game area can be raised. Specifically, for example, it is preferable to provide an outlet dedicated to the ball flowing down the left region and an outlet dedicated to the ball flowing down the right region. When a plurality of out ports are provided, it is preferable to provide a notification means for notifying the player that the ball entry port is an out port. This prevents the player from being given an unpleasant sensation due to the fact that no benefit is given despite the ball entering the ball entry port (actually the out port) provided in the game area. be able to.

  A large number of nails are implanted in the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (features) such as a windmill are disposed.

  As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is integrated with a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control apparatus 113), and a display control board (display control apparatus 114). In the control board unit 91, a delivery control board (delivery control device 111), a emission control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116 are mounted and unitized.

  In the back pack unit 94, a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a dispensing unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used as an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port to communicate with various devices, a random number generator used in various lottery, time counting and synchronization etc. Clock pulse generation circuits etc. are mounted as needed.

  The main control unit 110, the audio lamp control unit 113 and the display control unit 114, the payout control unit 111 and the emission control unit 112, the power supply unit 115 and the card unit connection board 116 are accommodated in the substrate boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The substrate boxes 100 to 104 each include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to accommodate the control devices and the respective substrates.

  Also, the substrate box 100 (main controller 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing controller 111 and firing controller 112) connect the box base and the box cover unsealably (sealing structure) by a sealing unit (not shown) Consolidated). Further, a seal seal (not shown) is pasted over the box base and the box cover at the connection portion between the box base and the box cover. The sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if it is attempted to peel off the sealing seal to open the substrate box 100 or 102, or if the substrate box 100 or 102 is to be opened forcibly, the box base side and the box cover It is cut to the side. Therefore, by confirming the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it can be known whether or not the substrate box 100, 102 has been opened.

  Dispensing unit 93 is located at the top of back pack unit 94 and opens upward, tank 130, tank rail 131 connected to the lower side of tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and downstream of tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side, and a dispensing device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and dispensing balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 12) ing. The balls supplied from the island facility of the game hall are successively replenished to the tank 130, and the required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. The tank rail 131 is attached with a vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131.

  In addition, the payout control device 111 is provided with the state recovery switch 120, the emission control device 112 is provided with the operation knob 121 of the variable resistor, and the power supply device 115 is provided with the RAM erase switch 122. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to eliminate the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a dispensing error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 12) portion, for example. The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the launch force of the launch solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on in order to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a drawing for explaining the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 4 (a) is a view schematically showing area division setting and effective line setting of the display screen, FIG. 4B is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen.

  The third symbol (the decorative symbol dynamically displayed corresponding to the dynamic display of the first symbol) is composed of nine types of main symbols attached with the numbers “1” to “9”. Each of the main symbols is configured by attaching numbers “1” to “9” on the rear symbols that simulate various animals. Specifically, for example, the number “1” is attached to the rear symbol imitating an elephant, and the number “2” is attached to the rear symbol imitating a lion. In this manner, the display pattern of the rear symbol is displayed to the player even during the dynamic display of the third symbol by setting the third symbol to be a display mode in which the rear symbol and the numbers are associated with each other and synthesized. The type of the third symbol is roughly grasped by the color, outline, size, etc.), and when the third symbol is stopped and displayed, the type of the third symbol is surely identified by identifying the number attached to the rear symbol Can be made to understand.

  In the first embodiment, the combination of the rear symbol and the number forming the third symbol is not changed, but the combination of the rear symbol, the display mode and the number may be changed. good. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to display a lottery result different from the lottery result (type of the third symbol) predicted by the player while the third symbol is dynamically displayed. It is possible to provide a game that does not come bored. In addition, the combination pattern of the rear symbol and the number as the third symbol is set to be regularly changed according to, for example, the lottery result of the special symbol or the set gaming state, as the third symbol. The prediction accuracy of the game content based on the display mode (combination of the rear symbol and the number) to be stopped and displayed can be enhanced, and it is possible to provide the player with fun to make predictions.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the main controller 110 is a big hit, the variation display in which the same main symbol is aligned is performed, and the variation display is finished It is configured to generate a big hit later. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol is out, the variable display in which the same main symbol is not aligned is performed. Furthermore, this embodiment is configured to win a small hit as a lottery result of the special symbol, and when the lottery result of the special symbol is a small win, the main symbol is a specific combination (for example, "341") It is displayed stopped by. In the present embodiment, the combination of the main symbols stopped and displayed is made different according to the lottery result of the special symbol, so that the lottery result can be easily understood for the player, but the present invention is limited thereto. For example, the same main symbol may be stopped and displayed in the case where the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit and the case where it is a small hit, for example.

  As shown in FIG. 4 (a), the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is largely divided into upper and lower two, and about 3/4 of the upper side is a main display area Dm in which the third symbol is variably displayed. About 1⁄4 of the lower side is a sub display area Ds for displaying a notice effect, a character, the number of holding balls, and the like.

  In the main display area Dm, upper, middle and lower three symbol rows L1, L2 and L3 are displayed. In each of the symbol rows L1 to L3, the above-described third symbol is displayed in a prescribed order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending order of the numbers in each of the symbol rows L1 to L3 and the variable display is scrolled in the horizontal direction (usually from right to left) with periodicity for each symbol row L1 to L3 Is done. In particular, in the upper symbol row L1, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged in descending order, and in the middle symbol row L2 and the lower pattern row L3, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged in ascending order.

  Further, in the main display area Dm, the third symbol is displayed in three stages of left, middle and right for each of the symbol rows L1 to L3. The left vertical line, the middle vertical line, and the right vertical line of the main display area Dm are set as effective lines V1 to V3, respectively. In addition, the downward sloping diagonal lines and the upward sloping diagonal lines in the main display area Dm are set as the effective lines V4 and V5, respectively. At each game, the third symbol is stopped (fixed display) on the effective lines V1 to V5 in the order of the upper symbol row L1 → the lower symbol row L3 → the middle symbol row L2. This stop display state is held for at least one second. In this way, by displaying the stopped third symbol for a predetermined period (one second or more), it is determined whether the player is the combination of the third symbol corresponding to the jackpot (the lottery result of the special symbol is the jackpot) It can be suppressed that it is overlooked). Also, if the combination of big hit symbols (in the present embodiment, the combination of the same main symbols) is aligned on the effective lines V1 to V5 when the third symbol is stopped, a big hit moving image (opening effect) is displayed as a big hit.

  In addition, when the combination of the 3rd symbol which is stopped and displayed is the combination which corresponds to the fact that it is the combination which falls off, there is a retention ball, after the 1 seconds stop indication (confirmation indication), fluctuation indication corresponding to the lottery based on the holding sphere Is started. In addition, when several holding balls exist, a lottery is performed based on the holding ball corresponding to the oldest entering ball in time.

  On the other hand, if the third symbol of the combination corresponding to the removal of the special symbol is stopped and displayed for 1 second (confirmed display) in the state where there is no holding ball, the state where the third symbol is stopped and displayed continues thereafter. . This state continues until a predetermined time (e.g., 30 seconds) elapses, or a new ball enters for either the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640. Then, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the third symbol is stopped (fixed display), a demonstration effect (guest waiting demo screen) indicating that a game is not being executed is displayed. .

  It is rare that the player does not enter the ball into the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 despite the fact that the player continuously launches the ball for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). Yes, in many cases where the state where the third symbol is stopped and displayed continues for a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds), the pachinko machine 10 does not play a game at all because the player quits playing the game. to cause. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses after the third symbol is stopped and displayed, it is determined that the player is not playing a game, and the demonstration effect is started. Do. Thereby, the player who is going to select the pachinko machine 10 to start the game can easily judge whether the game is being performed or not based on the display of the demonstration effect. On the other hand, if a new ball enters the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 before the predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses, the new entrance is accepted. Variation display of the third symbol is executed.

  The sub display area Ds is provided horizontally below the main display area Dm. The sub-display area Ds is an area for displaying the number of holding balls, which is the number of balls (holding balls) whose variation has not been executed among the balls entered into the first entrance 64. In the present embodiment, the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 while the third symbol display device 81 (the first symbol display device 37) is performing variable display based on the drawing of the first special symbol. In this case, the number of times of ball entry is suspended up to four times, and the number of holding balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also in the small area Ds1 of the sub display area Ds. By the number of the holding symbols displayed in the sub display area Ds, it is possible to make the player clearly recognize the number of holding balls on which the variable display is currently held. In the present embodiment, only the variable display of the first special symbol is configured to be able to be held, and the variable display of the second special symbol is configured not to be stored. For this reason, in the sub display area Ds, only the number of holding symbols corresponding to the number of holding balls of the first special symbol is displayed.

  In addition, on the display screen shown using FIG. 4A, the sub display area Ds is formed below the main display area Dm, and the dynamic display (variation display) of the third symbol in the main display area Dm 4 (a) (a variation effect) is performed to display a notice effect, a character, the number of holding balls, etc. in the sub display area Ds, but all the game states are shown in FIG. 4 (a). It is not necessary to form each area shown in, and for example, when making the player pay attention to an effect for suggesting whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, the display area of the sub display area Ds It may be configured to perform powerful rendering by reducing (erasing) and expanding the display area of the main display area Dm. On the other hand, when an effect of changing the display mode of the holding symbol or game guidance for explaining future game contents is emphasized in the sub display area Ds and executed, the display area of the main display area Dm is reduced to By expanding the display area of the display area Ds, an effect that is easy for the player to understand may be performed.

  Furthermore, an area for displaying the number of holding symbols in the main display area Dm or an area for executing a notice effect may be formed according to the set gaming state and the effect mode being executed. An area for executing the variable display of the third symbol may be provided in the display area Ds.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 4B, an example of the display content actually displayed on the third symbol display device 81 will be described. In the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 4B, a total of nine main symbols and sub symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. In addition, three parts of the main symbol and the sub symbol are displayed on the right and left sides of the display area Dm. These show the lottery results of the first special symbol in the normal state. Furthermore, in the upper center portion of the main display area Dm, a small area Dm1 for displaying a third symbol indicating the lottery result of the second special symbol is displayed. In this small area Dm1, the variable display of the three third symbols of the simple aspect composed only of the numerals “1” to “9” is executed. In the small area Dm1, the jackpot is started by stopping and displaying the three third symbols configured by the same number. It should be noted that the third symbol showing the lottery result of the second special symbol is displayed in a simple manner as compared to the third symbol showing the lottery result of the first special symbol in the normal state and the probability variation state. The first special symbol lottery is executed, and the second special symbol lottery has almost no opportunity to be executed.

  Therefore, the game result is displayed more clearly by setting it as the structure which displays the fluctuation display of the 1st special symbol mainly performed in a bigger display area. In the following description, the variable display of the special symbol mainly executed in each gaming state (in the normal state or probability change state, the variable display of the first special symbol corresponds) is referred to as the main fluctuation, in each gaming state The variation display of the special symbol that is hardly executed when the regular game method is performed (the variation display of the second special symbol corresponds to the normal condition or the probability change condition) is referred to as a secondary variation.

  Furthermore, although the details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the state where the probability change state is set, when winning a big hit in the lottery of the first special symbol, a long period (up to 10 minutes) The variable display (dynamic display) is executed, and the gaming state is configured to shift from the probability change state to the latent state at the timing when the variable display is started. Then, during the period in which the latent state is set (period from when the fluctuation display to the big hit is executed to the end of the fluctuation display, to the start of the jackpot game), the lottery of the second special symbol is performed. The game is configured to execute a game aiming at a small hit. Therefore, when the latent state is set as the gaming state, the variation display of the second special symbol is the main variation, and the variation display of the first special symbol is the sub variation.

  In the small area Ds1 in the sub display area Ds, the holding symbols imitating the face of a bird are displayed in the same number as the number of holding balls in the first symbol. At this time, at the start of the variable display based on the holding ball corresponding to each of the reserved symbols, an effect of entering into the interior of the house displayed on the right side in the small area Ds1 is executed. This allows the player to easily understand that the variable display corresponding to the holding ball has been started. Also, in the small area Ds1, a notice effect is performed by the holding symbol sometimes performing a special operation, another character appearing, or the like.

  In the present embodiment, ball entry into the first entry slot 64 is configured to be suspended up to four times, but the maximum number of balls reserved is not limited to four times, and is three times The number of times may be set to five or more (for example, eight times). Moreover, you may comprise so that the ball entering to the 2nd ball entrance 640 can be hold | maintained. In addition, instead of the display of the number-of-hold ball number symbol in the small area Ds1, the number of number-of-hold balls is divided by a number into a part of the third symbol display device 81 or (For example, it may be displayed in a color or lighting pattern). Further, since the number of balls held is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the number of balls held may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Furthermore, the variable display unit 80 may be provided with four holding lamps indicating the number of holding balls, which corresponds to the maximum number of holdings, and the number of holding balls may be displayed according to the number of holding lamps in the lighting state.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 5, the flow of the variable display effect of the third symbol in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 5 is a timing chart schematically showing the contents of the fluctuation display effect executed corresponding to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment and the fluctuation state of each special symbol. Here, the playability of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be briefly described. As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is a variable display (dynamic display) for showing a lottery result of the first special symbol and a variable display (dynamic display for showing a lottery result of the second special symbol And) can be executed simultaneously (in parallel).

  And, when the variation display corresponding to the jackpot of the first special symbol is executed in the state where the definite variation state (the high probability state of the special symbol, the high probability state of the normal symbol) is set, the high probability state of the ordinary symbol Is shifted to the low probability state, and the gaming state is configured to shift from the probability change state to the latent state. While this latent state is set, the variable display (dynamic display) period for showing the lottery result of the second special symbol is set short, so many lottery of the second special symbol may be executed. It is a possible period (special figure 2 fluctuation advantageous period).

  In the present embodiment, since it is configured to win a small hit in the lottery of the second special symbol at a probability of about 1/2, during the period in which the latent state is set as the gaming state, the small hit When the player wins the game, the small hit game to be executed is executed frequently, and a game state (special figure 2 advantageous state) advantageous to the player who can obtain many winning balls is achieved.

  As described above, the period in which the latent state is set in the present embodiment (special figure 2 fluctuation advantageous period) is during the fluctuation display period (dynamic display period) of the first special symbol winning the jackpot in the probability change state Since it is (during special figure 1 big hit fluctuation), when special figure 2 advantageous state ends, big hit game will be executed. As described above, since a plurality of states (special figure 2 advantageous state, jackpot gaming state) that are advantageous to the player are continuously set, the player is continuously given various benefits. Can.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, when a small hit is won in one special symbol (special figure 2) and a small hitting game is executed, the variation of the other special symbol (special figure 1) is interrupted (variation display period Interrupt the measurement of the), when the small hitting game is over, it is configured to resume the measurement of the suspended display period. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the special figure 2 fluctuation advantageous period from being subtracted during the small hitting game, so regardless of the number of small hitting games executed during the special figure 2 fluctuation advantageous period. The player can be provided with a certain special figure 2 fluctuation advantageous period.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when the jackpot game is executed based on the lottery result of one of the special symbols (special figure 1), the other special symbol (special figure 2) in the movement is a stop display mode showing the detachment. It is configured to stop by force. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a small hit game is executed during a big hit game.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the control content for the variation of the other special symbol is made different according to the lottery result of the one special symbol. Specifically, when the lottery result of one of the special symbols is a big hit (a lottery result capable of giving the first benefit to the player), the variation of the other special symbol is that the lottery result is out of order. If the stop display is in the display mode shown and the lottery result of one of the special symbols is a small hit (a lottery result capable of giving the player a second benefit different from the first benefit), the variation of the other special symbol Is suspended until the end of the second benefit award (until the small hit game is ended), and is resumed after the end of the second benefit award. In addition, when the lottery result of one of the special symbols is out, the variation of the other special symbol is executed as it is.

  By configuring in this manner, it is possible to vary the lottery contents of the other special symbol (the period until the lottery result is displayed, the period until the lottery result is displayed) based on the lottery result of one of the special symbols. A variety of gameplay can be provided.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when the lottery result of one of the special symbols is a lottery result capable of giving a bonus to the player, the control content for the other special symbol variation is made different according to the content of the bonus. Therefore, for example, in the case where the lottery result gives the player the most advantageous benefit (big hit game), the lottery result corresponding to the change of the other special symbol being executed is the lottery result giving the benefit. Even if the player is forced to stop the change so that the lottery result deviates, the player is prevented from being given an extra benefit, and the lottery result (small hit) with less benefits given than the jackpot game In the case of, in order to prevent the bonus based on the lottery of the other special symbol being given during the small hitting game, without changing the lottery result corresponding to the fluctuation of the other special symbol being executed, the fluctuation table It is possible to interrupt only the measurement period.

  Therefore, in the state in which a plurality of special symbols (special figure 1 and special figure 2) are simultaneously changing, the player is given the most inconvenient benefit by being granted the most advantageous benefit to be awarded later. It is possible to suppress a situation in which the player does not get out of the game and to prevent a situation in which a player feels uncomfortable.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when the latent state is set as the gaming state, a short display period (0.5 seconds) is set as the variable display period of the second special symbol (special figure 2), The small hit game is configured to be able to be executed frequently. Then, the condition that the latent state is set as the gaming state, the condition that the latent state is ended as the case where the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol in the state where the probability variation state is set, the first special symbol Since the stop display is in the display mode indicating the big hit and the big hit game is executed, the big hit game is executed after the end of the first advantage period which is advantageous to the player who is frequently played the small hit game. The second game period is set. Therefore, since the first advantageous period and the second advantageous period that are advantageous to the player can be set continuously, it is possible to play the game with enthusiasm so that the first advantageous period is set.

  Next, the display contents displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 in each gaming state in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. As shown in FIG. 5, when the jackpot gaming state is set as the gaming state, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 displays the contents of the jackpot game, for example, the round of the jackpot game currently being executed. The number of rounds display mode to show the number, the acquired amount display mode to show the number of acquired balls, the type to suggest the type of jackpot game in progress (the number of rounds, the gaming state set after the jackpot game is over) Suggested display mode, the number of jackpots won during the period when the non-normal state (probability change state, latent state, time saving state) is set without setting the normal state as gaming state continuously (so-called, the number of consecutive chans The jackpot game display mode in which the etc. is displayed is displayed.

  And, at the timing when the big hit game is over (see Figure 5 (a)), if the big hit type of this time is the big hit type (for example, big hit A) that sets the probability change state as the gaming state after the big hit game is over, As shown in FIG. 6 (a), an effect mode (chance zone mode) is displayed which aims to set a latent state advantageous to the player.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 6A, the display content of the end screen (ending screen) of the jackpot game will be described. FIG. 6A is a schematic view schematically showing the display contents of the end screen (ending screen) of the jackpot game. As shown in FIG. 6A, on the ending screen of the jackpot game, a comment of "chance zone rush !!" indicating that a definite change state is set after the jackpot game is displayed in the sub display area Ds. Then, in the main display area Dm, a character 811 displayed during a period in which a probability change state or a latent state is set is displayed. The character 811 is configured so as not to appear (is not displayed) during the period in which the normal state is set, and the player is required to display the period during which the character 811 is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. The game state that is advantageous to the game state (a game state that is more advantageous than the normal state).

  With this configuration, the player can grasp the outline of the currently set gaming state by grasping whether or not the character 811 is displayed on the display screen. Can be provided.

  In addition, a comment of “Aim for RUSH !!” for aiming to set the latent state in the main display area Dm is displayed. Furthermore, in the guidance display area Dm3 of the main display area Dm, the characters "left strike" are displayed as a guidance display mode for causing the player to play the left strike game. This makes it possible to easily grasp that the player plays the left side game aiming at the left side area when the probability change state is set. In the present embodiment, the second variable winning device 650, which is operated to open during the big hit game, is a ball fired in the left-handed game (a ball which has flowed down the left area) and a ball fired in the right-handed game. The characters ("left hit", "right hit") displayed in the guidance display area Dm3 during the jackpot game, which are disposed at positions where they can win (downstream position in the game area (see FIG. 2)) The game method for guiding during the jackpot game is configured to be variable according to the game state before the jackpot game is executed.

  Specifically, if it is determined that the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot, and it is determined that the game state (normal state, time saving state, probability changing state) in which the left hitting game is guided, as a guidance display during the big hit If "left-handed" is displayed and it is determined that the game state (latency state) in which the right-handed game is guided is determined, "right-handed" is displayed as a guidance display during the big hit. As a result, when the jackpot game is executed, it is possible to save the trouble of changing the game method for the player.

  In addition, the special display 1 display area Dm1 for displaying the third design corresponding to the first special symbol in the main display area Dm, and the special figure 2 display area for displaying the third design corresponding to the second special symbol Dm 2 is formed, and according to the example shown in FIG. 6A, “777” is displayed in the special view 1 display area Dm 1 as a display mode corresponding to a jackpot game currently being executed (during an ending screen display). It is displayed. In addition, "-" is displayed on the special figure 2 display area Dm2 as a non-variation display mode which shows that the 2nd special symbol is not fluctuatingly displayed.

  In the present embodiment, the non-variation display mode described above is displayed when the special symbol has not been variably displayed even after the power is turned on. By displaying this non-variation display mode, it is possible to make the player predict the past game history (the change history of the special symbol).

  In the present embodiment, the non-variable display mode described above is configured to be displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a predetermined display mode (initial display mode) indicating detachment is configured to be displayed. Display is also displayed in the special view 1 display area Dm1 and the special view 2 display area Dm2 when it is determined that the elapsed period since the previous variable display was performed has exceeded a predetermined period (for example, 30 minutes) The aspect may be configured to be variably displayed in the initial display mode and the non-variable display mode.

  Returning to FIG. 5, the explanation will be continued. In the state where the probability change state is set as the game state (see FIG. 5 (b)), it becomes a game state in which it is easy to execute the lottery of the first special symbol by the left strike game. That is, since the high probability state of the symbol is normally set in the positive change state, the electric character 64a is easily released, and the ball is easily inserted into the lower first ball entry port 64b2.

  The contents of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 in the definite variation state will be described with reference to FIG. 6 (b). FIG. 6B is a schematic view schematically showing the display contents of the display screen in the positive variation state. As shown in FIG. 6 (b), a comment of "in the chance zone" indicating that the current gaming state is a definite change state is displayed to scroll in the lateral direction (right to left) in the sub display area Ds. Ru.

  Then, in the main display area Dm, an effect of moving (running) the character 811 in the lateral direction (left to right) is displayed. Then, "left-handed" is displayed in the guidance display area Dm3, and a changing display indicating that the first special symbol is changing is displayed in the special view 1 display area Dm1. In addition, also at this time, since the second special symbol is not newly changed from the state shown in FIG. 6 (a) (because the ball is not entered into the second ball entry port 640 by the right-handed game) The non-variable display mode "-" is continuously displayed in the special figure 2 display area Dm2.

  Although detailed explanation is omitted, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a plurality of motion display patterns of the character 811 are stored in the definite variation state, and the lottery result of the first special symbol in the definite variation state (decision judgment result) Accordingly, the operation display pattern of the character 811 is configured to be different. Thus, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of predicting whether or not the lottery result of the first special symbol is won in the jackpot during the definite change state.

  After the display screen shown in FIG. 6 (b) is displayed, the display shown in FIG. 7 (a) is performed when the variable display is executed to show that the lottery result of the first special symbol has won the big hit. The screen is displayed. FIG. 7A is a schematic view showing the display content displayed when the variable display in which the jackpot is won is started during the probability change state. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the gaming state transitions from the probability changing state to the latent state at the timing when the variable display indicating that the first special symbol is won in the big hit during the probability changing state is started. It is configured as follows.

  Therefore, since the game state shifts to the advantageous state (latency state) for the player at the timing when the change of the first special symbol starts, the change of the first special symbol in the special view 1 display area Dm1 of the display screen In the state where the variable display mode indicating that the display is being executed is displayed, the display mode (the display mode of "333") of the effect pattern 813 for showing that the gaming state has shifted to the player is the stop display Be done. As a result, it is possible for the player to think that the gaming state has shifted from the probable change state to the latent state by the stop display of the effect pattern 813. Moreover, in this embodiment, since the display mode similar to the display mode of the third symbol is used as the effect symbol display mode, the effect symbol display mode stopped and displayed is a display for showing the lottery result of the special symbol. It can be considered as an aspect.

  The present embodiment is configured such that it is possible to execute many small hitting games by frequently executing the variable display of the second special symbol during the period in which the latent state is set. Therefore, at least, during the period in which the latent state is set, “right-handed” for indicating the right-handed game to the player is displayed in the guidance display area Dm3. Then, in the sub display area Ds, a comment of “RUSH rush !! Please hit right” is displayed to indicate that the latent state has been set as the gaming state.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, at the start of variation of the first special symbol winning the big win, the production symbol displayed in the main display region Dm is stopped and displayed without changing the presentation mode of the special figure 1 display region Dm1. Since the game is configured as described above, it is possible to make the player think that the gaming state has shifted according to the lottery result of the presentation symbols.

  And, during the latent state where the right-handed game is being executed continuously (during the big hit of the first special symbol), if you win a small hit in the second special symbol lottery shown in Figure 7 (b) As shown in the figure, an effect mode is displayed to indicate that the player has won the small hit. Here, the display contents in the case where the latent state is set will be described with reference to FIG. 7 (b). FIG. 7B is a schematic view schematically showing display contents of the display screen in the latent state.

  According to FIG. 7 (b), in the state in which the latent state is set (during RUSH), the first special symbol is displayed in the special figure 1 display area Dm1 when the small winning of the second special symbol lottery is won. Is displayed to indicate that it is in the middle of fluctuation (during jackpot fluctuation), a display mode "341" indicating that the player wins a small hit is displayed in the special view 2 display area Dm2. .

  Then, the treasure box 812 displayed as an effect mode in RUSH is opened, and "V" for showing a small hit is displayed as an effect pattern 813 for showing the game result from the inside. As a result, it is possible to inform the player that the player can win the small hit with the second special symbol during the latent state (during RUSH) and the small hit game is executed.

  In the present embodiment, the first variable winning device 65, which is pivoted when the player wins a small hit, is provided in the right area, and a game can be performed with the same game method (right-handed) as in the latent state. It is configured as follows. By configuring in this manner, even if the small hitting game is frequently executed during the latent state, it is sufficient for the player to continue the right-handed game, thus providing the player with an easy-to-understand game. it can.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is started during the probability change state, the latent state is set from the time of the jackpot fluctuation start, and the latency state In the state where is set, it is comprised so that the lottery of the 2nd special symbol (special figure 2) can be performed efficiently.

  Therefore, it is configured to notify the player of the period in which the latent state is set (based on the setting of the latent state) (FIG. 7 (a ))reference.

  However, since the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is capable of simultaneously changing the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the first special symbol is also the second in a state where the positive variation state is set. Both special symbols may change.

  In such a case, even if the display mode indicating that the latent state (RUSH) has been set is displayed at the timing when the latent state is set (see FIG. 7A), The lottery of the second special symbol in the latent condition can not be executed until the special symbol stops fluctuating, and a problem occurs that the small hit game is not executed regardless of how long it is in the RUSH condition. There was a fear.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the transition condition to the latent state is satisfied (when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol during the probability change state), the fluctuation state of the second special symbol (presence or absence of fluctuation, The remaining fluctuation period is determined, and based on the determination result, the timing for notifying that the RUSH state has been set is configured to be different.

  Here, referring to FIG. 5 and FIG. 8, when the transition condition to the latent state is satisfied (when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol during the definite change state), the second special symbol ( The contents of the effect when the special figure 2) is fluctuating will be described. As shown in FIG. 5, when the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is started in the state in which the probability variation state is set, if the second special symbol is in motion (see (c) in FIG. 5), the probability variation A "super-chance zone" is displayed with an increased expectation for the RUSH state to be set, rather than the "chance zone" for indicating the state.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 8A, the display contents of the display screen in the "super chance zone" will be described. FIG. 8A is a diagram showing the case where the variation winning the jackpot with the first special symbol is executed during the second special symbol variation in the positive variation state. That is, this "super chance zone" is a state in which the latent state is set as the gaming state, but the variation display of the second special symbol executed before the latent state is set is displayed. It is a display mode which shows the state which is not completed.

  When the "super-chance zone" is set, a comment indicating that the "super-chance zone is in progress" is displayed in the sub display area Ds. The character 811 is displayed in the main display area Dm in a mode in which the character 811 is moving at a higher speed than in FIG. 6B, and the character 811 moving at a high speed is configured to easily find the treasure box 812.

  And "variation display mode" for showing that the first special symbol is changing is displayed in the special figure 1 display area Dm1, and the latent state is set in the special figure 2 display area Dm2. The "variation display mode" during fluctuation from the point before time is displayed.

  Returning to FIG. 5, the explanation will be continued. The display screen of the "super chance zone" shown in FIG. 8A is displayed until the timing at which the special figure 2 variation executed across the timing of shifting the gaming state from the probability change state to the latent state ends. When the special figure 2 fluctuation ends (see FIG. 5D), a “RUSH” rush screen is displayed to notify the player that the player has entered “RUSH” (see FIG. 8B).

  Here, with reference to FIG. 8 (b), the contents of the screen that has entered the "RUSH" via the "super chance zone" will be described. FIG. 8 (b) is a schematic view schematically showing a screen that has entered “RUSH” via the “super chance zone”. As shown in FIG. 8B, in the main display area Dm, a display pattern 813 is displayed from the inside of the treasure box 812 and a display mode for notifying the player that the player has rushed to "RUSH" is displayed. Then, “right-handed” is displayed in the guidance display area Dm3 for guiding the gaming method in the rush game. At this point in time, a special display pattern Dm1 displays a variation display mode to indicate that the first special symbol is fluctuating (during jackpot fluctuation), and the special figure 2 display region Dm2 indicates a deviation. The display mode "346" is stopped and displayed.

  Returning to FIG. 5, the explanation will be continued. During the rush game (during RUSH), that is, during the jackpot change of the first special symbol, the game of causing the lottery of the second special symbol to be frequently performed by setting the fluctuation pattern whose fluctuation time is short by performing the right-handed game Is executed. In addition, although the detailed description will be described later, in the present embodiment, in the state where the jackpot is won by one special symbol (including during the jackpot variation), the jackpot is won in the lottery of the other special symbol It is configured not to. Therefore, in the lottery of the second special symbol during the rush game, the lottery result is either a small hit or a drop. And in the lottery of the second special symbol is configured to win a small hit with a high probability (about 1/2).

  Therefore, during the rush game, the player wins a small hit with a probability of 1/2, and the game for obtaining a winning ball by the small hit game continues until the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is finished. That is, even if the lottery of the second special symbol is frequently executed during the rush game, the jackpot variation period of the first special symbol is fully used since the jackpot is not won by the lottery of the second special symbol. Rush game can be provided.

  Then, when the jackpot variation of the first special symbol is finished (see FIG. 5 (f)), a screen corresponding to the jackpot type selected this time is displayed (see FIGS. 9 (a) and 9 (b)). Here, with reference to FIGS. 9A and 9B, the display screen at the end of the rush game (at the stop of the special hit of the big hit variation) will be described.

  FIG. 9 (a) is a view schematically showing the display contents in the case where the jackpot (jackpot A (see FIG. 16 (a)) which is advantageous to the player is set, and FIG. Is a diagram schematically showing display contents in the case of winning a jackpot (jackpot D (see FIG. 16A)) which is disadvantageous to the player.

  As shown in FIG. 9 (a), at the timing when the third symbol ("777") for showing that the jackpot A (see FIG. 16 (a)) is won is displayed in the special view 1 display area Dm1, In the special view 2 display area Dm2, the third symbol "346" indicating disengaging is forcibly stopped and displayed. Then, the effect pattern 813 ("super V") indicating that the player has won the jackpot advantageous to the player is displayed from the treasure box 812 and a comment of "congratulations" is displayed in the sub display area Ds. In this case, in the guidance display area Dm3, the characters “right strike”, which is a game method similar to that in the latent state, are displayed.

  On the other hand, in FIG. 9B, at the timing when the third symbol (“666”) for indicating that the jackpot D (see FIG. 16A) is won is displayed in the special view 1 display area Dm1, In the special view 2 display area Dm2, the third symbol "346" indicating disengaging is forcibly stopped and displayed. Then, a representation pattern 813 ("END?") Indicating that the player has won the jackpot which is disadvantageous to the player is displayed from the treasure box 812 and a comment of "Please return to the left" is displayed in the sub display area Ds. Be done. In this case, in order to indicate to the player that the rush game is over, the character “left strike”, which is a game method similar to that in the normal state, is displayed in the guidance display area Dm3.

  9B shows the display screen in the case of winning the jackpot D (see FIG. 16A), but in the case of winning the jackpot C (see FIG. 16A), that is, the jackpot D The same jackpot game is executed, but the same display screen is displayed also when the gaming state set after the jackpot is won by the jackpot which becomes more advantageous to the player than the jackpot D, and the jackpot is recovered at the end of the jackpot game As the effect, it is configured to execute the effect of performing the right-handed game. As a result, it is possible to provide the player with a surprising effect.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 10, a card forgetting reminder screen displayed to the player will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is necessary to insert a card (value medium) into a card unit installed accompanying the pachinko machine 10 in order to borrow a ball used for gaming. In such a pachinko machine 10, when the player has won many balls by playing a game, a situation occurs in which the card is forgotten to be inserted in the card unit and the card is forgotten at the end of the game. I had something to do.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the card forgetting reminder screen (see FIG. 10A) is configured to be displayed at a predetermined timing (for example, at the time of a jackpot game where a winning ball can be acquired). This can prevent the player from forgetting to take the card. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, it is possible to set a jackpot that is easy to acquire a prize ball as a jackpot game and a jackpot that is hard to win a prize ball, and furthermore, it is possible to set a gaming state in which a small hitting game can be executed frequently in a short time The timing at which the card forgetting alert screen is displayed can be set in accordance with the game result (accumulation of the number of winning balls in a predetermined period).

  Here, with reference to FIG. 10A, the display contents of the card forgetting alert screen will be described. FIG. 10A is a schematic view schematically showing the display contents of the card forgetting alert screen. Thus, while displaying the operation at the time of taking out the card from the card unit using the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 of the pachinko machine 10, a comment of "Please be careful to forget the card" is displayed .

  Next, the display timing of the card forgetting alert screen will be described with reference to FIGS. In FIG. 10 (b), the first jackpot is "jackpot A (see FIG. 16 (a))", that is, in the case of winning a jackpot capable of giving many prize balls to the player in one jackpot game. It is a timing chart showing the display timing of the card display (card forgetting alert display), and the first jackpot is “big hit A (see FIG. 16 (a))” in FIG. 10 (c) and FIG. 10 (d). That is, it is a timing chart showing the display timing of the card display (card forgetting alert display) when winning a jackpot capable of giving many winning balls to the player in one jackpot game.

  As shown in FIG. 10 (b), when the first jackpot (the jackpot won when the normal state is set as the gaming state) is the jackpot A, the number of winning balls is sufficient during the jackpot. In order to give, the card display is executed in the ending period (ED) of the jackpot.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 10 (c) and 10 (d), when the first jackpot is a jackpot C, the player can not give a sufficient number of winning balls during the jackpot. The card display is not displayed on the end screen of the first jackpot (jackpot C) because there is a possibility of continuing to borrow a ball using the card.

  In such a state, in the present embodiment, the period from the first jackpot to the setting of the normal state is defined as an advantageous duration, and the number of winning balls acquired during the advantageous duration is accumulated, and the cumulative result is The card display is configured to be executed with the card display execution condition having reached a predetermined amount (for example, 250 shots).

  That is, when a small hit game occurs continuously after the big hit C ends, and the number of prize balls in the advantageous continuation period exceeds a predetermined amount, the card display is performed on the small hit game ending screen. (Refer to FIG. 10 (c)), when jackpot C is repeatedly executed and the number of prize balls in the advantage continuation period exceeds a predetermined amount, the card display is performed on the ending screen of the jackpot game. (See FIG. 10 (d)).

<About the transition of the gaming state in the first embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 11, the transition of the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment will be described. FIG. 11 is a schematic view schematically showing a method of transition from one gaming state to another gaming state with respect to four types of gaming states set in the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment.

  First, the transition method of the gaming state when staying in the normal state will be described. As described above, in the normal state, it is more advantageous for the player to hit the left because the player who played the game with the left hit tends to have a higher lottery frequency of the special symbol than playing the game with the right. This is because it is easy to enter the upper first ball entrance 64b1 when the player strikes the left. In addition, in the lottery of the first special symbol executed based on the ball entering the first ball entrance 64, as described above, the small hit is not drawn, so the ball is endless unless it is a big hit. It is in a disadvantageous condition that continues to decrease. In this normal state, there is a possibility of shifting to another gaming state only when the jackpot occurs. In addition, four types of jackpots A to D are provided as jackpot types that can be won in the first special symbol lottery. The details of these jackpot types will be described later with reference to FIG.

  As shown on the left side of FIG. 11, if it becomes jackpots A and C determined by a ratio of 65% in total when it becomes a jackpot in the lottery of the first special symbol in the normal state ST1, after the jackpot end, the center of FIG. It shifts to the definite change state ST2 shown in FIG. In addition, when it becomes the big hit D which is decided with ratio of 10% when it becomes the big hit with the drawing of the first special symbol in normal state ST1, after the big hit end, it moves to time saving state ST3 which is shown on the right side of Figure 11 . On the other hand, when it becomes the jackpot B determined at a rate of 25% when it becomes the jackpot in the first special symbol lottery, the normal state is set again as the gaming state after the jackpot end (loop the normal state To do).

  In the normal state, it is usual to play a game by aiming at the upper first entrance 64b1 by hitting left, but the player intentionally strikes right and the ball enters the second entrance 640. As a result, a part of the ball that has made a left strike may enter the second entrance port 640, and as a result, it may become a jackpot in the second special symbol lottery. In this embodiment, there are three types of big hit types (big hit E to G) as big hit types set when the big win is won with the second special symbol, and in the normal state was won the big hit of the second special symbol In the case of jackpot E, F determined in the proportion of 65% in total, transition to the definite change state ST 2 after the jackpot end, when it is the jackpot G determined in the proportion of 35%, the normal state as gaming state after jackpot end Is set again (loop normal state).

  In this way, when it becomes a big hit by lottery of the first special symbol in the normal state, while there is a possibility of transitioning to a time saving state that is more advantageous than the normal state at a ratio of 10% (big hit D), When it becomes a big hit by the lottery of the second special symbol in the normal state, the possibility of shifting to the time saving state becomes 0. Therefore, since the demerit in the case of performing the unusual game method which performs the lottery of the 2nd special symbol can be enlarged by performing the right strike in the normal state, it is possible to suppress the irregular game. In addition, in the lottery of the second special symbol executed in the normal state, because it is configured to set a fluctuation pattern having a fluctuation time of a long time (10 minutes), when the gaming efficiency is to play a left-handed game As compared with the above, it is possible to further increase the demerit in the case of performing the irregular game method of executing the lottery of the second special symbol by performing the right strike in the normal state.

  Next, the transition method of the gaming state when staying in the definite change state will be described. As described above, in the definite change state, it is easier for the player to hit the left because it is easier for the player to play the game with the left hit than to play the game with the right hit as in the normal state. It becomes. In the positive change state, since the jackpot probability of the special symbol is increased compared to the normal state, it is advantageous compared to the normal state, but is disadvantageous compared to the latent state. When the definite change state ST2 is set, the state shifts to the latent state SP1 when the jackpot of the first special symbol is won (special figure 1 jackpot variation starts).

  In the definite change state, while aiming at the upper first ball entry port 64b1 by hitting left similarly to the normal state, the game is aimed at the lower first ball inlet 64b2 provided below the upper first ball port 64b1. It will be done. That is, since the high probability state of the symbol is normally set during the definite change state, the motorized accessory 64a attached to the lower first ball entry port 64b2 is easily opened. Therefore, it becomes a gaming state where it becomes easier to execute the lottery of the first special symbol than in the normal state.

  In such a definite variation state, the left hitting game is usually performed to make a drawing of the first special symbol, but the ball enters the second ball entry port 640 and the second special symbol There is also a possibility that it will be a jackpot by lottery. In this case, when the jackpot E, F is determined at a rate of 65% in total when winning the jackpot of the second special symbol, the probability change state ST2 is set again after the jackpot end, and determined at a rate of 35% When the jackpot becomes G, the time saving state is set as the gaming state after the jackpot ends.

  That is, when the lottery of the first special symbol is executed in the definite variation state, it is possible to shift to the latent state that is most advantageous to the player, while the lottery of the second special symbol is executed. In this case, the possibility of shifting to the latent state becomes zero. Therefore, since the demerit in the case of performing the irregular game method for executing the lottery of the second special symbol can be increased by performing the right strike in the definite change state, it is possible to suppress the irregular game.

  Next, the transition method of the gaming state when staying in the latent state will be described. As described above, in the latent state, unlike the normal state or the definite change state, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is short, so by playing the game with the right hand, the lottery of the second special symbol can be efficiently performed . Therefore, it is more advantageous for the player to hit the right than to hit the left.

  In the present embodiment, when the jackpot of the first special symbol is won in the state where the probability change state is set (first transition condition), the jackpot C is won in the state where the probability change state and the time saving state are set. There are two transition conditions (the second transition condition), and when the first transition condition is established, the latent state is in progress before the jackpot game is started, ie, during the jackpot fluctuation of the special symbol. When the second transition condition is established, the latent state is set after the end of the jackpot game.

  By configuring in this manner, the timing at which the gaming state (latency state) that is most advantageous to the player can be set can be made before or after the jackpot game, so that the player can play various games. Can provide sex.

  Furthermore, when the first transition condition is satisfied, the period in which the latent state is set is the jackpot fluctuation period of the first special symbol, so the period in which the latent state is set can be determined in advance. Therefore, it is possible to easily create the effect to be performed during the latent state in advance (when the latent state is set) in accordance with the period in which the latent state is set.

  In addition, when the jackpot C is won by the lottery of the first special symbol in the state where the probability change state is set, the player can be set to the latent state either before or after the jackpot game. It is possible to provide unexpected playability.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 12 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main controller 110 is mounted with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 storing various control programs to be executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory for temporarily storing various data etc. when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. In the main control unit 110, main processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as a jackpot lottery, display setting in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device Run.

  Although various commands are transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the sub control unit by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control units such as the payout control unit 111 and the audio lamp control unit 113 to operate. Such command is transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the sub control unit in one direction only.

  The RAM 203 is a stack area in which various areas, counters, flags, contents of internal registers of the MPU 201, return addresses of control programs executed by the MPU 201, etc. are stored, various flags and counters, I / O, etc. And a work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 is configured to be able to receive data (backup) supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power shutoff (including the time of the power failure, the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including the power on after the power failure is eliminated, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power is shut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by a main process (not shown), and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in a start-up process (not shown) when the power is turned on. The power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 at the time of power interruption due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When it is input, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) as processing upon power failure is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 via a bus line 204 configured by an address bus and a data bus. In the input / output port 205, the lower side of the opening / closing plate 65f of the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol display device, the second symbol hold lamp, and the variable winning device 65 A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for opening and closing drive to the right as an axis and a solenoid for driving an electric part is connected, and the MPU 201 receives various commands for these via the input / output port 205. Send control signal.

  The input / output port 205 includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown) and a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotational position detection sensor R, and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply 115 described later. Are connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of the winning balls and the lending balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 212 storing a control program to be executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 is, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, a stack area where the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, various flags and counters , I / O, etc. are stored in the work area (work area). The RAM 213 is configured to be able to receive a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is turned off and to hold (back up) data, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 at the time of power interruption due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) as processing upon power failure is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 configured by an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the emission control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but not connected to the main control device 110.

  The emission control device 112 controls the ball emission unit 112 a so that the ball launch strength according to the amount of rotational operation of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main controller 110 instructs the ball emission. . The ball launch unit 112a includes a launch solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the launch solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on condition that the firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited corresponding to the amount of rotational operation (rotational position) of the handle 51, and the ball is emitted with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs of lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (such as the illumination parts 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34) It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 and the like performed by the display control device 114 such as display (display) and advance notice effect. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 configured by an address bus and a data bus. To the input / output port 225, a main control unit 110, a display control unit 114, an audio output unit 226, a lamp display unit 227, other units 228, a frame button 22 and the like are connected. Other devices 228 include drive motors 420, 530, 630.

  The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and commands the determined display mode. The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). In addition, the audio lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, changes the stage displayed by the third symbol display device 81, or super reach It instructs the display control device 114 to change the effect contents of the hour. When the stage is changed, a back side image change command including information on the changed stage is transmitted to display control device 114 in order to display a back side image corresponding to the changed stage on third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113.

  In addition, the audio lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the sound lamp control device 113 outputs a sound corresponding to the display content from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display content of the third symbol display device 81. The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled according to the display content.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol display effect variation effect of the third symbol display device 81, etc. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 matches the display of the third symbol display device 81 with the voice output from the voice output device 226 by outputting the voice from the voice output device 226 according to the display content indicated by the display command. be able to.

  The power supply unit 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As a summary, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts AC supplied from the outside, 12 volts voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as solenoid 209, motor, etc. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc. are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts and backup voltages are supplied to the respective control devices 110 to 114 and the like.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting the power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of the stable DC voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power loss, power loss) occurs when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts. Then, the blackout signal SG1 is output to the main control unit 110 and the payout control unit 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute NMI interrupt processing. The power supply unit 251 outputs a 5-volt voltage, which is a driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient for execution of the NMI interrupt processing even after the voltage of the DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main control unit 110 and the payout control unit 111 can execute and complete the NMI interrupt processing (not shown) normally.

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control unit 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. The main control unit 110 controls the payout initialization command for clearing the backup data and causing the payout control unit 111 to clear the backup data when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. Transmit to the device 111.

Regarding Electrical Configuration in First Embodiment
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 to 21. FIG. First, details of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 12) provided in the pachinko machine 10 will be described.

  In main controller 110, main processes of pachinko machine 10 such as jackpot lottery, setting of display in first symbol display device 37 and third symbol display device 81, lottery of display result in second symbol display device (not shown) Run. The RAM 203 is provided with a counter buffer (see FIG. 13) for storing various counters for controlling these processes.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 13, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described. These counters and the like are selected by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in order to perform the jackpot lottery, the setting of the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the lottery of the display result of the second symbol display device. used.

  Selection of jackpot random number counter C1 to be used for lottery of jackpot (and jackpot) and selection of jackpot type (jackpot symbol) for setting of display of jackpot lottery and first symbol display device 37 and third symbol display device 81 And a first initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting an initial value of the first random number counter C1. Further, the second random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the normal symbol (the second symbol display device 83), and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. In addition, the small hitting type counter C5 is used for the selection of the small hitting type. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time updating is performed, and the value returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds which is an execution interval of timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 31), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main processing (see FIG. 52) The updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer set in the predetermined area of the RAM 203. Although details will be described later, the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a in which each counter value is stored for entering a ball into the first entrance 64 and each counter for entering a ball in the second entrance 640 is stored in the RAM 203. A second special symbol execution area 203b in which a value is stored is provided. In the present embodiment, the first ball entrance 64 is provided with a maximum of four holding balls. Therefore, when the ball enters the first entrance 64 during a period when the special symbol is not being displayed in a variable display or when the special symbol such as when the jackpot of the special symbol is not being played, each counter value is When the ball is stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a and the ball enters the second entrance 640, each counter value is stored in the second special symbol execution area 203b. Thereafter, each counter value stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is moved to the execution area provided in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, and the first special symbol is variably displayed (dynamic Various settings and control processing for display are executed. Further, each counter value stored in the second special symbol execution area 203b is used as it is for various settings and control processing for fluctuating display of the second special symbol.

  On the other hand, during a period when the first special symbol can not be drawn, such as during the variable display of the first special symbol or during the jackpot game of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the ball wins the first entry slot 64, And when the number of holding balls of the first entrance 64 is less than the upper limit (4 in the present embodiment), each counter value is acquired and stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. Be done. In addition, when the number of holdings for the first ball entrance 64 is the upper limit value (four in the present embodiment) or more, acquisition of each counter value and the like is not performed, but four balls (four in the present embodiment) Only the winning balls) are treated as invalid balls to be paid out to the player. In addition, the ball entered the second entrance slot 640 during a time when lottery of the second special symbol such as during the second special symbol variation display or during the jackpot game of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is impossible. In this case, only the winning balls (two winning balls in the present embodiment) are treated as invalid balls to be paid out to the player without acquiring the counter values and the like.

  In the present embodiment, although the upper limit value of the number of holding balls is four for the first entrance 64, it is not limited thereto, and may be less than four (for example, three). There may be more than four (eg, eight). Further, the upper limit value may not be provided. Moreover, in this embodiment, although it was set as the structure which does not hold | throw-in to the ball to 2nd ball entrance 640 (the fluctuation display based on the lottery of the 2nd special symbol), holding storage is possible similarly to the 1st ball entrance 64 It may be configured.

  Each counter will be described in detail with reference to FIG. The first random number counter C1 is sequentially incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 479), and is 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 479 in the case of a counter capable of taking values of 0 to 479). It is configured to return to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one revolution, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

  The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take values of 0 to 479, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 479. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 52).

  The value of the first hit random number counter C1 is, for example, periodically (in the present embodiment, updated once in each timer interrupt processing), the ball enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 At the timing, it is stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol execution area 203b of the RAM 203. And the value of the random number which becomes the big hit of the special symbol is specified in the first random number table 202a (refer to FIG. 15A) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control unit 110, and the first random number counter C1 When the value matches with the value of the jackpot random number defined in the first random number table 202a, it is determined that the jackpot of the special symbol. Further, the value of the random number which is the small hit of the special symbol is defined in the small hit random number table 202 b (refer to FIG. 15 (b)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110.

  Here, the first random number table 202a will be described with reference to FIG. 15 (a). The first random number table 202a is a table in which random number values (determination values) determined to be winning in each gaming state are set in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 15 (a), in the low probability state (normal state, time saving state) of the special symbol as the gaming state, in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol Whether the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 is “7, 8” is determined, and if it is any of “7, 8”, it is determined that a big hit is made.

  In addition, when it is a high probability state of the special symbol (probability state, latent state) as a game state, the value of the 1st random number counter C1 which is acquired in the drawing of the 1st special symbol or the 2nd special symbol It is determined whether it is in the range of “0 to 5”, and if it is in the range of “0 to 5”, it is determined that it is a big hit. That is, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, among the random number counters having a total number of 480, since the low probability state of the special symbol defines two values as the value to be determined as the big hit, the low probability state of the special symbol The jackpot probability at time is 1/240. On the other hand, the jackpot probability in the high probability state of the special symbol is 1/80.

  Next, the small hitting random number table 202 b will be described with reference to FIG. The small hit random number table 202b is a table in which a random value (determination value) determined to be a small hit is set in the special symbol lottery. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 15 (b), a random number to be a small winning is not defined in the first special symbol lottery. That is, it does not become a small hit in the lottery of the first special symbol. On the other hand, in the second special symbol lottery, regardless of the gaming state, it is determined whether the acquired value of the first random number counter C1 is within the range of "212 to 432", the range of "212 to 432" If it is inside, it is determined that it is a small hit.

  Here, if the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol execution area 203b is a random number that becomes a small hit, the first symbol The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the display device 37 is the one at the time of the small hit of the special symbol.

  On the other hand, if the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol execution area 203b is a random number that becomes the big hit of the special symbol, the first The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the one symbol display device 37 is the one at the time of the big hit of the special symbol. In this case, a specific display mode at the time of the jackpot is a display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same execution area.

  The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 479. As described above, in the low probability state of the special symbol, there are two values of the first random number counter C1 per jackpot of the special symbol, and the random numbers "7, 8" are the first per one as described above. It is stored in the random number table 202a. Thus, since the total number of random numbers to be a big hit is 2 while the total number of random numbers is 480, the probability to be a big hit of a special symbol is "1/240". On the other hand, in the high probability state of the special symbol, there are four values of the first random number counter C1 per jackpot of the special symbol, and the random number "0 to 5" is the first random number table as described above It is stored in 202a. As described above, since the total number of random number values to be a big hit is six while the total number of random number values is 480, the probability to be a big symbol of a special symbol is "1/80".

  Furthermore, as described above, there are 221 values of the first random number counter C1 that will be small per win in the lottery of the second special symbol, the random value "212-432" is stored in the small per random number table 202b ing. As described above, since the total number of random numbers to be small hits is 221 while the total number of random numbers is 480, the probability to become a small symbol of a special symbol is "221/480" (about 46%).

  Returning to FIG. 13, the description will be continued. The value of the first collision type counter C2 is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. Then, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, the big hit type is selected based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 and the big hit type selection table 202d (see FIG. 16A). It becomes. Specifically, this will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The small hit type counter C5 is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. And, when the lottery result of the special symbol becomes the small hitting, small hitting classification (small hitting on the basis of the value of this small hitting classification counter C5 and the small hitting classification selection table 202e (figure 16 (b))) A to C) will be selected. Specifically, this will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The fluctuation type counter CS1 is configured to be sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The fluctuation type counter CS1 determines one fluctuation pattern from the set fluctuation pattern selection table 202f. A fluctuation time (dynamic display period) is set in this fluctuation pattern, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 is also a counter that determines the fluctuation time. The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated once each time a main process (see FIG. 52) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. The fluctuation pattern selection table 202f (see FIGS. 17 to 19) storing a random value for determining one fluctuation time of symbol fluctuation from the value (random number value) of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is ROM 202 of the main control device 110. It is provided inside.

  A plurality of data tables for selecting a variation pattern are defined in the variation pattern selection table 202f (see FIGS. 17 to 19). In the variation pattern selection table 202f, a plurality of variation pattern selection tables according to the gaming state are set, and for each, variation pattern selection tables are set for each of the pass / fail determination results. The details of each variation pattern selection table will be described later with reference to FIGS. 17 to 19.

  The second random number counter C4 is configured, for example, as a loop counter that is sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 232, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 232). When the second random number counter C4 makes one revolution, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4. In the second embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 is periodically updated, for example, every timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31), and it is detected that the ball has passed the normal start opening (through gate) 67. Acquired and stored in the second symbol holding ball execution area of the RAM 203.

  And the value of the random number which becomes a hit of the ordinary symbol is specified in the second hit random number table 202c (refer to FIG. 15 (c)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and the value of the second hit random number counter C4. When it agrees with the value of the random number which becomes the second specified in the second random number table 202c, it is determined that the normal symbol (the second symbol) is hit. The details of the second random number table 202c will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 15C is a schematic view schematically showing the content of the second random number table 202c. In this second hit random number table 202c, there are 11 random values for the normal symbol in the low probability state of the normal symbol (during the normal state and the latent state) as the gaming state, and the range is “0 to 10 It is ". Since the total number of random numbers to be hit is 11 among the total of 233 random numbers that can be taken by the second random number counter C4, the probability that the symbol will normally hit is "11/233".

  On the other hand, in the high probability state of the normal symbol (probable variation state, time-shortening state), there are 232 random number values that hit the normal symbol, and the range is “0 to 231”. Since the total number of random numbers to be hit is 232 while the total number of random numbers that can be taken by the second random number counter C4 is 233, the probability that the symbol will normally hit is “232/233”. As described above, in this embodiment, the random number value corresponding to the normal symbol is configured such that a difference of about 20 times is provided between the low probability state of the normal symbol and the high probability state of the normal symbol There is. In addition, the variation time of the normal symbol and the opening time of the motorized accessory 64a attached to the lower first entrance 64b2 when the normal symbol is hit is also high for the normal symbol against the low probability state of the normal symbol The probability state is more advantageous (it is easier for the ball to enter the lower first entrance 64b2).

  When the ball passes through the normal starting opening 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is obtained, and the variation display of the normal symbol is executed for 3 seconds in the second symbol display device. Then, in the low probability state of the normal symbol, if the value of the second hit random number counter C4 acquired is within the range of "0 to 10", it is determined to be a hit, and the variation display in the second symbol display device is finished After that, a symbol “o” is lit and displayed as a stop symbol (second symbol), and the lower first ball entry port 64b 2 is opened for “one second × two times”. On the other hand, if the value of the second hit random number counter C4 acquired is in the range of "0 to 231" in the high probability state of the normal symbol, it is determined to be hit, and the variable display in the second symbol display device 83 is finished. After that, a symbol “o” is lit and displayed as a stop symbol (second symbol), and the lower first ball entry port 64b 2 is opened for “one second × two times”. In the present embodiment, the variation time of the normal symbol, and the opening time and the number of times of opening of the normal electric character combination may be changed as appropriate within a range that does not impair the game characteristics.

  The common variation type counter CS2 is configured as a loop counter which is incremented by one in order in the range of 0 to 198 and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). When the ball passes through the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67, the common drawing fluctuation pattern table 202g for selecting the fluctuation pattern of the normal design based on the value of the common drawing fluctuation type counter CS2 (see FIG. 20) ) Are defined in the ROM 202 of the main control unit 110. The details of the common drawing fluctuation pattern table 202g will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 198), and is updated once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31). And is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 52).

  As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control unit 110 causes the jackpot lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the value of the counter or the like. It is possible to execute main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device.

  Next, the contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 14 is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 in the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 in the present embodiment. In addition to the first random number table 202a, the small random number table 202b, and the second random number table 202c described above, the ROM 202 further includes a large hit type selection table 202d, a small hit type selection table 202e, and a variation pattern selection. At least a table 202f and a common drawing variation pattern table 202g are provided.

  First, the details of the jackpot type selection table 202d will be described with reference to FIG. The jackpot type selection table 202d (see FIG. 16A) is a data table in which the determination value for determining the jackpot type is stored for each type of special symbol, and the judgment value of the first hit type counter C2 is , It has been defined in association with each jackpot type. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired based on the start winning combination is compared with the big hit type selection table 202d. The jackpot type corresponding to the value of the type counter C2 is selected.

  As shown in FIG. 16 (a), "big hit A" is associated with the first special symbol (special figure 1) in the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "0 to 24". Are defined. In this "big hit A", the number of rounds is 15 rounds, and a big hit game in which the second attacker (the second variable winning device 650) is opened is set. Among the 100 possible counter values of the first hit type counter C2, the counter value for "big hit A" is 25, so "big hit A" is determined when it becomes a big hit in the first special symbol lottery Rate is 25% (25/100).

  Then, when "big hit A" is selected, the positive change state is set at the end of the big hit (positive change flag 203g is set to ON) regardless of the gaming state when winning the big hit, and 10000 times are reduced It is set (a value of 10000 is set to the time reduction counter 203f). That is, after the "big hit A" ends, a definite change state is set until the next big hit is won.

  Since "big hit A" is one of the highest hit types with the highest number of rounds, it is advantageous in terms of the number of prize balls that can be obtained. Further, since the jackpot probability of the special symbol and the collision probability of the ordinary symbol are set to be higher than those in the normal state, a gaming state in which an advantageous game can be performed more than the ordinary state is obtained. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the latent condition is more likely to give an advantage to the player than the definite variation state, and among the plurality of gaming conditions, the next to the latent condition is provided. It is a game state advantageous to

  In the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "25 to 49", "big hit B" is associated and defined. This "big hit B" is the same jackpot game as the "big hit A" described above is executed, the number of rounds is 15 rounds, the jackpot to open the second attacker (the second variable winning device 650) A game is set. After the "big hit B" ends, the probability change flag 203g is set to be off, and the time reduction counter 203f is configured to have a different value according to the game state at the time of winning.

  If the gaming state at the time of jackpot win is a normal state, the value of "0" is set to the time reduction counter 203f, and if the gaming state at the time of jackpot win is a time saving state or a probability change state, A value of "100" is set. That is, when the player wins the "big hit B" with the normal status set, the normal status is set after the big hit ends, but when the "big hit B" is won during the time saving status After the big hit, the time saving state (100 times) is set. Among the 100 possible counter values of the first hit type counter C2, the counter value for "big hit B" is 25, so "big hit B" is determined when it becomes a big hit in the first special symbol lottery Rate is 25% (25/100).

  "Big jack B" is one of the jackpot types with the largest number of rounds like "Big jack A", so it is advantageous in terms of the number of prize balls that can be obtained, but a high probability state of special symbol is not set after the jackpot end , "Jackpot A" is a disadvantage jackpot type.

  In the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “50 to 89”, “big hit C” is defined in association with it. In this "big hit C", the number of rounds is 2 rounds, and a big hit game for opening the first attacker (first variable winning device 65) is set. Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, even in the small hitting game executed when the small winning is won in the second special symbol lottery, the first attacker (first variable winning device 65) is opened In this configuration, it is difficult for the player to distinguish between the case of winning the "big hit C" and the case of winning the "small hit".

  By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand whether the big hit game or the small hit game was performed when the first attacker is released and the hit game is performed. As described above, in the present embodiment, since the player is configured to be in the latent state (RUSH state) in which the small hitting game can be executed frequently during the big hit fluctuation period of the first special symbol, the player 1Attack is released and it will be played while expecting that the game is a small hit game. That is, by providing a game period in which the player does not normally want a situation in which the jackpot game desired by the player is most desired to be executed, novel game characteristics can be provided.

  After the "big hit C" ends, the probability change flag 203g is set to ON, and a different value is set to the time reduction counter 203f in accordance with the gaming state at the time of winning. If the gaming state at the time of jackpot win is a normal state, a value of “10000” is set to the time reduction counter 203f, and if the gaming state at the time of jackpot win is a time saving state or a probability change state, A value of "0" is set. That is, when the jackpot is won in the normal state, the definite change state is set after the end of the jackpot, but the jackpot is won in the positive change state or the short time state. In this case, the latent state is set after the end of the jackpot.

  In this way, in the gaming state when the jackpot is won, even if it is the jackpot of the same type, by configuring the gaming state to be set after the jackpot is different, the player simply aims to win the jackpot Not only that, but also because it is possible to focus on the set gaming state, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the latent state is set as the gaming state, the gaming state is configured to be most advantageous to the player, and the probability change state is set as the condition under which the latent state is set. There are two conditions of the first setting condition where jackpot fluctuation of the special symbol is started in the state where is set, and the second setting condition of winning jackpot C in the state where the definite change state and the time saving state are set. doing. That is, according to the game state at the time of winning the jackpot, the degree of expectation (probability) for which the latent state is set is configured to be different. By configuring in this manner, the player is allowed to gradually increase the expectation for setting a gaming state that is advantageous to the player (in accordance with the set gaming state) according to the progress of the game. It is possible to prevent the player from getting bored early in the game.

  Among the 100 possible counter values of the first hit type counter C2, the counter value which is "big hit C" is 40, so "big hit C" is determined when it becomes a big hit in the first special symbol lottery Rate is 40% (40/100). Since "big hit C" is one of the big hit types that has a smaller number of rounds and a shorter opening operation period than "big hit A" and "big hit B" described above, it is disadvantageous in terms of the number of prize balls that can be obtained However, depending on the gaming state at the time of the jackpot, it is set after the jackpot because it is the only jackpot type that can set the latent state that is most advantageous to the player as the gaming state set after the jackpot ends. In terms of gaming state, the jackpot type is more advantageous than "jackpot A", "jackpot B".

  In the range of “90 to 99”, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in association with “big hit D”. In this "big hit D", the number of rounds is 2 rounds, and a big hit game (the same as "big hit C") for opening the first attacker (the first variable winning device 65) is set.

  After the end of the "big hit D", the probability change flag 203g is set to off, and the value of "0" is set to the time saving counter 203f. That is, when the "big hit C" is won, the normal state is set after the big hit ends. Since this "big hit D" is the same big hit game content as the "big hit C" described above, the first attacker (the first variable winning device 65) is configured to operate in the same opening operation as the small hit game ing.

  After completion of the "big hit D", as it is configured to set the normal state as described above, the variable display (big hit fluctuation) won in "big hit D" in the state where the positive change state is set If executed, after frequently playing a small hit game during the big hit fluctuation, the big hit game is performed, and then the normal state is set.

  That is, in the latent state (RUSH state) when winning a "big hit D" in the lottery of the first special symbol, the normal state after the "big hit D" where the opening operation same as the small hit game is set is finished Since it is set, it is possible to make the player think that the latent state in which the jackpot game is to be executed has ended.

  Among the 100 possible counter values of the first hit type counter C2, the counter value which is the "big hit D" is 10, so the "big hit D" is determined when it becomes the big hit in the first special symbol lottery Rate is 10% (10/100). The "big hit D" is one of the big hit types that has a smaller number of rounds and a shorter opening operation period than the "big hit A" and "big hit B" described above, so it is disadvantageous in terms of the number of prize balls that can be obtained It becomes. Then, regardless of the gaming state at the time of the jackpot, since the normal state is set after the end of the jackpot, it is also disadvantageous in terms of the gaming state set after the jackpot. That is, it is the most disadvantageous jackpot type.

  As described above, as described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment has four jackpot types ("jackpot A" to "jackpot D") as jackpot types of the first special symbol (special figure 1). There is. Among them, in the two jackpot types ("big hit A", "big hit B"), to perform a big hit game open target second attacker (second variable winning device 650) that is open only during the big hit game, In the other two big hit types ("big hit C", "big hit D"), a big hit game is executed which targets the same first attacker (first variable winning device 65) as the small hit game.

  That is, in the first embodiment, the main jackpot game ("big hit A", "big hit B") intended to cause the player to obtain a winning ball as a big hit of the special symbol, and changing the gaming state A secondary jackpot game ("big hit C") aimed at making it difficult to tell whether the player has won the big hit or not (it is difficult to determine whether the small hit game is a big hit game) It is configured to be able to execute "big hit D").

  Further, in the present embodiment, it is not a jackpot game but a game characteristic that allows a player to obtain a prize ball by a small hit game, so it is set difficult to obtain a large number of prize balls during a jackpot game As a jackpot (even if a jackpot game is executed with only a small number of balls depending on the jackpot type), a jackpot game aimed to vary the gaming state while suppressing giving the player a sense of discomfort It can be set.

  On the other hand, as the type of jackpot by lottery of the second special symbol, "jackpot E" is defined in association with the range of the first hit type counter C2 of "0 to 4". In this "big hit E", the number of rounds is 15 rounds, and a big hit game in which the second attacker (the second variable winning device 650) is opened is set. Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, there are 5 counter values that will be "big hit E", so "big hit E" is determined when it becomes a big hit in the second special symbol lottery Rate is 5% (5/100).

  Then, when "big hit E" is selected, the positive change state is set at the end of the big hit (positive change flag 203g is set on) regardless of the gaming state when winning the big hit, and 10000 times It is set (a value of 10000 is set to the time reduction counter 203f). That is, after the "big hit E" ends, a definite change state is set until the next big hit is won.

  The "big hit E" is one of the types of jackpots with the largest number of rounds, so it is advantageous in terms of the number of prize balls that can be obtained. Further, since the jackpot probability of the special symbol and the collision probability of the ordinary symbol are set to be higher than those in the normal state, a gaming state in which an advantageous game can be performed more than the ordinary state is obtained. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the latent condition is more likely to give an advantage to the player than the definite variation state, and among the plurality of gaming conditions, the next to the latent condition is provided. It is a game state advantageous to

  In the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "5 to 64", "big hit F" is associated and defined. In this "big hit F", the number of rounds is 2 rounds, and a big hit game in which the first attacker (first variable winning device 65) is opened is set. Among the 100 possible counter values of the first hit type counter C2, the counter value for "big hit F" is 60, so "big hit F" is determined when it becomes a big hit in the second special symbol lottery Rate is 60% (60/100).

  Then, when "big hit F" is selected, the positive change state is set at the end of the big hit (positive change flag 203g is set on) regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning the big hit (time change flag 203g is set on). It is set (a value of 10000 is set to the time reduction counter 203f). That is, after the "big hit F" is finished, a definite change state is set until the next big hit is won.

  The "big hit F" is one of the few types of jackpots with the smallest number of rounds, and thus is disadvantageous in terms of the number of prize balls that can be obtained. Further, since the jackpot probability of the special symbol and the collision probability of the ordinary symbol are set to be higher than those in the normal state, a gaming state in which an advantageous game can be performed more than the ordinary state is obtained. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the latent condition is more likely to give an advantage to the player than the definite variation state, and among the plurality of gaming conditions, the next to the latent condition is provided. It is a game state advantageous to

  The "big hit G" is associated with the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "65 to 99". In this "big hit G", the number of rounds is 2 rounds, and a big hit game in which the first attacker (the first variable winning device 65) is opened is set. Among the 100 possible counter values of the first hit type counter C2, the counter value which is "big hit G" is 35, so "big hit G" is determined when it becomes a big hit in the second special symbol lottery The ratio is 35% (35/100).

  Then, when "big hit G" is selected, the normal state is set at the end of the big hit (the probability change flag 203g is set to be off) regardless of the gaming state when winning a big hit, and the number of time saving times of 0 times is It is set (a value of 0 is set to the time reduction counter 203f).

  The "big hit G" is one of the types of jackpots with the smallest number of rounds, and thus is disadvantageous in terms of the number of prize balls that can be obtained. In addition, since the gaming state set after the big hit ends is a normal state, it is also disadvantageous in terms of the gaming state set after the big hit. That is, it is the most disadvantageous jackpot type.

  As described above, in the first embodiment, the jackpot is won in the first special symbol (special figure 1) lottery and the second jackpot in the second special symbol (special figure 2) lottery as described above. And the point that the percentage of setting the probability change flag 203g to ON after the big hit end is 65% (65/100), but the percentage where 15 rounds are set as the big hit game (special figure 1 is 50% , Special figure 2 5%), the percentage at which the second attacker (second variable winning device 650) is selected as the release target (50% special figure 1 and 5% special figure 2), gaming state at the time of jackpot winning The value of 10000 is set to the time reduction counter 203f after the big hit end in the case where the time reduction state is a probability change state (that is, the high probability state of the normal symbol) (special figure 1 is 25%, special figure 2 is 65%) Are configured differently.

  As described above, by making the jackpot gaming content and the gaming state after the jackpot end different according to the type of the special symbol winning the jackpot, it becomes possible to provide various game characteristics to the player, and the gaming It is possible to improve interest.

  In the present embodiment, although the above-described content is configured to be different according to the type of the special symbol, the present invention is not limited thereto, and even if only a part of the above-described content is configured to be different. Good, other than the above-mentioned contents, for example, by setting the number of rounds (for example, 7 rounds) where only the jackpot type corresponding to special figure 1 can be set, the number of rounds set may be different Alternatively, the ratio of setting the probability change flag 203g to on may be made different.

  In addition, on condition that the ball passes a specific area (for example, the area where the ball that has won the second variable winning device 650 can pass) during the jackpot game, the probability change flag 203g is set to ON after the jackpot is over In the gaming machine configured as described above, the probability that the ball passes through the specific area may be made different between the jackpot type corresponding to the special view 1 and the jackpot type corresponding to the special view 2. Further, the data table for selecting the variation pattern for indicating the lottery result in each gaming state set after the big hit may be configured to be different according to the big hit type.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 16A, in the present embodiment, it is possible to win a prize in one round game for both the first attacker (first variable winning device 65) and the second attacker (second variable winning device 650). The upper limit value is set to "10", but the upper limit value may be made different between the first attacker (the first variable winning device 65) and the second attacker (the second variable winning device 650). In addition, the upper limit value of the opening operation in the round game may be made different depending on the winning jackpot type (or the type of the special symbol winning the jackpot).

  Next, the details of the small hit type selection table 202e will be described with reference to FIG. The small hit type selection table 202e is a data table to be referred to to determine the type of small hit when the small win occurs in the second special symbol (special figure 2) lottery. In the small hitting type selection table 202e, the corresponding small hitting type is defined for each range of the value of the small hitting type counter C5.

  As shown in FIG. 16 (b), “small hit A” is defined in association with the range where the value of the small hit type counter C 5 is “0 to 93”. This "small hit A" is a small hit type in which the first attacker (the first variable winning device 65) is set to the open state only once for 1.5 seconds x 1 during the small hit game.

  Among the 100 random numbers that can be taken by the small hit type counter C5, 94 small random numbers are "small hit A", so "small hit A" if it becomes a small hit in the second special symbol lottery The rate at which is determined is 94% (94/100).

  Moreover, "small hit B" is matched and prescribed | regulated to the range whose value of small hit classification counter C5 is "94-98". The "small hit B" is a small hit type in which an open state of 0.2 seconds x 6 times is set during a small hit game. Among the 100 random number values that can be taken by the small hit type counter C5, there are 5 random values that will be "small hit B", so "small hit B" if it becomes a small hit in the second special symbol lottery The rate at which is determined is 5% (5/100).

  Furthermore, "small hit C" is specified in association with the value "99" of the small hit type counter C5. The "small hit C" is a small hit type in which the open state of 0.06 seconds x 8 times is set during the small hit game. Among the 100 random numbers that can be taken by the small hit type counter C5, there is only one random value that will be "small hit C", so it will be "small hit C" if it becomes a small hit in the special symbol lottery The proportion is 1% (1/100).

  Next, details of the fluctuation pattern selection table 202f will be described with reference to FIGS. As described above, the fluctuation pattern selection table 202f defines random number values for determining the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the fluctuation display from the value (random number value) of the fluctuation type counter CS1.

  As shown in FIG. 17, the variation pattern selection table 202f is a table 202f1 for determining a variation pattern (variation time) in a normal state, and for time reduction / probability variation for determining a variation pattern in a short time state or a positive change state. At least a table 202f2 and a latency table 202f3 for determining the fluctuation pattern in the latency state are included. Specific contents of these tables will be described with reference to FIGS. 18 and 19. Although the fluctuation time is described in milliseconds in each of the tables shown in FIG. 18 and FIG. 19, the fluctuation time is expressed in seconds in the following description in order to facilitate understanding.

  First, the normal table 202f1 will be described with reference to FIG. The normal table 202f1 is a table to be referred to when the gaming state is normal. FIG. 18 is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the ordinary table 202f1. As shown in FIG. 18, the table 202f1 for normal use is a random number value (variation type) for determining the type (variation time) of the variation pattern for each type of special symbol and each type of stop (special decision result) of the special symbol. The counter value of the counter CS1 is defined.

  Specifically, as the variation pattern determined when the first special symbol lottery is a big hit, the value of the variation type counter CS1 falls within the range of "0 to 50" and normal reach (20 seconds) is associated, Super reach A (30 seconds) is associated with the range of “51 to 100”, super reach B (30 seconds) is associated with the range of “101 to 150”, and super reach for the range of “151 to 198” C (30 seconds) is associated.

  On the other hand, when the first special symbol lottery is removed and the table for ordinary use 202f1 is referred to, the number of holding balls of the first special symbol (the value set in the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d) Accordingly, the correspondence between the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the selected fluctuation pattern changes. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 18, when the number of holding balls in the first special symbol is within the range of 0 or 1, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of “0 to 70”. A variation pattern of out (12 seconds) is associated, and out of the range of “71 to 150” is associated normal reach (20 seconds). Further, as the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, the super reach A (30 seconds) is associated with the range of “151 to 170”, and the super reach B (30 seconds) is associated with the range of “171 to 198”. It is done.

  On the other hand, when the number of holding balls in the first special symbol is 2 or 3, the fluctuation pattern of short deviation (8 seconds) corresponds to the range of "0 to 70" as the value of fluctuation type counter CS1. The variation pattern counter of long term (12 seconds) is associated with the range of “71 to 130” as the value of the variation type counter CS1, and the normal reach (20 seconds) is associated for the range of “131 to 170”. ing. Further, as the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, the super reach A (30 seconds) is associated with the range of “171 to 185”, and the super reach B (30 seconds) is associated with the range of “186 to 198”. It is done.

  In addition, the process (see S505 in FIG. 35) of selecting the variation pattern of the first special symbol with reference to the table 202f1 for ordinary use is the process of subtracting the holding ball of the first special symbol (see S303 in FIG. 33) Is also performed later. Therefore, the normal table 202f1 is not referred to in the state where there are four holding balls.

  As described above, when the number of holding balls is small (0 or 1), a fluctuation pattern with a long fluctuation time is easily selected as compared with the case where the number of holding balls is large (2 or 3). By configuring in this manner, when the number of holding balls is small, it is possible to secure a time for storing the holding balls and make it difficult for the fluctuation display to be interrupted. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from getting bored with the game. On the other hand, when the number of holding balls is large, it becomes difficult to store the holding by shortening the fluctuation time, so the ball number is further increased to the first ball entrance 64 when the number of holding balls becomes the upper limit (4). Can be prevented (suppressed) from entering the ball. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel lost.

  On the other hand, when the second special symbol lottery is executed and the normal table 202f1 is referred to, 600 seconds (10 minutes) is set as the fluctuation time regardless of the lottery result. That is, when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a big hit, the long fluctuation A (600 seconds) is associated with the value of the whole range (0 to 198) of the possible values of the fluctuation type counter CS1, If the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small hit, small hit long fluctuation A (600 seconds) is associated with the value of the whole range (0-198) of the possible values of the fluctuation type counter CS1, When the lottery result of the second special symbol is out, out-of-long variation A (600 seconds) is associated with the value of the entire range (0-198) of the possible values of the variation type counter CS1. As a result, when the right hitting is performed in the normal state and the second special symbol lottery is executed, the fluctuation time of 600 seconds is set each time, so the gaming efficiency is extremely deteriorated compared to the left hitting. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to suppress anomalous gaming methods in which a right strike is performed at the normal time.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 19A, the details of the time reduction / probability change table 202f2 will be described. At this time, the short / probable change table 202f2 is a table to be referred to when selecting a variation pattern when a high probability state (that is, a short time state or a positive change state) of a normal symbol is set as a gaming state.

  As shown in FIG. 19 (a), the table 202f2 for short / prone variation is used to determine the type of variation pattern (variation time) for each type of special symbol and for each type of stop (special decision result) of the special symbol. A random number value (counter value of the variation type counter CS1) is specified. The time reduction / probability change table 202f2 is different from the normal table 202f1 described above with reference to FIG. 18 and is configured such that a different variation pattern is not selected according to the number of holding balls of the first special symbol. doing.

  That is, when the normal state is set as the gaming state, it is difficult to always secure the holding ball of the first special symbol, since it plays the game aiming at the upper first ball entrance 64b1 while playing the left hitting game, There is a possibility that the period when the lottery of the first special symbol is not executed (the first special symbol is not changed) may occur. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 18, when the number of holding balls in the first special symbol is small, the normal table 202 f 1 is configured such that a fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time can be easily selected. Thereby, in the normal state, the state in which the variable display of the first special symbol is not executed continues for a long time, and it is possible to suppress the problem that the player gets bored with the game.

  On the other hand, the time reduction / probability change table 202f2 shown in FIG. 19 (a) is played in a left-handed game, and a game is performed in which a ball is inserted into the lower first entrance 64b2 It is a data table to be referred to. At this time, in the short state and the definite change state, since the electric accessory 64a is frequently opened, the gaming state in which the holding ball of the first special symbol can be easily stored is obtained.

  As described above, when the gaming state in which the holding balls of the first special symbol can be easily stored is set, fluctuation occurs when the number of holding balls of the first special symbol is small as in the above-described table 202f1 for normal The first special symbol (special figure 1) variation that is executed when the game is paused and the number of holding balls in the first special symbol decreases when a configuration in which a long variation pattern is easily selected is added. The fluctuation time of the game becomes longer, and it becomes difficult to play the game efficiently during the time saving state or the probability changing state. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the game state (short time state, positive change state) that can easily store the holding balls of the first special symbol, that is, the variation pattern table (time short · time reference referred in the high probability state of the normal symbol) In the table 202f2 for probability variation, the variation pattern selected by the number of holding balls in the first special symbol is not different (if the number of holding balls in the first special symbol is small, the variation pattern with a long variation time is not selected ) Is configured. Thereby, the game of a time saving state and a definite change state can be performed efficiently.

  Further, although details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the jackpot is won in a state where the probability change state is set, the latency state starts from the probability change state at the timing when the jackpot variation starts. It is configured to migrate to Specifically, the lottery for the first special symbol (special figure 1) is performed in a state where the probability change state is set, and when the result of the selection (success or failure judgment result) is a big hit, the time reduction / probability change table 202f2 If you refer to, and a special variation (600 seconds) is selected, the gaming state becomes latent while the special variation (600 seconds) is being executed, and the special variation ends, the special figure 1 The special figure 1 is stopped and displayed in the combination which shows that the lottery result of is a big hit, and a big hit game is started.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, since the first special symbol and the second special symbol are configured to be able to simultaneously execute the lottery and the variable display, while the latent state is set (the special variation for the special figure 1) Of the second special symbol can be made) while In addition, in the present embodiment, the variation display period (variation time) for indicating the lottery result of the second special symbol is defined as the latent state only for a short period (one second), and only the second special symbol is specified. It is configured to win a small hit. By configuring in this manner, the player can frequently perform the lottery of the second special symbol while the latent state is set (while the hit special variation is being executed). You can get a lot of prize balls.

  As described above in FIG. 19A, in the present embodiment, if the jackpot of the special figure 1 is won in the state where the probability change state is set, 60 seconds to 600 are obtained depending on the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1. The variation time of the second is configured to be set, and this variation time directly becomes the duration of the latent state. Therefore, as a lottery result of a special symbol, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the selected fluctuation pattern (variation time) as well as the result (incidence determination result) as to whether or not the jackpot is won. The interest of the game can be improved.

  On the other hand, when the second special symbol lottery is executed and the time reduction / probability variation table 202f2 is referred to, 60 seconds (one minute) is set as the fluctuation time regardless of the lottery result. That is, when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a big hit, the long fluctuation (60 seconds) is associated with the value of the whole range (0-198) of the possible values of the fluctuation type counter CS1, 2 If the lottery result of the special symbol is a small hit, small hit long fluctuation (60 seconds) is associated with the value of the entire range (0-198) of the possible values of the fluctuation type counter CS1, and the second When the lottery result of the special symbol is out, out-of-long variation (60 seconds) is associated with the value of the whole range (0-198) of the possible values of the variation type counter CS1. As a result, when the right hitting is performed in the time saving state or the definite changing state and the lottery of the second special symbol is executed, the fluctuation time of 60 seconds is set each time, so the gaming efficiency is extremely higher than the left hitting. Getting worse. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to suppress anomalous game methods in which a right strike is performed in the time saving state or the probability changing state.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 19 (b), the details of the latency confirmation table 202f3 will be described. The latency confirmation table 202f3 is a table to be referred to when selecting a variation pattern when the latency state (high probability state of special symbol, low probability state of normal symbol) is set as the gaming state.

  As shown in FIG. 19 (b), the latent table 202f3 is a random pattern for determining the type (variation time) of the variation pattern for each type of special symbol and the type of stop of the special symbol (appropriate determination result). A numerical value (counter value of the fluctuation type counter CS1) is defined. In the same manner as the time reduction / probability change table 202f2 described above, the latent determination table 202f3 is configured such that a different variation pattern is not selected according to the number of holding balls of the first special symbol.

  This latent table 202f3 is used to select the variation pattern of the second special symbol (special figure 2) during the period when the jackpot variation of the special figure 1 is being executed during the definite variation state, or during the time saving state or the definite variation state In winning the jackpot which is the jackpot type of "jackpot C" in, when selecting the variation pattern of the first special symbol (special figure 1), the second special symbol (special figure 2) executed after the jackpot game is over Referenced.

  This latent confirmation table 202f3 is selected when the content specified in the time reduction / probability change table 202f2 described above with reference to FIG. 19A becomes a big hit in the first special symbol lottery The difference is that the value of the variation type counter CS1 defined for each variation pattern to be changed is different from the variation time of each variation pattern selected in the second special symbol lottery, Other than that is the same. Detailed description of the same elements will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 19 (b), as the variation pattern determined when the first special symbol lottery results in a big hit, the value of the variation type counter CS1 falls within the range of "0 to 39" and the normal variation (60 (60) Seconds are associated, the range of "40 to 119" is associated with super fluctuation (180 seconds), and the range of "120 to 198" is associated with special variation (600 seconds).

  On the other hand, when the lottery for the first special symbol is lost and this latent confirmation table 202f3 is referred to, the number of holding balls of the first special symbol (the value set in the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d And the out-of-middle change (30 seconds) is associated regardless of the value of the change type counter CS1.

  When the second special symbol lottery is executed and the latency confirmation table 202f3 is referred to, one second is set as the fluctuation time regardless of the lottery result. That is, when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a big hit, the short-circuit fluctuation (1 second) is associated with the value of the whole range (0-198) of the possible values of the fluctuation type counter CS1, 2 If the lottery result of the special symbol is a small hit, small hit short fluctuation (1 second) is associated with the value of the whole range (0-198) of the possible values of the fluctuation type counter CS1, and the second When the lottery result of the special symbol is out, the out-of-short fluctuation (1 second) is associated with the value of the whole range (0-198) of the possible values of the change type counter CS1. As a result, it is possible to execute many lots (variations) of the second special symbol during the latent state.

  Next, details of the common drawing fluctuation pattern table 202g will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, the common drawing fluctuation pattern table 202g is a table to be referred to in order to select the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol when the lottery of the normal symbol is executed. As shown in FIG. 20, in the common drawing fluctuation pattern table 202g, the range of values of the common drawing fluctuation type counter CS2 and the fluctuation pattern (variation time) for each gaming state at the time when the lottery of the normal symbol is executed. And are defined in association with each other.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 20, when the gaming state is the normal state, the latent state, that is, the low probability state of the normal symbol, the entire range of possible values of the common drawing fluctuation type counter CS2 A variation pattern with a variation time of 10 seconds is associated with 0 to 198). Further, also in the case where the gaming state is the definite change state, the change pattern of the change time of 10 seconds is associated with the entire range (0 to 198) of the possible values of the common drawing change type counter CS2.

  On the other hand, when the gaming state is a short time state, a definite change state, that is, a high probability state of a normal symbol, the value of the common drawing change type counter CS2 changes in the range of "0-198" and the change time changes by 3 seconds. Patterns are associated.

  In the first embodiment, although a plurality of variation pattern variations are provided only in the latent state, the present invention is not limited to this. Even if it is a normal state or a definite change state, a variation may be given to the variation pattern (variation time) of the normal symbol, and when the lottery of the normal symbol is executed in the latent state, 2 seconds of 1 second or 3 seconds as the variation time The configuration may be such that one of the types is set. The variation time is not limited to two, and more variation times may be selected. As the variation time is varied, it is more difficult for the player to predict the variation time, so it is possible to make the right strike continuously more reliably during the latent state.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the variation time of the normal symbol is set based on the gaming state and the value of the common drawing variation type counter CS2 acquired, but in addition to that, based on the number of holding balls of the normal symbol The variation time may be changed, the variation time may be changed based on the number of lottery times of the special symbol, or the variation time of the normal symbol may be set by a method combining the various configurations described above. Specifically, one second is set as the fluctuation time of the normal symbol from the transition of the gaming state to the latent state until the lottery of the special symbol is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times), and thereafter (for example, , 51 times to 100 times) may be configured such that 3 seconds is set as the fluctuation time of the normal symbol.

  As described above, by measuring the number of times of special figure fluctuation (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) from the end of the previous big hit, and by configuring so that the fluctuation time corresponding to the measurement result is selected and executed During the period when the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, making the player play the game while giving the player a sense of expectation so that a more advantageous fluctuation time (for example, a short fluctuation time) is executed a lot. it can.

  In addition, while the lottery of the even numbered special symbols is executed after the gaming state shifts to the latent state, 1 second is set as the variation time of the normal symbol, and other than that (odd number of times), It may be configured to set 3 seconds as the fluctuation time of the normal symbol. As described above, by configuring the variation time of the normal symbol to be changed based on the number of times the lottery of the special symbol is executed, it becomes difficult for the player to predict the variation time, so that it is possible to more surely in the latent state. It is possible to make a right strike continuously. In this case, when the special symbol lottery is not executed, the variation time of the normal symbol is longer (compared to the case where the special symbol lottery is executed), or the special symbol It is good to constitute so that the fluctuation time of a normal symbol may become long, so that the number which carries out the reservation memory of the lottery is small.

  Moreover, when setting the fluctuation time of a normal symbol based on the holding ball number of a normal symbol, it is good to comprise so that long fluctuation time may be easy to be selected, so that the number of holding balls of a normal symbol is large. By configuring in this way, the pachinko machine 10 in which the number of holding balls in the normal pattern is hard to be stored is adjusted, and the pachinko machine 10 in which the number of holding balls in the normal pattern is easily stored is per unit time The number of regular symbol lottery can be made uniform.

  Next, the details of the RAM 203 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 21 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203 of the main control unit 110. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 21, the RAM 203 has a first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, a second special symbol execution area 203b, a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c, a first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d, and a normal symbol holding ball Number counter 203e, time reduction counter 203f, probability variation flag 203g, special figure 1 big hit flag 203h, special figure 2 big hit flag 203i, winning state storage area 203j, small hit flag 203k, special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203m, special figure 2 fluctuation It has at least a time counter 203n, a large hitting middle flag 203o, a small hitting middle flag 203p, a special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203s, a common drawing short fluctuation flag 203t, a winning counter 203u, a special drawing 1 temporary stop flag 203v, and other memory areas 203z. ing.

  The first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a has one execution area (first special symbol execution area) and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), each of which In the area, the respective values of the first random number counter C1, the first collision type counter C2, the small hit type counter C5, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 are stored.

  More specifically, at the timing when the ball enters the first entrance 64 (start winning), the value of each counter is acquired, and the acquired data is divided into four holding areas (holding first area ~ Among the vacant areas in the reserved fourth area), the areas are stored in order from the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, as the area number is smaller, data corresponding to the winning in time is stored, and in the reserved first area, data corresponding to the oldest winning in time is stored. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, in the main controller 110, when a lottery of special symbols is performed, each value of each counter C1 to C3 stored in the first reserved area of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is the execution area After being shifted (moved), determinations such as drawing of special symbols are performed based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the execution area.

  Note that when data is shifted from the hold first area to the execution area, the hold first area becomes empty. Therefore, there is a shift process in which winning data stored in other hold areas (hold second area to hold fourth area) is packed into a hold area (hold first area to hold third area) with one smaller area number. To be done. In the present embodiment, in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, data shift is performed only for the holding area (second holding area to fourth holding area) in which data of winning is stored.

  In the second special symbol execution area 203b, similarly to the first special symbol execution area of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the determination value (counter value) for executing the lottery of the special symbol is stored. In the second special symbol execution area 203b, the respective counter values acquired at the timing when the start winning on the second entrance 640 is detected are stored.

  The normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is, like the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, one execution area (normal symbol holding ball execution area) and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area) And. In each of these areas, a second random number counter C4 is stored.

  More specifically, at the timing when the ball passes through gate 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired, and the acquired data is divided into four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). In the vacant area of), the areas are stored in order from the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, similarly to the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, data corresponding to winning is stored while the winning sequence is held. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, in the main control unit 110, when the lottery of the normal symbol is performed, the value of the second collision random number counter C4 stored in the first reserved area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is the execution area Then, based on the value of the second random number counter C4 stored (shifted) and stored in the execution area, a determination such as a lottery of a normal symbol is performed.

  In addition, when the data is shifted from the reserve first area to the execution area, the reserve first area becomes empty, so it is stored in another reserve area as in the case of the first special symbol reserve ball storage area 203a. A shift process is performed to pack winning data into a reserve area with a smaller area number. In addition, data shift is also performed only for the holding area in which winning data is stored.

  The first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d is a variation display of the special symbol performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the ball entering into the first ball entrance 64 (start winning combination) (the first symbol display device 37, It is a counter which counts the number of pending balls (number of waiting times) of the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 up to four times. The first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d has an initial value set to zero, and a maximum value of 4 each time the ball enters the first entrance 64 and the number of holding balls in the variable display increases. Up to one is added (see S1704 in FIG. 47). On the other hand, the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d is decremented by one each time the variation display of the special symbol is newly executed (see S303 in FIG. 33).

  The value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d (number of holding N1 of the variable display in the first special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the holding ball number command (S304 in FIG. 33, FIG. 47) See S1705). The holding ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 each time the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d is changed.

  The voice lamp control device 113 changes the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d by the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control unit 110, the variable display being held by the main control unit 110 It is possible to obtain the value of the holding ball number itself. As a result, the number of holding balls in the variable display managed by the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223c of the audio lamp control device 113 is the holding of the actual variable display held in the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if the number of balls deviates, it is possible to correct the deviation by means of the command for holding ball number received next.

  The audio lamp control device 113 manages the number of holding balls based on the holding ball number command, and the display hold for notifying the display control device 114 of the number of holding balls every time the number of holding balls changes. Send a ball number command. The display control device 114 displays the number-of-held-balls number symbol on the third symbol display device 81 based on the number of held balls notified by the number-of-held-cells-for-display command.

  The normal symbol holding ball number counter 203e holds the number of holding balls (number of waiting times) of the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on passage of the ball in the through gate 67 up to 4 times It is a counter that counts up to. The initial value of the value of this normal symbol holding ball number counter 203e (the number M of holdings of the variable display in the normal symbol) is set to zero, and the ball passes through the through gate 67 and the number of balls holding the variable display increases Every time, 1 is added up to the maximum value 4 (see S1904 in FIG. 49). On the other hand, the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203e is decremented by one each time the variable display of the normal symbol (the second symbol) is newly executed.

  When the ball passes through gate 67, if the value of this normal symbol holding ball number counter 203e (number M of suspension display of the fluctuation display in the normal symbol) is less than 4, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired The acquired data is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c (see S1905 in FIG. 49). On the other hand, when the ball passes through gate 67, if the value of this normal symbol holding ball number counter 203e is 4, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c (S1903 in FIG. 49: No) reference).

  The time saving counter 203f is a counter for counting the number of times of fluctuation of the remaining special symbol in the time saving state. At this time, a value corresponding to the winning jackpot type is set to the short counter 203 f after the big hit ends. Then, the hour reduction counter 203f is decremented by one in the gaming state update process executed immediately after setting the start of the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol (see S308 in FIG. 36). When the lottery of the normal symbol is performed, if the value of the short time counter 203f is 1 or more, it is determined that the time symbol of the normal symbol is short, and the determination of the normal symbol is executed with reference to the high probability table. . On the other hand, if the value of the hour reduction counter 203f is 0, it is determined that the symbol is in the normal state, and the normal symbol determination is performed with reference to the low probability table.

  The probability change flag 203g is a flag indicating whether or not the high probability state of the special symbol is set, and indicates that the special symbol is in the high probability state when it is set to ON. That is, when the probability change flag 203g is set to ON, the probability change status (special symbol: high probability status, normal symbol: high probability status) or the latent status (special symbol: high probability status) Normal symbol: Low probability state) is set.

  The probability change flag 203g is set to ON at the end of the jackpot if the jackpot type won is a jackpot to set a probability change state or a latent state after the jackpot (S2402 in FIG. 54: Yes) 54 (see S2403). Then, when the symbol indicating that the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit is stopped and displayed, it is set to be off (see S806 in FIG. 38).

  In this embodiment, as described above, the high probability state of the special symbol is set based on the big hit of the special symbol, and the high probability state of the special symbol is continued until the next jackpot is won. However, without limitation thereto, for example, a special symbol from the time when the high probability state (special figure high probability state) of the special symbol is set as the special figure high probability end condition for ending the high probability state of the special symbol The probability variation flag 203g may be set to be off when the number of variations (the number of special pattern variations) reaches a predetermined number (for example, 50). In this case, in order to set the probability change flag 203g to OFF, the storage means for storing the number of times of special figure fluctuation as the special figure high certainty end condition in advance and the special figure high certainty state are set. A measurement means for measuring the number of times of special figure fluctuation, and an end judgment for judging whether the number of times of special figure fluctuation measured by the measurement means satisfies the number of special figure fluctuations stored in the storage means (special figure high probability end condition) A means may be provided.

  Furthermore, a plurality of special figure high certainty end conditions are prepared, for example, special figure 1 high certainty end condition which can be established based only on the number of times of fluctuation of the first special symbol in the special figure high certainty state Various conditions such as the special figure 2 high probability end condition which can be established based only on the number of times, and the lottery end condition which can be established when the lottery result of the special symbol is a predetermined lottery result (for example, the lottery result of winning a small hit) It is also possible to configure the special figure high probability end condition to be easy, and to set the probability variation flag 203g to OFF when any of the special figure high probability end conditions is satisfied.

  Special figure 1 big hit flag 203h, when it is decided that the value of the 1st hitting random number counter C1 which is acquired on the basis of entering into the 1st entrance 64 matches with the big hit decision value at the time of the fluctuation start, it is turned on (See S407 in FIG. 34). The special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is set to OFF when setting the display of the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot (S806 in FIG. 38).

  When the variation time of the variation display of the first special symbol ends with the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h on, processing for forcibly stopping the second special symbol by the symbol is executed (see S804 in FIG. 38). . Thereby, it is possible to prevent a defect that the other becomes a big hit or a small hit during the execution of one big hit with the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

  Special figure 2 big hit flag 203i is turned on, when it is judged that the value of the 1st hitting random number counter C1 which is acquired on the basis of entering into the 2nd entrance 640, matches with the big hit decision value at the time of the fluctuation start, (See S1007 in FIG. 40). The special view 2 jackpot flag 203i is set to OFF when setting the display of the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot (S1506 in FIG. 45).

  When the variation time of the variation display of the second special symbol ends with the special figure 2 big hit flag 203i on, processing for forcibly stopping the first special symbol with a symbol is executed (see S1004 in FIG. 40). . Thereby, it is possible to prevent a defect that the other becomes a big hit or a small hit during the execution of one big hit with the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

  The winning state storage area 203 j is a storage area for storing information indicating the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot. Specifically, if the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is the normal state (if the value of the time reduction counter 203f is 0 and the probability change flag 203g is off), the winning state storage area 203j is in the normal state. “00H” is stored as information indicating On the other hand, if the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is a definite change state (if the value of the time reduction counter 203f is 1 or more, and the positive change flag 203g is on), the positive change state storage area 203j indicates a positive change state "01H" is stored as information. If the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is the latent state (if the value of the time reduction counter 203f is 0 and the probability change flag 203g is on), the latent state is stored in the winning state storage area 203j. "02H" is stored as information to indicate.

  The information stored in the winning state storage area 203j is held until the end of the jackpot, and is referred to when setting the gaming state after the jackpot is ended (see S2404 in FIG. 54).

  The small hitting flag 203k is turned on when it is determined that the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired based on entering the second entrance 640 matches the small hitting determination value at the start of fluctuation. This flag is set (see S1102 in FIG. 41). The small hit flag 203k is set to OFF when setting the display of the stop symbol corresponding to the small hit (see S1605 in FIG. 46). With this small hitting flag 203k on, when the fluctuation time of the second special symbol fluctuation display ends, temporarily stop the fluctuation of the other special symbol (subtract the counter that measures the fluctuation time of the special symbol) A process of stopping is executed (see S1603 in FIG. 46). Thereby, during execution of the small hit of the second special symbol, it becomes a big hit in the lottery of the first special symbol, it can be prevented (suppressed) that the problem that the big hit is started during the small hit will occur it can.

  The special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203m and the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203n are counters for measuring the fluctuation time of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, respectively, and the first special symbol and the second special When the variation pattern of the symbol is selected, the variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set. Whether or not the variation time of each special symbol has ended is determined by the counting results of the special figure 1 variation time counter 203m and the special figure 2 variation time counter 203n.

  The jackpot middle flag 203o is a flag indicating whether or not a jackpot is in progress. If the jackpot flag 203o is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a jackpot, and if it is off, it indicates that it is not in a jackpot. The jackpot flag 203o is set to ON when the start of the jackpot is set. On the other hand, it is set off in the jackpot end process executed at the end of the jackpot.

  The small hit middle flag 203p is a flag indicating whether or not the small hit is in progress. If the small hit middle flag 203p is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a small hit, and if off, it indicates that the small hit is not in progress. The small hit middle flag 203p is set to ON when the start of the small hit is set (see S1606 in FIG. 46). On the other hand, it is set to off at the end of the small hit (see S2512 in FIG. 55).

  The pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured to win only the second special symbol in the small hit, and when the small hit is won (when the small hit flag 203 p is set to ON), 1) It is configured to interrupt the change display of the special symbol. In other words, among the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) of a plurality of types, it wins a small hit by lottery of one special symbol (second special symbol), and the small hit middle flag 203p is set on In this state, the variation display of the other special symbol (first special symbol) is not completed, so that the player can be made to pay attention to the small hit game. In addition, during the small hitting game, it is possible to prevent the other special symbol fluctuation display ending, and the big hit game being started.

  The special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203 s is a flag indicating that it is a period from when the fluctuation of the first special symbol is stopped and displayed (fixed display) with the stop symbol of the big hit to the start of the big hit. If this special view 2 fluctuation stop flag 203s is set to ON, execution of the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is avoided even when there is a new ball entry to the second ball entrance 640 (See S901 in FIG. 39: Yes). This special view 2 fluctuation stop flag 203s is set to ON when the second special symbol is removed and forced to stop with the symbol (see S802 in FIG. 38), and the processing for executing the second special symbol fluctuation display is avoided. If it has been set, it is set to off (S902 in FIG. 39).

  The common drawing short fluctuation flag 203t is a flag for indicating that the fluctuation of the normal symbol (the second symbol) is the short fluctuation (the fluctuation for 3 seconds), and is set to ON so that the normal symbol (the second symbol) is displayed. Symbol) is shown to have been executed. The common drawing short fluctuation flag 203t determines that the timing to set the fluctuation time of the normal symbol in the normal symbol fluctuation processing (see S106 in FIG. 48) is during the time saving state (time in the short) (S1811 in FIG. 48: Yes 48. When the fluctuation time (short fluctuation) of 3 seconds is set, it is set to ON (S1814 in FIG. 48), and it is determined that the fluctuation time of the normal symbol (second symbol) has elapsed (S1816 in FIG. 48: Yes), it is referred to (S1819 in FIG. 48) when it is determined that the lottery result of the current normal symbol (the second symbol) is a hit (S1818 in FIG. 48: Yes).

  Here, when it is determined that the common drawing short change flag 203t is set to ON (S1819 in FIG. 48: Yes), it is determined whether the current time is in the time saving state (time saving) (S1821 in FIG. 48). ), When it is determined that the time saving state (during the time saving) (S1821 in FIG. 48: Yes), an opening operation (long opening) advantageous to the player is set as the opening operation of the electric role item 64a (FIG. 48 S1822). It is to be noted that the common drawing short fluctuation flag 203t is set to be off (S1820 in FIG. 48) after it is determined that the normal symbol fluctuation processing (S106 in FIG. 48) is set to ON.

  As described above, the game state at the start of variation of the normal symbol (the second symbol) (at the setting of the variation time) and the setting condition of the electric character 64a after the variation time of the normal symbol (the second symbol) has elapsed. Since the opening operation (long opening) advantageous to the player is set as the opening operation of the motorized prize 64a only when both the gaming state and the time saving state are set, a plurality of gaming states (normal state) By the fluctuation (lottery drawing) of the normal symbol executed across the time saving state, it is possible to reliably prevent the long opening of the electric character 64a from being opened long, and the advantage (long of the electric character 64a for the player) It is possible to prevent the player from being excessively provided open.

  The winning counter 203 u is a counter that counts the number of balls that have won (entered) the first specified winning opening 65 a in the small hitting game round. When the value of the winning counter 203u is 10, which is the upper limit value, it is determined that the round end condition is satisfied, and the round is ended (see S2706 in FIG. 57). In each round of the jackpot, even when the value of the winning counter 203u is less than 10, the round is ended if the round period set in the round is reached. The winning counter 203u is incremented by one each time a ball is inserted into the first specified winning opening 65a during a small winning round valid period. Also, the value is reset to 0 at the end of each round.

  Although detailed description is omitted, the above-mentioned winning counter 203u is not limited to small hitting games, but also when counting the number of balls that have won to the second specified winning opening 650a in each round in the big hitting game Are also used.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the period for which the first specified winning opening 65a is opened as the game content of the small hitting game is 1.5 seconds, and the ending condition of the round established by the number of winnings is set to 10 pieces. doing. That is, the effective period (1.5 seconds) of the round game elapses until ten balls are won in the first specific winning opening 65a during the small hitting game (until the round end condition for the winning number is satisfied). It will be. Therefore, since the period of the small hitting game can be made constant, the effect across the small hitting game (period from the start of fluctuation of one special symbol to the end of fluctuation of another special symbol via the small hitting game The presentation period of a series of productions to be performed can be predetermined. Therefore, the fluctuation timing of the special symbol and the execution timing of the effect can be easily synchronized, and the effect can be enhanced.

  Special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is the flag which shows the period which stops renewal (subtraction) of fluctuation time of special figure 1, when it is set to on, renewal (subtraction) of fluctuation time is stopped, When it is set to off from the state set to on, the update (subtraction) of the stopped fluctuation time is resumed.

  This special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON when stopping the variation of the second special symbol (special figure 2) for which the lottery result is a small hit (S1602 in FIG. 46), and the special symbol variation process (figure) 32) (S202 in FIG. 32). As a result of the reference, when it is set to ON, processing is performed to update the display of the first symbol display device 37 corresponding to the special view 1 in the same manner as during fluctuation (S203 in FIG. 32). That is, while the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON, the update (subtraction) of the fluctuation time is stopped, but the first symbol display device 37 continues the fluctuation display. It becomes. As a result, by setting the special view temporary stop flag 203v to ON, it can be informed that the fluctuation of the special view 1 is not forcibly stopped. Then, if it is determined that the first special symbol variation in progress processing (see FIG. 37) is set to on (S701 in FIG. 37: Yes), it is set to off (S703 in FIG. 37).

  In the present embodiment, only the second special symbol lottery is configured to be able to win a small hit, so the special symbol for which the variable display is temporarily stopped based on having won a small hit is the first special It becomes only a symbol, but if it is configured to be able to win a small hit also for the lottery of the first special symbol, even if the special figure 2 temporary stop flag is provided in order to temporarily stop the variable display of the second special symbol. good.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the lottery result of one of the special symbols is a big hit, it is based on the fact that one of the special symbols is stopped in the combination showing the big hit (based on the big hit game being executed ), The process to forcibly stop the variation display of the other special symbol and stop, and when the lottery result of one of the special symbols is a small hit, the one special symbol is stopped by the combination showing a small hit On the basis of the above, the variable display of the other special symbol is temporarily stopped (stopped until the small hitting game is over).

  That is, according to the lottery result of one special symbol, it is constituted so that change indication of the other special symbol can be processed into various modes. By configuring in this way, the lottery result of one of the special symbols becomes the game result (for example, a big hit) that is most advantageous to the player, and while the variable display for showing the game result is being executed, The special symbol (lottery result is a small hit) of is stopped and displayed, and it can be suppressed that a big hit is erased by a small hit.

  The other memory area 203z is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110.

  Thus, the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is provided with various flags, counters, and the like. The basic function of the pachinko machine 10 and the novel state transition shown in FIG. 11 can be realized based on various tables provided in the ROM 202 and flags, counters, and the like provided in the RAM 203.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 22 and 23, the details of the electrical configuration of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 22A is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 provided in the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 22A, the ROM 222 at least includes a variation pattern selection table 222a, a stop display mode selection table 222b, and an additional effect selection table 222c.

  In the fluctuation pattern selection table 222a, based on the fluctuation pattern command output from the main controller 110, the voice lamp control device 113 roughly indicates the contents of fluctuation indicated by the fluctuation pattern command (variation time, fluctuation type (reach, out of range, etc.) ), And is used to determine the contents of the detailed variation display to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Thereby, more various variation modes can be determined. Here, with respect to the rough fluctuation content instructed from main controller 110, one fluctuation mode among a plurality of types is determined by lottery.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 19 (a), when the jackpot is won with the first special symbol in the state where the probability change state is set, the fluctuation time is normal fluctuation or fluctuation per 60 seconds. A variation pattern command corresponding to one of the super variation per 180 seconds and the special variation per 600 seconds is output from main controller 110, and voice lamp control device 113 receives the variation pattern command (variation time Setting the fluctuation effect corresponding to the

  Here, as a variation effect corresponding to the special variation (600 seconds), the first 60 seconds execute the first stage effect mode (for example, the effect of defeating the first enemy) and the second in a period of 60 seconds to 180 seconds. A variation effect is set in which a stage performance mode (for example, production for defeating a second enemy) is executed, and a third stage performance mode (production for defeating a third enemy) is executed in a period of 180 seconds to 600 seconds. The first 60 seconds perform the first stage effect mode (for example, the effect of defeating the first enemy) as the change effect corresponding to the change (180 seconds), and the second stage effect mode in a period of 60 seconds to 180 seconds A change effect is set to execute (for example, an effect to be defeated by a second enemy), and as a change effect corresponding to a normal change (60 seconds), an effect mode of the first stage for the first 60 seconds (for example, the first enemy Destruction ) Change production to be executed is set to.

  In this way, the fluctuation pattern set for the player this time by setting the effect mode so as to put a break on the fluctuation effect to be executed corresponding to the stage of the fluctuation time that can be set as the lottery result of the special symbol. It is possible to enjoy the fluctuation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while predicting which type of image is, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

  In addition, when performing the fluctuation production mentioned above, the remaining time display mode for making a player grasp the remaining time with respect to the production period set as each step (for example, the timing at which the production mode may shift to the next step) It may be configured to display an effect mode in which the remaining time up to is counted down and displayed. As a result, it is possible to make the player know in advance at least a period during which the variable effects are continuously executed (a period in which the latent state is continuously set), so that the player can play the game with confidence. it can.

  In addition, a plurality of types of enemies appearing during the fluctuation production are provided, and depending on the type of the appearing enemy, the degree of expectation that the fluctuation production shifts to the next stage (proportion of selection of the production mode for winning the enemy), It is preferable to be able to indicate the content of the jackpot game to be executed after the end of the current variable display, and the gaming state set after the jackpot game is over.

  In addition, in this case, for example, when the enemy A is displayed as the enemy type, if the fluctuation pattern set this time is the hit super fluctuation (180 seconds), the jackpot type most advantageous to the player is It may be configured to indicate that it is selected, and if the variation pattern is a hit special variation (600 seconds), it indicates that the player is selected other than the most advantageous jackpot type. By configuring in this way, it is possible to determine the effect mode (type of enemy) of the change effect by combining a plurality of elements that determine whether or not to give the player an advantageous benefit, so The effect can be further enhanced.

  In the stop display mode selection table 222b, a latent state is set as the gaming state, and a period (hereinafter referred to as a rush period) in which a small hitting game can be executed frequently is set by the lottery of the second special symbol. It is a data table referred when selecting the stop display mode (refer to Drawing 7 (a) and Drawing 8 (b)) of the production design for informing a person. The stop display mode selection table 222b is configured such that different stop display modes are selected according to the jackpot type won in the first special symbol lottery and the length of the rush period to be executed.

  Here, the content of the stop display mode selection table 222b will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 23A is a schematic view schematically showing the contents defined in the stop display mode selection table 222b. As shown in FIG. 23A, in the stop display mode selection table 222b, the player predicts the degree of advantage of each jackpot type (the number of rounds and the game state set after the jackpot game) and the length of the rush period. It is defined that the stop display mode of the effect pattern is set to be possible.

  Specifically, among the jackpot types of the first special symbol (special figure 1), it is elected to "jackpot A" which is the jackpot type that is most advantageous to the player, and the remaining time storage area 223p (the length of the rush period If the information stored in the information storage area is "0 to 60 seconds", that is, if the rush period is within 60 seconds, the value of the obtained effect counter 223h falls within the range of "0 to 39". Stop display mode "111" is defined, stop display mode "111" is defined in the range of "40 to 79", and stop display mode "666" is defined in the range of "80 to 99" .

  In addition, the jackpot is won, and the information stored in the remaining time storage area 223p (the area for storing information indicating the length of the rush period) is "61 seconds to 300 seconds", that is, the rush period is 61. If it is within 300 seconds, the stop display mode "111" is defined in the range of "0 to 39" and the stop display mode "333" is in the range of "40 to 79". Is defined, the stop display mode "333" is defined in the range of "80 to 99", and the information stored in the remaining time storage area 223p (the area for storing information indicating the length of the rush period) is "301 seconds-", that is, when the rush period is 301 seconds or more, the stop display mode "777" is defined in the range of "0 to 39" of the value of the obtained effect counter 223h, "40 to 79" "of In circumference, defined stop display mode "777", the range of "80 to 99" is defined stop display mode "VVV".

  Then, among the jackpot types of the first special symbol (special figure 1), the player wins "jackpot B" which is the jackpot type disadvantageous to the player, and the remaining time storage area 223p (stores information showing length of rush period If the information stored in the area) is "0 to 60 seconds", that is, if the rush period is within 60 seconds, the stop display mode is within the range of "0 to 39" of the value of the obtained effect counter 223h. “222” is defined, the stop display mode “444” is defined in the range of “40 to 79”, and the stop display mode “666” is defined in the range of “80 to 99”.

  In addition, the jackpot is won, and the information stored in the remaining time storage area 223p (the area for storing information indicating the length of the rush period) is "61 seconds to 300 seconds", that is, the rush period is 61. If it is within 300 seconds, the stop display mode "444" is defined in the range of "0 to 39" and the stop display mode "666" on the range of "40 to 79". Is defined, the stop display mode "111" is defined in the range of "80 to 99", and the information stored in the remaining time storage area 223p (the area for storing information indicating the length of the rush period) is "301 seconds-", that is, when the rush period is 301 seconds or more, the stop display mode "111" is defined in the range of "0 to 39" of the value of the effect counter 223h acquired, "40 to 79" "of In circumference, defined stop display mode "333", the range of "80 to 99" is defined stop display mode "333".

  Lastly, among the jackpot types of the first special symbol (special figure 1), it is elected as the "jackpot C" which is the second most advantageous jackpot type, or the "big hit D" which is the most disadvantageous jackpot type, If the information stored in the time storage area 223p (the area for storing information indicating the length of the rush period) is "0 to 60 seconds", that is, if the rush period is within 60 seconds, the acquired effect counter 223h The stop display mode "444" is defined in the range of "0 to 39" and the stop display mode "666" is defined in the range of "40 to 79" in the range of "80 to 99". The stop display mode "444" is defined.

  Also, the information stored in the remaining time storage area 223p (the area for storing information indicating the length of the rush period) is "61 seconds to 300 seconds", that is, it is elected as "big hit C" or "big hit D". When the rush period is within 61 to 300 seconds, the stop display mode "666" is defined in the range of "0 to 39" for the value of the obtained effect counter 223h, and in the range of "40 to 79", The stop display mode "111" is defined, the stop display mode "111" is defined in the range of "80 to 99", and the remaining time storage area 223p (area for storing information indicating the length of the rush period) is stored. If the information being displayed is "301 seconds-", that is, if the rush period is 301 seconds or more, the stop display mode "333" is defined in the range of "0 to 39" for the value of the obtained effect counter 223h. , In the range of 40 to 99 ", it is defined stop display mode" 777 ".

  As described above, in this embodiment, the length of the rush period and the length of the rush period after the end of the rush period depending on the stop display mode of the effect symbol displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 at the timing when the rush period starts. The content of the jackpot to be executed (jackpot type) is configured to be suggested to the player. As a result, by grasping the stop display mode of the effect symbol, it is possible to make the player predict the future game contents.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the stop display mode of the production symbol is defined to have a predetermined rule property. Specifically, the stop display mode of the production symbol is "even symbol", "odd symbol", It is specified that the benefits awarded to the player increase in the order of “777” and “VVV” (the rush period becomes longer, and the jackpot type becomes advantageous). As described above, by giving the stop display mode of the effect symbol a predetermined rule property, it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game.

  Further, since the stop display mode of the effect pattern is selected by combining the jackpot type and the length of the rush period, for example, the stop display mode "111" of the effect pattern is most advantageous for the player. Only when the jackpot type "big hit A" is set, it is specified that the rush period is selected even if it is within 60 seconds, so when "111" is displayed, the player In contrast to the novel game nature that it is desired that the rush period end in 60 seconds, that is, the game characteristic that normally requires a longer rush period, a combination of the jackpot type and the length of the rush period By displaying the stop display mode, it is possible to add a game characteristic for which a game result (short rush period) reverse to the normal is desired.

  In addition, when "VVV" is displayed as the stop display mode of the effect pattern, it indicates that the player is most selected as the most advantageous type for both the jackpot type and the length of the rush period. On the other hand, you can play with peace of mind.

  In the present embodiment, the timing for selecting the stop display mode of the production symbol with reference to the stop display mode selection table 222b according to the gaming state (the timing for displaying the production symbol on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 stop) is displayed. It is configured to be different. Specifically, whether or not the second special symbol is in motion at the time when the latent state is set (when the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is started in the state where the probability variation state is set), or not If it is determined that the second special symbol has not changed, that is, if it is possible to execute the lottery of the second special symbol immediately after the latent state is set, the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is It is configured to stop and display the effect pattern based on the start.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the second special symbol is fluctuating at the time when the latent state is set (when the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol starts in the state where the probability variation state is set), That is, unless it is not possible to execute the drawing of the second special symbol in the state where the latent state is set unless the variable display of the second special symbol currently being executed is ended, the fluctuation display of the second special symbol being executed It is configured to stop and display the effect pattern based on the timing when the key is finished.

  By configuring in this manner, the lottery of the second special symbol can be executed in a state in which the latent state is set immediately after the rush period starts with the stopped display of the effect symbol, which makes the player uncomfortable. It is possible to play the game in the latent state without giving it.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, it is assumed that the second special symbol fluctuates at the time when the latent state is set (when the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol starts in the state where the probability change state is set) When it is determined, the length of the rush period from the timing when the fluctuation display of the second special symbol in execution is finished is determined, and if the result of the determination is within a predetermined time, the effect is made to stop and display the effect pattern It is configured not to execute (representation indicating that the rush period has been started). As a result, despite the fact that the effect pattern is stopped and displayed and the rush period has been started (the rush game has been started), if the small hitting game is to be executed, the rush period will end. Can be suppressed.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, it is configured to display that the rush period (lash game) has been started by the effect symbol similar to the third symbol, so the third symbol corresponding to the special symbol is displayed. It can be made to seem as if rush game was performed based on the symbol being stopped and displayed. In addition, even when the length of the rush period is within a predetermined time and the rendering symbol is not stopped and displayed, it is possible to suppress giving the player a large sense of discomfort.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the second special symbol being executed at the timing when the jackpot variation of the first special symbol is started or the timing when the latent state is set as the timing for stopping and displaying the effect symbol. Although the timing at which the variable display of symbols is stopped is used, the effect symbols may be stopped and displayed at timings other than this, and for example, they are stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a If the winning information command indicating winning information is analyzed and it is determined in advance that the jackpot fluctuation is to be executed in the next fluctuation, immediately before the jackpot fluctuation is executed (the third symbol in the previous fluctuation of the jackpot fluctuation You may comprise so that a production | presentation pattern may be stopped and displayed by the timing by which it is stopped and displayed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute the lottery of the second special symbol immediately after the latent state is set.

  As described above, in the case of using a configuration in which the effect pattern is stopped and displayed before the jackpot variation is executed and the rush game is started to be started, the second on from the timing when the effect pattern is stopped and displayed. When a game aiming at the ball opening 640 (right-handed game) is performed, it is preferable that the lottery of the second special symbol is not executed before the start of the next jackpot variation. Thereby, as a result of performing the right-handed game based on the stop display of the effect pattern, it is before the latent state is set (before the jackpot fluctuation is started), that is, while the probability change state is second It is possible to prevent a situation in which a lottery for a special symbol is executed and the period in which rush game is executed is shortened.

  In the additional effect selection table 222c, when selecting the effect mode (additional effect mode) at the time of resuming the variable display of the first special symbol temporarily stopped by having won a small hit in the lottery of the second special symbol It is a data table to be referred to, and is configured such that a different additional effect mode (treasure box (see FIG. 7B)) is selected according to the remaining fluctuation time of the first special symbol after resumption. Here, the contents defined in the additional effect selection table 222c will be described with reference to FIG. 23 (b).

  FIG. 23B is a schematic view schematically showing the contents defined in the additional effect selection table 222c. As shown in FIG. 23B, in the additional effect selection table 222c, different additional effect types are selected based on the period information stored in the remaining fluctuation time information storage area 223o and the additional effect counter 223i. As described above, the data content is defined, and the player predicts the remaining fluctuation time (the remaining period of the rush period) of the first special symbol by executing the additional rendering mode corresponding to the selected additional rendering type. Configured to earn.

  Specifically, when the remaining fluctuation time (period information stored in the remaining fluctuation time information storage area 223o) is the period A (less than 5 seconds), the value of the acquired additional effect counter 223i is “0 to 99 The additional effect type "none" is defined in the range of "," and the "additional effect A" is defined in the range of "100 to 198". In addition, when the remaining fluctuation time (period information stored in the remaining fluctuation time information storage area 223o) is the period B (5 seconds to 60 seconds), the value of the acquired additional effect counter 223i is "0 to 99". The additional effect type "additional effect A" is defined in the range of "," and the "additional effect B" is defined in the range of "100 to 198". Then, when the remaining fluctuation time (period information stored in the remaining fluctuation time information storage area 223o) is the period C (60 seconds or more), the acquired value of the additional effect counter 223i is in the range of “0 to 99”. An additional effect type “additional effect B” is defined, and “additional effect C” is defined in the range of “100 to 198”.

  Here, when the “addition effect A” is set, the display mode of the treasure box 812 (see FIG. 7B) displayed during the rush period is changed to the display mode of the tattered. By grasping the display mode of the batter, the player can predict that the rush period is short. Further, when "addition effect B" is set, a treasure box 812 (see FIG. 7B) of the normal display mode is displayed, and when "addition effect C" is set, the normal display mode is selected. Also a gorgeous display mode is set. Further, when “none” is selected, an effect is set in which the treasure box 812 is not displayed during the remaining rush period.

  Although the additional effect selection table 222c (FIG. 23B) shown in the present embodiment shows an example in which the remaining fluctuation time of the rush period and the additional effect type are completely associated with each other, the present invention is limited thereto. There is little probability that, for example, "additional effect C" is set in period B, or "additional effect A" or "none" is set in period C. Also good. In this way, it is possible to execute an unexpected effect on the player.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, in the stop display mode of the effect pattern displayed at the timing when the latent game becomes a latent state and the rush game is started, the composite game information in which the rush period and the jackpot type are combined is played The game is provided to the player and game information indicating the remaining period of the rush period is provided to the player by the additional effect during the rush period. As a result, the player can comprehensively determine the stop display mode of the effect pattern executed as the composite game information and the effect mode of the additional effect, thereby making it possible to predict more detailed game content.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 22B, the RAM 223 in the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 22 (b) is a block diagram showing the contents of the RAM 223. In the RAM 223, a command storage area 223a, a winning information storage area 223b, a first special symbol holding ball number counter 223c, a special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223d, a special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223e, and a special figure 1 stop Type selection flag 223f, special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223g, effect counter 223h, additional effect counter 223i, state setting area 223j, remaining short number area 223k, special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 223m, special drawing 2 Fluctuation time counter 223n, remaining fluctuation time information storage area 223o, remaining time storage area 223p, card notified flag 223q, card notified flag 223s, rush displayed flag 223t, award ball number counter 223u, power supply At least the other memory area 223z It is provided.

  The command storage area 223a is an area temporarily stored until various commands output from the main control unit 110 to the audio lamp control unit 113 are processed. In detail, it is configured by a ring buffer, and data read / write is performed by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 60) of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area 223a is read out, and the command determination process is performed. , And the command is analyzed and processing according to the command is performed.

  The winning information storage area 223b has one execution area and four areas (first to fourth areas), and winning information is stored in each of these areas. In the pachinko machine 10, when the start winning combination for the first ball entry port 64 is detected in the main control unit 110, the first hit random number counter C1 and the first hit type counter C2, which are obtained according to the start winning combination. From the values of the small hit type counter C5 and the change type counter CS1, various information (hit or miss, big hit type in the case of a big hit, change pattern) obtained when the drawing of the special symbol corresponding to the start winning is performed Various information predicted (estimated) in main controller 110 and the predicted various information is notified from main controller 110 to voice lamp control device 113 by a winning information command.

  In the voice lamp control device 113, when the winning information command is received, the various information (the jackpot type in the case of a hit or a big hit, a fluctuation pattern) notified by the winning information command is extracted as winning information, and the winning information Are stored in the winning information storage area 223b. More specifically, among the vacant areas of the four areas (first area to fourth area), the extracted winning information is stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth). Be done. That is, as the area number is smaller, data corresponding to an earlier winning is stored, and data corresponding to the oldest winning in time is stored in the first area.

  The first special symbol holding ball number counter 223c is a fluctuation effect (variation display) of the first special symbol performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), and is suspended by the main control device 110 It is a counter which counts the number of holding balls (the number of waits) of the change production of the 1st special symbol being done up to 4 times for every classification of a special symbol.

  As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 can not directly access the main control device 110 to obtain the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, in the voice lamp control device 113, the number of holding balls is counted based on the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and the number of holding balls is special symbol by the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223c. It is managed by each type of.

  Specifically, in main controller 110, when the number of holding balls of the variation display is added by entering the ball into first entrance 64, or the variation display in the special symbol is executed in main controller 110. When the holding ball number is subtracted, a holding ball number command indicating the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

  When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, it acquires the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 from the holding ball number command. , And stored in the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223c (see S4212 in FIG. 60). As described above, since the sound lamp control device 113 updates the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223c according to the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the first special symbol of the main control device 110 The value can be updated while being synchronized with the value of the holding ball number counter 203d.

  The value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223c is used for displaying the number-of-holding-balls symbol in the third symbol display device 81. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of holding balls indicated by the command in the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223c in response to the reception of the holding ball number command, and also stores the first special symbol holding after storage. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of the number-of-balls counter 223 c, a display holding ball number command is transmitted to the display control device 114.

  When the display control device 114 receives this display holding ball number command, the value of the holding ball number indicated by the command, that is, the value for the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223c of the audio lamp control device 113 is held. The drawing of the image is controlled to display the ball number pattern in the sub display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223c is changed in synchronization with the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110. Therefore, the number of holding ball number symbols displayed in the sub display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81 may also be changed while being synchronized with the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 it can. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can correctly display the number of the holding balls for which the variable display is held.

  The special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223d and the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223e are the fluctuation pattern command of the first special symbol transmitted from the main control unit 110 and the fluctuation pattern command of the second special symbol, respectively. It is turned on (see S4206 and S4209 in FIG. 60), and turned off when the variable display setting in the third symbol display device 81 is made (see S5102 and S5108 in FIG. 69). When the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223d and the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223e are turned on, the display fluctuation pattern command is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command.

  The display variation pattern command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S4102) of the main process (see FIG. 59) executed by the MPU 221, It is transmitted to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that variation display of the third symbol is performed in the third symbol display device 81 with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the fluctuation effect is started.

  When special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223 f and special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223 g receive stop type command of the first special symbol and stop type command of the second special symbol transmitted from main controller 110 (See S4301 in FIG. 61) and when the setting of the stop type in the third symbol display device 81 is made (see S5112 in FIG. 69). When the special view 1 stop type selection flag 223 f or the special view 2 stop type selection flag 223 g is turned on, the stop type is based on the stop type (big hit type in the case of big hit) extracted from the received stop type command. It is determined.

  The effect counter 223 h is a counter used for selection of a fluctuation pattern, selection of various effects, and the like. The effect counter 223h is formed of a 1-byte loop counter updated in the range of 0 to 198. For example, each time the main process (see FIG. 59) is executed, the value is incremented by one and updated. Be done.

  The additional effect counter 223i is a counter used for selecting a fluctuation pattern, selecting various effects, and the like. The additional effect counter 223i is formed of a 1-byte loop counter updated in the range of 0 to 198. For example, a value is added by 1 each time the main process (see FIG. 59) is executed. It will be updated.

  The state setting area 223 j is a storage area in which information according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is stored. Information corresponding to the state of the pachinko machine 10 indicated by the status command is stored in the status setting area 223 j every time the status command output from the main control device 110 is received (see S 4405 in FIG. 62). . More specifically, a storage area of 2 bits is allocated to the state setting area 223j, and whether or not it is a high probability state of a special symbol in order from the upper bit, whether it is a high probability state of a normal symbol or not A value indicating that is stored. For example, if the value of the state setting area 223j is "11B", it means that it is a definite variation state (high probability state of special symbol and high probability state of normal symbol), and if it is "10B", it is latent It means that it is a firm state (high probability state of special symbol and low probability state of normal symbol). On the other hand, if it is "00H", it means that it is a normal state (a low probability state of a special symbol, and a low probability state of a normal symbol).

  By updating the status setting area 223 j in accordance with the status command output from the main control unit 110, the voice lamp control unit 113 can accurately grasp the status of the pachinko machine 10.

  The remaining-time short-time area 223 k is a storage area for storing the remaining number of times of the high probability state of the normal symbol. The remaining short time area 223 k is updated to the number notified by the remaining short time number command output each time the value of the time reduction counter 203 f is updated in the main control unit 110 (see S 4802 in FIG. 66). As a result, the value stored in the remaining short time area 223 k can be updated in synchronization with the value of the short time counter 203 f of the main control unit 110. It can be made to coincide with the actual number of times the main control unit 110 updates.

  The special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 223m and the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223n indicate the corresponding fluctuation time when the respective fluctuation display is set (executed) in the fluctuation display setting process (see S4113 in FIG. 69). Each time a value is set and various counter update processing (see S4111 in FIG. 72) is executed, each value is decremented by 1 (see S5402 and S5404 in FIG. 72). The period from the reception of the special view temporary stop command from main controller 110 to the reception of the special view 1 restart command is the case where various counter update processing (see S4111 in FIG. 72) is executed. Also, the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 223m is configured not to be decremented by one.

  Then, in the temporary stop related process (see S4220 in FIG. 67), which is executed when it is determined that the temporary stop related command is received in the command determination process (see S4112 in FIG. 60), the remaining fluctuation time is calculated. Reference is made (see S4903 in FIG. 67).

  The remaining fluctuation time information storage area 223o is a storage area for storing information indicating the remaining period of the rush period, that is, the remaining time of the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol. In this remaining fluctuation time information storage area 223o, remaining period information (period A to period C) for indicating the remaining fluctuation time of the temporarily stopped first special symbol fluctuation display is set, and the temporarily stopped first special Remaining period information stored when setting additional effects in the case of resuming fluctuation display of a symbol is referred to.

  The card notification completion flag 223 q is a flag for indicating whether or not the card forgetting alert screen (see FIG. 10A) is displayed (notified), and is turned on when the card forget alert screen is displayed. It is set.

  The card notification enable flag 223s is a flag indicating whether or not the card forget warning alert screen (see FIG. 10A) can be displayed (notified), and the card forget alert alert screen can be displayed. It is set to on when the following conditions are met.

  The rush display completion flag 223t is a flag for indicating whether or not rush game has been started in the state where the latent state is set, and a rush rush screen showing that rush game has been started (see FIG. 7). When (a) and FIG. 8 (b) are displayed, it is set to ON.

  The prize ball number counter 223 u is a counter for continuously measuring the number of prize balls after the jackpot game is started, and the prize ball number during the period in which the game state advantageous to the player is continuously set. The numbers are configured to be cumulative. Specifically, when it is determined in the hit-related process (S4216 in FIG. 63) that the winning ball command has been received (S4505 in FIG. 63: Yes), the value corresponding to the received winning ball command is added ( S4506 in FIG.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to be able to obtain a large number of prize balls in the small hit game in addition to the big hit game, so the small according to the value of the award ball number counter 223u It is configured to be able to execute a card forgetting alert display after the end of the winning game or after the end of the jackpot game in which a small number of rounds is set.

  The power-off flag 223y is a flag used to determine whether a momentary power failure has occurred. The power-off flag 223y receives a power-off command from the main control device 110, and is set to ON before the power-off process is performed (see S4117 in FIG. 59). After that, since the RAM 223 is a volatile memory, all information in the RAM 223 disappears after a predetermined time (100 milliseconds) has elapsed. Therefore, if the power-off flag 223y is on (see 4008: Yes in FIG. 58) in the startup processing (see FIG. 58) of the audio lamp control device 113, the power-off flag 223y is set to on and then constant. This is a case where the voice lamp control device 113 has started up before the time (100 milliseconds) has elapsed, that is, there is a momentary power failure. In this case, all the information in the RAM 223 is not erased, and unnecessary information (or information which is incomplete because only a part of the information is erased) remains in the work area of the RAM 223. Since there is a case, the information in the work area of the RAM 223 is cleared (see S4009 in FIG. 58). As a result, processing is not executed based on unnecessary (or incomplete) information, so that each processing of the audio lamp control device 113 can be operated normally.

  The other memory area 223z is provided as an area for storing data other than the above-described data, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 24 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. As shown in FIG. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

  The output side of the audio lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 238, and the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 are connected via the bus line 240 to the output side of the input port 238. . The image controller 237 is connected to a resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236, and to an output port 239 via a bus line 241. In addition, the third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 is a symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if it is another model in which the lottery probability of becoming a big hit of a special symbol and the number of prize balls paid out in one big symbol of a special symbol are different. The display control device 114 is converted into a common part and the cost is reduced because there are models of the same specifications.

  In the following, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

  First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 incorporates an instruction pointer 231a, reads out and fetches an instruction code stored at an address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processing according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is configured to be reset by the power supply 115 immediately after the power is turned on (including the recovery from a power failure; the same applies hereinafter), and when the system reset is canceled, the instruction pointer 231a Is automatically set to "0000H" by the hardware of the MPU 231. Then, each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. When the MPU 231 executes a setting instruction of the instruction pointer, the value of the pointer designated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

  Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided with a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. The character ROM 234 provided for storing data of an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is not stored.

  Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is configured by a NAND flash memory 234a which can achieve a large area with a small area. Thus, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. When the control program and the like are stored in the character ROM 234, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, NAND flash memories generally have a problem that the reading speed is slow particularly when random access is performed. For example, in the case of reading data arranged in a row in a plurality of pages, data of the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed, but an address is specified for reading the first page of data. It takes a long time to output data after In addition, when reading out non-consecutive data, a large amount of time is required each time the data is read out. As described above, since the speed for reading the NAND flash memory is low, if the MPU 231 directly reads the control program from the character ROM 234 and executes various processes, it takes time to read the instruction that configures the control program. In the case where a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control apparatus 114 may be degraded.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234 a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. Store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes in accordance with the control program stored in the work RAM 233. The work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM) as described later, and the data read / write is performed at high speed. Therefore, the MPU 231 can read an instruction constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects using the third symbol display device 81.

  The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores control programs executed by the MPU 231 and data of an image displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 after system reset release via the bus line 240, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234 described later to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 stores image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 of the character ROM 234, which will be described later, into a resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237. Transfer to the normal video RAM 236.

  The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing the NAND flash memory 234a, the ROM controller 234b, the buffer RAM 234c, and the NOR ROM 234d.

  The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and fixed value data for driving most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 for storing and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (such as a character) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the NAND flash memory is characterized in that a large storage capacity can be obtained with a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. Thereby, in the pachinko machine, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of 2 gigabytes, for example, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated in order to further enhance the player's interest.

  The NAND flash memory 234a can also store a control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 while storing a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2. In this manner, the control program and fixed value data are provided to store data of an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without providing and storing a dedicated program ROM as in a conventional gaming machine. Since the character ROM 234 can be stored, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  The ROM controller 234 b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234, and for example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234 a or the like. Are read out and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  Here, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits into which erroneous data has been written) are generated when data is written, or a defective data block in which data can not be written is generated. To Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and is known to read and write data to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding the defective data block. Execute conversion of data address of.

  Since error correction is performed on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit by the ROM controller 234b, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, the error correction is performed based on the erroneous data. Thus, it can be suppressed that the MPU 231 performs processing or the image controller 237 generates various images.

  Further, since the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a is analyzed by the ROM controller 234b and the access to the defective data block is avoided, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 are different defective data in the individual NAND flash memory 234a. The character ROM 234 can be easily accessed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234 a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the complexity of access control to the character ROM 234.

  The buffer RAM 234 c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234 a. When an address allocated to the character ROM 234 is designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b causes one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the designated address. It is determined whether or not the data of (1) is set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, if it is not set, data of one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the designated address is read out from the NAND type flash memory 234a (or NOR type ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. Do. Then, the ROM controller 234 b performs known error correction processing, and then outputs data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  The buffer RAM 234c is configured by two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b outputs data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside, for example, using the other bank with data set in one bank, or designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. Processing for transferring and setting one page of data including data corresponding to the specified address from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and setting the data corresponding to the address designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 to the other The processing of reading out from the bank and outputting it to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, responsiveness in reading of the character ROM 234 can be improved.

  The NOR type ROM 234 d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234 and has a much smaller capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND type flash memory 234 a for the purpose of complementing the NAND type flash memory 234 a. ) Is configured. Among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, programs not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the NOR ROM 234d. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

  The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. As a result, various controls can be performed in the display control device 114. The first program storage area 234d1 should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released within the range of the capacity of one bank (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) of the buffer RAM 234c in this boot program. From the instruction, a predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) of instructions) are stored. The number of boot program instructions stored in the first program storage area 234d1 may be smaller than the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and may be appropriately set according to the specification of the display control device 114. It may be.

  When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware, and designates the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is designated to the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d is used as one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. And the corresponding data (instruction code) is output to the MPU 231.

  When the MPU 231 fetches an instruction code received from the character ROM 234, it executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, increments the instruction pointer 231a by one, and transmits the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. To specify. Then, while the address specified by the bus line 240 is an address indicating the program stored in the NOR ROM 234 d, the ROM controller 234 b of the character ROM 234 selects from among the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234 c from the NOR ROM 234 d. The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234 c and output to the MPU 231.

  Here, in the present embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program that should be processed first by the MPU 231 after system reset is released are NOR ROM 234d. The reason for storing in is as follows. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time from the specification of the address to the output of the data in the reading of the first page of data. There's a problem.

  When all control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. In this case, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a lot of time to read and set it in the buffer RAM 234c, so the MPU 231 specifies an address "0000H" and then an instruction corresponding to the address "0000H". It consumes a lot of latency before receiving the code. Therefore, the time taken to activate the MPU 231 becomes long, and as a result, there arises a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, since the NOR ROM 234 d is a memory that can read data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions are stored in the NOR ROM 234 d from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after system reset release. When the address "0000H" is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately uses the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d as the buffer RAM 234c. And the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive an instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", and can start the MPU 231 in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be immediately started.

  The boot program is a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program excluding the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. A fixed amount data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control program, a predetermined amount (for example, a capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) program storage area of the work RAM 233 It is programmed to be transferred to the data table storage area 233b and the data table storage area 233b. Then, the MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after releasing the system reset, and the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 A predetermined amount of data is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a while using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c.

  Here, as described above, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is configured to have a capacity equivalent to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, so the address of the internal bus is specified as "0000H". When the boot program of the first program storage area 234d1 is set to the buffer RAM 234c in response to the above, the boot program is set to only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c The transfer process can be performed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, after the transfer process, the process of resetting the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 to the buffer RAM 234c is unnecessary, so the time for the boot process can be shortened.

  When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the boot pointer stored in the program storage area 233a It is programmed to set a first predetermined address. Thus, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by the predetermined amount by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a becomes the first predetermined one of the program storage area 233a. Set to street address.

  Therefore, when a predetermined amount of program among the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads the control program stored in the program storage area 233a, and Various processing can be performed. That is, the MPU 231 reads out the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a instead of reading out the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetching the instruction, and fetches the instruction. And perform various processes. As described later, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  Here, the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 include the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, among the control programs transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, the remaining boot programs are the boot programs stored in the first program storage area 234d1. It is programmed to be included, and is programmed to set the instruction pointer 231a with the top address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

  Thus, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. Run the remaining boot programs included in the control program.

  In this remaining boot program, all remaining control programs not transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, a display data table, transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control program are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. At the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, the initial setting process (see S6002 in FIG. 73) executed after the boot process (see S6001 in FIG. 73) stored in the program storage area 233a as the second predetermined address is completed. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

  By executing this remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. The various control programs are used to execute various processes.

  Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after system reset is released. Thus, the MPU 231 can perform various controls by reading the control program from the work RAM 233 configured by a DRAM having a high reading speed. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects using the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, as described above, without storing all boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234 d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after system reset release, and the remaining boot programs are Even when stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, since the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the extremely small capacity NOR ROM 234 d, the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can.

  The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and causes the third symbol display device 81 to display the drawn image at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image of one frame based on a later-described drawing list (see FIG. 30) transmitted from the MPU 231, and one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c described later The image drawn in the buffer is displayed, and the image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by outputting the image information for one frame previously expanded in the other frame buffer to the third symbol display device 81. . The image controller 237 performs the drawing process of the image for one frame and the display process of the image for one frame, and the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) Parallel processing in

  The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter, referred to as “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds for which the image rendering process for one frame is completed. Every time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, it executes V interrupt processing (see FIG. 75B), and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next frame. According to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of the image for the next one frame and also executes the process of displaying the image developed by the drawing on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt processing in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237, and instructs the image controller 237 to draw, so the image controller 237 performs image drawing processing and display. An instruction to draw an image can be received from the MPU 231 every processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image when the image drawing process or the display process is not completed, so that drawing of a new image is started during image drawing, or It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  The image controller 237 also executes processing for transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 based on a transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and transfer data information included in the drawing list.

  The drawing of the image is performed using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, before drawing is performed, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on an instruction from the MPU 231.

  Here, in general, the NAND flash memory makes it easy to increase the capacity of the ROM, but the reading speed is slower compared to other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to Then, as described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled to be resident without being overwritten.

  Thus, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws the image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed at the time of image drawing. The time required for the reading can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In particular, the resident video RAM 235 allows image data of an image to be displayed frequently and image data of an image to be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control unit 110 or the display control unit 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, it is possible to maintain high responsiveness until the third symbol display device 81 displays an image.

  When the display control device 114 renders an image using image data nonresident in the resident video RAM 235, it is necessary for rendering from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the rendering is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer image data. As described later, although the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 is used for image drawing, there is a possibility that the image data may be deleted by overwriting, but at the time of image drawing, the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed It is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured in the above, and the time required for the reading can be omitted, so that the drawing of the image is immediately performed and the drawn image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 it can.

  Further, by storing the image data also in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so it is not necessary to prepare a large capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, cost increase due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

  The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of 132 kilobytes of SRAM, which is a capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

  The transfer instruction of the image data that the MPU 231 sends to the image controller 237 according to the transfer instruction and the transfer data information of the drawing list is the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (storage source final address), information of transfer destination (information indicating to which of resident video RAM 235 and normal video RAM 236 to transfer), and start of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) Address is included. The data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

  The image controller 237 reads data of one block from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 according to the various information of the transfer instruction and temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a. When the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used, the buffer RAM 237a The image data stored in the image data is transferred to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, the process is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source final address is transferred from the storage source head address indicated by the transfer instruction.

  Thereby, the image data read out from the character ROM 234 is stored temporarily in the buffer RAM 237a, and thereafter, the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can. Thus, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the ordinary video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of image data, the video RAMs 235 and 236 can not be used for image rendering processing, and as a result, the image rendering or the required time is taken. The third symbol display device 81 can be prevented from not being displayed in time.

  In addition, since transfer from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is performed by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the regular video RAM 236 perform the image drawing process and the third symbol display. It is possible to easily determine a period of time unused for display processing on the device 81, and simplification of the processing can be achieved.

  The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 continues to be held without being overwritten while the power is on, and the power-on main image area 235a, the back image area 235c, the character pattern area In addition to the error message image area 235f, at least a power-on fluctuation image area 235b and a third symbol area 235d are provided.

  The power-on main image area 235a is a power-on main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until all image data to be resident is stored in the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is an area for storing corresponding data. In the power-on variation image area 235b, the game is started by the player while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the upper first ball entry port 64b1 or the lower first is entered. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to a power-on fluctuation image that displays the lottery result performed in the main control unit 110 by fluctuation effect when the ball entering the ball entrance 64b2 is detected.

  When the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started, the MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235 a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S6003 and S6004 in FIG. 73).

  Here, the power-on fluctuation image will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 25 shows the power-on display on the third symbol display device 81 while the display control device 114 is transferring image data to be stored from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 immediately after power-on. It is explanatory drawing explaining a time image.

  When the display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235 a and the power-on fluctuation image area 235 b immediately after power on. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the transfer of the remaining image data is being performed, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to generate the main power-on time shown in FIG. The image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  At this time, when receiving the display variation pattern command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110 which is the command to start variation, the display control device 114 displays FIG. As shown in Fig. 25 (c), the power-on fluctuation image of the symbol "○" on the display screen of the main image at power-on and at the bottom right of the screen, as shown in FIG. The power-on fluctuation image of the "x" symbol is alternately displayed repeatedly during the fluctuation period at the same position as the symbol. Then, based on the variation pattern command from the main control unit 110 and the stop type command, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the audio lamp control unit 113 cause the drawing of the lottery performed by the main control unit 110. The result is judged, and the image shown in FIG. 25 (b) is displayed for a certain period of time after the stop of the fluctuation effect when it is “big hit of the special symbol”, and is “out of special symbol” in FIG. The image to be shown is displayed for a certain period of time after the change effect is stopped.

  The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the main image area 235a when the power is turned on for the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. At power on, it instructs to draw the main image. As a result, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person in charge of the hall may confirm the main image when the power is turned on displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. be able to. Also, since the player can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235 While transferring data from character ROM 234 to resident video RAM 235, wait until transfer of image data to resident video RAM 235 is completed without fear that the operation has stopped. Can.

  In addition, also in the operation check in the factory etc. at the time of manufacture, the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately when the power is turned on, and the third symbol display device 81 starts the operation without problems by the power on. It is possible to immediately confirm that this is the case, and further, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed as the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the efficiency of the operation check.

  In addition, the player starts playing while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, and the ball is detected in the upper first ball entry port 64b1 or the lower first ball entrance 64b2. If it is determined that the power-on change image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on change image resident in the power-on change image area 235b, the image shown in FIGS. 25 (b) and 25 (c) is generated. Are instructed from the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 so that the symbols are alternately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, it is possible to perform simple fluctuation presentation using the power-on fluctuation image. Therefore, even while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can surely confirm that the lottery has been performed by the simple fluctuation effect.

  Further, at the stage when the main image at power on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data corresponding to the fluctuation effect image at power on is already resident in the power on fluctuation image area 235b. When the ball is detected in the upper first entrance 64b1 or the lower first entrance 64b2 while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display 81, the corresponding variation effect is displayed in the third The symbol display device 81 can be displayed immediately.

  Returning to FIG. 24, the description will be continued. The rear image area 235 c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Here, with reference to FIG. 26, the range of the back side image and the back side image stored in the back side image area 235c among the back side images will be described. FIG. 26 is an explanatory view for explaining the four types of back side images and the range of the back side images stored in the back side image area 235 c of the resident video RAM 235 for each back side image; FIG. 26 (b) shows the back side B to D corresponding to the “forest stage”, the “river stage”, and the “empty stage” with respect to the back side A corresponding to the “mid-town stage” . Moreover, FIG. 27 is shown with respect to the back surface E corresponding to an "island stage."

  As the back surface images corresponding to the back surfaces A to D, as shown in FIG. 26, an image longer in the horizontal direction than the display area displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is prepared in the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 draws an image so that the back image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while scrolling the image horizontally from left to right.

  The images prepared on the respective back faces A to D (hereinafter, referred to as "scroll images") are configured such that the back face images are continuous at positions a and c. The image between the position c and the position d and the image between the position a and the position a ′ are composed of images corresponding to the horizontal width of the display area, and the image between the position c and the position d Is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area, and then an image between the position a and the position a 'is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area, and the third symbol display device 81 is smoothed. The back image is scrolled by a series of connections.

  When the change of the back surface type is determined based on the back surface type selection table (not shown) and the stage is changed to "town stage", "forest stage", "river stage", or "empty stage", the MPU 231 The image controller 237 is controlled such that the image on the initial position is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by setting the position between the position a and the position a 'of the corresponding back image first as the initial position of the display area. . Then, the display area is moved from left to right with respect to the scroll image as time passes, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and display is further performed. When the area reaches the image between the position c and the position d, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is again displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as an image from the position a to the position a ′. Therefore, it is possible to cause the third symbol display device 81 to repeatedly scroll and display the image between the position a and the position c in a smooth connection so as to flow in the left direction.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 27, the back image on the back E is the third symbol in the order of (a) → (b) → (c) → (a) →... Of FIG. It is displayed on the display device 81. Specifically, in the back E, the image of the mountain that soars on the island, the image of the sandy beach that spreads to the foot of the mountain, and the image of the sea surrounding the island are the third pattern in a state where the displayed position is fixed. It is displayed on the display device 81. On the other hand, the color of the sky image that spreads over the mountain changes with time.

  When the stage is changed to the “island stage”, a back surface image shown in FIG. 27A is displayed as an initial back surface image of the back surface E. In the back image shown in FIG. 27A, an orange sky indicating a morning glow is displayed. Then, as the time passes, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from orange to bright blue, and after a predetermined time passes, the back image shown in FIG. 27B is displayed. In the back image shown in FIG. 27B, a bright blue sky indicating day is displayed. Next, as the time passes, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from bright blue to black, and after a predetermined time passes, the rear image shown in FIG. 27C is displayed. In the rear image shown in FIG. 27C, a black sky indicating night is displayed. After that, as time passes, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from black to white and gradually to orange. Then, after a predetermined time has elapsed, the back image shown in FIG. 27 (a) is returned to, and the back image of FIGS. 27 (a) to 27 (c) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 again.

  Next, in each rear surface image, the range of the rear surface image stored in the rear surface image area 235c will be described. As shown in FIG. 26A, the back surface A corresponding to the town stage which is the initial stage is the entire surface of the back surface A, that is, all the image data corresponding to the position a to the position d is the back surface of the resident video RAM 235 It is stored in the image area 235c. Usually, the game is often performed without changing the stage while displaying the initial stage "town stage", so the image data of the back surface A corresponding to the frequently displayed "town stage" is displayed. By making all the data resident in the rear image area 235 c, the number of data accesses to the character ROM 234 can be reduced. Thus, the processing load on the display control device 114 can be reduced.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 26 (b), the back surface B corresponding to the "Mori stage", the back surface C corresponding to the "kawa stage", and the back surface D corresponding to the "empty stage" That is, only the image data corresponding to the image between the position a and the position b is stored in the rear image area 235 c of the resident video RAM 235. Also, the back surface E corresponding to the island stage includes FIG. 27 (a), and the image data corresponding to the back image between FIG. 27 (a) and FIG. 27 (b) excluding FIG. Is stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 during the start-up process of FIG.

  Here, in order to change the back image immediately, it is ideal to keep the entire range of image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 for all back images, but if doing so, the resident video RAM 235 As a very large amount of RAM must be used, this may lead to increased costs.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the initial position of the rear surface image to be displayed first when the stage is changed is in the range from the position a to the position a '(or the range in FIG. 27 (a) to (b) Image data corresponding to the image between position a and position b (or the image between FIG. 27 (a) and (b)) including its initial position, and the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 Even if the character ROM 234 is configured with the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the back surface of the resident video RAM 235 is determined when the change of the stage is determined by the lottery at the start of the change. By using the image data resident in the image area 235c, the initial position of the back surfaces B to D can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately Can, also, it is possible to display while changing the scrolling display or color over time. In addition, since only image data corresponding to an image in a partial range is stored for the back faces B to D, an increase in storage capacity of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed, and an increase in cost can be suppressed.

  In addition, after the image of the initial position is displayed, the back surfaces B to D face the range from position a to position b from left to right using the image data resident in the back image area 235 c of the resident video RAM 235 The range from the position a to the position b is set so that the image data corresponding to the image from the position b ′ to the position d can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 while scrolling. As a result, while scrolling the range from position a to position b, the image data from position b 'to position d can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 After scrolling the range from the position a to the position b, the image data corresponding to the back image stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay is used to scroll the range from the position b ′ to the third position. It can be displayed on the symbol display device 81.

  Similarly, after the image of the initial position is displayed, the back surface E displays the images of FIGS. 27A and 27B using the image data resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. 27 (b) to 27 (c) and 27 (c) to 27 (a) can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 as shown in FIG. The range of (b) is set. As a result, while the images in FIGS. 27 (a) and 27 (b) are displayed, the image data corresponding to the images in FIGS. 27 (b) to 27 (c) and 27 (c) Since the image can be transferred to the video RAM 236, the images of FIGS. 27 (a) and 27 (b) are displayed using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and then stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay. 27 (b)-(c) and 27 (c)-(a) are sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time using the image data corresponding to the back image. be able to.

  In the back surfaces B to E, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is stored in a sub-area dedicated to the back image provided in the image storage area 236 a (see FIG. 24) of the normal video RAM 236. As a result, since the rear image data stored in the rear image dedicated sub area is not overwritten by other image data, the rear image can be reliably displayed.

  Further, on the back faces B to D, the image data stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 correspond to the image between the position b 'and the position b. Image data is stored redundantly. Then, under the control of the image controller 237 by the MPU 231, the image up to the position b is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and then the normal video By displaying the image from the position b ′ on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the RAM 236, the back image is scrolled and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in a smooth connection. ing.

  Furthermore, when the MPU 231 controls the image controller 237 to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as the display area using the image data of the normal video RAM 236 as the display area, then, The MPU 231 controls the image controller 237 so that the image between the position a and the position a 'is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 as the display area. Do. Thereby, the third symbol display device 81 can be repeatedly scrolled and displayed in a smooth connection so that the image between the position a to the position c flows in the left direction.

  Returning to FIG. 24, the description will be continued. The third symbol area 235 d is an area for residence of the third symbol used in the fluctuation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-described ten types of main symbols assigned with the numbers "0" to "9", which are the third symbols, reside. As a result, when the third symbol display device 81 performs the fluctuation effect, it is not necessary to read out the image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. It is possible to start fluctuating production quickly. Therefore, after the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 occurs, in the first symbol display device 37, the third symbol display device despite the fact that the fluctuation effect is started. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which the change effect is not immediately started at 81.

  In the third symbol area 235d, characters such as a main symbol with a rear symbol such as a wooden box, a character with a rear symbol, a flannel, a helmet, etc. as a main symbol without the numbers “0” to “9” Image data corresponding to a main symbol consisting of an attached symbol imitating the symbol is also resident. These image data are used for the demonstration effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start winning is not started even if a predetermined time has elapsed since one variation effect was stopped. Be Thereby, when the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, in the demonstration effect, a main symbol not numbered is displayed as the third symbol. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demonstration state by visually recognizing the main symbols without numbers from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.

  The character symbol area 235 e is an area for storing image data corresponding to a character symbol used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In the pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "boy", "old man" and "girl" are displayed according to various effects, and data corresponding to these are displayed in the character pattern area 235e. Since the display control device 114 changes the character pattern based on the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 by being resident, the display control device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, and is used for residence. The image controller 237 can draw a predetermined image by reading out image data previously resident in the character pattern area 235 e of the video RAM 235. As a result, since it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, even if the character ROM 234 uses the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, it is possible to change the character pattern immediately.

  The error message image area 235 f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In this pachinko machine 10, for example, when the sound lamp control device 113 detects a vibration from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back of the game board 13, the sound lamp control device 113 generates a vibration error. The display control unit 114 is notified by an error command. Further, even if the occurrence of another error is detected by the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 notifies the occurrence of the error to the display control device 114 together with the error type by an error command. When the display control device 114 receives an error command, the display control device 114 is configured to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message corresponding to the received error.

  Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error from the viewpoint of the player's fraud prevention and the player's protection against the error. In the pachinko machine 10, since the image data corresponding to various error messages are resident in advance in the error message image area 235f, the display control device 114 generates an error message of the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out the image data previously resident in the image area 235f, the image controller 237 can immediately draw each error message image. Thus, there is no need to sequentially read out the image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even when using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed as the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is received after receiving the error command. It can be displayed immediately.

  The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated as needed, and at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c are provided.

  The image storage area 236 a is an area for storing image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub areas, and for each sub area, the type of image data stored in the sub area is predetermined.

  Among the image data not required to be resident in the resident video RAM 235, the MPU 231 is required to render image data required for subsequent rendering of the image from the character ROM 234 to the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. The image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub area to be stored. Thereby, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a designated predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

  The transfer instruction of the image data is performed by including transfer data information in a drawing list described later in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. As a result, the MPU 231 can issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction only by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby reducing the processing load.

  The first frame buffer 236 b and the second frame buffer 236 c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image of one frame drawn according to an instruction from the MPU 231 into one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby allowing one frame of the frame buffer While expanding the image and expanding the image in one of the frame buffers, the other frame buffer reads the image information of one frame that has been expanded first, and sends a drive signal to the third symbol display device 81. By transmitting the image information, the third symbol display device 81 executes processing for displaying the image for one frame.

  As described above, by providing two of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c as frame buffers, the image controller 237 develops an image for one frame drawn in one frame buffer at the same time. The image for one frame expanded earlier is read out from the other frame buffer, and the image for one frame read out can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Then, with the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame to display the image on the third symbol display device 81, the drawing processing of the image for one frame is Every 20 milliseconds for completion, either the first frame buffer 236 b or the second frame buffer 236 c is alternately interchanged and designated by the MPU 231.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed, and one frame The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. Thereby, the image information of the image developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. Ru.

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Be done. Thereby, the image information of the image developed in the second frame buffer 236c earlier can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. Ru. Thereafter, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds between the frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame and the frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. By alternately replacing and designating images, it is possible to continuously perform display processing of an image of one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing processing of drawing an image of one frame.

  The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing work data and flags used when the MPU 231 executes various control programs. Configured The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a clock counter 233h, stored image data determination It has at least a flag 233i, a drawing target buffer flag 233j, a rear image change flag 233w, a rear image determination flag 233x, a demonstration display flag 233y, and a final display flag 233z.

  The program storage area 233a is an area for storing a control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. When all control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is configured by the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device 81 Can be used to easily carry out diversified and complicated renditions.

  The data table storage area 233b is a display data table describing display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as time elapses with respect to one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and display data It is an area where transfer data information of image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among transfer image data used in one effect displayed by the table and a transfer data table defining transfer timing are stored.

  These data tables are normally stored as a type of fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is configured by the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device By using 81, it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated rendition.

  Here, the details of the various data tables will be described. First, one display data table is prepared for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. For example, a change effect, an opening effect Display data tables corresponding to, round presentation, ending presentation, and demonstration presentation are prepared.

  The fluctuation effect is an effect started in the third symbol display device 81 when the display fluctuation pattern command from the sound lamp control device 113 is received. In addition, when the fluctuation pattern command for display is received, the stop type command for display indicating the stop type of the fluctuation effect is also received. For example, when the change effect is started, if the stop type of the change effect is out, the stop symbol indicating the end is finally displayed stop, while the stop type of the change effect is big hit A, big hit B If it is either, the stop symbol which shows each jackpot is finally displayed stopped. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbol in the fluctuation effect, and can easily determine the game value to be awarded according to the jackpot type.

  The opening effect is an effect for notifying the player that the pachinko machine 10 is shifted to the special gaming state from now on and the large opening which is normally closed is repeatedly opened, and the round effect starts from now on This is an effect for notifying the player of the number of rounds to be played. The ending effect is an effect for notifying the player of the end of the special game state.

  In addition, as described above, the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next fluctuation effect accompanying the start winning is not started even if a predetermined time has passed since the one fluctuation effect was stopped. While the third symbol consisting of the main symbols not numbered from "0" to "9" is stopped and displayed, only the back image is changed. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the person in charge of the hall can recognize that the game is not being performed in the pachinko machine 10.

  The data table storage area 233b stores one display data table corresponding to the opening effect, the round effect, the ending effect, and the demonstration effect. In addition, as for the fluctuation display data table which is a display data table for fluctuation presentation, if there are 32 fluctuation demonstration patterns to be set, one table is prepared for one fluctuation presentation pattern, and a total of 32 tables are prepared.

  Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 28 is a schematic view schematically showing an example of the variable display data table in the display data table. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address in which the time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) in which the image for one frame is displayed in the third symbol display device 81 is represented as one unit The contents (drawing contents) of an image for one frame are specified in detail.

  In the drawing content, for each sprite that is a display object constituting an image of one frame, the type of the sprite is specified, and according to the type of the sprite, display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, semitransparent Drawing information such as a value, α blending information, color information, and filter specification information for causing the third symbol display device 81 to draw a sprite is defined.

  The type of sprite is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 where the sprite should be displayed. The enlargement factor is information for specifying the enlargement factor to the standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the enlargement factor. Note that if the enlargement ratio is larger than 100%, the sprite is displayed enlarged than the standard size, and if the enlargement ratio is smaller than 100%, the sprite is displayed smaller than the standard size Be done.

  The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when rotating and displaying the sprite. The semitransparent value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the semitransparent value, the image is displayed so that the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The alpha blending information is information for specifying a known alpha blending coefficient used when performing superposition processing with another sprite. Color information is information for specifying the color tone of a sprite to be displayed. The filter specification information is information for specifying an image filter to be applied to the sprite when drawing the specified sprite.

  In the variable display data table, as drawing contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address, one back image, nine third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2, ...), light in the image Drawing information for each sprite, such as an effect expressing insertion of a character, a character used for various effects such as a boy image and a character, is defined for each address. Note that one or more pieces of information regarding effects and characters are defined in accordance with the content to be displayed in the frame.

  Here, the display position of the back image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the magnification, rotation angle, semi-transparency value, alpha blending information, color information and filter designation information Since the variation display data table is constant, only the back surface type, which is information for specifying the type of the back surface image, is defined. This back surface type is the back surface A to E corresponding to the stage selected by the player (one of the "town center stage", "forest stage", "river stage", "empty stage" and "island stage"). Information for specifying whether to display one or displaying a back image different from the back surfaces A to E is described. Moreover, when specifying to display the back surface image different from the back surfaces A to E, the back surface type is also described together with information specifying which back surface image to be displayed.

  When it is specified that one of the back surfaces A to E is displayed according to the back surface type, the MPU 231 specifies a back surface image corresponding to a stage determined by lottery among the back surfaces A to E as a drawing target. In addition, the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame is specified as time passes. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a back surface image different from the back surfaces A to E, the back surface image to be displayed is specified from the back surface type.

  In the present embodiment, only the back surface type is defined as the drawing content of the back surface image in the display data table, but instead, the back surface type and the range of the back surface image corresponding to the back surface type And position information indicating whether or not to be displayed. The position information may be, for example, information indicating an elapsed time after the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame based on the elapsed time after the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information is displayed.

  Further, the position information may be information indicating an elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started. In this case, the MPU 231 displays the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started based on the display database It specifies based on the position of a back surface image, and the elapsed time after drawing of the said image shown by position information (or display of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81) is started.

  Further, the position information is information indicating an elapsed time since the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed according to the back surface type, and drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81 May indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time since the start of the display), and the type information (for example, of the range corresponding to the initial position) of the position information together with the back type and the position information. It is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image is displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time after the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started (Information indicating (1)) may be defined as the drawing content of the rear image. In addition, the position information may not be information indicating an elapsed time, but may be information indicating an address at which a range of a back image to be displayed is stored.

  In the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Symbol type offset information is described as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. The offset information is information representing the difference between the numerals attached to the respective third symbols. Instead of directly identifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is identified by the fact that the display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before and the variation effect to be performed this time The reason is to change according to the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information until a predetermined time elapses from the start of the change, the offset information from the stop symbol of the change effect performed one before is described. Thereby, the fluctuation effect is started from the stop symbol in the immediately preceding fluctuation effect.

  On the other hand, after a predetermined time has passed since the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the audio lamp control device 113 Describe the information. Thereby, the fluctuation effect can be stopped at the stop symbol according to the stop type designated by the main control device 110.

  In addition, since a unique number is attached to each third symbol, the third symbol is the variation symbol in the variation production of one before or the stop symbol according to the stop type designated by the main control device 110. The third symbol to be displayed can be easily specified from the offset information by managing it with the number given to the symbol and representing the offset information with the difference between the digits given to the respective third symbols.

  In addition, in the symbol offset information, the third symbol fluctuates at high speed for the predetermined time that is switched from the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed one before to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect currently performed this time It is set to be the displayed time. While the third symbol is fluctuatingly displayed at high speed, the third symbol is in a state in which it is not visible to the player. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect being performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third symbol is interrupted, the player is not made to recognize the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

  The start address of the display data table “0000H” describes “Start” information indicating the start of the data table, and the final address of the display data table (“02F0H” in the example of FIG. 29) indicates the data table "End" information indicating the end of the Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address "02F0H" in which the "End" information is described, the presentation mode to be specified in the display data table is made to correspond. The drawing contents are described.

  The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control unit 110 and displays the selected The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Then, each time drawing processing for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by one, and the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is next processed based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f. The image content to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 30) to be described later is created. By sending this drawing list to the image controller 237, an instruction to draw that image is given. As a result, the drawing contents are specified in the order defined by the display data table according to the update of the pointer 233f, so the image as defined by the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. The effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233 d instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231 .

  Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is activated every time the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed as in a conventional pachinko machine, with the diversification of effect images Since the processing of the start and execution of a program that is complicated and enormously takes a great deal of load, the processing capability of the display control device 114 may be limited, which may limit the diversification of effect images that can be controlled. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. A variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114.

  Also, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each presentation mode, a display data table buffer corresponding to the presentation mode to be displayed is set, and a drawing list is displayed one frame at a time according to the set data table. The pachinko machine 10 can be created because an effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning. On the other hand, in game machines and the like other than pachinko machines such as pachinko machines, the display contents are changed on the spot based on the user's operation, and therefore the display contents can not be predicted. The display data table corresponding to the presentation mode can not be provided. Thus, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each presentation mode, a display data table buffer according to the presentation mode to be displayed is set, and a drawing list is created for each frame according to the set data table. The configuration to be performed can be realized for the first time based on the configuration in which the pachinko machine 10 determines the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning.

  Next, the details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 29 is a schematic view schematically showing an example of the transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, the resident data among the image data of the sprites used in the effects specified in the display data table Transfer data information for transferring image data not resident in the video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 and its transfer timing are defined.

  If all the image data of the sprites used in the effects specified in the display data table are stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Thereby, the capacity increase of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed.

  The transfer data table corresponds to an address defined in the display data table, and transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as “transfer target image data”) for which transfer should be started at the time indicated by the address. Are described (addresses "0001H" and "0097H" in FIG. 29 correspond). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

  On the other hand, when there is no transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address defined in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transfer corresponding to the address. Null data is defined to mean (corresponding to the address “0002H” in FIG. 29).

  As transfer data information, the start address (storage source start address) and final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) Is included.

  As in the case of the display data table, “Start” information indicating the start of the data table is described in “0000H”, which is the start address of the transfer data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. In “02F0H”), “End” information indicating the end of the data table is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, transfer data information of transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table Is described.

  When MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from main controller 110, the display data table If there is a transfer data table corresponding thereto, the transfer data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b and stored in a transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, every time the pointer 233f is updated, the display content specified in the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 30) to be described later is created. Then, from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite for which transfer should be started at that time is acquired, and the transfer data information is created in the drawing list created. to add.

  For example, in the example of FIG. 29, when the pointer 233f becomes "0001H" or "0097H", the MPU 231 creates transfer data information defined at the relevant address of the transfer data table based on the display data table. It is added to the drawing list, and the drawing list after the addition is sent to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233 f is “0002H”, since the null data is defined at the address “0002H” of the transfer data table, it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start transfer, and the data is generated. The drawing list is sent to the image controller 237 without adding transfer data information to the drawing list.

  When transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from MPU 231, image controller 237 transfers transfer target image data from character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to

  Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information defined in the transfer data table. When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, it is possible to draw a predetermined sprite based on the display data table.

  Thereby, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite designated in the data table. Also, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10, display data is displayed in the display control device 114 according to a command (for example, display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Since the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e in accordance with setting the table in the display data table buffer 233d, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table is The data can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

  Further, in the transfer data table, transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. As a result, transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that processing relating to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in units of sprites, transfer of the image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, an increase in load applied to transfer can be efficiently suppressed.

  The transfer data table has the same data structure as the display data table, and transfers transfer target image data to be started at the time indicated by the address in correspondence with the address defined in the display data table. Since data information is defined, before the image data of a predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the image data is reliably stored in the normal video RAM 236 As described above, since the timing of starting transfer can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, a wide variety of effect images are easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

  The simplified image display flag 233c indicates whether or not to display the power-on images (the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image) shown in FIGS. 25 (a) to 25 (c) on the third symbol display device 81. It is a flag to indicate. After this simple image display flag 233c is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or the power-on change image area 235b of the resident video RAM, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on change image is transferred. , And in the main processing (see FIG. 73) executed by the MPU 231 (see S6005 in FIG. 73). Then, in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an image other than the power-on image when all resident object image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process. It is set to off (see S7605 in FIG. 85 (b)).

  The simplified image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 each time the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S6301 in FIG. 75 (b)). When the image display flag 233c is on, the simplified command determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 75 (b)) and the simplified display setting process (see FIG. 75B) so that the power-on image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. 75 (b) (see S6309) is executed. On the other hand, when the simplified image display flag 233 c is off, command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110. Processing (see FIGS. 76 to 81) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 82 to 84) are performed.

  Also, the simplified image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S7501 in FIG. 85A), and the simplified image display flag 233c is on. Executes resident image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 85B) for transferring resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 because resident target image data not stored in the resident video RAM 235 exists. If the simple image display flag 233c is off, the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 86) for transferring image data necessary for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

  The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to a command or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main controller 110 It is a buffer to The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. The selected display data table is selected and stored in the display data table buffer 233 d. Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233 f one by one, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233 d, the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233 f. A drawing list (see FIG. 30), which will be described later, describes the contents of the instruction for drawing the image for the image. As a result, on the third symbol display device 81, an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed.

  The MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f one by one and, based on the drawing content defined in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, an image for the image controller 237 every frame. A later-described drawing list (see FIG. 30) describing the contents of the drawing instruction is generated. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The transfer data table buffer 233 e is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233 d in response to a command or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main controller 110. Is a buffer for storing The MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b in accordance with storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfers the selected transfer data table. It stores in the data table buffer 233e. When all the image data of the sprite used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233 d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing null data that means that there is no transfer target image data in the transfer data table buffer 233 e.

  Then, the MPU 231 defines transfer data information of transfer target image data defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233 f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233 e while adding the pointer 233 f one by one. (That is, if Null data is not described), the transfer data information is included in a drawing list (see FIG. 30) described later (see FIG. 30) in which the contents of the image drawing instruction to the image controller 237 generated for each frame are described. to add.

  Thereby, when transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from MPU 231, image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute processing to transfer. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, it is necessary for drawing the sprite Image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  Thereby, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite designated in the data table. Also, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The pointer 233 f is an address at which transfer data information of the corresponding drawing content or transfer target image data should be acquired from the display data table and transfer data table respectively stored in the display data table buffer 233 d and the transfer data table buffer 233 e. It is for specifying. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233 f to 0 as the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233 d. Then, the display setting process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds from which the image controller 237 completes the image drawing process for one frame (FIG. 75 (b In S6303), pointer update processing (see S7205 in FIG. 84) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

  The MPU 231 specifies, from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the drawing contents defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f every time the pointer 233f is updated, and a drawing list to be described later. As shown in FIG. 30, transfer data information of image data of a predetermined sprite for which transfer should be started at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data Add information to the drawing list you created.

  As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233 d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233 d. Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, a wide variety of effects can be displayed.

  Also, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is drawn before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table. The image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used in the drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Thereby, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite designated in the data table. Also, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The drawing list area 233g is an image controller for drawing an image of one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a drawing list instructed to 237.

  Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 30 is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image of one frame, and as shown in FIG. 30, a back image to be used for an image of one frame, a third pattern (symbol 1, 1 ···, effects (effect 1, effect 2, ···), characters (character 1, character 2, ···, holding ball number design 1, holding ball number design 2, ···, error The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described for each sprite such as the pattern 1). Further, transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is also described in the drawing list.

  The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (video RAM 235 for residence or video RAM 236 for normal use) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and the information The address is described, and the image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. The detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, semi-transparent value, alpha blending information, color information, and filter designation information. A standard image generated by the image data of the sprite read out from the video RAM is subjected to enlargement / reduction processing according to the enlargement ratio, rotation processing is performed according to the rotation angle, and semitransparent according to the semitransparent value. Processing, combining processing with other sprites according to alpha blending information, tone correction processing according to color information, and filtering processing according to the method specified by that information according to filter specification information After that, an image obtained by performing various processes on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is expanded by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236 b or the second frame buffer 236 c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233 j.

  In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 displays the drawing contents defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the contents of other images to be drawn (for example, a hold for displaying the hold ball number pattern) Generate detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used for drawing an image of one frame based on an image, a warning image notifying of the occurrence of an error, etc., and the detailed information for each sprite Create a drawing list by sorting.

  Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of data of a sprite (display object) are the sprite type specified in the display data table or the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. It is generated accordingly. That is, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 where the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 responds to the sprite type. Thus, it is possible to immediately specify the storage RAM type and the address in which the image data of the sprite is stored, and to easily include the information in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  Further, the MPU 231 is specified in the display data table for other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, semi-transparent value, α blending information, color information and filter specification information) among the detailed information of each sprite. Copy those information as it is.

  Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged on the back side in the order of the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and detailed drawing information for each sprite Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, the detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, then the third symbol (pattern 1, symbol 2, ...), effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of (character 1, character 2, ..., holding ball number symbol 1, holding ball number symbol 2, ..., error symbol 1).

  The image controller 237 executes drawing processing of each sprite in accordance with the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprite in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image of one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be placed closest to the back, and the sprite drawn last can be placed closest to the front.

  When the transfer data information is described in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the MPU 231 transfers the transfer data information (a character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and storage source end address in the ROM 234 and the storage destination start address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a where the transfer target image data is to be stored are added to the end of the drawing list. If the image data is included in the drawing list, the image controller 237 generates an image from a predetermined area (the area indicated by the storage source head address and the storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236.

  The clock counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 sets time data indicating an effect time of an effect to be displayed based on the display data table in accordance with storing of one display data table in the display data table buffer 233 d. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment).

  Then, based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds for which the image drawing process and display process for one frame are completed, the V interrupt process (FIG. 75 (b Every time the display setting process (see) is executed, the clock counter 233h is decremented by one (see S7207 in FIG. 82). As a result, when the value of the clock counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is ended, and performs according to the end of the effect Perform various processing.

  The stored image data discrimination flag 233i stores image data corresponding to the sprite in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for all sprites for which the corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235. It is a flag indicating the storage state indicating whether or not there is.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i is generated by an initial setting process (see S6002 in FIG. 73) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data determination flag 233i generated here is set to "off" which indicates that the storage state for all the sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i is updated when the transfer instruction of transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 86) executed by the MPU 231. It will be. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction has been set is set to “on” which indicates that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236 a. Also, the image data of the other sprites that are to be stored in the sub area of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite always becomes unstored by the image data of the one sprite being stored. So, set the storage state corresponding to other sprites to "off".

  Further, when transferring image data of a sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data discrimination flag 233i and transfers the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether the image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 (see S7713 in FIG. 86). Then, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "off" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, the transfer instruction of the image data is set (see S7714 in FIG. 86). The image controller 237 transfers the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer processing of the image data is canceled. As a result, wasteful transfer of data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, and the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 can be reduced and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. it can.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233 j is a frame buffer (hereinafter referred to as “drawing target buffer”) for expanding an image drawn by the image controller 237 out of two frame buffers (the first frame buffer 236 b and the second frame buffer 236 c). The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the drawing target buffer when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is zero, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified when it is one. Then, information on the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S7802 in FIG. 87).

  Thus, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process of expanding the image drawn on the basis of the drawing list onto the specified drawing object buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out previously developed drawing image information from the frame buffer different from the drawing object buffer simultaneously and in parallel with the drawing processing, and transmits the image to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, display processing for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233 j is updated as the drawing target buffer information is sent to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update should be set to "1" by reversing the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, that is, to "1" when the value is "0", and to "0" when the value is "1". Done by Thereby, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. In addition, transmission of the drawing list is performed by the V-interrupt performed by the MPU 231 based on the V-interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing and display processes for one frame are completed. This processing is performed each time the drawing processing (see S6306 in FIG. 75B) of the processing is performed.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed, and one frame The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. Thereby, the image information of the image developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. Ru.

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Be done. Thereby, the image information of the image developed in the second frame buffer 236c earlier can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. Ru. Thereafter, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds between the frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame and the frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. By alternately replacing and designating images, it is possible to continuously perform display processing of an image of one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing processing of drawing an image of one frame.

  The rear surface image change flag 233 w is a flag for determining whether or not to change the type of the rear surface image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. If the back image change flag 233 w is on, it means that the type of the back image is changed, and if it is off, it means that the change is not performed. The rear image change flag 233 w is set to ON when the rear image change command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 is received (see S 7001 of FIG. 81A). The rear image change flag 233w is referred to in the normal image transfer setting process (see S7709 in FIG. 86), and is set to off when the rear image change process is performed (see S7710 in FIG. 86). As a result, it is possible to display a rear surface image corresponding to the rear surface image change command and the effect mode change command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  The rear image determination flag 233x is a flag indicating the set rear image type. The flag is formed of, for example, 1 byte, and each back type is associated with each bit. If any bit of the back image determination flag 233x is on, it means that the back type corresponding to the on bit is set as the current back type. For example, if the 0th bit of the rear surface image determination flag 233x is on, it means that the rear surface A is set. When the rear surface image change command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 is received, a bit corresponding to the rear surface image notified by the command is set to on (see FIG. 81 (a). See S7002)). At this time, all other bits are set to off. The rear face type currently set can be easily specified by the rear face image determination flag 233x.

  The demonstration display flag 233 y is a flag indicating whether or not a demonstration effect is in progress. If the demonstration display flag 233y is on, it means that demonstration is in progress, and if it is off, it means that demonstration is not in progress. The demonstration display flag 233y is set to ON when the demonstration display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d in the display setting process (see FIG. 82) (see S7221 in FIG. 82), and the demonstration display data table is displayed. Other display data tables are set to OFF when they are set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6505 in FIG. 77 (a), S6705 in FIG. 78 (a), and S6805 in FIG. 78 (b)). (See S6905 in FIG. 79). This demonstration display flag 233y makes it possible to easily determine whether a demonstration effect is currently being performed.

  The finalized display flag 233z is a flag indicating whether or not the finalized display effect is being executed. Here, the finalized display effect refers to an effect of stopping and displaying (finalized display) the stop symbol for a predetermined period (for example, one second) after the fluctuation pattern. If the finalized display flag 233z is on, it means that a static display effect is being performed, and if it is off, it means that the static display effect is not on. The finalized display flag 233z is set to ON when the finalized display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d in the display setting process (see FIG. 82) (S7214 in FIG. 82), and the other than the finalized display data table When another display data table is set to the display data table buffer 233d, it is set to OFF (S6505 in FIG. 77 (a), S6705 in FIG. 78 (a), S6805 in FIG. 78 (b), 79, S6905). It is possible to easily determine whether or not the current display effect is being performed by the finalized display flag 233z.

<About control processing of main controller in the first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly classified into a start-up process activated upon turning on the power, a main process executed after the start-up process, and a timer activated periodically (at intervals of 2 ms in this embodiment) There are interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, timer interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing will be described first, and then start processing And the main processing will be described.

  FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110. The timer interrupt process is, for example, a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, read processing of various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, while reading the states of various switches connected to the main control device 110, the state of the switches is determined to store detection information (winning detection information).

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (479 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by one, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (232 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 Are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Furthermore, the first random number counter C1, the first collision type counter C2, the second collision random number counter C4, and the small hit type counter C5 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, the second per random number counter C4 and the small per type counter C5 are respectively incremented by 1, and their counter values are maximum values (in the present embodiment, When reaching 479, 99, 232, 99, respectively, they are cleared to 0 respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1, C2, C4, and C5 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Next, special symbol variation processing for setting a variation pattern or the like of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed, as well as processing for performing display in the first symbol display device 37 (S104). Thereafter, the start winning process is executed in association with the winning on the first ball entrance 64 (start winning) (S105). In addition, the details of the special symbol variation process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  After the start winning process (S105) is performed, a process for displaying on the second symbol display device (not shown) and a process for passing a ball in the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 are performed. A symbol variation process is executed (S106). The details of the normal symbol variation process (S106) will be described later with reference to FIG. After the normal symbol variation processing is executed, the launch control processing is executed (S108), and the other processing to be periodically executed is executed (S109), and the timer interrupt processing is ended. In the shot control process, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the shot stop switch 51b for stopping the shot is not operated. It is a process of determining on / off of the firing. The main controller 110 instructs the launch controller 112 to launch the ball when the launch of the ball is on.

  First, with reference to FIG. 32, the content of the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 32 is a flow chart showing the contents of the special symbol variation process (S104). When the special symbol variation process (S104) is executed, it is first determined whether the present is a big hit or a small hit (S201), and when it is determined that a big hit is a middle hit or a small hit (S201: Yes) Next, it is determined whether the special view temporary stop flag 203v is set to on (S202). In the process of S202, it is determined whether or not the subtraction of the other special figure fluctuation time during fluctuation is being interrupted by the stop display of one special figure with a symbol indicating a hit. In the process of S202, when it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON (S202: Yes), the display of the first symbol display device 37 corresponding to the temporarily stopped special figure is updated (S203), that is, the processing of causing the first symbol display device 37 to continue the variable display with respect to the special drawing in which the subtraction of the fluctuation time is interrupted, and the present processing is ended. As a result, it is possible to notify the player that the special figure fluctuation is not forcibly stopped.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S201 that the present is a big hit or a small hit (S201: No), the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203m is larger than 0 (that is, the special figure 1 fluctuates If it is determined that the value of special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203m is not larger than 0 (is 0) (S204: No), the first special symbol fluctuation start processing (S208) is executed, and thereafter, the process proceeds to S209 where the variation process relating to the special figure 2 is performed. Details of the first special symbol variation start process (S208) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S204, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203m is larger than 0 (S204: Yes), the first special symbol fluctuation in progress processing (S205) is executed. The first special symbol variation in-execution processing (S205) is to execute the processing in special figure 1 variation, and the detailed description will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the first special symbol variation in progress processing (S205) is finished, next, it is determined whether it is the end timing of variation time (special figure 1 variation time counter 203m is 0) (S206), If it is determined that it is the end timing (S206: Yes), the first special symbol variation stop process (S207) is executed, and then the process proceeds to S209. On the other hand, in the process of S206, when it is determined that it is not the end timing of the fluctuation time (S206: No), the process of S207 is skipped and the process proceeds to S209.

  In the process of S209-S213, the process similar to S204-S207 performed with respect to the special figure 1 is performed. When the process of S209 is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203n is larger than 0 (that is, the special figure 2 is in the process of variation) (S209). If it is determined that the value of the time counter 203n is not larger than 0 (is 0) (S209: No), the second special symbol variation start process (S210) is executed, and then this process is ended. Details of the second special symbol variation start process (S210) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S209 that the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203n is larger than 0 (S209: Yes), the second special symbol fluctuation in progress processing (S211) is executed. The second special symbol variation in-execution process (S211) is to execute the process in the special figure 2 variation, and will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the second special symbol variation in progress processing (S211) is finished, next, it is determined whether it is the end timing of variation time (special figure 2 variation time counter 203n is 0) (S212), If it is determined that it is the end timing (S212: Yes), the second special symbol variation stop process (S213) is executed, and this process is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S212 that it is not the end timing of the fluctuation time (S212: No), the process of S213 is skipped and the present process is ended.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 33, a first special symbol variation start process (S208) which is one process of the special symbol variation process (S104 of FIG. 32) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation start process (S208).

  In the first special symbol variation start process (S208), first, the value (N1) of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d is acquired (S301), and the acquired value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d (N1) It is determined whether or not is a value greater than 0 (S302). In the process of S302, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d is larger than 0 (S302: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d is 1 is subtracted (S303), the ball holding ball number command for notifying the voice ball control device 113 of the ball holding number command showing the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d after subtraction is set (S304) .

  The ball holding ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S2201) of the main process (see FIG. 52) described later executed by the MPU 201, It is transmitted to the lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the holding ball number command, it extracts the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d from the holding ball number command, and extracts the extracted value as the first special symbol holding ball number counter of the RAM 223 Store in 223c. As described above, since the sound lamp control device 113 updates the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223c according to the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the first special symbol of the main control device 110 The value can be updated while being synchronized with the value of the holding ball number counter 203d.

  When the process of S304 is finished, next, the data of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is shifted to the previous data (S305). More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in such a way as holding area 1 → execution area, holding area 2 → holding area 1, holding area 3 → holding area 2, holding area 4 → holding area 3 and so on.

  When the process of S305 is finished, next, the first special symbol jackpot determination process is executed (S306). The first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306) will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. 34, but the value of the first random number counter C1 shifted to the execution area of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a Is a process for executing a jackpot determination as to whether or not a jackpot based on the set gaming state.

  When the process of S306 ends, next, a first special symbol variation pattern selection process is executed (see FIG. 35). Although the details will be described later, this first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307) is a variation type counter stored in the execution area of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a as a result of the determination of the first special symbol This is a process for selecting a variation pattern based on the value of CS1.

  When the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307) is ended, next, the game state update process is executed (S308). The gaming state update process (S308 in FIG. 36), which will be described in detail later, indicates the state of the pachinko machine 10, the state of the probability change flag 203g, the state of the pachinko machine 10 by updating the value of the time reduction counter 203f. Is a process for updating the When the process of S308 ends, the present process ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S302 that the value (N1) of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d is 0 (S302: No), this process is ended as it is.

  Next, referring to FIG. 34, about the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306) which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 33, S208) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110. explain. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306). In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, during a period in which the variable display (big hit fluctuation) winning the big hit is executed in any one of the special symbols, whether or not the big hit is won in the other special symbol lottery. It is configured not to make a determination.

  That is, in a state in which it is determined that a big hit game is to be performed after a predetermined period (after a variation time has elapsed) by one special symbol lottery, the other special symbol lottery wins a big hit and multiple times in a short period of time It is configured to suppress winning of the jackpot and excessively granting benefits.

  As described above, processing for acquiring various counter values is performed in the same manner as in the normal special symbol lottery, and determination based on the various counter values acquired in the processing is skipped, and out-of-patterns are set. It can respond promptly to the lottery result of the special symbol lottery of.

  In the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306), first, each counter value stored in the execution area of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is acquired (S401). Next, it is determined whether the probability change flag 203g is set to on (S402). That is, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is in a high probability state (probability state, latent state). If it is determined that the probability change flag 203g is on (ie, it is a probability variation state of a special symbol) (S402: Yes), a random number value that becomes a jackpot defined in the first random number table 202a for high probability time It is determined whether the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired from the counter buffer matches or not, and the determination result (lottery result) is acquired (S403). On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S402 that the probability variation flag 203g is off (that is, the special symbol low probability state) (S402: No), the first random number table 202a for low probability is displayed. It is determined whether or not the specified jackpot random number value matches the value of the first hit random number counter C1 acquired from the counter buffer, and the lottery result is acquired (S404).

  Then, it is determined whether the special figure 2 jackpot flag 202i is on (S405). When it is determined that it is not on (ie, off) (S405: No), it is determined whether the lottery result obtained in S403 or S404 is a big hit (S406), and if the lottery result is a big hit ( S406: Yes, the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is set to ON for the first special symbol (S407), and the lottery result of the first special symbol is set as a jackpot (S408). Then, based on the acquired value of the hit type counter, the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S409), and the value according to the current gaming state is the winning state storage area The value is stored in 203 j (S410), 1 is set in the time reduction counter 203 f (S411), and this processing is ended.

  Here, by setting the value of the hour reduction counter 203f to 1 in the process of S411, the first special symbol variation start process (see S208 in FIG. 33) and the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see S306 in FIG. 34) It is possible to shift the high probability state of the normal symbol to the low probability state in the gaming state update process (S308) to be executed later than the above. Thereby, when the jackpot is won by the first special symbol lottery, it becomes possible to set the low probability state of the ordinary symbol at the timing when the jackpot fluctuation is started. Therefore, by winning the jackpot of the first special symbol in the state in which the probability change state is set, the probability change state can be shifted to the latent state.

  In addition, by performing processing of setting the value of the time reduction counter 203f to 1 in the processing of S411, processing to shift the high probability state of the normal symbol to the low probability state on condition that the jackpot is won, and the special symbol Any of the processing for shifting the high probability state of the normal symbol to the low probability state can be executed using the gaming state update processing (S308) on condition that the number of times of fluctuation has reached a predetermined number of times. Thereby, even when a plurality of conditions for terminating the high probability state of the normal symbol are provided, it is possible to prevent the processing of the main control device 110 from being complicated.

  On the other hand, in the process of S405, when it is determined that the special figure 2 big hit flag 203i is on (S405: Yes), or when it is determined that the lottery result is out in the process of S406 (S406: No), the outlying symbol of the first special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S412), and then this process is ended.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 35, a first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307) which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (S208 in FIG. 33) will be described. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307).

  In the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307 in FIG. 35), first, in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306 in FIG. 34), whether the lottery result of the first special symbol was determined to be a big hit, ie, 1 Determine whether the jackpot of the special symbol is set (S501). Here, the determination as to whether or not the jackpot is made is determined by whether or not the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is on. The special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is set to ON in the process of S407 in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 34) described above.

  In the process of S501, when it is determined that the jackpot of the first special symbol is set (S501: Yes), the first acquired in the process of S401 in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 34) described above Based on the value of the type counter C2 per unit, the jackpot type is determined from the jackpot type selection table 202d (see FIG. 16A) (S502), and the process proceeds to S503.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S501 that the lottery result of the first special symbol is out (i.e., the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is off) (S501: No), the process of S502 is skipped. Then, the process proceeds to the process of S503.

  In the process of S503, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is acquired from the execution area of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a (S503). Next, the variation pattern selection table (see FIGS. 17 to 19) corresponding to the gaming state is read (S504), and the process proceeds to S505. The gaming state is determined based on the state of the probability change flag 203g and the value of the time saving counter 203f. In the process of S505, the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is selected from the read fluctuation pattern selection table (S505), and then the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command is set based on the selected fluctuation pattern ( S506).

  When the process of S506 is finished, a special figure 1 stop type command indicating a stop symbol is set (S507), and then, the first symbol display device 37 sets the start of variation of the first special symbol (S508), and the process of S505. The value indicating the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern selected in step (c) is set in the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203m (S509), and this processing is ended.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 36, a game state update process (S308) which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 33) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing this gaming state update process (S308). In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, among the state of the probability change flag 203g which is a condition for setting the gaming state, and the value of the time reduction counter 203f, only the value of the time reduction counter 203f is updated at the start of the special symbol change. In the gaming state update process (see FIG. 36) which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 33), the process of updating the value of the time reduction counter 203f is executed.

  And although the details will be described later, the probability variation flag 203g set to on is set to off when the jackpot variation is finished and the special symbol indicating the jackpot is stopped and displayed (when the jackpot game is executed) It is configured as follows.

  In other words, one of the two condition elements (the state of the probability change flag 203g, the value of the time reduction counter 203f) referred to when setting the gaming state is updated at the start of the change of the special symbol, the other condition elements By making it possible to update the special symbol at the time of the change stop of the special symbol, it is possible to facilitate diversification of the gaming state set by combining the two condition elements. In addition, since it is possible to set a specific gaming state (for example, the state of latency) only during a period from when the variation of the special symbol starts to when it ends, it is advantageous for the player only during a predetermined period. It becomes possible to set the gaming state.

  When the gaming state update process (see FIG. 36) is started, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the time reduction counter 203f is larger than 0 (S601). When it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203f is 0 (S601: No), the present process is ended as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the time reduction counter 203f is larger than 0 (S601: Yes), the value of the time reduction counter 203f is decremented by 1 (S602), and the remaining time shortness command indicating the value of the time reduction counter 203f is set. (S603). Next, it is determined whether the value of the hour reduction counter 203f is 0 (S604), and if it is determined that it is 0 (S604: Yes), then it is determined whether the positive variation flag 203g is set on (S605) ). Here, when it is determined that the probability change flag 203g is set to ON (S605: Yes), since it is a probability change state (that is, the latent state) in which the time saving game is not provided, it indicates the latent state A status command is set (S606), and the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S605 that the positive variation flag 203g is not set to ON (S605: No), since it is in the normal state, a state command indicating the normal state is set (S607). Finish.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S604 that the value of the time reduction counter 203f is not 0 (S604: No), the process is ended as it is.

  In this embodiment, the high probability state of the special symbol is set to be continued until the jackpot of the special symbol is won next time (until the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the combination indicating the jackpot). In addition to this, for example, instead of the probability variation flag 203g, a probability variation counter is provided, and the value of the probability variation counter becomes 0 when the variation of the special symbol is executed and the value of the probability variation counter is subtracted In this case, the high probability state of the special symbol may be shifted to the low probability state.

  When such a configuration is used, the gaming state updating process (S308) shown with reference to FIG. 36 is regarded as the special state variation start gaming state updating process, and separately from this, at the timing when the variation display of the special symbol is finished. Processing to determine whether to end the special symbol high probability state by providing a special figure fluctuation stop gaming state update processing to update the value of the probability change counter, and whether to end the normal symbol high probability state Can be executed at different timing from the process of determining whether the

  Next, referring to FIG. 37, the contents of the first special symbol variation in-execution processing (S205) executed in the special symbol variation processing (see S104 of FIG. 31) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110. Give an explanation. FIG. 37 is a flow chart showing the contents of the first special symbol variation in progress processing (S205). In the first special symbol variation in-execution processing (S205), processing for resuming the subtraction when the subtraction of the variation time in the special view 1 is interrupted, and processing for subtracting the variation time are executed.

  When the first special symbol variation in-execution process (S205) is executed, first, it is determined whether the special view temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON (S701). Here, a case where this processing is executed in a state in which the special view temporary stop flag 203v is set to on will be briefly described. As described above, the special view temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON when the special view 2 is changing and the special view 2 is stopped and displayed with a symbol indicating a small hit. Then, when the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON, the large hit middle flag 203o is set to ON within the processing, so the timer interrupt executed by the main control unit 110 every 2 milliseconds. When the process loops and the special symbol variation process (FIG. 32) is executed next time (2 ms after the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set on), a big hit is in process in S201. Since it is determined that the first special symbol variation in progress processing (S205) is not performed. And the big hit game (or small hit game) ends, and it is determined that it is not a big hit (or a small hit) in the process of S201, and the first special symbol variation executing process (S205) is executed It will be. By configuring in this way, the state in which the first special symbol variation under-execution process (S205) is executed with the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v set to ON is a big hit (or small hit) game. It is configured to end at the timing to resume the subtraction of the fluctuation time of the special pattern fluctuation, which has been interrupted the subtraction of the fluctuation time.

  Returning to FIG. 37, the description will be continued. In the process of S701, when it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON (S701: Yes), next, the special figure 1 fluctuation resume command is set (S702), the special figure 1 provisional The stop flag 203v is set to OFF (S703), and the process proceeds to S704. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is not set to on (is set to off) in the process of S701 (S701: No), the process of S702 and S703 is skipped to perform S704. Move to the process of

  In the process of S704, the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203m is decremented by 1 and updated (S704), the display of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S705), and the present process is ended.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 38, the first special symbol variation stop processing (S207) which is one of the special symbol variation processing (S104 in FIG. 32) will be described. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation stop process (S207).

  In the first special symbol variation stop process (S207), first, it is determined whether the special figure 1 big hit flag 203h is set to ON for the first special symbol (special figure 1) (S801). When it is determined that the special figure 1 big hit flag 203h is set to ON for the first special symbol (S801: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203s is set to ON (S802), and the special figure (2) A special figure 2 fluctuation stop command indicating that the fluctuation stop flag 203s is turned on is set (S803). Next, the second special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is removed and stopped and displayed with the symbol (S804).

  After the process of S804, the jackpot scenario corresponding to the selected jackpot type is set (S805), and the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h, the probability change flag 203g, and the time saving counter 203f are reset (S806). Next, the jackpot flag 203o is set to ON (S807), and the process proceeds to S808.

  On the other hand, in the process of S801, if the special figure 1 big hit flag 203h is set to off for the first special symbol (S801: No), the process of S802 to S807 is skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S808.

  In the process of S808, a special view 1 determination command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 that the first special symbol is to be determined and stopped is set (S808). Thereafter, the process of stopping the variable display of the first special symbol variably displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S809), and the present process is ended.

  As described above, in the first special symbol stop process (S207), processing (S802 to S809) is executed to stop the variable display with the symbol indicating the determination result of the first lottery game. Also, when it is determined that the lottery result of the first special symbol is a big hit (S801: Yes), processing (S803, S804) for forcibly stopping the second special symbol in the variable display is executed.

  In the first embodiment, when the stop symbol of the first special symbol is stopped and displayed with the big hit symbol, the second special symbol in the variable display is removed and forcibly stopped and displayed by the symbol. It is not limited to For example, the variable display of the second special symbol may be interrupted (temporarily stopped) when the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol is stopped and displayed. And after the jackpot of the first special symbol is finished, the variable display of the second special symbol may be resumed. As a result, it is possible to provide a more natural aspect as compared to the case where the forced stop is caused by disengaging. In the present embodiment, the jackpot scenario is set in the process of S805 based on the gaming state stored in the winning state storage area 203j in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 34). For example, the jackpot scenario is set in the process of S805 based on the gaming state stored in the winning state storage area 203j in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 34) using the opening period of the jackpot game. You may do it.

  Next, the contents of the second special symbol variation start process (S210) executed in the special symbol variation process (FIG. 32) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second special symbol variation start process (S210). In the second special symbol variation start process (S210), a process for starting the variation of the special view 2 is executed. In addition, with respect to the processing relating to the variation of the first special symbol described above with reference to FIGS. 39 to 46, the target of variation is only different from the first special symbol to the second special symbol. Detailed description of the elements is omitted.

  In the second special symbol variation start process (S210), first, it is determined whether the special view 2 variation stop flag 203s is set to ON (S901). When it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203s is set to on (S901: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203s is set to be off (S902), and this processing is ended. The special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203s is a flag which is set to ON while making the stop display corresponding to the second special symbol come off at the same time as the big hit fluctuation of the first special symbol ends, as described above. . That is, if the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203s is on, it means that the jackpot will be started, so the fluctuation start of the second special symbol should not be set. Therefore, when the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203s is on in the process of S901, the present process is ended without executing each process of S902 to S907 for setting the fluctuation start.

  On the other hand, in the process of S901, when it is determined that the special view 2 fluctuation stop flag 203s is set to off (that is, not set to on) (S901: No), the second special symbol execution area 203b Data (various counter values) is acquired (S903). Next, based on the data acquired in the process of S903, it is determined whether there is acquired data (S904). That is, when it is determined that there is no data in the second special symbol execution area 203b (S904: No), the present processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S903, when it is determined that there is data (S904: Yes), the second special symbol big hit determination processing for executing the big win determination of the second special symbol based on each stored counter value Execute (S905). The details of the second special symbol jackpot determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the process of S 905 ends, next, based on the lottery result of the second special symbol and the data acquired in the process of S 903, the second special symbol variation pattern selection process for selecting a variation pattern is executed (S 906) . The details of the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S906) will be described later with reference to FIG. After the process of S906 is completed, the above-described gaming state update process (see FIG. 36) is executed (S907), and this process is ended.

  Next, referring to FIG. 40, regarding the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S905) which is one process of the second special symbol variation start process (S210 in FIG. 39) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110. explain. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S905).

  In the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S905), the same processing as the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 34) described above is performed, so the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 34) The differences between the

  When the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S905) is executed, each counter value stored in the second special symbol execution area 203b is acquired (S1001). Then, the processing of S1002 to S1004 for acquiring the lottery result of whether or not a big hit is performed based on each of the acquired counter values and the state of the probability variation flag 203g. In each of these processes, the point that the counter value used for lottery (determination) is acquired from the second special symbol execution area 203b is different, and the other is the same as the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 34). Control is performed.

  When the process of S1003 or S1004 ends, it is determined whether the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is set to ON (S1005). When it is determined that the special figure 1 big hit flag 203h is not set to ON (S1005: No), it is determined whether the obtained lottery result is a big hit (S1006) and it is determined that it is a big hit (S1006: Yes), the processing of S1007 to S1010 for setting the lottery result of the second special symbol as a jackpot is executed, and this processing is ended. In each of the processes of S1007 to S1010, the same processes as the respective processes of S407 to S410 for setting the lottery result of the first special symbol as a big hit in the first special symbol big hit determination process (see FIG. 34) are executed. Be done.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is set to ON in the process of S1005 (S1005: Yes), or that the lottery result of the second special symbol obtained in the process of S1006 is not a big win If it is determined (S1006: No), the special figure 2 deviation variation process for setting the stop symbol corresponding to the small hitting or the detachment of the second special symbol is executed (S1011), and this process is ended. The details of the special view 2 deviation variation process (S1011) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 41 is a flow chart showing this special view 2 deviation fluctuation process (S1011).

  In the special figure 2 deviation fluctuation process (S1011), first, it is determined whether the lottery result acquired in the process of S1003 or S1004 in FIG. 40 is the small hit of the second special symbol (S1101), the lottery result is the small hit If it is determined that (S1101: Yes), the small hit flag 203k is set to ON (S1102), and the lottery result of the second special symbol is set to the small hit (S1103). Then, a small hitting symbol indicating a small hitting type corresponding to the value of the obtained small hitting type counter C5 is set as a stop symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 (S1104), and this processing is ended.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the lottery result is out in the process of S1101 (S1101: No), the out-of-design of the second special symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S1105), and This process ends.

  Next, referring to FIG. 42, a second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S906) which is one of the second special symbol variation start processing (S210 in FIG. 39) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110. Will be explained. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S906).

  In the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S906 in FIG. 42), first, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is acquired from the second special symbol execution area 203b (S1201). Then, in the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S905 in FIG. 40), it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the second special symbol is a jackpot, that is, whether the jackpot of the second special symbol is set. (S1202). Here, the determination as to whether or not the jackpot is made is determined based on whether or not the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203i is on for the second special symbol. This special view 2 jackpot flag 203i is set to ON in the process of S1007 in the second special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 40) described above.

  If it is determined in the process of S1202 that the jackpot of the second special symbol is set (S1202: Yes), the variation pattern selection table (see FIGS. 17 and 19) corresponding to the current gaming state is read out. (S1203). Then, based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S1001 in the second special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 40) described above, the big hit from the jackpot type selection table 202d (see FIG. 16 (a)) The type is determined (S1204).

  When the process of S1204 is completed, the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is selected from the read fluctuation pattern selection table (S1205), and then the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command is set based on the selected fluctuation pattern. (S1206). Then, the process proceeds to the process of S1208.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the jackpot of the second special symbol is not set in the process of S1202 (S1202: No), the special figure 2 out-of-variation variation pattern selection process (S1207) is executed, and the process goes to S1208. Transition.

  In the process of S1208, a special figure 2 stop type command indicating a stop symbol is set (S1208). Subsequently, the variation start of the second special symbol is set by the first symbol display device 37 (S1209), and a value indicating the variation time of the variation pattern selected in the processing of S1205 is set in the special figure 2 variation time counter 203n ( S1210), the process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 43, the special view out-of-two variation pattern selection process (S1207) will be described. FIG. 43 is a flow chart showing the contents of the special view 2 deviation variation pattern selection process (S1207).

  In the special pattern 2 out-of-variation variation pattern selection process (S1207 in FIG. 43), first, it is determined whether the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small hit (S1301). Here, it is determined whether the small hit flag 203k is set to ON (S1301). If it is determined that the small hit flag 203k is on (S1301: Yes), the value of the small hit type counter C5 is acquired from the second special symbol execution area 203b (S1302). Then, the small hitting type is selected based on the value of the small hitting type counter C5 and the small hitting type selection table 202e (refer to FIG. 16B) (S1303).

  Next, the fluctuation pattern selection table (see FIGS. 17 to 19) corresponding to the current gaming state is read (S1304), and the fluctuation pattern of the small hitting corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 from the read fluctuation pattern selection table. Is selected (S1305). Thereafter, a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command indicating the selected small hitting fluctuation pattern is set (S1306), and this processing is ended.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1301 that the lottery result of the second special symbol is not a small hit (that is, it is out of place) (S1301: No), a variation pattern selection table (FIG. 17 and FIG. 19) (S1307), and the out-of-out fluctuation pattern corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is selected from the read fluctuation pattern selection table (S1308). Thereafter, the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command is set based on the selected outlier fluctuation pattern (S1309), and this processing is ended.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 44, in the second special symbol variation in-execution processing (S211) which is one of the special symbol variation processing (see S104 in FIG. 32) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110. Explain the contents. FIG. 44 is a flow chart showing the contents of the second special symbol variation in-execution process (S211). In the second special symbol variation under-execution process (S211), processing for resuming the subtraction when the subtraction of the variation time in Special Figure 2 is suspended, and processing for subtracting the variation time are executed.

  When the second special symbol variation in progress processing (S211) is executed, first, the special figure 2 variation time counter 203n is decremented by 1 and updated (S1401), and the second special symbol display of the first symbol display device 37 is displayed. Are updated (S1402), and the process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 45, the contents of the second special symbol variation stop process (S213) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second special symbol variation stop process (S213). The second special symbol variation stop process (S213) is to execute a process when stopping the variation of the special figure 2.

  When the second special symbol fluctuation stop process (S213) is executed, first, it is determined whether the special figure 2 big hit flag 203i is set to on (S1501), the special figure 2 big hit flag 203i is set to on If it is determined (S1501: Yes), the special figure 1 fluctuation stop command indicating the stop of the special figure 1 fluctuation is set (S1503). Next, when the process of S1503 is finished, the first special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is removed and stopped and displayed with the symbol (S1504). Next, the jackpot scenario corresponding to the selected jackpot type is set (S1505), and the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203i, the probability change flag 203g, and the time reduction counter 203f are reset (S1506). Next, the jackpot flag 203o is set to ON (S1507), and the process proceeds to S1509.

  In the process of S1509, a special view 2 determination command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 that the second special symbol is to be determined and stopped is set (S1509). Thereafter, the process of stopping the variable display of the second special symbol variably displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S1510), and the present process is ended.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1501 that the special figure 2 big hit flag 203i is not set to ON (S1501: No), the special figure 2 off stop process is executed (S1508), and the above-mentioned S1509 and S1510 The process of is executed, and this process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 46, the special figure 2 off stop processing (S1508) which is one of the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S213 in FIG. 45) will be described. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the special view 2 off stop processing (S1508). In this special figure 2 off stop process (S1508), when the lottery result of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is other than the big hit (small hit, out), the special figure 2 showing the lottery result is stopped and displayed. When the drawing result of the special figure 2 is a small winning, the process for temporarily stopping the special figure 1 change being executed is executed.

  In the special view 2 off stop process (S1508), first, it is determined whether the small hitting flag 203k is set to ON (S1601). If it is determined that the small hit flag 203k is set to ON (S1601: Yes), the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON (S1602). Next, a special figure 1 temporary stop command indicating that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is on is set (S1603).

  After the process of S1603, the small hitting scenario is set based on the selected small hitting type (S1604). Thereafter, the small hit flag 203k is set to off (S1605), and the small hit middle flag 203p is set to on (S1606).

  When the process of S1606 is completed, a special figure 2 determination command for instructing the voice lamp control device 113 to set and stop the second special symbol is set (S1607). Thereafter, the second special symbol variably displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is stopped fluctuating with the small hitting symbol (S1608), and the present process is ended.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1601 that the small hitting flag 203k is off (that is, the lottery result of the second special symbol is out) (S1601: No), the second special symbol is decidedly stopped. The special figure 2 determination command for instructing the voice lamp control device 113 is set (S1609). Thereafter, the second special symbol variably displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is removed and the variation is stopped with the symbol (S1610), and the present process is ended.

  As described above, since the control of the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is independently and parallelly executable, it is possible to simultaneously change the first special symbol and the second special symbol. It can be displayed. Therefore, it is possible to execute more special symbol lottery games within a predetermined time, and it is possible to increase the probability that a jackpot is given to the player within the predetermined time. Therefore, the player can play the game efficiently.

  In this embodiment, when the special symbol indicating the big hit is stopped and displayed by either one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the other special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the other special symbol may be variably displayed in a state in which the temporary stop or measurement of fluctuation time is interrupted. In such a case, since the temporarily stopped special symbol is stopped in the display mode or the notification mode that shows the player that the temporary stop is in progress, the player loses the lottery game which was in the process of the variable display. It is possible to grasp that it is not, and can play the jackpot game with ease.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 47, the start winning process (S105) which is one process of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S105). In the start winning process (S105 in FIG. 47), it is determined if the game ball enters (winning) the first ball entry (first starting) 64 and the ball is entered (winning) if the ball is entered (winning) It is a process which stores each acquired counter value in the 1st special symbol holding ball storage area 203a to the upper limit number (maximum 4 pieces at the first ball entrance 64). In addition, when each counter value acquired based on the holding ball is stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, based on each counter value stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a A process is performed to predict in advance the result of the pass / fail determination and the selected variation pattern. Hereinafter, the start winning process (S105) will be described.

  In the start winning process (S105), first, it is determined whether the ball has entered the first ball entrance 64 which is the first start opening (start winning) (S1701). Here, it discriminate | determines using the detection result of the 1st ball entering switch (not shown) which detects the ball entering of the ball to the 1st ball entrance 64. As shown in FIG. If it is determined that the ball has entered the first entrance 64 (there is a start winning) (S1701: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d is acquired (S1702) ). It is determined whether the acquired value (N1) is less than 4 (S1703). It is determined whether this is less than 4 which is the upper limit value of the number of reservations for the first entrance 64 (that is, whether the number of reservations is stored up to the upper limit value). When it is determined whether the acquired value (N1) is less than 4 (S1703: Yes), 1 is added to the value (N1) of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d (S1704). A holding ball number command for notifying the sound lamp control device 113 of the number of holdings is set (S1705). Each value of the first random number counter C1, the first collision type counter C2, and the fluctuation type counter CS1, which are various counter values, are read out (obtained) from the counter buffer, and the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 Each is put on hold (stored) in the storage area of the corresponding hold number of balls (S1706).

  Next, on the basis of the stored counter values, the hit / not determined result of the first special symbol, the hit type determined, and the fluctuation pattern are predicted (S1707). Then, a winning information command including the predicted success / failure determination result of the first special symbol, the hit type, and the variation pattern is set (S1708), and this processing is ended.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the game ball is won in the first starting opening (first ball entrance) 64 and is newly stored on hold, the result of the pass / fail determination based on the information stored on the hold. Is determined before the start of fluctuation and notified to the audio lamp control device 113. In this way, based on the result of the determination of whether the holding ball is stored, the display mode of the holding ball can be changed (for example, the color of the holding ball can be changed in a different color from normal) and displayed It is possible to display a notice symbol or the like and execute an effect that suggests the player a result of the pass / fail judgment.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 48, the normal symbol variation processing (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the normal symbol variation process (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31), and the variation display and variation time of the second symbol performed in the second symbol display device 83, lower first ball entry port 64b2 Is a process for controlling the opening operation and opening time and the like of the motorized accessory 64a attached to the.

  In this normal symbol variation process (S106 in FIG. 48), first, it is determined whether or not the current symbol is in the middle of the normal symbol (second symbol) (S1801). As the middle of the normal symbol (the second symbol), the opening and closing control of the motorized accessory 64a attached to the lower first ball entry port 64b2 is in the middle of the display showing the second symbol display device 83 showing the hit. In the middle of being done is included. As a result of the determination, when it is determined that the normal symbol (the second symbol) is being hit (S 1801: Yes), a new normal symbol variation (lottery) can not be started (executed), so it is as it is This process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the hit is not in the normal symbol (the second symbol) (S1801: No), next, whether the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (during normal symbol change) If it is determined (S1802) and the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is not changing (during normal symbol change) (S1802: No), that is, even if the current symbol is a normal symbol, the normal symbol variation If it is determined that there is no condition among them, that is, it is possible to start (execute) a new normal symbol variation (lottery drawing), the data in the execution area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c (second random number It is determined whether or not the value of the counter C4 is stored (S1804), and if no data is stored (S1804: No), it is impossible to execute the lottery of the normal symbol, so The present process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1804 that data is stored in the execution area (S1804: Yes), the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c Is acquired (S1807). Then, based on the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired in the process of S1807 and the normal symbol (second) random number table 202c, the lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S1808). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random value stored in the second random number table 202c. As described above, when the low probability state of the normal symbol is set, if the value of the second collision type counter C4 is in the range of “0 to 10”, it is determined as the hit of the normal symbol, and the normal symbol is When the high probability state is set, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "0 to 231", it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of "232", It is determined that the symbol is off normally.

  Next, it is determined whether the lottery result of the normal symbol acquired by the processing of S1808 is the hit of the normal symbol (S1809), and when it is determined that the symbol is the normal symbol (S1809: Yes), the hit time The display mode of is set (S1810), and the process proceeds to the process of S1811. In the process of S1810, after the variable display in the second symbol display device is finished, the symbol of "o" is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (the second symbol).

  On the other hand, in the process of S1809, when it is determined that the normal symbol is out (S1809: No), the display mode at the time of out is set (S1812), and the process shifts to the process of S1811. In the process of S 1812, after the variation display in the second symbol display device is finished, the symbol “x” is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of removal is completed, the process proceeds to the process of S1811.

  When the process of S1810 or S1812 is completed, it is determined whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state (short time state) of the normal symbol in the process of S1811 (S1811), the high probability state of the pachinko machine 10 is normal time (short time) If it is determined that it is the state) (S 1811: Yes), the variation time of the normal symbol in the second symbol display device is set to 3 seconds (S 1813), and then the common drawing short variation flag 203t is set to ON. (S1814) This process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is not the high probability state (short time state) of the normal symbol (the low probability state of the normal symbol) (S1811: No), the fluctuation time of the normal symbol in the second symbol display device Is set to 10 seconds (S1815), and this processing ends.

  In addition, the common drawing short fluctuation flag 203t set to ON in the processing of S1814 is a configuration for temporarily storing the gaming state at the timing when the lottery of the normal symbol is executed, and the fluctuation of the normal symbol is stopped. It is displayed and referred to when setting the opening operation of the motorized accessory 64a. In this way, it is possible to vary the release operation content of the motorized prize 64a in accordance with which gaming state the variation (lottery) start timing of the normal symbol and the opening operation timing of the motorized prize 64a are.

  In this embodiment, the gaming state at the timing of fluctuation (lottery) start (execution) of the normal symbol is temporarily stored using a dedicated flag, but other configurations may be used. For example, when it is determined that the lottery result of the normal symbol is a hit in the gaming state storage means capable of always storing the currently set gaming state, the gaming state when the lottery of the normal symbol is executed is A storage area for temporary storage may be provided. Furthermore, there is provided means for constantly storing the period in which the normal state is set, and the period stored in the means (period in which the normal state is set) is compared with the timing at which the lottery of the normal symbol is performed. By doing this, the gaming state may be determined at the timing when the lottery of the normal symbol is performed. That is, any configuration may be employed as long as it has storage means capable of storing the currently set gaming state and storage means capable of storing at least the gaming state set at a predetermined timing in the past.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1802 that the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S1802: Yes), the change time of the change display being executed in the second symbol display device 83 elapses It is determined whether or not it has been made (S1816). In addition, before the fluctuation display is started in the second symbol display device 83, the fluctuation time here is a time preset by the processing of S1810 or the processing of S1812.

  When it is determined in the process of S1813 that the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S1816: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1816 that the variation time of the currently displayed variation display has elapsed (S1816: Yes), then the stop display of the second symbol display device is set (S1817). In the process of S1817, if the lottery of the normal symbol becomes a hit, and the display mode is set by the process of S1810, the "o" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device (lit display Set to be On the other hand, if the normal symbol lottery is out and the display mode is set by the process of S1812, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device (lit display) Is set as Note that the period during which the second symbol is stopped and displayed is longer than the period during which one part in the blinking display (alternate display of “o” and “x”) indicating that the second symbol is changing is lit longer To be displayed (fixed display). This makes it possible for the player to easily grasp that the second symbol has been stopped and displayed.

  When the stop display is set by the process of S1817, the second symbol display update process (S2208 in FIG. 52) of the main process (see FIG. 52) is executed next, the variation display in the second symbol display device In the display mode set in the process of S1810 or the process of S1812, the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device.

  After the process of S1817 is finished, next, when the variable display under execution in the second symbol display device is started, the lottery result of the ordinary symbol performed by the ordinary symbol variation process (S106) (current lottery result) It is determined whether it is a hit of a normal symbol (S1818). If it is determined that the lottery result this time is an out-of-order symbol (S1818: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the current lottery result is a normal symbol hit (S1818: Yes), it is next determined whether the common drawing short fluctuation flag 203t is set to ON (S1819).

  If it is determined in the process of S1819 that the common drawing short variation flag 203t is not set to ON (is set to OFF), that is, the gaming state at the timing when the lottery (variation) of the current normal symbol is started. If it is determined that it is in the normal state (S1819: No), the open time of the motorized accessory 64a is set to 0.2 seconds, and the open frequency is set to 1 (S1824), and the process proceeds to S1823. Do.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1819 that the common drawing short fluctuation flag 203t is set to ON, that is, it is determined that the gaming state at the timing at which the current lottery (variation) of the normal symbol is started is short. If it is (S1819: Yes), the common drawing short fluctuation flag 203t is set to OFF (S1820), and then it is determined whether the current gaming state is the time saving state (time reduction) (S1821).

  When it is determined in the process of S1821 that the current gaming state is not the short time state (S1821: No), the gaming state at the timing at which the current lottery (variation) of the normal symbol starts is the normal state, and the current gaming state ( Since the timing to set the opening operation of the motorized accessory 64a is in the normal state, the opening period of the motorized accessory 64a attached to the lower first ball inlet 64b2 is set to 0.2 seconds, and the number of times of opening is set. The setting is made once (S1824), and the process proceeds to the processing of S1823.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the current gaming state is the short time state (S1821: Yes), the timing at which the current lottery (variation) of the normal symbol starts, and the current gaming state (the opening operation of the electric role 64a) Because the timing to set both is short time, the opening period of the motorized accessory 64a attached to the lower first entrance 64b2 is set to 2 seconds, and the number of times of opening is set to 2 (motorized symbol The long release operation of 64a is set (S1822), and the process proceeds to S1823.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the timing at which the lottery (variation) of the normal symbol is executed and the timing at which the opening operation of the motorized prize 64a to be executed based on the winning of the normal symbol is set. It is configured to set the opening operation (long opening) which is advantageous to the player as the opening operation of the motor-operated accessory 64a only when both are in the short time state.

  By configuring in this manner, it is possible to strictly set the conditions under which the opening operation that is advantageous to the player is set, so for example, the lottery of the normal symbol in the state where the normal state is set as the gaming state Even if the time variation state is set until the variation time (10 seconds) of the normal symbol is set, the long release is set as the operation of the motorized prize 64a. There is no such thing. In addition, the player wins a hit in the variation (lottery) of the normal symbol executed in the same manner as the time saving state is set, and the normal condition is set as the gaming state until the variation of the normal symbol is stopped. Also in the case, the long opening of the motorized role piece 64a is not set. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the provision of the benefit (the long opening of the electric role item 64a) which is excessively advantageous to the player.

  Furthermore, since it is possible to suppress the electric character 64a from being long-opened in the state where the normal state is set as the gaming state, the lottery of the special symbol (second special symbol) advantageous to the player is easy to be executed The period can be limited during the short time condition. In the present embodiment, the gaming state in the timing when the lottery (variation) of the normal symbol is started and the timing for setting the opening operation of the motorized accessory 64a is determined, and the gaming state set in each timing is determined. Although the above-described configuration is used as the configuration for setting the opening operation content of the motorized part 64a based on that, any other configuration may be used.

  For example, the opening operation which is disadvantageous to the player only when both the timing when the lottery (variation) of the normal symbol is started and the timing when the opening operation of the motorized accessory 64a is set are in the normal state (S1824 in FIG. 48) The release operation set in step S2 may be set (the short release operation may be set), and in the other state, the long release (the release operation set in S1822 of FIG. 48) may be set. By configuring in this manner, a benefit (long open) advantageous to the player is also provided for the normal symbol fluctuation executed in the period before and after the time saving state which is the gaming state advantageous to the player is set. Time saving can be made more advantageous to the player.

  As described above, while the time saving state is set as the gaming state, the variation time of the normal symbol becomes very short as "10 seconds → 3 seconds" as compared with the case where the normal state is set, and further, Since the opening period of the lower first inlet 64b2 is very long, such as “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 2 seconds × 2 times”, it is easy for the ball to enter the lower first inlet 64b2. Become. In the present embodiment, when the jackpot game is executed, the time saving state is ended, so the jackpot game is in the normal state during the jackpot game. On the other hand, when the small hitting game is executed, since the time saving state is set continuously unless the time saving end condition is established, the small running is performed while the time saving state is set. During a hit game, the first variable winning device 65 opens in a small hit game, and a period in which the electric combination 64a opens is long, and a plurality of winning openings (first specified winning opening 65a, lower first entry ball opening) This is a specific period during which it is easy to enter the ball into 64b2).

  By using such a configuration, for example, instead of the configuration of the game board 13 shown in FIG. 2, the motorized prize 64a and the lower first ball entry port 64b2 are disposed above the first variable winning device 65. It is good to configure the ball to enter two winning openings (specific winning opening 65a, lower first ball entry 64b2) during small hitting game, whereby the number of winning balls obtainable during small hitting game Can be increased, and it is possible to give more advantageous benefits to the player.

  Referring back to FIG. 48, the description will be continued. In the process of S1820, the opening / closing control start of the motorized accessory 64a attached to the lower first ball entrance 64b2 is set (S1823), and this process is ended. When the opening / closing control start of the motorized workpiece 64a is set by the process of S1823, the motored workpiece opening / closing process (see S2206) of the main process (see FIG. 52) is executed next. The control is started, and the opening / closing control of the motorized accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the process of S1824 or S1822 end.

  Next, the through gate passing process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing this through gate passage processing (S107). This through gate passing process (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31), and it is determined whether or not the passing of the gaming ball in the normal ball entry port (through gate) 67 is made. This process is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the second random number counter C4 if there is any.

  In the through gate passing process (S107 in FIG. 49), first, it is determined whether the gaming ball has passed through the normal ball entry port (through gate) 67 (S1901). Here, the passage of the gaming ball at the normal ball entry (through gate) 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the gaming ball has passed through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 (S1901: Yes), the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203e (number M of holding times of variable display in normal symbol) is acquired (S1902). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203e is less than the upper limit (4 in the present embodiment) (S1903).

  If the game ball has not passed through the normal entrance (through gate) 67 (S1901: No), or if the game ball has passed through the normal entry (through gate) 67, the normal symbol holding ball number counter If the value (M) of 203e is not less than 4 (S1903: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if the game ball passes through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 (S1901: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203e is less than 4 (S1903: Yes), The value (M) of the symbol holding ball number counter 203e is incremented by 1 (S1904).

  When the process of S1904 is finished, the value of the second random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the above-mentioned timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31) is displayed as the empty reservation area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203 The process is stored in the first area of the area to the reserved fourth area (S1905), and this processing is ended. In the process of S1905, the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203e is referred to, and if the value is 1, the holding first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the pending second area is set, if the value is 2, the pending third area is set, and if the value is 3, the pending fourth area is set as the first area.

  Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, it is set that the lottery based on the second special symbol is more advantageous to the player than the lottery based on the first special symbol. Therefore, the state in which the ball can enter the lower first ball entrance 64b2 provided by the lottery result of the normal symbol (the second symbol) becomes a winning game state becomes an advantageous gaming state compared to the normal gaming state .

  By indicating the timing at which such a gaming state is provided based on the predetermination result of the common drawing, the player can play a game without missing a gaming state more advantageous than the normal gaming state. In addition, when performing an effect using the prior determination result of such a common drawing, not only the effect based on the pass / fail judgment result of the common drawing, but the electric combination 64a is opened when the common drawing is determined to be a hit. It is good to do the production which suggests the timing of By doing this, the normal gaming state plays a game aiming at the game area on the left side of the game board 13, and the lower first ball entry port 64b2 (the ball entry port accompanied by the electric character 64a) is the game board 13 It is possible to switch to a game aiming at the right side of the game board 13 (so-called, right-handed) before the electric role item 64a performs the opening operation, even in the case of being arranged on the right side of However, there is an effect that the possibility of the ball entering the lower first ball entrance 64b2 can be increased.

  FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the occurrence information of the power-off is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off due to the occurrence of a blackout or the like, the blackout signal SG1 is output from the blackout monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control under execution to start the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information (S2001), and ends the NMI interrupt processing. Do.

  The above-described NMI interrupt processing is also executed by the payout control device 111 in the same manner, and the power disconnection occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off due to the occurrence of a blackout etc., the blackout signal SG1 is outputted from the blackout monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control under execution. Start the NMI interrupt processing.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 51, the start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 when the main control apparatus 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing this start-up process.

  This start-up process is started by the reset upon power-on. In the start-up process (FIG. 51), first, an initial setting process associated with power on is executed (S2101). For example, a predetermined value determined in advance is set in the stack pointer. Subsequently, in order to wait for the control device on the sub side (peripheral control devices such as the audio lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to become operable, a weight process (one second in this embodiment) is executed. (S2102). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S2103).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch (see FIG. 12) provided in the power supply 115 is turned on (S2104), and if it is turned on (S2104: Yes), the process proceeds to S2110. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch (see FIG. 12) is not turned on (S2104: No), it is further judged whether or not the occurrence information of the power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (S2105), and if not stored (S2104) S2105: No), since there is a possibility that the processing at the time of the previous power-off has not ended normally, the processing shifts to S2110 also in this case.

  If the occurrence information of the power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (S2105: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S2106), and if the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S2107: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored at the time of power-off, the backed up data is destroyed, so the process also proceeds to S2110. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at a work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S2110, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111 to be a sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S2110). When receiving the payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and can start the payout control of the gaming ball. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing (S2111, S2112) of RAM 203.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch (FIG. 12) in the case of initializing the RAM data at the time of power on, for example, at the time of business opening of a hall. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch (FIG. 12) is pressed when the start-up process is executed, the initialization process (S2111, S2112) of the RAM 203 is executed.

  In addition, the initialization process (S2111, S2112) of the RAM 203 is also executed similarly when the occurrence of power-off is not set or when the backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value etc.). . In the initialization process (S2111, S2112) of the RAM, the use area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S2111), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S2112). After the initialization process of the RAM 203 is performed, the process proceeds to step S2113.

  On the other hand, the RAM erase switch (FIG. 12) is not turned on (S2104: No), the occurrence information of power off is stored (S2105: Yes), and the RAM judgment value (checksum value etc.) is normal. If there is (S2107: Yes), the power-off occurrence information is cleared (S2108) while holding the backed up data in the RAM 203. Next, a payout recovery command at the time of power recovery for transmitting the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side back to the gaming state at the time of the driving power shutoff is transmitted (S2109), and the process proceeds to S2113. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout recovery command, it holds the data stored in the RAM 213, and can start the payout control of the gaming balls.

  Next, an effect permission command for permitting execution of various effects is output to the sound lamp control device 113 (S2113). Thereafter, the state of the probability change flag 203g and each value of the short time counter 203f are read (S2114), and a state command is set based on the read counter value (S2115). When the process of S2115 ends, the interrupt is permitted (S2116), and the process shifts to the main process described later.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 52, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 after the above-described start-up process will be described. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing this main processing. In this main process, the process of updating the counter and the process upon power-off are roughly divided.

  In the main processing, first, each control device of the sub side (peripheral control device (output control device such as command) stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 31) The external output processing to be sent to is executed (S2201).

  Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S2202). Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in the present embodiment). Then, the update value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203.

  When the variation type counter CS1 is updated, the winning ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S2203). The jackpot control process is executed (S2204). The jackpot control process (S2204) will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. 53. A process of setting the operation of the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650 in the jackpot game is executed.

  After the jackpot control process (S2204) is executed, the small hit control process (S2205) is executed. This small hitting control process (S2205) will be described later with reference to FIG. Thereafter, the motor-operated combination opening and closing process is executed (S2206). In the motorized jack product opening and closing process (S2206), an opening and closing process of the motorized jack item 64a is performed. Thereafter, the display update process of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S2207).

  Next, display update processing of the second symbol (for example, symbol "o" or "x") by the second symbol display device is executed (S2208). Simply stated, on the condition that the ball passes through the normal ball entry (through gate) 67, the second random number counter C4 value is acquired at the timing when it passes, and the second symbol display device The variable display of the second symbol (normal symbol) is carried out. Then, the second symbol (normal symbol) is drawn according to the value of the second random number counter C4, and when the second symbol (normal symbol) is hit, the electrically driven accessory 64a is released for a predetermined time.

  After that, it is judged whether or not the occurrence information of the power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (S2209), and if the occurrence information of the power failure is not stored in the RAM 203 (S2209: No), the power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 SG1 is not output and the power is not shut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main processing has come, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the previous main processing (S2210) If the predetermined time (4 ms) has already passed (S2210: Yes), the process proceeds to S2201, and the above-described S2201 and subsequent steps are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the main processing of this time (S2210: No), the first main processing is performed until the predetermined time is reached, that is, within the remaining time until the next main processing execution timing is reached. 1) The update of the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 and the variation type counter CS1 is repeatedly executed (S2211, S2212).

  First, update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is executed (S2211). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (479, 232 in this embodiment). . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S2202 (S2212).

  Here, since the execution time of each process of S2201 to S2208 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant but is variably displayed. Therefore, by repeatedly executing the update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using such remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (ie, The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4 can be updated at random, and the variation type counter CS1 can also be updated at random.

  Further, in the process of S2209, if the occurrence information of the power-off is stored in the RAM 203 (S2209: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of the power failure or the power-off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, it means that the NMI interrupt processing of FIG. First, the occurrence of each interrupt processing is prohibited (S2213), and a power-off command indicating that the power is shut off is sent to another control device (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the audio lamp control device 113). And transmit (S2214). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is stored (S2215), the access to the RAM 203 is inhibited (S2216), and the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely shut off and the processing can not be performed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in a stack area and a work area backed up in the RAM 203.

  Note that the processing of S2209 is at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the state change of the game performed in S2201 to S2208, or at the timing of the end of one cycle of the processing of S2211 and S2212 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of main controller 110, since the occurrence information of the power-off is confirmed at the timing when each setting is finished, when returning from the power-off state, the process is performed after the end of the start-up process. It is possible to start from the process of S2201. That is, as in the case of being initialized in the start-up process, the process can be started from the process of S2201. Therefore, in the process at the time of power shutdown, the stack pointer does not save the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 to the stack area nor save the value of the stack pointer in the initialization process (S2101). By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the process of S2201. Therefore, the control load on the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main control device 110 malfunctioning or runaway.

  Next, the jackpot control process (S2204) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing this jackpot control process (S2204). This jackpot control process (S2204) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 52), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot state of the special symbol, execution of various effects according to the jackpot, or the first specified prize It is a process for opening or closing the mouth (large open mouth) 65a and the second specified winning hole 650a.

  In the jackpot control process (S2204), first, it is determined whether a jackpot scenario is set (S2301). If it is determined that the jackpot scenario is not set (S2301: No), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2301 that the jackpot scenario is set (S2301: Yes), the jackpot scenario is updated (S2302), and it is determined whether it is the opening start timing of the jackpot scenario (S2303) . More specifically, 1 is added to the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter (not shown) in the process of S2302, and the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter (not shown) starts the opening of the jackpot scenario in the process of S2303. It is determined whether it is a value corresponding to

  If it is determined in the process of S2303 that it is the timing of the opening start (big hit start) of the big hit scenario (S2303: Yes), a big hit opening command is set (S2304), and this processing is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not the opening start timing of the jackpot scenario (S2303: No), it is then judged whether it is the start timing of a new round of the jackpot scenario (S2305).

  If it is determined in the process of S2305 that it is the start timing of a new round of the jackpot scenario (S2305: Yes), the jackpot operation setting process for setting the opening / closing operation of the specified winning opening 650a in jackpot is executed ( S2306), this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2305 that it is not the start timing of a new round of the jackpot scenario (S2305: No), it is next determined whether the round end condition of the currently executed round is met ( S2307). Here, in the present embodiment, while the first specified winning opening 65a or the second specified winning opening 650a is open, a total of a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls are won in total, or When the opening period of the specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a has passed a predetermined time (30 seconds), it is determined that the round end condition is satisfied. If it is determined that the round end condition is satisfied (S2307: Yes), the processing of S2308 is set to close the first specified winning opening 65a or the second specified winning opening 650a which is currently open, This process ends. The above-described determination processing of S2305 to S2307 is repeatedly executed for the number of rounds of the jackpot set in the jackpot scenario.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2307 that the round end condition of the currently executed round is not satisfied (S2307: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of ending effect (S2309). If it is the start timing of (S2309: Yes), the jackpot ending command is set (S2310), and this processing ends. The ending command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S2201) of the main process (see FIG. 52) executed by the MPU 201, the voice lamp control It is sent to the device 113. When the audio lamp control device 113 receives the ending command, it transmits the ending command for display to the display control device 114. When the display ending command is received by the display control device 114, an ending effect indicating the end of the jackpot is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2309 that it is not the start timing of ending effect (S2309: No), it is determined whether it is the end timing of the big hit (S2311). Here, the end timing of the jackpot indicates the case where the execution period of the ending effect has passed. If it is determined in the processing of S2311 that the end timing of the jackpot is reached (S2311: Yes), the jackpot end processing for setting the gaming state after the jackpot end is executed (S2312), and the present processing is ended. The details of the jackpot end process (S2312) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, if it is not the end timing of the big hit (S2311: No), this processing ends as it is.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 54, the jackpot end processing (S2312) which is one of the jackpot control processing (S2204 in FIG. 53) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110 will be described. The jackpot end process (S2312) is a process for setting the gaming state after the jackpot end, as described above. FIG. 54 is a flow chart showing the contents of the jackpot end process (S2312).

  In the jackpot end processing (S2312), first, the gaming state at the time of winning is specified based on the winning state storage area 203j (S2401). Next, it is determined whether or not the present jackpot is a probability variation jackpot (a jackpot type in which the probability variation flag 203g is set to ON after the termination of the jackpot game) (S2402). Here, in the process of S2402, the determination is performed based on the jackpot type set this time. If it is determined in the process of S2402 that the present jackpot is a probability variation jackpot (S2402: Yes), the probability variation flag 203g is set to ON (S2403), and the process shifts to the processing of S2404. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2402 that the current jackpot is not a probability variation jackpot (S2402: No), the process of S2403 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2404. Thereby, the low probability state of the special symbol is set as the gaming state after the big hit.

  Next, the value corresponding to the gaming state at the time of winning and the jackpot type read out in the process of S2401 is set in the time reduction counter 203f (S2404). Specifically, when "big hit A" is set as the big hit type, "10,000" is set to the value of the time reduction counter 203f to continue the high probability state of the normal symbol until the next big hit, "big hit B When “is set, the value of the hour reduction counter 203f is set to“ 100 ”in order to continue the high probability state of the normal symbol until the number of times of variation of the special symbol becomes 100 times.

  When the process of S2404 is finished, the jackpot flag 203o is then set to OFF, and the winning state storage area 203j is cleared (S2405). Thereafter, a state command corresponding to the set gaming state is set (S2406), and this processing is ended.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, at the end of the jackpot game, the jackpot type of the jackpot won this time and the gaming state at the time of winning are determined, and two condition elements for setting the gaming state after the jackpot game end The contents of (the probability change flag 203g and the time reduction counter 203f) are set. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to both the jackpot type of the winning jackpot and the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 55, the small hitting control process (S2205) which is one process in the main process (see FIG. 52) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110 will be described. FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the contents of this small hitting control process (S2205).

  In the small hitting control process (S2205), first, it is judged whether a small hitting scenario is set (S2501). Specifically, the process of S1604 of the special view 2 off stop process (see FIG. 46) is executed to determine whether a small hit scenario is set. If the small hitting scenario is not set in the process of S2501 (S2501: No), this process is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, if the small hitting scenario is set in the process of S2501 (S2501: Yes), the small hitting scenario is updated (S2502), and it is determined whether it is the opening start timing of the small hitting scenario (S2503). More specifically, 1 is added to the counter value of the small hitting scenario counter (not shown) in the process of S2502, and the counter value of the small hitting scenario counter (not shown) in the process of S2503 is the small hitting scenario. Determine whether it is a value corresponding to the opening start of.

  If it is determined in the process of S2503 that it is the opening start timing of the small hitting scenario (S2503: Yes), the small hitting opening command is set (S2504), and this process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the opening start timing of the small hitting scenario (S2503: No), it is then determined whether it is the round starting timing of the small hitting scenario (S2505).

  If it is determined in the process of S2505 that it is the timing to start the round of the small hitting scenario (S2505: Yes), the small hitting operation setting process is executed (S2506), and this process is ended. The details of the small hitting operation setting process (S2506) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not the timing of the round start of the small hitting scenario (S2505: No), it is then determined whether the round end condition of the currently executed round is satisfied (S2507). Here, in the present embodiment, while the specified winning opening 65a is open, when a predetermined number of balls (for example, five) in total are won, or the opening period of the specified winning opening 65a has passed a predetermined time. If so, it is determined that the round end condition is satisfied.

  When it is determined in the process of S2507 that the round end condition of the round currently being executed is satisfied (S2507: Yes), the specific winning opening 65a is set to be closed in the process of S2508, and this process is performed. Finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the round end condition of the specific winning opening 65a is not satisfied (S2507: No), it is determined whether it is the timing to start the ending effect (S2509).

  If it is determined in the processing of S2509 that it is the timing for starting the ending effect (S2509: Yes), the small hitting ending command is set (S2510), and this processing is ended. The ending command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S2201) of the main process (see FIG. 52) executed by the MPU 201, the voice lamp control It is sent to the device 113. When the audio lamp control device 113 receives the ending command, it transmits the ending command for display to the display control device 114. When the display ending command is received by the display control device 114, an ending effect indicating the end of the jackpot is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2509 that it is not the start timing of ending effect (S2509: No), it is determined whether it is the end timing of the small hitting (S2511). Here, the end timing of the small hit indicates a case where the execution period of the ending effect has passed.

  If it is determined in the process of S2511 that the end timing of the small hit is reached (S2511: Yes), the small hit middle flag 203p is set to OFF (S2512), and the present process is ended. On the other hand, if it is not the end timing of the small hit (S2511: No), the second winning process is executed (S2513), and the present process is ended. The details of the second winning process (S2513) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 56, the small hitting operation setting process (S2506) which is one process in the small hitting control process (S2506 in FIG. 56) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 will be described. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing the contents of the small hitting operation setting process (S2506).

  In the small hit operation setting process (S2506), first, an open scenario in which an open operation corresponding to the number of small rounds to be started is set is read (S2601). The opening operation of the specific winning opening 65a is set by the data read in the process of S2601 (S2602), and this process is ended.

  As described above, since each operation of the variable winning device 65 is set at each start of each round, even if an unexpected power failure occurs during a big hit game, the big hit game is ended halfway Problems can be suppressed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 57, the details of the second winning process (S2513) which is one process in the small hitting control process (S2506 in FIG. 56) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 57 is a flow chart showing this second winning process (S2513). The second winning process (S2513) is executed in the small hitting control process (see FIG. 55), and as described above, is a process for performing control according to the winning on the specific winning opening 65a.

  In the second winning process (S2513), first, it is determined whether or not the present is a round effective period (S2701). Here, the round effective period is a period in which a round game is set, that is, a period from when the specific winning opening 65a is set to the open state to when the interval period (five seconds) ends. In the process of S2701, if it is not a round effective period (S2701: No), the winning counter 203u is reset (S2702), and this process is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2701 that the present is a round effective period (S2701: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the winning of the specified winning opening 65a is detected (S2703), and the specific winning opening 65a If no winning is not detected (S2703: No), this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2703, if the winning of the specific winning opening 65a is detected (S2703: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the winning counter 203u for updating (S2704). Then, it is determined whether the value of the winning counter 203u is equal to or more than the upper limit (5 in the present embodiment) (S2705), and if the value of the winning counter 203u is equal to or less than the upper limit (5 in the present embodiment) S2705: No), this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if the value of the winning counter 203u is equal to or more than the upper limit (5 in the present embodiment) (S2705: Yes), closing of the specific winning opening 65a (opening / closing plate 65f1 attached thereto) is set (S2706). Next, the small hit scenario is updated to the end of the round (S2707), and the process ends.

<About control processing of voice lamp control device in the first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 58 to FIG. The processing of the MPU 221 can be roughly classified into a start-up process which is started upon turning on the power and a main process which is executed after the start-up process.

  First, with reference to FIG. 58, the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process is performed upon power-on (S4001). Specifically, a predetermined value determined in advance is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether the power-off process flag is on or not, the power-on process of S4117 is performed due to a momentary voltage drop (a momentary power failure, so-called "temporary power failure") in the current startup process (see FIG. 59). It is judged whether or not it is started during the execution of (S4002). As described later with reference to FIG. 59, the audio lamp control device 113 executes the power-off process of S4117 when the power-off occurrence information is received from the main control device 110 (see S4114 of FIG. 59). The power-off processing flag is turned on before the power-off processing is performed, and the power-off processing flag is turned off after the power-off processing is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power-off process in S4117 is being executed can be determined based on the state of the power-off process flag.

  If the power-off process flag is off (S4002: No), the current start-up process is started after the power is completely shut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power-off of S4117 occurs. It was started after completing execution of the process, or was started after reset (only without receiving a power-off command from the main control unit 110) by resetting only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control unit 113 due to noise or the like. is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is checked whether the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S4003).

  Confirmation of data corruption in the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of “55 AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S4006. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is "55 AAh", there is no data destruction of the RAM 223, and conversely, if "55 AAh", the data destruction of the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If data corruption in the RAM 223 is confirmed (S4003: Yes), the process proceeds to S4004 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data corruption in the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S4003: No), the process proceeds to S4008.

  In addition, since the keyword of "55AAh" is not memorize | stored in the specific area | region of RAM223 when the start-up process this time is started after the power supply was cut off completely (The memory of RAM223 is lost by power-off. ) Is judged to be data destruction of the RAM 223 (S4003: Yes), and the process moves to S4004. On the other hand, the current start-up process is started after completing the execution of the power-off process of S4116 after a momentary power failure occurs, or reset only to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. If it is started, the keyword “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, so the data of the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S4003: No), and the process moves to S4008.

  If the power-off process flag is on (S4002: Yes), the current start-up process is after an instantaneous power failure, and the voice lamp control device 113 is performed during the execution of the power-off process of S4117. The MPU 221 is reset and started. In such a case, since the power-off process is being executed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct. Therefore, since the control can not be continued in such a case, the process proceeds to S4004 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the process of S4004, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S4004). As a check method, first, “0FFh” is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is “0FFh”, and if “0FFh”, it is determined that it is normal. The writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” next to “0FFh”. By the read / write check of the RAM 223, all storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to zero.

  If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S4005: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set RAM destruction check data (S4006). By checking the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether there is data corruption in the RAM 223 or not. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read / write check is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S4005: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S4007), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is shut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. Note that the voice output device 226 may output a voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be sent to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. You may

  In the process of S4008, it is determined whether the power-off flag 223y is turned on (S4008). The power-off flag 223y is turned on when the power-off process of S4117 is performed (see S4116 in FIG. 59). That is, since the power-off flag 223y is turned on before the power-off processing of S4117 is performed, the process of S4008 in the state where the power-off flag 223y is turned on is that the current start-up process is This is the case where the power failure process of the step S4117 is started after completion of the power failure process. Therefore, in such a case (S4008: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each processing of the audio lamp control device 113 (S4009), and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S4010). The state setting area 223 j is updated based on the command (S 4011). Next, interrupt permission is set (S4012), and the process proceeds to the main processing. The work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than the area for storing a command or the like received from the main control device 110.

  On the other hand, the reason for reaching the processing of S4008 when the power-off flag 223y is turned off is, for example, the processing of S4004 to S4006 is performed via the processing of S4004 because the current startup processing is started after the power is completely shut off. Or the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset only due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S4008: No), S4009 which is the clear process of the work area of the RAM 223 is skipped, the process proceeds to S4010, and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S4010).

  When the process of S4009 skips the process of S4009 when the process of S4008 is performed via the processes of S4004 to S4006, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S4004. If the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset only due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data of the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, and the audio lamp control device 113 is stored. It is because control of can be continued.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 59, the main processing executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 after the start-up processing of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing this main processing. When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not one millisecond or more has elapsed since the main process was started or the process of S4101 was performed last time (S4101), and one millisecond If the above has not elapsed (S4101: No), the processing proceeds to S4112 without performing the processing of S4102 to S4111. In the process of S4101, the process of determining whether 1 millisecond has elapsed is a process related to display (rendering) in S4102 to S4111, and it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 millisecond). This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination process of S4112 and the variable display setting process of S4113 in a short cycle. Since the process of S4112 is executed in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent reception omission of the command transmitted from main controller 110, and by executing the process of S4113 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process Setting based on the variable display effect can be performed without delay.

  If one millisecond or more has elapsed in the process of S4101 (S4101: Yes), first, various commands to the display control apparatus 114 set by the processes of S4103 to S4113 are transmitted to the display control apparatus 114 ( S4102). Next, the setting of the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the output of each lamp are set to be the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S4108 described later (S4103), and then the power on notification process is executed (S4104). The power on notification process is to notify that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is made by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. It will be. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 so as to notify that power is supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to step S4105 without performing notification by the power on notification process.

  In the process of S4105, the customer waiting effect is executed, and then the number-of-helds display update process is executed (S4106). In the customer waiting effect, when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player for a predetermined time, a setting is made to switch the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen, and the setting is displayed as a command. It is sent to 114.

  Thereafter, the frame button input monitoring and effect process is executed (S4107). In this frame button input monitoring and effect processing, the input whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed in order to enhance the effect is monitored, and the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. It is a process set to perform an effect. In this process, when an operation by the player of the frame button 22 is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set.

  When the frame button input monitoring / rendering process is finished, next, the lamp editing process is executed (S4108), and then the sound editing / output process is executed (S4109). In the lamp editing process, lighting patterns and the like of the electric decoration portions 29 to 33 are set to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output processing, the output pattern of the audio output device 226 is set to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the audio output device 226 according to the setting.

  After the process of S4109, a liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S4110). Thereafter, the process proceeds to the process of S4111. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set. The lamp editing process of S4108 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. In addition, the sound editing / output processing of S4109 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

  After the process of S4110, various counter update processes are executed (S4111), and the process shifts to the process of S4112. The details of the various counter update processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After that, a command determination process (S4112) for performing a process according to the command received from the main control apparatus 110 is executed, and the process shifts to the process of S4113. Details of the command determination process (S4112) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S4113, in order to display the variation display effect on the third symbol display device 81, a variation pattern command for display is generated based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, and the command is displayed control device 114 The variable display setting process, which is a process to be set to transmit the image data, is executed (S4113). The details of the variation display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the process of S4113 is completed, it is determined whether or not the occurrence information of the power-off is stored in the work RAM 233 (S4114). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main control device 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S4113 (S4114: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off process flag are turned on (S4116), and the power-off process is executed (S4117). After the power-off process is executed, the power-off process flag is turned off (S4118), and then the process is looped endlessly. In the power-off process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is inhibited, and each output port is turned off, and the outputs from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are turned off. In addition, the storage of the occurrence information of the power-off is also erased.

  On the other hand, if the occurrence information of the power-off is not stored in the process of S4114 (S4114: No), it is judged based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed (S4115) and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S4115: No), the process returns to S4101, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S4115: Yes), the processing is infinitely looped to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, since the main processing is not executed if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and the loop is infinite, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change thereafter. Therefore, the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, and can call a clerk or the like in the hall to ask for repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, notification of the destruction of the RAM may be performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 60, the command determination processing (S4112) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (S4112). This command determination process (S4112) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 59) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. . The details of the command determination process (S4112) will be described below.

  In the command determination process (S4112), first, the first command received from the main control unit 110 among the unprocessed commands is read out from the command storage area 223a provided in the RAM 223 and analyzed, and the special view from the main control unit 110 It is determined whether a 1 stop type command or a special view 2 stop type command has been received (S4201). When it is determined that the special figure 1 stop type command or the special view 2 stop type command is received (S4201: Yes), the stop type command reception process is executed (S4202), and this process is ended. The details of the stop type command reception process (S4202) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4201 that neither the special figure 1 stop type command nor the special figure 2 stop type command has been received (S4201: No), whether a state command has been received from the main control device 110 (S4203). If it is determined that a status command has been received (S4203: Yes), status command processing is executed (S4204), and this processing ends. The details of this state command processing (S4204) will be described later with reference to FIG. 62, but based on the state command output from the main control device 110, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (normal state, positive change state, latency) A process of setting state) in the state setting area 223 j is executed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4203 that the status command has not been received (S4203: No), it is determined whether the special view 1 fluctuation pattern command has been received (S4205). Here, the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command is a command for notifying the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the first special symbol.

  In the process of S4205, when it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command is received (S4205: Yes), the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S4206), The variation pattern type is extracted from the special figure 1 variation pattern command (S4207), and this processing ends. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 in a format that can identify that it is the variation pattern type of the first special symbol, and in the variation display setting process (see FIG. 69) described later. , When notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variation display effect of the first special symbol and the display mode of the variation display effect of the first special symbol (setting the variation pattern command for display of the first special symbol In the case of

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the special view 1 change pattern command has not been received (S4205: No), it is determined whether the special view 2 change pattern command has been received from the main control device 110 (S4208). In addition, the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command is a command for notifying the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the second special symbol.

  If it is determined in the process of S4208 that the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command has been received (S4208: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S4209). The variation pattern type is extracted from the variation pattern command (S4210), and the process ends. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 in a format that can be identified as the variation pattern type of the second special symbol, and in the variation display setting process (see FIG. 69) described later When notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variation display effect of the second special symbol and the display mode of the variation display effect of the second special symbol (setting the variation pattern command for display of the second special symbol In the case of

  If it is determined in the process of S4208 that the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command has not been received (S4208: No), it is determined whether or not the ball holding ball number command has been received from the main control device 110 (S4211). If it is determined that the holding ball number command has been received (S4211: Yes), the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 included in the received holding ball number command (that is, the first The number of balls held for variation display of special symbol) is extracted, and the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223c provided in the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 is updated according to the extracted counter value ( S4212), this processing ends. In the present embodiment, the second special symbol (special figure 2) does not have a configuration for holding the lottery of the special symbol (special figure 2), so in the process of S4212 the value of the first special symbol (special figure 1) holding ball number counter 223c Only the process to update is executed.

  Here, since the holding ball number command is transmitted from the main control unit 110 when the ball wins (start winning) at the first ball entrance 64, the process of S4212 is performed each time there is a starting winning. The value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 can be adjusted to the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110. Therefore, even if the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 deviates from the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise etc. If the ball holding number command is notified based on winning, the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 is corrected, and the first special symbol holding ball number of the main control unit 110 It can be adjusted to the value of the counter 203 d.

  If it is determined in the process of S4211 that the holding ball number command has not been received (S4211: No), it is determined whether a winning information command has been received from the main control device 110 (S4213). In the process of S4213, when it is determined that the winning information command has been received (S4213: Yes), the winning information corresponding to the information of the received winning information command (the special symbol lottery success or failure, the hit type, and the variation pattern) It sets to the storage area 223b (S4214), and ends this processing.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4213 that no winning information command has been received (S4213: No), it is determined whether or not the winning related command has been received from the main control device (S4215). If it is determined in the process of S4215 that a win related command has been received (S4215: Yes), a win related process is executed (S4216), and this process ends. The details of the hit-related processing (S4216) will be described later with reference to FIG. 63, but the effect corresponding to the jackpot game or the small hit game executed when the jackpot or the small hit is won as a result of the drawing of the special symbol. A process for causing the third symbol display device 81 to execute display is performed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4215 that the win related command has not been received (S4215: No), it is determined whether a remaining short command has been received from the main control unit 110 (S4217). If it is determined in the process of S4217 that the remaining time short number command has been received (S4217: Yes), the remaining number of times update process (S4218) is executed. The details of the remaining number updating process (S4218) will be described with reference to FIG. 66, but for displaying on the third symbol display device 81 based on the remaining time short number command output from the main control device 110 A process of setting the contents of the effect display is executed.

  If it is determined in the process of S4217 that the remaining short command is not received (S4217: No), it is determined whether a temporary stop related command has been received from the main control device 110 (S4219). If it is determined in the process of S4219 that the temporary stop related command has been received (S4219: Yes), the temporary stop related process is executed (S4220), and the present process ends. The details of temporary stop related processing (S4220) will be described later with reference to FIG. When the special figure 1 fluctuation resumption command or the special figure 2 fluctuation resumption command is received, processing for setting an effect (additional effect) to be executed by the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S4219 that the temporary stop related command has not been received (S4219: No), the process according to the other commands is executed (S4221), and the present process is ended. In the process of S4221, if the other command is a command used by the audio lamp control device 113, processing corresponding to that command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if it is a command used by the display control device 114, the command To send the display control device 114 to the display control device 114.

  As described above, in the command determination process (S4112 of FIG. 60) executed by the voice lamp control device 113 according to the present embodiment, the process of determining whether a status command has been received (see S4203 of FIG. 60) The processing is configured in the previous stage of the processing (see S4205 and S4208 in FIG. 60) of determining whether the variation pattern command of each special symbol has been received.

  By configuring in this manner, when the variation pattern command and the state command are simultaneously output from main controller 110, that is, during the first special symbol variation start process (see S208 in FIG. 33) of main controller 110. Then, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (see S307 in FIG. 33) is executed, the special figure 1 variation pattern command is set, and then in the gaming state update process (see S308 in FIG. 33) executed Even when the state command indicating that the state is changed is set, the gaming state currently set on the audio lamp control device 113 can be determined earlier than the special view 1 variation pattern command.

  Therefore, when the jackpot of the special figure 1 is won in the state where the definite variation state is set, and the latent state is set during the jackpot variation, the audio lamp control device 113 side is set that the latent state is set. It is possible to easily set the fluctuation effect (see FIG. 7A) corresponding to the fluctuation pattern command that causes the jackpot fluctuation in the determined state.

  Note that, unlike the configuration of the present embodiment, when the processing according to the variation pattern command is performed at the previous stage of the determination processing of the state command, the variation pattern command corresponding to the above-mentioned big hit variation Only the information indicating that the jackpot has been won by the first special symbol lottery in the state is first received, and the variable display according to the received content is set. Therefore, it becomes difficult to execute the variable display indicating that the latent state has been set at the same time that the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is started. By delaying the variable display indicating that the latent state has been set as described above, the timing for notifying the player that the right-handed game is to be played is delayed, which makes the player uncomfortable. The problem arises of giving.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, on the main control device 110 side, the game state is changed after the jackpot determination (see S306 in FIG. 33) and the change pattern setting (S307 in FIG. 33) While the (playing state updating process (S308 in FIG. 33) is executed, the voice lamp control device 113 first executes a process (S4204 in FIG. 60) for determining the current playing state, and thereafter The variable display corresponding to the fluctuation pattern is set. Therefore, it is possible to reliably prevent the variable display corresponding to the previous game state from being set and executed although the latent state is set.

  Further, by configuring the audio lamp control device 113 side to define the reception order of various commands output from the main control device 110, it is necessary to define the output order of various commands on the main control device 110 side. Can be reduced. Therefore, the control load of main controller 110 can be reduced.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 61, stop type command reception processing (S4202) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing the stop type command reception process (S4202). The stop type command reception process (S4202) is executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 60) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. The details of the stop type command reception process (S4202) will be described below.

  In the stop type command reception process (S4202), first, when the special view 1 stop type command is received corresponding to the received command, the special view 1 stop type selection flag 223f is set to ON, and the special view 2 is selected. When the stop type command is received, the special view 2 stop type selection flag 223g is set to ON (S4301). Next, the stop type (big hit A to big hit G, small hit A to small hit C, out of reach, out of reach, etc.) is extracted from the received special view 1 stop type command or special view 2 stop type command (S4302). End the process.

  The type of stop extracted in S4302 is stored in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. In addition, the stop type extracted from the special figure 1 stop type command can distinguish that it is the stop type of the first special symbol, and the stop type extracted from the special view 2 stop type command is the second special symbol The types of stop are stored so as to be identifiable. Thereby, even if the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the second special symbol (special figure 2) start to change simultaneously, it becomes possible to manage the stop type respectively, and execute appropriate change display Can.

  Next, referring to FIG. 62, state command processing (S4204) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing the state command processing (S4204). This state command process (S4204) is executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 60) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. The details of the state command processing (S4204) will be described below.

  In this state command processing (S4204), processing is performed to set the current gaming state to the state setting area 223j based on the state command output from the main control unit 110, and the gaming state shifts to the latent state Processing for setting an effect (chance zone effect (see FIG. 6B)) for notifying the player that the latent state is set, and the gaming state has shifted to the normal state. In this case, processing for clearing various flags and counters used to display the card forgetting alert screen (see FIG. 10A) is executed.

  In the state command processing (S4204), first, from the value of the state setting area 223j provided in the RAM 223, the gaming state before receiving the state command is determined (S4401). That is, it is determined in which gaming state the state command has been received. Next, it is determined whether the gaming state before receiving the state command is the latent state (S4402). If it is determined that the gaming state before receiving the state command is not the latent state (S4402: No), it is determined whether the received command is a state command indicating transition to the latent state (S4403). In the process of S4403, when the received command is a state command indicating transition to the latent state (S4403: Yes), a latent notification annotating effect for notifying entry of the latent state is set (S4404). Then, the value corresponding to the gaming state notified by the received state command is stored in the state setting area 223 j (S 4405), and the process proceeds to the processing of S 4406.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of 4402 that the gaming state before receiving the state command is the latent state (S4402: Yes), the processing of S4403 and S4404 is skipped, and the processing of S4405 is executed. Transfer to the processing of S4406. If it is determined in step S4403 that the received command is not a state command indicating transition to the latent state (S4403: NO), the processing in steps S4404 and S4405 is skipped, and the process proceeds to step S4406.

  Next, it is determined whether the received command is a state command indicating transition to a normal state (S4406). If it is determined that the received command is not a state command indicating transition to the normal state (S4406: No), the processing of S4407 to S4410 is skipped, the processing of S4411 described later is executed, and this processing is ended. . On the other hand, if it is determined that the received command is a status command indicating transition to the normal status (S4406: Yes), it is determined whether the card notification completion flag 223q is set to ON (S4407). If it is determined that the card notification completion flag 223q is set to ON (S4407: Yes), the value of the award ball number counter 223u is cleared to 0 (S4408), the card notification completion flag 223q, and the card notification available flag The flag 223t is set to off for the rush display flag 223t (S4409). Next, the contents of the remaining fluctuation time information storage area 223o and the remaining time storage area 223p are cleared (S4410), and a value corresponding to the gaming state notified by the other state command is stored in the state setting area 223j (S4411) This processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4407 that the card informing completion flag 223q is set to off (S4407: No), the processes of S4408 and S4409 are skipped, and the processes of S4410 and S4411 are executed. End the process.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 63, the hit related process (S4216) which is one process in the command determination process (see FIG. 60) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 63 is a flow chart showing the contents of the hit related process (S4216). In this hit-related processing, as a result of the lottery of the special symbol, the processing for making the third symbol display device 81 execute the effect display corresponding to the jackpot game or the small hit game executed when winning in the big hit or small hit Processing is performed in response to various commands transmitted from the main control unit 110 when the player wins a jackpot or a jackpot.

  In addition, when a prize ball number command for indicating the number of prize balls acquired during a hit game (big hit game, small hit game) is received, the number of prize balls indicated by the prize ball number command is accumulated and accumulated. A process for displaying a card forgetting reminder screen (see FIG. 10A) is executed based on the result.

  In the hit related process (S4216), first, it is determined whether the command received in the command determination process (see FIG. 60) has received the jackpot related command (S4501). When it is determined that the received command is the jackpot related command (S4501: Yes), the jackpot related process is executed (S4502), and the process ends.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 64, the jackpot related process (S4502) will be described which is one process in the hit related process (S4216 in FIG. 63) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot related process (S4502). In the jackpot-related processing, processing is performed to cause the third symbol display device 81 to execute the effect display corresponding to the jackpot game executed when the jackpot is won, and when the jackpot is won, the main control device Processing corresponding to various commands transmitted from 110 is executed.

  In the jackpot-related process (S4502), first, it is determined whether or not the hit-related command received in the hit-related process (S4216) has received the jackpot start command (S4601). When the jackpot start command is received (S4601: Yes), the display jackpot start command is set (S4602), and the process ends. The display jackpot start command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S4102) of the main process (see FIG. 59) executed by the MPU 221, It is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display jackpot start command, the display control device 114 displays an effect indicating the start of the jackpot on the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4601 that the big hit start command has not been received (S4601: No), it is determined whether a round number command has been received (S4603). If the round number command has been received (S4603: Yes), the display round number command is set based on the number of rounds (S4604), and the process ends. In the present embodiment, since the information indicating the number of rounds is transmitted from the main control device 110 as the number-of-rounds command, the round number command for display is set based on the received number of rounds command. In the case where information for indicating that a new round has been started is transmitted as a round update command from the main control unit 110 in order to reduce the volume of command data transmitted from the control unit 110, the voice lamp control unit The round number accumulation counter for accumulating the number of round update commands received is provided in the RAM 223 of the 113 when the round update command is received, and the current round on the voice lamp control device 113 side based on the value of the round number accumulation counter. Calculate the number and configure the number of display rounds command Good.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4603 that the round number command has not been received (S4603: No), it is determined whether the ending command has been received (S4605). If it is determined that the ending command has not been received (S4605: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the ending command has been received (S4605: Yes), the display ending command is set (S4606), and it is determined whether the card notification completion flag 223q is set to ON (S4607). If it is determined that the card notification completion flag 223q is set to ON (S4607: Yes), a display ending command not including card notification is set (S4608). That is, the process for not displaying the display mode of FIG. 10A on the third symbol display device 81 is executed, and the present process is ended.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4607 that the card notification completion flag 223q is not set on (ie, off) (S4607: No), the current jackpot type is the jackpot A or jackpot B It is determined whether or not (S4609). If it is determined that the present jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B (S4609: Yes), the display ending command including card notification is set (S4610), and the card notification completion flag 223q is set to ON. (S4611). That is, the process for displaying the display mode of FIG. 10A on the third symbol display device 81 is executed, and the present process is ended.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the present jackpot type is not the jackpot A or the jackpot B (S4609: No), it is determined whether the card notification enable flag 223s is set to ON (S4612). If it is determined that the card notification enable flag 223s is set to ON (S4612: YES), the card notification enable flag 223s is set to OFF (S4613), and the above-described processing of S4610 to S4611 is executed to execute End the process. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4612 that the card notification enable flag 223s is not set to ON (S4612: No), the process of S4608 described above is executed, and the present process is ended.

  As described above, in the jackpot-related process (S4502 in FIG. 64), various display modes displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 during the jackpot game are gaming information (opening, In addition to the processing of setting the display content of the ending and the number of rounds, processing of whether or not to display a card forgetting reminder screen (see FIG. 10A) is configured to be executed.

  In this card forgetting alert screen, when the player wins a predetermined amount (for example, 250 shots) of winning balls in a game (big hit game, small hit game), the player borrows a card (balls) It is a notification mode for calling attention so as not to forget the valuable medium used at the time. In the present embodiment, the card described above is satisfied when the number of winning balls obtained in the period from the normal state to the jackpot and from the transition to the normal state (continuous advantage period) satisfies the predetermined amount. It is configured to display a reminder screen.

  Specifically, as described above with reference to FIG. 64, in the jackpot (first hit) won in the normal state, a jackpot (jackpot A, a jackpot that can easily obtain a prize ball exceeding a predetermined amount (for example, 250 shots) When the jackpot B) is won, the card notification to display the card forgetting alert screen at the end of the jackpot game is executed, and when the other jackpot (jackpot C, jackpot D) is won, the card notification is executed It is configured not to.

  By configuring in this manner, it is possible to suppress a situation in which a card forgetting alert screen is displayed for a player who has not obtained a predetermined amount of winning balls, and to continue playing a game while borrowing the balls. It is possible to prevent the player who feels off feeling uncomfortable.

  Furthermore, the present embodiment is configured to be able to set the gaming state (latency state) that is easy to execute the small hit game frequently in addition to the big hit game, so the player can repeat the small hit game repeatedly. In some cases, a predetermined amount (for example, 250 shots) of winning balls may be obtained. Therefore, the number of winning balls acquired by the player during the advantageous duration (the number of winning balls to be paid out during the advantageous period) is accumulated, and when the accumulated result exceeds a predetermined amount (250 shots), execution is performed at that time. It is configured to display a card forgetting alert screen on the ending screen of the middle jackpot game or the small jackpot game. Thereby, the card forgetting alert screen can be displayed to the player at an appropriate timing.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, it is comprised so that a card forgetting alerting screen may be alert | reported only once in one advantageous continuation period. As a result, the card forgetting alert screen is frequently displayed, and it is possible to suppress giving the player an unpleasant feeling. Note that the method for displaying the card forgetting alert screen is not limited to the contents of the present embodiment. For example, a measuring unit for measuring an advantageous continuation period is provided, and an elapsed period since the card forgetting alert screen was displayed last time When the time exceeds a predetermined period (for example, 10 minutes), the card forgetting alert screen may be displayed again. In this case, since the card forgetting reminder screen is displayed once (because the display condition for displaying the card forgetting alert screen is already satisfied), during the special symbol variation period (for example, during the advantageous continuation period) It is good to constitute so that a card forgetting alert screen may be displayed when a fluctuation pattern of 5 seconds or more is selected.

  By configuring in this manner, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the current game situation by using the fixed concept of the player that the card forgetting alert screen is displayed after the end of the big hit game. In addition, as a method for achieving the same effect, the jackpot warning screen may be displayed using the opening period of the small hit game.

  Referring back to FIG. 63, the description will be continued. When it is determined in the process of S4501 that the received command is not the jackpot related command (S4501), it is determined whether the received command has received the small hit related command (S4503). If it is determined that the received command is a small hit related command (S4503: Yes), a small hit related process (S4504) is executed, and the process is ended.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 65, the small hit related process (S4504) which is one process in the hit related process (S4216 in FIG. 63) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing the contents of the small hitting related process (S4504). In the small hit related processing, processing is performed to cause the third symbol display device 81 to execute the effect display corresponding to the small hit game executed when the small hit is won, and when the small hit is won. Processing corresponding to various commands transmitted from main controller 110 is executed.

  In the small hit related process (S4504), first, it is determined whether the hit related command received in the hit related process (S4216) has received a small hit start command (S4701). When the small hitting start command is received (S4701: Yes), the small hitting display start command is set (S4702), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S4701 that the received command is not the small hit start command (S4701: No), it is determined whether the ending command has been received (S4703). If it is determined that the received command is not an ending command (S4703: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the received command is the ending command (S 4703: Yes), the display ending command is set (S 4704), and it is determined whether the card notification completion flag 223 q is set to ON (S 4705) . If it is determined that the card notification completion flag 223 q is set to ON (S 4705: Yes), a display ending command not including card notification is set (S 4706), and this processing is ended.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4705 that the card notification end flag 223q is not set to ON (S4705: No), it is determined whether the card notification enable flag 223s is set to ON (S4707). If it is determined that the card notification enable flag 223s is set to on (S4707: Yes), the card notification enable flag 223s is set to off (S4708), and a display ending command including card notification is set ( In step S4709, the card notification completion flag 223q is set to on (S4710), and the process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S4707, the card notification enable flag 223s is not set to ON (S4707: No), the process of S4706 described above is executed, and the present process is ended.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, after winning a jackpot in a normal state, even in a small hit game in which the display condition for displaying the card forgetting alert screen is not displayed in one game in the present embodiment, If the cumulative value of the number of winning balls acquired in the gaming period (the advantageous continuation period) until the normal state is set again satisfies the display condition (for example, the number of winning balls reaches 250), the small hit The card forgetting alert screen is displayed even after the game is over. Thereby, the card forgetting alert screen can be displayed to the player at an appropriate timing.

  Referring back to FIG. 63, the description will be continued. When it is determined in the process of S4503 that the received command is not a small hit related command (S4503: No), it is determined whether or not a winning ball command has been received (S4505). If it is determined that the received command is not a winning ball command (S4505: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the received command is a prize ball command (S4505: Yes), the value corresponding to the received command is added to the value of the prize ball counter 223u (S4506), and then the card It is determined whether the notification completion flag 223 q is set to on (S 4507). If it is determined that the card notification completion flag 223q is not set to ON (S4507: No), it is determined whether the value of the award ball number counter 223u added in the process of S4506 is 250 or more (S4508). If it is determined that the value of the award ball number counter 223u after the addition is 250 or more (S4508: Yes), the card notification enable flag 223s is set to ON (S4509), and the display ball number command is set. (S4510), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4507 that the card informing completion flag 223q is set to ON (S4507: Yes), or that the number-of-winnings ball counter 223u after the addition is less than 250 in the process of S4508. When it discriminate | determines (S4508: No), the process of S4509 mentioned above is skipped, the process of S4510 is performed and this process is complete | finished.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is determined by the state command processing (see S4204 in FIG. 62) that the normal state has been set, and the value of the award ball number counter 223u is cleared. The winning balls number counter 223 u is configured to accumulate the winning balls number corresponding to the winning balls number command received during the period up to (the advantageous continuation period). Then, it is configured to display a card forgetting alert screen according to the value of the award ball number counter 223 u at the end of the winning game (big hit game, small hit game) (at the ending screen display timing).

  Thus, for example, when the jackpot (first hit) that is the trigger for setting the advantageous duration is a jackpot C (a jackpot in which it is difficult to obtain a predetermined amount (250 shots) of winning balls in one jackpot game) In the case of winning the small hitting game during the advantageous continuation period, or when winning the big hit C again, the card forgetting alert screen can be displayed.

  Next, the remaining number updating process (S4218) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 66 is a flow chart showing the contents of the remaining number updating process (S4218). This remaining number of times updating process (S4218) is executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 60) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and the remaining time shorter number of commands from the main control device 110. On the basis of having received, the process of updating the contents set in the remaining short time area 223k, the remaining fluctuation time information storage area 223o, and the remaining time storage area 223p is executed.

  In the remaining number updating process (S4218), first, it is determined whether a remaining time short number command has been received from the main control device 110 (S4801). If it is determined that the remaining short command has not been received (S4801: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4801 that the remaining short time number command has been received (S4801: Yes), a display short time number command corresponding to the received command is set (S4802), and this process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 67, the contents of the temporary stop related process (S4220) will be described. FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing the contents of the temporary stop related process (S4220). In this temporary stop related process (S4220), a process for determining the remaining time of the special view fluctuation time when the special view temporary stop command is received, and the third symbol display device when the special view 1 fluctuation restart command is received. A process of setting an effect (additional effect) to be executed at 81 is executed.

  When temporary stop related processing (S4220) is executed, first, it is determined whether the special view temporary stop command has been received (S4901), and when it is determined that it has not been received (S4901: No), fluctuation restart processing Execute (S4902). Details of the fluctuation restart process (S4902) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S4901 that the special figure 1 temporary stop command has been received (S4901: Yes), the remaining fluctuation time of the currently set fluctuation pattern is calculated (S4903). Then, it is determined whether the remaining fluctuation time calculated in the process of S4903 is less than 2 seconds (S4904). If it is determined that the remaining fluctuation time is less than 2 seconds (S4904: Yes), the remaining fluctuation time information storage area 223o remains A period A indicating that the time is short is set (S4905), and the process shifts to the processing of S4902.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4904 that the remaining fluctuation time is not less than 2 seconds (2 seconds or more) (S4904: No), then the remaining fluctuation period is 2 seconds or more and more than 15 seconds. If it is determined that there is less (S4906) and it is determined that it is 2 seconds or more and less than 15 seconds (S4906: Yes), period B indicating that the remaining change time information storage area 223o is the normal remaining change time Is set (S4907), and the process shifts to the processing of S4902.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4906 that the remaining fluctuation time is not less than 15 seconds (more than 15 seconds) (S4906: No), the remaining fluctuation time information storage area 223o indicates that the remaining fluctuation time is long. The period C is set (S4908), and the process shifts to the processing of S4902. As described above, the fluctuation time (remaining fluctuation period) to be executed when the special drawing fluctuation is resumed is calculated at the timing when the special drawing fluctuation is interrupted (the subtraction of the special drawing fluctuation time is interrupted) By setting the information to be performed, it is possible to execute an effect (additional effect) suitable for the remaining fluctuation time without delay at the timing of resuming the special figure fluctuation.

  In the present embodiment, if the period information (period A to period C) to be set in the remaining fluctuation time information storage area 223o is different corresponding to the fluctuation time (remaining fluctuation period) executed when special figure fluctuation is resumed, However, for example, the period A is more easily selected as the remaining time is shorter, and the period information is selected so that the period C is more easily selected as the remaining time is longer. The ratio may be configured to be different according to the remaining time, or the remaining periods may be divided by a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) and the periods A to C may be ordered and distributed for each of the divisions. You may configure.

  With this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the relationship between the additional effect performed based on the period information set in the remaining change time information storage area 223o and the remaining change time, and the remaining It can provide fun to predict time of change.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 68, the contents of the fluctuation resumption processing (S4902) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing the contents of the fluctuation resumption processing (S4902). This fluctuation restart process (S4902) is a process of setting an additional effect to be executed when the special view 1 fluctuation restart command is received.

  When the fluctuation restart process (S4902) is executed, first, it is judged whether the special figure 1 fluctuation restart command has been received (S5001), and when it is judged that it has not been received (S5001: No), this process is ended. . On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5001 that the special figure 1 fluctuation resume command has been received (S5001: Yes), the remaining fluctuation time information stored in the remaining fluctuation time information storage area 223o is read out next (S5002 The additional effect type is determined from the additional effect selection table 222c based on the read remaining fluctuation time information and the additional effect counter 223i (S5003). Next, a display additional effect command corresponding to the read additional effect type is set (S5004), the information set in the remaining fluctuation time information storage area 223o is cleared (S5005), and this processing is ended.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the special figure fluctuation is interrupted, the special figure fluctuation resumes after the normal effect (the effect display executed when the special figure fluctuation is started) is finished in the present embodiment. In the period until it is performed, the swing effect for displaying the third symbol is performed, and when the special figure change is resumed, the additional effect corresponding to the special figure change period (remaining change period) after the restart is performed. Although configured as described above, any other configuration may be used.

  For example, there is provided an effect period determination means for determining a normal effect period in which a normal effect is executed, and the additional effect is executed when it is determined by the effect period determination means that the normal effect period has ended. It is also good. By configuring in this manner, the normal effect and the additional effect can be continuously performed, so it is possible to provide a more suitable effect display to the player. Moreover, in this case, an error may occur between the end timing of the additional effect period in which the additional effect is executed and the special figure fluctuation period after resumption, but the additional effect is continuously executed during the error period. Or, a swing effect may be performed to swing and display the third symbol. Furthermore, an error period determination means for determining the length of the error period is provided, and when the error period determination means determines that the error period is equal to or longer than a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds), the additional effect is executed again. It may be configured as follows.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 69, the variable display setting process (S4113) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing the variation display setting process (S4113). The variable display setting process (S4113 in FIG. 69) is a process of the main process (see FIG. 59) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. As described above, the variation display setting process (S4113 in FIG. 69) is the first or special view 2 variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to display the variation display effect on the third symbol display device 81. Based on the display, a variation pattern command for display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is set, and processing for transmitting the command to the display control device 114 is executed. Also, based on the extracted stop type (big hit A to big hit G), processing is performed to set a special display 1 for display or a special figure 2 stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type.

  In the variation display setting process (S4112), first, it is determined whether the special figure 1 variation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S5101). When it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223d is off (S5101: No), since the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command is not received from the main control device 110, the process proceeds to S5107. Transition. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223d is on (S5101: Yes), the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223d is set to be off (S5102). Next, it is determined whether the current gaming state is the latent state (S5103). If it is determined that the current gaming state is the latent state (S5103: Yes), the variable display setting process (S5104) for the special figure 1 is executed.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 70, the details of the fluctuation display setting process (S5104) for Special Drawing 1 which is one process in the fluctuation display setting process (S4113) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 Do. FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special view 1 variation display setting process (S5104). In this variation display setting for special view 1 (S5104), when the current gaming state is the latent state, for the display of the first special symbol based on the special view 1 variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 A process of setting the latent variation pattern command and transmitting it to the display control device 114 is executed.

  In the fluctuation display setting process for special drawing 1 (S5104), first, the fluctuation time corresponding to the extracted fluctuation pattern is read out (S5201), and the value corresponding to the fluctuation time read in the processing of S5201 is subspecially selected 1 It sets to fluctuation time counter 223m (S5202). Next, it is determined whether the value of sub special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223n is a value larger than 0 (S5203). If it is determined that the value of sub special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223n is 0 (S5203: No), a rush rush command for display is set (S5204), and rushed flag 223t is set to ON (S5205). ). On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5203 that the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation counter is larger than 0 (S5203: Yes), the above-described processes of S5204 and S5205 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S5206. Next, based on the extracted variation pattern, a display special variation pattern variation display command of the first special symbol is set (S5206), and this processing is ended.

  Referring back to FIG. 69, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S5103 that the current gaming state is not the latent state (S5103: No), the special pattern 1 variation pattern command is extracted in the process of S4205 of the command determination process (see FIG. 60) The variation pattern in the variation display effect of the first special symbol is acquired from the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223, and the variation pattern command for display of the first special symbol is generated (S5105). In addition, the variation pattern command for display of the first special symbol is configured to be distinguishable whether it is a variation pattern command for display corresponding to the first special symbol or a variation pattern command for the second special symbol. Specifically, if the upper 2 bits of the upper byte of the display variation pattern command of 2 bytes configuration is "10", it indicates that it corresponds to the first special symbol, and if it is "01" the second special symbol It is configured to indicate that it corresponds to

  The display variation pattern command of the first special symbol set in the processing of S5104 or S5105 is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and the command output processing (see FIG. 59) of the main processing (see FIG. 59) It transmits to the display control apparatus 114 by S4102). By receiving the display variation pattern command of the first special symbol, the display control device 114 corresponds to the third symbol display device 81 with the variation pattern of the first special symbol indicated by the variation pattern command for display. Display control of the variable display effect is started so that the variable display of the symbol is performed.

  With the setting of the display variation pattern command of the first special symbol, the holding ball of the special symbol corresponding to the set display variation pattern command is consumed (that is, the variation corresponding to the holding sphere of the first special symbol In accordance with the setting of display), the data corresponding to the first special symbol in the winning information storage area 223b is shifted (S5106).

  Next, it is determined whether the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S5107). When it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223e is not on (that is, is off) (S5107: No), the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command is not received from the main control device 110. Since there is, the processing of S5111 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223e is on (S5107: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223e is set to be off (S5108). Next, the special view 2 variation display setting process (S5109) is executed.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 71, the variable display setting process (S5109) for the special view 2 which is one process in the variable display setting process (S4113 in FIG. 69) will be described. FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special view 2 fluctuation display setting process (S5109).

  In the variation display setting process for special view 2 (S5109), first, in the process of S4210 of the command determination process (see FIG. 60), reading of the variation time corresponding to the extracted variation pattern is executed (S5301), and the variation read A value corresponding to time is set in sub-special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223n (S5302). Next, it is determined whether the current gaming state is the latent state (S5303). If it is determined that the state is the latent state (S5303: Yes), it is determined whether the rush-displayed flag 223t is on (S5304). If it is determined that the rush-displayed flag 223t is not on (S5304: No), the remaining time stored in the remaining time storage area 223p is read (S5305). Next, it is determined whether the remaining time read in the process of S5305 is less than one second (S5306). When it is determined that the remaining time is less than one second (S5306: Yes), the process of S5307 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S5308.

  On the other hand, in the process of S5306, when it is determined that the remaining time read is one second or more (S5306: No), the display rush command is set (S5307), and the rush display flag 223t is set to ON. (S5308). Next, based on the extracted variation pattern, a display special variation variation pattern command for the second special symbol is set (S5309), and this processing is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5303 that the current gaming state is not the latent state (S5303: No), or if it is determined in the process of S5304 that the rush-displayed flag 223t is set to ON. (S5304: Yes), the processing of S5305 to S5308 described above is skipped, the processing of S5309 is executed, and this processing is terminated.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when setting the variation display of the first special symbol in the state where the latent state is set in the state setting area 223j, that is, the latent state during the big hit fluctuation period When setting the variable display corresponding to the first special symbol variation, it is determined whether the second special symbol (special figure 2) is in variation, and it is determined that the special figure 2 is not in variation. Is configured to set a rush entry command as an effect aspect of the variable display. That is, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is configured to display a screen (see FIG. 7A) for notifying the player that the rush has occurred on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 at the timing when the special figure 1 change of the target is executed. doing.

  On the other hand, when setting the fluctuation display corresponding to the first special symbol fluctuation in which the jackpot fluctuation period becomes the latent state, it is determined whether the second special symbol (special figure 2) is in motion, and the special figure When it is determined that 2 is changing, a screen (see FIG. 6B) indicating that the latent state is in progress is displayed without setting the display rush command as the effect mode of the variable display. It is configured to display.

  As a result, when a right-handed game is performed at the time when a screen (see FIG. 7A) for notifying the player that a rush has been entered is set by setting the rush rush command for display, the game is immediately performed. The lottery of the second special symbol in the latent state can be executed, and the player can be provided with a game without discomfort.

  In addition, when setting the fluctuation display corresponding to the first special symbol fluctuation that becomes a latent condition during the jackpot fluctuation period, it is determined whether or not the second special symbol (special figure 2) is in fluctuation, and the special figure 2 When it is determined that is changing, the special figure 2 fluctuation during the fluctuation may be forced to be terminated, and a new special figure 2 fluctuation may be executed.

  It should be noted that the setting timing of the display rush rush command when the gaming state is shifted to the latent state during the special figure 2 fluctuation is not limited to the contents of the present embodiment, and the player is provided with a game without discomfort. It is good if it has a configuration that can For example, if it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation during fluctuation is finished at the timing when the latent state is set, the display rush-in command may be set, or the fluctuation occurs at the timing when the latent state is set It may be configured to determine the remaining time until the end of the special figure 2 fluctuation in, and to set the display rush-in command when the determination result becomes a predetermined time (1 second). In this case, as the predetermined time to be set, it takes from the time the player operates the operation handle 51 to start the right hitting game until the ball fired by the right hitting game enters the second entrance 640. The time may be set shorter than the period, and may be set appropriately according to the configuration of the game board 13.

  Referring back to FIG. 69, the description will be continued. The variation pattern command for display of the second special symbol set in the process of S5109 is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and displayed by the command output process (S4102) of the main process (see FIG. 59) It transmits to the control device 114. In the display control device 114, by receiving the display variation pattern command of the second special symbol, a special pattern corresponding to the third symbol display device 81 with the variation pattern of the second special symbol indicated by the display variation pattern command Display control of the variable display effect is started so that the variable display of the symbol is performed. Then, the data corresponding to the second special symbol in the winning information storage area 223b is shifted (S5110).

  Next, it is determined whether the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223f or the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223g is set to ON (S5111). If it is determined that the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223f or the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223g is not set on (that is, is off) (S5111: No), this process is ended.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the special view 1 stop type selection flag 223f or the special view 2 stop type selection flag 223g is on (S5111: Yes), the special view 1 stop type selection flag 223f is on. When the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223f is set to OFF and the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223g is on, the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223g is set to OFF (S5112).

  In the process of S4201 of the command determination process (see FIG. 60), the stop type extracted from the received special view 1 stop type command or the special view 2 stop type command is set (S5113), and this process is ended. If the extracted stop type is the stop type of the first special symbol, a display special figure 1 stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type is set based on the stop type. Moreover, when the extracted stop type is the stop type of the second special symbol, a display special figure 2 stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type is set based on the stop type. . In addition, the special figure 1 or special figure 2 stop type command notified from the main control device 110 is to notify the jackpot type when the jackpot is reached, and the notification is made even if the determination result is out. Be done. If the determination result is out, the out type is not referred to and the out pattern is set.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 72, various counter update processing (S4111) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing the various counter updating process (S4111). The various counter updating process (S4111 in FIG. 72) is one process of the main process (see FIG. 59) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and the values of the various counters provided in the RAM 223 It is a process to execute an update.

  In the various counter updating process (S4111), first, it is determined whether the value of the sub special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223n is larger than 0 (S5401). If it is determined that the value of sub special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223n is larger than 0 (S5401: Yes), the value of sub special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223n is decremented by 1 (S5402). On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5401 that the value of sub special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223n is not larger than 0 (that is, it is 0) (S5401: No), the process of S5402 is skipped and S5403 Transfer to processing of Next, it is determined whether the value of sub special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 223m is larger than 0 (S5403). If it is determined that the value of sub special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 223m is larger than 0 (S5403: Yes), the value of sub special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 223m is decremented by 1 (S5404).

  Next, the value of sub special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 223m and reading of sub special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223n are executed (S5405), the value of sub special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 223m is executed from sub special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223n The remaining time is calculated (S5406). The remaining time calculated in the process of S5406 is stored in the remaining time storage area 223p (S5407), the value of other various counters is decremented by 1 (S5408), and the process is ended.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5403 that the value of sub special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 223m is not larger than 0 (ie, it is 0) (S5403: No), S5404 to S5407 described above are skipped. , S5408, and this process ends.

<Control Processing of Display Control Device in First Embodiment>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 73 to 87. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, and one frame of the image controller 237. There is a V interrupt process which is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of a command and detection of a V interrupt signal. When the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal are simultaneously performed, the command reception process is preferentially executed. As a result, the contents of the command received from the audio lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected to execute the V interrupt process.

  First, main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing this main processing. The main processing is to execute initialization processing at power on.

  Specifically, the start of the main process is performed according to the following flow. When power is supplied from the power supply device 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" according to the hardware configuration. The address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is designated to the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address designated to the bus line 240 is "0000H", it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. And outputs corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, and starts execution of processing according to the fetched instruction to start main processing.

  Here, if all boot programs to be processed first by the MPU 231 are temporarily stored in the NAND flash memory 234a after releasing the system reset, the character ROM 234 states that the address designated to the bus line 240 is "0000H". When it is detected, data of one page including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read out from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read and set it in the buffer RAM 234c, so the MPU 231 receives the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" after specifying the address "0000H". It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, the time taken to activate the MPU 231 becomes long, and as a result, there arises a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, the NOR type ROM 234d can be operated at high speed by storing a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after releasing the system reset among the boot programs as in the present embodiment. Since it is a memory that can read out data, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after releasing the system reset, the character ROM 234 immediately enters the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234 c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive an instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the main processing in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be immediately started.

  When the main processing is executed as described above, first, the boot processing executed by the boot program is executed (S6001), and the display control device 114 is made to be able to execute various controls on the third symbol display device 81. Launch

  Here, the boot process (S6001) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing the boot process (S6001) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are not stored in the dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine, and are stored in the third symbol display device 81. A character ROM 234 provided for storing data of an image to be displayed is stored. Since the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a which can achieve a small area and a large capacity, not only image data but also a control program can be sufficiently stored, while the control is performed. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, since the reading speed of the NAND flash memory is slow especially when random access is performed, the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234 a as the MPU 231. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be degraded. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a or data table provided in the work RAM 233 configured by DRAM. A process of transferring to and storing in the storage area 233b is executed.

  Specifically, first, based on the hardware operation of the above-mentioned MPU 231 and character ROM 234, after the system reset is released, the boot program is read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c. The control program stored in the two program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount (S6101). The predetermined amount of control program transferred here includes the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

  Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S6102). Thus, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot programs included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S6101.

  Also, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address of the program storage area 233a by the process of S6102, the MPU 231 executes various processes while reading out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 reads out the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a instead of reading out the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetching the instruction, and fetches the instruction. And execute various processes. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is configured by the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the process of S610, subsequently, it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot program whose execution is started by the set instruction pointer 231a. Among the control programs, the remaining control programs not transferred to the program storage area 233a and the fixed value data are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b by a predetermined amount (S6103). Specifically, the control program and part of fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) of the fixed value data are stored as data tables. It transfers to the storage area 233b.

  Then, after performing other processing necessary for the boot processing (S6104), the instruction pointer 231a is executed after the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the end of this boot processing (see S6001 in FIG. 73). By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the initialization process (see S6002 in FIG. 73) (S6105), the execution of the boot program is finished, and this boot process is finished.

  As described above, when the boot process (S6001) is executed, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. It is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-described second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 transfers the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Use it to execute various processes.

  Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control program and fixed value data are released after the system reset is released from the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and By transferring data to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read out the control program and fixed value data from the work RAM configured by the DRAM having a high reading speed to perform various controls. It is possible to maintain high processing performance, and it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated rendition using the auxiliary effect part.

  On the other hand, without storing all boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234 d, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first are stored by the MPU 231 after system reset release, and the remaining boot programs are NAND flash memory 234 a. Even in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, since the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the extremely small capacity NOR ROM 234 d, the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can.

  In the boot process shown in FIG. 74, a predetermined amount of control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S6101 includes all remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although configured, but not necessarily limited thereto, the control program of a predetermined amount transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S6101 is a boot program that executes the boot process to be processed following the process of S6102. It may be part of The boot program transferred here transfers the control program including all the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and further, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is used as an instruction pointer The process set in 231 a may be executed. Then, the processing of S6103 to S6105 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

  In addition, the boot program transferred by the process of S610 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and then, the head of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. A process of setting an address in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Further, a part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this processing further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the program storage area 233a A process of setting the start address of the stored boot program in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a in the instruction pointer 231a is S6101. And after repeating the process of S6102 several times including the process of S610-S6105 may be performed.

  Thus, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 can not be transferred to the program storage area 233a at one time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. A predetermined amount can be transferred to the program storage area 233a by using the boot program.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a case has been described where in the first program storage area 234d1 a part of the boot program to be executed by the MPU 231 at the time of system reset release is stored among the boot programs. It may be stored in one program storage area 234d1. In this case, when the boot process is started, the MPU 231 may execute the processes of S6103 to S6105 without performing the processes of S6101 and S6102. As a result, since the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a is unnecessary, the number of transfer processes of the program to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a is reduced, so that the processing time of the boot process can be reduced. Therefore, the control of the auxiliary rendering unit in the MPU 231, which becomes possible after the boot process, can be started earlier.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. When the boot process is finished, next, the initialization process is executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S6002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings for the register group in the MPU 231, the I / O device, and the like are performed. Further, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Furthermore, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set to the respective flags. Note that “off” or “0” is set as an initial value of each flag, unless otherwise specified.

  Furthermore, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237 is performed, the image is drawn to the image controller 237 so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire third display screen 81. And instructs to execute display processing. Thus, immediately after the power is turned on, the third symbol display device 81 first displays an image of a specific color over the entire screen. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. Thereby, in the operation check in the factory etc. at the time of manufacture, immediately after the power is turned on, the pachinko machine 10 checks whether the image of the color according to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or not. Whether or not activation can be started normally can be determined easily and immediately.

  Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 so as to transfer the image data corresponding to the main image at power on to the main image area 235a at power on of the video RAM 235 for residence (S6003). In this transfer instruction, the start address and the final address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the main image at power on is stored, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination When the power is turned on, the image controller 237 receives image data corresponding to the main image from the character ROM 234 when the power for the resident video RAM 235 is turned on. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

  Then, when all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the end of transfer to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction is completed. When all transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer end information indicating the transfer end to a register provided in the image controller 237 or a partial area of the built-in memory. It may be written. Then, the MPU 231 reads out information of a partial area of this register or built-in memory as needed, and detects writing of transfer end information by the image controller 237, thereby grasping that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction is completed. You may do so.

  At power-on, the image data transferred to the main image area 235a is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is shut off. When transfer of the image data corresponding to the main image at power on to the main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the process of S6003, next, the fluctuation image at power on A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so as to transfer the image data corresponding to the image data to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S6004). In this transfer instruction, the start address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image is stored, the data size of the image data, and the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235) And the start address of the power-on fluctuation image area 235b which is the transfer destination, and the image controller follows the transfer instruction to transmit the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. It is transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. Then, the image data transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is shut off.

  When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the process of S6004, the simple image display flag 233c is then performed. Is turned on (S6005). Thus, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 85A) described later. The resident image transfer setting process for instructing transfer to the image controller 237 is executed so as to transfer (see S7502 in FIG. 85A).

  The simplified image display flag 233c is a transfer instruction from the character ROM 234 of the resident video RAM 235 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It will remain on until it is finished. Thus, in the meantime, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 75 (b)), the image at power on (the main image at power on or the fluctuation image at power on) (not shown) is drawn simply. The command determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 75B) and the simplified display setting process (see S6309 in FIG. 75B) are executed.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 due to the slow reading speed is It takes a lot of time to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in the main processing, after the power is turned on, first, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the power-on main image is third By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person concerned with the hall, when the power is turned on displayed on the third symbol display device 81 You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so the player is resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235 Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed, without fear that the operation has stopped.

  In addition, also in the operation check in the factory etc. at the time of manufacture, the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately when the power is turned on, and the third symbol display device 81 starts the operation without problems by the power on. This can be confirmed immediately, and by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed as the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the efficiency of the operation check.

  The display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10 also transfers the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 along with the power-on main image after power-on, so the power-on main image is the third symbol Since the player starts playing while being displayed on the display device 81, there is a ball entry (start winning) into the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640, and the start instruction of the fluctuation effect is If there is a display fluctuation pattern command from the main control unit 110 via the audio lamp control unit 113, the fluctuation image upon power-on is displayed immediately during the fluctuation presentation period, a simple fluctuation It is possible to make a presentation. Therefore, even while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can surely confirm that the lottery has been performed by the simple fluctuation effect.

  Also, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image at power-on continues to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, but the character ROM 234 Is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, and it takes time to transfer the data, so that the time for which the main image is continuously displayed when the power is turned on becomes longer after the power is turned on. However, in the pachinko machine 10, since a simple fluctuation effect can be performed using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after power on, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, power failure recovery Immediately after, for example, while the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  After the processing of S6005, interrupt permission is set (S6006), and thereafter, the main processing executes infinite loop processing until the power is turned off. Thus, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S6006, command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 75 (a), the command interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 75 (a) is a flowchart showing the command interruption process. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes a command interrupt process.

  In this command interruption process, the received command data is extracted, and the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S6201), and the process is ended. The various commands stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are read out by the command determination process or the simple command determination process of V interrupt process described later, and the process according to the command is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 75 (b), the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 75 (b) is a flowchart showing the V interrupt process. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area are executed by the command interrupt process, and an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the drawing of the image is performed. By creating a list and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute the drawing process and the display process of the image.

  As described above, this V interrupt processing is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. The V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated every 20 milliseconds when the image controller 237 completes drawing processing of an image of one frame, and is sent to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, the drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image when the image drawing process or the display process is not completed, so that drawing of a new image is started during image drawing, or It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  Here, first, an outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing will be described, and then details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interruption process, as shown in FIG. 75 (b), first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6301), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, If it is off (S6301: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed, so the normal effect image is not the third power pattern but the power-on image. A command determination process (S6302) is executed to display on the display device 81, and then a display setting process (S6303) is executed.

  In the command determination process (S6302), the contents of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are analyzed, and a process corresponding to the command is executed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, the variation display data table corresponding to the demonstration display data table or the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfer corresponding to the set display data table is performed. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  In this command determination process, all the commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed to execute the process. This is because command determination processing is performed at an interval of 20 milliseconds at which V interrupt processing is executed, and it is highly likely that a plurality of commands are stored in the command buffer area within that 20 milliseconds. is there. In particular, when the start of the fluctuation effect is determined in the main control device 110, there is a high possibility that the display fluctuation pattern command, the display stop type command and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at one time, the aspect and the type of stop of the fluctuation effect selected by the main controller 110 and the audio lamp control device 113 can be grasped quickly, and the effect image according to the aspect It is possible to control the drawing of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The details of the command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 76 to 81.

  In the display setting process (S6303), the image for one frame to be displayed next in the third symbol display device 81 based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S6302) and the like. Concretely identify the contents of Further, according to the status of the process, etc., the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233 d. The details of the display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 82 to 84.

  After the display setting process is executed, task processing is then executed (S6304). In this task processing, the image is configured based on the contents of the image of the next one frame to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 specified by the display setting processing (S6303) or the simple display setting processing (S6309) While specifying the type of sprite (display object) to be processed, various parameters necessary for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

  Next, transfer setting processing is executed (S6305). In this transfer setting process, while the simplified image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set the instructions. Also, while the simplified image display flag 233c is off, based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, predetermined image data is sent from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 for normal use. In addition to setting a transfer instruction to be transferred to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236, the image controller 237 continuously receives a continuous notice command and a rear image change command from the audio lamp control device 113. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous preview image used in the preview effect and the image data of the back image after change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. The details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 85 and 86.

  Next, drawing processing is executed (S6306). In this drawing process, types of various sprites constituting one frame, parameters necessary for drawing the respective sprites determined in the task process (S6304), and a transfer instruction set in the transfer setting process (S6305) The drawing list shown in FIG. 29 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. Accordingly, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list (S6306). Details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S6307). Then, the V interrupt processing ends. As a counter updated by the process of S6307, there is, for example, a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and the updating process is performed each time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, in the command determination process, when reception of the display stop type command is detected, the stop type (large jack A, big jack B, front and back outreach, reach other than back and forth out, reach out completely) indicated by the display stop type command The corresponding stop type table and the stop type counter are compared, and the stop symbol after the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6301 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6301: Yes), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, the simplified command determination process (S6308) is executed, and then the simplified display setting process (S6309) is executed to shift to the process of S6304.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 76 to 81, details of the above-mentioned command determination process (S6302) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. First, FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing this command determination process.

  In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 76, it is first determined whether there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S6401), and if there is no unprocessed new command (S6401: No), The command determination process is ended and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes), the new command flag for notifying the display setting processing (S6303) that the new command has been processed in the on state is set to ON (S6402). For all unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area, the type of the command is analyzed (S6403).

  Then, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S6404). If there is a display variation pattern command (S6404: YES), variation pattern command processing is executed (S6405), and the process returns to S6401.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 77 (a), the details of the fluctuation pattern command processing (S6405) will be described. FIG. 77 (a) is a flowchart showing variation pattern command processing (S6405). The variation pattern command processing (S6405) is to execute processing corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the fluctuation pattern command processing, first, the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation effect pattern indicated by the display fluctuation pattern command is determined, and the determined fluctuation display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b. The buffer 233d is set (S6501).

  Here, since the determination of the start of the change is always made several seconds or more apart in main controller 110, two or more display change pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination process is performed. When executing, it is impossible when two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command is erroneously displayed It may be interpreted as a fluctuation pattern command. In the process of S6501, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time is the shortest. Are set in the display data table buffer 233 d.

  Assuming that the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, in fact, the fluctuation effect having fluctuation time shorter than the set display data table is the main control device When indicated by 110, while the third symbol display device 81 is displaying the fluctuation effect according to the set fluctuation display data table, the next display fluctuation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 As another variable display is suddenly started, the player may feel discomfort.

  On the other hand, by setting the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern with the shortest fluctuation time to the display data table buffer 233 d as in the present embodiment, the fluctuation is actually longer than the display data table set. Even when the fluctuation effect having time is instructed by the main controller 110, as described later, after the fluctuation effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is ended, the main display device 110 for the next display Since the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demonstration effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player can easily feel the third symbol display device 81 3 You can keep watching the pattern fluctuation.

  Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S6501 is determined and read out from the data table storage area 233b and is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6502). Then, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S6501, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the clock counter 233h (S6503), 233 f is initialized to 0 (S6504). Then, the demonstration display flag 233y and the finalized display flag 233z are both set to OFF (S6505), the variation pattern command is ended, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

  By executing the variation pattern command process, in the display setting process, while updating the pointer 233f initialized in the process of S6505, from the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S6501. At the same time that the contents of the image for one frame to be displayed next are specified in the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time the transfer data table buffer 233e is processed by the processing of S650. The transfer data information specified in the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in the image data of the sprite required in the variable display data table set in advance from the character ROM 234 for the normal video R To be transferred to the image storage area 236a of M236, to control the image controller 237.

  Further, in the display setting process, the time of the fluctuation effect defined in the fluctuation display data table is measured using the clock counter 233h in which the time data is set by the process of S6503, and when the fluctuation effect in the fluctuation display data table is ended. When it is determined, the setting of the stop display is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the process of S6404 that there is no display variation pattern command (S6404: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S6406), If there is a display type-of-stop command (S6406: Yes), the type-of-stop command processing is executed (S6407), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

  Here, the details of the stop type command process (S6407) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 77 (b) is a flowchart showing the stop type command process. The stop type command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display variation type command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the stop type command process (S6407), first, a stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (one of big hit A to G, small hit A to C, reach out, complete out) indicated by the display stop type command Is determined (S6601), and the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter updated each time V interrupt processing (see FIG. 75 (b)) is executed, and the third symbol display device Finally, the stop symbol after the fluctuation effect displayed on 81 is set (S6602).

  Then, among the stop symbol determination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the process of S6602 is turned on, and the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the other stop symbols is It is set to ON (S6603), and returns to the command determination processing.

  Here, as described above, in the fluctuation display data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation based on the data table The offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the processing of S6602 is described. In the above-described task processing (S6304), after a predetermined time has passed since the start of the fluctuation, the stop symbol set by the processing of S6602 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set by S6603, and the specified stop By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. And the address in which the image data corresponding to this specified 3rd design was stored is specified. The image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235 d of the resident video RAM 235 as described above.

  Since determination of the start of the change is always made several seconds or more apart in main controller 110, two or more display stop type commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, command determination processing is executed. In the case where two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, there is no possibility, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc. and another command is erroneously displayed for display It may be interpreted as a type command. In the process of S6601, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, the stop type is assumed to be completely out, and the stop type is determined. Determine the table. Thereby, the stop symbol corresponding to complete removal is set by the processing of S6602.

  Temporarily, if the stop symbol corresponding to "the big hit of the special symbol" is set, in fact, even if it is "the removal of the special symbol", the "special symbol" in the third symbol display device 81 The stop symbol corresponding to the "big hit" will be displayed, causing the player to misunderstand that the pachinko machine 10 has become the "big hit of the special symbol", which may lower the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, if the stop symbol corresponding to complete removal is set as in the present embodiment, in fact, if it is a "big hit of a special symbol", stop of complete removal on the third symbol display device 81 Even if the symbol is displayed, the player can be pleased because the pachinko machine 10 is "the jackpot of the special symbol".

  Referring back to FIG. 76, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S6406 that there is no display stop type command (S6406: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display opening command among the unprocessed commands (S6408), and display is performed. If there is an opening command for use (S6408: Yes), an opening command process is executed (S6409), and the process returns to S6401.

  Here, the details of the opening command process (S6409) will be described with reference to FIG. 78 (a). FIG. 78 (a) is a flowchart showing opening command processing. This opening command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the opening command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the opening command process, first, the opening display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233 d (S6701). Thereafter, the transfer data table corresponding to the opening display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6702), and based on the set opening display data table, time data is set in the clock counter 233h (S6703). Thereafter, the pointer 233 f is initialized to 0 (S 6704). Then, the demonstration display flag 233y and the finalized display flag 233z are both set to OFF (S6705), the opening command is ended, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

  Referring back to FIG. 76, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S6408 that there is no display opening command (S6408: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a display round number command among the unprocessed commands (S6410). If there is a command for the number of rounds (S6410: Yes), the command processing for the number of rounds is executed (S6411), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

  Here, the details of the round number command process (S6411) will be described with reference to FIG. 78 (b). FIG. 78 (b) is a flowchart showing round number command processing. The round number command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display round number command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the round number command processing, first, the round number display data table corresponding to the round number indicated by the display round number command is determined, and the determined round number display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b. The table buffer 233d is set (S6801). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6802).

  Then, based on the number-of-rounds display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S6801, the time data representing the effect time is set in the clock counter 233h (S6803), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S6804). Then, the demonstration display flag 233y and the finalized display flag 233z are both set to OFF (S6805), and the round number command processing ends, and the processing returns to the command determination processing.

  Referring back to FIG. 76, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S6410 that there is no display round number command (S6410: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a display ending command among the unprocessed commands (S6412), and display is performed. If there is an ending command for use (S6412: Yes), an ending command process is executed (S6413), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

  Here, the details of the ending command process (S6413) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing ending command processing. The ending command process is to execute a process corresponding to the display ending command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the ending command process, first, the ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the ending effect indicated by the display ending command is determined, and the determined ending display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b. The buffer 233d is set (S6901). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6902).

  Next, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S6901, the time data representing the rendering time is set in the clock counter 233h (S6903), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 ( S6904). Then, the demonstration display flag 233y and the finalized display flag 233z are both set to OFF (S6905), the ending command process is ended, and the process returns to the command judgment process.

  Referring back to FIG. 76, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S6412 that there is no display ending command (S6412: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a display rush command among the unprocessed commands (S6414). If there is a rush entry command for use (S6414: Yes), rush entry command processing is executed (S6415), and the process returns to the processing of S6401.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 80 (a), the details of rush rush command processing (S6415) will be described. FIG. 80 (a) is a flowchart showing rush rush command processing. The rush-to-rush command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display ending command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

  In the rush entry command processing, first, a rush entry display data table corresponding to the display mode of the rush entry effect indicated by the display rush entry command is determined, and the determined rush entry display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b. Then, the display data table buffer 233d is set (S6931). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6932).

  Next, based on the rushing display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S6931, time data representing the rendering time is set in the clock counter 233h (S6933), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S6934). Then, the demonstration display flag 233y and the finalized display flag 233z are both set to OFF (S6935), the rush rush command processing is ended, and the processing returns to the command judgment processing.

  Referring back to FIG. 76, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S6412 that there is no rush-in command for display (S6414: No), it is then determined whether or not there is an additional rendering command among the unprocessed commands (S6416), and the additional rendering is performed. If there is a command (S6416: Yes), additional effect command processing is executed (S6417), and the process returns to S6401.

  Here, the details of the additional effect command process (S6417) will be described with reference to FIG. 80 (b). FIG. 80 (b) is a flowchart showing the additional effect command process. This additional effect command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display additional effect command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the additional effect command processing, first, an additional effect display data table corresponding to the display mode of the additional effect indicated by the additional effect command for display is determined, and the determined additional effect display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b. , And is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6951). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6952).

  Next, based on the additional effect display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S6951, the time data representing the effect time is set in the clock counter 233h (S6953), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S6954). Then, the demonstration display flag 233y and the finalized display flag 233z are both set to OFF (S6955), the additional effect command processing is ended, and the processing returns to the command determination processing.

  Referring back to FIG. 76, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S6416 that there is no display additional effect command (S6416: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a back image change command among the unprocessed commands (S6418), If there is an image change command (S6418: Yes), a back image change command process is executed (S6419), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 81, the details of the rear image change command processing (S6419) will be described. FIG. 81 is a flowchart of the rear image change command process. The rear image change command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the rear image change command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the rear surface image change command processing, first, the rear surface image change flag 233w for notifying the normal image transfer setting processing (S7503) of the change of the rear surface image accompanying the reception of the rear surface image change command in the on state is set on (S7001). ). Then, among the bits of the rear surface image determination flag 233x provided for each rear surface image type (rear surface A, B), the bit corresponding to the rear surface image type indicated by the rear surface image change command is set on The bit corresponding to the rear image type is set to off (S7002), the rear image change command processing ends, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

  In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the back image change flag 233w set in the process of S7001 is turned on, the back image type after change is selected from the back image discrimination flag 233x set in the process of S7002. Identify.

  In addition, in the task processing, when it is specified that either the back surface A or B is displayed by the back surface type of the back surface image defined in the display data table, from the back surface image discrimination flag 233x set in S7002, RAM type that specifies the back image type to be displayed at that time, and further specifies the range of the back image to be displayed according to the passage of time, and stores the image data corresponding to the range of the back image Specify the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236) and the address of that RAM.

  Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 in 20 milliseconds or less, two or more back image change commands are not received within 20 milliseconds. Therefore, the command determination process is executed. In this case, there should not be two or more back image change commands stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc. and another command is erroneously changed to the back image It may be interpreted as a command. In the process of S7002, when it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image discrimination flag 233x corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image command received earlier is turned on. Alternatively, the rear image discrimination flag 233x corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image command received later may be turned on. Further, any one rear surface image change command may be extracted, and the rear surface image determination flag 233x corresponding to the rear surface image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since the change of the rear image does not directly affect the gaming value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to set as appropriate according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the process of S6418 that there is no rear surface image change command (S6418: No), then it is determined whether there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S6420), and there is an error command For example (S6420: Yes), error command processing is executed (S6421), and the process returns to S6401.

  Here, the details of the error command processing (S6421) will be described with reference to FIG. 81 (b). FIG. 81 (b) is a flowchart showing error command processing. This error command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the error command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

  In the error command processing, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the on state is set to on (S7101). Then, among error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set to off (S7102). The process ends and returns to the command determination process.

  In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S7101, the type of the generated error is determined from the error determination flag set by the process of S7102, and the error type is handled. The process is executed to display a warning image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in S7102, the error determination flags corresponding to all the error types indicated by the respective error commands are set to on. As a result, since the warning images corresponding to all the error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the person in charge of the hall can correctly grasp the occurrence status of the error.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the process of S6416 that there is no error command (S6420: No), then the process corresponding to the other unprocessed command is executed (S6422), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

  In the process of S6401 executed again after the process of each command is executed, it is judged again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes ), The processing of S6402 to S6422 is executed again. Then, the processes of S6401 to S6422 are repeatedly executed until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if it is determined in the process of S6401 that there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, this command determination is made. End the process.

  In the simplified command determination process (S6308) executed when the simplified image display flag 233c is on in the V interruption process (see FIG. 75B), the same process as the command determination process is performed. However, in the simple command determination process, from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area, only the commands necessary for displaying the power-on image, ie, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command While extracting and executing the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 77 (a)) and the stop type command processing (see FIG. 77 (b)) which are processing corresponding to the respective commands, other commands are Perform processing to discard without executing the processing corresponding to the command.

  Here, in the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 77A) executed in this case, in the processing of S6501, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the variation image upon power-on is displayed in the display data table buffer 233d. The image data of the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image, which are set and necessary in that case, are stored in the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 Therefore, in the process of S6502, the null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the process of clearing the contents is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 82 to 84, details of the above-mentioned display setting process (S6303) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

  In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 82, it is first determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S7201), and if the new command flag is not on, that is, if it is off (S7201: No ), It is determined that the new command has not been processed in the command determination process to be executed first, and the processes of S7202 to S7204 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S7205. On the other hand, if the new command flag is on (S7201: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the command determination process to be executed earlier, and after setting the new command flag to off (S7202), S7203 to S7204. The processing corresponding to the new command is executed by the processing of

  In the process of S7203, it is determined whether the error occurrence flag is on (S7203). Then, if the error occurrence flag is on (S7203: Yes), warning image setting processing is executed (S7204).

  Here, with reference to FIG. 83, the details of the warning image setting process will be described. FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing a warning image setting process. This process is a process for expanding the image data that causes the third symbol display device 81 to display a warning image corresponding to the error that has occurred. First, with reference to the error determination flag, all the error determinations for which ON is set Warning image data for displaying on the third symbol display device 81 a warning image of an error corresponding to the flag is developed (S7301).

  In task processing (S6304), based on the expanded warning image data, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the warning image is specified, and for each sprite, the display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle Decide various parameters necessary for drawing.

  Then, in the warning image setting process, after the process of S7301, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S7302), and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. After the warning image setting process (S7204), or when it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, ie, off in the process of S7203, the process proceeds to S7205.

  At S7205, pointer update processing is executed (S7205). Here, the details of the pointer update process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing pointer update processing. In this pointer update process, transfer data information of the corresponding drawing content or transfer target image data is acquired from the display data table and transfer data table respectively stored in the display data table buffer 233 d and the transfer data table buffer 233 e. This is a process of updating the pointer 233 f for specifying the address to be done.

  In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233 f (S7401). That is, in principle, the pointer 233 f is updated so that only one is added each time the V interrupt processing is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, the Start information is described at the address "0000H", and the substance of each data is defined at the address "0001H" and thereafter, the display data table is displayed. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 in accordance with being stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update processing, so each address Substantial data can be read out from the data table.

  After the value of the pointer 233f is updated by the process of S7401, next, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, whether or not the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is As a result, if it is End information (S7402: Yes), in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the pointer 233f is updated past the address where the entity data is written. It means that

  Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demonstration display data table (S7403). If it is a demonstration display data table (S7403: Yes), the display data is displayed. The time data corresponding to the rendering time of the demonstration display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the clock counter 233h (S7404), the pointer 233f is set to 1 for initialization (S7405), and this processing ends And return to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be developed sequentially from the top of the demonstration display data table, so that the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly display the demonstration effect.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S7403 that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demonstration display data table (S7403: No), the value of the pointer 233f is decremented by 1 ( S7406), end this processing, and return to the display setting processing. Thereby, in the display setting process, when the display data table other than the demonstration display data table, for example, the variable display data table, is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address at which the End information is described Since the drawing contents of are always expanded, the third symbol display device 81 can display the last image defined in the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S7402, if the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not the end information (S7402: No), this process ends, and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, returning to FIG. 82, the description will be continued. After the pointer update process, the drawing content of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process is acquired from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7206). In task processing (S6304), the type of sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the drawing contents expanded in the process of S7206 together with the warning image etc. expanded in advance, and for each sprite It determines various parameters necessary for drawing, such as display coordinate position, magnification, and rotation angle.

  Next, the value of the clock counter 233h is decremented by 1 (S7207), and it is determined whether the value of the clock counter 233h after subtraction is 0 or less (S7208). Then, if the value of the clock counter 233h is 1 or more (S7208: No), the display setting process is ended as it is, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the clock counter 233h is 0 or less (S7208: Yes), it means that the effect time of the effect corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing to stop the variable display and stop the display, so it is confirmed whether the finalized display flag 233z is on or not. (S7209).

  As a result, if the finalized display flag 233z is off (S7209: No), the finalized display is not yet performed, and the finalized display is displayed, so the finalized display data table is first displayed on the display data table buffer 233d. (S7211), and then write null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S7211). Then, the time data corresponding to the rendering time in the finalized display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S7212), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7213). Then, after setting the decision display flag 233z indicating that the decision display effect is on in the on state (S7214), the contents of the stop symbol determination flag are copied as they are to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233. Then (S7215), the process returns to the V interrupt process.

  Thereby, when the variation display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, etc., the final display effect of the stop symbol in the variation effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the end of the effect. As such, the drawing contents can be set. In addition, it is possible to easily change the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to the determined display effect simply by changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233 d to the determined display data table. Then, as compared with the case where the display content is changed by activating another program as in the prior art, the program does not become complicated and bloated, and therefore, the MPU 231 does not burden much. A wide variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114.

  In addition, the previous stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S7215 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the fluctuation effect to be performed next. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the fluctuation effect changes in accordance with the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed one time ago, and in the fluctuation display data table, the fluctuation based on the data table is The symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed one time ago is described until the predetermined time passes since it is started. In the task processing (S6304), until the predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation, the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed one time ago is specified from the previous stop symbol discrimination flag set in S7215, and The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the identified stop symbol. Thereby, the fluctuation effect is started from the stop symbol in the immediately preceding fluctuation effect.

  On the other hand, if the finalized display flag 233z is on in the process of S7209 (S7209: Yes), it is determined whether the demonstration display flag 233y is on (S7216). Then, if the demonstration display flag 233y is off (S7216: No), this means that the value of the clock counter 233h becomes 0 or less as the finalized display effect ends, so a fixed time from the end of the finalized display effect After the lapse, processing is performed to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display a demonstration effect.

  First, the demo display data table is acquired and set in the display data table buffer 233 d (S 7217), and the null data is written to the transfer data table buffer 233 e to clear the contents (S 7218). Then, the time data corresponding to the presentation time of the demonstration display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S7219). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7220), and the demonstration display flag 233y indicating that demonstration is being performed in the on state is set on (S7221), this processing is ended, and the processing is returned to the V interruption processing. .

  As a result, if the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect is not received after the finalized display effect is finished, the demonstration effect is automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Can set the drawing contents.

  In the process of S7216, if the demonstration display flag 233y is on (S7216: Yes), the demonstration effect is performed after the completion of the definite display effect, which means that the demonstration effect is ended, so the display setting process is performed as it is End and return to the V interrupt processing. Then, in this case, as described above, various settings are performed so that the demonstration effect is started again by the pointer updating process performed in the next V interruption process. The demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until a new display variation pattern command is received.

  In the simple display setting process (S6309) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 75B), the same process as the display setting process is performed. However, in the simple display setting process, one of the power-on-time fluctuation images according to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command for a predetermined time after the effect time of the fluctuation effect by the power-on time fluctuation image is over. A process of setting a display data table that specifies to stop and display the image of the above image in the display data table buffer 233 d is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 85 and 86, details of the above-described transfer setting process (S6305) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. First, FIG. 85A is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

  In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether the simple image display flag 233c is on (S7501). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S7501: Yes), all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is not transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so the resident image transfer setting is made. The process is executed (S7502) to end the transfer setting process and return to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction for transferring image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is set to the image controller 237. The details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if the result of the process of S7501 is that the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, if it is off (S7501: No), all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 It is transferred to the RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S7503), the transfer setting process is ended, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. The details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 85 (b), a resident image transfer setting process (S7502) which is one process of the transfer setting process (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 will be described. FIG. 85 (b) is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process (S7502).

  In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not transfer instruction of untransferred image data is given to the image controller 237 (S7601), and if the transfer instruction is transmitted (S7601: Yes) Furthermore, it is determined whether the transfer process of the image data performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction is completed (S7602). In the process of S7602, after the transfer instruction of the image data is issued to the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed when the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237. . Then, when it is determined that the transfer processing is not completed by the processing of S7602 (S7602: No), since the image transfer processing is continuously performed in the image controller 237, this resident image transfer setting processing is performed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S7602: Yes), the process proceeds to S7603. Also, as a result of the process of S7601, even when a transfer instruction of untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 237 (S7601: No), the process proceeds to S7603.

  In the process of S7603, it is determined whether or not all resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S7603), and if there is untransferred resident target image data (S7603: No) A transfer instruction to the image controller 237 is set so as to transfer the resident target image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S7604), and this processing is ended.

  As a result, transfer data information regarding the untransferred resident target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 transfers the data described in the drawing list. The resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the data information. The transfer data information includes the start address and the final address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data for residence is stored, the information of the transfer destination (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (transferred here) The start address of the area provided in the resident video RAM 235 to store the resident target image data is included. The image controller 237 executes the image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads out the image data designated by the transfer process from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a. To the designated address of the video RAM 235 for residence. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  As a result of the process of S7603, if all resident target image data has been transferred (S7603: Yes), the simplified image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S7605), and this process is ended. Thus, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 75B), the command is not the simple command determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 75B) and the simple display setting process (see S6309 in FIG. 75B). Since determination processing (see FIGS. 76 to 81) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 82 to 84) are performed, drawing of an image at normal time is set, and the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. The normal image is displayed. Further, subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 86) (see S7501: No in FIG. 85A).

  By executing the resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 performs all residency to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 except for the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image already transferred in the main process. Object image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 to be held without being overwritten while the power is on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process is resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is on.

  Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display controller 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the image controller 237 is used. The image drawing process can be performed in Thus, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed at the time of image drawing. Therefore, the time required for the reading can be omitted, and the drawing of the image can be immediately performed to display the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81.

  In particular, image data for frequently displayed images such as a back image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message in the resident video RAM 235, the main controller 110, the audio lamp controller 113, and the display controller 114. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is made to reside immediately after the display is decided by the display etc., even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, various operations performed by the player at arbitrary timings The responsiveness until the third symbol display device 81 displays an image can be kept high.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 86, a normal image transfer setting process (S7503) which is one process of the transfer setting process (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 will be described. FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing the normal image transfer setting process (S7503).

  In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S7205) of the display setting process (S6303) executed earlier is performed. The information described in the indicated address is acquired (S7701). Then, it is determined whether the acquired information is transfer data information (S7702), and if it is transfer data information (S7702: Yes), character ROM 234 in which transfer target image data is stored from the transfer data information The start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of, and the start address of the transfer destination (video RAM for normal use 236) are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( In step S7703), the transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the on state is set to on (S7704), and the process proceeds to step S7705.

  If the acquired information is not transfer data information but null data in the process of S7702 (S7702: No), the processes of S7703 and S7704 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S7705. In the process of S7705, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer instruction is newly set to the image controller 237 after the previous transfer of the image data is completed (S7705), and the transfer instruction is set. If it is (S7705: Yes), it is further determined based on the transfer instruction whether transfer of the image data performed by the image controller 237 is completed (S7706).

  In the process of S7706, after setting the transfer instruction of the image data to the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed when the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237. . Then, if it is determined that the transfer processing is not completed by the processing of S7706 (S7706: No), since the image transfer processing is continuously performed in the image controller 237, this normal image transfer setting processing is performed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer processing has ended (S7706: Yes), the processing proceeds to S7707. Also, as a result of the process of S7705, even when the transfer instruction of the image data is not set to the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer process (S7705: No), the process moves to S7707.

  In the process of S7707, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S7707), and if the transfer start flag is on (S7707: Yes), there is image data to be transferred, so the transfer start flag Is turned off (S7708), and the image data of the sprite indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the process of S7703 is set as the image data to be transferred, and then the process proceeds to the process of S7713. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S7707: No), it is then determined whether the rear image change flag 233w is on (S7709). If the back image change flag 233w is not on but off (S7709: No), since there is no image data to be transferred, the normal image transfer setting process is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, if the back image change flag 233w is on (S7709: Yes), it means that the back image is changed, and therefore, the back image change flag 233w is set to off (S7710) and then provided for each back image type. The image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag 233x in the on state among the back image discrimination flag 233x is specified, and the image data is set as the transfer object image data (S7711). Furthermore, the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image determination flag 233x in the on state is stored, and the transfer destination ( The start address of the normal video RAM 236) is acquired (S7712), and the process proceeds to S7713.

  In the process of S7713, it is determined whether the transfer target image data is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7713). The determination in the process of S7713 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233i. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite as the transfer target image data is read from the storage image data determination flag 233i, and if the storage state is "on", the image data of the sprite as the transfer target is the normal video If it is determined that the stored state is "off", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

  If the transfer target image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the process of S7713 (S7713: Yes), it is not necessary to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The normal image transfer setting process is ended as it is. As a result, unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, so that the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. Can be

  On the other hand, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of S7713 (S7713: No), a transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set (S7714). As a result, transfer data information of transfer target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, it is possible to transfer the image data of the transfer target image from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start and end addresses of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the transfer target image is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (here, transfer) The start address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 to store the image data of the transfer target image to be transferred is included. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on the transfer data information, reads out the image data designated by the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, and designates the designated video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). To the specified address. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  After the process of S7714, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated (S7715), and the normal transfer setting process is ended. As described above, updating of the stored image data determination flag 233i sets the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the transfer target image data to "on", and the sub of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites to be stored in the area to "off".

  As described above, by executing the normal image transfer process, the process corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the command determination process previously executed, and as a result, the display stop type command is executed. If it is determined that the indicated stop type information is a stop type for a big hit, it is possible to transfer the image data used in the fanfare effect from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. In addition, when the rear image is changed based on the reception of the rear image change command in the command determination process executed earlier, the rear surface of the resident video RAM 235 among the image data used for the rear image. Image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the display data table is displayed in the display data table buffer 233 d according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main controller 110. At the same time, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, the MPU 231 executes the normal image transfer setting process to send the image controller 237 the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233 f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233 e. Since the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233 d is reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at the desired timing. Can.

  Here, in the transfer data table, image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is defined for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information defined in the transfer data table, whereby the predetermined is performed according to the display data table. When drawing a sprite, image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  Thereby, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite designated in the data table. Also, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, in the transfer data table, transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. As a result, transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that processing relating to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in units of sprites, transfer of the image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, an increase in load applied to transfer can be efficiently suppressed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 87, details of the above-mentioned drawing process (S6306) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

  In the drawing process, types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S6304) and parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, semitransparent value, α blending information) The drawing list (see FIG. 30) is generated from the color information, the filter specification information), and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S6305) (S7801). That is, in the processing of S7801, based on the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task processing (S6304), for each sprite, the storage RAM type storing the image data of the sprite and the address are specified Then, with respect to the specified storage RAM type and address, the necessary parameters for the sprite determined by the task processing are associated. Then, the sprites are rearranged in the order of the sprites to be placed on the front side from the sprites to be placed on the back side in the image for one frame, and then details for each sprite in the sprite order after the rearrangement. The drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type in which the image data of the sprite is stored, the address, and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite as proper drawing information (detailed information). When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S6305), the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which transfer target image data is stored as transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. , The final address (storage source final address), and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236).

  As described above, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 where the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 According to the sprite type, the storage RAM type and the address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233 j are transmitted to the image controller (S 7802). Here, in the case where the drawing target buffer flag 233 j is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233 j is 1 including the information for expanding the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236 b as the drawing target buffer information. Includes information instructing development of the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236 c as drawing object buffer information.

  The image controller 237 draws images sequentially from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, and expands it by overwriting the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information. Do. As a result, in the image of one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be placed closest to the back, and the sprite drawn last can be placed closest to the front.

  If transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data from the transfer data information And the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236), and the image data stored from the storage source start address to the storage source final address are sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, when the normal video RAM 236 is not in use, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 thereafter, and drawing of an image according to the drawing list is performed.

  The image controller 237 reads out the image information of the image developed earlier from the frame buffer different from the frame buffer instructed by the drawing object buffer information, and the image information together with the drive signal is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Send to Thereby, the image developed in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, the image developed from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while the image drawn in one frame buffer is expanded, and the drawing processing and the display processing are simultaneously processed in parallel. be able to.

  In the drawing process, after the process of S7802, the drawing object buffer flag 233j is updated (S7803). Then, the drawing process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The update of the drawing target buffer flag 233 j is performed by inverting the value, that is, setting “1” when the value is “0”, and setting “0” when the value is “1”. To be done. Thereby, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted.

  Here, transmission of the drawing list is executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds for which the image drawing process and display process for one frame are completed. It is performed each time the drawing process of the loading process (see FIG. 75 (b)) is performed. Thus, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. The second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of a minute is read. Accordingly, the image information of the image developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Be done. Therefore, the image information of the image developed in the second frame buffer 236c earlier can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . Thereafter, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds between the frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame and the frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. By alternately specifying, it is possible to perform display processing of an image of one frame continuously in units of 20 milliseconds while performing drawing processing of an image of one frame.

  In the first embodiment, the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be executed simultaneously in parallel, but it is not limited to this. For example, regardless of whether it is the first special symbol or the second special symbol, in the state where one variable display is being executed, another variable display may be configured to be infeasible. And when a holding ball exists, it is good also as composition which carries out change display in order from a holding ball with which a starting winning combination is temporally old. By configuring in this way, control can be simplified, and processing load can be reduced.

  As described above, in the first embodiment, the normal state (the low probability state of the special symbol and the normal state of the normal symbol) and the positive change state (the high probability state of the special symbol and the high probability of the normal symbol) Four game states are provided: state), short time state (special symbol low probability state and normal symbol high probability state) and latent state (special symbol high probability state and normal symbol normal state) There is. Then, the latent state is configured to be the most advantageous game state for the player.

  That is, when the latent state is set, the variation time for showing the lottery of the second special symbol which is more likely to be a lottery result more advantageous to the player than the lottery of the first special symbol is set to another gaming state By defining the length to be shorter than that in the case where it is set, it is possible to most efficiently execute the lottery advantageous to the player. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with a novel game characteristic of expecting the latent state to be set.

  Specifically, in addition to the jackpot in the second special symbol lottery, the first specified winning opening 65a is opened even in the case of a small hit, so that the variation time of the second special symbol is short. In the state, it is possible to keep increasing the winning balls. Therefore, the game can be played in anticipation of being in the latent state. In a general game machine, the probability change state is the most advantageous game state, but in the present embodiment, since the latent state is more advantageous than the probability change state, novel game characteristics can be provided.

  Further, in the first embodiment, the variable display based on the lottery of the first special symbol and the variable display based on the lottery of the second special symbol can be executed simultaneously (in parallel) (so-called simultaneous) Adopts a fluctuation method). As a result, even while the variation display of one special symbol is being executed, the variation display of the other special symbol can be executed without waiting for the end of the variation display, so that the lottery of the special symbol can be executed more efficiently it can. In addition, when the first special symbol and the second special symbol are changing at the same time, if one of them stops changing with a stop symbol of big hit or small hit, the other change display shows the remaining change time or lottery Regardless of the result, it is stopped and displayed with the stop stop pattern. In this way, it is possible to prevent the other variable display from being determined and displayed as a win or small hit during the execution of the big hit or the small hit, and the jackpot or the small hit may be repeatedly started.

  Further, in the first embodiment, when the probability variation state (high probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol) is set, when the variable display corresponding to the big hit of the first special symbol is executed Usually, the high probability state of the symbol shifts to the low probability state, and the gaming state shifts from the probability change state to the latent state. While this latent state is set, the variable display (dynamic display) period for showing the lottery result of the second special symbol is set short, so many lottery of the second special symbol may be executed. It is a possible period (special figure 2 fluctuation advantageous period).

  In the present embodiment, since it is configured to win a small hit in the lottery of the second special symbol at a probability of about 1/2, during the period in which the latent state is set as the gaming state, the small hit When the player wins the game, the small hit game to be executed is executed frequently, and a game state (special figure 2 advantageous state) advantageous to the player who can obtain many winning balls is achieved.

  As described above, the period in which the latent state is set in the present embodiment (special figure 2 fluctuation advantageous period) is during the fluctuation display period (dynamic display period) of the first special symbol winning the jackpot in the probability change state Since it is (during special figure 1 big hit fluctuation), when special figure 2 advantageous state ends, big hit game will be executed. As described above, since a plurality of states (special figure 2 advantageous state, jackpot gaming state) that are advantageous to the player are continuously set, the player is continuously given various benefits. Can.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, when a small hit is won in one special symbol (special figure 2) and a small hitting game is executed, the variation of the other special symbol (special figure 1) is interrupted (variation display period Interrupt the measurement of the), when the small hitting game is over, it is configured to resume the measurement of the suspended display period. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the special figure 2 fluctuation advantageous period from being subtracted during the small hitting game, so regardless of the number of small hitting games executed during the special figure 2 fluctuation advantageous period. The player can be provided with a certain special figure 2 fluctuation advantageous period.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when the jackpot game is executed based on the lottery result of one of the special symbols (special figure 1), the other special symbol (special figure 2) in the movement is a stop display mode showing the detachment. It is configured to stop by force. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a small hit game is executed during a big hit game.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the control content for the variation of the other special symbol is made different according to the lottery result of the one special symbol. Specifically, when the lottery result of one of the special symbols is a big hit (a lottery result capable of giving the first benefit to the player), the variation of the other special symbol is that the lottery result is out of order. If the stop display is in the display mode shown and the lottery result of one of the special symbols is a small hit (a lottery result capable of giving the player a second benefit different from the first benefit), the variation of the other special symbol Is suspended until the end of the second benefit award (until the small hit game is ended), and is resumed after the end of the second benefit award. In addition, when the lottery result of one of the special symbols is out, the variation of the other special symbol is executed as it is.

  By configuring in this manner, it is possible to vary the lottery contents of the other special symbol (the period until the lottery result is displayed, the period until the lottery result is displayed) based on the lottery result of one of the special symbols. A variety of gameplay can be provided.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when the lottery result of one of the special symbols is a lottery result capable of giving a bonus to the player, the control content for the other special symbol variation is made different according to the content of the bonus. Therefore, for example, in the case where the lottery result gives the player the most advantageous benefit (big hit game), the lottery result corresponding to the change of the other special symbol being executed is the lottery result giving the benefit. Even if the player is forced to stop the change so that the lottery result deviates, the player is prevented from being given an extra benefit, and the lottery result (small hit) with less benefits given than the jackpot game In the case of, in order to prevent the bonus based on the lottery of the other special symbol being given during the small hitting game, without changing the lottery result corresponding to the fluctuation of the other special symbol being executed, the fluctuation table It is possible to interrupt only the measurement period.

  Therefore, in the state in which a plurality of special symbols (special figure 1 and special figure 2) are simultaneously changing, the player is given the most inconvenient benefit by being granted the most advantageous benefit to be awarded later. It is possible to suppress a situation in which the player does not get out of the game and to prevent a situation in which a player feels uncomfortable.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when the latent state is set as the gaming state, a short display period (0.5 seconds) is set as the variable display period of the second special symbol (special figure 2), The small hit game is configured to be able to be executed frequently. Then, the condition that the latent state is set as the gaming state, the condition that the latent state is ended as the case where the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol in the state where the probability variation state is set, the first special symbol Since the stop display is in the display mode indicating the big hit and the big hit game is executed, the big hit game is executed after the end of the first advantage period which is advantageous to the player who is frequently played the small hit game. The second game period is set. Therefore, since the first advantageous period and the second advantageous period that are advantageous to the player can be set continuously, it is possible to play the game with enthusiasm so that the first advantageous period is set.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is started during the probability change state, the latent state is set from the time of the jackpot fluctuation start, and the latency state In the state where is set, it is comprised so that the lottery of the 2nd special symbol (special figure 2) can be performed efficiently.

  Therefore, it is configured to notify the player of the period in which the latent state is set (based on the setting of the latent state) (FIG. 7 (a ))reference.

  However, since the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is capable of simultaneously changing the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the first special symbol is also the second in a state where the positive variation state is set. Both special symbols may change.

  In such a case, even if the display mode indicating that the latent state (RUSH) has been set is displayed at the timing when the latent state is set (see FIG. 7A), The lottery of the second special symbol in the latent condition can not be executed until the special symbol stops fluctuating, and a problem occurs that the small hit game is not executed regardless of how long it is in the RUSH condition. There was a fear.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the transition condition to the latent state is satisfied (when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol during the probability change state), the fluctuation state of the second special symbol (presence or absence of fluctuation, The remaining fluctuation period is determined, and based on the determination result, the timing for notifying that the RUSH state has been set is configured to be different.

  Specifically, when it is determined that the new second special symbol fluctuation is executable when the transition condition to the latent state is established, it is notified that the RUSH state is set. Configured. As a result, despite reporting that the RUSH state has been set, the variation of the new second special symbol is not started, and it is possible to suppress the situation where the small hitting game is not executed.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when the transition condition to the latent state is satisfied, the period until the latent state ends is determined after the variation of the new second special symbol becomes executable. When the determined period is less than the predetermined period, it is configured not to notify that the RUSH state has been set. Thereby, it is possible to suppress that the big hit game is started without the small hit game being executed, even though it is informed that the RUSH state is set.

  In this embodiment, when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol in the definite variation state, as the gaming state by transitioning the high probability state of the normal symbol to the low probability state at the time when the jackpot fluctuation starts If it is configured to set the latent condition and wins the jackpot in the second special symbol lottery, the high probability state of the normal symbol is not shifted to the low probability state at the time when the jackpot fluctuation starts , It is configured to continue the definite change state even during the jackpot fluctuation. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to provide different game characteristics depending on the type of the special symbol.

  It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the configuration of the present embodiment, and even when the jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery in the probability variation state, the high probability state of the normal symbol to the low probability state at the time It may be configured to set a latent state as a gaming state by transitioning to a special game type, and only when a specific jackpot type is set among a plurality of jackpot types, it is normal at the time when the jackpot fluctuation starts. The high probability state of the symbol may be shifted to the low probability state to set the latent state as the gaming state.

  Furthermore, measure the number of big wins won during the advantageous continuation period, and when the measurement results reach a predetermined number, shift the high probability state of the normal symbol to the low probability state at the time when the big hit fluctuation starts. It may be configured to set the latent state as the gaming state.

  In this embodiment, when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery in the definite variation state, it is configured to set the latent state in the period until the jackpot fluctuation ends at the time when the jackpot fluctuation starts. However, the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, a period until the jackpot fluctuation corresponding to the predicted winning information ends based on the prediction that the jackpot will be won in the start winning processing (see FIG. 47) ( A plurality of fluctuation periods) may be configured to set a latent state.

  In this embodiment, when selecting the variation pattern of the second special symbol in the state where the latent condition is set, the variation pattern table is always constant regardless of the number of variations of the second special symbol during the latent state setting. Although it is set as the composition which uses (refer to Drawing 19 (b)), it is not restricted to this, for example, the number of times of change of the 2nd special symbol after a latent state is set reaches predetermined times (for example, 50 times) It is also possible to provide discrimination means for discriminating whether or not it has been made, and to make the data table for selecting the variation pattern different based on the discrimination result of the discrimination means.

  Specifically, when the number of changes in the second special symbol has not reached a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times), the second special symbol changes by referring to the data table in which the average of the change time is about 2 seconds. If the number of times has reached a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times), it is preferable to refer to a data table in which the average of the fluctuation time is about 1 second. As a result, when a variation pattern in which a long variation time is set as the jackpot variation of the first special symbol is selected, more small hitting games can be provided to the player.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, although it is comprised so that a latent state may be set during the big hit change in a definite change state, the lottery result of a special symbol is a specific deviation or a small hit besides this. It may be configured such that the latent state is set during the variable display in the case, or during the definite change state, the lottery result of the special symbol falls off a specific number or the number of times of small hits reaches a predetermined number of times It may be configured such that the latent state is set when it occurs.

Second Embodiment
Next, a pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the first embodiment described above, in the state in which the probability variation state (high probability state of special symbol, low probability state of normal symbol) is set, when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) The game state in the jackpot fluctuation is considered to be the latent state, and the small hitting game is configured to be easily executed when the latent state is set. On the other hand, in the second embodiment, in addition to the configuration of the first embodiment described above, the gaming state can be changed during the symbol determination period (period in which the first symbol is stopped and displayed) for displaying the lottery result of the special symbol. It is configured to That is, when the jackpot is won by the first special symbol (special figure 1) lottery in the state where the definite variation state is set, the start timing (the first symbol showing the jackpot) of the symbol determination period in which the lottery result is displayed Is configured to set the latent state as the gaming state at the timing when the stop display is performed.

  Furthermore, the second embodiment differs from the above-described first embodiment in that different symbol determination periods are set based on the lottery results of the special symbols. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to make the length of the period in which the latent state advantageous to the player is set different according to the length of the symbol determination period to be set. Also, as in the first embodiment described above, the symbol determination period of the special symbol (special pattern compared to the configuration in which the latent state is set according to the variation time of the special symbol (period in which the special symbol is varied) Since the configuration for setting the latent probability state corresponding to the period in which the symbol is stopped is used, the display mode corresponding to the special symbol in the state where the latent state is set can be simplified. The control of the pachinko machine 10 can be simplified.

  Furthermore, in the first embodiment described above, once the definite variation state is set, the definite variation state is continued until the jackpot is won next time, but in the second embodiment, the big hit of the special symbol is Even if the player does not win, he / she is made to end the definite change state when the predetermined end condition (the number of times the special symbol variation number after the positive change state is set reaches the predetermined number (50 times) is satisfied) It differs in that it is configured in By configuring in this way, it is possible to cause the player to play the game with enthusiasm for shifting to the latent state during the period in which the definite change state is set.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 88, the flow of the game in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 88 is a timing chart showing an example of the flow of gaming in the case where a specific jackpot (jackpot C) is won in the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) in the state where the probability change state is set. . As shown in FIG. 88, in the second embodiment, when the jackpot is won in the state where the probability change state is set, from the timing when the jackpot fluctuation stops (see FIG. 88 (c)), the jackpot game is The latent state is set in a period (pattern determination period) until it is executed.

  Then, in the state in which the latent state is set, the game for performing the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is executed as in the first embodiment described above. In addition, when winning in the small figure of special figure 2 during the symbol fixed period of special figure 1, it is configured to interrupt the measurement (subtraction) of the figure fixed period of special figure 1 during the period when the small hitting game is executed ing. In addition, in the second embodiment, different symbol determination periods are set according to the lottery result even when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of place or in the case of a small hit. Thereby, the player desires that a long period is set as the symbol determination period as the lottery result (lottery result of winning the big hit) of the special figure 1 corresponding to the period in which the latent state is set, In the state where the latent state is set, it is desirable that a short period be set as the symbol determination period in order to execute the lottery of the special figure 2 more.

  That is, in the second embodiment in which the symbol determination period is made different according to the lottery result, a long symbol determination period is desired and a short symbol determination period is desired according to the game state and the type of the special symbol. And can be provided to the player. Furthermore, in the second embodiment, different symbol determination periods are set for the same variation pattern in which the same variation display can be performed. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from predicting the symbol determination period in advance by the variable display contents of the special symbol, and which symbol determination period is set for the special drawing lottery this time. It can be made incomprehensible until the special symbol is actually stopped and displayed. In addition, since it has the above-described configuration, for the fluctuation effect (effect mode executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81) executed corresponding to one fluctuation time (variation pattern) Because it is configured to set a plurality of types of symbol determination period, the time required for one special symbol lottery (the special symbol lottery will be performed before the next special symbol lottery can be performed) Even in the case of complicatedly setting up to the time), it is possible to unify the fluctuation production.

  In the example described with reference to FIG. 88, showing the flow of the game when winning the jackpot of the special figure 1 when the probability change state is set, ie, the remaining number of short time is 47 times It is configured that the latent state is set from the time when the jackpot fluctuation has stopped. In addition to this, when the jackpot of Special Figure 1 is won at the timing when the definite variation state ends (the value of the probable variation counter 203aa becomes 0) (for example, the 50th special drawing lottery after the definite variation state is set) Is configured to set the latent state from the timing when the jackpot fluctuation starts.

  By configuring in this way, in the state where the positive variation state is set, advantageous periods of different lengths are set based on the timing of winning the jackpot of the special view 1. Therefore, since it is possible to cause the player to play the game while wishing to win the jackpot at the timing when the long advantageous period is set, the interest of the game can be improved.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 89, the gaming state set for the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) executed when the positive variation state is set will be described. FIG. 89 is a diagram showing the relationship between the contents of the special view 1 game and the award score after the probability change state is set.

  As shown in FIG. 89, in the second embodiment, the gaming state is variably set based on the lottery result of the special symbol lottery executed in the state where the probability variation state is set, the number of times of drawing (number of times of special figure fluctuation). Are configured to Specifically, in the second embodiment, the definite variation state is set continuously until the number of lottery times (variation number of special symbols) reaches a predetermined number of times (50 times) without winning a big hit. If it is configured, among them, if the number of lottery the number of special symbols (the number of changes) wins a big hit between 1 to 49 times, during the big hit the symbol is a definite change state, the special symbol showing the big hit is stopped and displayed During the settlement period, the latent state is set. As a result, the player is awarded with the latency state game (RUSH game) during the symbol determination period and the jackpot game after the completion of the state of latency state.

  Then, when the number of lottery times of the special symbol (number of times of variation) wins the 50th on the 50th, a latent state is set during the jackpot variation and during the symbol determination period. As a result, the player is awarded with the latency state game (RUSH game) until the end of the jackpot variation and the symbol determination period and the jackpot game after the end of the latency state. That is, in the second embodiment, in the state in which the definite variation state is set, the transition condition (big hit) to the latent state in the state in which the specific condition (specific drawing number (50th)) is satisfied. In the case where the condition is satisfied, the player is given an advantageous benefit more than in the case where the condition for transition to the latent state is satisfied in the state where the specific condition is not satisfied.

  Then, when the number of times of drawing of the special symbol exceeds 50 times, the predetermined number of times of probability variation is reached, and the normal state is set as the gaming state. When the jackpot is won during this normal state, the normal state continues during the fluctuation of the special symbol and during the symbol determination period, and the jackpot game is executed.

  On the other hand, if the number of lottery times (number of fluctuations) of the special symbol is out on the 1st to 49th occasions after setting the definite variation state, the definite variation state is also during the variation of the special symbol and during the symbol determination period. Continued, if the 50th time is off, during the special symbol variation and during the symbol determination period, the latent condition is set, so the latent condition from the special figure fluctuation to the symbol determination period end A game (RUSH game) becomes executable.

  In addition, although detailed explanation is mentioned later, when the lottery result of a special symbol is a big hit about the fluctuation time of the special symbol in a definite variation state and the symbol determination period in the second embodiment, it is other than a big hit (off , As compared to the case of small hit), it is configured to be easy to select a long time, for example, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, "60 seconds to 180 seconds as the fluctuation time The variation time of '' is selected, and the symbol determination period of '5 seconds to 150 seconds' is selected as the symbol determination period, and when the lottery result of the special symbol is other than the big hit (for example, it is out) A fluctuation time of “0.5 seconds to 150 seconds” is selected as a fluctuation time, and a symbol determination period of “0.2 seconds to 1.5 seconds” is selected as a symbol determination period.

  By configuring in this way, according to the lottery result of the special symbol and the lottery number, the latent state game (RUSH game) is 330 seconds at the maximum (when winning a big hit in 50 times of special figure fluctuation), the minimum The game can be provided to the player with a width of 5 seconds (when the special figure fluctuation number 1 to 49 is won for the big hit). Thus, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of predicting how long the current latent state will last.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, regardless of the lottery result of the special symbol, when the number of times of the special symbol lottery (the number of times of variation) after the definite change state is set becomes 50th, during the variation of the special symbol, Since the latent probability state is set during the symbol determination period, even if the jackpot is not won during the definite change state, the latent state gaming (RUSH game) is given to the player. Can be provided. Therefore, it is possible to make the player experience the latent state game (RUSH game) more easily than the configuration of the first embodiment in which the latent state game (RUSH game) is provided only when the jackpot is won. . Therefore, despite the fact that the game has been played for a long time, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player can not experience the latent state game (RUSH game) and get bored with the game.

  Further, in the present embodiment, it is set that a longer latency state is set than when the latency state is set without winning the jackpot if the latency state is set based on the winning of the jackpot during the probability change state. It is configured to be easy. As a result, the longer the period in which the latent state game (RUSH game) is executed, the easier the jackpot game can be executed after the latent state game (RUSH game) ends. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player in the latent state game (RUSH game) to play the game while expecting the jackpot game to be executed.

  It should be noted that, unlike the configuration of the present embodiment described above, it is equivalent to the case in which the latent probability state is set based on the winning in the large portion in some cases where the latent state is set without winning the jackpot. Or, set a fluctuation time and a symbol determination period that corresponds to a lottery result of a special symbol other than a big hit (disengagement, small hit) so that a latent state game (RUSH game) of a longer length is executed. Also good. As a result, it is possible to provide the player with a situation in which it is more advantageous not to win the jackpot in the special symbol lottery, and it is possible to provide a surprising game.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, a long latent state is easily set when the jackpot is won during the definite change state, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the latent change may not be won during the positive change state. If a state is set, a long latency state may be set. In this case, for example, the probability variation number (number of lottery times (variation number) of the special symbol in which the probability variation state is continuously set) is 50 and the jackpot probability in the probability variation state, that is, the high probability status of the special symbol is 1/20. It is good to set so that a long latent state is set when the result of the special symbol lottery is out of 50 times consecutively (about 7%).

  Next, among the display contents displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the display contents different from the above-described first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the second embodiment, unlike the first embodiment described above, since the latent state is set during the symbol determination period, the special figure 1 for the contents of the effect displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 The display mode of the display area Dm1 or the special view 2 display area Dm2 is different from that of the first embodiment described above. FIG. 90 (a) is a schematic view schematically showing an example of display contents in the latent state. As shown in FIG. 90 (a), in the second embodiment, since the latent state is set during the period when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed (fixed display), the latent state is set. The display of the effect mode (super chance zone display) showing the state in which the variation of the second special symbol is executed across the timing, the lottery result of the first special symbol (special figure 1) in the special view 1 display area Dm1 It differs from the display screen (see FIG. 8A) of the first embodiment described above in that it is executed during a period when the second symbol to be displayed is stopped and displayed (finalized display). The other display elements are the same as in the first embodiment, and thus the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  In the example shown in FIG. 90 (a), the display mode ("777") of the third symbol for showing that the first special symbol (special figure 1) has won the big hit is stopped and displayed. It indicates that the latent state is set based on the jackpot winning with the first special symbol during the definite change state. In the example shown in FIG. 90 (a), since the special figure 1 display area Dm1 in which the third symbol is displayed in a display mode visible to the player is formed, the player can display the special figure 1 display area. By grasping the display mode of the third symbol displayed in Dm1 and the effect mode indicating that the latent state displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 has been set, the flow of the future game will be related. It is possible to play the game in a state where information (information on whether or not the jackpot game is to be executed after completion of the latent game) is acquired in advance.

  Further, in the second embodiment, when the latent state is set based on the big hit of the first special symbol, the fall lottery (special symbol when the lottery of the special symbol is performed in the latent state) In order to shift the high probability state of to the low probability state, the lottery is not performed. Therefore, by identifying the display mode of the third symbol displayed in the special figure 1 display area Dm1, it is possible to grasp whether the current latent state is an advantageous latent state advantageous to the player. You can play with peace of mind.

  In the second embodiment, the third symbol is displayed so that the player can easily identify the lottery result of the special symbol. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the lottery result of the special symbol is displayed. In order to make it difficult for the player to identify, the display area is reduced, or the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is provided (for example, provided other than the light emitter attached to the game board 13 or the third symbol display device 81 The display may be performed using the liquid crystal display device or the like. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand what opportunity the latent state has been set, so that the jackpot game is executed after the latent state game (RUSH game) is over. It is possible to play the game while predicting whether or not the falling lottery is being executed during the latent state game (RUSH game).

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the display mode of the third symbol is displayed until the final display period (the symbol determination period) elapses after the third symbol is stopped (fixed display) in the special view 1 display area Dm1. Although the configuration is made to stop completely without changing it, it is not limited to this, as long as it informs the player that the present time is the final display period (the symbol finalization period) of the special symbol. During the finalized display period, the variable display of the third symbol is stopped, but the display mode (color) of the third symbol may be gradually changed, or the third character may not be identified by the player. You may constitute so that a pattern may be rocked.

  In addition, the player is currently in the finalized display period (the symbol determination period), or the right to execute the special symbol lottery to be newly executed is not yet acquired, so the new lottery for the special symbol (variation is made ) May be set so as to set the display mode for causing the player to identify whether or not the state is not being executed. For example, in the special view 1 display area Dm1, “in final display” or “in standby” The command of "" may be displayed, or the display mode (color, design) of the third symbol may be varied between "during display" and "on standby". By configuring in this manner, it is possible to suppress false recognition that a new lottery is not started, despite the state of holding storage, during the definite display period.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 90 (b), display contents at the time of entry into the latent state game (RUSH game) in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 90 (b) is a schematic view schematically showing an example of display contents displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 at the time of entering the latent game (RUSH game). As shown in FIG. 90 (b), in the present embodiment, since the latent state is set during the period when the first special symbol is in the stop display (final display), the latent state game (RUSH game) is made. Perform the effect mode that shows to enter during the period when the second symbol for showing the lottery result of the first special symbol (special figure 1) in the special figure 1 display area Dm1 is stopped and displayed (confirmed display) This point is different from the display screen of the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 8B). The other display elements are the same as in the first embodiment, and thus the detailed description thereof is omitted.

Regarding Electrical Configuration in Second Embodiment
Next, an electrical configuration according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the second embodiment, the contents of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 are changed, and the contents of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control apparatus 113 are changed. It differs in that it is done. The other points are the same as those of the first embodiment, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 91 is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 in the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 91, in the ROM 202 of the second embodiment, instead of the big hit type selection table 202d, the big hit type selection 2 table 202aa is replaced with the small hit type selection table 202e, and the small hit type selection 2 table 202ab The second embodiment is different from the first embodiment described above in that a variation pattern selection 2 table 202 ac is provided instead of the variation pattern selection table 202 f, and a deviation type selection table 202 ad is further provided.

  The jackpot type selection 2 table 202aa is different from the jackpot type selection table 202d of the first embodiment described above in that the type of jackpot type is changed, and various counters set after the jackpot end (time reduction counter 203f, probability variation counter 203aa The difference is that the contents of the determined time counters 203ad and 203ae) are changed and the value of the first hit type counter C2 corresponding to each jackpot type is changed. Here, the jackpot type selection 2 table 202aa in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 92 is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the jackpot type selection 2 table 202aa in the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 92, the jackpot type selection 2 table 202aa defines the same jackpot operation content as the jackpot type defined in the jackpot type selection table 202d (see FIG. 16A) of the first embodiment described above. The values of the time reduction counter 203f, the probability variation counter 203aa, the special figure 1 determination time counter 203ad, and the special figure 2 determination time counter 203ae are defined for each jackpot type.

  Specifically, when a jackpot type (jackpot A1 to jackpot A3) in which the same jackpot operation content as the jackpot A of the jackpot type selection table 202d of the first embodiment described above is executed is selected (winning jackpot) Stipulates that the value of "100" is set to the time reduction counter 203f when the gaming state is normal state or latent state, and that the value of "50" is set when the time reduction state or the probability change state. It is defined that the value of "50" is set to the probability variation counter 203aa.

  Furthermore, as a symbol fixed period of special symbol, big hit A1 is specified as “5 seconds”, big hit A2 as “60 seconds”, big hit A3 as “150 seconds” is set, and the obtained first hit type The jackpot A1 is defined in the range of “0 to 19”, the jackpot A2 is defined in the range of “20 to 23”, and the jackpot A3 is defined in “24” of the value of the counter C2 (0 to 99). That is, in the second embodiment, the jackpot operation corresponding to the jackpot A (jackpot A1 to A3) is executed at 25% when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, and 80% of them (20/20 25) specifies that the jackpot D, and 16% (4/25) will be the jackpot A2, and 4% (1/25) will be the jackpot A3.

  That is, in the present embodiment, even if the player wins a jackpot in which the jackpot game most advantageous to the player is executed, the symbol determination period is short as a period (symbol determination period) for stopping and displaying the lottery result on the player. If selected, the period in which the latent state game (RUSH game) is executed will be shortened. Therefore, with respect to the drawing of the special symbol, it is possible to make the player pay attention not only to the presence or absence of the jackpot winning but also to the length of the symbol determination period, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the second embodiment, the symbol determination period is defined in association with the jackpot type, but the present invention is not limited thereto, and a lottery for selecting the jackpot operation content (jackpot type), A lottery for selecting a symbol determination period may be performed independently. In this case, since it is possible to combine a plurality of symbol determination periods with a plurality of jackpot types, it is possible to provide playability that is difficult for the player to predict.

  Next, as with the above-described jackpot A1 to A3, jackpot B1 to B3, jackpot C1 to C3, and jackpot D1 to D3 are respectively defined.

  Specifically, when the jackpot type (jackpot B1 to jackpot B3) in which the same jackpot operation content as the jackpot B of the jackpot type selection table 202d of the first embodiment described above is executed is selected (winning jackpot) Stipulates that the value of "0" is set to the time reduction counter 203f when the gaming state is normal state or latent state, and that the value of "100" is set when the time reduction state or the probability change state. It is defined that the value of “0” is set to the probability variation counter 203aa. Furthermore, as the symbol determination period of the special symbol, the jackpot B1 is defined as "5 seconds", the jackpot B2 is "60 seconds", and the jackpot B3 is set as "150 seconds".

  Next, the small hitting type selection 2 table 202ab will be described with reference to FIG. 93 (a). FIG. 93A is a schematic view schematically showing the content of the small hitting type selection 2 table 202ab in the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 93 (a), the small hitting type selection 2 table 202ab is different from the small hitting type selection table 202e (see FIG. 16 (b)) of the first embodiment described above in each small hitting type (small It differs in the point which further subdivides and prescribes | hangs A-small hits C). Other than that, it is the same as the small hit type selection table 202e (see FIG. 16B). Detailed descriptions of the same elements are omitted.

  Specifically, as the small hitting type in which the small hitting operation (opening operation) corresponding to the small hitting A in the first embodiment described above is executed, the value of the small hitting type counter C5 falls within the range of “0 to 9”. "Small hit A1" with a symbol determination time of "0.2 seconds" is in the range of "10 to 89", and "small hit A2" with a symbol determination time of "0.5 second", "90 to 93 "Small hit A3" where the symbol determination time is "1.5 seconds" is defined in the range of "."

  Then, as a small hitting type in which the small hitting operation (opening operation) corresponding to the small hitting B of the first embodiment described above is executed, the value of the small hitting type counter C5 is within the range of "94 to 95" and the symbol is determined "Small hit B1" of the time "0.2 seconds" is in the range of "96 to 97", and "small hit B2" of the symbol determination time of "0.5 second" is the symbol to the value of "98" A "small hit B3" having a determined time of "1.5 seconds" is defined. Furthermore, as the small hitting type in which the small hitting operation (opening operation) corresponding to the small hitting C of the first embodiment described above is executed, the value of the small hitting type counter C5 is "99" and the symbol determination time is "1. A small hitting operation (opening operation) of 5 seconds is defined.

  Next, contents of the deviation type selection table 202 ad will be described with reference to FIG. 93 (b). The out-of-classification type selection table 202ad is used to select the out-of-classification type when the lottery result of the special symbol is out-of-pattern, and different patterns corresponding to the acquired value of the small hitting type counter C5 Fixed time is specified.

  In this embodiment, the same counter value (the value of the small hit type counter C5 in the case where the lottery result of the special symbol is small and the case where the lottery is out because of the fact that it can not be duplicated as the lottery result of the special symbol. It is configured to select the type referring to). Thereby, the number of counters of the main control device 110 can be reduced. In addition, it is good also as a structure which uses a different counter, when not limited to the structure mentioned above, and the case where the lottery result of a special symbol is a small hit, and the case of detachment.

  FIG. 93 (b) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents defined in the deviation type selection table 202ad. As shown in FIG. 93 (b), the symbol type (off type) with a symbol determination time of 0.2 seconds to 1.5 seconds is a small hit corresponding to the lottery result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. It is defined corresponding to the value of the type counter C5.

  As described above, in the second embodiment, as a lottery result of a special symbol, a jackpot result of a big hit, a small hit, and an off can be set, and furthermore, a different symbol determination time can be set for each lottery result It is composed of Thereby, even if the lottery results of the special symbols are the same, different symbol determination times can be set.

  Here, for example, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit and the latent state is set during the symbol determination period, a longer time (for example, 150 seconds) is selected as the symbol determination period. Since the period in which the latent state is set can be extended, it can be advantageous for the player. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol is out, as the long symbol determination time is selected, the number of games per unit time (the number of special symbol lottery) decreases, which is disadvantageous for the player.

  Furthermore, the second special symbol (special figure 2) in the case where the latent state is set in the period when the special symbol indicating that the lottery result of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is a big hit is stopped and displayed In the latent state game (RUSH game) to execute the lottery, when the lottery result of the special figure 2 is a small hit or is out, a long symbol determination time is selected, whereby a predetermined latent state is established. This is disadvantageous for the player because the number of times of drawing of the special figure 2 that can be executed during the period (the symbol determination period of the special figure 1) decreases.

  As described above, since the degree of advantage of the set symbol determination period can be varied according to the lottery result of the special symbol, it is possible to provide the player with novel playability.

  In the present embodiment, by changing the symbol determination period of the special symbol, the period in which the latent state which is a game state advantageous to the player is set is changed, and the process is executed during the latent state. Although the degree of advantage provided to the player is made different by varying the number of times of special symbol lottery, a configuration other than this may be used. Only when the symbol determination period of the special symbol indicating that it has been won is longer than the predetermined period, it may be configured to give the player a privilege to display a preferable video, or the music played during the jackpot game The selection operation may be configured to be executable during the symbol determination period.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 94, the contents of the time reduction / probability change 2 table 202ac2 will be described. FIG. 94 is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the time-saving / probability-variation 2 table 202ac2 in the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 94, the time reduction / probability 2 table 202ac2 has a variation pattern corresponding to the special view 1 with respect to the time reduction / probability table 202f2 (see FIG. 19A) of the first embodiment described above. The difference is that they have different lengths. Other than that, it is the same as the time reduction / probability change table 202f2 (see FIG. 19A). Detailed descriptions of the same elements are omitted.

  That is, in the present embodiment, the latent state is set during the stop display period (pattern determination period) of the special symbol in the case where the jackpot is won by the lottery of the special symbol (lottery of special figure 1) during the definite variation state. Since it is comprised, it is comprised so that the fluctuation | variation display period of the special figure 1 in a probability change state may become shorter than 1st Embodiment.

  Next, the configuration of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 95 is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 95, in the second embodiment, a definite variation counter 203 aa is provided instead of the definite variation flag 203 g in the first embodiment described above, and the special figure 1 during symbol determination flag 203 ab, special figure 2 The difference is that the flag 203ac during symbol determination, the special figure 1 determination time counter 203ad, and the special figure 2 determination time counter 203ae are added. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals and the description thereof is omitted.

  The probability variation counter 203 aa is a counter for continuing the number of drawing of the special symbol executed in the high probability state (latency state, definite variation state) of the special symbol, and a period in which the drawing of the special symbol is executed with high probability To indicate.

  The probability variation counter 203aa is a value defined corresponding to the winning jackpot type at the timing of setting the probability variation flag 203g to ON in the jackpot end processing (see S2312 in FIG. 54) of the first embodiment described above (FIG. 92) is set, and its value is referred to in the first special symbol jackpot determination processing 2 (see S356 in FIG. 98) (S451 in FIG. 98), and the jackpot lottery according to the value set in the probability variation counter 203aa It is executed (see S403 and S404 in FIG. 98). Moreover, it is referred also when performing the lottery of a 2nd special symbol similarly (refer S953 of FIG. 102).

  Then, the value is decremented by 1 at the timing when the symbol determination period of the special symbol (special figure 1, special figure 2) elapses, and is reset to 0 at the timing when the symbol determination period of the special symbol won the big hit .

  Special figure 1 during symbol determination flag 203ab is a flag for showing that the first special symbol (special figure 1) is stopped and displayed, and when it is set to ON, the stop indication of special figure 1 It indicates that it is during the period (during the symbol determination period). The special figure 1 symbol determination in progress flag 203ab is set to ON in the first special symbol determination period setting process (see S852 in FIG. 100) (see S2802 in FIG. 100), and the first special symbol variation stop process 2 (FIG. 99) (Refer to S257 of Then, if it is determined that the symbol determination period has elapsed (S853 in FIG. 99: Yes), it is set to be off.

  The special figure 2 symbol decision in progress flag 203ac is a flag for indicating that the second special symbol (special figure 2) is stopped and displayed, and when it is set to ON, the stop indication of the special figure 2 is displayed. It indicates that it is during the period (during the symbol determination period). The special figure 2 symbol determination in progress flag 203ac is the special figure 1 in symbol determination in relation to the flag 203ab described above, the type of the special symbol to be targeted from the first special symbol (special figure 1) to the second special symbol (special figure) It differs only in the point changed to 2), and the detailed explanation is omitted.

  Special figure 1 determination time counter 203ad, special figure 2 determination time counter 203ae are counters for measuring the symbol determination period of the first special symbol (special figure 1) or the second special symbol (special figure 2) When the first special symbol (special figure 1) or the second special symbol (special figure 2) 1 is stopped and displayed, a value indicating the current symbol determination period is set to the corresponding counter. Then, in the process during the fixed time periodically executed (see S 860 in FIG. 101), the value of the counter is subtracted, and the values of the special figure 1 fixed time counter 203 ad and the special figure 2 fixed time counter 203 ae become 0. In this case, processing for ending the symbol determination period of the special symbol is executed.

  In the second embodiment, different symbol determination periods are set according to the type for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol (see FIGS. 92 and 93). Then, the latent state is set as the gaming state during the symbol determination period.

  Next, information stored in the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 96 is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 96, in the RAM 223 of the second embodiment, in addition to the electrical configuration of the first embodiment described above, the special view determination counter 223aa, the special view 2 determination counter 223ab, and the remaining determination time information storage area The difference is that 223ac, a flag 223ad being determined is added.

  Special figure 1 determination counter 223aa is a counter for measuring the period (pattern determination period) to which the first special symbol is stopped and displayed, and the symbol determination period of the first special symbol (special figure 1) from main controller 110 Is received, the value corresponding to the symbol determination period of the special figure 1 is set.

  The value set in the special figure 1 determination counter 223aa is periodically subtracted by various counter update processing 2 (see FIG. 111) executed every one millisecond. In the second embodiment, since the latent state which is a gaming state advantageous to the player is configured to be set during the symbol determination period of the special symbol (first special symbol), this special drawing By managing the value of the 1 determination counter 223aa, it becomes possible to set remaining period information indicating a remaining period in which the latent state is continuously set.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when a small winning of the second special symbol is won during the symbol determination period of the special figure 1 (during the latent state game), the value of the special figure 1 determination counter 223aa during the small hitting game It is configured to interrupt the process of subtracting. Therefore, since the symbol determination period of the special figure 1 is not subtracted while the small hitting game is being executed, it is possible to appropriately execute the lottery of the second special symbol during the symbol determination period.

  Note that, in addition to the configuration of the second embodiment described above, processing may be provided to accumulate periods during which the subtraction processing of the special view determination counter 223aa is interrupted. Specifically, a small hit game counter is provided to measure a period during which a small hit game is being executed, and the small hit game is executed during the latent state continuously set using the small hit game counter. In the special period of time, the flag for interrupting the subtraction process of the fixed time counter 203 ad may be set to ON, and an interruption counter may be provided to measure the period during which the flag is set to ON. The middle counter may be used to calculate the cumulative period during the small hitting game in the latent state which is continuously set.

  In this manner, the player is notified of the result of the current latent game (RUSH game) by calculating accumulated interruption information obtained by accumulating the periods in which the subtraction process of the symbol determination period of the special figure 1 is interrupted. Can. Furthermore, as a detailed game result of the latent state game (RUSH game), the cumulative number of earned balls acquired during the latent state game (RUSH game), the accumulated number of small hits per winning small, and the above-mentioned suspended accumulated Based on the information, whether or not the game result indicates whether there are more benefits acquired than the design value (or more than the past history) or whether the number of balls obtained is greater than the number of small hits won The game result indicating whether or not the interruption accumulation information is long with respect to the game result to be shown or the winning number of small hits may be notified to the player. Alternatively, the system may be configured to simply notify the cumulative number of balls obtained, the cumulative number of small hits, and the cumulative interruption information.

  The special figure 2 determination counter 223ab is a counter for measuring a period (pattern determination period) in which the second special symbol is stopped and displayed, and the symbol determination period of the second special symbol (special figure 2) from the main control device 110 Is received, the value corresponding to the symbol determination period of the special figure 2 is set. The specific content is the same as that of the special figure 1 determination counter 223aa described above except that the measurement object is changed to the symbol determination period of the special figure 2 instead of the symbol determination period of the special figure 1 and detailed I omit explanation.

  Remaining fixed time information storage area 223ac, the remaining time (remaining fixed time) of the symbol fixing period at the time when the subtraction processing of the symbol fixing period of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is interrupted (temporary stop of special figure 1) It is a data area for storing remaining fixed time information shown. In the second embodiment, the effect mode at the time of resuming the subtraction process of the symbol determination period is set based on the remaining determination time information stored in the remaining determination time information storage area 223ac. As a result, by grasping the effect mode to be executed when the small hitting game is ended and the subtraction processing of the symbol determination period is resumed, it is possible to predict the period until the latent state ends.

  If it is determined that the temporary stop related command has been received in command determination process 2 (see S4162 of FIG. 106) in the remaining fixed time information storage area 223ac (S4219 of FIG. 106: Yes) The remaining fixed time information (period A to period C) set in temporary stop related process 2 (see S4253 in FIG. 108) to be executed is stored (see S4956, S4958, S4959 in FIG. 108). Then, when setting the effect mode at the time of resuming the subtraction process of the symbol determination period in the restart process (see S4952 in FIG. 109) executed in the temporary stop related process 2 (see S4253 in FIG. 108) It is output (see S5002 and S5052 in FIG. 109), and is referred to when determining the additional effect type (see S5003 and S5053 in FIG. 109).

  Thus, since information for indicating the remaining period of the latent game is notified by the establishment of various notification conditions, the remaining period of the symbol determination period, that is, the latent game It becomes possible to acquire information indicating the remaining period that can be performed by grasping the effect mode of various effects performed during the latent state. Therefore, the player can be made to pay attention to the effect, and the effect can be enhanced.

  In the second embodiment, the remaining period of the symbol determination period, that is, the remaining period in which the latent state game can be executed is divided into predetermined ranges, and the remaining period information for indicating the divided ranges is used by the player. By providing notification to the player, it is configured to provide the player with enjoyment that causes the player to roughly grasp the remaining period of the latent state gaming and predict a specific remaining period. For example, the present invention may be configured to notify the player of a specific remaining period in seconds.

  During determination flag 223ad is a flag to indicate that it is during the stop display period (pattern determination period) of the special symbol, and is set to ON when it is during the stop display period (pattern determination period) of the special symbol Ru. The final flag 223ad is configured to be set to ON even during the final symbol determination period, whichever special symbol is the first special symbol (special figure 1) or the second special symbol (special figure 2). There is.

  During determination command determination processing 2 of voice lamp control device 113 (refer to S4162 in FIG. 106), flag 223ad is determined when it is determined that a symbol determination related command has been received (S4254 in FIG. 106: Yes) symbol determination It is set to ON in the related process (see S4255 in FIG. 110) (see S5077 in FIG. 110). Then, when it is determined in the temporary stop related process 2 (see S4253 in FIG. 108) that the special view 1 temporary stop command has been received (see S4951 in FIG. 108), the fluctuation state of the special view 1 is during the symbol determination period. Is referred to (see S4953 in FIG. 108). Also, when it is determined that the special view 1 restart command is received in the restart processing (S4952 in FIG. 109) executed in the temporary stop related processing 2 (see S4253 in FIG. 108) (S5001 in FIG. 109: Yes). , It is referred to determine whether the fluctuation state of the special figure 1 is in the symbol determination period (see S5051 in FIG. 109).

  As described above, in the second embodiment, the time when the small winning is won by the second special symbol (special figure 2) lottery (when the small hitting game is executed) or when the small hitting game is over It is determined whether the variation state of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is in the variation display period or in the symbol determination period, and the special figure 1 is temporarily stopped based on the determination result (variation display period, The processing for interrupting the subtraction of the symbol determination period, and the effect mode for resuming the special view 1 (restarting the subtraction of the symbol display period and the variation display period) are configured to be set.

  By configuring in this way, the processing is executed appropriately regardless of the fluctuation state of the first special symbol (special figure 1) at the timing when the small special prize is won by the second special symbol (special figure 2) lottery can do.

<About control processing of main controller in the second embodiment>
Next, various control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 97 to 105. The control process of the main controller 110 in the second embodiment is a special symbol variation process 2 in place of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 32) with respect to the control process of the main controller 110 in the first embodiment described above. (See FIG. 97), instead of the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 34), instead of the first special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (see FIG. 98) and the first special symbol fluctuation stop process (see FIG. 38) Second special symbol variation stop processing 2 (see FIG. 99), second special symbol big hit determination processing 2 (see FIG. 102) instead of the second special symbol big hit determination processing (see FIG. 40), second special symbol variation stop processing Perform second special symbol variation stop processing 2 (see FIG. 103) in place of (see FIG. 45), and execute special figure 2 off stop processing 2 (see FIG. 105) instead of special view 2 off stop processing (see FIG. 46) Differ in that they are the first special Pattern confirmation period setting process (see FIG. 100), with the difference that adding a new second special symbol determined period setting process (see FIG. 104). The other processes are the same. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected about the same process and the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

  Here, among the contents of the control processing executed by the main controller 110 in the second embodiment, points that are significantly different from the first embodiment described above will be briefly described. In the first embodiment described above, the latent state, which is a gaming state advantageous to the player, is configured to be set during the variable display period of one of the special symbols (special figure 1). More specifically, in the state where the definite change state is set, the latent state is set during the fluctuation display period of the special symbol winning the jackpot, and the latent state game (RUSH game) is held until the fluctuation display period is over. The game is configured to execute a jackpot game immediately after the variable display period ends. This allows the player to continuously execute two different bonus games (playing a small hit frequently and a big hit game in a latent state) in a short period of time for the player. It was possible to give the benefits of

  Furthermore, since the latent state game (RUSH game) can be executed in a state before the big hit game is executed, the latent state game (RUSH game) can be executed with confidence. In other words, even if the game result on the first half side is not good by generally being set to the second half side of two consecutive bonus games where the bonus to be awarded to the player is larger than the small hit game is large. , It was possible to be motivated to obtain benefits in the game (jackpot game) executed on the second half side.

  In addition, since the latent state game (RUSH game) is configured to be performed during the execution of the jackpot variation, it is possible to set in advance a period during which the latent state game (RUSH game) can be performed. it can. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation where the latency state game (RUSH game) is executed for an unexpectedly long time and excess benefits are given to the player.

  In addition, the period in which the latent state game (RUSH game) can be performed is varied according to the variation pattern selected when the jackpot is won. In other words, since it is configured to determine the presence or absence of execution of the jackpot game and the length of the game period of the latent state game (RUSH game) by one lottery of the special symbol, the latent state game ( The processing load on the main control device 110 can be reduced as compared with the case where processing using a dedicated selection table is performed to set the length of the RUSH game period in advance.

  However, in the configuration of the first embodiment described above, since the game period of the latent state game (RUSH game) is determined only by the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol, the latent state game In order to prepare a plurality of (RUSH game) game periods, it is necessary to prepare a plurality of variation patterns (variation time) in advance, and there is a possibility that the data area for storing the variation patterns may be compressed.

  Therefore, in the second embodiment, in addition to the configuration of the first embodiment described above, the period during which the special symbol is stopped and displayed (the symbol determination period) is also a period in which the latent state game (RUSH game) can be executed. In such a manner, the length of the symbol determination period is configured to be different according to the symbol type based on the lottery result of the special symbol.

  By configuring in this manner, the game period of the latent state game (RUSH game) can be set by combining (combining) the variation period of the special symbol and the symbol determination period, so the latent state is established. The game period of the game (RUSH game) can be set in a plurality of patterns with a small amount of data.

  Furthermore, even in the lottery for the second special symbol (special figure 2) during the latent state game (RUSH game), different symbol determination periods are set according to the result of the lottery, and therefore, they are set. Depending on the symbol determination period, it is possible to make the number of times of drawing of the special figure 2 which is executed during a predetermined latent game (RUSH game) period (variation display time of the special figure 1) different.

  That is, in the lottery of the first special symbol that will set the game period of the latent state game (RUSH game), it is desired that a longer symbol determination period is set, and the latent state game (RUSH game) In the second special symbol lottery which is repeatedly executed during the game, it becomes a game characteristic that it is desired to set a shorter symbol determination period, and novelty that a different lottery result is desired depending on a special symbol type to be a lottery target Certain gameplay can be provided to the player.

  Furthermore, in the second embodiment, processing for shifting the high probability state of the normal symbol to the low probability state (subtraction processing of the time reduction counter 203f) is executed at the start of variation of the special symbol, and the high probability state of the special symbol Processing to shift the state to the low probability state (subtraction processing of the probability variation counter 203aa) at the end of the symbol determination period of the special symbol, and in the state where the high probability state of the special symbol is set The special symbol high probability state is shifted to the low probability state when the number of times the special symbol variation (lottery number) reaches a predetermined number (50 times), and the special symbol high probability state is set to be special The high probability state of the normal symbol can be shifted to the low probability state when the variation number of the symbol (lottery number) reaches a predetermined number (50 times).

  That is, when the number of times of variation of the special symbol (number of times of lottery) reaches 50 times in the state where the definite variation state (high probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol) is set, the change (50th variation At the timing when) is started, the gaming state shifts to the latent status (special symbol high probability status, normal symbol low probability status), and the timing when the fluctuation (50th fluctuation) ends (pattern finalization period ends) At the time) the game state is configured to be able to shift to the normal state (special symbol low probability state, normal symbol low probability state).

  By configuring in this way, even when the jackpot is not won, it is possible to set the latent state only for a predetermined specific period (including the 50th fluctuation period (including the symbol determination period)). , It is possible to make it easy for the player to experience the latent state game (RUSH game).

  First, referring to FIG. 97, special symbol variation processing 2 (S154) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 97 is a flowchart showing the contents of special symbol variation processing 2 (S154). The special symbol variation process 2 (S154) is replaced with the first special symbol variation stop process (S207) in that the processes of S251 and S252 are added to the special symbol variation process (S104) in the first embodiment described above. The second special symbol variation stop process 2 (S263) and the second special symbol variation stop process (S213) are replaced by a second special symbol variation stop process 2 (S263).

  In special symbol variation processing 2 (S154), when it is determined that the value of special figure 1 variation time counter 203m is 0 in the processing of S204 (S204: No), flag 203ab during special figure 1 symbol determination is turned on. It is determined whether it is set (S251). If it is determined that the special figure 1 symbol determination in progress flag 203ab is set to ON (S251: Yes), the first special symbol variation stop process 2 (S257) is executed, and the process proceeds to S209. Details of the first special symbol variation stop process 2 (S257) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S251 that the flag 203ab is set to off during special figure 1 symbol determination (S251: No), the first special symbol variation start process (S208) is executed, and the S209 is performed. Transfer to processing.

  If it is determined in the process of S206 described above that the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203m is not 0 (larger than 0) (S206: No), or if the processes of S208 and S257 are executed, the special It is determined whether the value of the fluctuation time counter 203n is larger than 0 (S209). When it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203n is not larger than 0 (is 0) (S209: No), it is then determined whether the special figure 2 symbol determination in progress flag 203ac is set to ON. (S252).

  In the process of S252, when it is determined that the flag 203ac is not set to ON during the special figure 2 symbol determination (S252: No), that is, the current second special symbol (special figure 2) by the process of S209 and S252. If it is determined that there is no change display or during the symbol determination period, the second special symbol change start process is executed to newly start the change of the second special symbol (special figure 2) (S210), and then this End the process. In addition, since the processing content of 2nd special symbol variation start processing (S210) is the same as that of 1st Embodiment mentioned above, the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

  On the other hand, in the process of S252, when it is determined that the special figure 2 symbol determination in progress flag 203ac is set to ON (S252: Yes), that is, during the symbol determination period of the second special symbol (special figure 2) If it is determined that the second special symbol variation stop process 2 (S263) is executed, the present process is ended. The details of the second special symbol variation stop process 2 (S263) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 98, a first special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (S356) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 98 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (S356). The first special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (S356) is the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306) in the first embodiment described above, the value of the probability variation counter 203aa is larger than 0 instead of the process of S402. Is different in that the process (S 451) for determining whether or not to execute.

  That is, in the first embodiment described above, when the high probability state of the special symbol is set, the high probability state of the special symbol is continued until the jackpot of the special symbol is won. Although the probability variation flag 203g for indicating the high probability state was used, in the second embodiment, as a condition for ending the high probability state of the special symbol, the jackpot winning of the special symbol (first end condition) In addition, it has a second end condition that is satisfied when the number of times of variation (number of lottery) of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times). Therefore, the probability variation counter 203 aa is used to measure the number of times of variation (number of times of lottery) of the special symbol in a period in which the high probability state of the special symbol is continuously set. The probability variation counter 203 aa is for measuring the number of times of variation (number of times of drawing) of the special symbol until the above-mentioned second end condition is satisfied, and the value is updated based on the drawing of the special symbol being executed. It is configured to be.

  The configuration other than the present embodiment is only required to determine whether the above-described second end condition is satisfied. For example, the probability variation flag 203g used in the first embodiment and the second variation A configuration using the probability variation counter 203aa used in the embodiment may be used, or a variation number counter may be provided to always measure the variation number (lottery number) of the special symbol regardless of the gaming state, and the setting status of the probability variation flag 203g. The number of times of variation of the special symbol in the probability variation state may be determined based on the number of updates of the variation number counter.

  Furthermore, in the second embodiment, the number of variations of the special symbol, ie, the number of variations of the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the number of variations of the second special symbol (special figure 2) Termination condition (the second termination condition) for terminating the definite variation state is set, but it is not limited to this, and only the variation count (lottery count) of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is measured. 1 A variation count counter and a special figure 2 variation count counter that measures only the variation count (lottery count) of the second special symbol (special figure 2), and the variation count of each special symbol (lottery count) is provided. It may be configured to set an end condition (end condition for ending the positive change state).

  Also, in the second embodiment, as the termination condition for terminating the high probability state (for example, the probability variation state) of the special symbol, in addition to the first termination condition based on the big hit of the special symbol, the number of times of variation of the special symbol Although the second end condition based on (number of times of drawing) is provided, other end conditions may be provided, for example, the drawing result of the special symbol is a specific drawing result (for example, small hitting) other than the big hit A third end condition may be established, which is satisfied when the number of occurrences reaches a predetermined number. Furthermore, the third termination condition may be set for each of the lottery result of the first special symbol and the lottery result of the second special symbol.

  In addition, a clock counter is provided to clock the time when the high probability state of the special symbol is set, and the fourth termination condition established when the clock counter clocks a predetermined time, the high probability state of the special symbol is set You may provide the 5th completion | finish conditions which may be satisfied based on the lottery result of the normal symbol and the number of times of lottery which are performed in the state which is being carried out.

  In addition, when any of the above-described plural end conditions is satisfied, the timing to shift the high probability state of the special symbol to the low probability state is also set other than the timing used in the second embodiment. Also, for example, immediately before the start of the special symbol lottery, immediately after the special symbol lottery is executed, the timing to start the variation of the special symbol, or a predetermined time after the variation of the special symbol is started (for example, 5 seconds) the timing when elapsing, the timing when the variation of the special symbol stops, the timing when a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 second) elapses after the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the stop display period of the special symbol (design confirmation) A transition may be made at any timing of the end timing of the period).

  Thus, by providing a plurality of ending conditions for ending the high probability state of the special symbol and the timing of ending the high probability state of the special symbol when the ending condition is established, the player is made special Since it can be difficult to understand how long the high probability state of the symbol will continue and at which timing (at the start of variation of the special symbol, at the time of variation stop, at the end of the symbol determination period), tension for the player It is possible to play the game while giving a feeling.

  The other processing of the first special symbol jackpot determination processing 2 (S356) is the same as the first special symbol jackpot determination processing (S306), and thus the detailed description will be omitted.

  Next, referring to FIG. 99, the first special symbol variation stop processing 2 (S257) which is one of the special symbol variation processing 2 (S154) executed by the MPU 201 of the second embodiment in the second embodiment. Will be explained. FIG. 99 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special symbol variation stop process 2 (S257). The first special symbol fluctuation stop process 2 (S 257) is a process (S 851 to S 858) to be executed during the symbol finalization period of the special symbol with respect to the first special symbol fluctuation stop process (S 207) in the first embodiment described above. , S 860) and the point that the contents of the reset processing at the time of displaying the first special symbol (special figure 1) winning the jackpot are different are different. About other processings, since it is the same as the 1st special symbol change stop processing (S207), detailed explanation is omitted.

  Here, returning to FIG. 97, conditions under which the first special symbol variation stop process 2 (S257 in FIG. 99) is executed will be described. In this first special symbol fluctuation stop process 2 (S 257 in FIG. 99), the process of stopping the fluctuation of the special symbol, the process of setting the period (pattern finalization period) of stopping and displaying the special symbol, and the set symbol decision A process of measuring a period and various execution processes corresponding to a lottery result of a special symbol after a symbol determination period has elapsed are configured to be executed.

  Therefore, in the processing of S206 of FIG. 97, that is, in the processing for determining whether it is the timing to end the variation of the first special symbol (special figure 1), the timing to stop the variation of the first special symbol (special figure 1) (The special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203m has a value of 0) (S206 in FIG. 97: Yes), and the process of S251, that is, the first special symbol (special figure 1) In the process of determining whether or not the stop display is in progress, if it is determined that the stop display of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is in progress (the special figure 1 symbol determination in progress flag 203ab is set on) (S251 in FIG. 97: Yes) is executed.

  Referring back to FIG. 99, the description will be continued. In the first special symbol variation stop process 2 (S 257), first, it is determined whether the special figure 1 symbol determination in progress flag 203 ab is set to ON (S 851). Here, in the case where the first special symbol fluctuation stop process 2 (S257) is executed to display the special figure 1 in a stopped state after the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 has elapsed, that is, in the process of S206 of FIG. When the first special symbol variation stop process 2 (S 257) is executed because it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 variation time counter 203m is 0, the special figure 1 symbol determination in progress flag 203ab is set on. Since there is no, it is determined that the flag 203ab is not set to on (set to off) during the processing of S851 (S851: No), and the first special symbol determination period setting process is executed. (S852).

  In the first special symbol determination period setting process (S852), a process is executed to set a period (pattern determination period) in which a special symbol is stopped and displayed. Here, referring to FIG. 100, a first special symbol determination period setting process which is one of the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 2 (S257) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 in the second embodiment. (S852) will be described. FIG. 100 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special symbol determination period setting process (S 852). In the first special symbol fixed period setting process (S 852), the fixed time (symbol fixed period) is set, and the processing to set the command to be sent to the first symbol display device 37, and the current first special symbol (special figure (special figure When the lottery result of 1) is a big hit, processing is performed to shift the high probability state of the normal symbol to the low probability state.

  In the second embodiment, when the winning symbol of the special symbol is won as a condition for shifting the high probability state of the normal symbol to the low probability state (time shortening ending condition) (first time shortening ending condition), the normal symbol When the number of times of fluctuation of the special symbol (number of lottery) reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times) in a state where the high probability state of is continuously set (second time ending condition), two time ends If it has conditions, and the above-mentioned first time short end condition is satisfied, the low probability state of the normal symbol is set at the timing when the special symbol is stopped and displayed (start timing of symbol finalization period), When the 2 o'clock short end condition is satisfied, it is configured to set the low probability state of the normal symbol at the timing when the variation display of the special symbol is started (the timing when the lottery of the special symbol is executed) .

  As described above, a plurality of conditions (timeout completion conditions) that trigger the transition of the high probability state of the normal symbol to the low probability state are provided, and the transition timing to the low probability state is made different according to the satisfied time completion conditions. By configuring, the low probability state of the normal symbol is set at any timing for the player who is playing the game in the gaming state (time reduction state, definite variation state) in which the high probability state of the normal symbol is set Since it can be difficult to predict whether to shift to the gaming state (normal state, latent state), it is possible to always keep an eye on the contents of the game and provide a game that does not come bored.

  In the second embodiment, the above-mentioned contents are configured to shift the state of the normal symbol, but other configurations may be used, for example, immediately before starting the lottery of the special symbol, or the special symbol Immediately after the lottery is executed, the timing to start the fluctuation of the special symbol, the timing when a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed since the fluctuation of the special symbol is started, the timing when the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped, It is configured to shift at any timing of a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 second) after the special symbol is stopped and displayed, or at the end timing of the stop display period (symbol determination period) of the special symbol. It is good.

  In the first special symbol determination period setting process (S 852), first, a value indicating a determination time (pattern determination time) corresponding to a stop symbol is set in the special figure 1 determination time counter 203ad (S 2801). In the second embodiment, the determination time is made to correspond to each type selected in the various tables (big hit type selection 2 table 202aa, small hit type selection 2 table 202ab, and off type selection table 202ad) used in the lottery of special symbols. Since (symbol determination period) is defined, a value indicating a determination time (symbol determination period) corresponding to the type to be displayed to be stopped this time is set in the special figure 1 determination time counter 203ad. Specifically, for example, if the lottery result of the first special symbol of this time is a jackpot, and the jackpot type selected using the jackpot type selection 2 table 202aa (see FIG. 92) is a jackpot A3, it is determined Since 150 seconds is defined as the time (symbol determination period), a value indicating 150 seconds is set in the special figure 1 determination time counter 203ad.

  Next, the flag 203ab is set to ON during the special figure 1 symbol determination (S2802), and it is determined whether the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is set to ON (S2803). When it is determined that the special figure 1 big hit flag 203h is set to ON (S2803: Yes), that is, it is determined that the lottery result of the first special symbol for which the determination time (symbol determination time) is set this time is a big hit If it has, the value of the time saving counter 203f is reset to shift the high probability state of the normal symbol to the low probability state (S2804). On the other hand, when it is determined that the special view 1 jackpot flag 203h is not set to ON (S2803: No), the process of S2804 is skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S2805. Thereby, only when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, it is possible to set the low probability state of the normal symbol at the timing when the special symbol is stopped and displayed.

  In addition, for example, when winning the big hit of the special symbol (first time short end condition), the number of times of fluctuation (lottery number of times) of the special symbol is a predetermined number of times in the state where the high probability state of the normal symbol is set continuously For example, if 50 time conditions have been reached (the second short time ending condition) and two short time ending conditions are satisfied based on the same special symbol lottery, it is determined whether or not the first short time ending condition is satisfied. Because it is configured to execute processing to determine the presence or absence of the establishment of the second time-short completion condition prior to the processing to be performed, winning a big hit of the special symbol when setting the symbol determination period of the special symbol Even in this case, the process of S2804 will be skipped.

  After the processing of S2803 or S2804 is executed, it is determined whether the value of the probability variation counter 203aa is larger than 0 in the processing of S2805 (S2805). If it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203aa is larger than 0 (S2805: Yes), a state command indicating the latent state is set (S2806), and the process proceeds to S2808. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S2805 that the value of the probability variation counter 203aa is 0 (S2805: No), a state command indicating a normal state is set (S2807), and the process proceeds to S2808. After executing the processing of S2806 or S2807, the special view 1 determination command is set (S2808). Next, the variation of the first special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is stopped (S2809), and the present process is ended.

  Referring back to FIG. 99, the description will be continued. On the other hand, when it is determined that the flag 203ab is set to ON during special figure 1 symbol determination in the process of S851 (S851: Yes), that is, during the symbol determination period of the first special symbol (special figure 1). If it is determined that there is, it skips the processing of S852 and shifts to the processing of S853. In special symbol variation processing 2 (see S154 in FIG. 97), it is determined that the flag 203ab is set to ON during special symbol 1 symbol determination (S251 in FIG. 97: Yes), and the first special symbol variation stop processing 2 When (see S 257 in FIG. 99) is executed, it is determined in the process of S 851 that the special figure 1 in-determination flag 203 ab is set to on.

  Next, it is determined whether the value of the special figure 1 determined time counter 203ad is 0 (S853). That is, it is determined whether the present time is the timing when the symbol determination period of the first special symbol (special figure 1) has passed. Here, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 determination time counter 203ad is not 0 (is 1 or more), that is, it is determined that the present is during the symbol determination period of the first special symbol (special figure 1) In the case (S853: No), the process (S860) is executed for a fixed time, and this process is ended. The processing during this fixed time (S 860) executes a process of updating the elapsed time of the symbol fixed period, or updates the elapsed time of the symbol fixed period which has been temporarily stopped based on the small hitting game being executed. It executes processing for resuming processing, and the detailed contents thereof will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S853 that the value of the special figure 1 determined time counter 203ad is 0 (S853: Yes), that is, it is determined that it is the end timing of the determined time (design determined period) The flag 203ab is set to off during determination of the special figure 1 design (S854). Next, it is determined whether the value of the probability variation counter 203aa is larger than 0 (S855). If it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203aa is larger than 0 (S855: Yes), the value of the probability variation counter 203aa is decremented by 1 (S856). On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203aa is 0 (S855: No), the process of S856 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S857. In the process of S857, a state command corresponding to the values of the time shortening counter 203f and the probability variation counter 203aa is set (S857).

  In the present embodiment, after the stop display period of the special symbol has elapsed (after the symbol determination period has elapsed), the process of subtracting the value of the probability variation counter 203aa is executed by performing the process of S856 described above, and subtraction is performed. When the value of the probability change counter 203aa later becomes 0, the high probability state of the special symbol is configured to shift to the low probability state. As a result, the definite variation end condition (condition for shifting the high probability state of the special symbol to the low probability state) is satisfied when the number of times the variation of the special symbol (number of lottery) reaches a predetermined number (for example, 50 times) In this case, since the low probability state of the special symbol is set after the stop display period of the special symbol has elapsed, the high value of the special symbol is displayed during the variation display period of the special symbol to be targeted and during the symbol determination period. It can be a probability state. Therefore, for example, even if the above-mentioned probability variation end condition is satisfied by fluctuation (lottery) of the first special symbol, during the symbol display period of the first special symbol, during the symbol determination period, the high probability state of the special symbol In the state where is set, it is possible to execute the fluctuation (lottery drawing) of the second special symbol.

  The contents of the state command set in the process of S857 described above will be specifically described. In the case where the value of the time reduction counter 203f is larger than 0 (when the high probability state of the normal symbol is set), the probability change counter If the value of 203aa is larger than 0, a state command indicating that the gaming state is a definite change state is set, and if the value of the positive change counter 203aa is 0, it indicates that the gaming state is a short time state A state command is set. In addition, if the value of the probability variation counter 203aa is larger than 0 when the value of the time reduction counter 203f is 0 (when the low probability state of the normal symbol is set), the gaming state is the latent state When the value of the probability variation counter 203aa is 0, a state command indicating that the gaming state is the normal state is set.

  Further, in the process of S857, when the value of the probability variation counter 203aa is larger than 0 (one or more), the remaining probability variation number command is set as information indicating the number of residual variation numbers, that is, the value of the probability variation number. The status command and remaining probability variation count command set in the process of S857 are output to the audio lamp control device 113 by the external output process (see S2201 of FIG. 52) of the main process (see FIG. 52) of the main control device 110. Be done. The voice lamp control device 113 receives various commands output from the main control device 110, and executes processing corresponding to the command received in command determination processing 2 (see S4162 in FIG. 106). As a result, the current game situation can be properly determined on the audio lamp control device 113 side.

  As described above, in the second embodiment, the high probability state of the normal symbol is low probability at the stop display timing of the special symbol when the first short time ending condition (the condition established when winning the big win) is satisfied. If it is shifted to the state and the 2nd time short end condition (condition established according to the number of times of special symbol fluctuation (lottery number)) is satisfied, the high probability state of the ordinary symbol is low at the fluctuation start timing of the special symbol. When transition to probability state and definite variation end condition (the first definite variation end condition established when winning a big hit, the second probable variation end condition established according to the number of times of variation of the special symbol (number of times of lottery) is established Is configured to shift the high probability state of the special symbol to the low probability state at the end timing of the stop display period (symbol determination period) of the special symbol.

  By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the period in which the latent state, which is a game state advantageous to the player, be set as the game state to be different according to the established time shortening end condition. Not only are you expecting whether or not a jackpot as a lottery result of a special symbol, it can be expected that the length of a period in which an advantageous gaming state is set will be longer.

  Next, a special figure 1 fixed period end command is set (S858), and the same process as the process of S801 to S805 in the first embodiment described above is executed. Next, the special figure 1 big hit flag 203 h and the probability variation counter 203 aa are reset (S 859), the big hit middle flag 203 o is set to ON (S 807), and this processing is ended.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 101, processing during a fixed time which is one of the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 2 (S257 in FIG. 99) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 in the second embodiment S860) will be described. FIG. 101 is a flowchart showing the contents of the process (S 860) during the fixed time.

  In the process during determined time (S860), first, it is determined whether the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON (S2901). The special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON when the small win is won in the second special symbol lottery and the lottery result is stopped and displayed (see S1602 in FIG. 46). And, during the period when the small hitting game is being executed, in the processing of S201 of the special symbol fluctuation processing 2 (see S154 in Figure 97), the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 2 is configured not to be executed. That is, it is determined that the special view temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON in the process of S2901 of the process (refer to S860 in FIG. 101) during the determined time is the special symbol only after the small hitting game is over. Only when fluctuation processing 2 (see S154 in FIG. 97) is executed.

  Therefore, if it is determined in the process of S2901 that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON (S2901: Yes), the special figure 1 restart command is set (S2902), the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203 v is set to off (S2903), and the process shifts to S2904. That is, in the process of S2901, when it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON (S2901: Yes), the small hitting game is over, so the small hitting game is executed. The processes of S2902 and S2903 are executed in order to resume the updating process of the symbol determination period which has been temporarily stopped by being performed.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is not set to on (is set to off) in the processing of S2901 (S2901: No), the processing of S2902 and S2903 is skipped and S2904. Move to the process of

  In the process of S2904, the special figure 1 determined time counter 203ad is decremented by 1 and updated (S2904), the display of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S2905), and this process is ended.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 102, a second special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (S953) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 102 is a flow chart showing the contents of the second special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (S953). The second special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (S953) is the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S905 in FIG. 40) in the first embodiment described above, instead of the process in S1002, the value of the probability variation counter 203aa is The difference is that the process (S1051) of determining whether it is larger than 0 is performed. The other processes are the same as the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S903), and thus detailed description will be omitted. Further, the contents of the process executed in S1051 described above are the same as the contents executed in S451 of the first special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (see S356 in FIG. 98) described above, and thus the details thereof I omit explanation.

  Next, referring to FIG. 103, second special symbol fluctuation stop processing 2 (S263) which is one of the special symbol fluctuation processing 2 (S154) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 in the second embodiment. Will be explained. FIG. 103 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second special symbol variation stop process 2 (S263). The second special symbol fluctuation stop process 2 (S263) is a point to which the processing of S1551 to S1563 is added to the second special symbol fluctuation stop process (see S213 of FIG. 45) in the first embodiment described above, and S1506 It differs in that the process of S1560 is provided instead of the process of (1) and the process of S1509 and S1510 is deleted. The other processing is the same as the second special symbol variation stop processing (S213 in FIG. 45), and thus the detailed description will be omitted.

  The second special symbol fluctuation stop process 2 (S263) is similar to the first special symbol fluctuation stop process 2 (see S257 in FIG. 99) described above, and the symbol determination period elapses after the variation time of the special symbol elapses. The processing up to is performed is different from the first embodiment in that the control target is changed from the first special symbol (special figure 1) to the second special symbol (special figure 2). Of the various processes executed in the second special symbol fluctuation stop process 2 (S263), the control process is merely controlled with respect to the various processes of the first special symbol fluctuation stop process 2 (see S257 in FIG. 99) described above. About the process which made the symbol classification different, and the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

  In the second special symbol variation stop process 2 (S263), first, it is determined whether the special figure 2 symbol determination in progress flag 203ac is set to ON (S1551). If it is determined that the special figure 2 symbol determination in progress flag 203ac is set to ON (S1551: Yes), the process of S1552 is skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S1553. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1551 that the special figure 2 symbol determination in progress flag 203ac is set to OFF (S1551: No), the second special symbol determination period setting process (S1552) is executed.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 104, the second special symbol which is one process in the second special symbol fluctuation stop process 2 (see S263 in FIG. 103) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 in the second embodiment. The fixed period setting process (S1552) will be described. FIG. 104 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second special symbol determination period setting process (S1552). The second special symbol determination period setting process (S1552) is a first special symbol pattern targeted for the processing executed in the above-described first special symbol determination period setting process (see S852 in FIG. 100). Change the command to the second special symbol, set the command as the special figure 2 fixed command corresponding to the second special symbol, and use the second special symbol as the symbol type to be stopped and displayed on the first symbol display device 37 The only difference is that the other processing contents are the same. Therefore, the content of the first special symbol determination period setting process (see S852 in FIG. 100) described above is referred to, and the detailed description of this process is omitted.

  Referring back to FIG. 103, the description will be continued. After executing the processing of S1551 or S1552, it is determined whether the value of the special figure 2 determined time counter 203ae is 0 (S1553), and the value of the special figure 2 determined time counter 203ae is not 0 (that is, When it is determined that it is larger than 0) (S1553: No), the value of the special figure 2 fixed time counter 203ae is updated (S1562), and the display of the second special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S1563) ), End this processing.

  The process of S1563 is for updating the display of the second special symbol which has already been stopped and displayed. In the present embodiment, in order to indicate that the special symbol is stopped in the first symbol display device 37, the symbol is displayed (including a display that blinks at a high speed to the extent that the player recognizes that it is lit). Since the system is configured as described above, in the process of S1563, an instruction to light the second special symbol is output to the first symbol display device 37.

  In the case of using a configuration in which only the special symbol is continuously lit during the symbol determination period as in this embodiment, for example, in the second special symbol determination period setting process (see S1552 in FIG. 104). In the process of S3009, it is configured to output an instruction for causing the second special symbol to change and stop (stop display), and also to output information indicating a period for which the second special symbol is to be stopped and displayed (design determination period). During the period, the second special symbol may be set in advance to be lit and displayed. By configuring in this way, there is no need to execute the process for updating the display content of the first symbol display device 37 each time in the process executed in a short cycle, so the processing load on the main control device 110 Can be reduced.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 determination time counter 203ae is 0 (S1553: Yes), the special figure 2 symbol determination in progress flag 203ac is set to OFF (S1554). Next, it is determined whether the special figure 1 big hit flag 203h is set to ON (S1555), and when it is determined that the special figure 1 big hit flag 203h is set to OFF (S1555: No), the probability variation counter 203aa It is determined whether the value of is larger than 0 (S1556).

  If it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203aa is larger than 0 (S1556: Yes), the value of the probability variation counter 203aa is decremented by 1 (S1557), and the process proceeds to the processing of S1558. On the other hand, in the process of S1555, when it is determined that the special figure 1 big hit flag 203h is set to ON (S1555: Yes), or when it is determined in the process of S1556 that the value of the probability variation counter 203aa is 0. (S1556: No), the process of S1557 is skipped, and the process shifts to the process of S1558.

  In the process of S1558, a state command according to the values of the time shortening counter 203f and the probability variation counter 203aa is set (S1558), and then a special figure 2 fixed period end command is set (S1559), and thereafter the first embodiment described above The same processing of S1501 to S1505 is executed. Here, when it is determined that the special figure 2 big hit flag 203i is not set on (is set off) in the process of S1501 (S1501: No), the special figure 2 off process 2 (S1561). ) And end this processing.

  Further, when the process of S1505 is finished, next, the special figure 2 big hit flag 203i is set to OFF, the value of the probability change counter 203aa is reset (S1560), and the process of S1507 identical to the first embodiment described above is executed. And the process ends.

  Next, referring to FIG. 105, the special figure 2 off stop process 2 (one process in the second special symbol fluctuation stop process 2 (S263) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 in the second embodiment (2 S1561 will be described. FIG. 105 is a flow chart showing the contents of the special view 2 off stop processing 2 (S1561). A special view 2 off stop processing 2 (S1561) in the second embodiment differs from the special view 2 off stop processing (S1508) in the first embodiment in that the processes of S1607 to S1610 are not performed. The other processing is the same processing, so the detailed description thereof is omitted.

<Control Process of Voice Lamp Controller in Second Embodiment>
Next, various control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 106 to FIG. The control process of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment is a command determination process 2 instead of the command determination process (see FIG. 59) with respect to the control process of the audio lamp control device 113 in the first embodiment described above. (Refer to FIG. 106) is different in that various counter update processing 2 (refer to FIG. 111) is executed instead of the various counter update processing (refer to FIG. 72), and the same processing is otherwise performed. Specifically, processing executed when various commands are output when the control content executed by the main control device 110 is changed from the first embodiment, and various types added from the second embodiment Processing to update the value of the counter has been added.

  First, with reference to FIG. 106, the command determination process 2 (S4162) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 106 is a flowchart showing the contents of command determination processing 2 (S4162). Command determination processing 2 (S4162) is different from the command determination processing (S4112 in FIG. 60) in the first embodiment described above in that processing of S4251 to S4255 is added. The other processes are the same as the command determination process (S4112) in the first embodiment, and thus detailed description will be omitted.

  When the command determination process 2 (S4162) is executed, first, the processes of S4201 to S4216 that are the same as the command determination process (S4112 in FIG. 60) in the first embodiment described above are executed. Then, if it is determined in the process of S4215 that a hit-related command has not been received from the main control device 110 (S4215: No), it is then determined whether a remaining-number-related command has been received (S4251). ).

  Here, as the remaining number related command, the remaining number of short times command indicating the remaining number (the number of remaining variation of the special symbol) for which the high probability state of the normal symbol is continuously set is set by the processing of S603 of FIG. Command) and a remaining certainty number change command (command set by the process of S857 in FIG. 99) indicating the remaining number (the number of remaining variation of the special symbol) for which the high probability state of the special symbol is continuously set. If it is determined that the remaining number related command has been received (S4251: Yes), the remaining number updating process 2 (S4252) is executed, and the present process is ended.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 107, the remaining number updating process 2 (S4252) which is one process in the command determination process 2 (S4162) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described. . FIG. 107 is a flowchart showing the contents of the remaining number of times update process 2 (S4252). The remaining number updating process 2 (S4252) is different from the remaining number updating process (S4218) in the first embodiment described above in that the processes of S4851 to S4852 are added. Specifically, the present embodiment is different in that a process for transmitting a command for displaying the remaining certainty variation number to the display control device 114 is added.

  In the remaining number updating process 2 (S4252), first, it is determined whether a remaining time short number command has been received from the main control device 110 (S4801). If it is determined that the remaining time short number command has been received (S4801: Yes), a display remaining time short number command corresponding to the command is set (S4802). On the other hand, if it is determined that the remaining-time short-time command has not been received (S4801: No), the process of S4802 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S4851. Next, it is determined whether or not the remaining certainty number command has been received (S4851). If it is determined that the remaining certainty number command has been received (S4851: Yes), the remaining certainty number command for display corresponding to the command is set (S4852), and this process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the remaining certainty number command has not been received (S4851: No), this processing ends.

  Referring back to FIG. 106, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S4251 that the remaining number related command has not been received (S4251: No), it is determined whether a temporary stop related command has been received (S4219). Here, in the temporary stop related command, the special figure 1 temporary stop command set when the special view 1 temporary stop flag 203v for temporarily stopping the first special symbol is set to ON (see S1603 in FIG. 46) And the special view 1 restart command (see S2902 in FIG. 101) set when the temporary display of the first special symbol that is temporarily stopped or the stop display is resumed. If it is determined that the temporary stop related command has been received (S4219: Yes), the temporary stop related process 2 (S4253) is executed, and this process is ended.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 108, temporary stop related process 2 (S4253) which is one process in command determination process 2 (S4162) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described. . FIG. 108 is a flowchart showing the contents of the temporary stop related process 2 (S4253). The temporary stop related process 2 (S4253) is different from the temporary stop related process (S4203) in the first embodiment described above in that a process for calculating the remaining fixed time is added.

  In this temporary stop related process 2 (S 4253), when the elapsed time of the variable display of the first special symbol or the stop display is temporarily interrupted (temporary stop), the temporarily stopped first special symbol A process is performed to cause the third symbol display device 81 to execute an effect mode corresponding to the variation display mode or the stop display mode. In temporary stop related processing 2 (S4253), first, it is determined whether a special view temporary stop command has been received from the main control device 110 (S4951). When it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop command has not been received (S4951: No), restart processing (S4952) is executed, and this processing is ended. Details of the restart processing (S4952) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop command has been received in the process of S4951 (S4951: Yes), that is, the variation display of the first special symbol (special figure 1) with the execution of the small hitting game, or If it is determined that it is time to temporarily stop the stop display, it is next determined whether the under determination flag 223ad is set to ON (S4953). Here, when it is determined that the flag 223ad during determination is set to ON (S4953: Yes), since the first special symbol is in the stop display (during symbol determination period), the symbol determination time set is set. The remaining time of (the symbol determination time of the first special symbol) is calculated (S4954), and the process proceeds to the processing of S4955.

  In the process of S4954, the remaining time of the set symbol determination time is calculated by reading the value of the special figure 1 determination counter 223aa, that is, the value indicating the remaining time of the symbol determination time of the first special symbol. Next, it is determined whether the remaining time of the symbol determination time calculated in the process of S4954 is less than 2 seconds (S4955). If it is determined that the remaining time is less than 2 seconds (S4955: Yes), a period A indicating that the remaining determined time is short is set in the remaining determined time information storage area 223ac (S4956), and the processing of S4952 is executed. And the process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4955 that the remaining time is not less than 2 seconds (2 seconds or more) (S4955: No), then the remaining time is 2 seconds or more and less than 60 seconds It is determined whether or not (S4957). In the process of S4957, when it is determined that the remaining time is 2 seconds or more and less than 60 seconds (S4957: Yes), it is determined that the remaining fixed time information storage area 223ac is the normal remaining fixed time. The period B shown is set (S4958), the process of S4952 is executed, and the present process is ended.

  Then, in the process of S4957, when it is determined that the remaining time is not less than 60 seconds (60 seconds or more) (S4957: No), it indicates that the remaining determined time information storage area 223ac has a long remaining determined time. The period C is set (S4959), the process of S4952 is executed, and the present process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4953 that the flag 223ad during determination is set to off (S4953: No), that is, if it is determined that the current time is in the variable display period of the first special symbol, The process (see S4903 to S4908) for calculating the remaining fluctuation time of the first special symbol performed in the temporary stop related process (see S4220 in FIG. 67) of the first embodiment described above is executed, and the process of S4952 Transition to In addition, since it is the same as 1st Embodiment mentioned above about the process (refer S4903-S4908) for calculating the remaining fluctuation time of a 1st special symbol, the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 109, the restart processing (S4952) which is one of the temporary stop related processing 2 (S4253) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 109 is a flowchart showing the contents of the restart processing (S4952).

  In the second embodiment, the second special symbol can be changed (lottery) during the stop display (during the symbol determination period) in addition to the first special symbol during the change display (during the change display period). Since it comprises, when a small hitting game is performed based on the lottery result of the 2nd special symbol, the stop display of the 1st special symbol is temporarily stopped (the subtraction of the symbol determination period is temporarily suspended) It is configured as follows. In addition, at the timing when the small hitting game is finished, the stop display of the first special symbol is resumed (the subtraction of the symbol determination period is resumed). Therefore, in the second embodiment, the situation of the first special symbol in the case where the variable display of the first special symbol or the stop display is resumed is determined, and the effect mode after the restart is set based on the determination result. Are configured to

  In the restart process (S4952), first, it is determined whether a special view 1 restart command has been received (S5001). If it is determined that the special figure 1 restart command has not been received (S5001: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special figure 1 restart command has been received (S5001: Yes), it is determined whether the under determination flag 223ad is set to ON (S5051). If it is determined that the flag 223ad is set to ON during determination (S5051: Yes), that is, if the timing at which the special figure 1 restart command is received is displaying the stop of the first special symbol, the remaining determination is made Reading the remaining fixed time information stored in the time information storage area 223ac (S5052), based on the read remaining fixed time information and the additional effect counter 223i, determine the additional effect type from the additional effect selection 2 table 222aa ( S5053) The display additional effect command corresponding to the additional effect type determined in the process of S5053 is set (S5054), and the information set in the remaining determined time information storage area 223ac is cleared (S5055). Then, the in-confirmation flag 223ad is set to off (S5056), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S5051, when it is determined that the flag 223ad during determination is set to off (S5051: No), that is, the timing at which the special figure 1 restart command is received is during the first special symbol variation display. If there is, the processing of S5002 to S5005 identical to the fluctuation resumption processing (S4902 of FIG. 68) of the first embodiment described above is executed, and this processing ends.

  Referring back to FIG. 106, the description will be continued. When it is determined in the process of S4219 that the temporary stop related command has not been received (S4219: No), it is determined whether the symbol determination related command has been received (S4254). When it is determined that the symbol determination related command has been received (S4254: Yes), the symbol determination related process (S4255) is executed, and the present process is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined that the symbol determination related command has not been received (S4254: No), processing according to the other commands is executed (S4221), and this processing is ended.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 110, the symbol determination related process (S4255) which is one process in the command determination process 2 (S4162) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 110 is a flowchart showing the contents of the symbol determination related process (S4255).

  In the symbol determination related process (S4255), first, it is determined whether the special view 1 determination command has been received from the main control device 110 (S5071). If it is determined that the special figure 1 determination command is received (S5071: Yes), the display special figure 1 determination command corresponding to the received command is set (S5072). Next, a value corresponding to the received command is set in the special figure 1 determination counter 223aa (S5073), and the process proceeds to the process of S5074. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5071 that the special figure 1 determination command is not received (S5071: No), the processes of S5072 and S5073 are skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S5074.

  In the process of S5074, it is determined whether a special figure 2 determination command has been received (S5074). If it is determined that the special figure 2 determination command is received (S5074: Yes), the display special figure 2 determination command corresponding to the received command is set (S5075), and the value corresponding to the received command is special figure (2) Set in the confirmation counter 223ab (S5076), set the in-confirmation flag 223ad on (S5077), and end this processing. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S5074 that the special figure 2 determination command is not received (S5074: No), the process of S5075 and S5076 is skipped as it is, the process of S5077 is executed, and the present process is ended. Do.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 111, various counter update processing 2 (S4161) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 111 is a flowchart showing the contents of various counter updating processing 2 (S4161).

  In various counter update processing 2 (S4161), first, it is determined whether the value of the special figure 1 determination counter 223aa is larger than 0 (S5451). If it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 determination counter 223aa is larger than 0 (S5451: Yes), the value of the special figure 1 determination counter 223aa is decremented by 1 (S5452). On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 determination counter 223aa is 0 (S5451: No), the process of S5452 is skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S5453. In the process of S5453, it is determined whether the value of the sub special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223n is larger than 0 (S5453). If it is determined that the value of sub special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223n is larger than 0 (S5453: Yes), the value of sub special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223n is decremented by 1 (S5454), special figure 1 determination counter 223aa The value of the sub special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223n is read out (S5455). Next, the value of the sub-special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223 n is subtracted from the value of the special figure 1 determination counter 223 aa read in the process of S 5455 to calculate the remaining time (S 5456). Next, the processing of S5407 and S5408 is executed, and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5453 that the value of the sub special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223n is 0 (S5453: No), the processes of S5454 to S5456 and S5407 are skipped and the process of S5408 is executed. , End this process.

Third Embodiment
Next, with reference to FIGS. 112 to 135, a pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described. Similar to the first embodiment described above, the second embodiment described above is configured to simultaneously change the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the second special symbol (special figure 2) (so-called , A simultaneous variation type), a lot of small hit games (RUSH games) can be executed by executing the drawing (variation) of the special figure 2 during the period in which the latent state is set as the gaming state Was configured.

  Furthermore, the first probability variation ends when the jackpot is won in the drawing of the special figure 1 in the state where the probability variation state is set as the condition for which the latent state is set (the condition that RUSH gaming can be performed) The condition and the second definite variation end condition that is satisfied when the number of times the variation of the special symbol (lottery number) reaches the predetermined number (50 times) is provided. If the first definite variation end condition is satisfied, the jackpot is won When the special symbol (special figure 1) showing that it has been displayed is stopped and displayed (pattern finalization period) becomes the latent state, and the second definite variation end condition is satisfied, the special symbol is displayed variably A period (variation display period) and during the symbol determination period are configured to be latent.

  In addition, the length of the symbol determination period is configured to be different according to the lottery result of the special symbol, and the symbol determination period is set longer in the case of winning the jackpot than in the case of not winning the jackpot. It was configured as.

  In addition, when the jackpot is won in the drawing of one special symbol (special figure 1), the ineffective lottery that the jackpot is not won in the drawing of the other symbol (special figure 2) is executed It is configured such that the value relating to the condition for varying the gaming state is not updated by this invalid lottery. Specifically, during the period when the jackpot has been won by the lottery of the special figure 1 (during the variation display period of the special symbol winning the jackpot and during the symbol determination period), the lottery of the special figure 2 is executed Even if this is done, the value of the probability variation counter 203aa is not updated (subtracted).

  In the second embodiment configured as described above, when a jackpot is won in the drawing of the special view 1 in a state where the probability change state is set, a period during which the jackpot game for the jackpot is executed (variation display Since the value of the probability change counter 203aa is not updated (subtracted) even if the variation (lottery drawing) of the special figure 2 is executed many times until the period when the symbol determination period is over, the special figure 2 is relieved. It was possible to carry out the fluctuation of

  On the other hand, in the third embodiment, the type of the probability variation termination condition is increased compared to the second embodiment described above, and the period in which the latent state is set is longer than the second embodiment described above. doing. Specifically, as the definite variation end condition, the definite variation end condition (third probable variation end condition) is satisfied when the small win is won in the special view 1 in the state where the definite variation state is set, and the third When the definite variation end condition is established, the gaming state is configured to shift from the probable changing state to the latent state at the time when the small hitting game is started.

  Furthermore, the period (the value of the probability variation counter 203aa) in which the high probability state of the special symbol is set and the period (the value of the time reduction counter 203f) in which the high probability state of the normal symbol is set are made identical (for example, “4 "), The game state will shift from the probability change state to the normal state if the jackpot is not won while the definite change state (high probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol) is set It is composed of

  That is, in the third embodiment, while a definite variation state (special symbol, normal symbol high probability state) is set, a small winning is won in the drawing of the special figure 1, and the normal symbol is switched to the low probability state By shifting, the period from the start timing of the small hitting game to the setting of the low probability state of the special symbol can be made to be the latent state.

  By configuring in this manner, it is possible to vary the period in which the latent state in which the gaming state is advantageous for the player is continuously set in accordance with the timing of winning the small hit in the drawing of the special view 1. . Therefore, the player can be made more interested in the lottery result of the special symbol, and a game machine which does not get tired can be provided.

  Furthermore, in the third embodiment, when the jackpot is won in the final change in which the definite change state ends, a change pattern having a long change time is easily selected. As a result, even if the final change of the probability change state is reached without winning a small hit, a long-term latency state can be set, so that the player is expected to play the game until the end You can

  Here, with reference to FIG. 112, types of benefits provided based on the game contents of the special view 1 during the probability change state in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 112 is a schematic diagram summarizing the relationship between the game contents of the special view 1 game after the probability change state has been set and the award benefits. As shown in FIG. 112, in this embodiment, the positive change state is set in a predetermined period (4 changes of the special symbol) after the end of the big hit, and the number of changes in positive change state (after the big hit) The content of the benefit to be provided to the player is made to differ according to the special figure fluctuation frequency), the special figure lottery result, and the like.

  Specifically, in the first and second special figure 1 changes (special figure 1 lottery) after the probability change state is set, if the lottery result (lottery result of special figure 1) is a big hit, many players are A period in which the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating that the special figure 1 is a jackpot as a period in which the latent state game (RUSH game) can be executed in addition to the jackpot game capable of acquiring the prize ball ) Is specified to be set. In addition, when the lottery result (lottery result of special figure 1) is a small hit, a small hit game is executed based on the lottery result of special figure 1 as a period in which the latent state game (RUSH game) can be executed. It is specified that after that, a period (design symbol determination period) until the number of times of special symbol variation after the big hit reaches 4 times is set.

  That is, when the small hit is won in the first special figure 1 lottery after the big hit end, the timing when the small hitting game is started (the first time the special symbol fluctuation is stopped and the small hitting game is executed) ), The latency state game (RUSH game) is set in the period from the end of the big hit to the end of the fourth special figure fluctuation. Therefore, as the period in which the latent state (RUSH state) is set, the longest period can be set as "very long". In addition, if the lottery result (lottery result of special figure 1) is out in the first and second special figure 1 changes (special figure 1 lottery) after the definite change state is set, the player is given no benefit Will not be granted.

  In the special figure 1 change (special figure 1 lottery) for the third time after the definite change state is set, the latent state is set under the same conditions as the first and second times after the definite change state is set. Configured. Here, when a small winning is won, a period until the end of the fourth special figure fluctuation is set as a latent state, in addition to the small hitting game, so after the above-mentioned probability changing state is set The period in which the latent state is set is shorter than when the player wins a small hit in the first and second special figure 1 changes (special figure 1 lottery).

  Further, in the third embodiment, when the jackpot is won as the number of times of special figure 1 fluctuation (special figure 1 lottery) increases after the definite deformation state is set in the definite deformation state, the fluctuation having a long fluctuation time The pattern is configured to be easily selected. Therefore, the period in which the latent state is set can be easily extended as compared to the case where the jackpot is won by the first and second special figure 1 changes (special figure 1 lottery) after the above-mentioned definite change state is set. be able to.

  Next, in the fourth special fluctuation (special drawing lottery) after the definite changing state is set, that is, in the special drawing final changing in the definite changing condition, the special drawing fluctuation is started regardless of the result of the special drawing lottery The period from the end of (to the end of the symbol determination period) is set as the latent state. In the third embodiment, it is easy to set a long-term fluctuation time when winning a big win in the special figure final fluctuation in the positive change state (the fourth special fluctuation after setting the positive change state). The length of the period in which the latent state is set is "long".

  Then, when the jackpot is not won due to the special figure final change in the definite change state, the normal state is set after the symbol determination period has elapsed, and the fifth and subsequent special figure lottery is executed.

<About the effect display content in the third embodiment>
In the third embodiment, as described above with reference to FIG. 112, the period in which the latent state, which is a gaming state advantageous to the player, is set is different according to the transition condition (probability change end condition) that holds. In order to indicate to the player the possibility that the latent state will be set or the timing at which the latent state is set, a bingo game may be executed during the probability change state. Configured.

  Therefore, with reference to FIGS. 113 to 115, the display contents of the suggested effect (bingo game) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the third embodiment will be described. Among the elements displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the same elements as those in the above-described embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 113A, the display contents of the end screen (ending screen) of the jackpot game in which the probability change state is set will be described. FIG. 113A is a schematic view schematically showing the display screen at the end of the big hit. As shown in FIG. 113 (a), in the main display area Dm of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the special view 1 display area Dm1 and the special view 2 display area identical to the second embodiment described above. Dm2, a guidance display area Dm3 is formed, and additionally, a special figure 1 reserve number display area Dm4 indicating the reserve sphere number of special figure 1 and a special figure 2 reserve number display area Dm5 indicating the reserve sphere number of special figure 2 , Is formed.

  FIG. 113 (a) shows the end screen of the jackpot game executed based on the special figure 1 jackpot, and the special figure 1 display area Dm1 shows that the lottery result of the special figure 1 is a big hit The stop display mode "777" of the third symbol is displayed, and the special view 2 display area Dm2 displays a "-" indicating that the special view 2 change is not performed. Further, in the guidance display area Dm3, a character of "left strike" is displayed to indicate that the jackpot game has been played in the left strike game.

  In the third embodiment, as in the second embodiment described above, the game content (right-handed or left-handed) displayed in the guidance display area Dm3 during the big hit game is identical to the game content at the time of the big hit It is configured to be That is, the state shown in FIG. 113 (a) is a jackpot won during the left-handed game.

  Furthermore, in the central portion of the main display area Dm, a bingo card 820 used in the probability change state set after the big hit game is displayed. Here, the suggestion effect (bingo game) executed in the third embodiment will be described. In the third embodiment, it is bingogo as a suggestion effect for suggesting to the player whether or not the latent state is set, or whether the jackpot is won during the period in which the definite change state is set. The game is configured to be run.

  In this bingo game, a bingo card 820 (see FIG. 113 (a)) in which an arbitrary number is arranged for nine squares (vertical 3 × horizontal 3) is displayed on the big hit end screen (ending screen). , A number is announced based on the drawing of the special figure 1 executed in the state where the definite variation state is set, and the player is presented based on the announced number and the arrangement of the numbers described on the bingo card 820 An effect that suggests a game result (lottery result of special figure 1) is executed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 113 (b) to FIG. 115, the display content (content of effect) displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 during the bingo game will be described. When the bingo game is started (when the special figure 1 change during the definite change state is started), the display shown in FIG. 113 (b) is executed. FIG. 113 (b) is a schematic view schematically showing display contents displayed when the special view 1 change (first time) is executed after the big hit ends.

  As shown in FIG. 113 (b), when the special view 1 change (first time) is executed, a display mode indicating that the special view 1 is changing is displayed in the special view 1 display area Dm1. . Then, “3” is displayed in the special figure 1 reservation number display area Dm 4, and it is subtracted (updated) from the value (“4”) shown in FIG. It shows.

  In the lower left area of the main display area Dm, the numeral “1” is displayed as the lottery result 821 of the bingo game based on the lottery result of this time (special figure 1 change (first time)). , A remaining number display 822 indicating the remaining number “last 3” of the bingo game is displayed. Here, for example, an effect example in the case where the special figure 1 change (fourth time) in the positive change state is the big win will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 114 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the bingo game contents during the fluctuation of the special figure 1 fluctuation (third time) when the special figure 1 fluctuation (fourth time) during the probability change state is a big hit FIG. 114 (b) is a schematic view schematically showing the display contents during the special figure 1 fluctuation (the fourth time). In the present embodiment, as described with reference to FIG. 112, in the final change of the positive change state (the special figure 1 change (fourth time)), the latent state is set at the timing when the variable display of the special figure 1 is started. In the latent state, a latent state game (RUSH game) is executed in which the lottery of the special view 2 is executed by the right-handed game.

  Therefore, in order to cause the player to immediately play the right-handed game immediately after the final change of the definite change state is executed (after the symbol determination period of the special figure 1 change (third time) elapses), the latent state is The presentation result (bingo 2 column alignment display) for notifying that it is set is before (in the special figure 1 fluctuation (third time)) the special figure 1 fluctuation (fourth time) in which the latent state is set Configured to be run. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to set the latency state in a state in which the player is sufficiently understood that the latency state is set.

  Although the detailed description is omitted, in the third embodiment, when the jackpot or the small winning is not won in the drawing of the special figure 1 in the final change of the probability change state (in the case of becoming out of place), it is short. The variation pattern of the variation time (1 second) is selected, and the effect result (bingo two-row aligned display) for notifying that the latent state is set in the bingo game is not displayed. . As a result, it is possible to eliminate notification of the fact that the latent state has been set for a short time to the player, and to execute a failure effect of the bingo game. In addition, when the state of latency for a short time is set, the guidance display area Dm3 is not displayed to the effect that the player is allowed to perform the right-handed game, so it is possible to suppress the annoyance to the game.

  Referring back to FIG. 114 (a), the description will be continued. In FIG. 114 (a), the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 fluctuation (third time) is performed, and the lottery result “1” of the special figure 1 fluctuation (first time) and the lottery result of the special figure 2 fluctuation (second time) “8” is displayed on the left side of the main display area Dm as the past history 823, and “5” is displayed as the current lottery result 821. Then, in the bingo card 820, the squares corresponding to "1", "8" and "5" displayed in the present bingo game are changed to "cross marks", and two lines of lines are formed and displayed. .

  Furthermore, “double bingo” is displayed as a status display mode 824 indicating the current status, and a comment of “super lucky” is displayed in the sub display area Ds. In this way, by notifying the player of the success in the bingo game during the fluctuation before the special figure 1 fluctuation (the fourth time) that will actually win the jackpot, the player is given an effect While providing the period which tastes a successful satisfaction, it can alert | report beforehand that it is necessary to perform right-handed game from the next fluctuation | variation.

  In the present embodiment, as a comment notifying that the rightward game is to be performed from the next change (a comment notifying that the rightward game condition is satisfied (the condition for setting the latent state is satisfied)) Although the sub-display area Ds displays "It is about to play a right-handed game," a configuration is provided in advance to notify the player of the timing at which the latent state is set, that is, the timing of playing the right-handed game. For example, the remaining period until the special figure 1 change (third time) ends (the remaining period obtained by adding the remaining change display period of the special figure 1 change (third time) and the symbol determination period) is calculated A calculation means may be provided, and information based on the calculation result of the calculation means (information for indicating the remaining fluctuation period of the special figure 1 fluctuation (third time)) may be notified to the player.

  In the third embodiment, in the case where the ball is inserted into the second ball entry port 640 while the probability change state is set as the gaming state (when the starting condition of the special view 2 is satisfied), A variation pattern of a short variation time (0.5 seconds to 1 second) is set regardless of the lottery result. As a result, when a right-handed game is performed in a state where the probability change state is set and the fluctuation (lottery drawing) of the special figure 2 is executed, the probability change state is set for a period in which the latent state may be set. It becomes extremely short compared to the case of performing a left-handed game in a state and performing a fluctuation (lottery drawing) in the special figure 2, so that a right-handed game in a definite change state can be made disadvantageous to the player. . Therefore, it is possible to suppress an act of intentionally performing anomalous game different from the display content during the probability change state in which “left-handed” is displayed in the guidance display area Dm3 of the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, in the state where the probability change state is set as the gaming state, when the ball enters the second entrance 640 (when the starting condition of the special view 2 is satisfied) ) Is configured to set a fluctuation pattern with a short fluctuation time (0.5 seconds to 1 second) regardless of the lottery result, but it is not limited to this, and the special figure 2 fluctuation during the positive change state The time may be configured to be a fluctuation time (for example, 120 seconds) extremely longer than the special figure 1 fluctuation time.

  By configuring in this way, for example, in the case where the right-handed game is performed in a state in which the probability change state is set by disregarding the progress contents of the suggestion effect (bingo game) executed by the third symbol display device 81 Since the special figure 2 fluctuation is performed for a long time (for example, 120 seconds), even if the latent state is set after that (for example, the special figure 1 fluctuation (the fourth time) fluctuation that was won by the jackpot) Since even if the display is started), the special figure 2 variation is being executed, the latent state game (a game for executing the special figure 2 variation with the latent state set) is newly added. It can be made difficult to execute.

  And in this embodiment, since the latent state which is a gaming state advantageous to the player is set based on the fluctuation period of the special symbol (special figure 1) and the symbol determination period, the latent state is The period (latency confirmation) during which the special figure 2 fluctuation in the latent state can be executed as the period from when the predetermined special figure 1 fluctuation starts to the end of the special figure 2 fluctuation during execution becomes longer. State game period will be shortened. Also, in a state in which the definite change state is set, a time when a sufficient time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed since the latent state was set in order to reliably prevent the special figure 2 change from being executed. Similarly, when the right hitting game is started from the left, the latent state gaming period becomes short, and the third symbol display device 81 is displayed to the player to grasp the timing of executing the right hitting game. The display contents of the screen can be watched closely.

  Then, when the right-hand game is performed during the latent state and the special figure 2 change is executed, the effect display during the RUSH game (latency state game) shown in FIG. 114 (b) is the third symbol display device 81 Displayed on the display screen of. FIG. 114 (b) is a schematic view schematically showing the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 when the fourth special figure fluctuation after the big hit end (after setting the probability change state) is the big hit. In the present embodiment, similarly to the above-described second embodiment, a latent game (RUSH game) is performed in which a fluctuation (lottery) of the special figure 2 is executed by the right-handed game when the latent state is set. That is, while in the latent state, the right-handed game becomes an advantageous game, and the left-handed game becomes a disadvantageous game.

  On the display screen shown in FIG. 114 (b), the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 "turns right" in the guidance display area Dm3, and the special figure 1 change in the special figure 1 display area Dm1 (4 In the special mode display area Dm2, the special mode 1 display area Dm2 is displayed, and the special mode 1 reserve number display area Dm4 is displayed. “0” indicating that there is no hold number in the special figure 1 is displayed “0” indicating that there is no hold number in the special figure 2 in the special figure 2 hold ball number display area Dm5.

  While this RUSH game is being executed, a character imitating a rabbit 811 runs from left to right while releasing a treasure box 812 discovered on the way (the same effect as in the first embodiment) Is displayed in the main display area Dm, and in the sub display area Ds, the characters "in RUSH" indicating that the latent state game (RUSH game) is being performed are displayed. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to easily inform the player that the game is currently in the latent state game (RUSH game).

  In FIGS. 113 to 114 described above, when the second probability variation termination condition established based on the number of times of variation of the special symbol is satisfied as the probability variation termination condition for terminating the probability variation state, that is, the final variation of the probability variation state (4 An example of the display screen in the case where the latent state is set in the special image fluctuation of the second time has been described. In the third embodiment, the first variation condition is set as a probability variation termination condition (a condition for shifting a high probability condition of an ordinary symbol to a low probability condition) for terminating the probability variation condition (shifting the probability variation condition to the latent condition). Positive variation termination condition (positive variation termination condition established based on big hit win), 2nd positive variation termination condition (positive variation finish condition established based on the number of times of special symbol variation), 3rd positive variation termination condition (minimized win based on small hit) The game state is configured to be shifted from the positive change state to the latent state when one of the end conditions is satisfied.

  Next, referring to FIG. 115 (a), the display displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 when the first probability variation end condition is met before the second probability variation end condition described above is met. Explain the contents. FIG. 115 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of display contents executed during the third special figure fluctuation in the case where the third special figure fluctuation is a large win after the big hit (after setting the probability change state) FIG.

  In the third embodiment, when the first definite variation termination condition (winning in the special symbol jackpot) is established, the special symbol for indicating that the lottery result of the special symbol is the jackpot is stopped and displayed, During the period until the stop display is finished (symbol determination period), the latent state is set. Therefore, since the probability change state is continuously set during the fluctuation display period of the special drawing 1 (during the special drawing fluctuation), in the schematic view shown in FIG. A display mode indicating that the variable display in FIG. 1 is being displayed is displayed, and “left-handed” is displayed in the guidance display area Dm3. Then, “4” is displayed in the lottery result 821, and the bingo card 820 is displayed in a display mode indicating that a line of lines is established.

  Further, although detailed description will be omitted, in the third embodiment, when the first probability variation end condition described above is satisfied and the latent state is set during the symbol determination period of the special symbol, it becomes an object A different number can be displayed a plurality of times as the lottery result 821 of the bingo game during the variable display period of the special symbol, and the player is notified of information for indicating the final result of the present bingo game in stages. Are configured to

  That is, in the example shown in FIG. 115 (a), the special figure 1 shows a state in which a line of lines is established during the variable display, but for example, the type of jackpot winning this time is a long symbol determination When the period (for example, 300 seconds) is the jackpot type (for example, jackpot C) to be set, a different number as the lottery result 821 of the bingo game during the remaining period until the variation display of the special figure 1 ends. (For example, "5") is newly displayed, and a presentation is finally performed in which the result of the bingo game is "two lines of lines established".

  In this manner, the result (the number of established lines) of the bingo game is varied a plurality of times during the variable display of the special symbol. In this way, it is possible to make the player grasp the contents of the benefits (RUSH game, jackpot game) to be awarded when the special figure variation ends, with the elapse of the variation display period of the special symbol. The effect contents displayed on the display screen of the three-symbol display device 81 can be kept gazed continuously.

  Also, if the type of jackpot won this time is a jackpot type (for example, jackpot A) in which a short symbol determination period (for example, 5 seconds) is set, the result (the number of established lines) of the bingo game does not change A number (for example, "3") may be displayed, and the result of the bingo game may be configured so as to be "a line of line formation".

  By configuring in this manner, the bingo game result (number of established lines) and the special symbol can be obtained while unifying the number of lottery results 821 displayed in the bingo game (the number of numbers displayed in the past history 823). It can be associated with the content of the benefit (the amount of benefit) given after the end of the variable display of. Therefore, since the player can be made to gaze at the content and result of the bingo game, the rendering effect can be enhanced.

  In the third embodiment, regardless of the special symbol lottery result, the number of lottery results 821 displayed during the bingo game (the number of numbers displayed in the past history 823) is unified, and the bingo game results are obtained. Although the effect of making the player thrilled as to whether (the number of established lines) increases is shown, without being limited thereto, for example, the content of the benefit (the amount of benefit) given after the end of the variation display of the special symbol The number of lottery results 821 displayed during the bingo game (the number of numbers displayed in the past history 823) may be associated with each other. As a result, it is possible to give the player an advantage that is more advantageous to the player if more numbers are displayed as the lottery result 821 during the bingo game, and the effect can be enhanced.

  Next, the display contents displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 when the third probability variation end condition is satisfied will be described with reference to FIG. 115 (b). FIG. 115 (b) schematically shows an example of display content executed during the second special figure fluctuation in the case where the second special figure fluctuation is a small hitting after the big hit (after setting the probability change state) It is a schematic diagram.

  The third embodiment is configured such that the timing at which the latent state is set is different depending on the type of the satisfied definite variation end condition. Specifically, when the first definite variation end condition is established, a period (target symbol) from the time when the stop display of the corresponding special symbol is started until the stop display is ended (the big hit game is started) The symbol finalization period of) is set as the latent confirmation state, and when the second definite variation end condition is satisfied, from the time when the variation display of the corresponding special symbol is started to the end of the stop display of the corresponding special symbol A period (a variation display period of the target symbol and a symbol determination period) is set as the latent state. That is, even if any of the above-mentioned first probability variation end condition and second probability variation end condition is satisfied, the latent condition is set within the period of the special symbol 1 fluctuation.

  On the other hand, when the third definite variation end condition is satisfied, the small winning is won in any of a plurality of times (four times) of the special figure 1 fluctuation that can be executed within the period in which the probable change condition is set. The latent state is set in the period from the point when the stop display of the special symbol indicating that the lottery result is a small hit is started to the end of the stop display of the special symbol that is the final change of the definite change state. . That is, when a small winning is won in the special drawing lottery (the first special drawing drawing) executed immediately after the definite variation state is set, the special symbol indicating the result of the first special drawing (small hitting) is stopped Between being displayed and passing through the second to fourth special drawing lottery period (the fluctuation display period and the symbol determination period) and until the stop display of the special symbol showing the result of the fourth special drawing lottery is ended (multiple times Special figure fluctuation period), the latent state will be set.

  As shown in FIG. 115 (b), when the third definite variation end condition is satisfied, “ALL” in which all numbers are targeted is displayed in the lottery result 821, and eight lines (all lines) are satisfied. The bingo card 820 is displayed in a display mode indicating. Then, "341" indicating that the player wins a small hit is displayed in the special figure 1 display area Dm1, and "right" is displayed in the guidance display area Dm3 to indicate that the latent state game (RUSH game) has been started. A strike is displayed.

  In addition, although the detailed description will be described later, in the third embodiment, the special figure fluctuation in which each probability variation end condition is satisfied (the special figure lottery) is satisfied with respect to the presence or absence of the first probability variation end condition or the second probability variation end condition. The third probability variation end condition is configured not to perform predetermination, while it is configured to determine (predetermination) whether or not the condition is established before execution of.

  By configuring in this manner, the first definite variation end of the progress content of the suggestion effect (bingo game) displayed across the plurality of special symbol variations executed in the period in which the definite variation state is set is ended. Since the condition or the second definite variation end condition can be set corresponding to the presence or absence of the establishment of the second definite variation end condition, it is possible to execute the suggested effect having no sense of incongruity to the player, and the third end condition is established. Since the suggestion effect shown in FIG. 115 (b) is executed, it is possible to provide a surprising effect.

  In the third embodiment, the first probability variation end condition and the second probability variation end condition are determined in advance, and the third probability variation end condition is not determined in advance. Although it is configured as described above, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, it may be configured to predetermine only the second probability variation end condition established based on the number of times of variation of the special symbol.

  In addition, as the above-mentioned predetermination, at the time of the big hit end (during the ending period of the big hit game), predetermination is performed on the special figure 1 stored on hold, and the big win is won in the special figure 1 stored on hold. It is determined whether or not the information corresponding to the lottery result is included, and the combination of the numbers displayed on the bingo card 820 is varied based on the determination result.

  By configuring in this manner, there is no sense of discomfort with the number of special figure fluctuations executed until the jackpot win and the bonus amount awarded to the player by winning the jackpot (bingo Can play the game. In addition, by the player grasping the number displayed on the bingo card 820, it is possible to provide the pleasure of predicting the future game result in advance.

Regarding Electrical Configuration in Third Embodiment
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 116 to 124. FIG. In the third embodiment, the contents of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 are changed, and the contents of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control apparatus 113 are changed. It differs in that it is done. The other points are the same as those of the second embodiment, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 116 is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 in the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 116, instead of the first random number table 202a, the first random number 3 table 202ba is replaced with the small random number table 202b, the small random number 3 table 202bb is replaced with the large hit type selection 2 table 202aa. The big hit type selection 3 table 202bc is replaced with the small hit type selection 2 table 202ab and the small hit type selection 3 table 202bd is replaced with the change pattern selection 2 table 202ac and the change pattern selection 3 table 202be is provided. It is different from the second embodiment.

  The first random number 3 table 202ba is the same as the first random number table 202a of the second embodiment described above (the same as the first embodiment and refer to FIG. 15 (a)), but the jackpot in the low probability state of the special symbol The difference is that the range of the value of the first random number counter C1 determined to be 1 and the range of the value of the first random number counter C1 determined to be a big hit in the high probability state of the special symbol are changed.

  Here, the contents defined in the first random number 3 table 202ba will be described with reference to FIG. 117 (a). FIG. 117 (a) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the first random number 3 table 202ba. As shown in FIG. 117 (a), in the case of the low probability state (normal state, time saving state) of the special symbol as the gaming state, the first obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol It is determined whether the value of the per-random number counter C1 is any one of "0 to 9", and if it is any one of "0 to 9", it is determined that the jackpot has occurred.

  In addition, when it is a high probability state of the special symbol (probability state, latent state) as a game state, the value of the 1st random number counter C1 which is acquired in the drawing of the 1st special symbol or the 2nd special symbol It is determined whether it is in the range of “0 to 99”, and if it is in the range of “0 to 99”, it is determined to be a big hit. That is, in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, among the random number counters having a total number of 480, since 10 values are determined as a value for determining a big hit in the low probability state of the special symbol, the special symbol The jackpot probability in the low probability state is 1/48. On the other hand, the jackpot probability in the high probability state of the special symbol is 1 / 4.8.

  The small hit random number 3 table 202bb is the first special symbol (special figure 1) of the small hit random number table 202b of the second embodiment described above (similar to the first embodiment and refer to FIG. 15 (b)). It is different in the point changed in order to win in the small hit also in the lottery. Here, contents defined in the small hitting random number 3 table 202bb will be described with reference to FIG. 117 (b). FIG. 117 (b) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the small hitting random number 3 table 202bb. As shown in FIG. 117 (b), in the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1), it is determined whether the acquired value of the first random number counter C1 is "10 to 14" or not, If it is any of "10-14", it is determined that it is a small hit.

  In the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2), the same contents as the above-mentioned small hitting random number table 202b (see FIG. 15 (b)) are defined, and therefore the detailed description is omitted. That is, the third embodiment is different from the above-described second embodiment in that it is configured to be able to win a small hit even in the lottery of the first special symbol. And in this 3rd embodiment, when a small hit is won in the lottery of the first special symbol in a state where a definite variation state (high probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol) is set, A process of shifting the high probability state of the symbol to the low probability state, that is, a process of shifting the gaming state from the positive change state to the latent state is executed.

  By configuring in this way, it is possible to increase the opportunity to shift the gaming state to the latent state during the definite change state, and therefore, it is possible to motivate the player who is playing the game during the definite change state Can be done.

  As shown in FIG. 117 (b), in the third embodiment, in the high probability state of the special symbol, the probability of winning the jackpot of the first special symbol (1/48 (see FIG. 117 (a))) The probability of winning in the small hit of the first special symbol (1/32 (see FIG. 117 ((b)))) is configured to be higher. The player who is executing the game in the probability change state is set because the probability state is set based on the small hit with a high probability than when the latent state is set based on winning. In contrast, only the game with the aim of winning the big hit, where both the latent state game (RUSH game) and the big hit game are executed, but the game aiming for the big hit, which is difficult to win, and the latent state game (RUSH game) is executed, Aim to win easy-to-win small hits It can be performed and skill, both.

  In the third embodiment, the probability of winning in the small hit of the special figure 1 is configured to be higher than the probability of winning in the special figure 1 in the high probability state of the special symbol, but is limited thereto It may be configured to be lower than the jackpot winning probability of the special figure 1 in the high probability state without any problem, for example, even if the probability of winning in the small hitting of the special figure 1 is set to a low probability of 1/480. good. By configuring in this manner, in the state where the definite change state is set, when the small hit is won before the big hit, the latent state game (RUSH game) in which the big hit game is not executed is Since the game can be executed, it is possible to provide the player with a surprising game.

  The jackpot type selection 3 table 202bc is different from the jackpot type selection 2 table 202aa of the second embodiment described above in that the type of jackpot type is changed, and various counters set after the jackpot end (time reduction counter 203f, probability variation counter The difference is that the contents of the decision time counters 203ad and 203ae) are changed and the value of the first hit type counter C2 corresponding to each jackpot type is changed. Here, the jackpot type selection 3 table 202bc in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 118 (a) is a schematic view schematically showing the content of the jackpot type selection 3 table 202bc in the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 118 (a), the jackpot type selection 3 table 202bc is the jackpot operation contents of each jackpot type defined in the jackpot type selection table 202d (refer to FIG. 16 (a)) of the first embodiment described above. The jackpot operation contents are defined in which only the number of rounds executed for each jackpot is different, and for each jackpot type, the time reduction counter 203f, the probability change counter 203aa, the special figure 1 definite time counter 203ad, the special figure 2 definite time The value of the counter 203ae is defined.

  Specifically, the jackpot A in which the symbol type is set corresponding to the first special symbol (special figure 1) has a value of “0 to 49” for the first hit type counter C2 (0 to 99) acquired. The jackpot operation content in which the round game for opening the second attacker (the second variable winning prize device 650) is performed for two rounds (2R) and the value of “4” for the hour reduction counter 203f are defined in the range, A value of "4" is specified to the probability variation counter 203aa, and a value indicating "5 seconds" is set to the special figure 1 determined time counter 203ad.

  The jackpot B whose symbol type is set corresponding to the first special symbol (special figure 1) is defined in the range of “50 to 96” as the value of the acquired first type counter C2 (0 to 99) The jackpot operation content in which 2 rounds (2R) of round games for opening the 2nd attacker (the second variable winning prize device 650) are executed, the value of "4" in the hour reduction counter 203f, the probability change counter 203aa The value “4” specifies that a value indicating “100 seconds” is set in the special figure 1 determined time counter 203 ad.

  For the jackpot C whose symbol type is set corresponding to the first special symbol (special figure 1), the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2 (0 to 99) is defined in the range of "97 to 99" The jackpot operation content in which 2 rounds (2R) of round games for opening the first attacker (first variable winning device 65) are executed, the value of "4" in the hour reduction counter 203f, and the probability change counter 203aa A value “4” specifies that a value indicating “300 seconds” is set in the special figure 1 determined time counter 203 ad.

  In addition, the jackpot D for which the symbol type is set corresponding to the second special symbol (special figure 2) defines the acquired value of the first hit type counter C2 (0 to 99) within the range of "0 to 64". The jackpot operation content in which 2 rounds (2R) of round games for opening the first attacker (first variable winning apparatus 65) are executed, and the value of “4” in the hour reduction counter 203f is a probability change counter 203aa A value of “4” is defined as, and a value indicating “0.5 seconds” is set to the special figure 1 determined time counter 203 ad.

  The jackpot E whose symbol type is set corresponding to the second special symbol (special figure 2) is defined in the range of "65 to 99" as the value of the acquired first type counter C2 (0 to 99) The jackpot operation content in which 2 rounds (2R) of round games for opening the first attacker (first variable winning device 65) are executed, the value of "4" in the hour reduction counter 203f, and the probability change counter 203aa A value of “4” specifies that a value indicating “1 second” is set to the special figure 1 determined time counter 203 ad.

  As described above, in the third embodiment, the jackpot probability of the special symbol is set higher than that of the above-described second embodiment to make it easy to win the jackpot, and a bonus given to the player in the jackpot game ( The award ball is configured to be reduced. By configuring in this manner, the amount of benefits to be awarded to the player is determined by the result of whether the latent state is set and the length of the period in which the latent state is continuously set. Since the number can be greatly varied, it is possible to provide the player with novel playability.

  The small hit type selection 3 table 202bd is the content of the small hit type set when the special figure 1 is won with respect to the small hit type selection table 202e (see FIG. 16B) of the first embodiment described above. Differs in that it is defined by adding. Here, the small hitting type selection 3 table 202bd will be described with reference to FIG. 118 (b).

  FIG. 118 (b) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the small hitting type selection 3 table 202 bd in the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 118 (b), the small hit type selection 3 table 202bd corresponds to the symbol type “special figure 1” with respect to the small hit type selection table 202e (see FIG. 16 (b)) of the first embodiment described above. It differs from the small hit type selection table 202e (see FIG. 16 (b)) in that the small hit D is added as the small hit type corresponding to “”, and the small hit type selection table 202e (see FIG. 16 (b)). Detailed descriptions of the same elements are omitted.

  When the small hit type selection 3 table 202bd wins the small hit in the first special symbol (special figure 1), regardless of the value of the small hit type counter C5 acquired, the first attacker (the first variable winning a prize) A small hit game is defined in which an opening operation for opening the device 65) for 0.02 seconds is performed once. That is, when the player wins the small hit in the drawing of the special figure 1, the small hit game in which it is difficult for the player to obtain the winning balls in the small hit game is executed.

  That is, in the third embodiment, the small hit in the special figure 1 is not a purpose to give the player a benefit (prize ball) by the small hit game, but an opportunity to set the latent state as the gaming state. It is an object. In this way, when the player wins a small hit on the special figure 1 in the state where the definite change state is set, the right-handed game is executed immediately after the effect (see FIG. 115 (b)) notifying that is executed. Even so, since the small hitting game has already ended (the time required for the ball fired by the right hitting game to reach the right area is longer than that of the small hitting game period), it is possible for the game to be smoothly latent. It is possible to execute a game (RUSH game).

  In addition, when the small winning of the special figure 1 is won in the normal state, the small hitting game can be executed without giving a sense of discomfort to the player. In the present embodiment, since the opening time of the first variable winning device 65 by the small hitting game is set as short as 0.02 seconds, when the small winning of the special figure 1 is won in the normal state, the winning is won Even if the game method is changed from the left-handed game to the right-handed game (when the special symbol indicating the small hit is stopped and displayed), the ball is first variable winning device 65 during the small hit game. It is difficult to win a prize, so when you win the small figure of the special figure 1 in the normal state, the effect and guidance to emphasize that the small figure was won on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 The display area Dm3 is configured not to display a "right-handed" display for guiding a right-handed game.

  This makes it possible to suppress the player from performing annoying game operations. It should be noted that notification means may be provided to notify that the small winning of the special figure 1 has been won in the normal state, or the right-handed display also in the small hitting game based on the special figure 1 small hitting winning in the normal state. May be configured to execute.

  The variation pattern selection 3 table 202be is replaced with the time reduction / probability variation table 202f2 referred to when the probability variation state is set with respect to the variation pattern selection table 202f of the first embodiment described above, and the variation 3 table 202be1 Is different from the latent confirmation table 202f3 referred to when the latent state is set, in that a latent confirmation 3 table 202be2 is provided.

  Here, the contents of the variation pattern selection 3 table 202be will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 119 (a) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents defined in the variation pattern selection 3 table 202be. As shown in FIG. 119 (a), in the third embodiment, when the normal state is set as the gaming state, the normal table 202f1 identical to the first embodiment described above is referred to, and the probability change state is If it is set, it is defined that the probability variation 3 table 202be1 is referred to, and if the latency state is set, the latency 3 table 202be2 is referenced.

  In the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. 118 (a), since the value of the time reduction counter 203f and the value of the probability change counter 203aa are equal after the big hit, the probability change counter Since the gaming state (that is, the time saving state) in which the value of 203aa becomes 0 and the value of the time reduction counter 203 f becomes a value larger than 0 is never set, the variation referred to when the time saving state is set It does not have a pattern selection table.

  Next, the contents of the probability variation 3 table 202be1 will be described with reference to FIG. 119 (b). FIG. 119 (b) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the probability variation 3 table 202be1. In the third embodiment, as described above with reference to FIG. 118 (a), when a jackpot is won, the probability change state is always set by four special symbol variations. And in the state where the definite change state is set, the change pattern (refer to the different change pattern table according to the special symbol change frequency (the number of special figure change frequency) after the big hit end and the lottery result of the special symbol The variation time is configured to be selected.

  By configuring in this manner, the latency state according to the timing (number of times of special figure fluctuation) in which the condition for setting the latency state as the gaming state (big hit in special figure 1 or small hit in small figure) is satisfied. It becomes possible to make the period (special figure fluctuation time) to be set different. Therefore, since it is possible to make the player pay attention not only to the lottery result of the special symbol but also to the number of times of special figure fluctuation, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Specifically, in the case where the symbol type of the special symbol is the special figure 1 and the lottery result is "big hit", the special figure variation frequency after the big hit end is "1 to 2 times". , "Probability A table 202bea (probability A)" is referred to, "3 times" refers to "probability B table 202beb (probability B)", and "4 times" refers to "probability C" It is defined that the table 202 bec (certain variable C) is referred to. In addition, when the lottery result is "small hit, out of place", when the number of special figure changes after the big hit is "1 to 3 times", "certain change A table 202bea (positive change A)" is referred. In the case of “four times”, “certainly modified C table 202 bec (certainly modified C)” is specified to be referred to.

  Furthermore, when the symbol type of the special symbol is the special figure 2, regardless of the lottery result and the number of times of special figure variation from the end of the big hit, "probably modified D table 202 bed (probable variation D)" is referred It prescribes in.

  Next, contents defined in various probability variation tables (positive variation A table 202bea to positive variation D table 202bed) to be referred to in the probability variation 3 table 202be1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 119 (c) to 120. . FIG. 119 (c) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents defined in the positive variation A table 202bea, and FIG. 120 (a) schematically shows the contents defined in the positive variation B table 202beb. FIG. 120 (b) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents defined in the probability variation C table 202bec, and FIG. 120 (c) is defined in the probability variation D table 202bed. It is a schematic diagram which showed the content typically.

  As shown in FIG. 119 (c), in the definite variation A table 202bea, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is “0” as the variation pattern determined when the big win occurs in the drawing of the first special symbol (special figure 1). The big hit fluctuation 1 (1 second) is associated with the range of “99”, the big hit fluctuation 2 (2 seconds) is linked with the range of “100 to 197”, and the big hit fluctuation 3 (300 seconds) with the value of “198” ) Are associated. In addition, when winning in small drawing or out of special drawing 1 small small fluctuation 1 (1 second) or out fluctuation 1 (1 second) is associated regardless of the value of fluctuation type counter CS1 It is done.

  As shown in FIG. 120 (a), in the probability variation B table 202beb, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is “0” as the variation pattern determined when the big win occurs in the drawing of the first special symbol (special figure 1). A big hit fluctuation 1 (1 second) is associated with the range of "-99", a big hit fluctuation 2 (2 seconds) is associated with the range of "100-149", and a big hit fluctuation 3 ("5-198") 300 seconds) are associated.

  As shown in FIG. 120 (b), in the probability variation C table 202bec, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is “0” as the variation pattern determined when the big win occurs in the drawing of the first special symbol (special figure 1). Big hit fluctuation 1 (1 second) is associated with the value of “1”, big hit fluctuation 2 (2 seconds) is linked with the value of “1”, and 3 hit (300 seconds) of big hit fluctuation in the range of “2 to 198” It is associated. In addition, when a small winning is won in the drawing of the special figure 1, small hitting fluctuation 2 (240 seconds) is associated regardless of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, and when winning out, the fluctuation type counter Outlier fluctuation 1 (one second) is associated regardless of the value of CS1.

  As shown in FIG. 120 (c), in the probability variation D table 202bed, a variation pattern determined when a big win occurs in the second special symbol (special figure 2) lottery, regardless of the value of the variation type counter CS1 When the jackpot fluctuation 1 (1 second) is associated and the small hitting is won, the small hitting fluctuation 4 (0.5 second) is associated regardless of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. Outlier fluctuation 4 (0.5 seconds) is associated regardless of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 121, the contents defined in the latency 3 table 202be2 will be described. FIG. 121 is a schematic view schematically showing the contents defined in the latency determination 3 table 202be2. As shown in FIG. 121, in the third embodiment, in the state where the latent state is set, when the lottery of the special figure 1 is executed, the variation pattern in which the long variation time is set is selected. Are configured to

  Here, in the third embodiment, when the small win is won in the special figure 1 lottery in the state where the definite variation state is set, the latent confirmation state is set, so the latency is confirmed. In order to select the variation pattern with reference to the third table 202be2, it is necessary to win a small hit in the lottery of the special figure 1 during the probability change state.

  As described above, in the third embodiment, the variation pattern (variation time) is selected with reference to a different table according to the number of times of special symbol variation in the state where the probability variation state is set. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to both the lottery result of the special symbol and the number of times of the special symbol variation (the number of variations after the probability change state is set) which is the lottery result.

  Next, contents of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 122 is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 in the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 122, the RAM 203 of the third embodiment adds the special figure 1 small hitting flag 203ba and the special figure 1 small hitting middle flag 203bb to the RAM 203 of the second embodiment described above. There is a difference in points. The other elements are the same, and the same elements will be denoted by the same reference numerals and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The special figure 1 small hit flag 203ba is a flag for showing that the small win is won in the drawing of the first special symbol (special figure 1), and by being set to ON, the drawing of the special figure 1 Indicates that the player has won a small hit. This special view 1 small hit flag 203ba is set to ON during a period until the small hit game is executed after the small hit is won in the special view 1 lottery.

  The special figure 1 small hit middle flag 203bb is a flag for showing that the small hit game is executed based on the small hit win of the first special symbol (special figure 1), and is set to ON , It shows that the small hitting game based on the small hitting winning of the special figure 1 is performed. In the third embodiment, when the small hit game based on the small hit of the special figure 1 is started in the state where the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, the high probability state of the normal symbol is the low probability state It is configured to execute the process of transitioning to

  When the special figure 1 small hit middle flag 203bb is determined that the special figure 1 small hit flag 203ba is set to ON in the special figure 1 off stop processing (see S871 in FIG. 128) (S 3201 in FIG. 128). : Yes), set to ON (S3207 in FIG. 128), and in small hit control processing 3 (see S2255 in FIG. 129), refer to the case where it is determined that it is the small hit start timing (see S2503 in FIG. 129) (S2551 in FIG. 129).

  Next, in the process of S2551 of FIG. 129, when it is determined that the game is set to ON (S2551 of FIG. 129: Yes), that is, the small hitting game of this time is won by the small drawing in the special drawing 1 The value of the time saving counter 203f is set to 0 when it is determined to be a small hit that is executed based on the above. Then, when it is determined in the small hitting control process 3 (see S2255 in FIG. 129) that it is the end timing of the small hitting (S2511 in FIG. 129: Yes), it is set to OFF.

  Next, the contents of the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 123 (a). FIG. 123 (a) shows the audio lamp control device of the third embodiment. It is the model which showed the content of ROM222 of 113 typically. As shown in FIG. 123 (a), the ROM 222 of the third embodiment differs from the ROM 222 of the second embodiment (first embodiment) described above in that the additional effect selection table 222c is replaced with a probability variation effect selection table 222ba. The difference is that they are provided. The other elements are the same, and the same elements will be denoted by the same reference numerals and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Here, the contents of the probability variation presentation selection table 222ba will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 124 is a schematic view schematically showing the contents defined in the probability variation presentation selection table 222ba. The probability variation presentation selection table 222ba is a data table for selecting the final aspect of the suggestion presentation (bingo game) described with reference to FIGS. 113 (b) to 115 (a), and is won by a jackpot The final aspect is defined based on the number of changes (the number of times of special figure change from the end of the big hit) and the type of big hit that can be won.

  Specifically, if the jackpot variation number of times is "2", that is, if you win the jackpot again in the second special symbol fluctuation after the jackpot end, the jackpot type to win is "big hit A", "big hit B In the case of “”, the effect mode in which one row (line) is established in bingo is set, and in the case of “big hit C”, the effect mode in which three rows (line) is established in bingo is defined.

  And, if the jackpot variation number of times is "3", that is, if you win the jackpot in the third special symbol change after the jackpot end, if the jackpot type to win is "big hit A", "big hit B" An effect mode in which two lines (lines) are established in bingo is set, and in the case of "big hit C", an effect mode in which three lines (lines) are established in bingo is set.

  Finally, if the jackpot variation number of times is "4", that is, if you win the jackpot in the fourth special symbol variation (special figure final variation for which a probability change state is set) after the jackpot end, winning jackpot type If "is the jackpot A", the effect mode in which 2 lines (lines) are established in bingo is set, and if the "the jackpot B", the effect mode in which 3 lines (lines) are established in bingo is set, "big hit C" If this is the case, it is defined that an effect mode in which all lines (lines) are established in bingo is set.

  In addition, although a detailed description will be described later, in the third embodiment, when winning a big hit by the first special symbol change after the big hit ends, the display screen at the end of the big hit (usually, bingo card On the screen on which the screen 820 is displayed (see FIG. 113), a special display screen for guiding that the latent state is set after the big hit is displayed.

  On the special display screen, an image for congratulating the player is displayed in the main display area Dm, and "right-handed" for guiding a right-handed game is displayed in the guidance display area Dm3. In this way, at the end of the jackpot game, it is possible to play a game (right-handed game) suitable for the gaming state (latency state) after the end of the jackpot game, so that the period for which the latency state is set is full. The lottery game of the second special symbol (special figure 2) can be executed by utilizing it.

  In the third embodiment, the display screen at the end of the big hit is configured to display the special display screen in the case of winning the big hit by the first special symbol change after the end of the big hit, but The timing for displaying the special display screen may be any timing as long as it is in the jackpot game, the timing when the jackpot game is started, or the timing when a predetermined round game in the jackpot game is executed. In this case, when the jackpot is won in the normal state, it corresponds to the special symbol fluctuation to be executed next among the prize information stored in the prize information storage area 223b until the round game of the jackpot game is started. A pre-determination unit is provided to determine in advance whether information indicating winning in a big hit is included in the winning prize information (presence information corresponding to the first special symbol change after the big hit end), and pre-discrimination by the pre-discrimination means As a result, when information indicating that the jackpot is to be won is included, "right-handed" is displayed in the guidance display area Dm3 to cause the jackpot game to be played in the right-handed game, and the right-handed game is performed. No effect is included in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81, and the information indicating that the jackpot is won is included. In this case, it may be configured to display a "left-handed" in the guidance display area Dm3.

  By configuring in this manner, when the jackpot is won in the normal state (the game state in which the left hitting game is performed), the jackpot game is displayed by the display mode of the guidance display area Dm3 for guiding the gaming method in the jackpot game. The game content after the end can be predicted. In the present embodiment, since the configuration of the game board 13 similar to that of the first embodiment is used, when the jackpot game for opening the second variable winning device 650 is executed, the left strike game is performed. It is configured such that the ratio of balls winning in the second variable winning device 650 does not change between the case and the right-handed game. Therefore, even if the game method (right-handed, left-handed) is changed based on the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223b, it is disadvantageous for the player during the big hitting game. Provide no such situation.

  In the present embodiment, a jackpot end process (see S4651 in FIG. 133) is executed when it is determined that the ending command has been received in the jackpot related process 3 (see S4552 in FIG. 132) (S4605 in FIG. 132: Yes). During the jackpot game, it is determined whether or not there is winning information to win the jackpot among the prize information (winning information in the special figure 1) stored in the prize information storage area 223b (see S5605 in FIG. 133). The winning information that has newly occurred is also targeted for discrimination, and it is configured to be able to determine more winning information, but the winning information (winning information of special figure 1) stored in the winning information storage area 223b A timing other than the present embodiment may be set as the timing for determining whether there is winning information for winning a big hit in the middle, for example, The timing when the winning game is started, the timing when the specific number of rounds (for example, 2 rounds) is reached, or the timing when the specific round game (the first round of round games) is finished is also used as the timing for executing the determination. good.

  Next, the contents of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 123 (b). FIG. 123 (b) shows the audio lamp control device of the third embodiment. It is the model which showed the content of RAM223 of 113 typically. As shown in FIG. 123 (b), the RAM 223 of the third embodiment is provided with the remaining probability change number area 223ba, the pre-reading hit flag 223bb, and the remaining change number counter 223bc with respect to the ROM 222 of the second embodiment described above. There is a difference in points. The other elements are the same, and the same elements will be denoted by the same reference numerals and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The remaining certainty variation number area 223 ba is a storage area for storing the number of variations that can be set as new winning information as a special symbol variation that can be executed during the probable variation state. A value obtained by subtracting the number of winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223b in the big hit end process (see S4651 in FIG. 133) is set to the remaining probability variation number area 223 ba (S 5604 in FIG. 133). . Then, in the prize information related process (see S4271 in FIG. 131), the set value is referred to (see S5504 in FIG. 131), and when the set value is larger than 0, that is, during the definite change state. If it is in a state where it is possible to newly receive winning information corresponding to the special symbol variation that can be executed (S5504 in FIG. 131; Yes), the prefetching process is executed as a special symbol variation executed during the definite variation state (the winning information A process of determining whether or not it is included is executed (S5505 in FIG. 131), and thereafter, the set value is decremented by 1 (S5507 in FIG. 131).

  As described above, the probability variation state is set by determining whether or not it is possible to set new winning information as a special symbol variation that can be executed during the probability variation state, using the remaining probability variation number area 223 ba. It becomes possible to determine whether or not the newly received winning information in the state corresponds to the special symbol variation to be executed during the definite variation state. Therefore, since the probability variation effect to be executed during the probability variation state can be set based only on the winning information corresponding to the special symbol variation to be executed during the probability variation state, the effect can be enhanced.

  The per-reading flag 223bb is a flag for indicating that there is winning information on the jackpot of the special symbol, and it is set to ON among the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223b. In addition, it indicates that the winning information corresponding to the jackpot is included.

  It is determined that there is prize information indicating that the jackpot has been won among the prize information stored in the prize information storage area 223b in the big hit end time processing (see S4651 in FIG. 133) of the pre-reading hit flag 223bb. If it is determined (S5605 in FIG. 133: Yes), it is set to ON (S5606 in FIG. 133). Further, it is determined in the winning information related process (see S4271 in FIG. 131) that the winning information received this time corresponds to the special symbol variation to be executed during the probability variation state (S5504 in FIG. 131: Yes), Also when it is determined that there is winning information indicating that a jackpot will be won among the winning information (S5505 in FIG. 131: Yes), it is set to ON (see S5506 in FIG. 131).

  Then, it is referred to in the probability variation change display setting processing (see S5151 in FIG. 135), and the prefetching hit flag 223bb is not set to on (S5702 in FIG. 135: No) and is set to on ( Processing is performed so that a different effect mode can be set in S5702 of FIG. 135: Yes).

  The remaining fluctuation number counter 223 bc is for counting the number of remaining fluctuation in the special drawing until the jackpot is won, and is stored in the winning information storage area 223 b in the jackpot end processing (see S4651 in FIG. 133). A value corresponding to the number of times of special symbol variation until the special symbol corresponding to the winning information winning in the jackpot changes when the winning information includes winning information for winning the jackpot (S5605 in FIG. 133: Yes) Is set (see S5607 in FIG. 133). Then, the variation display setting process for probability variation (S5151 in FIG. 135) is performed when it is determined that the variation display in the probability variation state is set in variation display setting processing 3 (see S4173 in FIG. 134) (see S5103 in FIG. 134). If it is determined that the special symbol for which the variable display is set this time is the pre-variation of the special symbol corresponding to the winning information winning the big win (the next time it becomes the big hit variation) (S5703 in FIG. 135: Yes). ), An effect mode using the probability variation effect selection table 222ba is set.

<About control processing of main controller in the third embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The control process of the main controller 110 in the third embodiment is different from the control process of the main controller 110 in the second embodiment described above in the first special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (see FIG. 98), 1 special symbol big hit determination processing 3 (see S376 in FIG. 125), first special symbol variation stop processing 2 (see FIG. 99) instead of the first special symbol variation stop processing 3 (see S277 in FIG. 127), small hitting control The difference is that small hit control process 3 (see FIG. 129) is executed instead of the process (see FIG. 55). The other processes are the same. In the above-described second embodiment, the same processing as that of the first embodiment is performed, and parts that are not described in detail will be described with reference to the drawings used in the description of the first embodiment. In the present embodiment, portions where the same processing as that of the second embodiment described above is performed are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 125, the first special symbol jackpot determination process 3 (S376) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 125 is a flow chart showing the contents of the first special symbol jackpot determination process 3 (S376). Since the third embodiment is configured to win a small hit in the drawing of the special view 1, the first special symbol jackpot determination process 3 (S376) is the first special in the above-described second embodiment. The difference is that the contents of the process to be executed when it is determined that the lottery result of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is not a big hit as opposed to the symbol jackpot determination processing 2 (see S356 in FIG. 98) doing. The other elements are the same, and the same reference numerals are given to the same elements and the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  When the first special symbol jackpot determination processing 3 (S376) is executed, the same processing as the first special symbol jackpot determination processing 2 (see FIG. 98) described above is executed, and the current variation hits the jackpot in the processing of S406. When it is determined that the condition is not (S406: No), the special figure 1 deviation variation process (S471) is executed, and this process is ended. This special figure 1 deviation variation process (S471) is executed when it is determined that the lottery result of the special figure 1 is other than the big hit, and it is determined whether or not the small hit is won, and the determination The processing corresponding to the result is executed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 126, special figure 1 deviation fluctuation processing (S471), which is one of the first special symbol jackpot determination processing 3 (S376) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 in the third embodiment. Will be described. FIG. 126 is a flow chart showing the contents of the special view 1 deviation fluctuation process (S471). This special figure 1 deviation fluctuation processing (S471) executes the processing for displaying the small hitting design and the outlying design on the first symbol display device 37, targeting the second special symbol (special figure 2) It differs in the point which changed the special symbol used as object from the special figure 2 to the special figure 1 with respect to the processing content of the special figure 2 deviation fluctuation processing (S1011 of FIG. 41) performed.

  In the special figure 1 deviation fluctuation process (S471), first, it is determined whether the execution data acquired from the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is a small hit (S3101). If it is determined that the execution data is a small hit (S3101: Yes), the special figure 1 small hit flag 203ba is set to ON (S3102), and the lottery result of the first special symbol is set to a small hit (S3103) ). Next, a small hitting symbol of the first special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S3104), and this processing is ended.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3101, when it is determined that the execution data is not a small hit (displaced) (S3101: No), the first special symbol display symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set. (S3105), this processing ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 127, the first special symbol fluctuation stop process 3 (S277) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 127 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special symbol variation stop process 3 (S277). The first special symbol fluctuation stop process 3 (S277) is the case where the lottery result of the first special symbol is not a big hit against the first special symbol fluctuation stop process 2 (S257 in FIG. 99) in the second embodiment described above That is, in the process of S801, when it is determined that the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is off (S801: No), the special figure 1 removal stop process (S871) is executed in that it is different. The other processes are the same, so the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Next, referring to FIG. 128, it is executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the third embodiment. The special figure 1 off stop process (S871) which is one process in the first special symbol variation stop process 3 (S277) will be described. FIG. 128 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special view 1 disconnection stop process (S871). In the special figure 1 stop processing (S871), when the lottery result of the special figure 1 is a small hit, a process for starting a small hit game is executed.

  In the special figure 1 stop processing (see S871 in FIG. 128), first, it is determined whether the special figure 1 small hit flag 203ba is set to ON (S3201). When it is determined that the special figure 1 small hit flag 203ba is set to ON (S3201: Yes), in order to forcibly stop the special figure 2 change during the change by the lottery result indicating the removal, Special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203s is set to on (S3202).

  And the special figure 2 fluctuation stop command which shows turning on of the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203s is set (S3203), the second special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is removed and stopped and displayed with the symbol (S3204). Next, a small hitting scenario based on the selected small hitting type is set (S3205), the special figure 1 small hitting flag 203ba is set to OFF (S3206), the special figure 1 small hitting middle flag 203bb is turned on. The setting is made (S3207), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3201, when it is determined that the special figure 1 small hit flag 203ba is not set to ON (ie, the lottery result of the first special symbol is out) (S3201: No), the book is as it is End the process.

  By being configured in this way, when the player wins a small hit in the first special symbol (special figure 1) lottery, it is possible to forcibly stop changing the special figure 2 during the change, so a small hit game can be made. During the latent state set at the start timing, it is possible to facilitate the execution of a new feature 2 variation. In the third embodiment, when the small hit of the special figure 1 is won, the process of forcibly stopping the special figure 2 change under execution in the display mode in which the lottery result shows the deviation is used, but Without being limited thereto, for example, it is configured to interrupt the measurement of the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation so that the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation being executed does not progress during the period when the small hitting game is being executed. You may.

  Next, referring to FIG. 129, it is executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the third embodiment. The small hitting control process 3 (S2255) will be described. FIG. 129 is a flowchart showing the contents of the small hitting control process 3 (S2255). The small hitting control process 3 (S2255) is different from the small hitting control process (S2205) in the first embodiment described above in that the processes of S2551 and S2552 are added. The other processes are the same, so the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In small hitting control processing 3 (S2255), when it is decided that it is the timing of small hitting start in the processing of S2503 (S2503: Yes), that is, the small hitting scenario updated by the processing of S2502 starts small hitting In the case of the content indicating the, the opening command is set (S2504), it is determined whether the special figure 1 small hit middle flag 203bb is set to ON (S2551). When it is determined that the special figure 1 small hit middle flag 203bb is set to ON (S2551: Yes), the hour reduction counter 203f is set to 0 (S2552), and this processing is ended.

  The third embodiment is configured to be able to win a small hit with both of the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the second special symbol (special figure 2), and among them, the small hit of the special figure 1 The value of the time saving counter 203f is set to 0 (cleared) only when the player is elected.

  That is, as a condition for ending the high probability state of the normal symbol (when the value of the time reduction counter 203f is larger than 0), the small hitting of the special figure 1 is won (the small hitting game starts based on the small hitting of the special figure 1) Is set. By configuring in this manner, it becomes possible to end the high probability state of the normal symbol under conditions other than the case of executing the variation of the special symbol by a predetermined number of times. Therefore, in a state in which a definite change state (high probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol) is set, a latent state (playing state advantageous to the player at any timing (any special symbol lottery)) Since it is possible to shift to the high probability state of the special symbol and the low probability state of the normal symbol, it is possible to make the player always play the game eagerly.

  Furthermore, in the third embodiment, a period in which the high probability state of the special symbol is continuously set is configured to be performed until the drawing (variation) of the special symbol is performed a predetermined number of times (four times) Therefore, as the period from when the definite change state is set to when the small hit is won in the drawing of the special figure 1 becomes shorter, it is possible to increase the number of drawing times of the special symbol that can be executed during the latent state. Therefore, the player can be made to play the game more actively.

  In addition, in the third embodiment, the high probability state of the normal symbol is configured not to end when the small winning is won in the second special symbol (special figure 2) lottery. As a result, even if the probability of winning a small hit in the drawing of the special figure 2 is set higher than the probability of winning in a small drawing of the special figure 1, the special drawing 2 is set in the state where the definite variation state is set. It is possible to suppress a situation in which a right-handed game is performed to execute the lottery.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S2551 that the special figure 1 small hit middle flag 203bb is not set to ON (S2551: No), the present process is ended as it is.

  As described above, in the third embodiment, when the jackpot is won by the lottery of the special symbol in the third embodiment, the definite change state (high probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol) is always required after the jackpot game is over Is configured to be set for a predetermined period (special symbol variation 4 times), and various transition conditions (latency state transition state) which shift the high probability latent state of the normal pattern to the low probability state during the definite change state Is established so as to set a latent state which is a game state advantageous to the player.

  And, in the third embodiment, as the latent condition transition condition, the first latent probability transition condition that is satisfied when the player wins a big hit during the definite variation condition, and the predetermined period in which the probable variation condition is set (special symbol variation 4 When the small win is won in the lottery of the second latent probability transition condition that is established when the final change of times) is executed, and the specific special symbol (first special symbol (special figure 1)) in the definite change state And a third latent transition condition that holds true. As described above, by configuring the latent state to be set under various conditions, it is possible to provide the player with playability that does not come tired.

  Furthermore, the plurality of latent probability transition conditions described above are configured such that the period in which the latent state is set after the establishment is different, and indicates the jackpot when the first latent probability transition condition is established. When the latent condition is set during the symbol determination period in which the special symbol is stopped and displayed, and the second latency transition condition is satisfied, the latent pattern is changed during the variation period of the special symbol variation of the object and during the symbol determination period. If the firm state is set and the third latency transition condition is satisfied, the probability change state is taken from the timing when the target small hitting game is executed (the timing when the first variable winning device 65 opens as the small hitting game) It is configured to be set up to the timing at which the symbol determination period of the special symbol corresponding to the final change of the symbol ends.

  By configuring in this way, it is possible to play a game for setting the latent state during the definite change state, not merely aiming for the latent state, but also for the occasion in which the latent state is set. Because it is possible to make the person pay attention, it is possible to play the game more aggressively.

  In the third embodiment, the symbol determination period of the special symbol is configured to be different according to the lottery result of the special symbol. In addition, according to the special symbol fluctuation frequency after the definite change state is set, it is constituted in order to make the fluctuation indicatory period (the fluctuation time) in order to show the drawing result of the special symbol different.

  Specifically, when the winning result of the special symbol for which the first latency transition condition is established, ie, when winning a big hit in the special symbol lottery, the symbol determination period is 5 seconds to 300 seconds according to the lottery result It is configured to be set in the range of. By configuring in this manner, even if the player determines that the first latent probability transition condition is satisfied (even if the special symbol indicating the big hit is stopped and displayed), the symbol determination period set thereafter Since it is not possible to easily determine the length of the game, it is possible to play the game while expecting that a long period is set as the period in which the latent state is continuously set.

  In addition, when the above-mentioned second latent probability transition condition is satisfied, the latent probability state is set by the lottery result of the special symbol variation (final variation in the probability change state) corresponding to the establishment of the second latent probability transition condition. The length of the period to be stored is configured to be largely different. For example, in the final change in the probability change state, when the lottery result of the special symbol is out, the length of the period set as the latent state is It is configured to be equal to or less than (including the same as) the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation that is executed during the latent state. By this configuration, when the final change of the positive change state is out, the latent state is temporarily set internally, but the special view 2 change is executed during the latent state, It is possible to set an unfair latent state which is disadvantageous to a player who makes it impossible (hard) to win a hit game.

  In addition, when the above-mentioned disadvantageous latent probability state is set, on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the effect mode to notify that the latent probability state game (RUSH game) is to be executed is not executed It is preferable not to notify the player that the latent state is set.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, when the lottery result of the special symbol is out in the final change of the definite variation state, the disadvantageous latent probability state is set, for example, the lottery result of the special symbol In a part of cases where the symbol is out of the game, a long symbol determination period (for example, 100 seconds that can be set when the lottery result is a big hit) is set or the lottery result of the special symbol is out As a variation pattern (variation time) selected to be, it may be configured to be able to set 300 seconds that can be set when the lottery result is a big hit.

  By configuring in this way, it is possible to set a latent state that is advantageous to the player even when the jackpot or the small jackpot is not won during the definite change state, so expecting the end of the definite change state Can play a game while playing. In addition, by making the set symbol determination period and the variation pattern the same as the period (time) that can be set when winning a big hit, it is expected that a big hit game will be executed after the latent state condition is over. be able to.

  In the above-described example, when the latency state game (RUSH game) is performed by setting the length of the symbol determination period to the same length as when winning a big hit, the lottery result of the special symbol is It is preferable that the special symbol (the third symbol) be stopped and displayed in a display mode that is difficult for the player to grasp. As a result, the lottery result of the special symbol of this time is determined at the timing when the special symbol is stopped and displayed, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the gaming intention during the latent state game.

  Furthermore, in the third embodiment, the length of the period in which the latent state is set is different according to the timing at which the first latency transition condition is satisfied. Specifically, as the number of times of special symbol variation in the probability change state increases, the latent state is set to be longer. Thus, as the number of special symbol variations in the definite variation state increases, that is, as the number of special symbol variations executable during the definite variation state decreases, a latent state that is advantageous to the player is likely to be set. Because you can make you think that you want to win the jackpot as soon as possible (I want to establish the first latency transition condition), or because you want to win the jackpot immediately before the end of the definite change state, the interest of the game is improved. It can be done. In addition, when the jackpot is won in the final change of the probability change state, that is, when both the first latency transition condition and the second latency transition condition are satisfied in one special symbol fluctuation (lottery). Can provide latency for a longer period of time, since the latency will be set from the period when the jackpot fluctuation starts.

  In the present embodiment, the later the establishment of the first latent probability transition condition is delayed, the more likely the latent state will be set for a long period of time. If the number of changes is an even number, or if the jackpot is won for the third time, the longest latency period may be set, or if the first latency transition condition is established as early as possible. It may be configured such that the latent state is more easily set for a long time.

<Control Process of Voice Lamp Controller in Third Embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 130 to 135. The control processing of the voice lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment is a command determination processing instead of the command determination processing 2 (see FIG. 106) with respect to the control processing of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment described above. 130 (refer to FIG. 130), jackpot related processing (refer to FIG. 64), jackpot related processing 3 (refer to FIG. 132), fluctuation display setting processing (refer to FIG. 69), change display setting processing 3 (refer to FIG. 134) 131 is different from the other in that the winning information related processing (see FIG. 131), the jackpot end processing (see FIG. 133), and the probability change variation display processing (see FIG. 135) are added. To be executed. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected about the same process and the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

  First, command determination processing 3 (S4172) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 130 is a flowchart showing the contents of command determination processing 3 (S4172). The command determination process 3 (S4172) is different from the command determination process 2 (S4162) in the second embodiment described above in that the process of S4271 is executed instead of the process of S4214. The other processes are the same as the command determination process 2 (S4162) in the second embodiment, and thus the detailed description will be omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 131, a winning information related process (S4271) which is one process in the command determination process 3 (S4172) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 131 is a flowchart showing the contents of the winning information related process (S4271).

  In the prize information related process (S4271), first, the information indicating the gaming state stored in the state setting area 223j is read (S5501). Next, in the process of S5501, it is determined whether the read gaming state (that is, the current gaming state) is in the process of being changed (S5502). If it is determined that the read gaming state is in the process of change (S5502: Yes), the value of the remaining certainty number change area 223ba is read (S5503). Next, in the process of S5503, it is determined whether or not the value of the read remaining probability variation number area 223ba is larger than 0 (S5504). If it is determined that the value of the remaining probability variation number area 223ba is larger than 0 (S5504: Yes), it is determined whether or not there is winning information in the winning information received this time (S5505). If it is determined that there is winning information in the winning information (S5505: Yes), the prefetching hit flag 223bb is set to ON (S5506). On the other hand, when it is determined that there is no hit information in the winning information (S5505: No), the process of S5506 is skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S5507.

  Next, the value of the remaining number of times of variation area 223ba is decremented by 1 (S5507), the information on the received prize information command is stored in the corresponding prize information storage area 223b (S5508), and this processing is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5502 that the read gaming state is not in a definite variation (S5502: No), or if it is determined in the process of S5504 that the value of the remaining certainty number change area 223ba is 0 (S5504: No), a display winning command corresponding to the received winning information is set (S5509), the above-described processing of S5508 is executed, and the present processing ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 132, the jackpot related process 3 (S4552) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 132 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot related process 3 (S4552). The jackpot related processing 3 (S4552) executes the above-mentioned processing of S4608 or S4611 to the jackpot related processing (S4502) in the first embodiment described above, and then executes the jackpot end processing (S4651). It differs in the point. The other processes are the same, so detailed description will be omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 133, the jackpot end processing (S4651) which is one of the jackpot related processing 3 (S4552) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 133 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot end process (S4651).

  In the jackpot end processing (S4651), first, all information stored in the winning information storage area 223b is read (S5601). Next, it is determined whether there is winning information (S5602). If it is determined that there is no winning information (S5602: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is winning information (S5602: Yes), the number of winning information determined in the processing of S5602 is subtracted from the probability change setting number (n = 4) (S5603). Next, in the process of S5603, the subtracted value is set in the remaining probability variation number area 223ba (S5604).

  Next, it is determined whether or not there is hit information in the read out information (S5605). If it is determined that the read information includes the hit information (S5605: Yes), is the hit information included in the winning information corresponding to the next change (that is, the first change executed after the end of the jackpot game)? Is determined (S5606). If it is determined in the process of S5606 that the winning information corresponding to the next change includes the hit information (S5606: Yes), the player is notified that the latent state will be set immediately after the big hit ends. The special rendering mode for the game is set (S5607), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the winning information corresponding to the next variation does not include the winning information (S5606: No), the per-read flag 223bb is set to ON (S5608), and the winning information including the winning information changes The special figure fluctuation count up to is set is set in the remaining fluctuation count counter 223bc (S5609), a display ending command including the bingo game display mode is set (S5611), and this processing is ended.

  If it is determined in the process of S5605 that there is no hit information in the read state (S5605: No), the number of definite variations (n = 4) is set in the remaining variation number counter 223bc (S5610), and the above-described S5611 The process of is executed, and this process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 134, the variable display setting process 3 (S4173) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 134 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variable display setting process 3 (S4173). The variation display setting process 3 (S4173) is different from the variation display setting process (S4113) in the first embodiment described above in the process of S5103 when it is determined that the current gaming state is not the latent state (S5103) : No), it differs in the point which performs change display setting processing (S5151) for a probability change. The other processes are the same, so detailed description will be omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 135, the variation display setting process for probability variation (S5151) which is one of the variation display setting processing 3 (S4173) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment. explain. FIG. 135 is a flowchart showing the contents of the probability change change display setting process (S5151). In the variation display setting process for probability variation (S5151), when the current gaming state is the probability variation state, the variation pattern command for display of the first special symbol based on the special view 1 variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 Is set, and the process of transmitting to the display control device 114 is executed.

  In the process of setting change display for probability change (S5151), first, it is determined whether or not the current change is a small hit (S5701). If it is determined that the variation this time is a small hit (S5701: Yes), set the rendering mode to become All Bingo, that is, the rendering mode as shown in FIG. 114 (b) (S5709), Transfer to processing. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5701 that the current variation is not a small hit (S5701: No), it is determined whether the prefetching hit flag 223bb is set to ON (S5702). If it is determined that the per-read-ahead flag 223bb is set to ON (S5702: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the remaining fluctuation number counter 223bc is 2, ie, whether the remaining fluctuation number is 2 ( S5703). If it is determined that the value of the remaining fluctuation number counter 223bc is 2 (S5703: Yes), readout of winning information corresponding to the next variation is executed from the winning information storage area 223b (S5704).

  Next, based on the winning information read out in the process of S5704 and the number of times of change, the effect mode is set from the probability change effect selection table 222ba (S5705). Next, the pre-reading hit flag 223bb is set to OFF (S5706), the remaining certainty variation number area 223ba and the remaining variation number counter 223bc are reset (S5707), and the process shifts to the processing of S5710. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5702 that the per-read flag 223bb is not set to ON (S5702: No), or if the value of the remaining fluctuation number counter 223bc is not 2 in the process of S5703. In (S5703: No), an effect mode in which the bingo can not be established is set (S5708), the value of the remaining fluctuation number counter 223bc is decremented by 1 (S5711), and the process proceeds to S5710.

  Next, the variation pattern command extracted and the variation pattern command for display corresponding to the rendering mode set in any of S5705, S5708, and S5709 are set (S5710), and this processing is ended.

Fourth Embodiment
Next, with reference to FIGS. 136 to 160, a pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment will be described. Each embodiment mentioned above is constituted so that the 1st special symbol (special figure 1) and the 2nd special symbol (special figure 2) may be fluctuated at the same time (so-called, simultaneous fluctuation type), and it is latent as a game state A lot of small hit games (RUSH games) are executed by the drawing (variation) of the special figure 2 being executed while the state (high probability state of special symbol, low probability state of normal symbol) is set It was configured to be possible.

  And once the latent state is set, the first latent end condition established based on the start of the jackpot game, or the number of times of variation of the special symbol since the high probability state of the normal symbol is set It is configured to end when any of the second latency end conditions established based on the above is established.

  In the above-described first to third embodiments configured as described above, for example, when the first latency end condition is satisfied, the latent gaming state (the first advantageous game advantageous to the player) ( Since the RUSH game is to be executed until just before the jackpot game which is the second advantageous game is started, the player can be made to successively execute a plurality of different advantageous games, the player Was able to give a sense of satisfaction.

  However, in each of the above-described embodiments, the latent state (high probability state of special symbol, low probability state of ordinary symbol) after the probability variation state (high probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol) is set Although a plurality of types of probability variation end conditions to be shifted to are allowed to be set, since only two types of the above-described two types of latency termination conditions for terminating the latency status are used for the player There is a problem that the period in which the positive state lasts can be easily predicted.

  With regard to such a problem, in the fourth embodiment, the lottery for shifting (falling) the high probability state of the special symbol to the low probability state every time the lottery of the special symbol (big hit lottery) is executed. (Hereinafter referred to as a fall lottery) is configured to be configured to set a low probability state of a special symbol when winning in this fall lottery.

  By configuring in this manner, it is possible to solve the problem that the player can easily predict the period in which the high probability state of the special symbol is continuously set, which is an advantageous game advantageous to the player. The game can be played while expecting the latent state game (RUSH game) to continue for a long time.

  Furthermore, in the present fourth embodiment, during a period in which the variable display (special map fluctuation display) for displaying that one of the special symbols has won the jackpot has been executed (the special display fluctuation display period), the other Even if the special symbol lottery is executed, the lottery result of the falling lottery is configured to be invalid.

  As a result, when the latent state is set by the establishment of the first probability variation end condition (a probability variation end condition established based on the jackpot win), the latency state game (RUSH) is executed during the latency state. In the game), since it is possible to invalidate the fall lottery, it is possible to make the latent state game (RUSH game) an advantageous latent state game (super RUSH game) that can be executed for a long time.

  On the other hand, when the latent state is set by the establishment of the second definite variation end condition (the positive variation end condition established based on the number of times of variation of the special symbol), the fall lottery is executed during the latent condition Since there is a risk that the latent state will end early based on winning the fall lottery, the period during which the latent state game (RUSH game) is executed is the above-mentioned advantageous latency state It can be considered as a normal latent game, which tends to be shorter than the state game.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 136, transition of the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 during the probability change state in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 136 is a schematic view schematically showing a transition method of four types of gaming states set in the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment. In the fourth embodiment, in addition to the method of transition of the gaming state in the pachinko machine 10 used in the above-described first embodiment, the contents of transition of the gaming state when winning the fall lottery are added, and each transition It differs in the point which changed the element until condition (predetermined condition) is satisfied, and the point which changed the shift ratio which shifts at the time of jackpot winning, and other than that differ. Detailed description of the same elements will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 136, in the fourth embodiment, the high probability state of the special symbol is configured to execute the falling lottery to shift to the low probability state, and the falling lottery is performed during the definite changing state. If the player wins the game, it shifts to the time saving state, and if it wins the falling lottery while in the latent state, it shifts to the normal state.

  By configuring in this manner, in order to set the latent state that is a gaming state advantageous to the player, a probability change state (high probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol) is set. In the state, the condition to shift the high probability state of the normal symbol to the low probability state (for example, time reduction) is more than the condition to shift the high probability state of the special symbol to the low probability state (winning fall lottery) It needs to be established first.

  Therefore, whether or not the latent state is set is determined in accordance with the timing of establishment of the transition condition of each symbol (special symbol, normal symbol), so that the player can be made to gaze at the game content. Can improve the interest of Furthermore, although details will be described later, in the fourth embodiment, the game method to be executed is the same (left-handed game) in the probability change state and the time reduction state, and the effect contents displayed on the third symbol display device 81 Are configured to be the same. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to grasp the effect even if he / she wins the fall lottery before the transition condition of the normal symbol (condition to shift the high probability state of the normal symbol to the low probability state) is established. be able to.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 137, the flow in which the latent state is set in the fourth embodiment, and the flow of the game in the latent state will be described. FIG. 137 (a) is a timing chart schematically showing the flow in the case where the special figure 1 jackpot is won during the definite variation state (when the first probable variation end condition is satisfied), and FIG. 137 (b) is a timing chart. It is the timing chart which showed typically the flow when the number of time saving becomes 0 in the definite variation state (when the 2nd definite variation end condition is satisfied).

  As shown in FIG. 137 (a), in the fourth embodiment, the high probability state of the special symbol is set to the low probability state in the state in which the high probability state (certain variation state or latent state) of the special symbol is set. A lottery (falling lottery) for shifting to a state is configured to be performed each time a lottery (variation) of a special symbol is executed, and when a jackpot is won during a definite change state (first definite change end condition) Is configured to be set as a fall lottery invalid period during which the fall lottery is not executed.

  On the other hand, if the latent state is set based on the establishment of the second probability variation end condition, the fall lottery is effective even during the latent state game (RUSH game), as shown in FIG. 137 (b). Since the execution is performed, the latent state is shifted to the normal state based on the winning of the falling lottery before the special figure 1 fluctuation ends. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the first probable variation end condition is established, a latent state game (RUSH game) which is more advantageous than the case where the second probable variation end condition is established can be executed.

<About the effect display content in the fourth embodiment>
In the fourth embodiment, in addition to the effect contents to be executed in the first embodiment described above as effect contents to be executed during the probability change state, the player is suggested (notified) to the opportunity that the latent state is set. It differs in the point for which the effect for showing and notifying (informing) that it had won the fall lottery during the latent state game (RUSH game) was added.

  Here, with reference to FIGS. 138 to 140, the contents of the effects added by the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 138 (a) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of effects for suggesting that the latent game (RUSH game) is set by the establishment of the second probability variation termination condition (attainment of the number of times reduced). FIG. 138 (b) schematically shows the contents of effects for suggesting that the latent game (RUSH game) is set by the establishment of the first probability variation termination condition (big hit). It is a schematic diagram.

  As shown in FIGS. 138 (a) and 138 (b), in the present embodiment, the player sets the opportunity for the latent state to be set by the display mode of the effect pattern 813 displayed when the treasure box 812 is opened. When the display mode of "444" is displayed as the effect pattern 813, it notifies that the second probability variation end condition (time arrival number of times reaching) is satisfied, and When the display mode of "super RUSH" is displayed, it is configured to notify that the first probability change termination condition (big hit) is satisfied.

  In the fourth embodiment, the display mode of the effect pattern 813 displayed as the effect result in the definite variation state is configured to notify the player of an opportunity for setting the latent state, but A configuration other than the above may be used. For example, a plurality of display modes may be provided in which the selection ratio is made different according to the type of the definite variation end condition established as the display mode of the effect pattern 813 to be displayed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of predicting which definite variation end condition is established.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 139 (a), the display content when winning in the fall lottery during the latent state game (RUSH game) will be described. FIG. 139 (a) is a schematic view schematically showing display contents when winning a fall lottery during a latent game (RUSH game). In the fourth embodiment, the falling lottery is executed each time the special drawing lottery start condition for executing the special symbol drawing (big hit drawing) is established, and the special drawing lottery starting condition is satisfied. After that, during the period until the jackpot lottery is executed, that is, before the jackpot lottery is performed, the fall lottery is executed.

  Therefore, when winning the fall lottery, as shown in FIG. 139 (a), while the special symbol (special figure 1) corresponding to the win of the fall lottery is variably displayed, latency state game (RUSH game) Is notified, and after the fall lottery is won (after the gaming state has shifted from the latent state to the normal state), it is suppressed that a new special figure 2 fluctuation is executed. In addition, the display mode of the guidance display area Dm3 is variably displayed from "right-handed" to "left-handed" while the special symbol (special figure 1) corresponding to the win of the fall lottery is variably displayed. After winning the fall lottery (after the gaming state has shifted from the latent state to the normal state), it is suppressed that a new special figure 2 fluctuation is executed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 139 (b), the contents of the effect executed when the jackpot is won during the latent state game (RUSH game) will be described. FIG. 139 (b) is a schematic view schematically showing an example of effect contents to be executed when a jackpot is won during the latent game (RUSH game).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 140, the contents of effects in the advantageous latent game (super RUSH game) which is advantageous to the player among the latent game (RUSH game) will be described. As described above, in the fourth embodiment, when the latent state is set based on the satisfaction of the first probability variation end condition, the falling fall is performed to invalidate the falling lottery during the setting period of the latent state. It is constituted so that a lottery invalid period is set up, and it is displayed in the main display area Dm of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 that it is in the advantageous latency confirmation state game (super RUSH game). A comment of "during super RUSH" is displayed which indicates that the number of displayed is increased and the sub display area Ds is in the game of advantageous latency confirmation.

Regarding Electrical Configuration in Fourth Embodiment
Next, the electrical configuration of the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 141 to 146. FIG. First, with reference to FIG. 141, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described. These counters etc. are MPU201 of the main control device 110 in order to perform a big hit lottery, the setting of the display of the 1st symbol display 37 and the 3rd symbol display 81, the lottery of the display result of the 2nd symbol display 83, etc. This embodiment is different from the above-described embodiments in that a fall lottery counter C6 used when determining the lottery result of the fall lottery is added.

  The fall lottery counter C6 is a loop counter whose value is updated in the range of “0 to 239”, and is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds which is an execution interval of timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 31). Some counters are periodically updated in the main processing (see FIG. 52), and the updated value is stored in a counter buffer (fall lottery counter buffer) set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203.

  The value of the falling lottery counter C6 is referred to in the falling lottery executed when the high probability state of the special symbol is set (when the probability change flag 203g is set to ON), and is acquired If it is determined that the value of the falling lottery counter C6 is a determination value defined in advance in the falling lottery table 202cb, the high probability state of the special symbol shifts to the low probability state (falls).

  Next, contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 142 is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 in the fourth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 142, the ROM 202 of the fourth embodiment is different from the ROM 202 of the first embodiment in that the jackpot type selection table 202d is replaced by a jackpot type selection 4 table 202ca, and a fall lottery The difference is that a table 202cb is provided. The other elements are the same, and the same elements will be denoted by the same reference numerals and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Here, the contents of the jackpot type selection 4 table 202ca will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 143 is a schematic view schematically showing the contents defined in the jackpot type selection 4 table 202ca. As shown in FIG. 143, in the fourth embodiment, when the jackpot is won and the jackpot game is executed, the operation content (operation scenario) for opening the second attacker (second variable winning device 650) without fail is as follows. It differs from the first embodiment described above in that it is set. In addition, as the number of rounds of the jackpot game executed when the jackpot is won, the operation content (operation scenario) is set such that the jackpot game of at least 5 rounds or more is executed Is different.

  That is, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment described above, the operation content executed during the small hitting game in order to make it difficult for the player to grasp whether the special symbol big hit or small hit is won. A jackpot game is defined in which the operation content identical to (the operation scenario) (concept including a difference which is difficult for the player to determine) is executed, and a latent state which is a gaming state in which the player is advantageous is set. The fourth embodiment of the present invention allows the player to easily determine whether the jackpot is won or the small jackpot, while the timing and the end timing are made unclear. By making the operation content different from the operation content of the small hit game, the player can easily distinguish.

  In this manner, the number of small hit games performed during the latent state game (RUSH game) is easily made by allowing the player to easily determine whether the big hit game was executed or the small hit game was executed. Can be made to understand.

  Next, the falling lottery table 202cb will be described with reference to FIG. 146 (a). FIG. 146 (a) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents defined in the falling lottery table 202cb. The falling lottery table 202cb is a data table in which the determination value of the above-described falling lottery counter C6 is stored. One of the values of the fall lottery counter C6 acquired when the ball enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 (during start winning) is defined in the fall lottery table 202cb When it matches with the judgment value of, it is set to shift to the low probability state of the special symbol (falling).

  More specifically, four judgment values "43, 107, 195, 222" are defined as judgment values judged to be falling in the high probability state of the special symbol. Here, the falling lottery counter C6 is a loop counter whose value is updated in the range of “0 to 239”. Of the 240 possible values of the fall lottery counter C6, there are four determination values determined to be fall, so the probability of falling (transition to a low probability state of the special symbol) in the definite variation state of the special symbol Is 1/60 (4/240).

  Also, in the fourth embodiment, the probability of winning a jackpot in the high probability state of the special symbol is set to be 6/480 (see FIG. 15 (a)), and the small hit is won in the drawing of the special view 2. It sets so that the probability of doing is 221/480 (refer FIG.15 (b)). That is, the probability of winning the fall lottery is configured to be slightly higher than the probability of winning the jackpot. That is, in the fourth embodiment, in the state where the latent state is set, it is configured to be easy to win in the order of the small hit, the fall, and the big hit.

  In addition, the winning ratios for the big hit, the small hit, and the fall in the high probability state of the special symbol are not limited to those shown in the present embodiment, and the easiness of winning may be made different. For example, the fall probability (probability of winning a fall lottery) is set to be lower than the jackpot probability, and during the latent state, the jackpot game and the small hit game are repeatedly enjoyed until the fall election is won. You may set it so that the small hitting probability and the falling probability are almost the same (for example, the small hitting probability 1/3, the falling probability 1/4), and the lottery of the special symbol is performed during the latent state Each time it is played, the player may have a playability that makes the player get excited. In addition, even if the fall probability is set high (for example, 1/2) and only when the fall does not fall in the first fall lottery, the special symbol lottery can be executed in the state in which the latent state is set. good.

  In addition, only the determination value for determining whether or not to fall in the high probability state of the special symbol is defined in the fall lottery table 202cb in the present embodiment, and the determination value for the low probability state of the special symbol is specified. It has not been. When it is already in the low probability state of the special symbol, it is a waste of processing to determine whether or not to shift to the low probability state of the special symbol.

  In the fourth embodiment, the falling lottery table 202cb and the regularly updated falling lottery counter C6 are compared, and the high probability state of the special symbol is shifted to the low probability state of the special symbol (falling) ) Is determined. That is, the timing to shift from the latent state (high probability state of special symbol, low probability state of normal symbol) to normal state (low probability state of special symbol, low probability state of normal symbol) can be made random. . Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to understand the timing at which the latent state ends in the latent state game (RUSH game) performed during the period in which the latent state is set.

  In this embodiment, whether to shift (fall) from the high probability state of the special symbol to the low probability state of the special symbol was drawn (determined), but it is drawn that the transition to other states is made (determination May). For example, whether or not to shift from the high probability state of the normal symbol to the low probability state of the normal symbol may be determined by a drawing (special drawing lottery) executed for each change of the special symbol. In this way, it is possible to randomize how long the high probability state of the normal symbol lasts, so the probability change state (the high probability state of the special symbol, the high probability state of the normal symbol) is the latent state (the high probability state of the special symbol) It is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the timing of transition to the normal symbol low probability state). Therefore, during the period in which the probability change state is set, it is possible to always play the game while expecting the latent state to be set. Further, for example, it may be configured to be able to draw lottery whether or not to shift from the low probability state of the special symbol to the high probability state of the special symbol.

  Next, the contents of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 of the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 144. FIG. 144 shows the contents of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 of the fourth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram shown typically. As shown in FIG. 144, the RAM 203 of the fourth embodiment is different from the RAM 203 of the first embodiment described above in that a state update restriction flag 203ca is provided. The other elements are the same, and the same elements will be denoted by the same reference numerals and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The state update restriction flag 203ca is a flag for indicating that the update of various parameters corresponding to various conditions for shifting the gaming state is restricted, and various states are set when ON. It indicates that the update of the parameter is in a restricted state. In the fourth embodiment, when the state update restriction flag 203ca is set to ON, the process of updating the value of the time saving counter 203f is skipped.

  This status update restriction flag 203ca is determined to have won the jackpot in the first special symbol (special figure 1) lottery in the first special symbol jackpot determination process 4 (see S386 in FIG. 147) (S406 in FIG. 147) : Yes) or when it is determined in the second special symbol jackpot determination processing 4 (see S975 in FIG. 150) that the jackpot was won in the second special symbol (special figure 2) lottery (S1006 in FIG. 150: Yes) Is set to ON (S487 in FIG. 147, S1077 in FIG. 150).

  Furthermore, when it is determined in the gaming state update process 4 (see S388 in FIG. 149) (see S651 in FIG. 149) and it is determined that it is set to ON (S651 in FIG. 149: Yes) The process of updating (subtracting) the value, that is, the process of updating the parameter (the number of time savings) corresponding to the condition for shifting the gaming state is skipped. And when it is determined in the first special symbol fluctuation stop process 4 (see S287 in FIG. 148) that the special view 1 jackpot flag 203h is set to on (S801 in FIG. 148: Yes), it is set to off (See S871 in FIG. 148). Similarly, when it is determined in the second special symbol fluctuation stop process 4 (see S293 in FIG. 151) that the special figure 2 big hit flag 203i is set to on (S1501 in FIG. 151: Yes), too It is set (S1571 in FIG. 151).

  That is, in the fourth embodiment, when the jackpot is won by any of a plurality of special symbols (special figures 1 and 2), the state update restriction flag 203ca is set to ON, and the special symbol is won for the jackpot. While the variable display of is being executed, it is configured not to shift the gaming state.

  Next, the contents of the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 of the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 145 (a). FIG. 145 (a) is an audio lamp control device according to the fourth embodiment. It is the model which showed typically the content of ROM222 of MPU221 of 113. FIG. As shown in FIG. 145 (a), the ROM 222 of the fourth embodiment is different from the ROM 222 of the first embodiment in that the latent mode selection table 222ca and the fall notification selection table 222cb are provided. doing. The other elements are the same, and the same elements will be denoted by the same reference numerals and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The latent probability mode selection table 222ca is a data table that is referred to when selecting an effect mode (latency mode) of an effect (latency effect effect) for informing the player that the latent state has been set. . In the latent mode selection table 222ca, there are a plurality of presentation modes (in correspondence with the setting timing of the latent state (big hit winning timing, short time reaching (short time passing) timing) and a mode setting effect counter 223ca described later. The rendering mode is defined, and it is possible to suggest the setting opportunity of the latent state to the player according to the selected rendering aspect of the latent presentation.

  Next, the detailed contents defined in the latent mode selection table 222ca will be described with reference to FIG. 146 (b). FIG. 146 (b) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents defined in the latent probability mode selection table 222ca. As shown in FIG. 146 (b), when the information included in the state command received from the main control unit 110 indicates that the current latent state is the big hit latent state, the value of the acquired mode setting effect counter 223ca "Invincible mode" is defined in the range of "0 to 49", "Normal mode B" is defined in the range of "50 to 89", and "Normal mode A" is defined in the range of "90 to 99" ing.

  Then, when the information included in the state command received from the main control device 110 indicates that the current latent state is the short-time missed latent state, the value of the acquired mode setting effect counter 223 ca is “0 to 49”. The “normal mode A” is defined in the range, the “normal mode B” is defined in the “50 to 89” range, and the “normal mode B” is defined in the “90 to 99” range.

  The fall notification selection table 222cb is a data table for selecting a notification mode for notifying (proposing) to the player that the win of the fall lottery has been made, and the time saving state (high probability state of the normal symbol) continues. The notification mode is selected based on the value of the remaining short time area 223k indicating the remaining period set and the value of the fall notification effect counter 223cf.

  In the fourth embodiment, the game method (left-handed game) and the third symbol display device 81 are executed when the probability change state is set as the game state and when the time reduction state is set. Are configured to be the same as various display modes. By this configuration, it is configured that the player can not easily determine whether the present state is a definite change state or a short time state. Furthermore, since the falling lottery is executed, the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment of the present invention is time-shortened at random timing in a state where a definite change state (high probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol) is set. It is configured that the state (low probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol) is set.

  Then, when the high probability state of the normal symbol shifts to the low probability state in the state where the probability change state is set, the gaming state shifts from the probability change state to the latent state, and a latent advantage for the player is obtained. If the high probability state of the normal symbol shifts to the low probability state while the time saving state is set while the firm state game (RUSH game) is executed, the gaming state is normally changed from the time saving state Transition to the state.

  Here, specific contents of the fall notification selection table 222cb will be described with reference to FIG. 146 (c). FIG. 146 (c) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the fall notification selection table 222cb. As shown in FIG. 146 (c), the fall notification selection table 222cb is associated with the remaining number of short times (information of the remaining short number area 223k) at the time of winning the fall and the value of the fall notification effect counter 223cf. The notification mode is defined.

  Specifically, when the timing of winning the fall is the remaining short number of times is 0 (when the information stored in the remaining short number of times area 223k indicates the remaining short number of times 0), that is, the high probability of the normal symbol When a win is made in the fall lottery due to the change ending in the state, “confirmation notification” is defined regardless of the value of the acquired fall notification effect counter 223cf. And, when the timing of winning the fall is the remaining number of short times is 1 to 49, that is, when half or more of the period in which the high probability state of the normal symbol is set has passed, the acquired fall notification effect counter 223cf "Suggested notification" is defined in the range of "0 to 49" or "90 to 99", and "confirmed notification" is defined in the range of "50 to 89". And, when the remaining number of short times is 50 to 98, that is, when the period for which the high probability state of the normal symbol is set remains half or more, the value of the acquired fall notification effect counter 223cf is “0 to 89”. "Suggested notification" is defined in the range of "," and "confirmed notification" is defined in the range of "90 to 99".

  Here, when "confirmed notification" is selected as the notification mode, a notification mode in which the player can easily grasp that the player has won the fall lottery, for example, falls to the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 A notification mode is set which displays an indication (for example, a display of "sorry"), or notifies of the winning of the fall lottery by a sound or a luminescent color of the decorative member.

  In addition, when “indication notification” is selected as the notification mode, a notification mode (for example, display of “pinch”) for notifying the player that there is a possibility of winning in the falling lottery is set. . Although the detailed description is omitted, this “indication notification” is configured to be set when the notification condition is satisfied even when the fall lottery has not been won. By configuring in this manner, the “indication notification” is executed both when the player actually wins the fall lottery and when the user does not win the fall lottery.

  As described above, in the fourth embodiment, the mode of the notification (indication) effect of whether or not the player has won the lottery for falling is continuously set with the high probability state of the normal symbol remaining period (remaining time short It is configured to set based on the period), and is configured such that the “confirmed notification” becomes more difficult to be set as the short remaining time is longer. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the player grasps that the player has won the falling lottery with the remaining time short period being long, and the game intention in the remaining short time period is lowered.

  In addition, the setting frequency of the "indication notification" set in the case of not winning the fall lottery may be configured to be variable based on the length of the short remaining time, for example, the longer the short remaining time falls It is good to constitute so that "indication notice" may be set up easily in the state which has not won a lottery. This makes it possible to vary the possibility of actually winning the fall lottery in the case where "indication notification" is executed, based on the length of the remaining period for a short time, so "indication notification" is performed. It is possible to cause the player to play the game for a short period of time while making the player predict the presence or absence of the falling lottery while judging the frequency (number of times) and the remaining number of short times, thereby improving the interest of the game it can.

  Next, the contents of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 of the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 145 (b). FIG. 145 (b) is the audio lamp control device of the fourth embodiment. It is the model which showed typically the content of RAM223 of MPU221 of 113. FIG. As shown in FIG. 145 (b), the RAM 223 of the fourth embodiment has a mode setting effect counter 223ca, a latent mode storage area 223cb, and the number of small hits compared to the RAM 223 of the first embodiment described above. The difference is that a counter 223 cc, a fall flag 223 cd, a short time notification completion flag 223 ce, and a fall notification effect counter 223 cf are provided. The other elements are the same, and the same elements will be denoted by the same reference numerals and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The mode setting effect counter 223ca is a counter used when selecting the latent mode using the latent mode selection table 222ca. It is repeatedly updated in the range of 0 to 99. Although illustration is omitted, the main processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is updated by one each time the main processing is executed.

  The latency mode storage area 223cb is a storage area for storing the latency mode currently set, and stores (setting) the latency mode determined in the latency mode setting process (see S4451 in FIG. 154). (See S5804 in FIG. 154). Then, it is referred to in the special display 1 variation display setting process 4 (see S5171 in FIG. 159) (see S5251 in FIG. 159), and the display variation pattern command is set (see S5252 in FIG. 159). Similarly, it is referred to in the special display 2 variation display setting process 4 (see S5175 in FIG. 160) (S5351 in FIG. 160), and the display variation pattern command is set (S5352 in FIG. 160). When information (latency mode information) stored (set) in this latency mode storage area 223cb is determined that the gaming status has shifted to the normal status in status command processing 4 (see S4281 in FIG. 153) (See S4454 in FIG. 153).

  The small hit counter 223 cc is a counter for measuring the number of small hits won during the latent state, and the small hit start command in the small hit related processing 4 (see S 4574 in FIG. 156) during the latent state. When received, the value is incremented by 1 (see S4752 in FIG. 156). Then, it is referred to when determining the number of times of small hits won in the latent state (S4753 in FIG. 156). In the present embodiment, the small hitting count display 825 is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 based on the value of the small hitting count counter 223cc, and the small hit is made during the period in which the latent state is set. When the number of winnings reaches a predetermined number (multiple of 10), the remaining time of the latent state is displayed.

  The fall flag 223 cd is a flag for indicating that the player has won the fall lottery during the definite change state, and is set to be on to indicate that the person has won the fall lottery.

  The short time notification completed flag 223ce wins the falling lottery during the probability variation state (high probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol), and to the short time state (high probability state of special symbol, low probability state of normal symbol) It is a flag for indicating that a fall notification effect (effect to be executed when a confirmation notification is selected in the fall notification selection table 222cb) for notifying the player that the shift has been made is executed, The fall notification effect is set by being set to ON.

  The fall notification effect counter 223cf is a counter used when selecting a notification mode of the fall lottery using the fall notification selection table 222cb. It is repeatedly updated in the range of 0 to 99. Although illustration is omitted, the main processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is updated by one each time the main processing is executed.

Regarding Control Processing of Main Control Device in Fourth Embodiment
Next, various control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 147 to 151. The control processing of the main control device 110 in the fourth embodiment is the first control processing of the main control device 110 in the above-described first embodiment, instead of the first special symbol jackpot determination processing (see FIG. 34). Special symbol jackpot determination processing 4 (see FIG. 147), first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (see FIG. 38) instead of the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 4 (see FIG. 148), gaming state update processing (see FIG. 36) In place of the game state update process 4 (see FIG. 149), the second special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 40) instead of the second special symbol jackpot determination process 4 (see FIG. 150), the second special symbol fluctuation stop process It differs in that the second special symbol variation stop process 4 (see FIG. 151) is executed instead of (see FIG. 45). The other processes are the same. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected about the same process and the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 147, the first special symbol jackpot determination process 4 (S386) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 147 is a flow chart showing the contents of the first special symbol jackpot determination process 4 (S386). The first special symbol jackpot determination process 4 (S 386) is a transition from the special variation state of the special symbol to the low probability state of the special symbol with respect to the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S 306) in the first embodiment described above It differs in the point which adds the processing which performs the drawing whether or not to make it fall). The other processes are the same, so the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In the first special symbol jackpot determination process 4 (S386), first, data of the execution area of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is acquired (S401). Next, it is determined whether the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203i is on (S481). When it is determined that the special figure 2 big hit flag 203i is on (S481: Yes), since the jackpot of the second special symbol is being executed, the present process is ended.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203i is off (S481: No), it is determined whether the probability variation flag 203g is on, that is, whether or not the probability variation is in progress (S482). If it is determined that the probability variation flag 203g is off, that is, it is determined that the probability variation is not in progress (S482: No), the processing proceeds to S404.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S482 that the probability change flag 203g is on, that is, if it is determined that the probability change is in progress (S482: Yes), the lottery result is acquired based on the falling lottery table 202cb. (S483). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the falling lottery counter C6 matches any of the determination values (random number values) defined in the falling lottery table 202cb (that is, it is a value corresponding to the falling) (S484) When it is determined that the value is not a value corresponding to the fall (S484: No), the process proceeds to S403.

  On the other hand, in the process of S 484, when it is determined that the value of the falling lottery counter C 6 matches one of the determination values (random number values) defined in the falling lottery table 202 cb (is a value corresponding to the falling) S484: Yes), by setting the probability change flag 203g to OFF, the transition from the probability change state of the special symbol to the low probability state of the special symbol (fall) is performed (S485). Then, the voice lamp control device 113 sets a fall command for notifying that the special symbol has changed from a certain variation state to a low probability state of the special symbol (S486), and the process proceeds to S404. Transition. Further, in the present embodiment, if it is determined that the data of the current execution area is a big hit in the process of S406 (S406: Yes), the process of S407 to S411 is performed, and then the state update restriction flag 203ca Is set to ON (S487), and this processing ends.

  By executing the special symbol variation start process 4 (S 386), the lottery of whether to shift (fall) to the low probability state of the special symbol and the lottery whether or not the jackpot of the special symbol are easily executed. be able to. In this embodiment, after the lottery (fall lottery) of whether or not to shift to the low probability state of the special symbol is executed first as the order of processing in the special symbol's definite variation state, the jackpot of the special symbol and Although it is comprised so that the lottery of whether to become will be performed, the process order is not restricted to this. It is good also as what performs a fall lottery after performing a lottery of a big hit first.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 148, the first special symbol variation stop process 4 (S287) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 148 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special symbol variation stop process 4 (S287). The first special symbol fluctuation stop process 4 (S 287) executes the processing of S 801 to S 805 with respect to the first special symbol fluctuation stop process (S 207) in the first embodiment described above, and then the state update restriction flag 203 ca It differs in the point which adds the process (S871) set to OFF. The other processes are the same, so the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 149, the game state updating process 4 (S388) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 149 is a flowchart showing the contents of the gaming state update process 4 (S388). The game state update process 4 (S388) is a point that adds the process (S651) to determine whether the state update restriction flag 203ca is on to the game state update process (S308) in the first embodiment described above. It is different. The other processes are the same, so the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In the gaming state update process 4 (S388), first, it is determined whether the state update restriction flag 203ca is on (S651). If it is determined that the state update restriction flag 203ca is on (S651: Yes), the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S651 that the state update restriction flag 203ca is not on (S651: No), the process proceeds to the process of S601.

  Then, after the processing of S601 to S604 is executed, it is determined whether or not the probability variation flag 203g is on (that is, whether or not the probability variation is in progress) in the processing of S605 (S605). If it is determined that the probability change flag 203g is on (S605: Yes), it is determined whether the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is on (S652). When it is determined that the special figure 1 big hit flag 203h is on (S652: Yes), a state command indicating a big hit latency state is set (S653), and this processing is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 big hit flag 203h is not on in the process of S652 (S652: No), a state command indicating a time-lapse missing probability state is set (S654), and this process ends. .

  Next, with reference to FIG. 150, the second special symbol jackpot determination process 4 (S975) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 150 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second special symbol jackpot determination process 4 (S975). The second special symbol jackpot determination process 4 (S975) is a transition from the special variation state to the low probability state of the special symbol (the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S905) in the first embodiment described above (S905) It differs in the point which adds the processing which performs the drawing whether or not to make it fall). The other processes are the same, so the detailed description thereof will be omitted. Further, with reference to FIG. 147, processing for changing the target of variation from the first special symbol to the second special symbol with respect to the first special symbol jackpot determination processing 4 (S386) described above is performed. The detailed description is omitted because it is only executed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 151, the second special symbol variation stop process 4 (S293) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 151 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second special symbol variation stop process 4 (S293). The second special symbol fluctuation stop process 4 (S293) executes the state update restriction flag 203ca after executing S1501 and S1503 to S1506 with respect to the first special symbol fluctuation stop process (S213) in the first embodiment described above. It differs in the point which adds the process (S1571) set to OFF. The other processes are the same, so the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<About control processing of voice lamp control device in the fourth embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 152 to 160. The control processing of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment is a command determination processing 4 in place of the command determination processing (see FIG. 60) with respect to the control processing of the voice lamp control device 113 in the first embodiment described above. (Refer to FIG. 152) is different in that the variable display setting process 4 (refer to FIG. 157) is executed instead of the variable display setting process (refer to FIG. 69), and the other processes are the same. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected about the same process and the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 152, the command determination process 4 (S4182) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 152 is a flowchart showing the contents of command determination process 4 (S4182). In contrast to the command determination process (S4112) in the first embodiment described above, the command determination process 4 (S4182) determines that a status command has been received from the main control device 110 in the process of S4203 (S4203: No) is different in that state command processing 4 (S4281) is executed instead of the state command processing (S4204). The other processes are the same as the command determination process (S4112) in the first embodiment, and thus detailed description will be omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 153, state command processing 4 (S4281) which is one of command determination processing 4 (S4182) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 153 is a flowchart showing the contents of state command processing 4 (S4281). The state command process 4 (S4281) determines whether the latency mode setting process (S4451) is added to the state command process (S4204) in the first embodiment described above, and whether or not a command related to the fall has been received. The difference is that processing is added. The other processes are the same as the state command process (S4204) in the first embodiment, and thus the detailed description will be omitted.

  In status command processing 4 (S4281), when it is determined that the command received this time is a status command indicating transition to the latent status (S4403: Yes), latency mode setting processing (S4451) is executed. Details of the latent probability mode setting process (S4451) will be described later with reference to FIG. Next, a value corresponding to the gaming state notified by the state command is stored in the state setting area 223j (S4405), and the process shifts to the processing of S4452. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4403 that the command received from the main control unit 110 this time is not a state command indicating transition to the latent state (S4403: No), the main control unit 110 executes a fall command. It is determined whether it has been received (S4452). If it is determined that a fall command has been received (S4452: Yes), a fall effect setting process is executed (S4453). Details of the falling effect setting process (S4453) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4452 that the fall command has not been received from the main control device 110 (S4452: No), the process of S4453 is skipped and the process of S4406 is executed. Next, after executing the processing of S4406 to S4411, the latent probability mode storage area 223cb, the small hitting frequency counter 223cc, the fall flag 223cd, and the short notice completion flag 223ce are cleared (S4454), and this processing is ended.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 154, the latency mode setting process (S4451) which is one process in the state command process 4 (S4281) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment will be described. . FIG. 154 is a flowchart showing the contents of the latent probability mode setting process (S4451).

  In the latent probability mode setting process (S4451), first, the type of the state command received from the main control device 110 this time is read (S5801). Next, based on the received state command and the value of the mode setting effect counter 223ca, the latent mode is determined using the latent mode selection table 222ca (see FIG. 146 (b)) (S5802). Next, in the process of S5802, a display latency mode command corresponding to the determined latency mode is set (S5803), and the determined latency mode is set in the latency mode storage area 223cb (S5804). Next, a latent notification announcing effect to notify the entry of the latent state is set (S5805), a value corresponding to the gaming state notified by the state command is stored in the state setting area 223j (S5806), and this processing is ended. Do.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 155, a falling effect setting process (S4453) which is one process in the state command process 4 (S4281) executed by the MPU 221 of the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 155 is a flowchart showing the contents of the falling effect setting process (S4453).

  In the fall effect setting process (S4453), first, it is determined whether the current gaming state is the latent state (S5901). If it is determined that the current gaming state is the latent state (S5901: Yes), a latent notification announcing effect notifying the end of the latent state is set (S5902), and the state command received from the main control device 110 The value corresponding to the gaming state notified by is stored in the state setting area 223j (S5903), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5901 that the current gaming state is not the latent state (S5901: No), then whether the remaining number of short times is 99 or more, that is, the remaining short number area 223k It is determined whether the value stored in the is 99 or more (S5904). If it is determined that the remaining short number of times is 99 or more (S 5904: Yes), a short notification effect is set to notify the entry of the short time state (S 5905), and the short time notified flag 223 ce is set on (S 5906). . On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S5904 that the number of remaining shorts is not 99 or more (S5904: No), the processes of S5905 and S5906 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S5907. Next, the fall flag 223 cd is set to ON (S 5907), a value corresponding to the gaming state notified by the state command received from the main control device 110 is stored in the state setting area 223 j (S 5908), and this processing is ended. Do.

  Next, small hit related processing 4 (S4574) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 156 is a flowchart showing the contents of the small hitting related process 4 (S4574). The small hitting related process 4 (S4574) is different from the small hitting related process (S4504) in the first embodiment described above in that a process for displaying remaining time information is added. The other processes are the same, so detailed description will be omitted.

  In small hit related processing 4 (S4574), first, when it is determined that a small hit start command has been received from the main control unit 110 (S4701: Yes), it is determined whether the current gaming state is in the latent state (S4751). If it is determined that the current gaming state is the latent state (S4751: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the small hitting number counter 223cc (S4752). Next, it is determined whether the value of the small hitting frequency counter 223cc is a multiple of 10 (S4753). If it is determined that the value of the small hitting frequency counter 223cc is a multiple of 10 (S4753: Yes), the information stored in the remaining fluctuation time information storage area 223o is read out (S4754). A display time information command indicating remaining time information is set (S4755), and then a display small hit start command is set (S4702), and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4751 that the latent state is not in progress (S4751: No), or if the value of the small hitting counter 223cc is not a multiple of 10 in the process of S4753 ( S4753: No), the process of S4702 is performed, and this process is complete | finished.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 157, the variable display setting process 4 (S4183) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 157 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variable display setting process 4 (S4183). The fluctuation display setting process 4 (S4183) is a fluctuation display setting process for special view 1 in place of the fluctuation display setting process for special view 1 (S5104) with respect to the fluctuation display setting process (S4113) in the first embodiment described above. 4 (S5171) is different from the special display 2 variable display setting processing (S5109) in that the special display 2 variable display setting processing 4 (S5175) is executed and the fall notification processing (S5173) is added. The other processes are the same, so detailed description will be omitted.

  In the variation display setting process 4 (S4183), first, it is determined whether the special view 1 variation start flag 223d is on (S5101). When it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223d is on (S5101: Yes), the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223d is set to be off (S5102). Next, it is determined whether the current gaming state is the latent state (S5103). If it is determined that the current gaming state is the latent state (S5103: Yes), the special display 1 variation display setting process 4 (S5171) is executed to set the first special symbol in the winning information storage area 223b. The corresponding data is shifted (S5106). The details of the special display 1 variation display setting process 4 (S5171) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5103 that the current gaming state is not the latent state (S5103: No), it is determined whether the falling flag 223cd is on (S5172). If it is determined that the fall flag 223 cd is on (S 5172: Yes), the fall notification process (S 5173) is executed. The details of the fall notification process (S5173) will be described later with reference to FIG. Next, based on the extracted variation pattern, a variation pattern command for display of the first special symbol is set (S5105), and the process proceeds to the above-described processing of S5106. Next, the process which changed the object into the special figure 2 is performed for the process performed with respect to the special figure 1 of S5171-S5173.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 158, the fall reporting process (S5173) which is one process in the variable display setting process 4 (S4183) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 159 is a flowchart showing the contents of the fall notification process (S5173).

  In the fall notification process (S5173), first, it is determined whether or not the time saving information flag 223ce is on (S8001). If it is determined that the time saving notification completion flag 223ce is on (S8001: Yes), a latent probability variation pattern command for display of the first special symbol is set based on the extracted variation pattern (S8009), and this processing is performed. Finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the time saving information end flag 223ce is off (S8001: No), the information of the remaining short number of times area 223k is read (S8002). Next, a fall notification mode is determined using the fall notification selection table 222cb based on the remaining number of short times read in the process of S8002 and the value of the fall notification effect counter 223cf (S8003). Next, in the process of S8003, it is determined whether the determined notification mode is a confirmation notification mode (S8004). When it is determined that the notification mode is the finalized notification mode (S8004: Yes), the short notice completion flag 223ce is set to OFF (S8005), and the fall flag 223cd is set to OFF (S8006). Next, a short-time notification effect is set to notify the entry of the short-time state (S8007), the process of S8009 described above is executed, and the present process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S8004 that the determined notification mode is not the final notification mode (S8004: No), the display fall notification command corresponding to the fall notification mode determined in the process of S8003 is set ( S8008) The process of S8009 described above is performed, and the process ends.

  Next, referring to FIG. 159, variation display setting processing 4 for special view 1, which is one process in variation display setting processing 4 (S4183) executed by MPU 221 of voice lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment. S5171) will be described. FIG. 159 is a flowchart showing the contents of variation display setting processing 4 for special view 1 (S5171). The special display 1 variation display setting process 4 (S5171) executes the processing of S5201 to S5205 with respect to the special display 1 variation display setting process (S5104) in the first embodiment described above, and then performs the processing of S5206. Instead, the readout of the latent mode stored in the latent mode storage area 223cb is executed (S5251), and the latent pattern variation pattern command for display of the first special symbol based on the extracted variation pattern and the latent mode Is different in that the process of setting (S5252) is executed. The other processes are the same, so detailed description will be omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 160, variation display setting processing 4 for special view 2, which is one process in variation display setting processing 4 (S4183) executed by MPU 221 of voice lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment. S5175) will be described. FIG. 160 is a flowchart showing the contents of variation display setting processing 4 for special view 2 (S5175). The variation display setting process 4 (S5175) for the special figure 2 executes the processes of S5301 to S5308 with respect to the variation display setting process for the special figure 2 (S5109) in the first embodiment described above, and then performs the process of S5309. Instead, the readout of the latent mode stored in the latent mode storage area 223cb is executed (S5351), and the latent pattern variation pattern command for display of the second special symbol based on the extracted variation pattern and the latent mode Is different in that the process of setting (S5352) is executed. The other processes are the same, so detailed description will be omitted.

  As described above, in the fourth embodiment, the configuration for performing the falling lottery in which the high probability state of the special symbol is shifted to the low probability state based on the lottery result is included in each of the above-described first embodiments. Because it is doing, in the state where the probability change state (high probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol) is set, the time saving state at any timing (low probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol) It can be difficult for the player to predict whether to shift to the next.

  In addition, if you win the falling lottery during the definite change state and shift to the time saving state, you will go to the latent state (high probability state of special symbol, low probability state of normal symbol) which is a game state advantageous to the player. Because it becomes difficult to shift (it is harder to shift than a definite change state), when a positive change state is set once, a latent state (high probability state of special symbol, low probability state of normal symbol) is set It is possible to play the game while making the pounding not to win the falling lottery before.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, since the same game method (left-handed game) is performed in the case where the probability change state is set and the case where the time reduction state is set, the present It can be made more difficult to grasp whether the gaming state is a definite change state or a short time state.

  Further, in the fourth embodiment, the player is notified that the probable change state has been set if the fall lottery is won immediately after the definite change state is set (for example, the first special symbol change). Since it is configured to execute the presentation mode (time-shortening notification effect) as if the time-shortening state is set from the beginning (after the big hit ends) without any problems, there is a possibility that the latent state may be set It is possible to suppress giving the player the discomfort that the probability change state higher than the game state ended in a short time.

  In addition, in the fourth embodiment, an effect (suggestive notification) indicating to the player the possibility of winning in the falling lottery during the definite change state (indication notification) and an effect for notifying the player that the falling lottery has been won (determination notification And can be executed, and the selection ratio of the indication notification and the confirmation notification is configured to be different based on the remaining number of times of fluctuation of the special symbol that can be set by continuing the definite variation state. Specifically, the configuration is configured such that the determination notification is less likely to be performed as the number of remaining fluctuations in the probability change state is larger. As a result, it is possible to recognize that the transition from the probability change state to the time saving state is made in the state where the remaining number of times of change is large, and it is possible to suppress the player's willingness to play from being reduced. In addition, the effect of performing the suggestion notification is configured to be executed even when the fall lottery is not won.

  Note that, in the present embodiment, the above-described suggestion notification or confirmation notification is configured to allow the player to determine whether the current gaming state is the definite change state or the time saving state. Other configurations may be used, for example, a variation pattern (variation time) of a special symbol that can only be selected during a probability change state, or a special symbol variation pattern (variation time) that can only be selected during a short time state. The game may be configured to cause the player to predict the current gaming state by the variation pattern of the special symbol provided and executed. In this case, the contents of the fluctuation pattern dedicated to the probability change state and the fluctuation pattern dedicated to the short time state do not differ greatly from each other. For example, it is preferable to provide the fluctuation time with an error of about 1 second. As a result, since the current gaming state can be notified to the player by the error of the fluctuation display time of a slight sense of incongruity, it is possible to pay attention to the fluctuation display of the special symbol to be executed strongly. Furthermore, in this case, it is preferable to use one second of the error, for example, in a period until the fluctuation of the third symbol is started on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. Thereby, the fluctuation start timing of the third symbol It is possible to inform the player of the current gaming state by a slight sense of incongruity that is slower or faster than usual, and the effect of presentation can be enhanced.

  In the fourth embodiment, during the period when the jackpot variation is being executed with one special symbol, the lottery result of the falling lottery accompanying the other special symbol variation (lottery) is invalidated. . As a result, for example, by establishing the first latency transition condition established based on the jackpot win of the special figure 1, the second special event is not won in the fall lottery during the period in which the latency state is set. It becomes possible to continue receiving the lottery of the symbol (special figure 2). Therefore, it is possible to set an advantageous (long-lasting) latent state that is more advantageous than the latent state set by the establishment of the other latent transition conditions.

  In the fourth embodiment, when a special symbol change (lottery) is executed, a fall lottery is also executed. That is, although the fall lottery is configured to be executed when the condition for executing the special symbol variation (lottery) is established, the invention is not limited thereto, for example, a specific entry (for example, the first entry) The ball has entered the ball opening 64, the second ball entrance 640, the general winning opening 63), that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, and that the conditions for executing normal symbol variation (lottery) have been established A special symbol or a normal symbol may stop display timing, or an elapsed timing of a symbol determination period may be used as an execution trigger of a falling lottery, or when an execution condition of a special symbol variation (lottery) is satisfied, the falling lottery It may be configured to determine whether or not to execute, and to execute a fall lottery based on the determination result. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand at what timing the falling lottery is executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from easily detecting the timing of winning the fall lottery.

  In the fourth embodiment, when the fall lottery is executed, the presence or absence of fall is determined with the same probability every time, but the present invention is not limited to this, and it is easy to fall in the fall lottery (winning It may be configured to provide an easy) high probability state and a low probability state in which it is difficult to fall down (it is difficult to win). In this case, for example, a high probability change state and a low probability change state are provided as a probability change state set after the big hit based on the jackpot type, and a low probability state of falling lottery is set in the high probability change state. In the state, a high probability state of falling lottery may be set. In addition, the state (high probability state, low probability state) of falling lottery may be variable based on the number of special symbol variations (lottery) executed after the definite variation state is set, for example, the probability variation The predetermined number of changes (for example, 10 times) after the state is set is configured so that the high probability state of the falling lottery that is easy to win the falling lottery is set, and then the low probability state of the falling lottery is set. It is good.

  By configuring in this manner, it is possible to set a period in which it is easy to fall from a definite change state and a period in which it is difficult to fall, so that it is possible to provide the player with game characteristics that are sharpened. Moreover, although it is comprised so that the process which makes the high probability state of a special symbol transition to a low probability state will be performed when it wins in a fall lottery in this embodiment, for example, A process of shifting the high probability state to the low probability state may be executed. Furthermore, in the fourth embodiment, when winning the fall lottery, the high probability state of the special symbol is shifted to the low probability state, but for example, the high probability state of the special symbol to the middle probability state (the jackpot probability is high It may be configured to shift to a state lower than the probability state and higher than the low probability state), and to the middle probability state may be configured so as not to shift unless winning in the fall lottery.

Fifth Embodiment
Next, the content of the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the fourth embodiment described above, it is configured to execute a falling lottery to shift the high probability state of the special symbol to the low probability state (for falling). By configuring in this manner, the period in which the high probability state of the special symbol continues can be made different according to the lottery result of the falling lottery, so the player has a high probability state of the special symbol for a long time It was possible to play the game while expecting to continue.

  However, in the configuration of the fourth embodiment described above, since the fall lottery is executed each time the special symbol lottery (variation) is executed, the player is allowed to execute the fall lottery with his own intention. There is a possibility that the player's willingness to play may be reduced due to the inability to make a selection. Therefore, in the fifth embodiment, a winning device (variable winning for small hitting) in which a ball can be won during a small hitting game which is executed when a drawing result of a special symbol becomes a predetermined drawing result (small hitting) Device) 2650 is provided, and when it is detected that the ball has passed in the area (flow path) where the ball won in the small hit variable winning device 2650 can pass, the high probability state of the special symbol to the low probability state And a fall gate 2650e3 (see FIG. 164) to be switched.

  By configuring in this manner, as in the above-described embodiments, a latent state (a high probability state of a special symbol, a low probability of an ordinary symbol) in which small hitting games are frequently performed based on the special figure 2 lottery In the state), it is possible to select whether the high probability state of the special symbol falls or not depending on whether the player shoots during the small hit game.

  Furthermore, in the fifth embodiment, the operation content (opening operation pattern) of the small hitting game to be executed is configured to be different depending on the type (small hitting type) in the case of winning in the small hitting, and the execution The percentage of balls that have won the small hit variable winning device 2650 during the small hit game is configured to be different depending on the opening operation pattern being performed.

  By configuring in this manner, the content of the small hitting game to be executed is predicted so as not to let the high probability state of the special symbol fall down, and to play the game aiming to obtain the benefits (winning balls) by the small hitting game. It is possible to make the player select the game while making the game.

  In addition, as in the fourth embodiment described above, in the latent state set during the period when one special symbol is executing the jackpot variation, the small symbol is won in the other special symbol variation (lottery) Even if the ball passes through the fall gate 2650e3, the high probability state of the special symbol is configured not to shift to the low probability state.

  As a result, in the state where the latent state is set, the high probability state of the special symbol does not fall (it is difficult to fall) the advantageous latent state and the high probability state of the special symbol falls more easily than the advantageous latent state An adverse latent status can be set.

<About the configuration of the game board in the fifth embodiment>
Next, the configuration of the game board 13 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the fifth embodiment, the configuration of the right area of the game board 13 is different from the configuration (see FIG. 2) of the game board 13 of the first embodiment described above, and instead of the first variable winning device 65 , And a small winning variable winning device 2650 is provided, and a small winning winning device (small hitting variable winning device 2650) to be opened during the small hitting game is provided on the upstream side of the second entrance 640. Is different.

  Here, the configuration of the game board 13 of the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. A small hit variable winning device 2650 is provided in the right area of the game board 13. This small hit variable winning device 2650 is a plurality of flow paths through which the winning balls flow down (a flow path for causing the high probability state of the special symbol to fall to the low probability state, the high probability state of the special symbol is the low probability state It has a flow path which does not fall down) and is configured such that winning balls flow down different flow paths according to the timing when the ball hits the small hitting variable winning device 2650.

  The internal structure of the small hitting variable winning device 2650 will be described with reference to FIGS. Next, the structure of the small hit variable winning device 2650 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 162 is an exploded perspective view of the small hitting variable winning device 2650.

  As shown in FIG. 162, the small hitting variable winning device 2650 is combined with an opening forming member 2650b disposed to protrude to the front side of the game board 13 and a back side of the opening forming member 2650b, and the small hitting The base member 2650c for screwing the variable prize winning device 2650 to the game board 13 and the back side of the base member 2650c, and the LED is illuminated to the front side of the pachinko machine 10 from the back side of the base member 2650c An LED substrate 2650 d on which a plurality of LEDs for arranging the light source are arranged, a back cover 2650 e holding the LED substrate 2650 d between the LED substrate 2650 d and the base member 2650 c, and a small winning prize opening (small hit) Opening and closing unit 2650f having an opening and closing door 2650f1 for opening and closing the 2650a It is projected on the flow path formed by the flow path cover body 2650g which is combined with the back side of the back cover body 2650e to form the flow path, the back cover body 2650e and the flow path cover body 2650g to switch the flow path of the gaming ball A switching member 2650h, a link member 2650i locked with the switching member 2650h, a back cover 2650j disposed on the back side of the flow path cover 2650g, and a back side of the back cover 2650j are fixed, A flow path solenoid 2650k for operating the link member 2650i, and a fixing cover 2650m for covering the flow path solenoid 2650k from the back side and fixing the flow path solenoid 2650k to the back cover 2650j with a screw.

  FIG. 163 is a cross-sectional view of the small hit variable winning device 2650. FIG. 163 (c) is a top view of the small hitting variable winning device 2650, and FIG. 163 (b) is an Lb-Lb cross section of the small hitting variable winning device 2650. As shown in FIG. 163 (b), the small hitting variable winning device 2650 is formed with a small hitting winning opening (small hitting winning opening) 2650a which is an opening through which game balls can enter. In the small hitting winning opening (small hitting winning opening) 2650a, a substantially rectangular opening is formed above the pachinko machine 10, and the gaming ball having passed through the opening is guided in the left direction of FIG. 163 (b). The bottom surface is formed to be inclined downward to the left. At the left end portion of the bottom surface, a detection port 2650a1 configured of a magnetic sensor (ball detection switch) 2650c1 for detecting winning of a game ball is disposed. The gaming ball having passed through the detection port 2650a1 is guided to the sorting flow path formed on the back side of the back cover 2650e shown in FIG. 163 (b).

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 163 (b), the opening of the small hitting winning opening (small hitting winning opening) 2650a can enter a ball by the opening / closing door 2650f1 configured with a shutter mechanism that can be retracted from the gaming board 13 side. Can be switched between an open state and a closed state in which the player can not enter the ball (hard to enter the ball). In the closed state, the opening is completely covered by the open / close door 2650f1, and a ball can roll on the top of the open / close door. Further, in the open state, the open / close door 2650f1 is configured to be retracted from within the small hitting winning opening (small hitting winning opening) 2650a by being retracted to the inside of the base member 2650c (inside the gaming board 13). ing.

  By configuring in this way, when the opening of the small hitting variable winning device 2650 is closed, the ball rolls on the upper surface of the opening / closing door 2650f1 of the small hitting variable winning device 2650, and the second entering ball It is configured to be guided to the side of the mouth 640, and during the right-handed game (during the latent state), the ball is allowed to enter the second ball entry port 640 while performing the right-handed game. It becomes possible, it is possible to reduce the time and effort of changing the game method to the left-handed game during the latent state where the small hitting game is executed frequently. Therefore, it is possible to play the game more easily.

  Also, in the open state, the plane orthogonal to the direction in which the game balls flow can be configured as the openings of the small hit variable winning device 2650, so more game balls can be efficiently used for the small hit winning openings Winning winning opening) 2650 a can be made to win. Therefore, the ball can be made to win for certain small hit variable winning device 2650 during the small hit game, it is possible to improve the efficiency of the game.

  FIG. 163 (a) is a cross-sectional view of La-La shown in FIG. 163 (b). As shown in FIG. 163 (a), the magnetic sensor 2650c1 having the detection port 2650a1 is fixed to the base member 2650c so that the detection port 2650a1 is inclined toward the distribution flow path side of the back cover 2650e.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 164, a configuration will be described in which the balls guided to the distribution flow channel of the back cover 2650e are distributed to a normal discharge flow channel 2650e1 and a special discharge flow channel 2650e2 described later.

  FIG. 164 (a) is a rear view of the back cover 2650e showing a state in which the switching member 2650h is operated so that the balls are distributed to the special drainage channel 2650e2. As shown in FIG. 164 (a), the switching member 2650h has a locking hole 2650h1 into which the projection of the link member 2650i is inserted and a guiding piece 2650h2 for guiding a ball, and the flow path cover 2650g It is pivotally supported rotatably from the rear side. Here, the passage cover body 2650g is provided with an opening portion through which the induction piece 2650h2 can be inserted, and the guide piece 2650h is rotated from the back side of the passage cover body 2650g into the flow passage. It is possible to arrange as possible.

  As shown in FIG. 164 (a), the sphere guided into the distribution channel from the detection port 2650a1 is guided to the upper surface of the induction piece 2650h2 disposed obliquely downward to the left and is guided to the special discharge channel 2650e2 . The special discharge flow channel 2650e2 flows down the fall route where the inflowing ball passes through the fall gate (fall switch) 2650e3, and the second normal discharge flow channel 2650e5 branched from the special discharge flow channel 2650e2, and the second normal gate 2) A normal switch is configured to have a second normal route passing through 2650e6, and the fall switch 2650e3 or the second normal switch 2650e6 that can detect the passage of the ball that has flowed into the special discharge flow path 2650e2 It is detected and then discharged out of the pachinko machine 10 as an out ball.

  Here, although details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment, when the fall switch 2650e3 described above detects a ball during a small hit game, that is, a special symbol by the ball passing the fall route The high probability state of is configured to transition (fall) to the low probability state. That is, the fall gate (fall switch) 2650e3 is configured as a trigger for shifting the special symbol from the high probability state to the low probability state. Further, the switching member 2650h is a flow passage of a ball that has won the small hit variable winning device 2650 during a small hit, a flow passage (special discharge flow passage 2650e2) that can pass through the fall gate (fall switch) 2650e3, or a fall It is for setting any flow path of the flow path (usually discharge flow path 2650e1) which can not pass (it is difficult) through the gate (falling switch) 2650e3, and by setting the flow path solenoid 2650k to ON. The flow paths are switched so that a ball that has won the small hit variable winning device 2650 flows down the special discharge flow path 2650 e 2 (see FIG. 164A).

  In the pachinko machine 10 used in the present embodiment, the channel solenoid 2650k is set to off while playing a game normally, and the ball winning in the small hitting variable winning device 2650 is the special discharge channel 2650e2 It is configured to flow down. Therefore, even if the small hit game is not being executed, if it is detected that the open / close door 2650f1 of the small hit variable winning device 2650 is opened and the ball is to be hit, the ball that is illegitimately hit falls It is configured to pass 2650e3.

  As described above, the channel solenoid 2650 k is set to the off state as a state where the pachinko machine 10 is maintained for a long period of time, and further, the channel configuration disadvantageous for the player (in the small winning variable winning device 2650 By setting the ball to a winning path through which the fall switch 2650e3 passes, the power consumption of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced, and a penalty can be imposed on the illegal game.

  Thus, since it is determined whether or not the high probability state of the special symbol is ended by the flow-down route in which the ball that has won the small hit variable winning device 2650 flows during the small hit game, the game is played even during the small hit game Can improve the interest of In addition, to pass through the entrance of the special discharge flow path 2650e2 (opening face closed by the guide piece 2650h2 of the switching member 2650h) from the small hitting prize opening (small hitting prize opening) 2650a of the variable hitting device 2650 for small hitting The required time is at least one second.

  Further, at the end of the normal discharge flow path 2650e1, a discharge confirmation switch (normal switch) 2650e4 constituted by a magnetic sensor capable of detecting passage of a ball is provided. This makes it possible to determine whether all the balls that have won a prize in the small hitting variable winning device 2650 have been discharged, by the total of the number of detected balls of the normal switch 2650e4, the second falling switch 2650e6, and the falling switch 2650e3. That is, the number of balls detected by the ball winning switch 2650c1 (the number of balls winning in the small winning variable winning device 2650) and various switches provided in the three discharge areas (normal switch 2650e4, second falling switch 2650e6, falling switch Whether or not the ball remains in the small hitting variable winning device 2650 is determined by comparing the number of balls detected by each of the 2650e3) (the number of balls discharged from the small hitting variable winning device 2650) can do.

  In addition, the end timing of the small hitting game (when the ending condition of the small hitting game (the small winning variable winning device 2650 has a predetermined number (10 pieces) winnings, or, the opening scenario of the small hitting variable winning device 2650 In the case where all the game balls entered in the small hitting variable winning device 2650 have not been discharged at the timing when the small hitting ending period to be executed after establishment of the small hitting ending period has been completed), the variable for small hitting It is good to constitute so as to determine the abnormality inside the winning device 2650 and to notify the outside of the abnormality or to stop the game so that the big hit game and the normal game are not started. As a result, it is possible to suppress the progress of the game in a state where an abnormality has occurred in a part of the pachinko machine 10 and the occurrence of a secondary abnormality.

  In this manner, the ball winning in the small hitting winning opening (small hitting winning opening) 2650a of the small hitting variable winning device 2650 is detected by the ball winning switch 2650c1, and based on that, the player wins the prize ball In the embodiment, 10 winning balls are paid out for a single ball winning, and the ball passes the falling switch 2650e3 using the ball after having been detected (passed through the ball winning switch 2650c1) By configuring whether or not it can be distributed, it is possible to determine whether or not the high probability state of the special symbol is ended during the small hitting game. Therefore, there is no need to provide a dedicated area for shifting the high probability state of the special symbol to the low probability state separately from the small hit variable winning device 2650, and the space of the game board 13 can be used effectively.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 165 and 166, the flow of the game in the fifth embodiment will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 165, the flow of the game when the jackpot of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is won with the probability change state set as the game state will be described. FIG. 165 is a timing chart showing the flow of the game when the special figure 1 jackpot is won during the probability change state.

  As shown in FIG. 165, in the fifth embodiment, when a jackpot is won in the drawing of the special view 1 in the state where the positive change state is set as in the above-described fourth embodiment, the latency is fixed during the jackpot fluctuation. It is configured that the state is set (see FIG. 165 (a)). And, by performing right-handed game to execute the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) during the period when the latent state is set (during special figure 1 big hit fluctuation), small hit game is It is configured such that a latent state game (RUSH game) which is frequently executed is executed.

  Furthermore, in the fifth embodiment, during the jackpot fluctuation period of one special symbol (for example, special figure 1) (after winning the jackpot in the lottery of the special symbol, the jackpot game is executed based on the lottery result The period up to is configured such that the jackpot will not be won in the lottery of the other special symbol (for example, the special figure 2). Thereby, during the jackpot variation period of one special symbol (for example, special figure 1), it wins a jackpot in the lottery of the other special symbol (for example, special figure 2), and is based on the jackpot winning of the other special symbol When the jackpot game is started, it can be suppressed that the period in which the latent state is set becomes short. That is, in the fifth embodiment, the latent state game (RUSH gaming) is surely performed during the latent state setting period (for example, the jackpot fluctuation time of the special view 1) set in advance when the latent state is set. ) Can be performed.

  In addition, in this embodiment, in the state where the high probability state of the special symbol is set, during the jackpot fluctuation period of one special symbol (for example, special figure 1) (after winning the jackpot in the lottery of the special symbol) , The period until the big hit game is executed based on the lottery result), even if the ball passes the fall switch 2650e3 in the small hit variable winning device 2650, the high probability state of the special symbol to the low probability state And it is configured to be a period that does not shift (fall ineffective period).

  Therefore, when the latent state is set during the special figure 1 fluctuation that has won the jackpot, the special figure 1 high probability state ends because the special figure 1 fluctuation period becomes the fall invalid period It is possible to execute the latent state game (RUSH game) without worrying about that. In addition, although a detailed description will be described later, in this embodiment, it is set that the latent state is set based on the jackpot winning of the special view 1 (the latent state is set based on the establishment of the first latent transition condition) Is configured to determine whether or not to execute an invincible effect (see FIG. 169) for informing the player).

  By being configured to execute this invincible effect (see FIG. 169), it is possible to make it easy for the player to grasp that the fall invalid period is set in the currently set latency state. It is possible to play the latent state game (RUSH game) with peace of mind. Further, in the fifth embodiment, even in the latent state where the fall ineffective period is set, the case where the invincible effect described above is not performed is generated. By configuring in this manner, in the latent game where the invincible effect (see FIG. 169) is not executed, the fall ineffective period may actually be set, so the ball can be made small during the small hit game. When the win is made to the variable winning prize device for winning 2650, it is possible to reduce the rate of falling.

  Then, when the variation time of the special figure 1 jackpot variation has elapsed (see FIG. 165 (b)), the high probability state of the special symbol shifts to the low probability state. If the small hit game is not executed at this timing, the big hit game is started. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 165, when the small hitting game is executed at the timing when the variation time of the special figure 1 jackpot variation has elapsed, the start of the big hitting game is postponed until the small hitting game ends. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to suppress providing a game that is difficult for the player to understand by the jackpot game being started during the execution of the small hit game.

  The same game state (normal state) as that during the jackpot game is set as the suspension period until the jackpot game is started after the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 jackpot variation shown in FIG. 165 has elapsed. In the fifth embodiment, when the small hitting game is executed at the timing when the variation time of the special figure 1 big hitting fluctuation has elapsed, the start of the big hitting game is interrupted until the small hitting game is ended (postponed ), But it should be controlled so that the small hit game and the big hit game are not executed at the same time, for example, the small hit game is executed at the timing when the variation time of the special figure 1 big hit change has passed If it is, it may be configured to forcibly end the small hitting game being executed.

  In addition, although a detailed description is also omitted in the drawing, in this embodiment as well as each embodiment described above, one of the special symbols (special figure 2) is won for a small hit, and a small hit game is executed. It is configured to interrupt the measurement of the variation time of the other special symbol (special figure 1) during the period in which it is present.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, since the latent state (advantage latent state) set based on the jackpot win of the special figure 1 is set as the fall ineffective period in this embodiment, a special symbol for the player It is possible to entertain the latent state game (RUSH game) without worrying that the high probability state of will end. Furthermore, the small hit game started during the latent state game (RUSH game) can be executed to the end.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 166, in the state where the probability change state is set as the game state, the flow of the game when the preset number of time saving times is digested will be described. FIG. 166 is a timing chart showing the flow of the game when all the time counts have been consumed while in the probability change state.

  As shown in FIG. 166, in the fifth embodiment, since the subtraction of the time reduction number is performed at the start of the variation of the special symbol, the value of the counter (time reduction counter 203f) for continuously setting the time reduction state is When it becomes 0, the latent state is set from the special figure 1 fluctuation to be executed (see FIG. 166 (a)). Incidentally, as shown in FIG. 166, the latent state set by digesting the predetermined number of times is configured so that the falling lottery during the latent state period is effectively determined. Therefore, in the small hit game executed during the latent state game (RUSH), the high probability state of the special symbol may be ended by the ball made to win the variable winning device (variable hit device 2650 for small hit) There will be a negative latency.

<About the contents of effects executed in the fifth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 167-FIG. 169, the characteristic presentation content displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 in this 5th Embodiment is demonstrated. In addition, about the aspect of the effect performed during the probability change state in order to suggest whether the latent state which is the game state advantageous to the player is set, the effect described in each embodiment described above As the embodiment is the same as the embodiment, the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 167 (a), the contents of the effect displayed when the player wins a small hit in the state where the latent state is set will be described. FIG. 167 (a) is a schematic view schematically showing an example of display contents in the case of winning a small hit in the fifth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 167 (a), the special figure 1 display area Dm1 displays a display mode indicating that the first special symbol (special figure 1) is variably displayed, and the special figure 2 display area Dm2 is displayed. The display aspect ("341") which shows that the 2nd special symbol (special figure 2) was won by small hitting is displayed. And in the guidance display area Dm3, "right-handed" for guiding the gaming method in the latent state is displayed.

  Then, the main display area Dm is displayed in a display mode for notifying that the character 811 has won a small hit, and the characters "GET" are displayed. Further, in the sub display area Ds, a comment of "You will start a small hit game" indicating that a small hit game will be started is displayed.

  When the small hit game is started, the display screen of FIG. 167 (b) is displayed. FIG. 167 (b) is a schematic view schematically showing an example of display contents in the small hitting game. According to the drawing shown in FIG. 167 (b), the special view 1 display area Dm1 displays the same display mode as FIG. 167 (a) described above, that is, the special view 1 is displayed in a variable manner. Although the mode is displayed, in fact, during the small hitting game, the subtraction of the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 is interrupted. In addition, unlike the display mode shown in FIG. 167 (b), the state in which the special figure 1 is appropriately fluctuating display (the state in which the subtraction of the fluctuation time is performed) and the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 are interrupted. The display mode to be displayed in the special view 1 display area Dm1 may be different depending on the state (the state in which the fluctuation time is not subtracted).

  Then, in the main display area Dm, a representation mode is displayed in which the character 811 runs from the left direction to the right direction, and the treasure box 812 appears from the traveling direction. In this embodiment, the effect of opening the treasure box 812 displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 during the small hitting game is executed, and the display mode of the effect pattern 813 appearing from the treasure box 812 The player is notified of the result of the hit game.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 168 (a) and FIG. 168 (b), the display content for showing the game result of the small hitting game in this 5th Embodiment is demonstrated. FIG. 168 (a) shows the display content when the fall switch 2650e3 detects a ball as a result of making the ball hit in the small hit variable winning device 2650 during the small hit game, and the high probability state of the special symbol is ended. FIG. 168 (b) is a schematic diagram showing an example, and FIG. 168 (b) shows the display content when the fall switch 2650e3 does not detect a ball as a result of making the ball fall in the small hit variable winning device 2650 during the small hit game. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example.

  In FIG. 168 (a), the effect pattern 813 indicating “cross mark” is displayed from the inside of the treasure box 812 and the high probability state of the special symbol of the character 811 is shifted to the low probability state during the small hitting game. It is displayed in the failure display mode shown. Then, in the sub-display area Ds, the latent state game (RUSH game) is ended, and a comment for guiding the game method to return to the left-handed game is displayed. In other words, the game state is latent by moving the high probability state of the special symbol to the low probability state during the latent state (high probability state of special symbol, low probability state of normal symbol) in which RUSH gaming is performed In order to shift from the state to the normal state (the low probability state of the special symbol, the low probability state of the normal symbol), a comment for causing the left hitting game to be executed is displayed in the sub display area Ds.

  On the other hand, in FIG. 168 (b), the effect pattern 813 indicating “V” is displayed from the treasure box 812 and a display mode for notifying the player that RUSH gaming is continuously performed (ie, left) The character 811 is displayed in the display mode in which the vehicle runs from the left to the right.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the effect corresponding to the game result during the small hit game performed during the latent state game (RUSH game) is executed by the third symbol display device 81, The player can easily grasp the progress of the latent state game (RUSH game) simply by grasping the contents of the effect executed by the third symbol display device 81.

  In the present embodiment, the ball that has won the small winning variable winning device 2650 during the small hitting game according to the type of the small hitting game executed during the latent game (RUSH game) is a probability change switch 2650e3 The different proportions (presence) of flowing down the special discharge flow path 2650e2 provided with.

  Therefore, for example, on the display screen at the time of the small hit winning shown in FIG. 167 (a), the player selects whether or not the small hit variable winning device 2650 is made to win a ball in the current small hit game. It is configured to display a comment (for example, “If fortunate to get a small hit, RUSH ends”, “If you're unsure, please stop launching”), and a character that is displayed when a small hit is won The display mode of 811 may be varied depending on whether or not the small hit type selected this time is a small hit that is easy to end the latent state game (RUSH game).

  By configuring in this manner, it is possible to allow the player to select whether or not to make the small hitting variable winning device 2650 win a ball during the small hitting game. Further, in the fifth embodiment in which the latent probability state is set only for a predetermined period (special figure 1 fluctuation time), the number of small hitting games that can be executed during the latent state is also limited. On the other hand, it is possible to play the game while thinking whether to acquire a benefit (prize ball) during a small hit game or to avoid the termination of the latent state game (RUSH game), a novel game Can provide sex.

  Furthermore, even if the small hitting game type being executed is notified to the player by the display mode of the treasure box 812 displayed on the small hitting game display screen shown by using FIG. 167 (b). Better, for example, it is better to configure the old battered treasure box 812 to be displayed as the small hit type being executed is a small hit type that is likely to end the latent state game (RUSH game), additionally, it is displayed It is good to constitute so that the comment according to the display mode of the treasure box 812 may be displayed. Furthermore, the display mode displayed during the small hitting game is more specific than the content suggesting the small hitting type (RUSH game continuation expectation) to the player this time when the small winning is won. It is good to constitute so as to notify the player of contents (high reliability).

  By configuring in this manner, the player who has selected whether or not the small hit variable winning device 2650 is to win a ball in the present small hit game based on the display screen displayed at the time of the small hit. Since it is possible to indicate a more specific RUSH continuation expectation, the player can be made to predict whether or not the selected game content is correct.

  In this case, particularly to the player who chooses not to win the ball in the small hit variable winning device 2650, it is emphasized that even if the ball is won, the RUSH game is difficult to finish. It is good to constitute so that it can be notified. Specifically, whether or not the ball wins the small winning variable winning device 2650 during a predetermined period after the small hitting type discrimination means for judging the type of the small hitting game this time and the small hitting game is started Means for determining (or means for determining that the right-hand game has been executed after winning a small hit), and the determination result by the small hit type determining means is a small hit type in which RUSH game is difficult to end In this case, if it is determined that the ball has not won the small hit variable winning device 2650 for a predetermined period after the small hit game is started, it is better for the current small hit game to fire the ball. It is preferable to provide a display means for displaying a hail comment (for example, "I should have fired a ball", "wimp") indicating that it has been acquired.

  As a result, since it is possible to clearly notify the player that he or she lost the ball due to not winning the ball in the small hit variable winning device 2650, it is possible to positively hit the player during the small hit game. The variable winning device 2650 can be urged to win a ball. That is, when the RUSH game is ended by winning the ball in the small hit variable winning device 2650, it is a game that the current selection is a failure with the game result even if the inscription by the effect is not performed. The player can be aware of it, but the player who chooses not to win the ball in the small hit variable winning device 2650 can not realize whether or not the result of this selection is advantageous. By displaying the evaluation of, it is possible to make it easy for the player to grasp whether or not the current selection is successful.

  Furthermore, a display mode for notifying a player who selects not to win a ball in the small hit variable winning device 2650, that the current small hit type is a small hit type in which RUSH gaming is easily ended. (For example, you may display "Stop firing and get a big right answer", "I guess that's good"), and even if this small hit type is a small hit type that RUSH gaming is easy to end, The small hit game of this time may display an insulting comment (for example, “I should have fired the ball,” “wimp”) indicating that it was better to have the ball fired.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 169, display contents of an effect for notifying that it is in the latent state (advantage latent state) in which the fall ineffective period is set will be described. FIG. 169 is a schematic view schematically showing an example of display contents displayed at the end of the small hitting in the advantageous latency confirmation state. As shown in FIG. 169, in the case where the currently set latency state is the advantageous latency state in which the fall ineffective period is set, the same latency mode setting processing as in the fourth embodiment described above (FIG. 154). When the invincible mode is set as the current latent probability mode in S4451 of (see), a presentation mode (“invincible mode”) indicating that the latent state currently set for the player is the advantageous latent probability state Is displayed.

  When entering the invincible mode, the display mode of the character 811 becomes a display mode dedicated to the invincible mode (a display mode in which an aura is crawled around). Then, “Lucky point × 0” is displayed with the number of balls that have passed through the fall gate 2650 e 3 in the invincible mode as the cumulative display mode 819. The cumulative display mode 819 corresponds to a command indicating the number of balls detected by the fall switch 2650e3 output from the main control unit 110 (a command indicating the number of times of falling if the fall invalid period is not set) The numbers are displayed. This makes it possible to easily notify the player of the situation in which the invincible mode has advantageously worked.

  In addition, although not shown in the drawing of FIG. 169, the small hitting number display 825 displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 in the fourth embodiment described above may be displayed, and the small hitting number display 825 And the cumulative display mode 819 may be displayed together. In addition, the non-game number counting means for measuring the number of small hitting games in which the player did not win the ball in the small hitting variable winning device 2650, and the number measured by the non-playing number measuring means are displayed on the display means It may be configured to

  By configuring in this manner, for example, the number of small hitting games in which the player played the game, and the player playing the game, for all the small hitting games executed during the latent state game (RUSH game) As it is possible to easily grasp the number of small hitting games that were not executed, it can be used as a reference for future RUSH games.

Regarding Electrical Configuration of Fifth Embodiment
Next, the electrical configuration of the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 170 to 173. FIG. First, the contents of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 170 is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 in the fifth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 170, the ROM 202 of the fifth embodiment is different from the ROM 202 of the first embodiment in that the small hit type selection table 202e is replaced by a small hit type selection 5 table 202da, and The difference is that the operation scenario storage area 202db is added. The other elements are the same, and the same elements will be denoted by the same reference numerals and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Here, the contents of the small hitting type selection 5 table 202da will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 171 is a schematic view schematically showing the contents defined in the small hitting type selection 5 table 202da. In the fifth embodiment, only the second special symbol (special figure 2) is configured to win a small hit, and when the small win is won in the drawing of the special figure 2, the small hit type selection 5 table The small hit type is selected with reference to 202da.

  In the small hit type selection 5 table 202da, the corresponding small hit type is defined for each value range of the small hit type counter C5, and as shown in FIG. 171 (a), the value of the small hit type counter C5 In the range of “0 to 14”, “small hitting A” is defined in association with it. The "small hit A" is a small hit type in which the first attacker (first variable winning device 65) is set in the open state for 1.5 seconds after the opening period 1.5 seconds has elapsed during the small hit game. Note that although an ending period of 0.5 seconds is set after the 1.5 second opening state has elapsed, this ending period is the same for all small hit types, so in FIG. 171 (a) I omit it.

  Further, “small hit B” is defined in association with the range of “15 to 59” as the value of the small hit type counter C5. This “small hit B” is set to the open state (first open setting) for 0.1 second after the first attacker (the first variable winning device 65) has been open for 0.5 seconds after the opening period has elapsed for 0.5 seconds during the small hit game. This is a small hit type in which an open state of 1.4 seconds is set (second open setting) after an interval period of 1 second. In addition, although the ending period of 0.5 second is set after the 2nd opening setting, since this ending period is the same in all the small hitting classifications, it omits in Drawing 171 (a).

  In the range of “60 to 79”, the value of the small hit type counter C5 is defined in association with “small hit C”. This "small hit C" is set in the open state (first open setting) for 0.5 seconds after the first attacker (the first variable winning device 65) has been opened for 0.1 seconds after the opening period 0.1 seconds has passed during the small hit game. This is a small hit type in which an open state of 0.1 second is set (second open setting) after an interval period of 1 second. In addition, although the ending period of 0.5 second is set after the 2nd opening setting, since this ending period is the same in all the small hitting classifications, it omits in Drawing 171 (a).

  In the range of “80 to 99”, the value of the small hit type counter C5 is defined in association with “small hit D”. This "small hit D" is set after the first attacker (first variable winning device 65) is opened for 0.5 seconds (first open setting) after the opening period 0.1 seconds has passed during the small hit game. After the interval period of 0.3 seconds, it is a small hitting type in which the open state of 1 second is set (second open setting). In addition, although the ending period of 0.5 second is set after the 2nd opening setting, since this ending period is the same in all the small hitting classifications, it omits in Drawing 171 (a).

  The operation scenario storage area 202db is a data area in which the operation scenario of the flow passage solenoid 2650h during small hitting game is stored in advance, and the flow passage solenoid 2650h performs the same operation regardless of the small hitting type to be executed. One operation scenario is set to run.

  Here, the contents of the operation scenario stored in the operation scenario storage area 202db will be described with reference to FIG. 171 (b). FIG. 171 (b) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the operation scenario defined in the operation scenario storage area 202db. As shown in FIG. 171 (b), in the operation scenario storage area 202db, an operation scenario set in accordance with the start timing of the small hitting game is defined.

  Specifically, the passage solenoid 2650h is set to be off until 1.4 seconds have elapsed from the small hitting start timing, and after 1.4 seconds from the small hitting start to the small hitting end It is specified that the flow path solenoid 2650h is set to ON for a period of time. The operation scenario in which the operation content of the flow path solenoid 2650h is defined is a loop counter in which a value is incremented by one each time the main processing of the main control unit 110 executed every 4 milliseconds is executed. It is managed by a counter (not shown).

  As described above, in the fifth embodiment, whether or not the ball that has won the small hit variable winning device 2650 flows down the special discharge flow path 2650 e 2, the type of small hit selected, and the flow path solenoid It is configured to be variably set according to the operation scenario of 2650 h. Furthermore, the ball that has flowed down the special discharge flow path 2650e2 is branched by the internal structure of the small hit variable winning device 2650 into a ball that passes the fall gate 2650e3 and a ball that does not pass (second normal switch 2650e6) It is composed of

  Specifically, in the small hitting game in which "small hitting A" is set as the small hitting type, the opening period (1.5 seconds) is a period in which the flow path solenoid 2650h is set to off (1 from the small hitting start Since it is set longer than .4 seconds, the ball does not pass through the falling route, and the small hit game which is most advantageous to the player whose opening period is set long is executed.

  In the small hit game in which "small hit B" to "small hit D" are set as the small hit type, the first open period is the timing at which the winning balls can pass the fall route. Furthermore, the "small hit C" and the "small hit D" have an opening period as short as 0.1 second (shorter than "small hit B") and. Since the first open period is as long as 0.5 seconds (because it is longer than "small hit B"), it becomes a small hit game in which the ball easily passes the falling route.

  In addition, the "small hit C" is the most disadvantageous to the player because the period during which the first attacker (first variable winning device) 65 is opened is shortest at 0.6 seconds in one opening operation. It becomes a hit game. In the fifth embodiment, it takes about 0.5 seconds for the ball fired by the right-handed game to win the small hit variable winning device 2650 and reach the distribution channel distributed by the channel solenoid 2650 h. It is configured as described above, and the symbol determination period of the special symbol at the time of winning a small hit is 0.5 seconds.

  Therefore, the small hit game is started by stopping the right-handed game immediately after the third symbol indicating that the lottery result of the special symbol is a small hit is stopped and displayed (see FIG. 167 (a)). At this point, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which a ball fired before stopping the right-handed game is won in the small hit variable winning device 2650.

  Next, the contents of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 172 is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 in the fifth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 172, the RAM 203 according to the fifth embodiment differs from the RAM 203 according to the fourth embodiment in that the small hit prize counter 203da, the fall passage counter 203db, and the passage flag 203dc are added. doing. The other elements are the same, and the same elements will be denoted by the same reference numerals and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The small hit prize counter 203da is a counter for measuring the number of balls that have won the small hit variable winning device 2650 during the small hit game, and in the small hit entrance passing process (see S171 in FIG. 174), the ball passes If it is determined that the timing at which the sensor (ball detection switch 2650c1) is on is during the small winning opening 2650a open period (S3302 in FIG. 174: Yes), the value is incremented by one and after addition The winning number command corresponding to the information indicating the value of is set (S3305 in FIG. 174). When the small hitting control process 5 (see S2271 in FIG. 176) determines that it is the end timing of the small hitting game (S2511 in FIG. 176: Yes), the value of the counter is cleared (FIG. 176). S2571).

  Although the detailed description will be described later, in the fifth embodiment, the sound lamp control device 113 continues the latent state based on the number-of-winnings command set corresponding to the value of the small hitting prize counter 203da. The small hit variable winning device 2650 is configured to accumulate the number of balls won during the set period. Thereby, it is possible to display the number of balls won in one latency state game (RUSH game) on the third symbol display device 81.

  Furthermore, in the fifth embodiment, as described above, it is possible to have the game characteristic of selecting whether or not the player makes the ball be awarded to the small hitting variable winning device 2650 during the small hitting game, Depending on the content selected by the player, the accumulated value of the number of balls won by the small hit variable winning device 2650 may greatly differ even if the number of times of the small hit is the same. Therefore, detailed game results can be provided by displaying the number of balls won on the small hit variable winning device 2650 instead of the number of times the small hit game has been executed.

  It should be noted that both the number of balls won in the small hit variable winning device 2650 described above and the number of times the small hit game has been executed are displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or won in one small hit game The average value of the number of balls may be displayed, or the number of winnings may be displayed as a winning history for each small hitting type of the small hitting game executed.

  The fall passage counter 203db is a counter for measuring the number of balls passing through the fall gate 2650e3 during a small hit game, and the fall switch 2650e3 detects the ball in the fall gate passage processing (see S172 in FIG. 175) In the case (S3402 in FIG. 175: Yes), the value is incremented by 1 (S3403 in FIG. 175), and the passage number command is set with the information corresponding to the value after the addition (S3404 in FIG. 175). When it is determined that it is the end timing of the small hitting game (S2511 in FIG. 176: Yes), the value of the counter is cleared (S2571 in FIG. 176).

  In the present embodiment, when the state update restriction flag 203ca is set to ON, that is, when an advantageous latency confirmation state is set, the number of balls having passed the fall route is always counted. . As a result, when the "invincible mode" is set as the latent mode, it passes through the route (falling route) where the high probability state of the special symbol shifts to the low probability state when it is not in the advantageous latency state. It is possible to inform the player of the number of balls that have been played (see cumulative display mode 819 in FIG. 169).

  The passage flag 203dc indicates that the fall switch 2650e3 detects a ball when it is effectively processed that the fall switch 2650e3 detects a ball (when the state update restriction flag 203ca is set to off). The flag is set to ON to indicate that the falling switch 2650e3 has detected a ball.

  When it is determined that the ball passes through the falling gate 2650e3 in the falling gate passing process (see S172 in FIG. 175) and the state update restriction flag 203ca is set to OFF (S3405 in FIG. 175). : No), set to on (see S3408 in FIG. 175). Then, when the passage flag 203dc is set to ON, the process of determining whether a new ball has passed the fall gate 2650e3 in the fall gate passage process (see S172 in FIG. 175) is skipped. Thereby, it is possible to suppress a situation in which processing for falling the high probability state of the special symbol during one small hitting game is executed plural times.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 173, the contents of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 173 is a schematic view schematically showing the contents defined in the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 173, the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 according to the fifth embodiment is different from the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 according to the fourth embodiment described above in terms of winning number counter 223da and passing number counter 223db. And are different in the point which added and, and other than that are the same. The same elements will be denoted by the same reference symbols and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The winning number counter 223da is a counter for measuring the number of balls that have won the small hitting variable winning device 2650 during the small hitting game, and in the ball passing related processing (see S4582 in FIG. 179), the main control unit 110 When it is determined that the winning number command has been received from the (S8101 in FIG. 179: Yes), the value is incremented by 1, and the display winning combination is made to display information corresponding to the value after the addition on the third symbol display device 81. Several commands are set (see S8106 in FIG. 179).

  When the gaming state shifts from the latent state to the normal state, the value of the counter is cleared. In other words, once the winning condition counter 223da is set to the latent state, the ball for which the variable winning device 2650 for small hitting is won in a plurality of small hitting games which are executed until the latent state ends It is configured so that the numbers can be accumulated and measured.

  The passage number counter 223 db is a counter for measuring the number of balls having passed through the fall gate 2650 e 3, and it is determined that the passage number command has been received from the main control device 110 in the ball passage related processing (see S4582 in FIG. 179). If it is determined that the current latent state is the advantageous latent state (S8107 in FIG. 179: Yes), the value is incremented by one (see S8110 in FIG. 179).

<About control processing of main controller in the fifth embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The control process of the main controller 110 in the fifth embodiment is a small hit control process 5 (see FIG. 55) in place of the small hit control process (see FIG. 55) with respect to the control process of the main controller 110 in the first embodiment described above. The point of executing FIG. 176) is different in small hit entrance passing processing (see FIG. 174) and falling gate passing processing (see FIG. 175). The other processes are the same. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected about the same process and the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

  First, the small hitting entrance passing process (S171) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 174 is a flowchart showing the contents of the small hitting entrance passing process (S171).

  In the small hitting entrance passing process (S171), first, it is determined whether or not the ball passing sensor is on (S3301). If it is determined that the ball passing sensor is not on (S3301: No), the present process is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined that the ball passing sensor is on (S3301: Yes), it is determined whether it is in the open period of the small winning opening (S3302). If it is determined that the small hit winning opening is open (S3302: Yes), a small hit entrance passing command is set (S3303). The small hit entrance passing command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is directed to the audio lamp control device 113 in the external output process of the main process executed by the MPU 201. Will be sent. One is added to the value of the small hit winning counter 203da (S3304). Next, in the process of S3304, a winning number command is set based on the value of the small hitting prize counter 203da after the addition (S3305), and the present process is ended. On the other hand, in the process of S3302, when it is determined that it is not in the open period of the small winning prize opening (S3302: No), an error command is set (S3306), and the flow path solenoid is set off (S3307) , End this process.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 175, the falling gate passing process (S172) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 175 is a flowchart showing the contents of the falling gate passage processing (S172).

  In the fall gate passage processing (S172), first, it is determined whether the passage flag 203dc is on (S3401). If it is determined that the passage flag 203dc is on (S3401: Yes), the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the passage flag 203dc is not on (S3401: No), it is determined whether the falling gate has a passage (S3402). If it is determined that there is no passage at the fall gate (S3402: No), the present process is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined that the fall gate is passing (S3402: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the fall pass counter 203db (S3403), and the number of passes is based on the value of the fall pass counter 203db after addition. The command is set (S3404). Next, it is determined whether the state update restriction flag 203ca is on (S3405). If it is determined that the state update restriction flag 203ca is on (S3405: Yes), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the state update restriction flag 203ca is not on (S3405: No), it is determined whether or not the falling gate passage valid period is in progress (S3406). If it is determined that it is in the fall gate passage effective period (S3406: Yes), the probability change flag 203g is set to OFF (S3407), and the passage flag 203dc is set to ON (S3408). Next, a fall command is set (S3409), and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3406 that the fall gate passage effective period is not in progress (S3406: No), an error command is set (S3410), and this process is ended.

  Next, small hitting control processing 5 (S2271) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 176 is a flowchart showing the contents of the small hitting control process 5 (S2271). The small hitting control process 5 (S2271), when compared with the small hitting control process (S2205) in the first embodiment described above, determines that it is the timing of the small hitting end in the process of S2511 (S2511: No The difference is that processing is added to clear the values of the small hit prize counter 203da and the fall passage counter 203db (S2571) and set the passage flag 203dc to OFF (S2572). The other processes are the same, so the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<About control processing of voice lamp control device in the fifth embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 177 to 179. The control process of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment is a state command process instead of the state command process (see FIG. 62) with respect to the control process of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment described above. 5 (see FIG. 177), instead of the hit related processing (see FIG. 63), performing the hit related processing 5 (see FIG. 178), different in ball passing related processing (refer to FIG. 179) Is executed. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected about the same process and the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

  First, state command processing 5 (S4291) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 177 is a flowchart showing the contents of state command processing 5 (S4291). The state command process 5 (S4291) executes the process of S4411 with respect to the state command process 4 (S4281) in the fourth embodiment described above, and then replaces the process of S4454 with the latency mode storage area 223cb, the small The difference is that processing (S4471) is added to clear the number-of-hits counter 223cc, the number-of-winnings counter 223da, the number-of-passes counter 223db, the fall flag 223cd, and the short notice completion flag 223ce. The other processes are the same as the state command process 4 (S4281) in the fourth embodiment, and thus the detailed description will be omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 178, the hit related process 5 (S4292) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 178 is a flowchart showing the contents of the hit related process 5 (S4292). The hit-related processing 5 (S4292) is different from the hit-related processing (S4216) in the fourth embodiment described above in that processing related to ball passage is added. The other processes are the same, so detailed description will be omitted.

  In hit-related processing 5 (S4292), when it is determined that the winning ball command has not been received from main controller 110 in the processing of S4505 (S4505: No), it is determined whether or not a ball passing related command has been received. (S4581). When it is determined that the ball passing related command has been received (S4581: Yes), the ball passing related process (S4582) is executed, and the present process is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined that the ball passage related command has not been received (S4581: No), this processing is ended as it is.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 179, the ball passing related process (S4582) which is one process in the hit related process 5 (S4292) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 179 is a flowchart showing the contents of the ball passing related process (S4582).

  In ball passing related processing (S4582), first, it is determined whether or not a winning number command has been received from the main control device 110 this time (S8101). If it is determined that the winning number command has been received (S8101: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the winning number counter 223da (S8102), and the readout of the latency mode stored in the latency mode storage area 223cb is performed. It executes (S8103). Next, it is determined whether the latent mode read in the process of S8103 is the invincible mode (S8104). If it is determined that the invincible mode is not set (S8104: No), a suggestion effect which suggests the end of the latent state is set (S8105), a display winning number command is set (S8106), and this processing is ended. . On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S8104 that the read latency mode is the invincible mode (S8104: Yes), the process of S8105 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S8106.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S8101 that the winning number command has not been received from the main control unit 110 (S8101: No), it is determined whether the passing number command has been received (S8107). If it is determined that the passage number command has been received (S8107: Yes), the value stored in the state setting area 223j is read (S8108). Next, in the process of S8108, it is determined whether or not the read value is a value indicating a time saving latency probability (S8109). If it is determined that the read value is not a value indicating a time-lapse missing latency probability (S8109: No), 1 is added to the value of the passage number counter 223db (S8110). On the other hand, in the process of S8109, when it is determined that the read value is not a value indicating the short time lapse latency (S8109: Yes), the process of S8110 is skipped to shift to the process of S8111.

  Next, readout of the latency mode stored in the latency mode storage area 223cb is executed (S8111). Next, it is determined whether the latent mode read in the process of S8111 is the invincible mode (S8112). When it is determined that the invincible mode is not set (S8112: No), a suggestion effect that suggests the end of the latent state is set (S8113), a display passage number command is set (S8114), and this processing ends. . On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S8112 that the read latency mode is the invincible mode (S8112: Yes), the process of S8113 is skipped, the process of S8114 is executed, and the present process is ended.

  As described above, in the fifth embodiment, the operation content (opening operation pattern) of the small hitting game to be executed is different according to the type (small hitting type) when winning in the small hitting. Depending on the opening operation pattern to be executed, the ratio in which the ball that has won the small hit variable winning device 2650 during the small hit game passes through the fall gate 2650e3 differs.

  By configuring in this manner, the content of the small hitting game to be executed is predicted so as not to let the high probability state of the special symbol fall down, and to play the game aiming to obtain the benefits (winning balls) by the small hitting game. It is possible to make the player select the game while making the game.

  In addition, as in the fourth embodiment described above, in the latent state set during the period when one special symbol is executing the jackpot variation, the small symbol is won in the other special symbol variation (lottery) Even if the ball passes through the fall gate 2650e3, the high probability state of the special symbol is configured not to shift to the low probability state.

  As a result, in the state where the latent state is set, the high probability state of the special symbol does not fall (it is difficult to fall) the advantageous latent state and the high probability state of the special symbol falls more easily than the advantageous latent state An adverse latent status can be set.

  In each of the above embodiments, the process of updating the value of the time reduction counter 203f (the process of subtracting the number of times reduced) is the timing to start the variation of the special symbol (for example, the first special symbol variation start process (see S208 in FIG. 33) Since the game is configured to be executed in the game machine, it is possible to simultaneously execute the first special symbol fluctuation (lottery drawing) and the second special symbol fluctuation (lottery drawing) by a predetermined number of times in the gaming machine , The time saving game (a game in which the high probability state of the normal symbol is set) is configured to execute, for example, when setting 100 to the value of the time saving counter 203 f (when setting 100 times of time saving) ), The period from the start of the 100th special symbol change to the start of the 101st special symbol change becomes the non-short time state (low probability state of the normal pattern) Was Tsu.

  During a period in which the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, it is a period in which the player can execute the lottery (variation) which is advantageous to the player even in the lottery (variation) of the normal symbol different from the special symbol. The period from the start of the 100th special symbol variation to the start of the 101st special symbol variation, that is, the period until the special symbol variation is executed for a number of times exceeding a predetermined number of times There is a problem that the player is given a sense of discomfort by setting the non-short time state in.

  However, if the process of updating the value of the time reduction counter 203f (the process of subtracting the number of time reductions) is updated at the timing when the variation display of the special symbol ends (the timing when the symbol determination period ends), In a gaming machine capable of simultaneously executing the first special symbol fluctuation (lottery) and the second special symbol fluctuation (lottery), the time saving state sets the special symbol variation (lottery) more than a predetermined number of time reductions. There is a problem that it will be executed in the state of being done.

  In order to solve the above-mentioned problem, the special symbol (for example, the first special symbol) corresponding to the special symbol lottery (100th time reduction) executed when the value of the short time counter 203f becomes 0 (1st time shortening end condition) is set, time shortening end condition (2nd time shortening end condition) is set for the other special symbol (for example, 2nd special symbol), and 2 time ending conditions set Among them, the time saving state may be ended based on the time shortening end condition established first.

  Specifically, when a predetermined period (for example, 100 hours) is set as the period in which the time saving state is set, the special symbol variation corresponding to the final change in the time saving state (for example, 100 times time) is ended. First time-shortening end condition that is satisfied, and the second time-shortening end condition that is satisfied when a condition for starting special symbol fluctuation (for example, the 101st special symbol fluctuation) that is newly executed after a predetermined period has started The 100th special symbol fluctuation period (or symbol finalization period) has ended by setting the first time shortening end condition first, ie, until the 101st special symbol fluctuation starts. In that case, the time saving state is ended at that time.

  On the other hand, if the second time shortening end condition is satisfied before the first time shortening end condition is established, that is, before the 100th special symbol variation period (or symbol determination period) is ended (special It is preferable that the time saving state be ended before the 101st special symbol lottery is executed when the 101st special symbol fluctuation start condition is satisfied.

  By configuring in this way, in the state where the time saving state is set as the gaming state, while preventing the special symbol variation (lottery draw) more than a predetermined number of times from being executed, the maximum period is set. It can be set as a time saving state. Therefore, it is possible to set a state advantageous to the player as long as possible as the normal symbol lottery (variation).

  In each of the above embodiments, the probability variation counter 203aa for measuring the period in which the high probability state of the special symbol is set, and the time reduction counter 203f for measuring the period in which the high probability state of the ordinary symbol is set In the above embodiments, instead of the process of interrupting the subtraction of the probability variation counter 203aa (the process of interrupting (skipping) the measurement), the time-shorting counter is used. A process for interrupting the subtraction of 203f may be applied, or the opposite process may be performed.

Sixth Embodiment
Next, with reference to FIGS. 180 to 194, a pachinko machine 10 according to a sixth embodiment will be described. In the second embodiment described above, the so-called simultaneous variation type pachinko machine 10 is capable of simultaneously executing the first special symbol lottery (variation) and the second special symbol lottery (variation). The game state is configured to be variable during a symbol determination period (period in which the first symbol is stopped and displayed) for displaying the lottery result of the special symbol. That is, when the jackpot is won by the first special symbol (special figure 1) lottery in the state where the definite variation state is set, the start timing (the first symbol showing the jackpot) of the symbol determination period in which the lottery result is displayed It is configured to shift the gaming state from the definite change state to the latent state at the timing when the stop display is performed).

  By configuring in this manner, the second special symbol in the latent state during the symbol determination period of the special view 1 (the period from when the first symbol showing the big hit is stopped and displayed until the big hit game is performed) (Special figure 2) It was possible to execute the game and to improve the interest of the game.

  Furthermore, in the second embodiment described above, the jackpot game is performed to suppress the occurrence of a situation where the player can not concentrate on the jackpot game because the jackpot game and the lottery game of the special symbol are simultaneously performed. While the game is being executed (from when the opening period of the jackpot game is set until the ending period of the jackpot game is ended), the special symbol fluctuation (lottery draw) is not executed. In the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above, since the drawing (variation) of the special symbol is not executed during the jackpot game, the player can be concentrated on the jackpot game. However, since the lottery (variation) of the special symbol is not performed in all the periods during the jackpot game, the period for executing the special symbol lottery is limited and the gaming efficiency (number of special symbol lottery executions per unit time) decreases. There was a problem that you

  On the other hand, in the sixth embodiment, even during the period from when the jackpot game is executed to the start of the round game (the opening period of the jackpot game), the special symbol variation on the side not winning the jackpot is Configured to be run. Specifically, for example, when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery and the jackpot game corresponding to the won jackpot is started (when the opening period of the jackpot game is set), during the opening period The second special symbol lottery (variation) is configured to be executed.

  That is, even during the jackpot game, the round game in which the ball can enter the ball by the jackpot game (the first variable winning device 65 or the second variable winning device 650 is in an open state in which the ball is easy to enter) In a period other than the game) (for example, an opening period, an interval period, an ending period), a special symbol lottery can be executed. By configuring in this manner, during the round game in the big hit game, the big hit game can be watched, and in the other periods, the special symbol variation can be watched, so that the player can be provided with efficient games.

  Furthermore, in the sixth embodiment, it is configured that there will be no jackpot winning in the special symbol lottery executed during the jackpot game. This makes it possible to suppress the player from being provided with an excessive jackpot game. In addition, in the present embodiment, even if the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out (other than the jackpot), it is configured to be able to win a small hit which can give the player a small amount of benefits (prize balls). ing. Therefore, the player can be made to gaze at the lottery result of the special symbol lottery executed during the jackpot game.

  In the sixth embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are configured to differ in the probability of winning in a small hit. Therefore, it is possible to differentiate the degree of advantage of the second special symbol lottery executed during the jackpot game of the first special symbol and the first special symbol lottery executed during the jackpot game of the second special symbol.

Regarding Electrical Configuration in Sixth Embodiment
Here, the electrical configuration in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 180 is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 in the sixth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 180, the ROM 202 of the sixth embodiment is different in that an open scenario table 202ea is added to the ROM 202 of the second embodiment described above, and the other elements are the same. The same elements will be denoted by the same reference symbols and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The open scenario table 202ea is a data table in which the game content in the big hit game or the small hit game (hereinafter referred to as a hit game) is stored, and the hit game scenario to be executed is according to the hit type It is memorized. Specifically, the variable winning combination in which the length of the period (opening period) from the start of the hit game to the start of the first round game, the length of the round game period, and the round game is opened. The type of the device, the number of times a round game is executed, the length of an inter-round game (interval period), and the length of an ending period set after all round games are finished are stored.

  In addition, the information (per game content) read in order to execute the per game corresponding to the winning jackpot or the small winning may be determined in advance, as in the present embodiment, using the open scenario table 202ea. Information may be stored, or the method used in each embodiment described above may be adopted.

  Next, contents of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 181 is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the main control unit 110 RAM 203 in the sixth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 181, the RAM 203 of the sixth embodiment differs from the RAM 203 of the second embodiment described above in the big hit status flag 203ea, the small hit status flag 203eb, the special view variable flag 203ec, and the big hit suspend flag 203ed. The difference is that the special figure fluctuation prohibition flag 203 ee is added.

  The jackpot state flag 203ea is for indicating the state in the jackpot game, the type of special symbol winning the jackpot, and the current jackpot gaming status (during the opening period, during the round game, during the interval period, the ending period It is a flag that is referred to when it is determined which of Here, the contents of the jackpot state flag 203ea will be described with reference to FIG. 182 (a). FIG. 182 (a) is a schematic view schematically showing the content of the jackpot state flag 203ea. As shown in FIG. 182 (a), the jackpot state flag 203ea is configured of a 1-byte storage area, and is configured to be able to specify the gaming state by the state of the lower 4 bits.

  Specifically, the special symbol that has won the jackpot this time is the first special symbol (special figure 1), and the lower 4 bits are "0001" during the opening period (OP) of the jackpot game (Fig. 182 (a). ), And the lower 4 bits are “0010” (shown as “02” in FIG. 182 (a)) during the round game (round), and during the round interval game Four bits are "0011" (denoted as "03" in FIG. 182 (a)), and during the ending period (ED), the lower four bits are "0100" (denoted as "04" in FIG. 182 (a)). Become.

  And, the special symbol that has won the jackpot this time is the second special symbol (special figure 2), and the lower 4 bits are "0101" (Fig. 182 (a) in the opening period (OP) of the jackpot game. And the lower 4 bits are “0110” (shown as “06” in FIG. 182 (a)) during the round game (round), and the lower 4 bits are during the round game (interval). "0111" (denoted as "07" in FIG. 182 (a)), and the lower 4 bits are "1000" (denoted as "08" in FIG. 182 (a)) during the ending period (ED).

  Also, when the jackpot game is not executed (when the jackpot flag 203o is set to off), the lower 4 bits are "0000" as an initial state. The jackpot state flag 203ea is configured to be updated according to the jackpot scenario to be updated in jackpot control processing 6 (see S2272 in FIG. 188) executed during the jackpot game, and the winning state The jackpot state flag 203ea is updated based on the information stored in the storage area 203j, that is, the type of the special symbol winning the jackpot and the content (jackpot gaming state) indicated by the jackpot scenario after the update.

  As described above, since the value of the jackpot status flag 203ea is updated based on the jackpot scenario, for example, means for storing the updated contents of the jackpot status flag 203ea, and the stored contents thereof A means for determining (past history) may be provided, and a configuration may be used to determine the presence or absence of abnormality for the jackpot game based on the judgment result of the past history of the jackpot state flag 203ea. Specifically, for example, from the values (values of "01" to "04" shown in FIG. 182 (a)) which can be set when the jackpot is won by the lottery of the special figure 1, the jackpot by the lottery of the special figure 2 If it is determined that the jackpot has been updated to the value that can be set when the player is won (values of "05" to "08" shown in FIG. 182 (a)), it is determined that the jackpot game is in an abnormal state, It is good to constitute so that abnormality notice may be performed. As a result, it can be accurately determined that the player has played an illegal game during the jackpot game.

  In the present embodiment, the value of the jackpot state flag 203ea is variable according to the content of execution of the jackpot control process 6 (see S2272 in FIG. 188), but the present jackpot gaming status can be determined. Any configuration may be used, and for example, means for determining whether or not the present is a big hit, and means for detecting the open state of the variable winning device (the first variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device 650); And the value of the jackpot state flag 203ea may be set based on the determination (detection) result of each means, or the content of the image displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is determined. Means for determining the current jackpot gaming situation based on the determination result of the means.

  When the value set in the jackpot state flag 203ea is updated, a state command for indicating that is set and output to the audio lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 determines the current jackpot gaming status by receiving a status command for indicating that the value set in the jackpot status flag 203ea has been updated, and various effects according to the jackpot gaming status. Is set.

  In the sixth embodiment, the special symbol type that has won the jackpot is also determined as the jackpot gaming situation, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the special symbol type may not be discriminated. By configuring in this way, it is possible to reduce the number of types for dividing the jackpot gaming situation.

  The small hitting state flag 203eb is for showing the state of playing in the small hitting game, and which of the current small hitting gaming situations (during the opening period, during the round game, during the interval period, during the ending period) is Is a flag that is referred to when determining Here, the contents of the small hitting state flag 203eb will be described with reference to FIG. 182 (b). FIG. 182 (b) is a schematic view schematically showing the content of the small hitting state flag 203eb. As shown in FIG. 182 (b), the small hitting state flag 203eb is configured by a storage area of 1 byte, and is configured to be able to specify the gaming state by the state of lower 2 bits.

  Specifically, the lower 2 bits are “01” (described as “01” in FIG. 182 (b)) during the opening period (OP) of the small hit game, and the lower 2 bits during the round game (round) Is “10” (denoted as “02” in FIG. 182 (b)), and the lower 2 bits are “11” (denoted as “03” in FIG. 182 (b)) during the ending period (ED). And, when the small hitting game is not executed (when the small hitting middle flag 203p is set to off), the lower 2 bits become “00” (denoted as “00” in FIG. 182 (b)) .

  In the present embodiment, since the round game is configured to be executed only once as a small hit game, a value for indicating an interval period is deleted from the above-described big hit state flag 203ea, and (1) Since it is configured not to win a small hit in the drawing of the special symbol, the value for determining the type of the special symbol that has won the small hit is also deleted. The small hitting status flag 203eb is configured to be set according to the updated contents of the small hitting scenario to be updated in the small hitting control processing 6 (see S2273 in FIG. 193), and the small hitting status flag When the value of 203eb is updated, a status command for indicating the value of the updated small hit status flag 203eb is set and output to the audio lamp control device 113.

  The voice lamp control device 113 grasps the current small hitting gaming situation by receiving a state command including information for indicating the value of the small hitting state flag 203eb, and the effect mode according to the current situation. Set

  The special figure changeable flag 203 ec is a flag for indicating whether the current situation is in a state where it is possible to newly execute the special symbol change, and is turned on when the new special symbol change can be executed. It is set.

  The jackpot suspension flag 203 ed is a flag for interrupting the update of the jackpot scenario during the jackpot game, and is set to ON when interrupting the update of the jackpot scenario. The jackpot suspension flag 203 ed is set, for example, to ON when the lottery result of the special symbol executed during the opening period of the jackpot game is a small hit and the small hit game is executed.

  In the sixth embodiment, a new special symbol lottery (variation) is configured to be executed in a partial state (a state where the round game is not executed) in the jackpot game, and the special symbol lottery is performed by the special symbol lottery When a small hit is won, a small hit game is executed. During this small hit game, the big hit suspension flag 203 ed is set to ON, and the big hit scenario is not updated.

  By configuring in this way, for example, even when a small jackpot is won during the opening period of the jackpot game, it is possible to reliably carry out the small hitting game without the jackpot round game being started. In addition, even when the jackpot is won in a predetermined period such as the jackpot opening period, a lot of jackpot games are executed because subtraction of the jackpot opening period (update of the jackpot scenario) is not performed. To play the game in an ambitious manner.

  In the sixth embodiment, when the small hit game is executed during the big hit game, the update of the big hit scenario is interrupted to surely execute the small hit game, but the present invention is limited thereto. For example, without stopping the update of the jackpot scenario, the jackpot game is forcibly terminated based on the timing when the jackpot round game is executed, or until the jackpot round game is ended, the jackpot game May be configured to be temporarily interrupted.

  Further, in the sixth embodiment, since the big hit interruption flag 203 ed is set to ON based on the timing when the small hit game is executed, the big hit scenario is updated during the variation time of the special symbol won for the small hit. Be done. As a result, the player can be made to play the game while expecting that the fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time as short as possible is set is set, in addition to winning in the small hit during the big hit game, On the other hand, the contents of the special symbol lottery (variation) can be watched closely.

  In this case, regardless of the lottery result of the special symbol variation which is executed this time at the timing when the variation of the special symbol is started, it is preferable to execute the variation time suggesting notification suggesting the set variation time. As a result, since it can be suggested to the player whether or not a short fluctuation time has been set, the rendering effect can be enhanced. In addition, even if the lottery result of the special symbol is out, by setting the short fluctuation time, it is possible to execute the next special symbol lottery immediately. That is, the fluctuation time suggestion notification is a notification indicating whether the lottery result is advantageous to the player without indicating whether the lottery result of the special symbol is a win or a win (outcome determination result).

  In addition to the configuration of the sixth embodiment, for example, the big hit interruption flag 203 ed may be set on based on the timing when the special symbol variation winning for the small hit is executed. As a result, it is possible to solve the problem that the jackpot round game is executed while the special symbol variation winning for the small jackpot is being executed, and the player is provided with a difficult-to-understand game.

  Moreover, in order to solve the problem mentioned above, a means for determining the remaining period of the opening period of the jackpot game and a means for determining the variation time of the special symbol are provided, and the special symbol lottery (variation) this time is the opening period. If it is determined that the process is ended, the effect mode is set based on the lottery result of the special symbol lottery (the result of determination of acceptance or rejection), and it is determined that the current special symbol lottery (variation) is not completed within the opening period. The effect mode corresponding to the case where the lottery result of the special symbol lottery (the result of the judgment of acceptance or rejection) is out may be set. By configuring in this manner, even if the lottery result of the special symbol variation forcibly ended by the execution of the round game of the big hit is a small hit, the special symbol variation is not given to the player. Can be stopped.

<Control Process of Main Control Device in Sixth Embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110 according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The control processing of the main controller 110 in the sixth embodiment is a special symbol fluctuation stop instead of the special symbol fluctuation stop processing 2 (see FIG. 97) with respect to the control processing of the main controller 110 in the second embodiment described above. Instead of processing 6 (see FIG. 183) and first special symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 33), in first special symbol variation start processing 6 (see FIG. 185) and second special symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 39) Instead of the second special symbol variation start process 6 (see FIG. 186), instead of the jackpot control process (see FIG. 53), the jackpot control process 6 (see FIG. 188), instead of the jackpot end process (see FIG. 54) Process 6 (see FIG. 192), point to execute small hit control process 6 (see FIG. 193) instead of small hit control process (see FIG. 55), variation condition determination process (see FIG. 184), round execution process (see FIG. 89 reference), with the difference that adds a small prize end processing (see FIG. 194). The other processes are the same. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected about the same process and the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 183, special symbol variation processing 6 (S181) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 in the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 183 is a flowchart showing the contents of special symbol variation processing 6 (S181). The special symbol variation process 6 (S181) adds a variation condition determination process (S291) to the special symbol variation process 2 (see FIG. 97) of the second embodiment described above, and the first special symbol variation start process First special symbol variation start process 6 (see FIG. 185) in place of (see FIG. 33), second special symbol variation start process 6 in place of second special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 39) (see FIG. 186) It differs in that it carries out. The other processes are the same, so the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In special symbol variation processing 6 (S181), first, variation condition determination processing (S291) is executed. Details of the fluctuation condition determination process (S291) will be described later with reference to FIG. Next, it is determined whether the special-image change possible flag 203 ec is on (S 292). If it is determined that the special-image change possible flag 203 ec is not on (S 292: No), the process proceeds to S 202. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure changeable flag 203 ec is on (S 292: Yes), the process proceeds to S 204.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 184, the variation condition determination process (S291) which is one process in the special symbol variation process 6 (S181) executed by the MPU 201 of the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 184 is a flowchart showing the contents of the fluctuation condition determination process (S291).

  In the fluctuation condition determination process (S291), first, it is determined whether the special figure fluctuation prohibition flag 203ee is on (S3501). When it is determined that the special figure fluctuation prohibition flag 203ee is on (S3501: Yes), the special figure fluctuation possible flag 203ec is set to be off (S3506), and the process shifts to the process of S3507. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure fluctuation prohibition flag 203ee is not on (S3501: No), it is determined whether or not the large hitting medium flag 203o is on (S3502). When it is determined that the big hit medium flag 203o is on (S3502: Yes), the information set in the big hit state flag 203ea is read (S3503). Next, in the process of S3503, it is determined whether the information of the read big hit state flag 203ea is "01" or "05". That is, it is determined whether it is the opening period of the jackpot (S3504). If it is determined that the read information is "01" or "05" (S3504: Yes), the special-image variable flag 203ec is set to ON (S3505), and the process proceeds to S3507. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3504 that the read information is not "01" or "05" (S3504: No), the special view variable flag 203ec is set to off (S3506), and the process of S3507 Migrate to

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the large hit middle flag 203o is not on (S3502: No), it is determined whether the small hit middle flag 203p is on (S3507). If it is determined that the small hit middle flag 203p is off (S3507: No), the special figure variation flag 203ec is set on (S3512), and the present process is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S3507 that the small hit medium flag 203p is on (S3507: Yes), the information set in the small hit state flag 203eb is read (S3508). Next, it is determined whether the information on the small hitting state flag 203eb read out in the process of S3508 is "01" (S3509). When it is determined that the information is "01" (S3509: Yes), the special figure changeable flag 203ec is set to ON (S3510), and this processing is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined that the read information is not "01" (S3509: No), the special figure fluctuation enable flag 203ec is set to off (S3511), and the present process is ended.

  Next, referring to FIG. 185, first special symbol variation start processing 6 (S293) which is one of the special symbol variation processing 6 (S181) executed by the MPU 201 of the sixth embodiment in the sixth embodiment. Will be explained. FIG. 185 is a flow chart showing the contents of the first special symbol variation start process 6 (S293). The first special symbol variation start process 6 (S293) is different from the first special symbol variation start process (S208 in FIG. 33) in the second embodiment in that the information of the big hit state flag 203ea is read out. . The other processes are the same, so the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In the first special symbol variation start process 6 (S293), first, the information set in the big hit state flag 203ea is read out (S391). Next, it is determined whether the information set in the jackpot state flag 203ea is "00" or "05". That is, it is determined whether it is the opening period of the jackpot of the second special symbol or it is out of the execution period of the jackpot (S392). If it is determined that the information set in the jackpot state flag 203ea is "00" or "05" (S392: Yes), the process proceeds to S301. On the other hand, when it is determined that the information set in the jackpot state flag 203ea is neither "00" nor "05" (S392: No), this processing is ended.

  Next, referring to FIG. 186, second special symbol variation start processing 6 (S294) which is one of the special symbol variation processing 6 (S181) executed by the MPU 201 of the sixth embodiment in the sixth embodiment. Will be explained. FIG. 186 is a flow chart showing the contents of the second special symbol variation start process 6 (S294). The second special symbol variation start process 6 (S294) reads out the information of the big hit state flag 203ea for the second special symbol variation start process (S210 in FIG. 39) in the second embodiment, and the big hit of the first special symbol A process of determining whether it is an opening period or a round period is added. The other processes are the same, so the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In the second special symbol variation start process 6 (S294), first, the information set in the jackpot state flag 203ea is read out (S971). Next, it is determined whether the information set in the jackpot state flag 203ea is "00" or "01". That is, it is determined whether it is the opening period of the jackpot of the first special symbol or it is out of the execution period of the jackpot (S972). If it is determined that the information set in the jackpot state flag 203ea is "00" or "01" (S972: Yes), the process proceeds to S901. On the other hand, when it is determined that the information set in the jackpot state flag 203ea is not "00" or "01" (S972: No), the processing of S902 is executed, and the present processing is ended.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 187, the motorized product opening / closing process 6 (S2271) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110 in the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 187 is a flow chart showing the contents of the motorized product opening / closing process 6 (S2271).

  In the motorized combination opening / closing process 6 (S2271), first, it is determined whether or not there is an open setting (S3601). If it is determined that there is an open setting (S3601: Yes), the solenoid of the corresponding attacker is set to ON (S3602), the jackpot status flag 203ea is set to the corresponding value (S3606), and this processing ends Do. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S3601 that there is no setting for opening (S3601: No), it is determined whether or not there is setting for closing (S3603). If it is determined that there is a setting for closing (S3603: Yes), the solenoid of the corresponding attacker is set to OFF (S3604), the processing of S3606 is executed, and this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S3603 that the setting of closing is not made (S3603: No), it is determined whether it is the end timing of the closing scenario (S3605). If it is determined that it is the end timing of the closing scenario (S3605: Yes), the processing of S3606 is executed, and this processing is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S3605 that it is not the end timing of the closing scenario (S3605: No), this process is ended as it is.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 188, the jackpot control process 6 (S2272) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 188 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot control process 6 (S2272).

  In the jackpot control process 6 (S2272), first, when it is determined that the jackpot scenario is set in the process of S2301 (S2301: Yes), it is determined whether or not the jackpot suspension flag 203ed is on (S2351) . When it is determined that the big hit interruption flag 203ed is on (S2351: Yes), the present processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the big hit interruption flag 203 ed is not on (S 2351: No), the big hit scenario is updated (S 2302).

  Next, it is determined whether it is a jackpot start timing (S2302). If it is determined that it is the start timing of the jackpot (S2303: Yes), an opening command is set (S2304), a value corresponding to the jackpot status flag 203ea is set (S2352), and this processing is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2303 that it is not the timing of the big hit start (S2303: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S2305). If it is determined that it is the start timing of a new round (S2305: Yes), a round execution process (S2353) is executed, and this process ends.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 189, the round execution process (S2353) which is one process in the jackpot control process 6 (S2272) executed by the MPU 201 of the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 189 is a flowchart showing the contents of the round execution process (S2353).

  In the round execution process (S2353), first, it is determined whether or not the current time is the start timing of the first round (S3701). When it is determined that it is the start timing of the first round (S3701: Yes), the jackpot suspension process is executed (S3702), and the process proceeds to S3703. Details of the jackpot interruption process (S3702) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, when it is determined that the start timing of the first round is not determined in the process of S3701 (S3701: No), a value corresponding to the big hit state flag 203ea is set (S3703), and a process corresponding to the big hit scenario is set. (S3704), and the process ends.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 190, the jackpot interruption processing (S3702) which is one of the round execution processing (S2353) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110 in the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 190 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot suspension process (S3702).

  In the big hit interruption process (S3702), first, it is judged whether or not the small hit middle flag 203p is on (S3801). If it is determined that the small hit middle flag 203p is on (S3801: Yes), the big hit suspend flag 203ed is set to ON (S3802), a big hit suspend command is set (S3803), and the process proceeds to S3805. . On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S3801 that the small hit medium flag 203p is not on (S3801: No), an opening command indicating the start of the small hit is set (S3804), and the process proceeds to S3805.

  Next, it is determined whether the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203m or the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203n is larger than 0, that is, whether or not the special symbol is changing (S3805). If it is determined that the special symbol is changing (S3805: Yes), the corresponding special symbol is removed and the symbol is stopped and displayed (S3806), and the special figure fluctuation prohibition flag 203ee is set to ON (S3807). End the process. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S3805 that the special symbol is not changing (S3805: No), the present process ends.

  Referring back to FIG. 188, the description will be continued. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S2305 that it is not the start timing of a new round (S2305: No), it is determined whether it is the end timing of the round (S2307). When it is determined that it is the end timing of the round (S2307: Yes), the closing of the specific winning a prize opening is set (S2308), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2307 that it is not the end timing of the round (S2307: No), it is determined whether it is the timing of the end of operation of the special power (S2354). If it is determined that it is the timing to end the operation of the special power (S2354: Yes), the ending execution process (S2355) is executed, and this process is ended.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 191, the ending execution process (S2355) which is one process in the jackpot control process 6 (S2272) executed by the MPU 201 of the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 191 is a flowchart showing the contents of the ending execution process (S2355).

  In the ending execution process (S2355), first, a value corresponding to the big hit state flag 203ea is set (S3901), an ending command is set (S3902), and this process is ended.

  Referring back to FIG. 188, the description will be continued. In the process of S2354, when it is determined that it is not the operation end timing of the special power (S2354: No), it is determined whether it is the operation end timing of the combination operating device (S2356). When it is determined that it is the operation end timing of the combination operation device (S2356: Yes), the jackpot end processing 6 (S2357) is executed, and the present processing is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S2356 that it is not the operation end timing of the combination operating device (S2356: No), the present process is ended as it is.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 192, the jackpot end process 6 (S2357) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110 in the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 192 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot end process 6 (S2357). In the jackpot end process 6 (S2357), after setting the status command (S2406) to the jackpot end process (S2312 in FIG. 54) of the second embodiment described above, the jackpot state flag 203ea is set to "00". The difference is that processing (S2451) is added. The other processes are the same, so the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Next, small hitting control processing 6 (S2272) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 193 is a flowchart showing the contents of the small hitting control process 6 (S2272). In the small hitting control process 6 (S2272), a process of setting a value corresponding to the small hitting state flag 203eb is added to the small hitting control process (S2205 in FIG. 55) of the second embodiment described above, The difference is that the small hitting end process (S2584) is executed instead of the process of S2512. The other processes are the same, so the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In small hitting control processing 6 (S2272), when it is decided that it is timing of the small hitting start in the processing of S2503 (S2503: Yes), the opening command is set (S2504), it corresponds to the small hitting status flag 203eb A value to be set is set (S 2581), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2503 that it is not the small hitting start timing (S2503: No), it is determined whether it is the small hitting round start timing (S2505). If it is determined that it is the start timing of the small hit round (S2505: Yes), the small hit operation setting process (S2506) is executed, and a value corresponding to the small hit status flag 203eb is set (S2582). Finish.

  Then, in the present embodiment, if it is determined in the processing of S2509 that it is the ending timing (S2509: Yes), the ending command is set (S2510) and the value corresponding to the small hitting status flag 203eb is set ( S 2583), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2509 that it is not the ending timing (S2509: No), it is determined whether it is the small hitting end timing (S2511). When it is determined that it is the end timing of the small hit (S2511: Yes), the small end processing (S2584) is executed, and the present process is ended.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 194, the small hitting end process (S2584) which is one process in the small hitting control process 6 (S2272) executed by the MPU 201 of the sixth embodiment in the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 194 is a flowchart showing the contents of the small hitting end process (S2584).

  In the small hitting end process (S2584), first, it is judged whether the big hit interruption flag 203ed is on (S2591). When it is determined that the big hit interruption flag 203ed is on (S2591: Yes), the big hit interruption flag 203ed is set to off (S2592), and the special figure fluctuation prohibition flag 203ee is set to on (S2593). Next, the update value of the jackpot scenario is decremented by 1 (S2594), the small hit middle flag 203p is set to OFF (S2595), and the process is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S2591 that the big hit interruption flag 203ed is not on (S2591: No), the processes of S2592 to S2594 are skipped, the process of S2595 is executed, and the present process is ended.

  As described above, in the sixth embodiment, as described above, the special symbol fluctuation on the side not winning the jackpot during the period from when the jackpot game is executed until the round game is started (opening period of the jackpot game) Is configured to be executed. Specifically, for example, when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery and the jackpot game corresponding to the won jackpot is started (when the opening period of the jackpot game is set), during the opening period The second special symbol lottery (variation) is configured to be executed.

  That is, even during the jackpot game, the round game in which the ball can enter the ball by the jackpot game (the first variable winning device 65 or the second variable winning device 650 is in an open state in which the ball is easy to enter) In a period other than the game) (for example, an opening period, an interval period, an ending period), a special symbol lottery can be executed. By configuring in this manner, during the round game in the big hit game, the big hit game can be watched, and in the other periods, the special symbol variation can be watched, so that the player can be provided with efficient games.

  Furthermore, in the sixth embodiment, it is configured that there will be no jackpot winning in the special symbol lottery executed during the jackpot game. This makes it possible to suppress the player from being provided with an excessive jackpot game. In addition, in the present embodiment, even if the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out (other than the jackpot), it is configured to be able to win a small hit which can give the player a small amount of benefits (prize balls). ing. Therefore, the player can be made to gaze at the lottery result of the special symbol lottery executed during the jackpot game.

  In the sixth embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are configured to differ in the probability of winning in a small hit. Therefore, it is possible to differentiate the degree of advantage of the second special symbol lottery executed during the jackpot game of the first special symbol and the first special symbol lottery executed during the jackpot game of the second special symbol.

Seventh Embodiment
Next, a seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In each embodiment mentioned above, it comprised so that a jackpot game might be performed, only when the lottery result of a special symbol is a jackpot. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the specific area 650V is provided in the second variable winning apparatus (V prize apparatus) 650 opened during the small hitting game, and the ball passes the specific area 650V during the small hitting game. The jackpot (so-called, per type 2) is configured to be played.

  In addition, although the details will be described later, the first flow in which the ball is less likely to pass through the specific area 650V as a path for causing the ball to flow down toward the second variable prize device (V prize device) 650 opened during small hitting game. A passage ta (see FIG. 196) and a second flow passage tb (see FIG. 196) through which the sphere easily passes through the specific region 650V are provided. As a result, the player pays attention to which flow path the ball flows down during the small hitting game. Therefore, since the player can be interested in the movement of the ball flowing down on the game board 13, the interest of the game can be improved.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the balls are distributed to the above-described first flow path ta or the second flow path tb by the opening and closing operation of the motorized part 3640a, so the operation of the motorized part 3640a The player can also be interested in Furthermore, when the ball flows down the second flow passage tb where it is easy to pass the specific area 650V, the ease of winning the ball to the V winning device 650 is configured to be different according to the variation time of the special symbol. ing.

  Further, the variation time of the special symbol to be set is configured to be different according to the set gaming state and the winning small hit type. By configuring in this way, the game state (advantagement time short) that makes it easy to pass the ball to the specific area 650V when winning in the small hit corresponding to the big hit that the time saving state is given after the big hit game end, the big hit end When the player wins a small hit corresponding to the jackpot to which the short time state is given later, it is possible to set a game state (a disadvantage time is short) that facilitates passing the ball in the specific area 650V.

  And, in the present embodiment, by using the above-mentioned advantageous time short and disadvantageous time short configuration, when a jackpot is won once (first hit), a total of three jackpots including at least the first hit are executed. It is configured that the gaming state advantageous to the player continues. As described above, by making it possible to set the gaming state in which the plurality of jackpot games are guaranteed to be executed, it is possible to make the player play the game with peace of mind.

  In addition, the detailed configuration will be described later with reference to FIG. 196 to FIG. 198, but in the seventh embodiment, it is configured to win a small hit in the second special symbol lottery, and the second special symbol The electric combination 3640a is configured to operate so that the ball can easily enter the second entrance 3640, which is a trigger for executing the lottery. Then, based on the ball flowing down on the electric symbol 3640a entering the second entrance 3640, the electric symbol 3640a shifts to the closed state, and at that time, it flows down on the electric symbol 3640a. According to the position (upstream side, downstream side) where the ball had flowed down, it is configured to be distributed to the first flow passage ta and the second flow passage tb.

  Furthermore, in the seventh embodiment, the ball located on the downstream side of the ball flow passage on the motorized prize 3640a is configured to be distributed to the second flow passage tb that is advantageous to the player, and continuously When firing the ball, the ball is configured to be easily introduced into the second flow passage tb.

  Therefore, in order to make the ball flow into the second flow passage tb while the lottery of the second special symbol is being performed, it is necessary to continuously shoot the ball toward the game area of the game board 13 . Therefore, it is possible to suppress an action to obtain an advantageous result by firing the ball at a predetermined timing.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 195, the configuration of the game board 13 in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 195 is a front view schematically showing a configuration of the game board 13 in the seventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 195, the seventh embodiment is different from the configuration of the game board 13 of the first embodiment described above in that the configuration of the right area of the game board 13 is largely different.

  Specifically, a point where the channel unit 660 is provided in the right area of the game board 13, a point where the second variable winning device (V prize device) 650 is provided below the channel unit 660, and a second variable The second variable winning device provided in the central lower portion of the game board 13 is a point provided with a specific area 650v capable of providing a big hit game based on the passage of a ball in the winning device (V prize device) 650. This embodiment is largely different from the second embodiment in that the second ball entry port 640 and the lower first ball entry port 64b2 to which the electric symbol 64a is attached are deleted. About the other than that structure, it is the same as that of the game board 13 (refer FIG. 2) of 1st Embodiment mentioned above, about the same structure, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

  Next, the configuration of the flow path unit 660 will be described with reference to FIGS. Fig. 196 is an enlarged view enlarging the vicinity of the flow path unit 660, and Fig. 197 (a) is a plan view schematically showing the ball flow when the motorized accessory 3640a is in a closed state (embedded state). FIG. 197 (b) is a perspective view schematically showing the ball flow when the motorized accessory 3640a is in a closed state (embedded state). And FIG. 198 (a) is a plan view schematically showing the ball flow when the motorized part 3640a is in the open state (projected state), and FIG. 198 (b) is a diagram showing the electric part 3640a. It is the perspective view which showed the ball | bowl flow in the case of an open state (protrusion state) typically.

  In addition, when the term indicating the variable state of the motorized jack 3640a used in the seventh embodiment is described, the closed state of the motored jack 3640a is a flow path for causing the ball to enter the second ball inlet 3640. This is a term used to indicate a closed state (a flow path formed on the electric part 3640a), that is, a state in which the electric part 3640a is embedded in the game board 13, and a functional expression In some cases, the term "restricted state" is used to limit the entry of the ball into the second entrance 3640.

  In addition, the open state of the motorized accessory 3640a means the state where the flow passage (the flow passage formed on the motorized accessory 3640a) for causing the ball to enter the second inlet 3640 is opened, ie, the motorized It is a term used to indicate that the character 3640a protrudes from the game board 13, and as a functional expression, the term "permitted state" (a state in which the ball is allowed to enter the second entrance 3640). May be used.

  As shown in FIG. 196, the channel unit 660 forms a first channel 660a forming the first channel ta and a second channel tb as a ball channel for causing the ball to flow down toward the V prize device 650. And a second passage 660b, and further, a first inlet 661 into which the ball flowing down the substantially central portion of the right side region flows, and a ball flowing from the first inlet 661 toward the motorized component 3640a The first induction passage 661a (see FIG. 197 (b)), the second inlet 662 into which the ball flowing down the left side of the right region flows, and the sphere flowing from the second inlet 662 pass through the through gate 67 The third passage 660c which is made to flow down toward the lower area of the game board 13, the third inflow port 663 into which the ball flowing down the right side area flows in, and the ball which flows in from the third inflow port 663 Out to discharge outside A mouth 66, and a.

  The ball flowing down the right side area is a flow path unit while changing the flow path by a plurality of nails (for example, nails 660k (see FIG. 195) which are flow path variable members) disposed above the flow path unit 660 Approximately 55% of the spheres flowing down the right side region flow into the first inlet 661, approximately 40% flow into the second inlet 662, and approximately 5% are arranged to reach 660. It is configured to flow into the inflow port 663. In addition, the distribution ratio mentioned above shows the average numerical value at the time of performing right-handed game, for example, continues the firing of the ball with the weakest firing intensity among the firing strengths that can be played right-handed In this case, the proportion of spheres flowing into the second inlet 662 increases. In this manner, the player can change the inflow ratio to each inflow port disposed in the flow path unit 660 by the player operating the firing intensity in the right-handed game, whereby the player can It is possible to provide the fun of varying the firing intensity so that an advantageous game is performed.

  Further, the balls flowing down the second inlet 662 are configured to be distributed to two flow paths formed in the depth direction of the pachinko machine 10, and the balls distributed to the flow paths on the near side (approximately 90 %) Flow down the third passage 660c provided with the through gate 67, and the ball (about 10%) distributed to the flow passage (not shown) on the back side flows into the out port 66 and the pachinko machine 10 It is configured to be discharged to the outside. As described above, in the seventh embodiment, the positions close to both ends of the motorized symbol 3640a to be opened when the lottery result of the normal symbol is a hit (formed when the symbol 374a is opened) The out-port 66 is disposed at a position adjacent to the upstream end and the downstream end of the ball flow path (the partition wall for partitioning the space from the out-port 66).

  By configuring in this manner, the player can easily grasp the movable range of the electrically-driven accessory 3640a that is operated when the normal symbol-clash game is executed, so that the electrically-operated bonus 3640a in the hit game is generated. It is possible to suppress the player from feeling discomfort with respect to the opening operation.

  In the schematic view shown in FIG. 196, the partition wall for partitioning the space between the out port 66 and the movable region of the motorized symbol 3640a is in contact with the motorized symbol 3640a. There is a gap of less than half a ball. Thereby, even if the opening operation of the motorized accessory 3640a is performed a plurality of times, it is possible to suppress breakage of the motorized accessory 3640a or the partition wall due to friction. In addition, since the size of the gap is less than half a ball, it is possible to suppress the ball from falling downward from the gap.

  Next, the ball flow of the right-handed game in the case where the motorized prize 3640a is in the closed state (embedded state) will be described with reference to FIGS. 196 and 197. As shown in FIG. 196, the ball flowing in from the first inlet 661 flows down toward the motorized jack 3640a, but when the motored jack 3640a is in the closed state (embedded state), the ball above the motorized jack 3640a Flow down to the first passage 660a provided below the first induction passage 661a (see FIG. 197 (b)). The first passage 660a is a passage in which the first flow passage ta is formed. The first flow passage ta is configured such that the time required for the ball to pass is about 0.5 seconds, and it is possible to win the ball in a shorter time than the ball flowing down the second flow passage tb described later. Device 650 can be reached.

  In addition, most (about 90%) of the balls that have flowed into the second inlet 662 pass through the through gate 67 regardless of the state of the motorized accessory 3640a, and the front side of the second passage 660b described later The third passage 660c formed in (the front side of the player's viewpoint of the pachinko machine 10 viewed from the front) flows down and is discharged to the lower area of the game board 13. Further, a part (about 10%) of the spheres flowing into the second inlet 662 passes through the fourth passage (not shown) provided on the back side of the third passage 660c and flows into the out port 66.

  As described above, by configuring the plurality of ball passages using the space in the depth direction of the game board 13, it is possible to three-dimensionally form the flow path in which the balls flow down, so the game area of the game board 13 It is possible to configure more ball passages within a limited range, and to provide a gaming machine capable of realizing a ball flow that does not come to the player.

  Similar to the second inlet 662 described above, the ball entering the third inlet is also discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 through the out port 66 without regard to the state of the motorized accessory 3640a. . Here, with reference to FIG. 196 and FIG. 197 (a), the structure of the upper surface (ball flow lower surface) of the motorized accessory 3640a will be described. As shown in FIG. 196, the motorized jack 3640a is configured to be inclined downward from the upper right to the lower left when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10, and the upper surface of the motored jack 3640a The ball that has reached B.sub.6 flows down the upper surface of the motor-driven symbol 3640a from its upstream side (upper right side) to its downstream side (lower left side) by its own weight.

  Then, on the top surface of the motor-operated accessory 3640a, a delay member is provided for delaying the flow-down speed at which the ball flows down on the top surface. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 197 (a), the first delay member 3641 and the second delay member 3642 are provided, and the ball flowing down the upper surface of the motor-driven workpiece 3640a is the first delay member 3641, A ball enters the second ball entry port 640 provided on the flow lower end side of the motorized workpiece 3640 a while in contact with the second delay member 3642. In the present embodiment, the mounting member 3643 is provided as a delay member for delaying the flow-down speed of the ball flowing down on the motor-driven workpiece 3640a.

  The mounting member 3643 is directly attached to the flow path unit 660, not to the motor-operated part 3640a. Therefore, it is always disposed at a fixed position regardless of the operation of the motorized part 3640a. As described above, the delay members for delaying the flow-down speed of the ball flowing down the upper surface of the electric part 3640 a are provided to the first delay member 3641, the second delay member 3642 attached to the electric part 3640 a, and the passage unit 660. When the motorized accessory 3640a is in the open state (projected state) (see FIG. 198 (a)) by configuring with the attached installation member 3643, the ball flowing down on the motorized accessory 3640a is meandered. Functions as a flow path forming means for causing the ball to flow down on the motorized part 3640a when the motorized part 3640a is in the closed state (embedded state) (see FIG. 197 (a)). It can be made to function as a flow control means to make it difficult.

  Here, specifically explaining the flow-down suppressing means described above, when the motorized accessory 3640a is in the closed state (see FIG. 197 (a)), that is, when it is difficult for the ball to enter the second ball entry port. As shown in FIG. 197 (a), the first delay member 3641 on the motorized symbol 3640a is on the side of the game disk 13 because the motorized symbol 3640a is buried in the back side of the game plate 13 as shown in FIG. Will be located in Thereby, the distance tc between the first delay member 3641 and the mounting member 3643 becomes narrow (a distance (about 5 mm) to such an extent that the ball can not pass between the first delay member 3641 and the mounting member 3643). Become). Similarly, the distance td between the second delay member 3642 and the mounting member 3643 is also an interval (about 7 mm) such that the ball can not pass through.

  As a result, even if the ball is illegally placed on the motorized symbol 3640a while the motorized symbol 3640a is in the closed state, the ball enters the second ball entrance 3640. Can be suppressed. Furthermore, since it is not necessary to embed each delay member on the motorized symbol 3640a inside the game board 13 when the motorized symbol 3640a is in the open state (projected state), in order to embed the motorized symbol 3640a. The opening of the provided game board 13 can be narrowed, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which dust or dirt enters the interior of the pachinko machine 10 from the opening of the game board 13.

  Furthermore, in the seventh embodiment, even when the motorized prize 3640a is in the closed state, the motorized prize 3640a is not completely buried in the game board 13, but a part (first delay member 3641, 2) The state in which the delay member 3642) is exposed is configured to be in the closed state of the motorized accessory 3640a. As a result, even when the motorized role product 3640a is located in the closed state, the player can easily grasp at which position the motorized role product 3640a is disposed. In addition, since each delay member provided on the motorized symbol 3640a is exposed, the ball flows down on the motorized symbol 3640a when the motorized symbol 3640a is in the open state (projected state). It is possible to make the player know what to do.

  That is, in the seventh embodiment, the movement of the ball (ball flow on the electric combination 3640a) which can be executed when the electric combination 3640a is in the open state is a state where the electric combination 3640a is in the closed state. Since it is possible to make the player grasp in advance, it is possible to suppress that the motorized part 3640a is actually in the open state and the state in which the ball flows down on the motored part 3640a is overlooked.

  On the other hand, when the motorized part 3640a is in the open state (projected state), as shown in FIG. 198, the ball flowing into the first inlet 661 and flowing down the first induction passage 661a is on the motorized part 3640a. To reach. Then, the upper surface of the motorized workpiece 3640a is inclined and meandered along the shapes of the respective delay members, and flows downward toward the second ball entrance 3640.

  Here, when the motorized part 3640a is in the open state (projected state), the ball channel formed on the motored part 3640a will be described with reference to FIG. 198 (a). In the above, a meandering spherical flow passage is formed until the ball discharged from the first induction passage 661 a reaches the second entrance 3640. The time taken for the sphere to pass through this meandering spherical channel is about 2 seconds, and it passes the channel from the outlet of the first guide channel 661a to the back side of the first delay member 3641 (channel upstream portion ZA) Takes about 0.8 seconds, and it takes about 1.2 seconds to pass through the flow passage (flow passage downstream portion ZB) from the back side of the first delay member 3641 to the second entrance 3640. It is configured to be seconds.

  In the present embodiment, as the operation termination condition of the motorized combination 3640a, a first general power termination condition that is satisfied when an elapsed time after operation to the open state (projected state) is 3 seconds, and a second The second normal power termination condition established when one ball enters the ball entry opening 3640 is set, and when any of the general power termination conditions is satisfied, the motorized role piece 3640a is in the closed state It is configured to operate in the (embedded state).

  The ball staying on the motorized part 3640a when the motorized part 3640a operates from the open state (projected state) to the closed state (embedded state) is a first passage 660a seen below the motorized part 3640a, Alternatively, it is configured to fall into any of the second passages 660b. That is, the moving distance (moving distance in the depth direction) when operating from the open state (projected state) to the closed state (embedded state) of the motorized part 3640a is at least one ball (11 mm) or more In the present embodiment, the moving distance of the motorized accessory 3640a is set to be 15 mm, which is larger than that of one ball (11 mm) and smaller than that of two balls (22 mm).

  By this configuration, when the motorized jack 3640a is in the closed state, the ball located on the motored jack 3640a can be reliably dropped downward, and two balls are pachinko balls. Since it does not fall continuously in the depth direction of the machine 10, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball clogging inside the first passage 660a and the second passage 660b.

  The ball staying in the flow path upstream portion ZA (see FIG. 198 (a)) of the serpentine ball flow path is staying in the first passage 660a and the flow path downstream portion ZB (see FIG. 198 (a)) The ball is configured to fall into the second passage 660b. In this embodiment, due to inertia acting on the ball flowing down on the motorized part 3640a, the ball moves from the open state (projected state) to the closed state (embedded state) at a speed at which the ball falls just below. Is configured as.

  In the seventh embodiment, the motorized part 3640 a is in the open state (projected state), and the ball is positioned between the second delay member 3642 and the second ball entrance 3640. When the ball moves to the closed state (embedded state), the ball collides with the second delay member 3642 moving toward the second ball entrance 3640 so that the ball enters the second ball entrance 3640. Configured. As described above, depending on the position of the ball on the motorized part 3640a, the movement of the motorized part 3640a from the open state to the closed state is a guiding operation for guiding the ball to the second ball entry port. be able to.

  The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to be able to fire 100 balls in 1 minute, and when 100 balls are fired in 1 minute in a right-handed game, the ratio of 1 ball to 2 balls is about 1 ball A ball flows into the first inlet 661. In other words, since the balls fired at intervals of 0.6 seconds flow into the first inlet 661 at a ratio of 1 ball to 2 balls, the distance between the balls flowing into the first inlet 661 is about 1.2 on average It will be seconds.

  And as above-mentioned, since the flow-path downstream part ZB is comprised so that 1.2 seconds are required for passage of a ball, when the above-mentioned 2nd charge termination conditions are satisfied, ie, the 2nd ball entrance In the case where the electric utility 3640a operates in the closed state (embedded state) by the ball entering the ball 3640, the second ball inlet 3640 is in the case where the ball is continuously fired to the right hitting area. The electric ball 364a operates in the closed state with the ball flowing into the first inlet 661 next to the ball entering the ball being located in the flow passage downstream portion ZB, so the ball in the second passage 660b It can be made easy to fall down.

  On the other hand, when a game is played with intentional timing for firing a ball, it is difficult to cause another ball to fall to the second passage 660b in a state where the ball enters the second entrance 3640. can do. Therefore, it is possible to urge the ball to be fired continuously in order to bring the ball into the specific area 650V in the V winning device 650 which is advantageous to the player.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when the time saving state is set as the gaming state, as described above, 3 seconds is set as the first general power termination condition of the electric role article 3640a, but the gaming state is the normal state In this case, the first normal power termination condition is set to 0.2 seconds. The time of 0.2 seconds is set to be shorter than the time (0.8 seconds) required to flow down the upstream portion of the serpentine spherical flow passage formed on the motor-driven accessory 3640a. Even if a right-handed game is played in the normal state, there is no possibility that the ball is made to enter the second ball entrance 3640. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the provision of advantageous benefits to a player who plays an incorrect game such as playing a right-handed game during the normal state.

  In addition, since it is also possible to prevent the ball from flowing down the second passage 660b, the ball is allowed to flow down the second passage 660b in a state in which the V prize winning apparatus 650 is opened in some way. It is possible to control cheating that passes the ball.

  In the present embodiment, the ball is passed through the second passage 660b which is advantageous to the player who does not play the right-handed game continuously during the time saving state or the right-handed game during the normal state. Although the second passage 660b is provided on the downstream side of the motorized product 3640a in order to make it difficult to make it difficult, the second passage 660b may be provided on the upstream side of the motorized product 3640a without being limited thereto. In addition, three or more passages for receiving the ball dropped from above the motorized symbol 3640a may be provided, and a plurality of receiving openings for balls dropped from above the motorized symbol 3640a may be provided. The probability of passing through the specific region 650V may be configured to be different. Furthermore, a plurality of paths where balls dropped from above the motorized part 3640a can pass through the specific area 650V are provided, and the time required to reach the specific area 650V by each path (time required to win the V winning device 650) May be configured to be different.

  Referring back to FIG. 195, the description will be continued. Below the flow path unit 660, a first variable winning device 65 is provided. As in the first embodiment described above, the first variable winning device 65 is opened when the jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery. In addition, 90% (the ball (50%) which flowed into the 1st inflow port 661 and the ball (40%) which flowed into the 2nd inflow port 662) the ball which was fired in the right-handed game during the big hit game is Both are configured to win the first variable winning device 65, so that even if the flow path unit 660 is provided on the upstream side (upper side) of the first variable winning device 65, the jackpot game can be smoothly executed. Can. In addition, since the ball flowing into the first inlet 661 and the ball flowing into the second inlet 662 flow down different flow paths to reach the first variable winning device 65, the plurality of balls are simultaneously The variable winning device 65 can be made easier to win.

<About the contents of effects in the seventh embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 199 to FIG. 202, before describing the characteristic effects executed in the seventh embodiment, the game characteristics of the seventh embodiment will be briefly described. In the seventh embodiment, when a big hit is won by a special symbol lottery, or a small hit is won by a special symbol lottery, a ball is passed through a specific area (specific area 650 V) during the small hit game. In the case, the jackpot game is configured to be executed (so-called 1 type 2 type mixed type).

  Moreover, it does not win in a small hit in the lottery of the first special symbol, and is configured to win a small hit only in the lottery of the second special symbol. And, the second entrance 3640, which is an opportunity to execute the lottery of the second special symbol, is configured to be able to enter the ball only in the state where the time saving state is set as the gaming state. When the jackpot game is executed, the time saving state is set after the jackpot is finished at a predetermined rate.

  In addition, in this embodiment, the V winning device 650 (see FIG. 195) is configured to be opened in a small hit game, and a ball is passed to a specific area 650 V provided in the V winning device 650. It has a difficult first channel (the first channel 660a) and a second channel (the second channel 660b) that it is easy to pass, and it is possible to vary which channel the ball flows down according to the game content It is configured to be able to

  Furthermore, the seventh embodiment has an advantageous small hit in which the time saving state is set after the end of the jackpot game set correspondingly, and a disadvantageous small hitting in which the time saving state is not set, and the type of the small hitting is The fluctuation time set accordingly is configured to be varied. In addition, it is easy to cause the ball to enter the specific area 650V easily when winning an advantageous small hit as a short time condition, and the disadvantage that it becomes easy to enter a ball into the specific area 650V when winning an adverse small winning. The time saving state is configured to be settable.

  In the present embodiment, the second flow passage (second passage 660b) capable of causing the ball to flow toward the specific region 650V in the V winning device 650 based on the start of the variation of the second special symbol. It is configured to set a state in which the ball can flow down, and is configured to change the variation time of the special symbol set at the time of winning a small hit between the advantageous time short state and the disadvantageous time short state. And in the state where the advantageous time short state is set, the ball which has flowed down the second flow path when winning in the advantageous small winning wins the V prize device 650, and the second flow path when winning in the disadvantageous small hitting The variation time of the special symbol corresponding to each small hit type is set so that the ball which has flowed down does not win the V prize device 650.

  By configuring in this way, when the advantageous time reduction state is set, the ball does not pass the specific area 650V even if winning in the disadvantage small winning, so set the time reduction state across the jackpot game be able to. That is, when winning the big win (first hit) in which the advantageous time short status is set after the big hit in the first special symbol lottery, at least two more (three times including the first hit) will be played a big hit game be able to.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 199 (a), an effect to be executed when a normal symbol (second symbol) is won in the short time state will be described. FIG. 199 (a) is a display screen showing an example of an effect to be executed when a normal symbol (second symbol) is won during the time saving state. As shown in FIG. 199 (a), while the time saving state is set, the character of "right strike" is displayed in the guidance display area Dm3 in order to cause the player to play the right strike game, A symbol for showing the lottery result of the normal symbol is displayed in the variation area Dm5.

  The symbols displayed in the common drawing variation region Dm5 are variably displayed corresponding to the lottery (variation) of the normal symbol (second symbol) executed when the ball passes through gate 67 (see FIG. 195). That is, it is stopped and displayed in the display mode for showing the result of the current lottery in synchronization with the timing when the fluctuation of the normal symbol (the second symbol) is stopped. FIG. 199 (a) shows a display mode "display mode imitating two round marks" indicating that the lottery result of the normal symbol (the second symbol) is a hit. In the embodiment, when the lottery result of the normal symbol (the second symbol) is out, “display mode imitating two cross marks” is stopped and displayed in the common drawing variation region Dm5, and the normal symbol (the second symbol is displayed While the variable display is displayed, "a display mode in which a circle and a cross are alternately displayed in a variable manner" is displayed in the common drawing change region Dm5.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 199 (a), when the win is won in the drawing drawing lottery, a character 811 imitating a rabbit crosses the bridge 851 and is directed to the race hall 852. In this effect, the ball is allowed to flow down onto the electric role piece 3640a operated to the closed state (protruding state) based on winning in the common drawing lottery, and the ball is made to enter the second ball entrance 3640. The game is shown, and the operating condition of the electrically operated character 3640a is expressed using the installation state of the bridge 851 displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the ball enters the second entrance 3640. The display content is set so as to express whether the character 811 reaches the race hall 852 or not, whether or not to ball.

  As described above, by executing the effect that reminds the actual game play using the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to inform the player of the complicated game play in an easy-to-understand manner.

  Further, in the state of FIG. 199 (a), neither of the first special symbol nor the second special symbol is in a state where the variation is not started, and the special figure 1 display area Dm1 and the special figure 2 display area Dm2 are both A display mode indicating that special symbol variation has not been performed is displayed. Then, in the sub-display area Ds, the characters "in preparation for race" are displayed, suggesting the contents of the effect in the future.

  Here, the flow of the contents of the effects performed during the time saving state in the present embodiment will be briefly described. It is executed based on the passage of the ball to the through gate 67 in the state in which the time saving state is set. When the player wins a hit in the normal symbol lottery (general drawing lottery), as shown in FIG. 199 (a), the ball is allowed to flow down onto the motorized jack 3640a which is in the open state (protruding state), An effect corresponding to the game of entering the ball (an effect toward the race hall) is executed.

  When the ball enters the second entrance 3640 and the second special symbol starts to change, the character 811 reaches the race hall, and a race effect shown in FIG. 199 (b) described later is executed. Ru. The contents of this race effect are according to the lottery result of the second special symbol under execution (appropriate judgment result, fluctuation time), and the inflow situation of the ball to the second passage 660b where it is easy to enter the ball in the specific area 650V. Is set.

  After that, when a ball passes through the specific area 650V in a small hit game, an effect that the character 811 will be one as a race result is executed (see FIG. 201 (b)). In this way, each game executed during the time saving state, that is, a game in which a normal symbol is hit, a game in which a ball is inserted into the second entrance 3640, a small winning in a second special symbol lottery It is possible to notify the player of the game result of the game for passing the ball to the specific area 650V during the small game and the small hitting game, using a series of effects. Therefore, since the player can grasp the game result by seeing the effect (race effect) executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the player can be provided with an easy-to-understand game .

  Here, the display screen during the race effect is returned to FIG. 199 (b) and the description is continued. When the display shown in FIG. 199 (a) is executed, that is, the player wins the hit of the normal symbol (the second symbol) in the short time state, and the motorized jack 3640a is variably operated to the open state (permissible state) In the state, when the ball flows down on the motorized prize 3640a and enters the second ball entrance 3640, the race start screen shown in FIG. 199 (b) is displayed.

  In the race start screen, a display mode is displayed in which a character 811 imitating a rabbit executes a race with a rival 860 imitating a turtle. The state shown in FIG. 199 (b) is a state in which the first second special symbol variation is executed after the time saving state is set, and the second special symbol (special FIG. 2) shows a display mode (dynamic display mode) indicating that the variable display is being performed, and the characters “9 race entry remaining” are displayed in the remaining short time notification area Dm6 as the remaining time reductions. . Then, in the sub-display area Ds, the characters "GREEN ON ONE GOAL" are displayed in order to guide the effect of the race effect corresponding to the game result which is advantageous to the player.

  Next, the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is executed during the time saving state, and when the lottery result is out, the screen shown in FIG. 200 (a) is displayed. In FIG. 200 (a), while the stop display mode of "3, 4, 6" indicating that the drawing result of the special figure 2 is out is displayed in the special figure 2 change area Dm2, in the main display area Dm. , And an effect mode (display mode in which the character 811 falls into the river and can not make a goal) indicating that the race effect has ended are displayed. Then, in the sub-display area Ds, the characters “expected to next time” are displayed to indicate that the special figure 2 fluctuation this time is not a game result advantageous to the player and that the time saving state continues. .

  On the other hand, when the lottery of the special figure 2 is a hit, the screen shown in FIG. 200 (b) or 201 (a) is displayed. As described above with reference to FIG. 196, in the present embodiment, the ball passage is configured such that two flow paths are formed to allow the ball to flow down toward the V winning device 650 that is opened at the small hit. The time required to reach the V winning device 650 which is opened during a small hit game is made different depending on which flow path the ball passes through. Further, it is configured that the ease of passage of the ball to the specific area 650V in the V winning device 650 is made different depending on the flow path through which the ball passes.

  Therefore, during the special symbol change when winning by the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2), the flow path in which the ball is flowing toward the V prize device 650 is detected, and the detection result It is comprised so that a production | presentation aspect may differ based on. Specifically, when the ball flows down the second aisle (delay aisle) 660b which is advantageous to the player during the small hitting fluctuation of the special figure 2, the effect mode shown in FIG. It is shown in FIG. 201 (a) when the ball flows down the first passage (normal passage) 660a which is disadvantageous to the player during the small hitting fluctuation of FIG. 2 (when the ball does not flow down the second passage 660b). The presentation mode is displayed.

  In FIG. 200 (b), in order to show that the ball is likely to pass through the specific area 650V in the small hitting game that is executed after the special image 2 variation being executed is stopped and displayed, the main indication as a race effect An effect is executed in which the character 811 runs ahead of the rival 860 in the area Dm. Then, the display mode of the character 811 is changed to a display mode different from the normal mode (a display mode obtained by crawling the aura), and the player is informed that there is a high possibility that the character 811 will be first in this race effect. In order to do this, the letters "Speed UP" are displayed. Further, the character of "big chance" is also displayed in the sub display area Ds as a comment for indicating that the character 811 is highly likely to be first-dressed in this race effect.

  On the other hand, in FIG. 201 (a), as a race effect, an effect mode in which a character 811 and a rival 860 aim at a goal while making a debt heat is displayed. Thus, even if the lottery result of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is the same small hit type, it is executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 by the difference of the flow path where the ball flows down. Because it is possible to make the player predict whether or not the game result will be advantageous to the player can be made different by making the effect mode different, it is executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 The player can be interested in the contents of the series of effects (race effect).

  Then, when the ball passes the specific area 650V during the small hitting game, that is, when it is determined that the big hitting game is executed after the small hitting game is over, the effect mode shown in FIG. 201 (b) is displayed Be done.

  On the other hand, when the ball does not pass through the specific area 650V during the small hitting game, the rival 860 takes the goal before the character 811 in the effect mode shown in FIG. 202 (a), that is, the race effect. The effect mode to be displayed is displayed.

  Further, although the detailed description will be described later, in this embodiment, a first time-shortened state (time-shortened state A) which is advantageous to the player as a time-shortened state and a second time-shortened which is more disadvantageous to the player than the first time-shortened state. It is configured to be able to set the status (time saving status B), and when the time saving status A (first time shortening status) is set, a small hit type of small hitting type corresponding to the big hit game to which the time saving status is provided The ball is configured to pass to the specific area 650 V in the V prize winning apparatus 650 only when the player is elected.

  That is, in the state in which the time saving state A is set, when the big hit game is executed based on the small hitting win, the time saving state which becomes advantageous to the player after the big hitting game ends is surely set. doing.

  Therefore, in the seventh embodiment, the effect mode shown in FIG. 202 (b) is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 in order to indicate to the player that the time saving state A has been set. It is configured to be displayed. FIG. 202 (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen of the third symbol display device 81 when the time saving state A is set.

  As shown in FIG. 202 (b), when the short time state A is set, an effect mode is set in which a sea bottom race in which a background indicating the sea bottom is set is executed. Then, in the sub-display area Ds, a comment of "When a race is won, luxury prize is confirmed !?" is displayed, which suggests that the time saving state is set again after the end of the jackpot game. By suggesting that the time saving state A is set by changing the background when the race is executed in this way, it is possible to set an effect aspect that is easy for the player to understand, and during the actual race. Since the effects can be made common, the volume of image data used to set the effect mode can be reduced.

  Although a detailed description is omitted, in the present embodiment, a plurality of background images other than the ordinary background and the above-mentioned seabed background can be set as backgrounds of the effect during the race, for example, desert You can set a background that imitates a tree, a background that imitates a tree sea, a background that imitates a city, etc. And each background changes the ratio set according to the time saving state (time saving state A, time saving state B) currently set. As a result, it is possible to provide the player with the fun of predicting which time saving state currently set is based on the background type set as the background of the effect during the race.

  Furthermore, there is provided a measuring means for measuring the number of times the time saving state A is continuously set, and a special that can be set only when the number of times the time saving state A is set reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 3 times). A background may be provided. This can provide a sense of security that the time saving state to be advantageous to the player is set, and can provide a sense of superiority by notifying surrounding players of the special game result. .

  As mentioned above, although the characteristic production | presentation aspect performed in this 7th Embodiment was demonstrated, the content mentioned above is an example to the last, and you may comprise so that the production | presentation aspect other than that may be displayed. For example, in the example of the effect described with reference to FIGS. 199 to 202, the effect example corresponding to the game result is set. However, the effect mode is not limited to this and is easily set by the game result. May be configured to be different.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in the state where the effect mode of FIG. 199 (b) is displayed, that is, in the state where the ball enters the second ball entrance 3640 during the time saving state (special figure 2 fluctuation started). The display mode of the rival 860 may be variably set based on the lottery result of the special figure 2 lottery this time, for example, to an advantageous small hit (small hitting A) which is advantageous to the player in the special figure 2 lottery. Display of rival 860 in the case of winning, in the case of winning a disadvantaged small hitting (small hitting C) which would be more disadvantageous to the player than the advantageous small hitting, and in the case of not winning in a small hitting (election of winning). The types of characters set as modes may be configured to be different.

  By configuring in this manner, when the special figure 2 change is started, the player can obtain information about the future game contents, that is, the lottery result of the special figure 2 lottery and the type of small hit that has been won. Can be provided.

  In addition, when the special figure 2 change is started, when the presentation mode (display mode) indicating the lottery result of the special figure 2 change this time is displayed (set), the content of the displayed presentation mode is grasped There is a problem that the act of continuing the game is performed only when the lottery result is advantageous to the player, but in the present embodiment, when entering the ball into the second ball entrance 3640, it is continuous. If the ball is not fired, it is difficult to pass the ball to the specific area 650V during the small hit game.

  As a result, even when the presentation mode (display mode) indicating the lottery result of the special figure 2 fluctuation at this time is displayed (set) at the time when the special figure 2 fluctuation is started, after confirming the display mode, Since the player can not be made to determine whether or not the ball is to be won to the V prize device 650 during the small hitting game, the above-mentioned problem can be solved.

  In addition, since the race shown in FIG. 199 (b) can be started from the timing when the special figure 2 variation is started, the period in which the race is executed (the execution period during the race) can be extended, The presentation effect can be enhanced. Specifically, since the variation period of the special symbol can be included in the effect execution period during the race, for example, it is longer to win a win (big hit, small hit) by lottery of the special symbol than if it is out By configuring the fluctuation period to be easily set, it can be thought that the player wins the win as the effect execution period during the race is longer, and it is possible to lengthen the period for executing the effect. In this case, it is possible to enhance the stage effect of the stage effect (the suggested stage effect) indicating that the player has won the win.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, after the start of the small hit game after the start of the special figure 2 variation, the determination by the determination means (special figure 2) is executed, and the result of the determination is a predetermined determination result. The character 811 is configured to execute effects (see FIG. 199 (b) to FIG. 202 (a)) using the specific game (small hit game) to be executed in the case of (small hit). At the start of the race (see FIG. 199 (b)), the value (information) for indicating the remaining short number of times (the number of remaining times excluding the special figure fluctuation currently being executed) displayed in the remaining short number of times notification area Dm6 It is configured to continuously display until the end (FIG. 202 (a)), that is, until the small hitting game executed after the special figure fluctuation (special figure 2 fluctuation) is finished is finished.

  In this manner, even if the special figure variation ends and the small hitting game is executed, the player can see the effect during the race for the player by configuring so as not to change the display mode of the remaining short time notification area Dm6. It can be easily reported.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the race is performed using one special figure fluctuation (lottery drawing) and a period until the small hitting game when the small winning game is won in the special figure lottery is ended. Since the middle effect is configured to be performed, there is a problem that the effect execution period during the race will be largely different based on the special drawing lottery result. That is, when the lottery result of the special symbol is out, the small hitting game is not executed, so the period during which the small hitting game is executed can not be included in the effect execution period during the race, and the effect during the race is executed There was a problem that the period became short.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, since it has at least a lottery result of a special symbol and a game result of a small hit game as an element for diverting the effect mode of the effect during the race, the game is not released during the race unless a small hit is won. It is not possible to provide the player with the effect mode (see, eg, FIG. 200 (b) and FIG. 201 (a)) set at the end of the game, and the player gets bored with the game before the player enjoys various effects. Problems could arise.

  In order to solve such a problem, for example, in a part of the case where the lottery result of the special symbol is out, the fluctuation time longer than the case where the lottery result of the special symbol becomes the small winning, specifically Outlier variation pattern (variation pattern for sash effect) in which a variation time similar (identical) to the sum of the variation time set when winning in the small win and the small hitting gaming time is set When this fluctuation pattern for garse effect is settable, as a stage effect during a race, if it wins a small hit as if it is a special symbol change as a stage effect, the ball does not pass the specific area 650V during the small hit game It is preferable to configure so as to set an effect mode (see FIG. 202 (a)) that indicates the event. Thus, even when the player does not win a small hit in the special figure lottery, the player can be made to experience the effect mode set at the end of the effect during the race.

  In addition, if you win the big win in the special figure lottery, set the same variation time as the variation time set when you win the small hit, the first round of the round game of the big hit, and the small hit It is good to set the opening operation of the big hit game so that the game and the opening operation mode become the same. In this way, even when the jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery, it is possible to execute the effect during the race, so the player is provided with an effect mode in which the effect result of the effect during the race is advantageous to the player. It is easy to do.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, although it is comprised so that an effect during a race may be performed using the period (special figure fluctuation period, small hitting execution period) set based on one special symbol lottery, Without being limited thereto, the effect during the race may be performed using a period set based on a plurality of special symbol lotterys. By configuring in this way, for example, when the lottery result of the special symbol is continuously out, it is possible to perform the effect during the race using the continuous special figure fluctuation period.

  Therefore, even if the variation time set when the lottery result of the special symbol is out is shorter than the case where the lottery result of the special symbol is the winning, it is set at the final stage of the effect during the race The presentation mode can be provided to the player. In addition, in order to set one effect mode using a plurality of deviation fluctuations, the effect mode for showing the player that the drawing of the special symbol is out is made to correspond to each special figure drawing As compared with the case of setting, it is possible to reduce the number of times the effect of notifying the player that the special drawing lottery is out is performed.

  As mentioned above, although the contents of effects in the case where time saving state is set up were explained, for example, by the lottery of the 1st special symbol, after the big hit game end, it was elected in jackpot type where time saving state A is set In this case, a special suggestion effect for notifying that effect may be executed. For example, instead of the display pattern of the third symbol that is normally stopped and displayed, a special display mode of "VVV" may be used. 3 symbols may be stopped and displayed. As a result, the player can be notified immediately of the setting of the advantageous gaming state to the player, so that the player can play the game for a long time without anxiety.

Regarding Electrical Configuration in Seventh Embodiment
Here, an electrical configuration according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 203 (a) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the main control unit 110 in the seventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 203 (a), the ROM 202 according to the seventh embodiment includes the first random number 7 table 202fa, the first random type 7 table 202fb, the second random number 7 table 202fc, and the variation pattern 7 table 202fd, A small hit type selection 7 table 202fe and an open scenario 7 table 202ff are provided. In addition, the configuration (table having the same name as the electrical configuration used in any of the above-described embodiments (the same name as “7” added to make it possible to identify that used in the seventh embodiment) ) Is the same as that of each embodiment described above in terms of its use, and therefore detailed description will be omitted.

  The first random number 7 table 202fa is a data table used in the same application as the first random number table 202a used in each embodiment described above, and the value of the first random number counter C1 is the first When the random number 7 matches the value of the random number to be the jackpot set by the table 202fa, it is determined that the jackpot of the special symbol. The first random number 7 table 202fa is provided with two types of special symbol 1 random number table 202fa1 for the first special symbol and special symbol 2 random number table 202fa2 for the second special symbol, and the big hit Although the number of random numbers to be is the same, only the special symbol 2 random number table 202fa2 for the second special symbol has set the value of the random number to be a small hit (see FIG. 204). In this way, by making the number of small random numbers different (by setting only one), a bonus for the player (a big hit or a small hit) is made between the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery. ) The degree of expectation for grant can be made different.

  Here, the contents of the first random number 7 table 202fa will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 204 (a) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents defined in the first random number 7 table 202fa, and FIG. 204 (b) is the contents defined in the special symbol 1 random number table 202fa1. Fig. 204 (c) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents defined in the special symbol 2 random number table 202fa2. In the first random number 7 table 202fa, a random number value (determination value) determined to be a big hit and a random value (determination value) determined to be a small hit are set in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol Table.

  Specifically, when the lottery of the first special symbol is executed, the special symbol 1 random number table 202fa1 is referred to. As shown in FIG. 204 (b), in the special symbol 1 random number table 202fa1, among the values of the first random number counter C1, "0 to 4" are defined as the big hit judgment value, and other values are other than the big hit It is defined as a judgment value of (that is, out). Then, in the first special symbol lottery, the value of the first random number counter C1 is determined, and when the value is any one of "0 to 4", it is determined that a big hit is made.

  When the lottery of the second special symbol is executed, the special symbol 2 random number table 202fa2 is referred to. As shown in FIG. 204 (c), in the special symbol 2 random number table 202fa2, among the values of the first random number counter C1, "0 to 4" are defined as the jackpot determination values, and "5 to 504" are small. It is defined as a hit determination value, and "505 to 999" is defined as the other (that is, out) determination value. Then, in the second special symbol lottery, the value of the first random number counter C1 is determined, and if the value is any of "0 to 4", it is determined as a big hit, and any of "5 to 504" In some cases, it is determined to be a small hit.

  The first hit type selection 7 table 202fb is a data table used in the same application as the jackpot type selection table 202d (see FIG. 14) used in the above-described embodiments, and the value of the first hit type counter C2 It is configured to determine the jackpot type when the jackpot is won by referring to the first hit type selection 7 table 202fb using. Here, the contents of the first hit type selection 7 table 202fb will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 205 (a) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents defined in the first hit type selection 7 table 202fb. As shown in FIG. 205 (a), in this embodiment, at the time of the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1), the special figure 1 jackpot type used to determine the value of the acquired first type of counter C2 It has a selection table 202fb1 and a special figure 2 jackpot type selection table 202fb2 used when determining the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired at the time of lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) . Thereby, the jackpot type when the jackpot is won by the lottery of the special figure 1 and the jackpot type when the jackpot is won by the lottery of the special figure 2 are made different, or each of plural jackpot types is selected To provide the player with different game characteristics in the game using the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the game using the second special symbol (special figure 2). Can improve the interest of the game.

  Next, the special figure 1 jackpot type selection table 202fb1 used at the time of the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) will be described with reference to FIG. 205 (b). FIG. 205 (b) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents defined in the special view 1 jackpot type selection table 202 fb 1. As shown in FIG. 205 (b), the jackpot type when the random number is any of "0 to 9" in the first type counter C2 is "big hit A", and any of "10 to 49" The jackpot type in the case of the jackpot is "jackpot B", and the jackpot type in the case of any of "50 to 99" is "jackpot C".

  The "big hit A" is a big hit type in which the number of rounds is 15 rounds (R) as a big hit game, and the gaming state after the big hit is set to a short time state (10 actual short times). Then, "time saving A" which is advantageous for the player is set as the time saving state set after the big hit ends. Since the "big hit A" has many rounds of big hit games and the gaming state after the big hit is further set to "short time A" which is more advantageous in the short time state advantageous to the player, the "big hit A" is , The most advantageous jackpot type for the player. Among the 100 counter values (random number values) that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, 10 random numbers are selected for "big hit A", so a big hit with the first special symbol (special figure 1) lottery The rate at which "jackpot A" is selected is 10%.

  In this embodiment, when the time saving state is set, the second special symbol lottery (special figure 2 lottery) which is more advantageous to the player than the first special symbol lottery (special figure 1 lottery) The ball is configured so that the ball can easily enter the second entrance 3640, and in the time saving state, the number of times of drawing the first special symbol (special figure 1) (number of fluctuations) and the second special symbol (special figure) 2) The number of lottery times (number of fluctuations) and the number of times (total number of times) of adding up reach 100 times, or the number of lottery numbers (number of fluctuations) of the second special symbol (special figure 2) reaches 10 times If it does, the time saving state is configured to end.

  By configuring in this manner, even if the lottery for the first special symbol (special figure 1) which is disadvantageous to the player is executed immediately after the time saving state is set, the lottery for the special figure 2 is performed a prescribed number of times ( Since it is possible to execute the game ten times, the player can play the game with confidence. Thus, for example, in the case where the time saving state is ended when the number of times of addition of the number of times of fluctuation of Special Figure 1 and the number of times of variation of Special Figure 2 in time saving state reaches a prescribed number (10 times) In order to prevent Special figure 1 fluctuation (lottery drawing) from being executed when the time saving state is set after the big hit ends, the game such that the reserve of Special figure 1 is not secured (game that does not fire balls continuously) It is possible to prevent (a so-called stop play game) from being executed and improve the operation of the game.

  The "big hit B" is a big hit type in which the number of rounds is 5 rounds (R) as a big hit game, and the gaming state after the big hit is set to a short time state (10 times short time). Then, as the time saving state set after the big hit ends, "time saving B" which is disadvantageous to the player is set. In this "big hit B", although the number of rounds of the big hit game is smaller than the above-mentioned "big hit A", since the game state after the big hit is set to a time saving state advantageous to the player, the jackpot advantageous to the player However, the "time saving B" which is more disadvantageous to the player than the time saving state "time saving A" set when the "big hit A" is won is set.

  That is, the jackpot B is an advantageous jackpot in which the time saving state is set after the jackpot end, but the number of rounds of the jackpot game and the type of time saving state set after the jackpot end is more gaming than the "jackpot A" described above Be a disadvantage to That is, the "big hit B" is a jackpot type that is more disadvantageous than the "big hit A" described above. Among the 100 possible counter values (random number values) of the first hit type counter C2, 40 random numbers are selected for "big hit B", so a big hit with the first special symbol (special figure 1) lottery The rate at which the "big hit B" is selected is 40%.

  The "big hit C" is a big hit type in which the number of rounds is 5 rounds (R) as a big hit game, and the gaming state after the big hit is set to a normal state (non-short time state). Since the number of rounds is small and the normal state is set after the jackpot, "big hit C" is a disadvantage jackpot type for the player. Among the 100 counter values (random number values) that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, 50 random numbers are selected for "big hit C", so a big hit with the first special symbol (special figure 1) lottery The percentage for which "jackpot C" is selected is 50%.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as described, the jackpot game (jackpot) of 15 rounds (R) at a ratio of 10% when winning a jackpot in the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) After the end, a short time A) is selected, and a jackpot game of 5 rounds (R) (time short B after the end of the big hit) is selected at a rate of 40%. That is, a jackpot in which the gaming state after the jackpot game ends shifts to the time saving state is selected at a rate of 50%.

  In this embodiment, as the jackpot type that is most advantageous to the player, the number of rounds executed during the jackpot game is the largest (15 rounds (R)), and the time saving state (time saving A Number of rounds executed during the big hit as the big hit type that will be advantageous to the player) (5 rounds (R)), and the type of time saving state set after the big hit, There is a big hit type "big hit B" which is more disadvantageous to the player than "big hit A", and a big hit type "big hit C" which is most disadvantageous to the player without time saving status after the big hit ends. It is possible to configure, but other jackpot types may be settable, for example, the number of rounds of the jackpot game is the largest (15 rounds (R)), time classification Then, the jackpot type in which "time saving B" is set, and the number of rounds in the jackpot game is small (5 rounds (R)), but the jackpot type in which "time saving A" is set as the time saving type, the number of rounds for jackpot game However, it may be possible to set the jackpot type in which the time saving state is not set (15 rounds (R)).

  In addition, as a concept of whether or not the jackpot type to be set is advantageous to the player, as in the present embodiment, the number of rounds of the jackpot game and the gaming state to be set after the jackpot end are comprehensively The concept of advantage and disadvantage may be defined by thinking, the concept of advantage and disadvantage may be defined based only on the number of rounds of jackpot game, and the advantage and disadvantage may be defined based only on the gaming state set after the jackpot is over You may define the concept.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 205 (c), the special figure 2 jackpot type selection table 202fb2 used in the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) will be described. FIG. 205 (c) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents defined in the special view 2 jackpot type selection table 202fb2. As shown in FIG. 205 (c), in the first hit type counter C2, the jackpot type when the random number value is any of "0 to 89" is "big hit D", and the random number value is "90 to 99. It is specified that the jackpot type in the case of being either "jackpot E".

  The "big hit D" is a big hit type in which the number of rounds is 15 rounds (R) as a big hit game, and the gaming state after the big hit is set to a short time state (10 times substantially short time). Then, "time saving A" which is advantageous for the player is set as the time saving state set after the big hit ends. That is, the "big hit D" is a big hit type having the same content as the "big hit A" described above, and is a big hit type that is most advantageous to the player. Among the 100 counter values (random number values) that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, 90 random numbers are selected for "big hit D", so a big hit with the second special symbol (special figure 2) lottery The rate at which "big hit D" is selected is 90%.

  The "big hit E" is a big hit type in which the number of rounds is 15 rounds (R) as a big hit game, and the gaming state after the big hit is set to a short time state (10 actual short times). Then, as the time saving state set after the big hit ends, “time saving B” which is more disadvantageous to the player than “time saving A” is set. That is, the "big hit E" is a jackpot type that is more disadvantageous than the "big hit D" described above. Among the 100 counter values (random number values) that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, since 10 random number values are selected for "big hit E", a big hit with the second special symbol (special figure 2) lottery The rate at which "big hit E" is selected is 10%.

  That is, in the present embodiment, when the jackpot is won by the second special symbol lottery, the jackpot game of 15 round (R) is executed, and furthermore, the time saving state is always set after the jackpot end. ing. As a result, it is possible to provide a jackpot game advantageous to the player if the player wins the jackpot in the special figure 2 lottery rather than winning the jackpot in the special figure 1 lottery, so the first special symbol lottery is selected. 2) The special symbol lottery is a lottery more advantageous to the player.

  In the present embodiment, five types of jackpots are used. However, the present invention is not limited thereto. Four or less types may be used, or six or more types may be provided. Moreover, you may be comprised so that a different big hit classification may be selected even if it is the value of the same 1st contact classification counter C2 with a 1st special symbol and a 2nd special symbol. By configuring in this manner, for example, when the jackpot with the second special symbol is performed, by setting the jackpot type in which the number of rounds is executed is larger, the player with the hit with the second special symbol is made more to the player. It can be expected. Therefore, the hit in the high probability gaming state can be made more advantageous to the player, and the convenience of the game in the high probability state can be improved. Therefore, the player can strongly feel that he / she wants to shift to the high probability state, and the game can be played for a longer time.

  In addition, the type of jackpot type selected with the first special symbol and the second special symbol and the selection rate (allocation ratio) of each jackpot type are made the same, and the first hit type counter C2 corresponding to each jackpot type You may comprise so that only a range may be varied. Thereby, it is possible to suppress that the fraudulent act of aiming at a specific counter value and acquiring the value of the first hit type counter C2 is executed in both the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

  The second random number 7 table 202fc is a data table used in the same application as the second random number table 202c (see FIG. 14) used in each of the embodiments described above, and the value of the second random number counter C4 With reference to the second random number 7 table 202fc, the presence or absence of the winning is determined.

  In this embodiment, as in the above-described embodiments, the low probability of the normal symbol (during the normal state of the normal symbol) and the high probability of high probability of being a hit of the normal symbol from the low probability (general) The number of values corresponding to the win is set differently depending on the time-saving state of the symbol). Thus, the probability of winning is changed between the low probability of the normal symbol and the high probability of the normal symbol by changing the number of random numbers to be hit.

  In addition, in the seventh embodiment, a plurality of operation patterns (opening operation patterns) of the motorized accessory 3640a to be executed when winning in the hit of the normal symbol (second symbol) can be set. Thereby, since the timing which opens electrically-driven part 3640a can be varied based on the hit of a normal symbol (the 2nd symbol), the timing (the 2nd ball entrance 3640 enters a ball) which opens electrically-operated part 3640a. It is possible to suppress the game in which the ball is fired by planning the timing at which the ball can be made.

  Here, the contents of the second random number 7 table 202fc will be described with reference to FIG. 206 (a). FIG. 206 (a) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents defined in the second random number 7 table 202fc. As shown in FIG. 206 (a), in the second random number 7 table 202fc, "generally per drawing A", "generally per drawing B", and "off" can be set as the second per collision type A second hit type is defined based on the gaming state (normal pattern high probability state or low probability state) and the acquired value of the second hit random number counter C4.

  Specifically, when the gaming state is a low probability state (normal state) of a normal symbol, the value of the second random number counter C4 is defined as "0 per A", and "1" "Per common drawing B" is specified, and "out" is specified in the range of "2-99". And, if the gaming state is a high probability state (time reduction state) of the normal symbol, the value of the second random number counter C4 is defined in the range of "0 to 79", "A per common drawing", "80 "Per common drawing B" is defined in the range of -98 ", and" out "is defined in" 99 ".

  That is, in the seventh embodiment, when the low probability state of the normal symbol is set as the gaming state, the probability of winning the winning in the normal symbol (second symbol) lottery is 2% (2/100) That is, when the player wins the winning, it is configured that "Per A" and "Per B" are selected at a rate of 50%.

  And, if the gaming state is a high probability state (time reduction state) of the normal symbol, the probability of winning the winning in the lottery of the normal symbol (the second symbol) is 99% (99/100), it is elected In such a case, “per A” is selected at a ratio of approximately 80% (80/99) and “per B at a ratio of approximately 20% (20/99) is selected. doing.

  That is, in the seventh embodiment, the high probability state of the normal symbol is higher than the low probability state of the normal symbol so that the probability of winning the win is higher, and at the time of the win, "A hit" is configured to be easily selected. As described above, by making the probability of hitting the normal symbol (the second symbol) and the type of hitting different according to the gaming state, the player plays the game while expecting a more advantageous gaming state to be set for the player. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In addition, in the seventh embodiment, the operation pattern of the motorized jackpot 3640a at the time of winning the second symbol is configured to be different according to the gaming state and the hit type, and in the low probability state of the normal symbol The operation pattern in which it is more advantageous for the player to win the second symbol in the high probability state of the normal symbol than in the case of winning in the second symbol hit a ball in the second ball entrance 3640 An operation pattern that is easy to cause is set. As a result, it is set as a condition for awarding a benefit advantageous to the player that winning in a hit during a high probability state of a normal symbol.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 206 (a), the contents of the operation pattern of the motorized jack 3640a executed during the high probability state of the normal symbol will be described. In the seventh embodiment, different operation patterns are set in accordance with the winning type that has been won, and when “per game A” is set in the high probability state, the opening period is 0. 0. When the operation pattern of 1 second (S), opening period 2 seconds (S), ending period 3.5 seconds (S) is executed, and "per B" is set, the opening period is 0.1 An operation pattern is executed in which the second (S), the open period is 2.5 seconds (S), and the ending period is 3 seconds (S).

  Then, even if any operation pattern is executed, if one ball enters the second ball entrance 3640 during the opening operation (during setting the opening period) of the motorized accessory 3640a, the closing condition is Then, the closing operation of the motorized jack 3640a is performed. That is, in the seventh embodiment, as the condition for ending the open state of the motorized prize 3640a, the condition established when the predetermined open period is reached, and the predetermined number is the second ball entrance The conditions established when entering the ball 3640 are set. As a result, when the player wins a winning by lottery of the second symbol (normal symbol), a large number of balls enter the second entrance 3640, and the player is given an extra benefit (winning balls). Can be suppressed.

  Further, regardless of which operation pattern is executed, the ending period is set to be equal to or longer than the period (3 seconds) in which the ball flows down the second passage (delay passage) 660b. Therefore, even if the player wins the game in succession, if the player wins a small hit by the special drawing 2 lottery executed on the basis of the previous game, the next game is made during the small hit game. It is possible to reliably suppress a situation in which the ball having flowed down the second passage 660b wins the V prize winning device 650 based on the common figure.

  In the present embodiment, by using the above-described configuration, the ball does not pass through the specific area 650 V during the small hitting game at an unintended timing based on a plurality of consecutive game results (popular drawing lottery results). It constitutes, and it is constituted so that a proper game will be performed, for example, without being limited to this, for example, when it wins to the popular figure continuously, the ball passes the specified territory 650V during the small hitting game It may be configured to be easy to do. In this case, for example, an opening period (0.1 second), an opening period (2 seconds), and an ending period (0.1 second) are set as the second type (per common figure). If it is possible to set C) per diagram, and it wins again in the next spread fluctuation that won C per spread, it has flowed into the second passage 660b during the hit game corresponding to the next spread fluctuation. The ball may be configured to pass through the specific area 650V during the small hitting game won by the special drawing 2 lottery executed based on the common drawing C.

  By configuring in this manner, it is possible to provide the player with a game having a surprising nature, and hence the interest of the game can be improved. In addition, in the case of adopting such a game characteristic, the effect during the race (FIG. 200 (b)) is executed corresponding to C per common figure, and then the effect once lost in the race (FIG. 202 (a) After executing the above, if it is detected by the delay path entering ball switch 660e1 that the ball has flowed into the second path 660b based on the next popular figure, the resurrection effect after losing the race is executed Good to configure. As a result, it is possible to execute an unexpected effect corresponding to the game having an unexpectedness to the player.

  Furthermore, a common drawing prior discriminating means capable of discriminating in advance the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired when passing through the through gate 67 is provided, and as a priori judgment result corresponding to the reserved and stored common drawing prize information, If it is determined that the regular drawing prize information for winning a round drawing C and the regular drawing prize information for winning a round drawing are continuously stored on hold, it corresponds to a plurality of continuous drawing figures. You may comprise so that presentation (continuous presentation) may be performed. In this manner, by performing the pre-reading process of the regular drawing prize information, since the effect can be set in a state where the lottery result of the regular drawing lottery (the second symbol lottery) is determined in advance, Can be performed.

  In the seventh embodiment, as a winning game to be executed when the player wins a flat figure, the motorized prize 3640a is opened for a period in which the ball can be entered into the second entrance 3640. Although it is comprised so that only a hit game may be performed, it is not restricted to this, for example, it is not possible to make a ball enter the second entrance 3640, but let the ball flow in the second passage 660b. The motorized part 3640a may be configured to be in an open state for a period (for example, one second) in which the user can play the game.

  The variation pattern 7 table 202fd is a data table used in the same application as the variation pattern selection table 202f (refer to FIG. 14) used in each embodiment described above, and the types of special symbols for which the lottery is executed and the A fluctuation pattern in which different fluctuation times are set is defined corresponding to the result of the lottery and the value of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1.

  Here, the contents of the fluctuation pattern 7 table 202fd will be described with reference to FIGS. 207 and 208. FIG. FIG. 207 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the fluctuation pattern 7 table 202fd, and FIG. 208A is defined in the first time shortening fluctuation pattern table 202fd2 defined by the fluctuation pattern 7 table 202fd. 208 (b) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents defined in the second time-shorting fluctuation pattern table 202fd3 defined by the fluctuation pattern 7 table 202fd. FIG.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 208 (a), the contents of the first time variation pattern table 202fd 2 for time reduction will be described. The first time variation pattern table 202fd2 is a variation pattern table to be referred to when the time saving condition A (time variation A) is set as the gaming state, and a second time variation pattern table 202fd3 (time variation) described later In the case where the player wins a small hit (for example, a small hit C) which is more disadvantageous to the player than the variation pattern table (referred to when the state B (time saving B) is set) The fluctuation time is defined so that the fluctuation time that makes it difficult for the sphere to pass through the specific region 650V is easily set.

  Here, specifically explaining the contents defined in the first time variation pattern table 202fd2, when the special symbol type is the special figure 1 and the lottery result is out, the acquired variation type counter CS1 Regardless of the value of “very short deviation” (a fluctuation time of 0.5 seconds) is defined as a fluctuation pattern, and if the lottery result is a big win, it is a fluctuation pattern regardless of the value of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1. A "very short" (variation time 0.5 seconds) is defined. In other words, when the time saving state A (time saving A) is set, that is, when the lottery of the first special symbol is executed in the state where the lottery of the second special symbol is easy to be executed, 0.5 seconds The variation pattern is configured to be set.

  And, if the type of the special symbol is the special figure 2 and the lottery result is out, “very short out” as the fluctuation pattern (the fluctuation time is 0.5 seconds regardless of the value of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1 Is defined, and if the lottery result is small hitting A or small hitting B, "long or small hitting" (variation time 3 seconds) is specified as the variation pattern, and if small hitting C, the variation pattern is "short hitting" (Variation time 0.5 seconds) is defined. In addition, when the lottery result is a big hit, when the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 is in the range of “0 to 149”, “shortage per unit (variation time 1 second)” is defined as a variation pattern, When it is in the range of "150 to 198", "medium to big hit (variation time 30 seconds)" is defined as the fluctuation pattern.

  By configuring in this way, when the first time-shortening fluctuation pattern table 202fd2 is referred to, that is, in the state in which time reduction A is set as the gaming state, the fluctuation pattern of 3 seconds is set to a small fluctuation pattern When a win A or a small win B is won, the ball is configured to easily pass the specific area 650 V in the V prize winning apparatus 650. On the other hand, when the player wins a small hit C in which a fluctuation pattern of 0.5 seconds is set, the ball enters the second entrance 3640 immediately after the ball enters (a second special symbol lottery is executed Because the small hitting game is executed immediately after), the opening operation of the V winning device 650 ends before the ball flowing down the second flow passage tb is discharged from the second flow passage tb. Can make it difficult to pass through the specific area 650V in the V winning device 650.

  As described above, in the seventh embodiment, after the end of the jackpot game executed based on the passage of the ball through the specific area 650V during the small hit game corresponding to the small hit C, the player is designated as the game state It is configured to be set to the normal state to be disadvantageous, after the end of the jackpot game to be executed based on having won the other small hit (small hit A, small hit B), as a gaming state A time saving state (time saving A or time saving B) which is advantageous to the player is set.

  As described above, when time saving A is set as the gaming state, a variation pattern is set with reference to the first time variation pattern table 202fd2, and a small winning which is advantageous to the player by the set variation pattern. When winning in the category, a big hit game via a small hit game becomes easy to be executed, so it is easy to set an advantageous gaming state continuously even after the next big hit game is over, and let the player play the game with peace of mind Can.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 208 (b), the contents of the second time-changing variation pattern table 202fd3 will be described. FIG. 208 (b) is a schematic view schematically showing the content of the second time-shorting fluctuation pattern table 202fd3. The second time variation variation pattern table 202fd3 is a variation pattern table to be referred to when the time reduction B is set as the gaming state.

  As shown in FIG. 208 (b), the second time variation pattern table 202fd2 for the second time is set when winning a small hit in the second special symbol lottery with respect to the above-described first time variation pattern table 202fd2. The difference is that the variation patterns (variation time) are different, and the other elements are the same.

  Specifically, if the lottery result is a small hit A, "long / small hit" (fluctuating time 3 seconds) is defined as the fluctuation pattern, and in the case of a small hitting B, "short hit" as the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time 0.5 seconds) is specified, and in the case of a small hit C, when the acquired value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of “0 to 169”, “long / small hit” as fluctuation pattern (variation time of 3 seconds ) Is defined and in the range of “170 to 198”, “short per minute” (a fluctuation time of 0.5 seconds) is defined as a fluctuation pattern.

  That is, when the second time variation pattern table 202fd3 is referred to, that is, in the state where the time reduction B is set as the gaming state, the lottery of the second special symbol is easier to be executed than the normal state, but the small hit Since a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 3 seconds is set when C is won, a game state in which the normal state is more likely to be set as the game state after the end of the next big hit game is more than the state where time reduction A is set. Become.

  As described above, in the seventh embodiment, when the lottery of the second special symbol whose jackpot game is more easily executed based on the lottery result is set as the gaming state in the seventh embodiment, the normal state is set as the gaming state It is possible to set the time saving state easier to execute than that, and as the time saving state, the game state (time saving A) in which the gaming state (time saving state) which becomes advantageous to the player after the next big hit ends is easy to be set again It is possible to set a gaming state (time reduction B) in which the gaming state (time reduction state) that becomes advantageous to the player later is more difficult to set than time reduction A.

  By configuring in this way, when the gaming state (time saving A) that is most advantageous to the player is set, the gaming state shifts to the normal state only when one big hit game is executed. As a result, it is possible to make the player play the game with confidence. Further, even if the time reduction B which is more disadvantageous to the player than the time reduction A is set, the probability that the time reduction A is set after the end of the jackpot game is made higher than when the normal state is set. As a result, it is possible to cause the player to play a game aiming to set the time saving A eagerly.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 208 (b), in the seventh embodiment, even if the player wins a small hit C in which the normal state is set as the gaming state after the end of the big hit game, the ball is the V winning device 650 Because it is configured to be able to select a fluctuation pattern (a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 0.5 seconds) that is difficult to pass through the specific region 650V of Can also make the player interested. In this case, for example, the player may be notified that the small hit C has been won, and then an effect may be performed to ask whether or not the ball passes through the specific area 650V. By configuring in this manner, the player does not pass through the specific area 650V despite winning the small hit, which is a disadvantage to the player, and thus the player is placed in a disadvantageous gaming state. The player can be made aware of the fact that the player can avoid the problem, and a sense of satisfaction can be provided.

  Furthermore, a means is provided to measure the number of times the player wins a small hit which is disadvantageous to the player (the number of times the small hit C is won), and the number of times the execution of the big hit game based on the small hit C is avoided (the small hit of the small hit C It may be configured to display the number of times the ball has not passed the specific area 650V during the game. In this way, it is possible to make it possible for the player to specifically grasp by the player that it was possible to avoid a situation in which the player is set to a disadvantageous gaming state, and at the same time, is the currently set gaming state A? It is possible to make it easy for the player to predict whether the time is short B or not.

  In the seventh embodiment, as described above with reference to FIGS. 208 (a) and 208 (b), the data table (variation pattern is referred to when the variation pattern of the special symbol is selected according to the short time condition set. When the player wins a small hit which is advantageous to the player by changing the table), the gaming state (time reduction A) in which the ball easily passes through the specific area 650 V and the gaming state (time reduction B) difficult to pass It is configured to be settable. In other words, it is possible to set the gaming state (time reduction B) where it is easy for the ball to easily pass through the specific area 650V and the gaming state (time reduction A) which is difficult to ing.

  In addition, in the seventh embodiment, a game state in which a ball easily passes through the specific area 650V at the time of small hit is selected, and a game which is difficult to pass according to the type of the time saving state (time saving A, time saving B) set. The state and are configured to be settable. Specifically, when the time saving A is set as the gaming state, the first time shortening variation pattern table 202fd2 is referred to when selecting the variation pattern of the special symbol. When selecting the variation pattern of the special symbol with reference to the first time variation pattern table 202fd2, 90% at the time of the small hit (100% at the time of the small win A and 100 at the time of the small win B It is configured that the variation time in which the sphere can pass is set in the specific region 650 V in%).

  On the other hand, when the time saving B is set as the gaming state, the second time shortening variation pattern table 202fd3 is referred to when selecting the variation pattern of the special symbol. When selecting the variation pattern of the special symbol with reference to the second time variation pattern table 202fd3, about 28.5% at the time of the small hit winning (100% at the small winning A winning and the small hitting C winning (About 85% of the hour) is configured to set a variation time in which the sphere can pass through the specific region 650V.

  That is, in the seventh embodiment, the variation pattern (variation time) set at the time of winning a small hit is made different according to the type of time saving state to be set, and specified at the time of winning a small hit. Region 650V is configured to differ in the rate at which the variation pattern through which the sphere can pass is selected. Therefore, the probability of executing the jackpot game based on the small hit in the short time state can be made different depending on the type of the short time state set.

  Furthermore, in the seventh embodiment, as the transition condition (time shortening end condition) to shift the time saving state to the normal state, it is set as the transition condition that the number of times of variation of the special symbol reaches 10 times. The transition condition can be made easier to establish as the big hit game is less likely to be executed when the small hit is won if the short time B is set as compared with the case where the short time A is set as the type of the state.

  In the seventh embodiment, as described above, the ball easily passes through the specific area 650V at the time of small hit winning which is advantageous to the player, and the ball easily passes the specific area 650V at the time of small hitting win. The time-short A which is a state, and the time-short B which is in a time-short state where the ball is difficult to pass the specific area 650 V at the time of small hitting, which makes the ball easy to pass the specific area 650 V at the small hitting win which is disadvantageous to the player. Is set, but there is no limitation to this. For example, a small hit type is one, and a variation pattern that allows a sphere to pass through the specific area 650 V is set simply when a small hit is won. The variation pattern table to be referred to may be different according to the type of the time saving state that is set, so that only the ratio is different.

  In addition, transition conditions (time reduction end conditions) for shifting the time reduction state to the normal state may be set differently according to the type of time reduction state to be set, for example, time reduction state advantageous to the player (For example, a time reduction end condition that is more likely to be established when time reduction A) is set than a time reduction state that is more disadvantageous to the player (for example, time reduction end condition established with a smaller number of special symbol variations) You may set it. As a result, it is possible to suppress that the degree of expectation that the big hit game will be executed during the period in which the time saving state is set is greatly different depending on the type of the time saving state being set. Even if is set, it is possible to play the game eagerly aiming at the jackpot game.

  Furthermore, since the game contents expected within a short time can be made different according to the type of time saving state to be set, specifically, the time saving end condition is easily established, and the specific area 650 V is selected at the time of small hitting. If a time saving state in which the ball is easy to pass is set, it is expected to win a small hit during the time saving state, and it is difficult for the time saving end condition to be established When the short time state is set so that it is difficult for the player to pass, it is possible for the player to get bored early in the game because it can be expected that the ball will pass through the specific area 650V in the small hit won during the short time state. It is possible to suppress the

  The small hit type selection 7 table 202fe is a data table used in the same application as the small hit type selection table 202e (refer to FIG. 14) used in each embodiment described above, and when a small hit is won, It is referred to when selecting the type of small hit, and is configured to select different small hit types according to the value of the obtained small hit type counter C5.

  Here, the contents of the small hitting type selection 7 table 202fe will be described with reference to FIG. 206 (b). FIG. 206 (b) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents defined in the small hitting type selection 7 table 202 fe. As shown in FIG. 206 (b), in the small hitting type selection 7 table 202fe, three kinds of small hitting A to small hitting C are selected by the value of the small hitting type counter C5 as the small hitting type of the second special symbol. As specified. Specifically, the small hitting type in the case where the value of the small hitting type counter C5 being acquired is any of "0 to 19" is "small hitting A (10R real time 10 shorts at V passing big hit)" And the small hitting type in the case of any of "20 to 89" is "small hitting B (10R when passing V 10 times a real time 10 big hits)" and in the case of any of "90 to 99" The small hitting type of is "small hitting C (V passing 10 R time short non hit)".

  Then, when the jackpot based on the "small jack A" is finished, "time saving A" is set as the gaming state, and when the jackpot based on the "small jack B" is finished, the "time short B" is set as the gaming state When the jackpot based on the "small jack C" is finished, the "normal state" is set as the gaming state.

  Here, in each small hitting type (small hitting A-small hitting C), when the ball passes V switch 650e3 inside V winning device 650 in small hitting game respectively, it is executed after the small hitting game end The type of jackpot game is set. In the case of "small hit A", 10R real-time short ten times big hit is set, after execution of the small hit A, the jackpot where the variable winning device 65 is set to 10 round (R) open state is executed, After that, 10 short time games (a period until the variation of the special symbol is executed 100 times or the variation of the second special symbol is executed 10 times) are set as 10 short time conditions.

  Moreover, in the case of "small hitting B", 10 rounds (R) real time short 10 times big hitting is set, after execution of small hitting B, variable winning prize apparatus 65 is set to 10 round (R) open state Jackpot is executed, and then 10 short-time games (time until the variation of the special symbol is executed 100 times or the variation of the second special symbol is executed 10 times) is set as the short time state Is configured. In the case of "small hit C", a jackpot of 10R is set, and after execution of the small hit C, a jackpot is executed in which the variable winning device 65 is set to 10 round (R) open state, After the jackpot game, the time saving state is not set, and the normal state is set.

  As described above, it is possible to make the contents of the jackpot game to be executed after the small hitting game end and the gaming state set after the jackpot game different depending on the small hitting type to be selected.

  Specifically, since "small hit A" has a large number of rounds to be executed in the big hit game (10 R), and the time saving state (time short A) that is most advantageous to the player after the big hit game is set. , It is set as the most advantageous small hit for the player, the small B is a large number of rounds to be executed in the big hit game (10R), and is set the same as the small A mentioned above, but the big hit game The time saving state to be set later is set as a small hitting which is more disadvantageous than the small hitting A because “time saving B” is set which makes the player more disadvantageous than the time saving A. The "small hit C" is set as the most disadvantageous small hit for the player because the number of rounds executed in the big hit game is large (10R), but no time saving state is set after the big hit game.

  In the present embodiment, regardless of the type of the small win won, the jackpot game executed when the ball passes the specific area 650V during the small hit game is configured to be a round game of 10 round (R) Thus, the player easily grasps the type of the small win which has been won this time by grasping the number of round games (the number of rounds) to be executed as the big hit game during the big hit game which is executed at the small hit opportunity. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be configured to set jackpot games of different round numbers for each small hitting type. As a result, since the degree of advantage for each small hit type can be largely different, it is possible to play a game while expecting the player to win the most advantageous small hit type.

  In this embodiment, as the termination condition of the time saving state, the variation number of the second special symbol is 10 times (first termination condition) or the variation number of the special symbol (first special symbol and the second special symbol) is A total of 100 times (the second end condition) is set. By configuring in this way, the first special symbol (special figure 1 after the big hit is finished when the big hit is won after the big hit is finished after the big hit is finished, with the number of holding balls of the first special symbol being 1 or more. Even if the change of) is executed, the time saving state does not end. In addition, when the second special symbol (special figure 2) fluctuation is executed, the above-mentioned second termination condition is satisfied and the short time state can be ended, so any special symbol (second time pattern) can be set. The special symbol can be reliably changed a predetermined number of times.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 196, a description will be given of the type of winning made during the time saving state (during the high probability state of the normal symbol) and the ball flow to the second ball entrance 3640. As described above with reference to FIG. 196, in the seventh embodiment, the player wins the game and the electric symbol 3640a changes to the projecting state (see FIG. 198), whereby the ball on the electric symbol 3640a is changed. Flows, and the state in which the ball is likely to enter the second entrance 3640 is constructed.

  Then, when the closing condition of the motor-operated symbol 3640a is satisfied, the motor-operated symbol 3640a executes the closing operation, and at that time, the ball flowing down on the motored symbol 3640a is provided immediately below the motor-operated symbol 3640a. It flows into the one flow passage ta or the second flow passage tb. Here, the balls flowing down the first flow passage ta reach the V winning device 650 provided below the flow passage unit 660 after a flow-down period of 0.5 seconds, and the balls flowed down the second flow passage tb Reaches the V prize winning apparatus 650 after a three second drop period.

  Next, the case where a ball enters the second ball entrance 3640 as a closing condition of the motorized accessory 3640a will be described. When the closing condition of the motorized accessory 3640a is satisfied by the ball entering the second ball entrance 3640, the closing operation of the motorized accessory 3640a is executed and the second special symbol lottery is executed. . Then, the variation pattern (variation time) of the second special symbol is determined in accordance with the lottery result of the second special symbol. In the present embodiment, it is possible to set an advantageous short time (time short A) which is advantageous for the player as a short time state, and a disadvantageous short time (time short B) which is more disadvantageous to the player than the advantageous time short. Different fluctuation patterns are set according to the state.

  In the open scenario 7 table 202ff, the game content (open scenario) of the winning game (big hit game, small hit game) executed when the win (big hit, small hit) is won in the special symbol lottery is winning type In the case of winning a win, an open scenario corresponding to the set hit type is read out, and a hit game is executed.

  Here, the contents of the release scenario 7 table 202ff will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 209 is a schematic view schematically showing the contents defined in the open scenario 7 table 202ff. The opening scenario 7 table 202ff is a winning device (variable winning device) in which a ball can enter in a bonus game (big hit game, small hit game) executed when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit or a small hit. 65, operation data (opening scenario) is defined to make the opening operation of the V winning device 650 different depending on the winning type (large hitting type, small hitting type).

  As described above, the winning devices (variable winning device 65, V winning device 650) and the opening operation content (opening scenario) are opened according to the winning result (large hit or small hit) and the hit type (big hit type, small hit type). By changing the), it is possible to set the degree of advantage of the bonus game in a plurality of stages, so that it is possible to enjoy which type of win for the player even after winning a big or small hit. it can.

  In the release scenario 7 table 202ff, the start interval period during the winning game (time from the start of the winning game to the opening operation of the winning apparatus for the first time corresponding to the winning category (big hit type, small hit type) won ), The opening operation mode of the winning device (type of winning device to be opened, number of seconds for one opening operation (round game), total number of opening operations (round number)), and an interval period between rounds (between rounds) The period during which the winning device set for the game is closed and the end interval period (the period from the end of all round games to the end of the hit game (until the start of a new special symbol variation is permitted) Each period is specified.

  Specifically, "2 seconds" as the start interval period and "the variable winning device 65" as the opening operation mode of the winning device corresponding to the winning type corresponding to "winning" A, D, E, "15 rounds" The opening operation mode for opening “Continuously for 29 seconds” as one round game is defined as “1 second” as an inter-round interval period and “4 seconds” as an end interval period. Therefore, when the jackpot type wins the jackpot of the jackpots A, D, E, the jackpot game in which the variable winning device 65 is opened for 15 rounds is executed, and many prize balls are paid out to the player It becomes a jackpot game. Furthermore, if the jackpot type is a jackpot A or D, the jackpot A or D is considered to be the most advantageous for the player because it is a jackpot in which the time reduction state is set. Become a jackpot to be given a bonus.

  Next, "2 seconds" as the start interval period corresponding to the jackpot types B and C, and "variable winning device 65" as the opening operation mode of the winning device "5 rounds" as one round game In the release operation mode for releasing "Continuously for 29 seconds", "1 second" is defined as the inter-round interval period, and "4 seconds" is defined as the end interval period. Therefore, if the jackpot type wins a jackpot B or C, the jackpot game in which the variable winning device 65 is opened for five rounds will be executed, and the player will be jacked A, D, E It becomes a jackpot game in which about 1/3 of the winning balls of the corresponding jackpot game are paid out.

  Then, the hit type corresponds to small hits A to C, "0.1 second" as the start interval period, and "V winning device 650" as the opening operation mode of the winning device in the "first round" If the ball passes (V passes) the specific area 650 V during the opening operation of the first round (including 0.5 seconds set as the ball-sinking time after the opening operation ends), “variable Opening operation of winning device 65 "in the 2nd-11th round", as 1 round game, the 1st round "open continuously for 1.5 seconds", the 2nd-11th round "open continuously for 29 seconds" As the inter-round interval period, “5 seconds” is defined after the end of the first round, “1 second” is defined otherwise, and “4 seconds” is defined as the end interval period. That is, in the seventh embodiment, when the ball passes the specific area 650V during the small hitting game, thereafter, the jackpot game for 10 rounds is executed.

  In the present embodiment, when the jackpot is won, the jackpot game of opening the variable winning device 65 is executed from the first round, but the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, the small jackpot mentioned above You may provide the big hit type (for example, big hit Z) in which the open scenario similar to hits AC is set. By configuring in this manner, when the jackpot Z is set, the V prize winning apparatus 650 is operated in the same opening operation mode as the small hit in the first round, so for the player this time It is possible to make it hard to understand whether the jackpot was won or the small hit by the symbol.

  In this case, since the jackpot game is already being executed, the ball does not pass through the specific area 650V while the V prize apparatus 650 is opened in the first round of the jackpot Z. , Round game after the second round will be executed. Therefore, when the big hit game in which the opening operation mode similar to the small hit game is set is executed, the effect shown in FIG. 201 (b) is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. Good to configure. As a result, it is possible to make the player think that the jackpot game has been executed due to the ball having passed the specific area 650V during the small hitting game.

  In addition, since it is possible to execute the effect shown in FIG. 201 (b) by actually passing through the specific area 650V during the small hitting game and winning the big hit Z, the effect result in the effect during the race As a result, it is possible to increase the rate at which the rendering result (see FIG. 201 (b)) that is advantageous to the player is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to give a sense of expectation to the rendering during the race.

  In addition, it is displayed in the third symbol display device 81 in the case of winning the jackpot type (for example, jackpot Z) in which the opening operation mode similar to the small hitting game is set and in the case of winning in various small hits In order to make it difficult for the player to distinguish the lottery result by the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 which shows the same effect mode as the variable display (variation effect) and shows the lottery result of the special symbol, The stop display timing of the special symbol and the stop display timing of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are made different, or the stop display timing of the special symbol and the stop display timing of the third symbol are synchronized, In order to make it difficult for the player to distinguish the display of the third symbol in the stop display timing or the period before or after that, the display mode and the display area are changed. Or, at the stop display timing of the special symbol, the symbol for effect displayed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 is switched from the third symbol to the normal symbol for effect corresponding to the fluctuation display of the normal symbol. Good. Thereby, it can be suppressed that the present lottery result is a small hit or a big hit easily grasped in the stop display mode of the third symbol.

  Next, contents of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 203 (b). FIG. 203 (b) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 in the seventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 203 (b), the RAM 203 of the seventh embodiment has a first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, a first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d, a time-span-middle sum counter 203fa, a big hit start flag 203fb, A large hit middle flag 203o, a small hit start flag 203fc, a small hit middle flag 203p, a V passing big hit type storage area 203fd, a V flag 203fe, a short time special 2 counter 203ff, a V passing flag 203fg, and the other memory area 203z. . In addition, the configuration (flag having the same name as the electrical configuration used in any of the above-described embodiments (the same name as “7” added to make it possible to identify that used in the seventh embodiment) The counter, area) is the same as the above-described embodiments in terms of its application, and thus detailed description will be omitted.

  The time saving middle total counter 203fa is a counter for adding up the number of times of fluctuation of the first special symbol and the second special symbol executed during the time saving state, and counting up to 100 times. At this time, the short / middle sum counter 203fa is set to 0, which is an initial value when a jackpot is won (see S10018 in FIG. 215), and is set to 100 at the end of the jackpot (see S10614 in FIG. 222). And, 1 is subtracted every time the fluctuation of the special symbol ends in the time saving state (see S10202 in Figure 217). At this time, the value of the short / middle addition counter 203fa is referred to when it is determined whether or not the termination condition of the time reduction state is satisfied, and when it is determined that the counter value is reduced to 0 (S10207 in FIG. 217). : Yes), the normal state is set as the gaming state (S10208 in FIG. 217).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the number of times of adding the variation of the first special symbol and the second special symbol in the time saving state reaches 100 times (first end condition) or the second special in the time shortening state The time saving state is configured to end when one of the conditions for the number of variations of the symbol reaches 10 (the second end condition) is satisfied, and whether or not the first end condition among them is satisfied or not In order to determine the time, the time-storing middle sum counter 203fa is used. Note that the value of the time saving / middle adding counter 203 fa is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by a remaining time short count command (see S 10205 in FIG. 217). The remaining-time short-time command is a command transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the audio lamp control unit 113 each time the value of the time-span-middle total counter 203fa is changed.

  The voice lamp control device 113 keeps the number of remaining fluctuations until the first termination condition of the time saving state is satisfied by the remaining short number of times command transmitted from the main control unit 110 every time the value of the time saving middle total counter 203fa is changed. You can get Thereby, the remaining number of short times managed by the game state storage area 223fe of the audio lamp control device 113 deviates from the actual number of remaining fluctuations counted by the time counter 24fa of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise and the like. Even in the case where the error occurs, the deviation can be corrected by the remaining time short command received next.

  Although the voice lamp control device 113 manages the remaining number of short times based on the remaining short number of commands, the remaining short number of commands corresponding to the value of the above-mentioned time-sixth addition counter 203fa, that is, Information indicating the number of remaining fluctuations until the end condition is satisfied is not transmitted to the display control device 114. This is because when the normal game is being performed, the time saving state is shifted to the normal state when the second end condition for the time saving state is satisfied, and the first end condition is In the state where the number of remaining fluctuations until establishment is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the second end condition is satisfied, and the situation where the time saving state is ended is suppressed.

  The jackpot start flag 203 fb is a flag indicating that it is a jackpot game start timing. When the variation of the special symbol whose lottery result is determined to be a big hit is stopped, the big hit start flag 203fb is set to ON (S10017 in FIG. 215). When it is determined that the big hit start flag 203fb is on and it is identified that it is the big hit start timing, it is set to be off (S10603 in FIG. 222). The big hit start flag 203fb is set to be off in the initial state, and is configured to be backed up and maintain the state immediately before the power is turned off when the power is turned off or the like.

  The jackpot middle flag 203o is a flag indicating that a jackpot game is in progress. The determination result is set to ON at the timing when the variation of the special symbol whose jackpot is large is stopped (S10017 in FIG. 215). On the other hand, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the jackpot (when it is determined that the game of the number of rounds corresponding to the set jackpot type is ended), it is set to OFF (S10617 in FIG. 222). The big hit flag 203o is a flag that is set to off in the initial state such as RAM clear, and is maintained by backing up the state immediately before the occurrence of a power failure or the like when a power failure or the like occurs. Are configured to The jackpot flag 203o has the same function as the jackpot flag 203o used in the first embodiment described above.

  The small hit start flag 203fc is a flag indicating that it is the start timing of the small hit game. It is set to ON at the timing when the variation of the special symbol whose judgment result is a small hit is stopped (S10304 in FIG. 218). If it is determined that the small hit start flag 203fc is on and it is identified that it is the start timing of the small hit game, it is set to off (S10703 in FIG. 223). The small hit start flag 203fc is a flag set to OFF in the initial state such as RAM clear, and is held by backing up the state immediately before the occurrence of a power failure or the like when a power failure or the like occurs. It is configured to be.

  The small hit middle flag 203p is a flag indicating that a small hit game is being played. It is set to ON at the timing when the fluctuation of the special symbol whose judgment result is a small hit is stopped (see S10304 in FIG. 218). On the other hand, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the small hit (when it is determined that the game of the set number of rounds of the small hit is ended), it is set to OFF (see S10717 in FIG. 223). The small hit middle flag 203p is a flag that is set to OFF in the initial state such as RAM clear, and is maintained by backing up the state immediately before the occurrence of a power failure or the like when a power failure or the like occurs. It is configured to be.

  The V-pass jackpot type storage area 203fd is a small-hit game when a ball winning a V-winning device 650 passes a specific area 650V (a detection switch detects that the ball has passed the specific area 650V It is a storage area in which data for determining the jackpot type set in the case where it detects (not shown)) is stored. The V-pass jackpot type storage area 203fd stores data values corresponding to the jackpot type corresponding to the small jackpot type being determined, when the variation of the special symbol for which the determination result is a small jackpot is stopped (FIG. 218) See S10302). When the ball flows down the specific area 650V in the V winning device 650 and the ball is detected by the detection switch, the V flag 203fe corresponding to the jackpot type corresponding to the data value stored in the V passage jackpot type storage area 203fd Is configured to be set to on. At the end of the small hit game, the data value stored in the V-pass jackpot type storage area 203fd is cleared. The V-pass jackpot type storage area 203fd is a flag that is set to OFF in an initial state such as RAM clear, and when a power failure or the like occurs, the state immediately before the power failure or the like is backed up Configured to be held by the

  The V flag 203fe is a jackpot type corresponding to the type of small hitting game being executed when the ball flows down the specific area 650V in the V winning device 650 during the small hitting game and the detecting switch detects the ball. The corresponding flag is set to on. At the end of the small hit game, it is determined whether the V flag 203fe is on (see S10712 in FIG. 223) and it is determined that the V flag 203fe is on (S10712 in FIG. 223: Yes), it is turned on. The jackpot type to be executed is determined based on the set flag, and the corresponding jackpot game start (opening scenario based on the jackpot type) is set (S10713 in FIG. 223). The V flag 203fe is a flag that is set to off in an initial state such as RAM clear, and is maintained by backing up a state immediately before the occurrence of a power failure or the like when a power failure or the like occurs. Is configured as.

  The time saving special middle counter 203ff is a counter for counting the number of times of fluctuation of the second special symbol executed during the time saving state up to 10 times. At this time, the special short counter 203ff is set to 0, which is an initial value, when the jackpot is won (see S10018 in FIG. 215), and is set to 10 at the end of the jackpot (see S10614 in FIG. 222). Then, when the variation of the second special symbol ends in the time saving state, 1 is subtracted (see S10204 in FIG. 217). At this time, the value of the special short counter 203ff is referred to when it is determined whether or not the end condition of the short time condition is satisfied, and it is determined that the counter value is decremented to 0 (FIG. S10206: Yes), the normal state is set as the gaming state (S10208 in FIG. 217).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the number of times of adding the variation of the first special symbol and the second special symbol in the time saving state reaches 100 times (first end condition) or the second special in the time shortening state The time saving state is configured to end when one of the conditions for the number of times of variation of the symbol reaches 10 (the second end condition) is satisfied, and whether or not the second end condition among them is satisfied or not A special time counter 203ff is used to determine the time. Note that the value of the hour / minute special second counter 203ff is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the remaining time short number command (see S10205 in FIG. 217). The remaining-time short-time command is a command that is transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the audio lamp control unit 113 each time the value of the hour-time middle-second special counter 203ff is changed.

  Although the voice lamp control device 113 manages the remaining number of short times based on the remaining short number of commands, the remaining short number of commands corresponding to the value of the above-mentioned time counter 2 counter 203ff, that is, 2) It is configured to transmit information indicating the number of remaining fluctuation until the termination condition is satisfied, to the display control device 114. This is because when the normal game is being performed, the time saving state is shifted to the normal state by the establishment of the second end condition of the time saving state, and the player is asked This is to provide the easy-to-understand game by displaying the number of remaining fluctuation until the time saving state ends on the third symbol display device 81.

  The V passage flag 203fg is a flag used to determine the state in which the V flag 203fe is set to on during the small hitting game, and is set to on when the V flag 203fe is set to on Be done. In this embodiment, in the small hitting game, V pass processing (see FIG. 221) corresponding to the ball that first passes through the specific area 650V in the V prize device 650 is set to ON (S10507 in FIG. 221).

  Then, in the V-passing process (see FIG. 221), it is determined whether the V-passing flag 203fg is set to on (S10501 in FIG. 221), and if it is determined to be on (S10501 in FIG. 221: Yes). In the V passage processing (see FIG. 221), the processing of S1050 to S10508 is skipped. Thereby, when a plurality of balls pass the specific area 650V during one small hitting game (when a detection switch (not shown) capable of detecting a ball passing the specific area 650V detects a plurality of balls) Even if), only the V-passing process corresponding to the ball detected first will be executed. Therefore, the process executed during the small hitting game can be simplified, and the V pass command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 a plurality of times, and the V pass management on the voice lamp control device 113 side is complicated. Can be suppressed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 210 and FIG. 211, the playability of the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 210 is a transition diagram schematically showing the flow of the gaming state to be performed subsequently based on the lottery result of the special symbol, and FIG. 211 schematically illustrates the flow of the operation of various devices executed during the small hitting game It is the timing chart shown.

  In the seventh embodiment, a normal state in which a left-handed game in which a ball is shot at a left side area of the game board 13 (see FIG. 195) and a lottery for the first special symbol (special figure 1) is executed. It is possible to set the time-shortened state to execute the right-handed game to launch the ball aiming at the right side area of 13 and execute the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2), and it is possible to set The special symbol lottery is easier to carry out a big hit game.

  Furthermore, one of the time saving state A (time saving A) which is advantageous for the player and the time saving state B (time saving B) which is more disadvantageous to the player than the time saving state A is set as the time saving state. ing. Here, in the present embodiment, when the jackpot game is executed in the state where the time saving state A (time saving A) is set, the normal state is not set (it is difficult to be set) after the end of the big hit game. There is. By configuring in this way, once the time saving state A (time saving A) is set, the normal state is not set as the gaming state unless at least two big hit games are executed, so the time saving state advantageous to the player is It can be built.

  As shown in FIG. 210, in the state where the normal state is set, the game is executed on the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1), and the jackpot is won if the special figure 1 lottery wins the jackpot. In the case of "big hit A" (10% of big hit) among the time-long jackpots, time saving state A (short time A) is set as the gaming state after the big hit game is over and "big hit B" (40% of big hit) In the case, the time saving state B (time saving B) is set as the gaming state after the end of the big hit game, and when it is "big hit C" (50% of the big hit), the normal state is set as the playing state after the big hit game is over Ru.

  In addition, when the special figure 2 lottery is executed during the normal state and the big hit game is executed based on the big hit or the small hit win, the normal state is set after the big hit game is over. Configured. Thereby, the act of executing the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) illegally in the normal state can be suppressed.

  In the state where the time saving state A (time saving A) is set, the special figure 2 lottery is mainly executed. In this special figure 2 lottery, as described with reference to FIG. 205 (c), when the jackpot is won, the time saving state is always set after the end of the jackpot game, so the time saving state A (time saving A) When the jackpot is won, the normal state is never set after the jackpot game is over.

  In addition, even when the small figure wins in the special figure 2 lottery, the fluctuation pattern defined in the first time-shorting fluctuation pattern table 202fd2 referred to in the time-shortening state A (time reduction A) is set, When the player wins the small hit type “small hit C” in which the normal state is set after the end of the big hit game, the ball does not pass through the specific area 650 V in the V winning device 650. Therefore, when the time saving state A (time saving A) is set, a plurality of jackpot games can be executed until the game state is set again to the normal state. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the situation in which the advantageous gaming state is immediately ended although the advantageous gaming state which is advantageous to the player is set, and to make the player play the game with peace of mind. it can.

  It should be noted that when the time saving end condition is satisfied (when the special figure 2 fluctuation is executed 10 times) while the short state A is set at this time, the time saving state is ended and the normal state is set. In the time saving state, it will win a small hit with a probability of about 1/2, and it will continue because a small hit game that can pass the ball to the specific area 650V is executed in 80% of that. As long as a normal game in which a right-handed game is played is performed, the jackpot game can be executed before the time-saving end condition is established. On the other hand, in order to pass the ball to the specific area 650V when winning a specific small hit type, when performing a game in which the right-handed game is not played continuously, the number of times of special figure 2 fluctuation is 10 It is possible to shift to the normal state by reaching. As a result, it is possible to impose a penalty on the player who made an inappropriate game during the time saving state.

  When the small hit A (20%) is won with the time saving state A (time short A) set, the time saving state A (time short A) is again performed after the big hit game based on the small hit winning is executed. Is set, and when the small hit B (70%) is won, the time saving state B (time short B) is set after the jackpot game based on the small hit is executed. In the case of winning a small hit C (10%), as shown in FIG. 208 (a), since a short fluctuation time (0.5 seconds) is set, the specific area 650V during the small hit game The ball never passes.

  Also, when the jackpot is won in the state where the time saving state B (time saving B) is set, the large hitting D (90%) and the big hitting E (10%) as in the time saving state A (time short A) described above. Is set. In addition, when the small winning is won, the second time variation pattern table 202fd3 (see FIG. 208 (b)) is referred to, and the small passing A or the small hitting C is configured so that the ball passes through the specific area 650V. ing.

  Therefore, when the small hit A (20%) is won, after the big hit game based on the small hit is executed, the time saving state A (time short A) is set, and the small hit C is won, After the jackpot game based on the small hit is executed, the normal state is set. Also, as with the time saving state A (time saving A), when the time saving end condition is satisfied (when the special figure 2 fluctuation is executed 10 times), the time saving state ends and the normal state is set. Configured.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 211, the flow of the operation of various devices in the small hitting game will be described. FIGS. 211 (a) to 211 (f) are diagrams schematically showing the flow of various components in the small hit game. As shown in FIGS. 211 (a) to 211 (f), the display control device 114 displays the third symbol display device 81 when the special view variation display in which the small winning is won is executed by the control processing of the main control device 110. During the race, effects (see FIGS. 199 (b) to 202 (a)) are executed on the screen. Then, when t1 (0.1 seconds) elapses after the small hit game is started, the V prize hole solenoid (not shown) is driven for 1.5 seconds in accordance with a predetermined scenario (see FIG. 209).

  A ball which has flowed down a specific area 650 V in the V prize device 650 is detected by a detection switch (not shown), and detected for 4 seconds (V effective period t5) from 1 second after the small hitting game is started When the switch detects the ball, the big hit game is executed after the small hit game ends, and when the opening period t6 (2 seconds) elapses after the big hit game is started, the round game of the first round is started and the specified winning opening 65a is released.

  As described above, in the seventh embodiment, the normal state, the time saving state A, the time saving state B, and the time saving state A are set, and the time saving state B is set in the seventh embodiment. In the case where the variation pattern of the special symbol is set, the data table to be referred to is different.

  And, when the time saving state A is set, when the player wins a small hit (small hit C) which is disadvantageous for the player, the ball does not pass the specific area 650V during the small hit game. The variation pattern is configured to be set. Specifically, as described above with reference to FIG. 196, when the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is executed in the short time state, the flow path (the second flow that can pass the specific region 650V The ball is allowed to flow down the path tb, and the fluctuation time (0.5 second) set when the small hit C is won than the period (3 seconds) required for the ball to pass through the second flow passage tb ) And the time (1.6 seconds) from the start of the small hit game to the end of the opening period of the V winning device 650 are configured to be shorter.

  In addition, when the time saving state B is set, the ball is allowed to pass through the specific area 650V during the small hitting game when winning in the small hitting (small hitting C) which is disadvantageous for the player. The pattern is configured to be set. By configuring in this way, even if the time saving state is set as the gaming state, the advantage degree with respect to the player is largely different only by changing the data table to be referred to when setting the variation pattern. You can

Regarding Electrical Configuration of Voice Lamp Controller 113 in Seventh Embodiment
Next, with reference to FIGS. 212 and 213, the electrical configuration of the audio lamp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 212 is a schematic view schematically showing the contents defined in the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 212, the RAM 223 of the seventh embodiment has a winning information storage area 223b, a first special symbol holding ball number counter 223d, a fluctuation start flag 223fa, a stop type selection flag 223fb, an effect counter 223h, and an SW effective time. A memory area 223fd, a fluctuation time counter 223fd, a game state storage area 223fe, a delay passage state flag 223ff, a long fluctuation flag 223fg, a second entering flag 223fh, a middle hit flag 223fi, and the other memory area 223z. The configuration (flag, counter, area) having the same name as the electrical configuration used in any of the above-described embodiments is the same as that of the above-described embodiments in its application, and therefore detailed description will be omitted. .

  The fluctuation start flag 223fa is a flag indicating that information (variation pattern command) indicating that the fluctuation of the special symbol is started is set, and is set to ON when the fluctuation of the special symbol is started. It is This variation start flag 223fa is based on the information included in the variation pattern command received by the voice lamp control device 113, whether the current special symbol variation is the variation of the first special symbol (special figure 1), the second special symbol It is comprised so that it can be discriminate | determined whether it is a fluctuation | variation of (special figure 2).

  Specifically, fluctuation start flag 223fa receives special pattern 1 fluctuation start flag 223fa1 which is set to ON when it receives a fluctuation pattern command showing special drawing 1 fluctuation, and receives a fluctuation pattern command showing special drawing 2 fluctuation It is formed from the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223fa2 which is set to ON in the case where it is set.

  Then, when the variation pattern command transmitted from main controller 110 is received (S12001 in FIG. 226: Yes), variation start flag 223fa corresponding to the symbol type information included in the received variation pattern command is set to ON. (See S12002 in FIG. 226) When the variable display in the third symbol display device 81 is set, it is set to OFF (see S5102 in FIG. 231 or S5108). When one of the fluctuation start flags 223fa is set to ON, the fluctuation pattern command for display is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command.

  The variation pattern command for display set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and is a command output process (S4102 in FIG. 225) of the main process (see FIG. 225) executed by the MPU 221. Is sent to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that variation display of the third symbol is performed in the third symbol display device 81 with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the fluctuation effect is started.

  The stop type selection flag 223fb is a flag for indicating that a command (stop type command) including information for indicating the stop type of the special symbol variation of this time is received from the main control unit 110, and the main control unit 110 Is set to ON when receiving a stop type command sent from (see S12005 in FIG. 226), and is turned off when the setting of the stop type in the third symbol display device 81 is made (see S5112 in FIG. 231) . When the stop type selection flag 223fb is set to ON, the stop type is set as it is based on the stop type (in the case of a large hit, a large hit type) extracted from the received stop type command.

  The game state storage area 223fe is an area for storing the game state corresponding to the state command when the state command related to the game state is received from the main control device 110. By referring to the information (game state) stored in the game state storage area 223fe, the sound lamp control device 113 is configured to be able to identify the current game state. In this embodiment, since the data is erased when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 is stored in the gaming state storage area 223fe when the power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. The information indicating the current playing state is also erased. However, in the present embodiment, since the status command is set in the startup process (see FIG. 51) of the main control device executed after the power is turned on (S2115 in FIG. 51), the gaming state storage area 223fe is immediately after the power is restored. Information indicating the gaming state set before the power is shut off is stored. Therefore, in the state where the power is supplied to the pachinko machine 10, the sound lamp control device 113 can always identify the gaming state.

  The status command output from the main control unit 110 is received when the presence / absence of reception is determined in command determination processing 7 of the voice lamp control unit 113 (see S4182 in FIG. 226), and it is determined that it has been received. A process is executed in which the gaming state included in the state command is stored in the gaming state storage area 223fe, but in FIG. 226, the processing content is processed according to other commands (S12019 in FIG. 226). And the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  The delay passage state flag 223 ff is a flag for determining the state of the ball flowing down the second flow passage (delay flow passage) tb in the flow passage unit 660. Here, the contents of the delay passage state flag 223ff will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 213 is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the delay path state flag 223ff. As shown in FIG. 213, the delay path state flag 223ff is configured by a storage area of 1 byte, and is configured to be able to specify the ball flow state of the delay flow path by the state of lower 4 bits.

  Specifically, the delay passage entrance ball switch 660e1 for detecting the ball flowing into the second passage (delay passage) 660b is set to OFF, and the delay passage discharge for detecting the ball flowing out from the second passage (delay passage) 660b When the switch 660e2 is set to off, that is, the ball is not passing through the second path (delay path) 660b, the lower 4 bits are "0001" (described as "00" in FIG. 213), In the state where the delay path entering ball switch 660e1 is set to ON and the delay path discharge switch 660e2 is set to OFF, that is, the ball is passing through the second path (delay path) 660b, the lower 4 bits Becomes “0010” (described as “01” in FIG. 213), the delay passage entering ball switch 660e1 is set to off, and the delay passage discharge switch 660e2 is turned on. Have been set state, i.e., in the state where the balls are discharged from the second passage (delay path) in 660b, the lower four bits is "0011" (in FIG. 213 as "02").

  Here, both the delay passage entering ball switch 660e1 and the delay passage discharging switch 660e2 are formed of proximity sensors capable of detecting a ball flowing down the second flow passage tb formed in the second passage 660b. It is configured to be turned on when an object is continuously detected for a predetermined period. And when it stops detecting an object for a predetermined period, it is constituted so that it may be set as OFF.

  Here, when the setting status of the lower 4 bits of the delay path status flag 223ff is "0001", "0010", and "0011" described above, the ball normally flows down the second path (delay path) 660b. Since it is a state that can be set to 0, it is determined that the ball flow is normal.

  On the other hand, when the delay path entering ball switch 660e1 is set to ON and the delay path discharging switch 660e2 is also set to ON, that is, the state in which the ball flows into the second path (delay path) 660b, and the ball is discharged. In the state in which the state and the state are simultaneously detected, the lower 4 bits become "0011" (described as "03" in FIG. 213), and the delay path entering ball switch 660e1 becomes abnormal (described as "-" in FIG. 213). In the state where the delay passage discharge switch 660e2 is set to ON, that is, the sensor for detecting the ball falling condition of the second passage (delay passage) 660b is broken, the lower 4 bits are “0100” (see FIG. At 213, it is described as "04", and it is determined that the ball is in an abnormal state of ball flow.

<Control Process Executed by Main Control Device 110 in Seventh Embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 214 to 224.

  FIG. 214 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 in the seventh embodiment. This timer interrupt process is a periodic process executed every two milliseconds, for example, instead of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31) in the first embodiment.

  Of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 214) in the seventh embodiment, the respective processing of S101 to S103, S105, S107, S110, and S111 correspond to the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 31) in the first embodiment. The same process as each process of S101 to S103, S105, S107, S110, and S111 is performed.

  Also, in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 214), when the process of S103 is finished, the process is next for displaying on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 The special symbol variation process 7 for setting the variation pattern etc. is executed (S191), and thereafter, the process proceeds to the process of S105. In addition, the details of the special symbol variation processing 7 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 215 to 218.

  After the process of S105 is performed, the normal symbol variation process 7 which is a process for performing display in the second symbol display device is performed (S192), and thereafter, the process proceeds to the process of S107. In addition, the details of the normal symbol variation processing 7 will be described later with reference to FIG. After the process of S107 is performed, the V entrance passage process according to entering the ball into the V prize winning apparatus 650 is performed (S193). Thereafter, a V passing process which is executed when a ball winning a prize in the V winning device 650 passes through the specific area 650V is executed (S194), and thereafter, the process proceeds to S110. The details of the V inlet passage processing and the V passage processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 220 and 221.

  That is, in the seventh embodiment, when the ball passes the specific area 650V provided in the V prize device 650 during the small hitting game, a process (2 for executing the big hitting game after the small hitting game is completed) The processing for the variation of the first symbol (special symbol), the second symbol (the point that the V inlet passage processing (S193 in FIG. 214) and the V passage processing (S194 in FIG. 214) are provided as the per-type execution processing) It differs from the first embodiment described above in that the detailed contents of the process relating to the variation of the normal symbol) are made different.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 215, special symbol variation processing 7 (S191) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 215 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation process 7 (S191). The special symbol variation process 7 (S191) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 214) in the seventh embodiment, and the variation display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed in the first symbol display device 37 or The third symbol display device 81 is a process for controlling variable display of the third symbol and the like.

  In addition, in the special symbol variation processing 7 (see S191 in FIG. 215) in the seventh embodiment, the same content processing as the special symbol variation processing (see S104 in FIG. 32) in the above-described first embodiment is also performed. However, for convenience of explanation, the processing of the same content is described with different reference numerals. In addition, it is naturally applicable to each modification content demonstrated in each embodiment mentioned above with respect to the element with the same processing content.

  In the special symbol variation process 7 (S191 in FIG. 215) in the seventh embodiment, first, it is determined whether or not the present is during the jackpot of the special symbol (S10001). As a big hit of the special symbol, during the display showing the big hit of the special symbol (including during the big hit game of the special symbol) in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and during the special symbol The middle of the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game is included. As a result of the determination, if it is during the jackpot of the special symbol (S10001: Yes), the present processing ends.

  If it is not during the jackpot of the special symbol (S10001: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S10002), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing If not (S10002: No), it is determined whether or not the ball has entered the second entrance 3640 (S10003).

  If it is determined that the ball has entered the second entrance 3640 (S10003: Yes), the second entry command is set (S10004), the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop The values of the type selection counter C3 and the small hit type counter C5 are stored in the special symbol holding ball execution area (S10005). Next, special symbol variation start processing 7 for starting variation display in the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S10011). In addition, the special symbol variation start process 7 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the ball has not entered the second entrance 3640 in the process of S10003 (S10003: No), the value (N1) of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d is acquired (S10006). Then, it is determined whether the value (N1) of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d is larger than 0 (S10007). If it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d is 0 (not larger than 0) (S10007: No), this processing is ended.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d is larger than 0 (not 0) (S10007: Yes), the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d (N1 Is decremented by 1) (S10008), and a pending ball number command (special figure 1 pending ball number command) indicating the value (N1) of the first special symbol pending ball number counter 203d changed by calculation is set (S10009). Here, the set ball holding ball number command is configured to include information for indicating that it is a command for indicating the number of holding balls in the first special symbol (special figure 1), and the main control The ball holding ball number command set in the external output process (see S2201 in FIG. 52) executed in the main process (see FIG. 52) of the device 110 is output to the audio lamp control device 113. Thereby, the present holding ball number can be grasped | ascertained for every classification of a special symbol on the audio | voice lamp control apparatus 113 side.

  After setting the special figure 1 holding ball number command by the process of S10009, the data stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is shifted (S10010). Thereafter, the process of S10011 is performed.

  Moreover, in the process of S10002, when it is determined that the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S10002: Yes), the change time of the change display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 elapses It is determined whether or not it has been made (S10012). The fluctuation time of the fluctuation display performed in the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counter CS1 (determined according to the fluctuation pattern command), and this fluctuation time When it is determined that has not elapsed (S10012: No), this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S10012, if the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display being executed has elapsed (S10012: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S10013). The display mode of the stop symbol is preset by the special symbol variation start process 7 (S10011) described later with reference to FIG. When the special symbol variation start process 7 is executed, a lottery of special symbols is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. More specifically, according to the value of the first random number counter C1 it is determined whether it will be the big hit of the special symbol or it will be out, and if it is the big hit of the special symbol, the first hit type counter The jackpot type (jackpot A to C) is determined according to the value of C2.

  In the present embodiment, when the jackpot A occurs, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display device 37. Also, in the case of a small hit, the red LED is lit, and in the case of a small hit, the red LED and the green LED are lit. In addition, although the display of each LED is cancelled | released, when the next fluctuation | variation display is started, it is good also as what makes it light only for several seconds after the stop of a fluctuation | variation.

  After the process of S10013 is finished, when the variation display in progress is started in the first symbol display device 37, the lottery result of the special symbol (the lottery result of this time) performed by the special symbol variation start process 7 is , It is determined whether it is a jackpot of a special symbol (S10014). If the lottery result this time is the big hit of the special symbol (S10014: Yes), an open scenario of the specific winning opening is set based on the big hit type (S10015), and then the start of the big hit is set (S10016). Next, the big hit start flag 203fb and the big hit medium flag 203o are set to ON (S10017), the value of the hour / minute middle sum counter 203fa and the value of the hour / minute middle special counter 203ff are set to 0 (S10018). Transfer to processing. In the process of S10019, a stop command is set (S10019), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S10014 that the current lottery result is not a big hit (S10014: No), the time saving update process (S10020) is executed to determine whether the current lottery result is a small win (S10021). The details of the time reduction processing (S10020) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  If it is determined in the process of S10021 that the current lottery result is a small winning (S10021: Yes), a small hitting start setting process is executed (S10022). Next, the processing of S10019 is executed, and this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S10021 that the present lottery result is not a small winning (S10021: No), the small hitting start setting process (see S10022) is skipped, the process of S10019 is executed, and the present process is ended. Do.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when it is determined that the variation time of the special symbol has passed, and it is determined that the current lottery result is not a big hit, the time reduction processing (S10020) is performed, and then the current lottery result is Although it is configured to determine whether it is a small hit, without being limited thereto, for example, it is configured to execute a time saving update process (S10020) after performing a small hit start setting process (S10022) You may. Furthermore, for example, when the time reduction processing is executed and it is determined that the time reduction processing is ended by the special symbol variation processing this time, when the lottery result of the current special symbol is out, the execution timing of the time reduction processing If the time saving state is ended at (pattern stop timing of the special symbol) and the lottery result of the special symbol this time is a small hit, the time saving state may be ended at the timing when the small hitting game is ended. . Thereby, the time saving state can be set until immediately before the next special symbol variation is started. Further, even when the small hit is won in the final change of the time saving state, the small hitting game can be executed in the state where the time saving state is set.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 216, the special symbol variation start process 7 (S10011) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 216 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation start process 7 (S10011). This special symbol variation start process 7 (S10011) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process 7 (see FIG. 215) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 214), and the first special symbol holding ball storage area Based on the values of the various counters stored in the execution area of 203a, while performing a lottery (judgment judgment) of "big hit of special symbol", "small hit of special symbol" or "out of special symbol", the first symbol This processing is executed when setting information necessary for determining the effect pattern (the change effect pattern) of the change effect performed by the display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81.

  In the special symbol variation start process 7 (S10011), first, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, which are stored in the execution area of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, And each value of small hitting classification counter C5 is acquired (S10101). Next, based on the first random number 7 table 202fd corresponding to the acquired type of special symbol, the lottery result is acquired (S10102). Specifically, in the case of a lottery of the first special symbol based on entering the first entrance 64, the value of the first random number counter C1 and the special symbol 1 random number table 202fa1 (see FIG. 204 (b)) The random number value stored in is compared to determine whether it is a big hit or not, and if it is a lottery of the second special symbol based on entering the ball into the second entrance 3640, the value of the first random number counter C1 And the random number value stored in the special symbol 2 random number table 202fa2 (see FIG. 204 (c)) to determine a big hit or a small hit.

  Next, it is determined whether the lottery result is a jackpot (S10103). When it is determined that the lottery result is a jackpot (S10103: Yes), the jackpot type is acquired based on the first hit type selection 7 table 202fa corresponding to the acquired type of special symbol (S10104). More specifically, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S10101 is compared with the random number value stored in the special view 1 jackpot type selection table 202fb1 or the special view 2 big hit type selection table 202fb2 Among the jackpots (jackpots A to E) of the five special symbols, it is determined what the jackpot type is (see FIG. 205 (b) or (c)).

  In the seventh embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol have the same judgment value determined to be a big hit, but the present invention is not limited thereto, and different random numbers may be used. By configuring in this manner, the random number value determined to be out of place in the first special symbol is determined to be a hit in the second special symbol, and it is possible to suppress the jackpot bias.

  Further, in the seventh embodiment, the number of jackpot random number values is set to be the same for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, but the present invention is not limited thereto, and the jackpot for the first special symbol and the second special symbol The number of random numbers to be determined may be set to be different. In this way, by configuring, the probability of jackpot can be made different between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and when the lottery is executed with the special symbol of the higher jackpot probability, the player Can be expected to have a big hit.

  And the display mode at the time of the usual big hit corresponding to a special symbol type and a big hit type is set (S10105). In the process of S10105, the display mode (lighting state of the LED 37A) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined jackpot type (big hit A to E). Also, in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to stop and display the stop symbol corresponding to the big hit type, the big hit type (big hit A to E) is set as the stop type.

  After that, the jackpot fluctuation pattern is determined based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 (S10106), and the process proceeds to S10113. When the fluctuation pattern is set in the process of S10106, the fluctuation time (display time) of the fluctuation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 stops until it stops at the jackpot symbol. The fluctuation time of the symbol is determined. Specifically, the type of the special symbol acquired, the lottery result, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203, and the variation pattern table of the variation pattern 7 table 202fd, the current game The value defined in the data table corresponding to the state is compared to determine the fluctuation time of symbol fluctuation (see FIG. 207).

  In the process of S10113, a fluctuation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the fluctuation pattern determined in the process of S10106 is set (S10113). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of S10105 is set (S10114). The fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command are stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and are included in the external output process (S2201) executed in the main process (see FIG. 52) of the main control device 110. Is sent to the audio lamp control unit 113. Thereby, the variation display mode (render mode) of the third symbol can be set according to the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol and the stop type on the audio lamp control device 113 side. When the process of S10114 ends, the process returns to the special symbol variation process 7 (S191).

  On the other hand, if the lottery result is not a jackpot (S10103: No), it is then determined whether the lottery result is a small winning (S10107). If it is determined that the lottery result is a small hit (S10107: Yes), a small hit type is acquired based on the small hit type selection 7 table 202fe (S10108). More specifically, the value of the small hitting type counter C5 acquired in the process of S10101 is compared with the random value specified in the small hitting type selection 7 table 202fe, and the small hitting of the special symbol with three types (small Of the hits A to C), it is determined what the small hit type is (see FIG. 206 (b)).

  In the seventh embodiment, the small special win is not selected in the first special symbol (special figure 1) lottery, and therefore, the small special win is selected in the special special symbol lottery. Since it is determined that the lottery of the special symbol this time is the lottery of the second special symbol, the process of determining the type of the special symbol that has won the small hit is not executed, for example, the first special symbol, If any of the second special symbol is configured to win a small hit, after it is determined that a small hit has been won, processing is performed to determine the type of special symbol corresponding to the current lottery, the determination It is good to constitute so that processing which chooses a small hitting classification may be performed according to a result. By configuring in this way, different small hitting types can be settable in the case of winning the small hit with the first special symbol and in the case of winning the small hit with the second special symbol, and the game characteristic Can have a width. In addition, even if it is constituted so that the selection ratio of each small hitting classification may be made different without changing the kind of small hitting which may be set when winning small winning by the first special symbol and the second special symbol. good.

  Next, a display mode at the time of small hit corresponding to the small hit type is set (S10109), and a small hit variation pattern is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 (S10110). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the fluctuation time of the third symbol until the small symbol is stopped in the third symbol display device 81 is determined. In addition, the process performed in S10110 is different in that the lottery result of the special symbol to be a target is replaced with a big hit instead of the big hit of the processing contents of S10106 mentioned above, but the set fluctuation The subsequent processing performed on the pattern (for example, the processing to output to the audio lamp control device 113) is the same, so the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  On the other hand, when the lottery result is not a small hit in the process of S10107 (S10107: No), the display mode at the time of removal corresponding to the special symbol is set (S10111). After that, a fluctuation pattern at the time of detachment is determined based on the number of holding balls (S10112). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the fluctuation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the dislocated symbol is determined. Next, the processing of S10113 and S10114 described above is executed, and the processing returns to the special symbol variation processing 7.

  In this embodiment, in the special symbol variation start process 7 (see S10011 in FIG. 216), the lottery result of the special symbol is configured to be discriminated in the order of “big hit”, “small hit”, and “disengagement” However, the present invention is not limited to this, and “disengagement” may be determined with priority. Such a configuration is effective for reducing the number of determinations repeatedly executed in various processes of the main control unit 110 because the lottery result that is most easily produced as a lottery result of a special symbol is "off". It becomes.

  Further, in the seventh embodiment, in the special symbol variation start process 7 (see S10011 in FIG. 216), the variation pattern command and the stop type command are configured to be set in the same process. The pattern command and the stop type command may be set at different timings. In addition, even when setting is performed in the same process, the stop type command is output after a predetermined period of time when the variation pattern command is output so that the timing of output to the audio lamp control device 113 is not the same. You may.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 217, the time saving number updating process (S10020) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 217 is a flowchart showing the time saving number updating process (S10020). At this time, the short-time update process (S10020) is executed in the special symbol variation process 7 (see FIG. 215) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 214), updates the time-short time, and sets the gaming state to the normal state. It is a process for

  In the time saving number updating process (S10020), first, it is determined whether the value of the time saving / middle adding counter 203fa is larger than 0 (S10201). If it is determined that the value of the hour-time middle sum counter 203fa is not larger than 0 (is 0) (S10201: No), that is, if it is determined that the current gaming state is the normal state, the number of time saving is updated Since there is no need, this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the time-span middle sum counter 203fa is larger than 0 (S10201: Yes), that is, when it is determined that the current gaming state is the time-slow state, The process (S10202-S10209) for performing the process of (1) is performed.

  In the process of S10202, the value of the hour-and-hour middle total counter 203fa is decremented by 1 (S10202), and then it is determined whether the present special symbol variation is a variation of the second special symbol (special figure 2) (S10203). If it is determined that the current variation is the second special symbol (special figure 2) (S10203: Yes), the value of the hour counter 12 special counter 203ff is decremented by 1 (S10204), and the process proceeds to S10205. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S10203 that the current variation is not the second special symbol (is the first special symbol) (S10203: No), the process of S10204 is skipped and the process proceeds to S10205.

  In the process of S10205, a remaining-time short-time command indicating the value of the hour / short / middle counter (the hour / short / middle addition counter 203fa and the hour / short / middle 2 counter 203ff) changed by calculation is set (S10205). The remaining-time short-time number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and an external output process (S2201) of the main process (refer to FIG. 52) of the first embodiment It is transmitted to the lamp control device 113.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the value of the hour-short-medium special counter 203ff is 0 (S10206), and when it is determined that the value of the hour-short-medium special counter 203ff is not 0 (S10206: No), next, time-shortening It is determined whether the value of the summation counter 203fa is 0 (S10207). When it is determined in the process of S10207 that the value of the hour-and-time middle sum counter 203fa is not 0 (S10207: No), this process is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S10206 that the value of the hour-and-hour special 2 counter 203ff is 0 (S10206: Yes), or in the process of S10207, it is determined that the value of the hour-and-hour total counter 203fa is 0. In the case (S10207: Yes), the gaming state is set to the normal state (S10208), and the values of the hour counter 2 counter 203ff and the hour counter 2 203fa are all set to 0 (S10209), and this processing is ended. .

  As described above, in the present embodiment, a plurality of time saving end conditions for ending the time saving state are set, and the processing for ending the time saving state when any of the time saving end conditions is satisfied (normal state Is configured to execute the process of setting. Specifically, when the number of times of special symbol variation (total number of variations) obtained by adding the number of variations of the first special symbol and the number of variations of the second special symbol in the time saving state reaches a predetermined number, ie, time shortening The value (for example, 100) set to the hour / hour middle sum counter 203fa when the state is set is subtracted every time the special symbol variation is executed, and the time saving end condition is satisfied when the value becomes 0. When the number of times of fluctuation of the second special symbol in the time saving state reaches a predetermined number of times, that is, when the time saving state is set, the value (for example, 10) set in the time saving 2 middle counter 203ff is 2 Special symbol (special 2) It is subtracted each time the change is executed, and the time saving end condition that is satisfied when the value becomes 0, and the time saving state ends when any of the time saving end conditions is satisfied. Are configured to

  By configuring in this manner, the lottery of the second special symbol in which the lottery more advantageous to the player is executed than the lottery of the first special symbol is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) while the time saving state is set. ) Can be performed reliably. In the present embodiment, the above-described two time saving end conditions are provided. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and three or more time saving end conditions may be set. Further, in the big hit of the special symbol which is a trigger for setting the time saving state, the value for establishing the time saving end condition may be varied according to the type of the big hit that has been won. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the time saving state is ended when any one of the plurality of time saving end conditions is satisfied, but the present invention is not limited to this. The ending condition may be set in advance, and the time saving state may be ended when two of the time saving ending conditions are satisfied. By setting the conditions for ending the time saving state in a complicated manner as described above, it can be made difficult for the player to grasp how long the time saving state (advantage game state advantageous to the player) continues. It is possible to play a game with a sense of tension.

  Further, as described above, when setting a plurality of time saving end conditions, a value corresponding to the time saving end condition that is most easily established is provided as an effect of notifying the player of the period until the time saving state ends. It suffices to execute an effect to be notified. In the present embodiment, in the state in which the time saving state is set, the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol is executed by the right hitting game, so the remaining number of short time notification performed during the time saving state Is configured to notify a value of the time until the time shortening end condition is satisfied based on the number of times of variation of the second special symbol (special figure 2) among the plurality of time shortening end conditions (FIG. 199 (b Remaining short time notification area Dm6))).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 218, the small hitting start setting process (S10022) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 218 is a flowchart of the small hitting start setting process (S10022). The small hitting start setting process (S10022) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process 7 (see FIG. 215) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 214), and the small hitting type (small hitting A to C) It is a process for setting the start of a small hit game (the game content (operation scenario) of a small hit game to be executed this time) based on the).

  Here, the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh embodiment changes the V winning device 650 into an open state in which the ball can win (easy) when the small hitting game is started, and the ball winning in the V winning device 650 is By passing the specific area 650V, the jackpot game is executed after the small hitting game is over.

  That is, in the gaming state in which the small hitting game is executed, the jackpot is executed as compared to the advantageous state in which the ball can be won in the V winning device 650 (a winning ball can be obtained) and the normal gaming state. It is configured to be in an advantageous state where the possibility is high.

  In the small hitting start setting process (S10022), first, an open scenario (operation scenario) corresponding to the small hitting type is set (S10301). This operation scenario is set with reference to the open scenario 7 table 202ff based on the small hit type set with reference to the small hit type selection 7 table 202fe at the time of winning the small hit.

  After that, the jackpot type according to the small hit type is set in the V-pass jackpot type storage area 203fd (S10302). More specifically, based on the small hitting type and the small hitting type selection 7 table 202fe, the V passing jackpot type (big hit D to E) is determined. As described above with reference to FIG. 206 (b), if the small hitting type is the small hitting A, it is determined that "10 rounds short 10 times big hit, time shorting A" as the V passing jackpot type. If the type is small hit B, it is determined that "10 rounds short 10 times big hit, time reduced B", and if the small hit type is C, it is determined "10 rounds short hit non hit" (Fig. 206 (B)).

  Next, the start of the small hit is set based on the small hit type (S10303), and the small hit start flag 203fc and the small hit middle flag 203p are set to ON (S10304). Thereafter, the process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 219, normal symbol fluctuation processing 7 (S192) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 219 is a flowchart showing the normal symbol variation process 7 (S192). This normal symbol variation process 7 (S192) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 214), and is associated with the second symbol variation display performed in the second symbol display device and the second ball entrance 3640. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the motorized accessory 3640a and the like.

  In the seventh embodiment, a plurality of hit types can be set as the hit type of the normal symbol (the second symbol), and the operation pattern (open scenario) of the motorized part 3640a according to the set hit type. Are configured to differ. As a result, when the player wins a normal symbol, the motorized jack 3640a can be opened and closed with a plurality of operation patterns, which makes it difficult for the player to predict the timing at which the motored jack 3640a is operating. be able to.

  Furthermore, in the seventh embodiment, the ball is easier to enter the second entrance 3640 when the motorized part 3640a is in operation (it is easier to enter the ball than the state in which the motorized part 3640a is not operating). ), And the balls flowing down on the motorized part 3640a at the timing when the operation of the motorized part 3640a is finished differ depending on the flow-down position (the first channel ta, the second channel) It is configured to be discharged to tb) (see FIGS. 195 to 198).

  And the ball which has flowed down the second flow passage tb is configured to easily pass the specific area 650V in the V winning device 650 during the small hitting game than the ball which has flowed down the first flow passage ta. . As described above, in the present embodiment, the ease of entering the ball into the second ball entrance 3640 can be varied by changing the release operation contents of the motorized prize 3640a (second ball entry) Set the first open state where the ball is easy to enter into the opening 3640 and the second open state where the ball is less likely to enter into the second entrance 3640 than the easy to enter state), The ease of passage of the sphere can be varied (a first induction state in which the sphere easily passes into the specific area 650V, and a second induction state in which the sphere is less likely to pass into the specific area 650V than the first induction state, Can be set).

  That is, in the seventh embodiment, a plurality of hit types can be set as the hit type of the normal symbol (the second symbol), and the operation pattern (open scenario) of the motorized part 3640a according to the set hit type. By making the different, it is possible to make the easiness of establishment of each condition different with respect to each of a plurality of conditions for having a bonus to the player, so that one variable means ( It is possible for the player to have an interest in the operation content of the electrically operated part 3640a).

  In addition, as a structure which makes the easiness of establishment of a plurality of game conditions different in this manner, the configuration other than the configuration of the seventh embodiment may be used. For example, variable means in which a plurality of operation patterns are set is Instead of the character 3640a, it may be a winning device (for example, the variable winning device 65) in which an operation pattern is set at the time of jackpot winning.

  In this normal symbol variation process 7 (S192), first, it is determined whether or not the current moment is in the middle of hitting a normal symbol (second symbol) (S801). As the middle of the normal symbol (the second symbol), the opening and closing control of the motorized accessory 3640a attached to the second entrance 3640 is performed while the display indicating the hit is made in the second symbol display device. Included. As a result of the determination, if it is in the middle of the hit of the normal symbol (second symbol) (S801: Yes), this processing is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is not inside the normal symbol (the second symbol) (S801: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device is changing (S802), and the second symbol display device If the display mode is not changing (S802: No), it is then determined whether data (the value of the second random number counter C4) is stored in the normal symbol holding ball execution area (S803).

  In the process of S803, when it is determined that the data is not stored in the normal symbol holding ball execution area, that is, the condition for starting the fluctuation of the normal symbol (the second symbol) is not newly established (S803: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the data is stored in the normal symbol holding ball possible area, that is, if it is newly determined that the condition for starting the variation of the normal symbol (the second symbol) is satisfied (S803 : Yes) Next, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 stored in the normal symbol holding ball execution area is acquired (S804).

  Then, based on the value of the second hit random number counter C4 acquired in the process of S804 and the second hit random number 7 table 202fc, a lottery result of whether or not a normal symbol is hit is obtained (S805). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second random number 7 table 202fc. As described above, if the current gaming state is the high probability state (time reduction state) of the normal symbol, if the value of the second random number counter C4 is in the range of "0 to 79" If it is in the range of "80 to 98", it is determined that it is B per common drawing, and if it is a value of "99", it is determined that it is out. Also, if the current gaming state is the low probability state (normal state) of the normal symbol, if the value of the second random number counter C4 is a value of "0", it is determined as A per common drawing, If it is a value of "1", it will be determined that it is per common drawing B, and if it is "2-99", it will be determined that it is off (refer FIG. 206 (a)).

  Next, it is determined whether the lottery result of the normal symbol acquired by the processing of S805 is the hit of the normal symbol (A per common figure or B per common figure) (S806), and it is a hit of the common symbol. If it is determined (S806: Yes), the hit display mode is set (S807), and the process proceeds to S809. In the process of S807, after the variation display in the second symbol display device is finished, the symbol of "o" is lit and displayed so that the hit type can be identified as the stop symbol (stop display mode) of the second symbol. To set.

  On the other hand, in the process of S806, when it is determined that the symbol is normally out (S806: No), the display mode at the time of out is set (S808). In the process of S 808, after the variation display in the second symbol display device is finished, the symbol “x” is set to be lit and displayed as a stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of removal is completed, the process proceeds to the process of S809.

  When the process of S 807 or S 808 is completed, it is determined in the process of S 809 whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state (short time state) of the ordinary symbol (S 809), the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state of the ordinary symbol If it is the time saving state) (S809: Yes), the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display in the second symbol display device is set to 3 seconds (S810), and this processing is ended. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is not the high probability state (time reduction state) of the normal symbol (S809: No), the fluctuation time of the variable display in the second symbol display device is set to 30 seconds (S811), and this processing is performed. finish.

  In the seventh embodiment, when the time saving state is set, a shorter variation time is set as the second symbol variation time than when the time saving state is not set (when the normal state is set). It is configured as follows. As a result, since it is possible to increase the number of times of drawing the second symbol per unit time in the time saving state than in the normal state, it is possible to efficiently execute the time saving game.

  In the seventh embodiment, when the time saving state is set, the probability of hitting the normal symbol (the second symbol) is higher than that in the normal state, and the variation time of the normal symbol (the second symbol) is By shortening the operation pattern of the electrically operated part 3640a and making it easy for the ball to enter the second entrance 3640, the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is easier to be executed than in the normal state. However, it is only necessary to be configured so that the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is easier to be executed in the time-shortened state than in the normal state, for example, the time-shortened state in comparison with the normal state The shorter the variation time of the normal pattern (the second pattern), and the other may be the same, or the time reduction state may increase the probability of hitting the normal pattern (the second pattern) more than the normal state, otherwise It may be the same, it is normal condition The operation pattern of more electric combination of even time reduction conditions 3640A, spheres into the second ball entrance opening 3640 so as to facilitate ball entrance, otherwise may be the same.

  On the other hand, in the process of S802, if the display mode of the second symbol display device is changing (S802: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display being executed in the second symbol display device has elapsed. (S812). In addition, the fluctuation time here is a time preset by the processing of S810 or the processing of S811 before the fluctuation display is started in the second symbol display device.

  In the process of S812, if the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S812: No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S812, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed (S812: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device is set (S813). In the process of S813, if the lottery of the normal symbol becomes a hit, and the display mode is set by the process of S807, the "o" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device (lighting display Set to be On the other hand, if the lottery of the normal symbol is out and the display mode is set by the process of S 808, the “x” symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lit display) on the second symbol display device Is set as When the stop display is set by the processing of S813, the second symbol display is displayed when the second symbol display update processing (see S2208) of the main processing (see FIG. 52) in the first embodiment is executed next. The variable display in the device ends, and the stop symbol (the second symbol) is stopped on the second symbol display device in the display mode set in the process of S807 or S808.

  Next, when the variable display under execution in the second symbol display device is started, it is determined whether the current lottery result of the ordinary symbol (present lottery result) is a hit of the ordinary symbol (S814). If the lottery result this time is an out-of-order symbol (S 814: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if the current lottery result is a normal symbol hit (S814: Yes), it is determined whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a high symbol probability state (time saving state) (S815).

  In the process of S815, when the pachinko machine 10 is not in the high probability state (short time state) of the normal symbol (S815: No), the open period of the motorized jack 3640a attached to the second entrance 3640 is 0.2 seconds. The release count is set to 1 (S816), and the process proceeds to S818. On the other hand, if the pachinko machine 10 is a high probability state (time reduction state) of a normal symbol (S815: Yes), a command per common drawing is set (S851), and the hit type set this time and the current gaming state The operation pattern of the corresponding motorized product 3640a is set (S817), and the process proceeds to S818.

  In the process of S818, the opening / closing control start of the motorized accessory 3640a attached to the second entrance 3640 is set (S818), and this process is ended. When opening / closing control start of the motorized part 3640a is set by the process of S818, the motored part is executed when the motored part opening / closing process (see S2206) of the main process (see FIG. 52) of the main control device 110 is performed. The opening and closing control of the object is started, and the opening and closing control of the motorized accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the process of S816 or the process of S817 end.

  Next, the V entrance passing process (S193) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 220 is a flowchart showing this V inlet passage processing (S193). This V inlet passing process (S193) is a flowchart showing the V inlet passing process (S193) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 214).

  In the V entrance passing process (S193), it is first determined whether a ball passing sensor (not shown) for detecting that the ball has won in the V winning device 650 is on (S10401). This ball passing sensor is a detection means that is turned on when the ball passes. Specifically, the proximity sensor disposed in proximity to the ball flow path is configured such that the period required for the ball to flow down the detection area of the ball passage sensor is a predetermined period (for example, 30 milliseconds). The proximity sensor is configured to turn on (output an on signal) when the proximity sensor continuously detects an object for 30 milliseconds. Thereby, for example, even if a state where a ball is detected at intervals of less than 30 milliseconds appears due to noise generated in the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to suppress a defect that the state is determined to be a ball passing state. can do.

  When it is determined in the process of S10401 that the ball passage sensor is not on (S10401: No), the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S10401 that the ball passage sensor is on (S10401: Yes), it is determined whether the V prize winning apparatus 650 is in the open period (S10402).

  If it is determined in the process of S10402 that the V winning device 650 is in the open period (S10402: Yes), a V entrance passage command is set (S10403), and the process is ended. The V entrance pass command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and an external output process (S2201) of the main process (refer to FIG. 52) of the main control unit 110 generates voice. It is transmitted to the lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the V entrance passage command, it counts the spheres that have passed through the V entrance, and transmits a command for causing the display control device 114 to execute an effect based on the V entrance passage. In this way, it is possible to execute an effect in a small hit game based on entering the ball into the V prize device 650.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the V winning device 650 is not in the open period (S10402: No), an error command is set because the ball is won for the V winning device 650 despite the fact that the game is not small hitting. (S10404) After that, this processing ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 221, the V passage process (S194) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 221 is a flowchart showing the V passage process (S194). This V passage process (S194) is a process executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 214) in the seventh embodiment.

  In the V-passing process, first, it is determined whether or not the V-passing flag 203fg is on (S10501). If it is determined in the process of S10501 that the V-passing flag 203fg is on (S10501: Yes), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S10501 that the V passage flag 203fg is not on (S10501: No), it is determined whether or not V passage is present (S10502). That is, it is determined whether the ball has passed the V winning switch 650 e 3 of the V winning device 650 or not. If it is determined in the process of S10502 that there is no V passage (S10502: No), this process ends.

  In the process of S10502, when it is determined that the V passage is present (S10502: Yes), it is determined whether or not the V passage valid period is in progress (S10503). When it is determined that the V-pass valid period is under (S10503: Yes), the V-pass jackpot type value stored in the V-pass jackpot type storage area 203fd is acquired (S10504), and the acquired V-pass jackpot The V flag 203fe corresponding to the type is set to ON (S10505). Then, a V passage command is set (S10506).

  Next, the V passage flag 203fg is set to ON (S10507), and then the time-span-middle total counter 203fa and the time-storing center special counter 203ff are set to 0 (S10508), and this processing is ended.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the V-pass valid period is not in progress in the process of S10503 (S10503: No), an error command is set (S10509), and the process ends. If the ball passes through the V prize winning switch 650e3 when the V valid period is not in progress, it is considered that the ball is winning to the V prize winning switch 650e3 illegally. In this case, by setting an error command in the process of S10505, an output of an error is executed, and it is possible to detect a fraud.

  Next, the jackpot control process 7 (S2282) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 222 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process 7 (S2282). This jackpot control process 7 (S2282) is executed instead of the jackpot control process (S2204) in the main process (see FIG. 52), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot state of the special symbol, it is according to the jackpot It is a process for opening or closing the execution of various effects and the corresponding winning opening (the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650).

  In the jackpot control process 7 (see FIG. 222, S2282), first, it is determined whether the jackpot of the special symbol is started (S10601). Specifically, if the big hit start flag 203fb is set to ON by the process of S10017 of the special symbol variation process 7 (see FIG. 215), it is determined that the big hit of the special symbol is started. If the jackpot of the special symbol is started in the process of S10601 (S10601: Yes), an opening command is set (S10602). Then, the jackpot start flag 203fb is set to off (S10603), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, when the jackpot of the special symbol is not started in the process of S10601 (S10601: No), it is determined whether or not the jackpot of the special symbol is in progress (S10604). As a big hit of the special symbol, during the display showing the big hit of the special symbol (including during the big hit game of the special symbol) in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and during the special symbol The middle of the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game is included. In the process of S10604, if it is not during the jackpot of the special symbol (S10604: No), the present process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S10604, when it is determined that the jackpot of the special symbol is in progress (S10604: Yes), the process of S10605 is executed. In the process of S10605, it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S10605). In the process of S10605, when it is determined that it is the start timing of a new round (S10605: Yes), the corresponding winning opening (specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or based on the open scenario 7 table 202ff) The V winning opening 650a) of the V winning device 650 is opened (S10606), and a round number command indicating the number of rounds to be newly started is set (S10607). After the round number command is set, this processing ends. The round number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S2201) of the main process (see FIG. 52) executed by the MPU 201 in the first embodiment. Is sent to the audio lamp control unit 113. When the audio lamp control device 113 receives the round number command, the audio lamp control device 113 transmits a display round number command according to the round number to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display round number command, a new round effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  Although the details will be described later, in the seventh embodiment, when the continued jackpot is executed in the voice lamp control device 113, a display round number command according to the cumulative number of round numbers is transmitted. Become. Therefore, the accumulated number of rounds in the continued jackpot in the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. This makes it possible for the player to recognize that the jackpot has continued for a long time, so that the interest of the player can be improved.

  On the other hand, in the process of S10605, if it is not the start timing of a new round (S10605: No), the corresponding winning opening (specific winning opening 65a of first variable winning device 65 or V winning opening 650a of V winning device 650) It is determined whether the closing condition is satisfied (S10608). Specifically, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed after opening the corresponding winning opening (the specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650), or When the first variable winning device 65 or the V winning device 650 has won a predetermined number (for example, 10 in total) of balls, it is determined that the closing condition is satisfied.

  In the process of S10608, when the closing condition of the corresponding winning opening (specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650) is satisfied (S10608: Yes), the corresponding winning The mouth (the specific winning hole 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or the V winning hole 650a of the V winning device 650) is closed (S10609), and the process is ended. On the other hand, when the closing condition of the corresponding winning opening (the specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650) is not satisfied (S10608: No), the ending effect is started It is determined whether it is timing (S10610). The start timing of the ending effect is the start timing of the ending effect when 15 rounds are finished and the open / close door 65f1 is closed and the waiting time (3 seconds in this embodiment) which is the ball discharging time has elapsed. It is determined as

  In the process of S10610, when it is determined that it is the start timing of ending effect (S10610: Yes), an ending command is set (S10611), and this process is ended. The ending command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and among the external output processing (S2201) of the main processing (see FIG. 52) executed by the MPU 201 in the first embodiment. Are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. When the audio lamp control device 113 receives the ending command, it transmits the ending command for display to the display control device 114. When a display ending command is received by the display control device 114, an ending effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S10610 that it is not the start timing of ending effect (S10610: No), it is determined whether it is the end timing of ending effect (S10612). In the process of S10612, when it is determined that it is not the ending timing of the ending effect (S10612: No), this process is ended.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S10612 that it is the end timing of ending effect (S10612: Yes), it is determined whether or not the special game being executed is a big hit C (S10613). In the process of S10613, if it is not determined that the big hit C (5R time short non hit big hit) (S10613: No), 100 is set to the hour / hour middle sum counter 203fa, 10 is set to the hour / hour special second counter 203ff (S10614), It transfers to the process of S10615. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S10613 that the jackpot is C (5R time short nonstop) (S10613: Yes), the process of S10614 is skipped and the process proceeds to S10615.

  In the process of S10615, a state command corresponding to the state after the big hit is set (S10615). Then, the end of the jackpot is set (S10616), the middle jackpot flag 203o is set to OFF (S10617), and then the process ends.

  Next, small hitting control processing 7 (S2283) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 223 is a flowchart showing the small hitting control process 7 (S2283). This small hitting control process 7 (S2283) is executed instead of the small hitting control process (S2205) in the main process (see FIG. 52) in the first embodiment, and the pachinko machine 10 is in a small hit state of the special symbol In the case where it is, to execute various effects according to the small hit, and to open or close the corresponding winning opening (specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650) It is a process.

  In small hit control processing 7 (S2283 in FIG. 223), first, it is determined whether a small hit of a special symbol is started (S10701). Specifically, if the small hit start flag 203fc is set to ON, it is determined that the small hit of the special symbol is started. In the process of S10701, when a small hit of a special symbol is started (S10701: Yes), an opening command is set (S10702). Then, the small hit start flag 203fc is set to off (S10703), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S10701, when the small hit of the special symbol is not started (S10701: No), it is determined whether the small hit of the special symbol is in progress (S10704). As a small hit of the special symbol, during the display showing the small hit of the special symbol (including the small hit of the special symbol) in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, It includes the middle of the predetermined time after the small hitting game end of the special symbol. In the process of S10704, when the small hit of the special symbol is not in progress (S10704: No), the present process is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, in the process of S10704, when it is determined that the small hit of the special symbol is in progress (S10704: Yes), the process of S10705 is executed. In the process of S10705, it is determined whether it is the V winning opening opening timing (S10705). In the process of S10705, when it is determined that the V winning opening opening timing is determined (S10705: Yes), the corresponding V winning opening (V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650) is opened based on the opening scenario 7 table 202ff. (S10706), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S10705, if it is not the V winning opening opening timing (S10705: No), it is determined whether the closing condition of the corresponding V winning opening (V winning opening 650a of V winning device 650) is satisfied (S10707) . Specifically, the closing condition is satisfied when the opening scenario set for the small hitting game is ended, or when a predetermined number (for example, a total of 10 balls) of balls are won in the V winning device 650. To determine.

  In the process of S10707, when it is determined that the closing condition of the corresponding winning opening (V winning opening 650a of V winning device 650) is satisfied (S10707: Yes), the corresponding winning opening (V winning of V winning device 650) The mouth 650a) is closed (S10708), and the process ends. On the other hand, when the closing condition of the corresponding winning opening (V winning opening 650a of V winning device 650) is not satisfied (S10707: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of ending effect (S10709). If it is determined in the process of S10709 that it is the start timing of ending effect (S10709: Yes), an ending command is set (S10710), and this process is ended. The ending command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and among the external output processing (S2201) of the main processing (see FIG. 52) executed by the MPU 201 in the first embodiment. Are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. When the audio lamp control device 113 receives the ending command, it transmits the ending command for display to the display control device 114. When a display ending command is received by the display control device 114, an ending effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S10709 that it is not the start timing of ending effect (S10709: No), it is determined whether it is the end timing of ending effect (S10711). In the process of S10711, when it is determined that it is not the ending timing of the ending effect (S10711: No), this process is ended.

  In the process of S10711, when it is determined that it is the end timing of ending effect (S10711: Yes), it is determined whether the V flag 203fe is set to ON (S10712), and the V flag 203fe is not set to ON If it is determined that (S10712: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the V flag 203fe is set on (S10712: Yes), an open scenario based on the jackpot type corresponding to the contents of the V flag 203fe is set (S10713), the jackpot start flag 203fb, the jackpot The medium flag 203o is set to ON (S10714), the V flag 203fe is set to OFF (S10715), the V passage flag 203fg is set to OFF (S10716), and the small hitting medium flag 203p is set to OFF (S10717) , End this process.

  Next, with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 224, the motorized product opening / closing process 7 (S2281) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110 in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 224 is a flowchart showing the motorized product opening / closing process 7 (S2281). The motorized product opening / closing process 7 (S2281) is a process executed in place of the motorized product opening / closing process (S2207) in the main process (see FIG. 52) in the first embodiment.

  In the motorized part opening / closing process 7 (S2281), first, it is determined whether the opening / closing control setting of the motorized part 3640a attached to the second entrance 3640 is in progress (S10801). If it is determined that the opening / closing control setting of the motorized accessory 3640a attached to the second entrance 3640 is not in progress (S10801: No), the present processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the opening / closing control setting of the motorized accessory 3640a attached to the second ball entrance 3640 is being set (S10801: Yes), at the opening timing of the motorized accessory 3640a attached to the second ball entrance 3640 It is determined whether there is any (S10802). If it is determined that it is the opening timing of the motorized accessory 3640a attached to the second ball entrance 3640 (S10802: Yes), the motorized accessory 3640a attached to the second ball inlet 3640 is opened (S10803), A special character release command is set (S10804), and then the process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S10802 that the opening timing of the motorized accessory 3640a attached to the second entrance 3640 is not the open timing (S10802: No), then the electromotive role attached to the second entrance 3640 It is determined whether it is the closing timing of the object 3640a (S10805). If it is determined that it is the closing timing of the motorized accessory 3640a attached to the second ball entrance 3640 (S10805: Yes), the motorized accessory 3640a attached to the second ball inlet 3640 is closed (S10806). A special property closing command is set (S10807), and then the process ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not the closing timing of the motorized accessory 3640a attached to the second ball entrance 3640 (S10805: No), next, the opening / closing control of the motorized accessory 3640a attached to the second ball entrance 3640 It is determined whether it is the end timing of (S10809). If it is determined that it is the end timing of the opening / closing control of the motorized accessory 3640a attached to the second entrance 3640 (S10809: Yes), a popular drawing end command is set (S10810), and then this processing ends. Do. Also, in the process of S10809, even when it is determined that it is not the end timing of the opening / closing control of the motorized accessory 3640a attached to the second entrance 3640 (S10809: No), the present process is terminated.

<Control Process Executed by Voice Lamp Controller 113 in Seventh Embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 225 to FIG. First, the main processing in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. This main process is a process to be executed instead of the main process (see FIG. 59) in the sixth embodiment (and the first embodiment), and the main process (FIG. 6) in the sixth embodiment (and the first embodiment) It is a process for performing the process similar to 59).

  Among the main processes (see FIG. 225) in the seventh embodiment, the processes of S4101 to S4111 and S4114 to S4118 respectively correspond to the main processes (see FIG. 59) in the sixth embodiment (and the first embodiment). The same processing as each processing of S4101 to S4111 and S4114 to S4118 is executed. Further, in the main process (see FIG. 225) in the seventh embodiment, after the process of S4111 is executed, the effect update process is executed (S4181). The effect updating process (S4181) is for performing a process for changing the content of the currently executed effect (the previously set fluctuation display) during effect execution.

  After executing the effect update process (S4181), the command determination process 7 is performed to perform a process according to the command received from the main control apparatus 110 (S4182). The details of the command determination process 7 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the process proceeds to step S4183. In the process of S4183, the variable display setting process 7 is executed (S4183). In the fluctuation display setting process 7 (S4183), in order to execute the fluctuation effect in the third symbol display device 81, the fluctuation pattern command for display is generated and set based on the fluctuation pattern command received from the main control device 110 . As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The details of the variable display setting process 7 (S4183) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Then, after executing the variable display setting process 7 (S4183), the ball passage monitoring process is executed (S4184). Details of the ball passage monitoring process (S4184) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In addition, it is determined whether or not 1 ms or more has elapsed since the main processing was started, or the current processing of S4101 is executed (S4101), and 1 ms or more has not elapsed (S4101: No) And the processing of S4102 to S4111 and S4181 are not performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 226, the command determination processing 7 (S4182) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 226 is a flowchart showing this command determination process 7 (S4182). This command determination process 7 (S4182) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 225) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. Do. Further, in this process, when a winning information command is received from the main control device 110, the start of continuous notice effect by the third symbol display device 81 is also determined.

  In command determination processing 7 (S4182), first, the first command received from the main control device 110 among unprocessed commands is read out from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and changed from the main control device 110. It is determined whether a pattern command has been received (S12001). If the variation pattern command is received (S12001: Yes), the variation start flag 223fa of the symbol type corresponding to the received variation pattern command is set to ON (S12002), and the variation pattern type is received from the variation pattern command Are extracted (S12003), and the processing returns to the main processing. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and is referred to when the variation display setting process 7 (see FIG. 231) described later is executed. And it is used in order to set the fluctuation pattern command for indication which notifies the start of fluctuation production and the fluctuation pattern classification to display control 114.

  On the other hand, when the fluctuation pattern command has not been received (S12001: No), it is next determined whether or not the stop type command has been received from the main control device 110 (S12004). When the stop type command is received (S12004: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223fb of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S12005), and the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S12006). Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and is referred to when the variable display setting process 7 (see FIG. 231) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the fluctuation effect.

  On the other hand, when the stop type command has not been received (S12004: No), it is next determined whether or not the ball holding ball number command has been received from the main control unit 110 (S12007). And when the holding ball number command is received (S12007: Yes), the value contained in the received holding ball number command, that is, the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 ( The number of times of suspension N1 of the variable display in the special symbol is extracted and stored in the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223d of the voice lamp control device 113 (S12008). Further, in the process of S12008, a display holding ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the value of the updated first special symbol holding ball number counter 223d is set. After the process of S12008 ends, the process returns to the main process.

  Here, the special figure 1 reservation ball number command is transmitted from the main control unit 110 when the ball enters the first entrance 64 (start winning combination) or when the drawing of the special symbol is performed Therefore, every time a start winning is detected, or each time a lottery for a special symbol is performed, the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223d of the voice lamp control device 113 of the main control device 110 is processed by S12008. It can be adjusted to the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d. Therefore, even if the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223d of the voice lamp control device 113 deviates from the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise etc. At the time of detection or lottery of special symbols, the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223d of the voice lamp control device 113 may be corrected and adjusted to the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 it can. When the process of S12008 is executed, a display holding ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the value of the updated first special symbol holding ball number counter 223d is set. Thereby, in the display control device 114, the number-of-held-balls number design according to the number of held balls is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the process of S12007, if the ball holding ball number command has not been received (S12007: No), it is then determined whether a winning information command has been received from the main control unit 110 (S12009). If it is determined that a winning information command has been received (S12009: Yes), winning information based on the received winning information command is stored in the winning information storage area 223b (S12010), and then the process returns to the main processing.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S12009 that no winning information command has been received (S12009: No), it is then determined whether a winning related command has been received (S12011) and a winning related command is received. If it is determined (S12011: Yes), the winning related process 7 is executed (S12012), and this process ends. The hit-related processing 7 (S12012) causes the third symbol display device 81 to execute the effect display corresponding to the jackpot game or the small hit game executed when the jackpot or the small hit is won as a result of the drawing of the special symbol. The processing corresponding to various commands transmitted from the main control unit 110 when the jackpot or the jackpot is won is executed.

  Here, the content of the win-related processing 7 (S12012) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 227 is a flowchart showing the contents of the hit related process 7 in the seventh embodiment. When this hit related process (S12012) is executed, it is determined first whether or not the jackpot start command has been received (S12101). If it is determined that the jackpot start command has been received (S12101: Yes), the display jackpot start command is set (S12102), and the process ends. The display jackpot start command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and the command output process (S4102) of the main process (see FIG. 225) executed by the MPU 221 in the seventh embodiment. ) Are sent to the display controller 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display jackpot start command, the display control device 114 displays an effect indicating the start of the jackpot on the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot start command has not been received (S12101: No), it is then determined whether a round number command has been received (S12103). When it is determined in the process of S12103 that the round number command has been received (S12103: Yes), the display round number command is set based on the number of rounds (S12104), and the process ends. In the seventh embodiment, since the information indicating the number of rounds is transmitted from the main control device 110 as the number of rounds command, the number of rounds command for display is set based on the received number of rounds command. If, in order to reduce the volume of command data transmitted from the main control device 110, information for indicating that a new round has been started from the main control device 110 is transmitted as a round update command, When the round update command is received in the RAM 223 of the lamp control device 113, a round number accumulation counter for accumulating the number of received round update commands is provided, and based on the value of the round number accumulation counter, the voice lamp control device 113 Calculate the current number of rounds, and set the number of rounds command for display. It may be.

  If it is determined in the process of S12103 that the round number command has not been received (S12103: No), it is then determined whether or not the big hit end command has been received (S12105). When it is determined in the process of S12105 that the big hit end command has been received (S12105: Yes), a big hit end command for display is set (S12106), and this process is finished.

  If it is determined in the process of S12105 that the big hit end command has not been received (S12105: No), it is determined whether the small hit start command has been received (S12107).

  If it is determined in the process of S12107 that the small hitting start command has been received (S12107: Yes), the small hitting start process is executed (S12108), and this process is ended. The details of the small hitting start process (S12108) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Here, the contents of the small hitting start process (S12108) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 228 is a flowchart showing the contents of the small hitting start process in the seventh embodiment. When this small hitting start process (S12108) is executed, first, it is judged whether or not the long fluctuation flag 223fg provided in the RAM 223 is on (S12201), and it is judged that the long fluctuation flag 223fg is on In the case (S12201: Yes), the value of the delay path state flag 223ff is read (S12202). Next, it is determined whether the value of the delay path state flag 223ff is "01" (S12203). If it is determined in the process of S12203 that the value of the delay path state flag 223ff is "01" (S12203: Yes), a small hitting start display command indicating a small hitting with high V expectation is set (S12204) , Then return to the hit related processing 7.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S12201 that the long variation flag 223fg is not on (S12201: No), the process proceeds to the process of S12205. Also, in the process of S12203, also when it is determined that the value of the delay path state flag 223ff is not "01" (S12203: No), the process proceeds to S12205.

  In the process of S12205, a small hit start command for display indicating a normal small hit is set (S12205), and then the process returns to the hit related process 7.

  Referring back to FIG. 227, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S12107 that the small hitting start command has not been received (S12107: No), it is determined whether the small hitting end command has been received (S12109). If it is determined in the process of S12109 that the small hitting end command has been received (S12109: Yes), a small hitting end command for display is set to execute an effect suggesting the end of the small hitting game (S12110), This process ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S12109 that the small hitting end command has not been received (S12109: No), it is determined whether the V entrance passing command has been received (S12111). If it is determined in the process of S12111 that the V inlet passage command has been received (S12111: Yes), a display V inlet passage command is set (S12112), and the process ends. If it is determined in the process of S12111 that the V inlet passage command has not been received (S12111: No), it is determined whether the V passage command has been received next (S12113).

  If it is determined in the process of S12113 that the V passage command has been received (S12113: Yes), a display V effect command for indicating an effect based on the ball entering the V switch 650e3 of the V winning device 650 is set ( S12114), this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S12113 that the V passage command has not been received (S12113: No), the process ends.

  Referring back to FIG. 226, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S12011 that a hit-related command has not been received (S12011: No), it is next determined whether a stop command has been received (S12013). If it is determined that the stop command has been received (S12013: Yes), the stop display of the third symbol is set (S12014), and it is then determined whether the long variation flag 223fg is on (S12015). If it is determined that the long fluctuation flag 223fg is on (S12015: Yes), the long fluctuation flag 223fg is set to off (S12016), and then the process returns to the main processing. If it is determined in the process of S12015 that the long fluctuation flag 223fg is not on (S12015: No), the process of S12016 is not performed, and the process returns to the main process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the stop command has not been received in the process of S12013 (S12013: No), it is then determined whether the time-saving effect related command has been received (S12017). If it is determined that the time-shortening effect related command has been received (S12017: Yes), the time-shorting effect related process is executed (S12018), and then the process returns to the main process. The details of the short time rendering related process (S12018) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S12017 that the time-saving effect related command has not been received (S12017: No), a process according to the other commands is executed (S12019), and then the process returns to the main process.

  Next, the contents of the time-saving effect related process (S12018) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 229 is a flowchart showing the contents of the time-saving effect related process (S12018). The time-saving effect related process (S12018) is a process executed in the command determination process 7 (see FIG. 226) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment.

  When the time-saving effect related process (S12018) is executed, first, the gaming state stored in the gaming state storage area 223fe is read (S12301), and then it is determined whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-saving state (S12302) ). If it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is not in the short-time state (S12302: No), the process ends, and the process returns to the command determination process 7 (S4182 in FIG. 226).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S12302 that the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S12302: Yes), then it is determined whether or not a command per popular map is received (S12303), If it is determined that the hit command has been received (S12303: Yes), the type of the current common drawing is analyzed based on the received command of the common drawing (S12304), and time-saving effects corresponding to the type of common drawing are executed. A display time reduction effect start command for display is set (S12305), and the flag 223fi in common drawing is set on (S12306), and then the process returns to the command determination process 7.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S12303 that the command for the common drawing is not received (S12303: No), it is then determined whether the second entering command is received (S12307). If it is determined that the second entry command is received (S12307: Yes), the second entry flag 223fh is set to ON (S12308), and a display effect command for updating the time-saving effect is set (S12309), Thereafter, the process returns to the command determination process 7.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S12307 that the second entry command has not been received (S12307: No), it is then determined whether the end command per popular drawing has been received (S12310). If it is determined that the end command per popular drawing has been received (S12310: Yes), the end processing per normal drawing is executed (S12311), and then the process returns to the command determination processing 7. If it is determined in the process of S12310 that the end command per drawing is not received (S12310: No), the process returns to the command determination process 7 as it is. The details of the end-of-pop-up process (S12311) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the contents of the end-of-round-piece process (S12311) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 230 is a flow chart showing the contents of end-of-round processing (S12311). The per-normal-drawing end process (S12311) is a process performed in the time-revolution-related process (see FIG. 229) performed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment.

  When the per-normal-drawing end process (S12311) is executed, first, it is determined whether the second entering flag 223fh is on (S12401). If it is determined that the second entering flag 223 fh is on (S 12401: Yes), the second entering flag 223 f h is set off (S 12402), and the process proceeds to S 12404. If it is determined that the second entry flag 223 fh is not on (S 12401: No), a display effect command for ending the time-saving effect is set (S 12403), and the process proceeds to S 12404.

  In the process of S12404, the flag 223fi during common drawing is set to OFF (S12404), and then the process ends, and the process returns to the time-saving effect related process (S12018 in FIG. 229).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 231, the variable display setting process 7 (S4183) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 231 is a flowchart showing the variation display setting process 7 (S4183). The variation display setting process 7 (S4183) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 225) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment, and variation presentation in the third symbol display device 81 In order to execute the above, the display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110.

  In the variation display setting process 7 (S4183), first, it is determined whether the special figure 1 variation start flag 223fa1 provided in the RAM 223 is on (S5101). When it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag fa1 is not on (that is, off) (S5101: No), the fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main control unit 110, so S5107 Transfer to processing. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag fa1 is on (S5101: Yes), the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag fa1 is set to be off (S5102), and then the display control device 114 is notified. The display fluctuation pattern command is generated based on the acquired fluctuation pattern type, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S5181). The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that variation display of the third symbol is performed in the third symbol display device 81 with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the fluctuation effect is started. When the process of S5181 ends, the data of the winning information storage area 223b is shifted (S5182), and the process shifts to the process of S5107.

  In the process of S5107, it is determined whether the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag fa2 provided in the RAM 223 is on (S5107). When it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag fa2 is not on (that is, is off) (S5107: No), the fluctuation pattern command is not received from the main control unit 110, so S5111 Transfer to processing. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag fa2 is on (S5107: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag fa2 is set to off (S5108), and then the special display 2 variation display setting process 7 Is executed (S5183). The details of the variation display setting process 7 (S5183) for the special figure 2 will be described later with reference to FIG. After the process of S5183, the data corresponding to the second special symbol in the winning information storage area 223b is shifted (S5110), and the process shifts to the process of S5111.

  In the process of S5111, it is determined whether the special view 1 stop type selection flag fb1 or the special view 2 stop type selection flag fb2 provided in the RAM 223 is on (S5111). When it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag fa1 or the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag fa2 is not on (that is, off) (S5111: No), the fluctuation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 Since there is no state, the present processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag fa1 or the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag fa2 is on (S5111: Yes), the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag fa1 or the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag fa2 is set off Then, the display special figure 1 or special figure 2 stop type command is set based on the stop type extracted from the command (S5113), and then this process is ended.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 232, variation display setting processing 7 for special view 2 (S5183) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 232 is a flowchart showing the variation display setting process 7 (S5183) for the special view 2. The special display 2 variation display setting process 7 (S5183) is a process executed in the variation display setting process 7 (see FIG. 231) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment. is there.

  In the variation display setting process 7 for special figure 2 (S5183), first, the gaming state stored in the gaming state storage area 223fe provided in the RAM 223 is read (S12501), and then the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state It is determined whether or not (S12502). When it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is not in the time-saving state of the normal symbol (S12502: No), the corresponding display variation pattern command is set (S12510), and then the present process is ended.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S12502 that the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S12502: Yes), then it is determined whether the lottery result is a big hit (S12503). If it is determined that the lottery result is a jackpot (S12503: Yes), a display variation pattern command corresponding to the jackpot is set (S12504), and then the process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S12503 that the lottery result is not a big hit (S12503: No), then it is determined whether the lottery result is a small win (S12505). If it is determined that the lottery result is not a small hit (S12505: No), a fluctuation pattern command indicating the end of the time-saving effect is set (S12506), and then the present process is ended.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S12505 that the lottery result is a small hit (S12505: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the change pattern of the small hit is a long change (S12507). When it is determined that the variation pattern of the small hitting is the long variation (S12507: Yes), the long variation flag 223fg is set to ON (S12508), and the process proceeds to the process of S12509. On the other hand, in the process of S12507, when it is determined that the variation pattern of small hitting is not the long variation (S12507: No), the process of S12508 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S12509.

  In the process of S12509, a display variation pattern command corresponding to the small hit is set (S12509), and then the process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 233, the ball passage monitoring process (S4184) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 233 is a flowchart showing this ball passage monitoring process (S4184). This ball passage monitoring process (S4184) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 225) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment, and the third symbol display device 81 produces a fluctuation effect In order to execute, the display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110.

  In the ball passage monitoring process (S4184), first, it is determined whether or not the delay passage entering ball switch (not shown) is on (S12601). If it is determined that the delay path opening switch is on (S 12601: Yes), then it is determined whether the middle hit flag 223fi provided in the RAM 223 is on (S 12602). If it is determined that the flag 223fi is not on (that is, off) per normal drawing (S12602: No), the processing proceeds to S12611.

  If it is determined in the process of S12602 that the medium flag 223fi is on per normal drawing (S12602: Yes), the value of the delay path state flag 223ff is read (S12603), and then the value of the delay path state flag 223ff is " It is determined whether it is 00 "(S12604). If it is determined that the value of the delay path state flag 223ff is "00" (S12604: Yes), the value of the delay path state flag 223ff is set to "01" (S12605), and the process proceeds to S12610. If it is determined in the process of S12604 that the value of the delay path state flag 223ff is not 00 (S12604: No), the process of S12605 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S12610.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S12601 that the delay passage entering ball switch is not on (ie, off) (S12601: No), then whether or not the delay passage discharge switch (not shown) is on. It is determined whether or not (S12606). When it is determined that the delay passage discharge switch is not on (that is, off) (S12606: No), the present process ends. If it is determined that the delay path discharge switch is on (S12606: Yes), the value of the delay path state flag 223ff is read (S12607), and then, whether the value of the delay path state flag 223ff is "01" or not (S12608). If it is determined that the value of the delay path state flag 223ff is "01" (S12608: Yes), the value of the delay path state flag 223ff is set to "02" (S12609), and then the process ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S12608 that the value of the delay path state flag 223ff is not "01" (S12608: No), the process proceeds to S12610. In the process of S12610, a value corresponding to the delay path state flag 223ff is set (S12610), an error command is set (S12611), and then the process ends.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the specific area 650V is provided in the second variable winning apparatus (V prize apparatus) 650 opened during the small hitting game, and the ball is in the specific area 650V during the small hitting game. It is constituted that a jackpot (so-called, per type 2) game is executed by passing.

  In addition, as a path for causing the ball to flow down toward the second variable winning device (V winning device) 650 opened during a small hit game, the first flow path ta where the ball is difficult to pass through the specific area 650V (see FIG. 196) And a second flow passage tb (see FIG. 196) through which the sphere easily passes through the specific region 650V. As a result, the player pays attention to which flow path the ball flows down during the small hitting game. Therefore, since the player can be interested in the movement of the ball flowing down on the game board 13, the interest of the game can be improved.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the balls are distributed to the above-described first flow path ta or the second flow path tb by the opening and closing operation of the motorized part 3640a, so the operation of the motorized part 3640a The player can also be interested in Furthermore, when the ball flows down the second flow passage tb where it is easy to pass the specific area 650V, the ease of winning the ball to the V winning device 650 is configured to be different according to the variation time of the special symbol. ing.

  Further, the variation time of the special symbol to be set is configured to be different according to the set gaming state and the winning small hit type. By configuring in this way, the game state (advantagement time short) that makes it easy to pass the ball to the specific area 650V when winning in the small hit corresponding to the big hit that the time saving state is given after the big hit game end, the big hit end When the player wins a small hit corresponding to the jackpot to which the short time state is given later, it is possible to set a game state (a disadvantage time is short) that facilitates passing the ball in the specific area 650V.

  And, in the present embodiment, by using the above-mentioned advantageous time short and disadvantageous time short configuration, when a jackpot is won once (first hit), a total of three jackpots including at least the first hit are executed. It is configured that the gaming state advantageous to the player continues. As described above, by making it possible to set the gaming state in which the plurality of jackpot games are guaranteed to be executed, it is possible to make the player play the game with peace of mind.

  In addition, in the seventh embodiment, it is configured to win a small hit in the lottery of the second special symbol, the ball to the second entrance 3640 as a trigger to perform the lottery of the second special symbol The motorized jack 3640a is configured to operate so as to facilitate ball entry. Then, based on the ball flowing down on the electric symbol 3640a entering the second entrance 3640, the electric symbol 3640a shifts to the closed state, and at that time, it flows down on the electric symbol 3640a. According to the position (upstream side, downstream side) where the ball had flowed down, it is configured to be distributed to the first flow passage ta and the second flow passage tb.

  Furthermore, in the seventh embodiment, the ball located on the downstream side of the ball flow passage on the motorized prize 3640a is configured to be distributed to the second flow passage tb that is advantageous to the player, and continuously When firing the ball, the ball is configured to be easily introduced into the second flow passage tb.

  Therefore, in order to make the ball flow into the second flow passage tb while the lottery of the second special symbol is being performed, it is necessary to continuously shoot the ball toward the game area of the game board 13 . Therefore, it is possible to suppress an action to obtain an advantageous result by firing the ball at a predetermined timing.

  In the seventh embodiment, the ball having flowed down the second flow passage tb, that is, the ball distributed to the flow passage advantageous to the player by the opening operation of the motorized accessory 3640a is directed to the V prize device 650. Although it is configured to flow down, it may be configured such that a ball that has flowed down the flow path that is advantageous to the player can enter the general ball entry port 63. Thereby, many winning balls can be provided to the player.

  Furthermore, a valve member is provided in the V winning device 650 for changing between the first state where the ball can pass through the specific area 650V and the second state where the ball is difficult to pass, and when the valve member is in the first state The fluctuation time for winning the device 650 and the fluctuation time for winning the V prize device 650 in the second state may be varied in accordance with the time saving state set.

  Also, in place of the V winning device 650, a V-attacker to be opened during the big hit game is provided, and a definite variation state (high probability state of special symbol) is given when the ball passes a specific area in the V-at- tacker The present invention may be applied to a pachinko machine 10.

Eighth Embodiment
Next, an eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 234 to 259. FIG. In the first embodiment described above, the first special symbol lottery (variation) and the second special symbol lottery (variation) can be executed simultaneously (in parallel), as a gaming state Makes it easy to execute the second special symbol lottery (variation) when the latent state (special symbol high probability state, normal symbol low probability state) is set, based on the second special symbol lottery result A small hit game was configured to occur frequently.

  As described above, when the latent state is set as the gaming state, that is, in order to frequently cause the small hitting game in the second special symbol lottery in the low probability state of the ordinary symbol, the low probability state of the ordinary symbol is similarly It was necessary to use the composition which can easily carry out the lottery of the second special symbol even in the normal state (the low probability state of the special symbol, the low probability state of the normal symbol) in which is set. In addition, in the normal state, to prevent the second special symbol lottery from being executed frequently, the fluctuation time is long (for example, 10 minutes) as the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol set in the normal state. It was necessary to set a fluctuation pattern.

  As described above, if the second special symbol for which the lottery is easily executed is configured to execute a long variation time, the player mistakenly executes the lottery for the second special symbol. The lottery of the next special symbol is not executed until the fluctuation pattern ends, and it interferes with the game, so in the first embodiment described above, the lottery (variation) of the first special symbol and the first symbol (2) The drawing (variation) of the special symbol was configured to be performed simultaneously (in parallel).

  On the other hand, in the eighth embodiment, during the big hit game, or during the small hit game which is executed in the low probability state (normal state, latent state) of the normal symbol, the execution opportunity of the second special symbol The ball is configured to be able to enter (become easy to enter) the second entry ball entrance 640 which is As a result, since it is possible to prevent the lottery of the second special symbol from being executed unless the winning game (big hit game, small hit game) is executed, as in the first embodiment described above, the lottery of the first special symbol Even if you do not use the configuration to execute (variation) and the second special symbol lottery (variation) simultaneously (in parallel), the small hitting game based on the second special symbol lottery only during the latent state Can be generated frequently. Therefore, control processing of the gaming machine can be simplified.

  Furthermore, according to the type of winning (large hit, small hit), it is possible to set the type of hit where the ball is easy to enter the second entrance 640 and the type of hit that is difficult to enter. Not only the size of the bonus (number of winning balls) that can be acquired during a hit game when the player wins a hit (big hit, small hit), the ball enters the second entrance 640 during the hit game It is possible to make the player interested in whether or not.

  In addition, in the eighth embodiment, a ball enters the second ball entry port 640 when the player wins a win in the first special symbol lottery and when the player wins a second special symbol lottery. The easy-to-perform hit types are set to be different in proportion. Specifically, it is easier for the ball to enter the second entry ball 640 more easily when the winning type is hit with the second special symbol than when the first special symbol wins the hit. Configured.

  By configuring in this way, it is possible to continue the lottery of the special figure 2 and make it easier to execute once it has shifted to a state where the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) can be executed. Although the advantageous game mode advantageous to the player (the mode capable of executing the drawing of the special figure 2) is set, the advantageous game mode is ended immediately and gives the player an unpleasant feeling. Can be suppressed.

  Further, in the eighth embodiment, the lottery of the second special symbol is configured to have a higher probability of winning as a win (large hit, small hit) than the lottery of the first special symbol. Specifically, in the lottery of the first special symbol without winning a small hit, only the jackpot winning (low probability 1/400) is set, whereas in the lottery of the second special symbol is a jackpot elected The probability of (the low probability 1/400) is the same as the first special symbol described above, but it is set to win a small hit (300/400). Thus, in the eighth embodiment, the lottery of the first special symbol is set by setting the lottery probability of the second special symbol higher than the lottery of the first special symbol so as to be more likely to win a small hit. Rather than the second special symbol lottery is configured to be easier to win (big hit, small hit).

  As a result, when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed based on the ball entering the second entry ball opening 640, it is possible to win a hit (big hit, small hit) with high probability, The hit game based on the lottery of the second special symbol can be executed frequently in a short time.

  Furthermore, in the eighth embodiment, the game is executed so that the ball is easily hit by the second entrance ball hole 640 with a higher probability when the small hit is won than when the large hit is won. doing. Thereby, when the player wins a small hit by the lottery of the second special symbol, the lottery of the second special symbol can be easily performed again after the game is finished.

  Further, in the eighth embodiment, a plurality (four) of the right (special figure 2 suspension) to execute the lottery of the second special symbol is configured to be capable of storing (pending storage), depending on the winning type selected. In addition, the opening operation pattern of the hit game is defined so that the number of pieces that can be held and stored during one hit game is different.

  By configuring in this way, it is possible to play a game eagerly in an attempt to secure more pending storage by one hit game. Here, in the eighth embodiment, the second opening / closing door 3650f attached to the second attacker 3650 to be opened in a hit game is in an open state (a state in which the ball can be guided to the second specified winning opening 3650a) When changing to the closed state (the state where the ball can not be guided to the second specified winning hole 3650a), a flow path in which a part of the ball dropped from above the second opening and closing door 3650f can enter the second ball inlet 640 Is configured to pass through. In this way, during the hit game, the ball can not enter the second attacher 3650 that is opened during the hit game, so that the ball can enter the second ball entry port 640, so that during the hit game, 2) The player can be made to watch the movement of the ball entering the specified winning hole 3650a and the movement of the ball entering the second entrance 640.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 234, the configuration of the game board 13 in the eighth embodiment will be described. FIG. 234 is a front view schematically showing a configuration of the game board 13 in the eighth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 234, the eighth embodiment is different from the configuration of the game board 13 of the first embodiment described above in that the configuration of the right area of the game board 13 is largely different.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 234, the first attacker (variable winning device) 650a is provided above the right side area of the game board 13, and the second attacker 3650 is provided approximately at the center of the right side area. A point where a guiding passage 3660 is provided at the lower position of the second attacker 3650, and a point where a second entrance port 640 accompanied by a motorized accessory 640a is provided at a position where the outlet of the guiding passage 3660 is facing , Is a big difference. About the other than that structure, it is the same as that of the game board 13 (refer FIG. 2) of 1st Embodiment mentioned above, about the same structure, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 234, the ball flow at the time of the right-handed game in the gaming machine of this embodiment will be briefly described. At normal times (other than the hit game when the second attack 3650 is opened), the ball fired toward the right area of the game board 13 by the right-handed game has the open / close door 3650f in the closed state (buried state) It passes so as to enter the general ball entrance 63 while passing through the right play area of the guiding passage 3660.

  In addition, in this general entrance port 63 (general entrance port 63 disposed on the right side of the second entrance port 640), one award ball is set as a benefit provided when the ball enters the ball. There is. Therefore, even if the right-handed game is played in the normal state, the ball does not increase.

  On the other hand, during the hit when the second attacker 3650 is opened, the open / close door 3650f is in the open state (projected state), that is, the ball can flow down on the open / close door 3650f toward the second specified winning hole 3650a. If so, the ball fired by the right-handed game flows down on the open / close door 3650f and wins the second specified winning opening 3650a. Then, the closing condition of the second attacker 3650 (the lapse of a predetermined opening period, or the number of balls awarded to the second specified winning opening 3650a reaches a predetermined upper limit winning number) is established, and the opening / closing door 3650f When changing to the closed state (embedding state), the ball which has flowed down the downstream side of the open / close door 3650f is configured to flow into the guiding passage 3660.

  That is, in the eighth embodiment, the ball passage which can enter the second entrance 640 even if the right-handed game is played at the normal time (other than the hit game when the second attacher 3650 is opened). The ball is constructed so as not to flow down in the guide passage 3660 in which is formed. By configuring in this way, the ball which has flowed down the inside of the guiding passage 3660 does not enter the second ball entry port 640 unless the second attacher 3650 is opened by the hit game, so the drawing of the second special symbol Can limit the time period in which

  Furthermore, a through gate 67 is disposed between the open / close door 3650 f and the inlet of the induction passage 3660, and the ball flowing into the induction passage 3660 passes through the through gate 67 and then flows into the induction passage 3660. It is composed of The induction passage 3660 is configured such that the time required for the sphere to flow down the induction passage is about 2.5 seconds. In this manner, the ball flowing down the flow path that can enter the second inlet 640 is configured to always pass the through gate 67, and reaches the second inlet 640 from the through gate 67. By setting the time until the time is constant (about 2.5 seconds), does the ball passing through the induction passage 3660 enter the second entrance port 640 by the set fluctuation time of the normal pattern? Whether or not can be easily varied.

  Here, in the eighth embodiment, the fluctuation time of the set normal symbol is made different according to the set gaming state. Specifically, a fluctuation time of 2 seconds is set in the low probability state (normal state, latent state) of the normal symbol, and a fluctuation time of 0.1 second in the high probability state of the normal symbol (time reduction state, definite change state) Is configured to be set. As a result, when the low probability state of the normal symbol is set, when the ball passes through the guiding passage 3660, the ball easily enters the second ball entry port 640, and the high probability state of the normal symbol is When set, when the ball passes through the guiding passage 3660, it is possible to make it difficult for the ball to enter the second ball entry port 640.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 235, the structure of the opening / closing door 3650f of the second attacker 3650 of the eighth embodiment will be described. FIG. 235 (a) is a plan view schematically showing the open / close door 3650f in the open state (projected state), and FIG. 235 (b) is the open / close state in the closed state (embedded state) It is the top view which showed the door 3650f typically. As shown in FIG. 235 (a), the open / close door 3650f of the present embodiment extends from the right upper surface 3650y1 of the open / close door 3650f to the upper surface 3650f1 of the open / close door 3650f along the inclination of the open / close door 3650f (see FIG. 234). It is configured to flow out toward the second specified winning hole 3650a.

  The first delay member 3650fa, the second delay member 3650fb, and the third delay member 3650fc are provided so that the ball meanders on the upper surface 3650f1 of the open / close door 3650f, and the flow-down period in which the ball flows down the open / close door 3650f is 1 .2 seconds are configured. This flow-down period (1.2 seconds) is shorter than the period (1.5 seconds) in which the second attacker 3650 is kept open when it is opened by a hit game (big hit B, big hit C, small hit). It is configured to be By configuring in this manner, it is possible to win a ball for the second specified winning opening 3650 a in a hit game in which the second attacker 3650 is opened.

  In the present embodiment, when the hit game of opening the second attacker 3650 is executed, the scenario of the opening operation is set such that the ball can win the second specified winning opening 3650a in all the winning games. However, the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, as an opening operation scenario set during a hit game, an opening operation scenario in which a ball easily wins into the second specified winning opening 3650a, and a ball flows into the guiding passage 3660 An easy open operation scenario may be set.

  In this case, for example, as an opening operation scenario of the second attacker 3650, a period in which the ball flowing down the upper surface 3650f1 of the open / close door 3650f flows down to the position facing the induction passage 3660 (downstream position ZD of the upper surface 3650f1) It is preferable to define an open operation scenario such that 5 seconds) is a period in which the open state of the open / close door 3650f is maintained when the open operation is performed. When the opening operation scenario defined in this way is set, it becomes difficult for the ball to enter the second specified winning opening 3650a during a hit game, and the ball flowing down the upper surface 3650f1 of the open / close door 3650f flows into the guiding passage 3660 It becomes easy to do.

  Thereby, for example, when the winning upper limit number of balls to the second specified winning opening 3650a and the opening upper limit period of the open / close door 3650f are set as the finish condition of the winning game, the second specified winning opening 3650a Since the opening operation in which the ball is hard to win is executed, the hit game can be continued for a long time. Therefore, it is possible to increase the number of balls flowing into the induction passage 3660 during one hit game, and to obtain more special image 2 retention memory.

  Next, when the closing condition of the open / close door 3650f is satisfied, the state shown in FIG. 235 (a) is changed to the closed state (buried state) shown in FIG. 235 (b). In this state, the ball located at the downstream position ZD passes through the through gate 67, and the ball located at the upstream position ZC passes the right area as well as the guiding passage 3660.

  As described above, in the eighth embodiment, the time for the upper surface sphere of the open / close door 3650f to flow down is 1.2 seconds (the upstream position ZC is 0.5 seconds and the downstream position ZD is 0.7 seconds) as described above. It is configured to open the open / close door 3650f for 1.5 seconds in one small hit game. As a result, when the ball that has flowed down first wins the second attacker 3650 and is detected by the detection switch 3650Z, it becomes possible to position the next ball at the downstream position ZD. Therefore, when a small hit game is performed, a ball can be reliably passed in the guidance passage 3660.

  The following configuration may be used instead of the configuration of the present embodiment. That is, the position of the detection switch 3650Z for detecting the ball that has won the second attacker 3650 is positioned on the back side (the position of the modification of FIG. 235) of the second attacker 3650, and from the opening of the second attacker 3650 to the detection switch 3650Z. The distance ZE should be configured to take 0.3 seconds for the ball to pass. By this configuration, even if the distance between the opening and closing door 3650f is shortened, the ball flowing down next can be reliably positioned at the downstream position ZD.

  Furthermore, a plurality of opening patterns of the opening and closing door 3650f which is effective in the small hitting game are prepared, and the second attacher 3650 does not win, but can execute the small hitting game in which the opening period in which the ball can pass through is set. You may configure it. That is, it is possible to execute the game for causing the second attacker 3650 to win a ball and the game for acquiring the reserve storage of the special view 2 using the small hit game.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 236 and FIG. 237, the ball flow of the right area of the game board 13 in the eighth embodiment will be described in detail. FIG. 236 is a schematic view showing a ball flow when the second attacker 3650 is in the open state (projected state), and FIG. 237 is a ball when the second attacker 3650 is in the closed state (embedded state) It is a schematic diagram showing a flow.

  As shown in FIG. 236, when the open / close door 3650f is in the open state (projected state), all the balls fired by the right-handed game are received by the open / close door 3650f (right side area of the game board 13) A door 3650f is provided so as to shield the With such a configuration, when the second attack 3650 is opened and a hit game is executed, it is possible to easily win a ball on the second specified winning opening 3650a simply by playing the right-handed game.

  In addition, when the open / close door 3650f is positioned in the open state (projected state), the inflow port of the induction passage 3660 is blocked by the open / close door 3650f, and the ball can not flow into the induction passage 3660 (difficulty) It is composed of That is, in the eighth embodiment, the function to make the open / close door 3650 f opened by the hit game easy to win the ball to the second specified winning opening 3650 a and the flow down of the ball to the guiding passage 3660 are restricted. And as a means having the

  Next, when the open / close door 3650f is in the closed state (embedded state), the ball fired to the right hitting area in the right hitting game flows down the right area of the guiding passage 3660 (see the arrow in FIG. 237) . Here, in the eighth embodiment, the ball which has flowed down the right hitting area by the right hitting game performed when the open / close door 3650 f is in the closed state (embedding state) can not flow into the guiding passage 3660 (difficult To be).

  Specifically, in the right area of the game board 13, the nail K1 implanted above the open / close door 3650f is below the open / close door 3650f and forms an inflow port of the induction passage 3660. It is configured to be located on the right side (right side in the view of FIG. 237) by a distance Kz (about 10 mm) than the nail K2 that has been inserted. The distance between the nail K1 and the nail K2 in the height direction is one ball (about 15 mm). With this configuration, it is possible to reliably prevent the ball, which has flowed down the right side of the nail K1 by right-handed game, from flowing into the inlet of the guiding passage 3660 formed on the left side of the nail K2.

  Furthermore, the distance in the height direction is shorter than the distance between the nail K1 and the width direction of the second specified winning opening 3650a where the ball that has flowed down to the lower end of the open / close door 3650f can win The second specified winning hole 3650a is configured such that the ball does not win when the open / close door 3650f is in the closed state (embedded state). In the present embodiment, the opening operation of the open / close door 3650f is configured to change the state in which the ball can win a prize in the second specified winning hole 3650a and the state in which the ball can not win (difficult). Other configurations may be used, for example, variable members that can be changed between an open position for opening the opening of the second specified winning opening 3650a and a closed position for closing the second specified winning opening 3650a and an open / close door 3650f. The variable member may be variably controlled so as to be variable in synchronization with the opening operation of the open / close door 3650f.

  In this case, for example, when the open / close door 3650f is in the closed state (embedded state), that is, when the ball does not win the second specified winning hole 3650a, the variable member is variably positioned to the closed position. In the case where the open / close door 3650f is in the open state (projected state), that is, in the state where the winning of the ball to the second specified winning opening 3650a is permitted, the variable part is positioned at the open position. It is good to make variable control. This makes it possible to more reliably prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the ball wins the second specified winning opening 3650a at an unintended timing.

  Furthermore, in the case of using the configuration of the example described above, it is preferable that one variable driving source (for example, a motor, a solenoid, etc.) be used to drive the variable member and the open / close door 3650f. Thus, the two members can be easily driven with regularity. Further, the variable member may be configured to be variable by delaying the grace period in consideration of the flow-down time of the ball with respect to the opening / closing timing of the opening / closing door 3650f. As a result, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the ball which has flowed down to the downstream end of the open / close door 3650f can not win the second specified winning opening 3650a due to the variable operation of the variable member.

  Next, the ball flow when the open / close door 3650f is changed to the closed state (embedded state) while the ball is flowing down on the upper surface 3650f1 (see FIG. 235A) of the open / close door 3650f will be described with reference to FIG. do. As shown in FIG. 237, a nail K2 is implanted below the opening / closing door 3650f and near the position on the downstream side 1/3 of the opening / closing door 3650f, and different flows occur on the right and left sides of the nail K2. A path is formed. Therefore, the ball flowing down on the upstream 2/3 range of the opening and closing door 3650 f flows down the right side area of the guiding passage 3660 when the opening and closing door 3650 f is changed to the closed state (embedded state). On the other hand, when the open / close door 3650f is changed to the closed state (embedded state), the ball flowing down in the downstream 1/3 range of the open / close door 3650f passes through the through gate 67 and the induction passage 3660 Flow into

  The guiding passage 3660 used in the eighth embodiment is formed in a serpentine shape in order to increase the time (flowing time) until the ball reaches the second ball inlet 640 and the inflow of the guiding passage 3660 The time required for the sphere to flow down from the position 3661a to the discharge position 3661b is about 2.5 seconds.

  Then, when the ball passing through the through gate 67 and flowing down the channel ty reaches the second entrance 640 when the ball reaches the second entrance 640, the electric entry 640a enters the second entrance 640 if it is open. If the accessory 640 a is closed, it flows downward toward the out port 66 without entering the second entrance 640.

  In the present embodiment, the first attacker (variable winning device) 650a is provided above the right area, but the present invention is not limited to this, and may be provided below the guiding passage 3660. Thereby, the balls having flowed down the plurality of flow paths can be caused to enter the first attacker (variable winning device) 650a at the same timing.

  Furthermore, a delay member for delaying the flow-down speed of the ball may be provided on the lower surface of the spherical surface of the induction passage 3660 used in the present embodiment.

<About the contents of effects in the eighth embodiment>
Next, characteristic effects performed in the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 238 to FIG. In the eighth embodiment, the right to draw the second special symbol (special figure 2 reserve memory) is configured to be easily acquired during the period when the hit game (big hit game, small hit game) is being executed. In addition, the second special symbol lottery is configured to be easier to win a small hit than the first special symbol lottery. That is, in the state where the normal state is set, the lottery of the first special symbol is executed by the left hitting game, the jackpot is won, the right hitting game is executed when the jackpot game is started, and the jackpot game is opened. A game in which the right to draw the second special symbol (special figure 2 reserve memory) is acquired while winning the ball in the attached attackers (the first attacker 650a, the second attacker 3650) and winning the prize ball (privilege) Is done.

  And, when special figure 2 retention memory is acquired during hitting game, the lottery of the 2nd special symbol (special figure 2) is executed after the ending of hitting game, the drawing result of that special figure 2 is big hit or small hitting If it is, a hit game is executed again. In the eighth embodiment, since it is configured to win a small hit with high probability in the lottery of the second special symbol, once the lottery of the special figure 2 is executed, the lottery of the special figure 2 is executed repeatedly It becomes a game state that is easy to be played.

  Therefore, in the eighth embodiment, an effect for suggesting to the player whether or not the lottery of the special figure 2 is executed (whether or not the lottery of the special figure 2 has been shifted to the executable state) is executed. Are configured to be As a result, the player can play the game while confirming the contents of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player can be provided with an easy-to-understand game.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the special game 2 hold storage can be acquired by executing the hit game (the hit operation in which the second attacker 3650 is opened), so first, FIG. 238 As shown in (a), during the execution of the hit game (the hit operation in which the second attacker 3650 is operated to open), an effect is performed to promote acquisition of the special view 2 hold storage. FIG. 238 (a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed during the jackpot game when the second attacker 3650 is elected to the jackpot C which is a jackpot to be opened.

  As shown in FIG. 238 (a), when the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot C is started, in the guidance display area Dm3, in order to guide the player that the right-hand game is played during the jackpot game, "Right strike" is displayed. Then, in the main display area Dm, an effect that the character 811 collects the key 871 is executed. In this key 871, the effect mode is set such that the number corresponding to the number of reserved memories of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is collected, and the character 811 collects a large number of keys 871, thereby making This is to inform (inform) the player that the number of pending storages in FIG. 2 is large.

  Then, in the main display area Dm, a comment of “collect a key of a treasure” for explaining the game characteristic of the effect is displayed. Although the details will be described later, in this embodiment, the key for collecting the retention memory of the special figure 2 during the jackpot game (collecting the key 871) and collecting the lottery result of the special figure 2 executed after the jackpot game is completed A treasure box 873 (see FIG. 239) is opened using 871, and an effect of notifying the player in the form of the contents of the treasure box 873 is executed.

  At the lower position of the main display area Dm, an acquisition display area Dm12a in which a value related to the number of winning balls acquired during the big hit game is added and displayed, and a round number display area Dm12b showing the current number of round games are formed . Since the example shown in FIG. 238 (a) is immediately after the jackpot game has been started, "00000" is displayed in the acquisition display area Dm12a, and the player does not acquire the prize ball during the jackpot game. Is shown. Then, “round 1” is displayed in the number-of-rounds display area Dm 12 b.

  In addition, in the jackpot game, acquired display areas Dm10a to Dm10d for notifying the player of the number of collected keys 871 are formed at the right position of the main display area Dm. In the effect executed in the present embodiment, one key 871 is configured to be collected each time one reserved memory of the special view 2 is acquired, and therefore the acquired display areas Dm10 a to Dm10 d are maximum. Four keys 871 are configured to be displayed. The acquired display areas Dm10a to Dm10d are also display areas for indicating the number of holding balls in the special view 2.

  Furthermore, a comment is also displayed on the sub-display area Ds to "continue hitting right" for showing the game content to the player, and a second guidance display area formed below the guidance display area Dm3. A diagram schematically showing the configuration in the vicinity of the second ball entrance 640 is displayed in Dm11. As described above, in the present embodiment, since it is configured that it is easier to continuously hold the ball and acquire the holding memory of the special view 2, other effects are provided so as not to provide the player with a disadvantageous game. The comment for showing the game content is displayed in the display mode (display mode which enlarged the size of the character) emphasized rather than the display mode used for. Thus, it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand game to the player by describing in detail the game content to be aimed during the big hit game using the main display area Dm and the sub display area Ds.

  Then, after the display of FIG. 238 (a) is executed, the jackpot game is executed, and when holding storage of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is acquired, the effect contents shown in FIG. 238 (b) Is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. FIG. 238 (b) is a schematic diagram showing a part of effect contents displayed when a ball enters the second ball entrance 640 during the big hit game.

  As shown in FIG. 238 (b), when the ball enters the second entrance 640 during the jackpot game, the ball enters the second entrance 640 in the main display area Dm. An effect indicating that the key 871 has been collected is executed as an effect for notifying the player that the pending storage of FIG. 2 has been acquired, and a comment of “Congratulations” is displayed.

  Further, in the acquired display area Dm10a, a key 871 is displayed to indicate that one key 871 has been acquired. Further, in the second guidance display area Dm11, a specific effect is displayed at a position imitating the second entrance 640 in order to visually notify the player that the ball has entered the ball. Then, in the acquisition display area Dm12a, “00085” is displayed as the number of winning balls acquired during the big hit game, and “2” is displayed in the number-of-rounds display area Dm12b, which indicates that the present is the second round. There is.

  Then, when the jackpot game is over, the screen shown in FIG. 239 (a) is displayed. FIG. 239 (a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of display content displayed during the ending period of the jackpot game. During this ending period, a notification mode (display mode 872 indicating that two keys have been collected) for notifying the player of the total of the number of reserved memories in the special view 2 acquired during the current big hit game is displayed mainly While being displayed in the area Dm, a comment of “right-handed continuation” for indicating that the right-handed game is continued even after the end of the big hit game is displayed in the sub display area Ds.

  Furthermore, even if the jackpot game is over, the display mode of the guidance display area Dm3 during the big hit game is displayed as the display mode of the guidance display area Dm3 in order to make the player continuously play the right-hand game. The display mode is set more emphatically than the reference). Thus, it is possible to reliably notify the player that the right-handed game must be continued even after the big hit game is over.

  After that, when the jackpot game is over and the second special symbol (special figure 2) lottery (variation) is executed, as shown in Figure 239 (b), using the key 871 collected during the jackpot game An effect of opening the treasure box 873 is executed. FIG. 239 (b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of an effect executed when the special view 2 change is executed after the end of the big hit game.

  FIG. 239 (b) is a state in which the special figure 2 variation is being executed, so a variation display indicating that the second special symbol (special figure 2) is being varied and displayed in the special figure 2 display area Dm2. An aspect is displayed. Then, an effect using one of the two keys 871 (special figure 2 hold) collected during the jackpot game is executed. Therefore, the number of keys 871 displayed in the acquired display areas Dm10a to Dm10d decreases from two at the end of the big hit to one.

  In addition, while the effect which is continued from during the big hit game is executed, the acquisition display field Dm12a is always displayed, when the small hitting is elected by the special figure 2 lottery, it wins by making the 2nd attacker 3650 win the ball Information on the number of winning balls is also displayed. As a result, it is possible to easily inform the player of the number of balls acquired during a period (advantage period) in which the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) can be executed.

  Furthermore, the number-of-rounds display area Dm12b is also continuously displayed in the same manner as the above-described acquisition display area Dm12a, and the characters "round extra" are displayed while the game based on the special figure 2 variation is being performed. As a result, it is possible to easily inform the player that the advantageous state is extended and set even after the big hit game is over.

  In the present embodiment, the character "round extra" is displayed for the game period in which the special figure 2 variation can be executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the special figure 2 variation There is provided a summing means for summing the number of winning balls obtained during the playable game period, and the number of winning balls summed by the summing means can be obtained in one round game executed during a big hit game. If it is determined that the number has been reached, the number of rounds displayed during the jackpot game may be increased by one, or a special hit may be made during the game period when the variation can be executed. A small hitting count measuring means for counting the number of times is provided, and the number of rounds displayed during the big hit game when the small hitting count measured by the small hitting count measuring means reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) 1 It may be configured so as to be calculated.

  By configuring in this manner, it is possible to make the player think that the jackpot game is being extended and being executed. Further, in this case, it is preferable that an effect (see FIG. 239 (b)) to open the treasure box 873 is performed using the key 871 even while the jackpot game is being executed. This makes it difficult to determine from the effect being executed whether or not the jackpot game is currently being played, so it is possible to prevent the player from easily predicting the preceding game.

  When the player wins a small hit while the effect shown in FIG. 239 (b) is being executed, as shown in FIG. 240, the treasure box 873 is opened and the effect of exposing the contents of the treasure box 873 is executed. FIG. 240 (a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of effect contents displayed when the player wins a small hit when the normal state is set as the gaming state.

  In this embodiment, when the low probability state (normal state, latent state) of the normal symbol is set as compared to the case where the high probability state (probable change state, time saving state) of the normal symbol is set as the gaming state. Is configured so that it is easier to obtain the special view 2 reserve memory during the small hitting game. And, in the example shown in FIG. 240 (a), since the player wins the small hit in the state where the normal state is set, it indicates that the small hit game which can acquire the special figure 2 hold storage is executed. “V” is displayed as the display mode of the contents of the treasure box 873.

  In addition, there are a plurality of display modes indicating the contents of the treasure box 873 other than "V". For example, when the lottery result of the special figure 2 is out, "x" is drawn and the lottery result of the special figure 2 is special figure 2 If it is a small hit that is difficult to obtain memory, a display mode imitating "?" Is set. In addition, a predetermination process of determining in advance the winning information of the second special symbol stored on hold is executed, and the discrimination result of the predetermination process is a jackpot or a player in the hold information stored on hold. If it is a judgment result indicating that there is a small hit that is advantageous to the other, it is executed by the time the variation of the second special symbol (special figure 2) corresponding to the holding information is executed By using the display mode indicating the lottery result of the special view 2, a display mode is suggested to indicate that the small hit which is advantageous to the jackpot or the player is included in the hold information stored on hold. You may configure.

  Here, as a result of the special figure 2 fluctuation, when winning the big hit which becomes disadvantageous to the player, ie, the big hit where the high probability state (for example, time saving state) of the normal symbol is set after the big hit game ends, FIG. As shown in (b), a display mode imitating "Dokuro" is set as a display mode indicating the contents of the treasure box 873.

  Furthermore, even if the display mode of the key 871 or the display mode of the treasure box 873 is made variable based on the lottery result of the special view 2 executed this time or the prior discrimination result for the suspension information stored on hold. For example, as shown in FIG. 241 (a), it may be configured to display a display mode (a rusted key and a battered treasure box) indicating that the lottery result of the special symbol is out. Thus, the player can be made to predict the lottery result of the special symbol this time before the treasure box 873 is opened, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

  After repeatedly executing each effect shown in FIG. 238 (a) to FIG. 241 (a) described above, when the key 87 is lost (when the reserve storage of the special figure 2 is lost), the advantage period advantageous to the player ends. In order to do this, the ending screen shown in FIG. 241 (b) is displayed. In this ending screen, a value (value displayed in the acquisition display area Dm12a) indicating the number of winning balls acquired in the current advantageous period (period in which the jackpot gaming period and the special figure 2 variation period are merged) The number of times the player has won and is displayed. Then, the display mode of the guidance display area Dm3 for guiding the player to return the game method to the left-handed game is variably displayed on the "left-handed" and at the sub-display area Ds, Display the comment of ".

  In the present embodiment, the display mode of the guidance display area Dm3 is changed so that the game method is switched from right-handed game to left-handed game at the timing when the reserve memory of the special view 2 disappears. ing. That is, in the state where the time saving state is set as the gaming state, when there is a special figure 2 reserve, it guides the right-handed game, and when there is no special figure 2 reserve, it guides the left-handed game ing. As a result, the player can execute the appropriate game without performing the disadvantageous game.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 242, the flow of transition of each gaming state in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 242 is a transition diagram showing a flow of transition of each gaming state in the seventh embodiment. In the seventh embodiment, as will be described later with reference to FIG. 244, there are five types (big hit A to E) of big hit types set when winning a big hit in the first special symbol lottery, and the second There are three types (big hits F to H) of jackpot types set when winning in a jackpot in the special symbol lottery.

  Then, according to the jackpot type set at the time of jackpot winning and the gaming state set at the time of jackpot winning, the gaming state set after the end of the jackpot game is configured to be different. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to make each gaming state shift in a complex manner in the game executed by the pachinko machine 10, and it is possible to suppress the player from being bored with the game early.

  In addition, the semi-advantage game state is set by providing a game state (semi-advantage game state) that is easy to shift to the advantageous game state (latency state) that is most advantageous to the player and a game state that is difficult to shift. In the case where the game is being played, the player can continuously play the game, so the operation of the game can be enhanced.

  As shown in FIG. 242, when the pachinko machine 10 starts playing a game, a game in which the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is performed is executed with the normal state set as the gaming state. Then, when winning the jackpot of the special figure 1, the probability change state is set with a probability of 65% (big hit A, B elected), the time saving state is set with a probability of 25% (big hit E elected), with a probability of 10% The normal state is set (hijack C, D winning).

  Among them, if you win the jackpot C (5%), because the second attack 3650 is open operation in part of the jackpot game, it is possible to obtain the retention memory of the special figure 2 during the jackpot game .

  Therefore, in the case of winning the jackpot that the normal state is set after the jackpot game is finished, the jackpot D (5%) is again played the game to draw the lottery of special figure 1, the jackpot C (5%), A game in which the drawing of the special figure 2 is performed is executed. And, special figure 2 wins small hitting with probability of approximately 75%, with small hitting game which is executed with the low probability state (normal state) of normal design, the retention memory of special figure 2 during the small hitting game Since it is configured to be able to be acquired, when the drawing of the special view 2 is executed in the normal state, a game period in which the special view 2 game can be continued and executed unless the reserve storage of the special view 2 disappears Become.

  In the state where the normal state is set as the gaming state, when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the special figure 2 to be executed, the probability change state is set with a probability of 30% (jackpot F won), with a probability of 35% Latency state is set (big hit G won), and time saving state is set with 35% probability (big hit H won).

  Next, when the probability change state is set, since the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, it is assumed that the small hit is won in the drawing of the special view 2 executed based on the holding storage of the special view 2 Even in the small hit game, it is configured such that it is not possible (hard) to obtain the new special view 2 reserve memory. Therefore, in the eighth embodiment, since the probability change state is a game state more advantageous than the time saving state because the jackpot winning probability of the special symbol is high, it is a state having the reserve memory of the special figure 2, Even if the player wins a small hit in the lottery, a new special memory of the special view 2 can not be obtained, so the gaming state is not favorable to the player.

  If the jackpot is won in the drawing of the special figure 1 in the state where the definite change state is set, the positive change state is set again with a probability of 35% (big hit A elected), and the latent state is set with a probability of 30% ( The jackpot B wins), the normal state is set with a probability of 10% (jackpot C, D elected), and the time saving state is set with a probability of 25% (jacket E wins). Then, when the jackpot is won in the drawing of the special figure 2, the probability change state is set again with a probability of 30% (jackpot F winning), and the latent state is set with a probability of 35% (jackpot G elected), 35% Time saving state is set by probability (big hit H winning).

  Next, since the low probability state of the normal symbol is set when the latent state is set, the player wins a small hit in the drawing of the special figure 2 executed based on the holding storage of the special figure 2 In this case, it is configured to be able to acquire a new special drawing 2 reserve storage during the small hit game. Therefore, in the eighth embodiment, the latent state is a state in which the jackpot winning probability of the special symbol is high and the reserve memory of the special view 2 is obtained, and the small figure wins in the special view 2 lottery. Since it is possible to obtain the new special drawing 2 hold storage, it becomes the gaming state most advantageous to the player.

  When the winning condition is set and the jackpot is won in the drawing of the special figure 1, the latent condition is set again with a probability of 65% (big hit A, B winning), and the normal condition is with a probability of 10%. It is set (hit jack C, D), and the time saving state is set with a probability of 25% (hit jack E). Then, when the jackpot is won in the drawing of the special figure 2, the probability variation state is set with a probability of 65% (jackpot F, G winning), the latent state is set with a probability of 35% (jackpot G winning), 35% The time saving state is set with the probability of (big hit H winning).

  Lastly, when the time saving state is set, since the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, it is assumed that the small hit is won in the drawing of the special figure 2 executed based on the holding storage of the special figure 2 Even in the small hit game, it is configured such that it is not possible (hard) to obtain the new special view 2 reserve memory. Therefore, in the eighth embodiment, in the time saving state, the jackpot winning probability of the special symbol is low, and in the state of having the reserve memory of the special figure 2, even if the small figure wins in the special figure 2 lottery, Since it is not possible to obtain the reserved memory of the special figure 2, it becomes the gaming state most disadvantageous to the player.

  In the state where the time saving state is set, if the jackpot is won in the drawing of the special figure 1, the probability change state is set with a probability of 65% (jackpot A, B elected) and the normal state is set with a probability of 10% ( The jackpot C and D wins) and the time saving state is set again with a probability of 25% (his jackpot E wins). Then, when the jackpot is won in the drawing of the special figure 2, the probability change state is set with a probability of 30% (big hit F elected), the latent state is set with a probability of 35% (big hit G elected), 35% probability The time saving state is set again (big hit H winning).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, in the state where there is no holding memory in the special view 2, it is configured so that the ball can not be newly entered into the second ball entry port 640 regardless of the gaming state. ing. Furthermore, the variation time of the first special symbol is configured so as not to change between the high probability state and the low probability state of the normal symbol. Therefore, in the state where there is no holding memory of the special figure 2, even if the state of the normal symbol is changed, the degree of advantage to the player does not change.

  That is, in the state of executing the fluctuation (lottery drawing) of the special figure 1, the low probability state (normal state, time saving state) of the special symbol becomes the same degree of advantage, and the high probability state (certainty state, latent) of the special symbol Since the jackpot probability of the special symbol is high, the gaming state is more advantageous than the low probability state of the special symbol.

  In addition, in the state where there is a reserve memory of the special figure 2, because it is not possible to acquire the reserve memory of the new special figure 2 in the high probability state of the ordinary symbol, the high probability state of the ordinary symbol (probability state, time saving state) Rather, the low probability state (normal state, latent state) of the normal symbol is a game state more advantageous to the player. Therefore, the gaming state most advantageous to the player is the latent state, and the most disadvantageous gaming state is the short time state.

  Furthermore, when the player wins a jackpot, if you explain about the ratio to shift to the most advantageous latent state for the player, the probability that the latent state is set based on the drawing of the special figure 1 is the most probable state High (30%). Therefore, the positive change state becomes a semi-advantage game state that is likely to shift to the most advantageous advantageous game state (latency state).

Regarding Electrical Configuration in Eighth Embodiment
Next, the electrical configuration of the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 243 to 250. FIG. FIG. 243 (a) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 in the eighth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 243 (a), the ROM 202 of the eighth embodiment is the first random number 8 table 202ga, the first type selection 8 table 202gb, the second random number 8 table 202gc, and the variation pattern selection 8 table 202gd. , Operation scenario 8 has a table 202ge. In addition, the configuration (table having the same name as the electrical configuration used in any of the above-described embodiments (the same name as “8” added to make it possible to identify that used in the eighth embodiment) ) Is the same as that of each embodiment described above in terms of its use, and therefore detailed description will be omitted.

  FIG. 243 is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 in the eighth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 243 (a), the ROM 202 of the eighth embodiment is the first random number 8 table 202ga, the first type selection 8 table 202gb, the second random number 8 table 202gc, and the variation pattern selection 8 table 202gd. , Operation scenario 8 has a table 202ge. In addition, the configuration (table having the same name as the electrical configuration used in any of the above-described embodiments (the same name as “8” added to make it possible to identify that used in the eighth embodiment) ) Is the same as that of each embodiment described above in terms of its use, and therefore detailed description will be omitted.

  The first random number 8 table 202ga is a data table used in the same application as the first random number table 202a used in each embodiment described above, and the value of the first random number counter C1 is the first When it matches with the value of the random number which becomes the jackpot set by the random number 8 table 202ga, it is determined that the jackpot of the special symbol is.

  The first random number 8 table 202ga specifies the number of random numbers that will be the big win in the first special symbol and the second special symbol, but the random number for the second special symbol only will be a small win Are defined (see FIG. 243 (b)). In this way, by making the number of small random numbers different (by setting only one special symbol), a bonus for the player is obtained for the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery. Expectations for jackpots or jackpots) can be varied.

  Here, the contents of the first random number 8 table 202ga will be described with reference to FIG. 243 (b). FIG. 243 (b) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents defined in the first random number 8 table 202 ga. In the first random number 8 table 202ga, a random number value (determination value) determined to be a big hit and a random value (determination value) determined to be a small hit are defined in the drawing of the first special symbol or the second special symbol Data table, which is referred to when obtaining the lottery result in the special symbol variation start process 8 (see FIG. 252) (see S11003 and S11004 in FIG. 252).

  The first random number 8 table 202ga (see FIG. 243 (b)) is a data table in which the correspondence between the value of the first random number counter C1 and the lottery result is defined. Specifically, in the low probability state of the special symbol, “0 to 1” is defined as the range of the judgment value determined to be a big hit (see 202ga1 in FIG. 243 (b)), and the first special symbol is judged to be out of position "2-399" is specified as the range of the judgment value to be calculated (see 202ga2 in FIG. 243 (b)).

  In addition, "2-99" is defined as the range of the judgment value determined to be out of the second special symbol (see 202ga2 in Fig. 243 (b)), and the judgment value of the second special symbol determined to be a small hit "100 to 399" is defined as the range (see 202ga3 in FIG. 243 (b)). Also, in the high probability state (probability state) of the special symbol, “0 to 19” is defined as the range of the judgment value determined to be a big hit (see 202ga4 in FIG. 243 (b)) “20 to 399” is defined as the range of determination values to be determined (see 202ga5 in FIG. 243 (b)). In addition, “20 to 99” is defined as the determination value determined to be out of the second special symbol (see 202ga5 in FIG. 243 (b)), and “100” is determined as the determination value to be a small hit of the second special symbol. To 399 "(see 202ga6 in FIG. 243 (b)).

  When the value of the first hit random number counter C1 acquired based on the start winning combination matches any of the judgment values corresponding to the jackpots specified in the first hit random number 8 table 202ga (see FIG. 243 (b)) If it is determined that the jackpot of the special symbol is matched with any of the determination values corresponding to the small hit, it is determined that the jackpot of the special symbol is hit.

  Next, contents of the first hit type selection 8 table 202gb will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 244 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the first hit type selection 8 table 202gb. In the eighth embodiment, there are five types of jackpot types set when a jackpot is won in the first special symbol (special figure 1) lottery, and the second special symbol (special figure 2) There are 3 types of jackpot types set when a jackpot is won in the lottery, and the opening operation scenario (operation scenario) set during the jackpot game is defined according to the jackpot type. , The game state set after the end of the jackpot game is different.

  Specifically, if the symbol type winning the jackpot is the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the judgment value of the obtained first hitting type counter C2 is "0 to 34", "big hit A" as the big hit type Is set. The “big hit A” is a 10-round probability variation big hit, and the action A is set as an open action scenario (action scenario). The specific contents defined in the operation scenario will be described later using the operation scenario 8 table 202ge described in FIG.

  Further, in the present embodiment, according to the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot, it is specified that the gaming state set after the jackpot game is different, and in the case of winning the jackpot A, the jackpot is won. The gaming state of the normal state (special symbol low probability state, normal symbol low probability state), probability variation state (special symbol high probability state, normal symbol high probability state), or, time saving state (special symbol low probability) If it is a state and a high probability state of a normal symbol), a probability change state is set after the end of the jackpot game, and the gaming state at the time of the jackpot win is a latent state (high probability state of special symbol, low probability state of normal symbol) For example, it is defined that the latent state is set after the end of the jackpot game.

  When the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2 is "35 to 64", "big hit B" is set as the big hit type. The "big hit B" is the same big hit game as the "big hit A" described above (a big hit game in which the action A is set as an open operation scenario (action scenario) at a 10 round probability variation big hit) The game state set after the big hit game is different.

  Specifically, in the case of winning the "big hit B", the gaming state at the time of the big hit is in the normal state (special symbol low probability state, normal symbol low probability state), or, time saving state (special symbol low probability) If the condition, the high probability state of the normal symbol), the probability change state is set after the big hit game is over, the gaming state at the time of the big hit is the positive change state (high probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol) or In the case of the latent state (high probability state of special symbol, low probability state of normal symbol), the latent state is set to be set after the end of the jackpot game.

  Thus, by providing jackpot types in which the game content (operation scenario) of the jackpot game is the same and the gaming state set after the jackpot game is different, the jackpot for the player who is executing the jackpot game It is possible to prevent the gaming state set after the end of the game from being grasped in advance (by the end of the jackpot game). In addition, by making it difficult to predict the gaming state set after the end of the jackpot game depending on the game content of the jackpot game, for example, during the jackpot game the suggestion effect for suggesting the player the gaming state set after the jackpot game is over It is good to provide a suggestion effect execution means for carrying out. By configuring in this manner, the player pays attention to the suggested effect performed by the suggested effect execution means, so that the effect can be enhanced.

  Furthermore, in this case, to provide a suggestion effect setting for setting the effect mode of the suggestion effect to be executed during the big hit game based on the gaming state set after the big hit game end and the big hit game content Good to configure. Specifically, the game contents of the big hit game and the game state set after the big hit game are each ranked in the order that is advantageous to the player, and each rank corresponding to the big hit type won this time is merged ( It is good to constitute so that one production | presentation aspect may be set out of several production | presentation aspects based on the value (information) made to add. Thereby, as the jackpot game progresses (as the game content of the jackpot game becomes clear), it becomes easy to predict the gaming state to be set after the jackpot game end based on the presentation mode of the suggestion effect to be executed, The player can be made to pay attention to the suggested effect over a long period of the jackpot game, and the effect can be further enhanced.

  When the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2 is "65 to 69", "big hit C" is set as the big hit type. In this "big hit C", 10 rounds of big hit games are executed similarly to the "big hit A" described above, but the content of the operation scenario to be set is different, and the first attacker 650 and the second attacker 650 are different. It is a jackpot in which a scenario of operation B in which game contents for opening both of 3650 are defined is set. And, it is usually the big hit where the low probability of the special symbol is set as the game state after the end of the big hit game.

  Specifically, in the case of winning the "big hit C", the gaming state at the time of the big hit is in the normal state (special symbol low probability state, normal symbol low probability state), definite variation state (special symbol high probability state, Normal pattern high probability state), short time state (special symbol low probability state, normal symbol high probability state), or latent state (special symbol high probability state, normal symbol low probability state), ie, jackpot winning Regardless of the game state at the time, it is stipulated that the normal state is set after the end of the jackpot game.

  Next, when the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2 is “70 to 74”, “big hit D” is set. In this "big hit D", the action scenario of the action A is set such that the game content of the big hit game is the same as the "big hit A" described above. Then, similarly to the "big hit C" described above, a low probability of a special symbol is usually set as a gaming state after the big hit game is over.

  Specifically, in the case of winning the "big hit D", the gaming state at the time of the big hit is in the normal state (special symbol low probability state, normal symbol low probability state), definite variation state (special symbol high probability state, Normal pattern high probability state), short time state (special symbol low probability state, normal symbol high probability state), or latent state (special symbol high probability state, normal symbol low probability state), ie, jackpot winning Regardless of the game state at the time, it is stipulated that the normal state is set after the end of the jackpot game.

  If the acquired value of the first hit type counter C2 is "75 to 99", "big hit E" is set. The "big hit E" is the one in which the same big hit game as the "big hit D" described above is executed (10 rounds usually a big hit, a big hit game in which the action A is set as an open operation scenario (operation scenario)), Only the game state set after the big hit game is different from "big hit D".

  Specifically, in the case of winning the "big hit E", the gaming state at the time of the big hit is in the normal state (special symbol low probability state, normal symbol low probability state), definite variation state (special symbol high probability state, Normal pattern high probability state), short time state (special symbol low probability state, normal symbol high probability state), or latent state (special symbol high probability state, normal symbol low probability state), ie, jackpot winning Regardless of the gaming state of the hour, it is defined that the time saving state is set after the end of the big hit game.

  On the other hand, if the symbol type winning the jackpot is the second special symbol (special figure 2) and the judgment value of the acquired first hitting type counter C2 is "0 to 29", "big hit F" is set as the big hit type Ru. The "big hit F" is a big hit game of the same game content as the "big hit A" described above, that is, a 10 round probability variation big hit, and the action A is set as an open action scenario (action scenario). And the game state at the time of jackpot win is normal state (low probability state of special symbol, low probability state of normal symbol), positive change state (high probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol), time saving state (special symbol) Low probability state, normal symbol high probability state), or latent state (special symbol high probability state, normal symbol low probability state), that is, regardless of the gaming state at the time of jackpot win, probability variation after the jackpot game is over It specifies that the state is set.

  If the acquired value of the first hit type counter C2 is "30 to 64", "big hit G" is set. The “big hit G” is a two-round probability variation big hit in which a two-round hit game is executed, and an operation scenario of an operation C is set in which game content for opening the second attacker 3650 is defined. And, when winning the "big hit G", the gaming state at the time of the big hit is the normal state (special symbol low probability state, normal symbol low probability state), definite variation state (special symbol high probability state, ordinary symbol) If high probability state) or time saving state (low probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol), latent state (high probability state of special symbol, low probability state of normal symbol) after the big hit game is If the jackpot is set and the gaming state at the time of jackpot winning is the latent state, it is defined that the jackpot state is set after the jackpot game is over.

  Finally, when the acquired value of the first collision type counter C2 is "65 to 99", "big hit H" is set. The "big hit H" is a 10-round normal big hit where the action scenario of the action A is set so that the big hit game of the same game content as the "big hit D" described above is executed. And, when winning the "big hit H", the gaming state at the time of the big hit is the normal state (special symbol low probability state, normal symbol low probability state), definite variation state (special symbol high probability state, normal symbol High probability state), short time state (special symbol low probability state, normal symbol high probability state), or latent state (special symbol high probability state, normal symbol low probability state), ie, game when winning a big hit Regardless of the state, it is specified that the time saving state is set after the end of the jackpot game.

  Here, in the present embodiment, in a state where it is possible to execute the lottery of the second special symbol (a state in which the reserved memory of the special view 2 is secured), the low probability state of the normal symbol (normal state, latent state) It is configured such that it is possible to provide the player with a more advantageous game than when the high probability state (probable change state, time reduction state) of the normal symbol is set when the is set.

  Specifically, when the second special symbol lottery is executed, it is configured to win a small hit with a probability of about 75%, and when a small hit is won, a second attacker 3650 (open door 3650f ) Is configured to be opened. Then, by the opening operation of the second attacker 3650 in a small hit game, a state is provided in which the ball easily flows into the guiding passage 3660 (see FIG. 243) through the through gate 67. When the low probability state of the normal symbol is set, the variation time (2 seconds) of the normal symbol suitable for the time it takes for the ball that has passed through gate 67 to reach the second entrance 640 is set Therefore, the ball passing through the through gate 67 is configured to be easy to enter the second ball inlet 640.

  On the other hand, when the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, the variation time of the normal symbol which is shorter than the time it takes for the ball passing through the through gate 67 to reach the second entrance 640 (0.1 Second), and in detail, the game performed based on the passage of the through gate 67 based on passing through the through gate 67 until the ball passing through the through gate 67 reaches the second entrance 640 (electric symbol 640 a The fluctuation time is set so short that the opening operation of. Therefore, it is comprised so that it may become difficult for the ball which passed through gate 67 to enter into the 2nd entrance hole 640.

  By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the number of acquisitions of the holding storage of the second special symbol in the small hitting game different according to the gaming state set when winning in the small hitting. In addition, when the big hit is won in the special symbol lottery, since the low probability state of the normal symbol is set during the big hit game, regardless of the gaming state set when winning a big, second special It can be made easy to acquire the reservation memory of a design.

  The operation scenario 8 table 202ge is a table defining the operations of the first attacker 650 and the second attacker 3650 when the game state is a big hit or a small hit. The operation scenario 8 table 202ge defines, for each scenario type, whether the operation contents and the special figure 2 pending acquisition in operation can be obtained.

  Here, the contents of the operation scenario 8 table 202ge will be described with reference to FIG. 245 (a). FIG. 245 (a) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents defined in the operation scenario 8 table 202ge. In the operation scenario 8 table 202ge, a jackpot game in which the first attacker 650 is opened for 10 rounds is defined when the jackpot and the scenario type is A. Therefore, when scenario A is set, the second attacker 3650 is not opened, so that it is impossible to newly acquire the hold storage of the special view 2 during the jackpot game. Next, if the jackpot and the scenario type is B, a jackpot game is defined in which the second attacker 3650 is opened for one to two rounds and the first attacker 650 is opened for three to ten rounds. There is. Therefore, when the scenario B is set, the second attacher 3650 is opened, so that it is possible to newly acquire the holding storage of the special view 2 during the jackpot game.

  Next, if the jackpot and the scenario type is C, a jackpot game is defined in which the second attacker 3650 is opened for one to two rounds. Therefore, when scenario C is set, the second attacker 3650 is opened, so that it is possible to newly acquire the hold storage of the special view 2 during the jackpot game. And in the case of a small hit, the second attacker 3650 is opened for one round. Therefore, it is possible to newly acquire the reserved memory of the special view 2 during the small hitting game.

  Here, the contents of each scenario defined in the operation scenario 8 table 202ge will be described with reference to FIG. 245 (b). FIG. 245 (b) is a diagram showing the contents of each scenario. As shown in FIG. 245 (b), when scenario A is set, 2 seconds is set as the opening period (OP period) of the big hit game, and the first attacker 650 is set for 30 seconds as one round game, or The game will be released until the number of prizes reaches 10 balls. When one round game ends, an interval period of 2 seconds is set, and a scenario in which the next round game is executed is set. Then, when the tenth round game ends, 4 seconds is set as the ending period (ED period), and the jackpot game ends when the ending period elapses.

  When scenario B is set, 2 seconds is set as the opening period (OP period) of the jackpot game, and one round game is executed for the second attack 3650 for 1.5 seconds three times, or The number of winnings is set until three balls are reached. When one round game ends, an interval period of 2 seconds is set, and a scenario in which the next round game is executed is set. Then, when the interval period after the second round game has passed, as the third round game, the first attacker 650 is released for 30 seconds or until the number of prizes reaches 10 balls. When the tenth round game ends, 4 seconds is set as the ending period (ED period), and the jackpot game ends when the ending period elapses.

  When scenario C is set, 0.5 seconds is set as the opening period (OP period) of the jackpot game, and one round game is executed three times for the second attack 3650 for 1.5 seconds, Alternatively, the number of winnings is set until three balls are reached. When one round game ends, an interval period of 2 seconds is set, and a scenario in which the next round game is executed is set. Then, when the second round game ends, 4 seconds is set as the ending period (ED period), and the jackpot game ends when the ending period elapses.

  In the scenario set during the small hit game, 0.5 seconds is set as the opening period (OP period) of the small hit game, and one round game has a second attack 3650 for 1.5 seconds with one opening. It is set until it is executed or the number of winnings becomes one. When one round game ends, 4 seconds is set as the ending period (ED period), and the jackpot game ends when the ending period elapses.

  As described above, in the eighth embodiment, a part of the big hit game (big hit B, big hit C) and a hit game for opening the second attacker 3650 in the small hit game are executed. There is. Therefore, the ball can be passed through the through gate 67 during a hit game, and the ball can be made to enter the second ball entrance 640. Also, as shown in FIG. 245 (b), when opening the second attack 3650 in the big hit game, the number of times the second attack 3650 is opened is smaller than in the case of opening the second attack 3650 in the small hit game. Since the number is set to be large, in the case of one hit game, the jackpot game can have more balls in the second entrance 640 than the small hit game.

  Furthermore, as described above, in the eighth embodiment, when the high probability state (short time state, positive change state) of the normal symbol is set, even if the ball is allowed to pass through the through gate 67, the induction passage 3660 The ball that has flowed down is configured to be unable to enter the second entrance 640 (it becomes difficult), and when the big hit game is executed, the low probability state of the normal symbol is set, and the small hit game is In the case of being executed, the small hitting game is configured to be executed with the gaming state at the time of the small hitting winning. Thus, the jackpot game is a hit game in which the ball is more likely to enter the second ball entrance 640 than the small hit game.

  The second random number 8 table 202gc is a data table used in the same application as the second random number table 202c (see FIG. 15) used in each of the embodiments described above, and the value of the second random number counter C4 With reference to the second random number 8 table 202gc, the presence or absence of the winning is determined.

  Here, the contents of the second random number 8 table 202gc will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 246 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the second random number 8 table 202gc. The second random number 8 table 202gc (see FIG. 246) is a data table in which a hit determination value of a normal symbol is defined (stored). Specifically, “0 to 237” is defined as the determination value for the hit of the normal symbol in the normal state of the normal symbol (see 202 gc1 in FIG. 246). Further, in the high probability state of the normal symbol, “0 to 238” is defined as the determination value which is the hit of the normal symbol (see 202 gc 3 in FIG. 246). In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired based on the passage of the ball through the normal ball entry port (through gate) 67 and the second random number 8 table 202gc are referred to And, it is determined whether it is a hit of a normal symbol.

  Further, in the normal state of the normal symbol, “238, 239” is defined as the determination value that causes the normal symbol to deviate (see 202 gc 2 in FIG. 246). Also, in the high probability state of the normal symbol, “239” is defined as the determination value that causes the normal symbol to be out of alignment (see 202 gc 4 in FIG. 246).

  The variation pattern selection 8 table 202gd is a data table used in the same application as the variation pattern selection table 202f (refer to FIG. 14) used in each embodiment described above, and the type of the special symbol for which the lottery is executed, A fluctuation pattern in which different fluctuation times are set is defined corresponding to the result of the lottery and the value of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1.

  Here, with reference to FIGS. 247 and 248, the contents of the variation pattern selection 8 table 202gd will be described. FIG. 247 is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the variation pattern selection 8 table 202gd, and FIG. 248 (a) is defined in the normal / latent 8 table 202gd1 defined by the variation pattern selection 8 table 202gd. 248 (b) schematically shows the contents defined in the table 8g for time reduction and probability variation 202 gd defined in the variation pattern selection 8 table 202 gd. FIG.

  Here, the contents of the normal / latent 8 table 202gd1 will be described with reference to FIG. 248 (a). The normal / latent 8 table 202gd1 is a variation pattern table to be referred to when the normal state / latency state is set as the gaming state, and the time-saving / probability-changed 8 table 202gd2 (time-shortened state described later) Or, it is easier to set the fluctuation time to make it easier for the ball to pass through the second entry port 640 or the second attachment 3650 than the fluctuation pattern table (referred to when the probability change state is set) As such, the fluctuation time is prescribed.

  The contents defined in the normal / latent 8 table 202gd1 will be specifically described. If the special symbol type is the special figure 1 and the lottery result is out, the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 is used. Regardless of the fluctuation pattern, "outside fluctuation" (a fluctuation time of 30 to 120 seconds) is defined, and when the lottery result is a big hit, the value of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 99". "Performing normal fluctuation" (a fluctuation time of 30 seconds) is specified as a fluctuation pattern. On the other hand, "Super fluctuation" (variation time 60 seconds) is specified for the range of "100 to 179", and "Performing special fluctuation" (variation time for the range of "180 to 198" as the fluctuation pattern 120 seconds) is specified.

  And, if the type of the special symbol is the special figure 2 and the lottery result is out, "outside fluctuation" (a fluctuation time of 5 seconds) is prescribed as the fluctuation pattern regardless of the value of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1. If the lottery result is a small winning, "small hitting fluctuation" (fluctuating time 5 seconds) is defined as the fluctuation pattern regardless of the value of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1, and if the lottery result is a winning, it is acquired Regardless of the value of the variation type counter CS1, "percussion variation" (variation time 5 seconds) is defined as the variation pattern. That is, in the special figure 2 game in the normal / latent state, the fluctuation time is set to 5 seconds regardless of the lottery result.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 248 (b), the contents defined in the time reduction / probability change 8 table 202gd2 will be specifically described. If the special symbol type is Special Figure 1 and the lottery result is out, "outside middle change" (30 to 60 milliseconds of change time) as a change pattern regardless of the value of the change type counter CS1 acquired. If the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 is “0 to 39”, “per normal variation” (a variation time of 30 milliseconds) is defined as the variation pattern if the lottery result is a big hit. . In the case of "40 to 119", "per-super fluctuation" (the fluctuation time of 60 milliseconds) is defined. In the case of "120 to 198", "performing special variation" (a variation time of 120 milliseconds) is defined as a variation pattern.

  And, when the type of the special symbol is the special figure 2 and the lottery result is out, “outside short fluctuation” (1 millisecond fluctuation time) as the fluctuation pattern regardless of the value of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1. Is defined, and if the lottery result is a small hit, regardless of the value of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1, “small hitting short fluctuation” (a fluctuation time of 1 millisecond) is defined as the fluctuation pattern, and the lottery result is a winning In this case, regardless of the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1, "performing short variation" (a variation time of 1 millisecond) is defined as the variation pattern. That is, in the special figure 2 game in the time saving state or the definite variation state, the variation time is set to 1 millisecond regardless of the lottery result.

  Next, contents of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 in the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 249 is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 in the eighth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 249, the RAM 203 according to the eighth embodiment includes the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203ga, the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c, and the first special symbol holding ball Number counter 203d, second special symbol holding ball number counter 203gb, normal symbol holding ball number counter 203e, probability variation flag 203g, fluctuation time counter 203gc, large hit middle flag 203o, small hit middle flag 203p, round end flag 203gd, other memory area It has 203z. The configuration (flag, counter, area) having the same name as the electrical configuration used in any of the above-described embodiments is the same as that of the above-described embodiments in its application, and therefore detailed description will be omitted. .

  In addition, the other memory area 203z of the present embodiment has a data area capable of storing the gaming state currently set, and the high probability state of the special symbol, the low probability state, or the high probability of the ordinary symbol The state, the low probability state can be stored, and further, the condition until each state ends (transition to another state), and the current status for the condition can be updated. The specific content is the same as the control process for the probability variation flag, the probability variation counter, and the time saving counter in each embodiment described above, and therefore the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The second special symbol holding ball storage area 203ga is different from the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a only in that it is a storage area corresponding to the second special symbol. More specifically, the values of the counters C1 to C3 are acquired at the timing when the ball wins (start winning) at the second entrance 640, and the acquired data includes Among the vacant areas of 1 area to 4 th reserved area), areas with smaller area numbers (first to fourth) are stored in order. That is, as the area number is smaller, data corresponding to the winning in time is stored, and in the reserved first area, data corresponding to the oldest winning in time is stored. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, in the main controller 110, when a lottery of special symbols is performed, each value of each counter C1 to C3 stored in the first reserved area of the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203ga is an execution area After being shifted (moved), determinations such as drawing of special symbols are performed based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the execution area.

  Note that when data is shifted from the hold first area to the execution area, the hold first area becomes empty. Therefore, there is a shift process in which winning data stored in other hold areas (hold second area to hold fourth area) is packed into a hold area (hold first area to hold third area) with one smaller area number. To be done. In the present embodiment, in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, data shift is performed only for the holding area (second holding area to fourth holding area) in which data of winning is stored.

  The second special symbol holding ball number counter 203gb is a counter for counting the holding ball based on winning in the second entrance 640, and the other configuration is the same as the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d Since there is, the detailed explanation is omitted.

  The fluctuation time counter 203gc is a counter for counting the fluctuation time. In the fluctuation time counter 203gc, a counter value corresponding to the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern determined based on the fluctuation pattern selection 8 table 202gd is set (see S11011 in FIG. 252). Also, this variation time counter 203gc is decremented by 1 in the special symbol variation processing 8 (see FIG. 251) (see S10914 in FIG. 251), and is variation time elapsed based on the value of this variation time counter 203gc Is determined.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 250, an electrical configuration of the audio lamp control device 113 in the tenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 250 (a) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents defined in the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 250 (a), the ROM 222 of the tenth embodiment is configured to have the same electrical configuration as that of the first embodiment described above, and thus the detailed description thereof will be omitted. FIG. 250 (b) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents defined in the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 250 (b), the RAM 223 of the tenth embodiment is a winning information storage area 223b, a first special symbol holding ball number counter 223c, a second special symbol holding ball number counter 223ga, a change start flag 223fa, A stop type selection flag 223fb, a fluctuation time counter 223fd, a game state storage area 223fe, a jackpot effect extension flag 223gb, and other memory areas 223z are provided. The configuration (flag, counter, area) having the same name as the electrical configuration used in any of the above-described embodiments is the same as that of the above-described embodiments in its application, and therefore detailed description will be omitted. .

  The second special symbol holding ball number counter 223 ga is a counter that counts the holding ball based on winning in the second entrance 640, and the other configuration is the same as the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223 c Since there is, the detailed explanation is omitted.

  The jackpot effect extension flag 223gb is a flag for indicating that the jackpot game effect (see FIG. 238 (a)) is to be executed continuously even after the jackpot game is over, and is continued even after the jackpot game is over It is set to ON when it is determined to execute (to extend the jackpot effect). This jackpot effect extension flag 223gb is turned on when a command indicating an increase in the number of holding balls of the second special symbol is received from the main control unit 110 (S12806 in FIG. 257), and the received command has the number of holding balls If it is determined that the command indicates that it is 0, it is turned off (S12906 in FIG. 258). When the jackpot effect extension flag 223gb is turned on, the jackpot extension effect is executed after the jackpot game (see FIG. 239 (a)).

<Control Process of Main Control Device in Eighth Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 251, the special symbol variation processing 8 (S9001) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 251 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation process 8 (S9001). The special symbol variation process 8 (S9001) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31), and the variation display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed in the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display This is a process for controlling the variation display of the third symbol performed in the device 81.

  In this special symbol variation processing 8, first, it is determined whether or not the present or present is a jackpot or a small hit of a special symbol (S10901). Specifically, it is determined whether any of the large hit middle flag 203o and the small hit middle flag 203p is on. As a result of the discrimination, when it is discriminated that the special symbol is in the middle or the middle of the jackpot (S10901: Yes), the present processing is ended as it is.

  In the process of S10901, if it is determined that the special symbol is neither large hit nor small hit (S10901: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S10902), If it is determined that the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is not changing (S10902: No), the value of the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203gb (number of holding times N2 of the variable display based on the lottery of the second special symbol) Is acquired (S10903). Next, it is determined whether the value (N2) of the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203gb is larger than 0 (S10904). If the value (N2) of the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203gb is not 0 (S10904: Yes), the value (N2) of the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203gb is decremented by 1 (S10905) and changed by calculation A ball holding ball number command indicating the value of the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203gb is set (S10906). The ball holding ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 52) executed by the MPU 201 is a voice. It is transmitted to the lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the holding ball number command, the value of the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203gb is extracted from the holding ball number command, and the extracted value is used as the second special symbol holding ball number counter of the RAM 223 Store in 223ga.

  After setting the holding ball number command in the process of S10906, the data stored in the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203ga is shifted (S10907). In the process of S10907, the data stored in the pending first area to the pending fourth area of the second special symbol pending ball storage area 203ga is sequentially shifted toward the execution area. More specifically, the areas within each area are: first holding area → execution area, second holding area → first holding area, third holding area → second holding area, second holding area → third holding area The data is shifted, and the process proceeds to the process of S10913.

  On the other hand, in the process of S10904, when the value (N2) of the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203gb is 0 (S10904: No), the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d (the first special symbol The number of times of suspension N1 of the variable display based on the lottery is acquired (S10908), and it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the acquired first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d is larger than 0 (S10909).

  In the process of S10909, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d is 0 (S10909: No), the first special symbol and the second special symbol both start a new fluctuation. Since the processing can not be performed, the present processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S10909, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d is not 0 (that is, is 1 or more) (S10909: Yes), the first special symbol holding ball number The value (N1) of the counter 203d is decremented by 1 (S10910), and a ball holding number command indicating the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S10911). The ball holding ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 52) executed by the MPU 201 is a voice. It is transmitted to the lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the holding ball number command, it extracts the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d from the holding ball number command, and extracts the extracted value as the first special symbol holding ball number counter of the RAM 223 Store in 223c.

  After setting the holding ball number command by the process of S10911, the data stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is shifted by the same method as the process of S10907 (S10909), and the process proceeds to S10913. Transition. In the process of S10913 executed after the process of S10907 or S10912, the special symbol variation start process 8 for starting the variable display in the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S10913), and this process is ended. The details of the special symbol variation start process 8 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S10902, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S10902: Yes), the value of the fluctuation time counter 203gc is updated by subtracting 1 (S10914), and the fluctuation time counter after updating Based on the value of 203 gc, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display executed in the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed (S10915). That is, it is determined whether or not the value of the fluctuation time counter 203gc updated in the process of S10914 has become 0. The fluctuation time of the fluctuation display performed in the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counter CS1 (determined according to the fluctuation pattern command), and this fluctuation time If has not passed (S10915: No), the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S10916), and this processing is ended.

  On the other hand, in the process of S10915, if the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display being executed has elapsed (S10915: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S10917). The display mode of the stop symbol is previously set by the special symbol variation start process 8 (S10913) described later with reference to FIG. When the special symbol variation start process 8 (S10913) is executed, a lottery of special symbols is performed based on the values of the various counters stored in the execution area. More specifically, according to the value of the first random number counter C1 it is determined whether or not the big win of the special symbol, and in the case of the big win of the special symbol, according to the value of the first type counter C2 One of the jackpots A to H is determined.

  After the process of S10916 is finished, when the variable display under execution in the first symbol display device 37 is started, the lottery result of the special symbol (this lottery result) performed by the special symbol variation start process 8 is It is determined whether it is a jackpot of a special symbol (S10918). If the lottery result this time is a big hit of the special symbol (S10918: Yes), the probability change flag 203g is set off (S10919), the start of the big hit of the special symbol is set (S10920), and the process moves to S10921. Do. When the start of the jackpot of the special symbol is set by the process of S10919, when the jackpot control process (S1004) of the main process (see FIG. 52) is executed, the process branches to S1101: Yes and the opening command is set. (S1102). As a result, in the third symbol display device 81, the jackpot effect is started.

  In the process of S10918, if the current lottery result is the omission of the special symbol (S10918: No), the process of S10919 and S10920 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S10921.

  In the special symbol variation processing 8 (see S9001 in FIG. 251) in the eighth embodiment, as in the second embodiment described above, the technical concept for displaying the special symbol for a predetermined period for a predetermined period and the control content It may be configured to be added. This makes it possible to inform the player of the lottery result of the specific symbol in an easy-to-understand manner.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 252, the special symbol variation start process 8 (S10913) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 252 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation start process 8 (S10913). This special symbol variation start process 8 (S10913) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process 8 (see FIG. 251) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31), and the first special symbol holding ball storage area Based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of 203a and the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203ga, a lottery for "big hit of a special symbol" or "out of a special symbol" is made (decision decision) and It is a process for determining an effect pattern (variation pattern) of the fluctuation effect performed by the one symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81.

  In the special symbol variation start process 8, first, the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203ga, the first hit type counter The values of C2 and the stop type selection counter C3 are acquired (S11001).

  Next, the probability change flag 203g is read out to determine whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the probability change state (S11002). In the process of S11002, if the probability change flag 203g is on, it is determined that the special symbol is in a probability variation state, and if the probability change flag 203g is off, it is determined that the special symbol is in a low probability state (not a probability variation state). In the process of S11002, when it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is in the definite variation state of the special symbol (S11002: Yes), the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S11001 and the first for high probability Based on the random number 8 table 202ga, a lottery result of whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot is acquired (S11003). When the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired, the process proceeds to the process of S11005.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S11002 that the pachinko machine 10 is not in a definite variation state (is in a low probability state of special symbol) (S11002: No), with the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S11001 Based on the first random number 8 table for low probability (refer to FIG. 243 (b)), a lottery result of whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is acquired (S11004). When the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired, the process proceeds to the process of S11005.

  Then, it is determined whether the lottery result of the special symbol acquired by the processing of S11003 or S11004 is the jackpot of the special symbol (S11005), and when it is determined that it is the jackpot of the special symbol (S11005: Yes), Based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S11001, the display mode at the time of big hit is set (S11006).

  In the process of S11006, the display mode (lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set in accordance with the determined jackpot type (big hit A to H). Further, in order to cause the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type to be stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the jackpot type (jackpot A to H) is set as the stop type.

  Next, a fluctuation pattern at the time of jackpot is determined (S11007). When the fluctuation pattern is set in the process of S11007, the fluctuation time (display time) of the fluctuation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 stops until it stops at the jackpot symbol. The fluctuation time of the symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is compared with the fluctuation pattern selection 8 table 202gd (see FIG. 247), and the fluctuation pattern (variation corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 Determine the time).

  On the other hand, in the process of S11005, when it is determined that the special symbol is dislocated (including small hitting) (S11005: No), the display mode at the time of disengaging (small hitting) is set (S11008). In the process of S11008, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the off (small hit) symbol, and based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area, 3 As a stop type to be displayed on the symbol display device 81, it is set whether it is a front or back outreach, a reach other than back or forth out, a complete out, or a small hit.

  Here, if the pachinko machine 10 is a definite variation of a special symbol, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 acquired in the process of S11001 is compared with the random number value stored in the stop type selection table for high probability. And set the stop type. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 89", complete removal is set, and if it is in the range of "90 to 97", reach other than out of order is set, "98 , 99 ”and set the reach before and after. On the other hand, if the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol, the stop type is set by comparing the value of the stop type selection counter C3 with the random number stored in the stop type selection table for low probability. Do. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 79", complete removal is set, and if it is in the range of "80 to 97", reach other than out of order is set, "98 , 99 ”and set the reach before and after.

  Next, a variation pattern at the time of deviation (small hitting) is determined (S11009). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until it is stopped at the third symbol display device 81 (off in a small hit) is determined. At this time, as in the process of S11007, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is compared with the fluctuation pattern selection 8 table 202gd, and the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. Determine the (variation time).

  When the process of S11007 or the process of S11009 is finished, next, the variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined in the process of S11007 or the process of S11009 is set (S11010). Next, a counter value corresponding to the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern this time is set in the fluctuation time counter 203gc (S11011). Then, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of S11006 or S11008 is set (S11012). The fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command are stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 in the process of S1001 of the main process (see FIG. 52). When the process of S11012 is finished, the process returns to the special symbol variation process 8.

  In the special symbol variation start process 8 (see S10913 in FIG. 252) of the eighth embodiment, if the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit (S11005 in FIG. 252: Yes), it is not a big hit (disengagement or In the case of small hit) (S11005 in FIG. 252: No), the processing content to be executed is configured to be different, but as used in any of the above-described embodiments, it is determined not to be a big hit. In this case, the control process is executed for removal, and in this case, the present lottery result is configured to determine whether it is a removal or a small hit, and the case of a removal and a small hit The processing content to be executed may be different. The detailed content of the control process executed in this case is the same as any of the above-described embodiments, and thus the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  Next, the start winning process 8 (S9002) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 253 is a flowchart showing the start winning process 8 (S9002). The start winning process 8 (S9002) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31), and determines whether there is a winning (start winning) on the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640. When there is a start winning, it is a process for executing the hold processing of the value indicated by the various counters.

  When the start winning process 8 is executed, first, it is determined whether the ball has won the first ball entrance 64 (start winning) (S11101). Here, the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the first ball entrance 64 (S11101: Yes), the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d (number of holding times N1 of the variable display in the special symbol) is obtained ( S11102). Then, it is determined whether the value (N1) of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit (4 in the present embodiment) (S11103).

  Then, whether the ball has not won the first ball entry 64 (S11101: No), or even if the ball has won the first ball entry 64, the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d If (N1) is not less than 4 (S11103: No), the process proceeds to S11107. On the other hand, if there is a winning to the first entrance 64 (S11101: Yes), and the value (N1) of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S11103: Yes), the first special The value (N1) of the symbol holding ball number counter 203d is incremented by 1 (S11104). And a ball holding number command (special figure 1 holding ball number command) which shows the value of the 1st special symbol holding ball number counter 203d changed by operation is set (S11105).

  The ball holding ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 52) executed by the MPU 201 is a voice. It is transmitted to the lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the holding ball number command, it extracts the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d from the holding ball number command, and extracts the extracted value as the first special symbol holding ball number counter of the RAM 223 Store in 223c.

  After setting the holding ball number command by the process of S11105, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 updated in S103 of the above-described timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31) Each value is stored in the first area of the free space reserved areas (held first area-reserved fourth area) of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 (S11106), and the process proceeds to S11107 . In the process of S11106, the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the holding first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the pending second area is set, if the value is 2, the pending third area is set, and if the value is 3, the pending fourth area is set as the first area.

  In the process of S11107, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the second entry hole 640 (start winning) (S11107). Also in this process, as in the process of S11101, the ball entering the second ball entrance 640 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the second entry ball opening 640 (S11107: Yes), the value of the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203gb (number of holding N2 of the fluctuation display in the special symbol) is obtained ( It is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203gb is less than the upper limit (4 in the present embodiment) (S11109).

  And if there is no winning in the second entrance 640 (S11107: No) or if there is a winning in the second entrance 640, the value (N2) of the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203gb is If it is determined that it is not less than 4 (that is, it is 4) (S11109: No), the process proceeds to S11113. On the other hand, if there is a winning on the second entrance 640 (S11107: Yes), and the value (N2) of the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203gb is less than 4 (S11109: Yes), the second special One is added to the value (N2) of the symbol holding ball number counter 203gb (S11110). And the ball holding ball number command which shows the value of the 2nd special symbol holding ball number counter 203gb changed by calculation is set (S11111).

  The ball holding ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 52) executed by the MPU 201 is a voice. It is transmitted to the lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the holding ball number command, the value of the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203gb is extracted from the holding ball number command, and the extracted value is used as the second special symbol holding ball number counter of the RAM 223 Store in 223ga.

  After setting the holding ball number command by the process of S11111, each value of the first random number counter C1, the first collision type counter C2 and the stop type selection counter C3 updated in the process of S103 of the timer interrupt process described above The second special symbol holding ball storing area 203ga of the RAM 203 is stored in the first area of the free holding areas (the first holding area to the fourth holding area) (S11112), and the process proceeds to S11113. In the process of S11112, as in the process of S11106, the value of the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203ga is referred to, and if the value is 0, the holding first area is made the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the pending second area is set, if the value is 2, the pending third area is set, and if the value is 3, the pending fourth area is set as the first area.

  In the process of S11113, a prefetch process for prefetching the success or failure from various counter values acquired based on the start winning is executed (S11113), and this process is ended. The details of this pre-reading process will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 254 is a flowchart showing pre-reading processing (S11113). In this pre-reading process (S11 13), first, it is determined whether or not a new entering ball to the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 has been detected in the current start winning process 8 (see FIG. 253) (S11201), if a new ball entry is not detected (S11201: No), this processing is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S11201 that a new ball entry has been detected (S11201: Yes), next, whether the number of holding balls corresponding to the detected ball entry is the upper limit value (ie, 4) It is determined whether or not it is (S11202), and when it is determined that it is the upper limit value (S11202: Yes), this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S11202, when it is determined that the number of holding balls is less than the upper limit value (S11202: No), whether or not the timing of starting the fluctuation display based on the entering ball is the definite variation state of special symbol It is determined whether or not (S11203). In the process of S11203, it is determined whether or not it is a definite change state, in accordance with the current gaming state and the pre-reading result of the holding ball held before the current entry of the ball. Specifically, if a big hit is not included in the holding ball, the current gaming state coincides with the timing of starting the variable display based on the currently detected ball, so the current gaming state is a definite change state It is determined that Further, when the big hit is included in the holding ball, the gaming state may be changed according to the type of big hit. Specifically, when a definite variation jackpot is suspended, it shifts to a definite variation state after the big hit, and when a big win is normally suspended, it shifts to a normal state after the big hit. Taking these into consideration, it is determined whether or not the start timing of the variable display based on the currently detected ball entry is a definite change state.

  In the process of S11203, when it is determined that the start time of the fluctuation based on the currently detected ball entry is a definite variation state of the special symbol (S11203: Yes), the type of the entrance slot that detected the entry ball, and high probability The lottery result based on the current entry is acquired based on the first hit random number 8 table 202ga (S11204), and the process proceeds to S11206. On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation start time is the low probability state of the special symbol (S11203: No), the type of the entrance into which the ball is detected and the first random number 8 table 202ga for low probability , The lottery result based on the current entry is acquired (S11205), and the process proceeds to S11206.

  In the process of S11206 executed after the process of S11204 or S11205, a winning information command is set based on the type of the entrance to which the current ball is detected and the lottery result acquired in the process of S11204 or S11205. (S11206), this processing ends. The winning information information command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 52) described later executed by the MPU 201, It is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. When receiving the prize information command, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the type of the entrance and the lottery result notified by the prize information command in the prize information storage area 223a.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 255, the normal symbol variation processing 8 (S9003) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 255 is a flowchart showing the normal symbol variation processing 8 (S9003). This normal symbol variation process 8 (S9003) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31), and the variation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed in the second symbol display device 83, and the second entering ball It is a process for controlling the open time etc. of the motorized accessory 640 a attached to the port 640.

  In this normal symbol variation process 8 (S9003), first, it is determined whether or not the current moment is in the middle of hitting a normal symbol (second symbol) (S11301). As the middle of the normal symbol (the second symbol), the opening and closing control of the motorized accessory 640a attached to the second ball entry port 640 is performed while the display indicating the hit is made on the second symbol display device 83. Included. As a result of the determination, if it is in the middle of the hit of the normal symbol (the second symbol) (S11301: Yes), this processing is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is not inside the normal symbol (the second symbol) (S11301: No), it is judged whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S11302), and the second symbol display device If the display mode 83 is not changing (S11302: No), the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203e (the number M of holding the variable display in the normal symbol) is obtained (S11303). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203e is larger than 0 (S11304), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203e is 0 (S11304: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203e is not 0 (S11304: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203e is decremented by 1 (S11305).

  Next, the data stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is shifted (S11306). In the process of S11306, a process of shifting the data stored in the first holding area to the fourth holding area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c in order toward the execution area is performed. More specifically, the areas within each area are: first holding area → execution area, second holding area → first holding area, third holding area → second holding area, second holding area → third holding area Shift data After shifting the data, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is acquired (S11307).

  Next, it is determined whether or not it is a high probability state (time saving state) of a normal symbol (S11308). In the process of S11308, it is determined based on the information possessed by the other memory area 203z of the RAM 203 whether or not the normal symbol is in the high probability state.

  In the process of S11308, when it is determined that the symbol is in the high probability state of the normal symbol (S11308: Yes), the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired in the process of S11307 and the second random number 8 for high probability Based on the table 202gc (refer to FIG. 246), a lottery result of whether or not a normal symbol is hit is acquired (S11309). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second random number 8 table 202gc for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "0 to 238", it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of "239", it is a normal symbol off It is determined that (see FIG. 246).

  If it is determined in the process of S11308 that the normal symbol is not in a high probability state (S11308: No), the process proceeds to S11310. In the process of S11310, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot game of the special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in the low probability state (normal state) of the normal symbol, the second random number counter acquired in the process of S11307 Based on the value of C4 and the second random number 8 table 202gc for low probability, a lottery result of whether or not a normal symbol is hit is acquired (S11310). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random value stored in the second random number 8 table 202gc for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "0 to 237", it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of "238, 239", the normal symbol is out. It is determined that is (see FIG. 246).

  Next, it is determined whether the lottery result of the normal symbol acquired by the processing of S11309 or S11310 is the hit of the normal symbol (S11311), and when it is determined that the symbol is the normal symbol (S11311: Yes), The display mode of the hit is set (S11312). In the process of S11312, after the variable display in the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the symbol of "o" is set to be lit and displayed as a stop symbol (second symbol).

  Then, it is determined whether or not the time saving state (high probability state) of the normal symbol (S11314), and if it is the time shortening state (high probability state) of the normal symbol (S11314: Yes), fluctuation display in the second symbol display device 83 Is set to 0.1 second (S11315), and the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the time saving state (high probability state) of the normal symbol is not determined (S11314: No), the variation time of the variable display in the second symbol display device 83 is set to 2 seconds (S11316), and this processing is performed. finish.

  In addition, in the process of S11302, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S11302: Yes), whether or not the change time of the change display being executed in the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. (S11317). The fluctuation time here is a time preset by the processing of S11315 or the processing of S11316 before the fluctuation display is started in the second symbol display device 83.

  When it is determined in the process of S11317 that the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S11317: No), this process is ended as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S11317, if the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display being executed has elapsed (S11317: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S11318). In the process of S11318, when the lottery of the normal symbol becomes a hit, and the display mode is set by the process of S11312, the "o" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 (lit It is set to be displayed. On the other hand, if the lottery of the normal symbol is out and the display mode is set by the processing of S11313, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lit display) in the second symbol display device 83 Are set to If the stop display is set by the process of S11318, then the second symbol display updating process (see S1007) of the main process (see FIG. 52) is executed, the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is displayed. Then, the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set in the processing of S11313 or S11318.

  Then, when the variable display under execution in the second symbol display device 83 is started, whether the lottery result of the ordinary symbol (this lottery result) performed by the ordinary symbol variation processing is a hit of the ordinary symbol Is determined (S11319). If the lottery result this time is a hit of a normal symbol (S11319: Yes), then, it is determined whether it is in the short status of the normal symbol (high probability status) (S11320) and in the short status (during the high probability status) If not (S11320: No), the opening time and number of times of opening of the motorized accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 are set to "0.9 seconds x 1 time" (S11321), and the process is performed in S11323. Migrate to On the other hand, in the process of S11320, when it is determined that the time is short (in high probability state) of the normal symbol (S11320: Yes), the opening time and opening of the motorized accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 and The number of times is set to “one second × one time” (S 11322), and the process proceeds to S 11323.

  In the process of S11323, the opening and closing control start of the opening time and the number of times of opening determined in the process of S11321 or S11322 is set (S11323), and this process is ended. When start of the opening / closing control of the motorized workpiece 640a is set by the process of S11323, the motored workpieces opening / closing process (see S1005) of the main process (see FIG. 52) is performed next. The open / close control is started, and the open / close control of the motorized accessory 640a is continued until the open time and the open number set in the process of S11321 or S11322 are finished. On the other hand, in the process of S11319, if the current lottery result is the deviation of the normal symbol (S11319: No), each process of S11320 to S11323 is skipped and the present process is ended.

<Control Process of Voice Lamp Controller in Eighth Embodiment>
Next, control processing executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 according to the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The control processing of the audio lamp control device 113 of the eighth embodiment is different from the control processing of the seventh embodiment described above in that the content of the command determination processing is changed. The other elements are the same, so detailed description thereof will be omitted. In addition, although the code | symbol different with respect to the process same as each embodiment mentioned above may be attached for convenience of explanation, about the process of the same name, it is used by the same use.

  First, command determination processing 8 (S4191) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 256 is a flowchart showing this command determination process 8 (S4191). This command determination process 8 (S4191) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 59) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. It is processing to do.

  In command determination processing 8, first, the first command received from the main control apparatus 110 among the unprocessed commands is read out from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the variation pattern command is transmitted from the main control apparatus 110. It is determined whether it has been received (S12701). If it is determined in the process of S12701 that the fluctuation pattern command has been received (S12701: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223fa provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S12702), and the fluctuation pattern type is received from the fluctuation pattern command received. Are extracted (S12703), and the process ends. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and is referred to when a variation display setting process (see FIG. 52) described later is executed. And it is used in order to set the fluctuation pattern command for indication which notifies the start of fluctuation production and the fluctuation pattern classification to display control 114.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S12701 that the fluctuation pattern command has not been received (S12701: No), it is next determined whether or not the stop type command has been received from the main control device 110 (S12704). When the stop type command is received (S12704: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223fb of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S12705), and the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S12706). End the process. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and is referred to when the variable display setting process is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the fluctuation effect.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S12704 that the stop type command has not been received (S12704: No), then it is determined whether or not the ball holding ball number command has been received from the main control device 110 (S12707) . When it is determined that the holding ball number command has been received (S12707: Yes), the holding ball number related process is executed (S12708), and this process is ended. Details of the holding ball number related process (S12708) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Here, when the ball has won the first ball entry 64 or the second ball entry 640 (start winning), or when a lottery of a special symbol is performed, the command for holding ball number is given from the main control unit 110 As it is transmitted, the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 and the second special are processed by the processing of S12708 every time a start winning is detected or each time a lottery of special symbols is performed. The value of the symbol holding ball number counter 223ga can be adjusted to the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d of the main control unit 110 and the value of the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203gb. Therefore, the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223c and the second special symbol holding ball number counter 223ga of the voice lamp control device 113 is the first special symbol holding ball number counter of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise etc. The first special symbol holding ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113, and the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203gb even when the value is different from the value of the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203gb The value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223ga can be corrected to match the values of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d of the main control unit 110 and the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203gb.

  In addition, when the process of S12708 is executed, the holding ball for display for notifying the display control device 114 of the values of the updated first special symbol holding ball number counter 223c and the second special symbol holding ball number counter 223ga. Several commands are set. Thereby, in the display control device 114, the number-of-held-balls number design according to the number of held balls is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  If it is determined in the process of S12707 that the ball holding ball number command has not been received (S12707: No), it is then determined whether a state command has been received from the main control device 110 (S12709). When it is determined that the state command has been received (S12709: Yes), data in the gaming state storage area 223fe is updated according to the received command (S12710). Thereby, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is changed, the sound lamp control device 113 can easily grasp the change.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S12709 that the status command has not been received (S12709: No), it is then determined whether or not the winning information command has been received (S12711). If it is determined in the process of S12711 that a winning information command has been received (S12711: Yes), information corresponding to the received winning information command is set in the winning information storage area 223b (S12712), and the present process is ended.

  If it is determined in the process of S12711 that the winning information command has not been received (S12711: No), then the command related to winning (big hit, small hit) (opening command for each hit, round number command, ending command) Is determined (S12713). When it is determined that the command related to the hit is received (S12713: Yes), the hit related process 8 for executing the control corresponding to the type of the command related to the hit is executed (S12714), This process ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S12713 that the command related to the jackpot has not been received (S12713: No), the process according to the other commands is executed (S12715), and the process ends. In the process of S12715, if the other command is a command used by the audio lamp control device 113, processing corresponding to that command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if it is a command used by the display control device 114, the command To send the display control device 114 to the display control device 114.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 257, the held ball number related process (S12708) which is one process in the command determination process 8 (S4191) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 257 is a flow chart showing this holding ball number related processing (S12708).

  In the holding ball number related process (S12708), first, it is determined whether a special figure 2 related command, that is, a command regarding the number of holding balls of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is received (S12801). If it is determined that the special figure 2 related command has been received (S12801: Yes), it is determined whether the received special figure 2 related command is a command indicating an increase in the number of holding balls in the special figure 2 (S12802). If it is determined that the command indicates an increase (S12802: Yes), the information of the gaming state storage area 223fe is read (S12803). Next, it is determined whether the information of the read gaming state storage area 223fe is in the middle or the middle (S12804). If it is determined that the jackpot is medium or small (S 12804: Yes), it is determined whether the jackpot extension flag 223 gb is on (S 12805). If it is determined that the jackpot effect extension flag 223gb is off (S12805: No), the jackpot effect extension flag 223gb is set to ON in order to set the extension of the effect performed during the jackpot (S12806), The jackpot extension effect is set (S12807), and the process proceeds to the process of S12808. On the other hand, in the process of S12805, when it is determined that the jackpot effect extension flag 223gb is on (S12805: Yes), there is no need to set the jackpot extension effect, so the process of S12806 to S12807 is skipped and S12808 Transfer to processing.

  By configuring in this way, when the reserve memory of the special figure 2 is acquired while the winning game is being performed, the special figure 2 fluctuation (lottery drawing) is executed after the end of the jackpot game, It is possible to set the jackpot extension effect. That is, since the effect to be executed after the end of the winning game is not set to the gaming state set after the ending of the winning game but based on the presence / absence of the hold storage of the special view 2, as in the eighth embodiment, Since the effect mode corresponding to the drawing (variation) of the special figure 2 that can be performed only under the conditions can be easily set, an effect that is easy for the player to understand can be performed.

  In S12808, a key display mode (display mode of acquired display areas Dm10a to Dm10d) corresponding to the command received this time is set (S12808). Next, the number of holding balls is extracted from the received command and stored in the second special symbol holding ball number counter 223ga (S12810), and the process proceeds to the processing of S12811. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S12804 that the current gaming state is not a big hit or a small hit (S12804: No), an error command is set (S12809), and the process proceeds to S12810. .

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S12802 that the special drawing 2 related command received this time is not a command indicating an increase (S12802: No), a decrease process is executed (S12813), and the process proceeds to S12811. Do.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 258, the decrease time process (S12813) which is one process within the number-of-held-balls related process (S12708) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 258 is a flowchart showing the reduction process (S12813).

  In the decrease processing (S12813), first, the number of holding balls is extracted from the command received this time, and is stored in the second special symbol holding ball number counter 223ga (S12901). Next, it is determined whether the number of holding balls is 0, that is, the value of the second special symbol holding ball number counter 223ga is 0 (S12902). In the process of S12902, when it is determined that the number of holding balls is 0, that is, the value of the second special symbol holding ball number counter 223ga is 0 (S12902: Yes), it is the timing of the big hit end, A display effect command indicating the end of the extra round is set (S12903). Next, a display instruction command indicating left strike is set (S12904). Next, the right-handed command is set to be off (S12905), the jackpot effect extension flag 223gb is set to be off (S12906), and this processing is ended.

  On the other hand, in the process of S12902, when it is determined that the number of holding balls is not 0 (ie, 1 or more) (S12902: No), a key display mode corresponding to the number of holding balls is set (S12907), This process ends.

  Referring back to FIG. 257, the description will be continued. When the processing of any of S12801, S12810, or S12813 ends, the process proceeds to S12811. In the process of S12811, it is determined whether a special-figure 1 related command has been received (S12811). In the process of S12811, it is determined whether a special-figure 1 related command has been received (S12811). If it is determined that the special figure 1 related command has been received (S12811: Yes), the number of holding balls is extracted from the received command and stored in the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223c (S12812), and this processing ends Do. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special-figure 1 related command has not been received (S12811: No), this processing ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 259, the contents of the hit related process 8 (S12714) will be described. FIG. 259 is a flow chart schematically showing the contents of hit-related processing 8 (S12714). This hit related process 8 (S12714) is executed when a command related to the hit related (big hit, small hit command) is received.

  When the hit related process 8 (S12714) is executed, it is first determined whether the hit related command received this time is a jackpot related command (S12151), and if it is determined that it is a jackpot related command (S12151: Yes) Then, the corresponding display command is set (S12152), and the process ends. The various display commands set in the process of S12152 are set by the same process as the process performed when the jackpot related command is received in the command determination process performed in each of the above-described embodiments. And the detailed description is omitted.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S12151 that the hit related command received this time is not the jackpot related command (S12151: No), it is next determined whether the hit related command received this time is the small hit start command. (S12107), when it is determined that it is a small hitting start command (S12107: Yes), the small hitting start process 8 is executed (S12158), and this process is ended.

  The small hit start process 8 (S12158) is the same as the process performed in the small hit start process 7 (S12108) of the seventh embodiment described above, except that the content of the display command to be set is the height of the normal symbol There is a difference in that the display command to be executed when the probability state is set and the display command to be executed when the low probability state of the normal symbol is set are determined and set. Other than that is the same, so the detailed description is omitted.

  In the process of S12107, when it is determined that the hit related command received this time is not the small hit start command (S12107: No), next, it is determined whether the small hit end command is received (S12109) and the small hit ends If it is determined that a command has not been received (S12109: No), this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S12109 that the small hitting end command has been received (S12109: Yes), then the small hitting middle flag 203p is set to OFF (S12153), and then the second special symbol holding ball It is determined whether the value of the number counter 223ga is larger than 0 (S12154). That is, in the process of S12154, it is determined whether or not the on-hold storage of the special view 2 is stored at the timing when the small hitting game is ended.

  If it is determined in the process of S12154 that the value of the second special symbol holding ball number counter 223ga is larger than 0 (S12154: Yes), special figure 2 fluctuation is executed after the small hitting game is over, so this process Finish. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S12154 that the value of the second special symbol holding ball number counter 223ga is not larger than 0 (is 0) (S12154: No), then the jackpot effect extension flag 223gb is on If it is determined that it is set to ON (S12155: Yes), the jackpot effect extension flag 223gb is set to OFF (S12156), and this processing ends.

  Thereby, after the small hitting game end, when special figure 2 fluctuation is not executed, namely, when it is not possible to acquire the retention memory of special figure 2 during the small hitting game, large hitting extension production is executed after the small hitting game end Can be avoided. In addition, although detailed explanation was omitted, when the small hitting end command is received in winning related processing 8 (S12109: Yes), if the value of the second special symbol holding ball number counter 223ga is 0 (S12154: No, the end screen (see FIG. 241 (b)) of the jackpot extension effect is displayed at the end of the small hit game. Therefore, it is possible to reliably notify the player that the jackpot extension effect is finished.

  As described above, in the eighth embodiment, the second special symbol is executed during the big hit game or during the small hit game which is executed in the low probability state (normal state, latent state) of the normal symbol. The ball is configured to be able to enter (become easy) to enter the second entrance ball hole 640 which is a trigger. As a result, since it is possible to prevent the lottery of the second special symbol from being executed unless the winning game (big hit game, small hit game) is executed, as in the first embodiment described above, the lottery of the first special symbol Even if you do not use the configuration to execute (variation) and the second special symbol lottery (variation) simultaneously (in parallel), the small hitting game based on the second special symbol lottery only during the latent state Can be generated frequently. Therefore, control processing of the gaming machine can be simplified.

  Furthermore, according to the type of winning (large hit, small hit), it is possible to set the type of hit where the ball is easy to enter the second entrance 640 and the type of hit that is difficult to enter. Not only the size of the bonus (number of winning balls) that can be acquired during a hit game when the player wins a hit (big hit, small hit), the ball enters the second entrance 640 during the hit game It is possible to make the player interested in whether or not.

  In addition, in the eighth embodiment, a ball enters the second ball entry port 640 when the player wins a win in the first special symbol lottery and when the player wins a second special symbol lottery. The easy-to-perform hit types are set to be different in proportion. Specifically, it is easier for the ball to enter the second entry ball 640 more easily when the winning type is hit with the second special symbol than when the first special symbol wins the hit. Configured.

  By configuring in this way, it is possible to continue the lottery of the special figure 2 and make it easier to execute once it has shifted to a state where the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) can be executed. Although the advantageous game mode advantageous to the player (the mode capable of executing the drawing of the special figure 2) is set, the advantageous game mode is ended immediately and gives the player an unpleasant feeling. Can be suppressed.

  Further, in the eighth embodiment, the lottery of the second special symbol is configured to have a higher probability of winning as a win (large hit, small hit) than the lottery of the first special symbol. Specifically, in the lottery of the first special symbol without winning a small hit, only the jackpot winning (low probability 1/400) is set, whereas in the lottery of the second special symbol is a jackpot elected The probability of (the low probability 1/400) is the same as the first special symbol described above, but it is set to win a small hit (300/400). Thus, in the eighth embodiment, the lottery of the first special symbol is set by setting the lottery probability of the second special symbol higher than the lottery of the first special symbol so as to be more likely to win a small hit. Rather than the second special symbol lottery is configured to be easier to win (big hit, small hit).

  As a result, when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed based on the ball entering the second entry ball opening 640, it is possible to win a hit (big hit, small hit) with high probability, The hit game based on the lottery of the second special symbol can be executed frequently in a short time.

  Furthermore, in the eighth embodiment, the game is executed so that the ball is easily hit by the second entrance ball hole 640 with a higher probability when the small hit is won than when the large hit is won. doing. Thereby, when the player wins a small hit by the lottery of the second special symbol, the lottery of the second special symbol can be easily performed again after the game is finished.

  Further, in the eighth embodiment, a plurality (four) of the right (special figure 2 suspension) to execute the lottery of the second special symbol is configured to be capable of storing (pending storage), depending on the winning type selected. In addition, the opening operation pattern of the hit game is defined so that the number of pieces that can be held and stored during one hit game is different.

  By configuring in this way, it is possible to play a game eagerly in an attempt to secure more pending storage by one hit game. Here, in the eighth embodiment, the second opening / closing door 3650f attached to the second attacker 3650 to be opened in a hit game is in an open state (a state in which the ball can be guided to the second specified winning opening 3650a) When changing to the closed state (the state where the ball can not be guided to the second specified winning hole 3650a), a flow path in which a part of the ball dropped from above the second opening and closing door 3650f can enter the second ball inlet 640 Is configured to pass through. In this way, during the hit game, the ball can not enter the second attacher 3650 that is opened during the hit game, so that the ball can enter the second ball entry port 640, so that during the hit game, 2) The player can be made to watch the movement of the ball entering the specified winning hole 3650a and the movement of the ball entering the second entrance 640.

  As in the seventh embodiment described above, inflow detection means for detecting that the ball has flowed into the flow passage (induction passage 3660) where the ball can flow down when the specific condition is satisfied, and the ball from the flow passage It is possible to provide discharge detection means for detecting that the ink has been discharged, and to provide presentation mode setting means for setting the presentation mode based on the detection results of each detection means, or based on the detection results of each detection means Operation restriction means for restricting the game operation may be provided.

The Ninth Embodiment
Next, the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the first embodiment described above, the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the second special symbol (special figure 2) can be displayed simultaneously (in parallel) and can be displayed dynamically (so-called simultaneous) Fluctuation type). Furthermore, in order to execute discrimination of the special symbol efficiently, it is possible to set the game state (high probability state of the normal symbol) which is easy to open the electric character 64a, high probability state of the normal symbol (for example, time saving state) It is configured to continue for a predetermined period which has been determined in advance (for example, a period until the number (time reduction number of times) of discrimination (variation) of the special symbol reaches 100 times after the big hit ends.

  In the first embodiment described above, since the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are configured to be capable of simultaneously (in parallel) performing the determination (variation), the high probability state of the normal symbol is previously determined. Refers to when determining the period in which the high probability state of the normal symbol is to be continued at the timing when the first special symbol or the second special symbol starts changing, in order to prevent it being set longer than the predetermined period. The time saving information (for example, the time saving counter 203f) is updated (see FIG. 36).

  As described above, in the first embodiment, since the time saving information is updated at the timing of starting the variation of each special symbol, in the simultaneous variation type game machine, the number of times of discrimination (variation) of the special symbol is Even if the time saving number is set based on that, it is possible to prevent the setting of the time saving state exceeding the predetermined time saving number.

  However, in the configuration of the first embodiment, in the simultaneous variation type gaming machine, depending on the determination (variation) timing of each special symbol, the period in which the time saving state is set becomes short and gives the player an unpleasant feeling. There was a problem that.

  Specifically, for example, as a discrimination (variation) of the first special symbol, a discrimination (variation) of the second special symbol, that is, immediately after the special figure fluctuation of the 100th rotation (the final number of time reductions) is performed. When the special figure fluctuation at the 101st rotation is executed, the time saving state can be ended at the timing when the 100th special drawing fluctuation is executed (immediately before the special figure fluctuation at the 101st rotation is performed). If the player does not feel discomfort, but the special figure fluctuation of the 100th rotation (final number of time reductions) is not executed, the special movement of the 101st rotation is not executed, for example, the 100th rotation In the case where the special drawing fluctuation at the 101st rotation is started after the special drawing fluctuation of the special movement is finished, the time saving state ends at the timing when the special drawing fluctuation at the 100th rotation is executed. The state of the normal symbol during the special figure change of There is a problem that uncomfortable feeling to the player for.

  On the other hand, in the ninth embodiment, the time saving end condition is satisfied when the number of times of special figure fluctuation (for example, 100 times) is set as the time reducing end condition for ending the high probability state of the normal symbol. Ending timing of the special figure fluctuation (for example, the special figure fluctuation at the 100th rotation) and start timing of the special figure fluctuation (for example, the special drawing fluctuation at the 101st rotation) executed first after the time saving end condition is satisfied And the time saving state is ended based on the timing to be executed earlier among any of the timings.

  By configuring in this manner, the high probability state of the normal symbol can be set longer, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player is given a sense of discomfort.

  Further, in the ninth embodiment, as the timing at which the special figure fluctuation at the 101st rotation is executed, the timing at which the condition that can execute the special figure fluctuation at the 101st rotation is established can be determined. The time saving state is configured to end before the determination of the special symbol is performed. As a result, the time saving state is set in a range exceeding a predetermined number of times of time saving, and it is possible to reliably prevent the lottery of the special symbol from being executed in the time short state.

  In the present embodiment, among the end timing of the special figure fluctuation in which the time saving end condition is satisfied and the timing in which the special figure fluctuation is executed next to the special figure fluctuation in which the time shortening end condition is satisfied, the above is satisfied first. Although the time saving state is ended based on the timing, the present invention is not limited to this, for example, the time saving based on only the timing when the special figure fluctuation is executed next to the special figure fluctuation satisfying the time shortening end condition. It may be configured to end the state.

  With such a configuration, for example, when there is a vacant period until the special figure fluctuation at the 101st rotation is executed after the special drawing fluctuation at the 100th revolution is completed, that is, the special drawing for the 100th rotation When the demonstration screen (standby screen) is displayed after the end of the fluctuation, the time saving state can be continued even during the idle period, so that the gaming state (high probability state of the normal symbol) advantageous to the player can be further enhanced. It can be set long.

  In this case, when playing the game for passing the ball to the through gate 67 for starting the variation of the normal symbol, the ball fired by the game is the ball entering for starting the variation of the special symbol. It is preferable to configure the game area of the game board 13 so that the ball can enter the mouth. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to suppress that a game in which only the variation of the normal symbol is started is performed without starting the variation of the special symbol.

  Furthermore, when winning is made in the normal symbol discrimination (lottery), the motorized role 64a is opened, and it is configured that the ball can easily enter the ball entering means for starting the variation of the special symbol. Therefore, it is possible to suppress that the game in which only the determination (lottery) of the normal symbol is executed continues for a long time.

  In the present embodiment, as in the first embodiment described above, when the player wins a hit in the normal symbol lottery, the motorized role object 64a is opened, and the ball enters the lower first ball entrance 64b2. Although it is configured to be easy (see FIG. 2), as the ball entry port where the ball can easily enter the ball by opening the motorized accessory 64a, it is not the ball entry port for starting the variation of the special symbol Alternatively, a predetermined number of winning balls may be provided based on the fact that the ball has entered the ball.

<Electric Configuration in the Ninth Embodiment>
Next, an electrical configuration in the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The present ninth embodiment is different from the above-described first embodiment in that the contents defined in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 are changed, and the other electrical configurations are the same. About the same element, the same numerals are attached and the detailed explanation is omitted. FIG. 260 is a schematic view schematically showing the contents defined in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 of the ninth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 260, the RAM 203 of the ninth embodiment is different in that a time saving end standby flag 203ha is added to the RAM 203 of the first embodiment described above.

  The time saving end standby flag 203ha is a flag for indicating that the time saving state is to be ended, and is set to ON when the time saving state is to be ended. In the ninth embodiment, a plurality of timings (time saving end timings) for ending the time saving state are set based on the number of times of variation of the special symbol (number of times of special figure variation). The time saving state is configured to end when one of the timings comes.

  Then, when it is in a state (standby state) where a plurality of time saving end timings can be established, the time saving end standby flag 203ha is set to on. Specifically, in the main control device 110, during the first special symbol variation start process (see S208 in FIG. 33) and the second special symbol variation start process (see S210 in FIG. 39), the gaming state update process (S308) When it is determined that the value of the time reduction counter 203f is 0 in the gaming state update process 9 (see S396 in FIG. 263) executed instead of) (S604: Yes), it is set to ON (see S691) ).

  Then, when the variation stop processing of the special symbol (first special symbol variation stop processing 9 (see S297 in FIG. 264) and the second special symbol variation stop processing 9 (see S298 in FIG. 266) are executed, or When the determination of the special symbol is executed (the first special symbol jackpot determination process 9 (see S395 in FIG. 261)), it is referred to in the second special symbol jackpot determination process 9 (see S991 in FIG. 265)) When the flag 203ha is set to ON, the time saving end process (see S492 in FIG. 262) for ending the time saving state is executed, and the time saving end waiting flag 203ha is set to OFF (S11404).

  By configuring in this way, in the case where the time saving end standby flag 203ha is set to ON (that is, in the standby state), when any time saving end timing comes, it is ensured according to each timing. Can execute the time saving end process. In addition, since the time saving end standby flag 203ha is set to off when the time saving end process (see S492 in FIG. 262) is performed, it is surely prevented that the time saving end process is performed redundantly at a plurality of timings. can do.

<About control processing of main controller in the ninth embodiment>
Next, various control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110 in the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The control process of the main controller 110 in the ninth embodiment is the first special symbol in place of the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 34) with respect to the control process of the main controller 110 in the first embodiment described above. The symbol jackpot determination process 9 (see FIG. 261), the gaming state update process (see FIG. 36), the gaming state update process 9 (see FIG. 263), and the first special symbol fluctuation stop process (see FIG. 38) 1 Special symbol variation stop processing 9 (see Figure 264), Second special symbol jackpot determination processing (see Figure 40) instead of the second special symbol jackpot determination processing 9 (see Figure 265), second special symbol variation stop processing ((Fig. 265) 45 is different from that in FIG. 45 in that the second special symbol variation stop process 9 (see FIG. 266) is executed and the time saving end process (see FIG. 262) is added. The other processes are the same. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected about the same process and the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 261, the first special symbol jackpot determination process 9 (S395) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 261 is a flowchart showing the details of the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S395). The ninth embodiment is different from the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 34) in the first embodiment in that the processes of S491 and S492 are added. The other processes are the same and thus the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  In the first special symbol big hit determination process 9 (S395), after acquiring the data of the execution area of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a (S401), whether the time saving end waiting flag 203ha is on, ie, this time It is determined whether or not the start of fluctuation is the timing of the short end (S491). If it is determined that it is the timing of the time saving end (S491: Yes), the time saving end process is executed (S492), and the process proceeds to the process of S402. Details of the time saving end process (S492) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, in the process of S491, if it is determined that the time saving end standby flag 203ha is not on, that is, the start of the current fluctuation is not the timing of the time saving end (S491: No), the process proceeds to S402.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not it is a time saving end timing before acquiring the lottery result of the special symbol. As described above, by configuring before acquiring the lottery result, it is possible to set the time saving as the gaming state until the end of the fluctuation which is the timing of the time reduction end.

  Next, the time saving end process (S492) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 262 is a flowchart showing the details of the time saving end process (S492). In the time saving end process (S492), a process for setting the gaming state after the time saving end is executed.

  In the time saving end process (S492), first, it is determined whether the probability change flag 203g is on (S11401). If it is determined that the probability change flag 203g is on (S11401: Yes), a state command indicating a latent state is set (S11402), and the process proceeds to S11404. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S11401 that the probability variation flag 203g is not on (S11401: No), a state command indicating a normal state is set (S11403), and the process proceeds to S11404. In the process of S11404, the time saving end standby flag 203ha is set to OFF (S11404), and this process is ended.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 263, the game state update processing 9 (S 396) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 263 is a flowchart showing the details of the gaming state update process 9 (S396). In the ninth embodiment, after subtracting the value of the time reduction counter 203f (S602) from the gaming state update process (see FIG. 36) in the first embodiment, it is determined that the value of the time reduction counter 203f is 0. In this case (S604: Yes), the processing is different in that a process (S691) for setting the time saving end standby flag 203ha to ON is added.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 264, the first special symbol variation stop process 9 (S297) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 264 is a flowchart showing the details of the first special symbol variation stop process 9 (S297). The ninth embodiment is different from the first special symbol variation stop process (see S207 in FIG. 38) in the first embodiment in that the processes of S891 and S892 are added. The other processes are the same and thus the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  In the first special symbol fluctuation stop process 9 (S 297), after stopping the fluctuation of the first special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 (S 809), whether the time saving end standby flag 203 ha is on, ie, this fluctuation It is determined whether or not the stop timing of is the timing of the short end (S891). When it is determined in the process of S891 that the time saving end standby flag 203ha is off (S891: No), the present process is ended as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S891 that the time saving end standby flag 203ha is on, the time saving end process for ending the time saving state is executed (S892), and the present process is finished. In addition, this time short end process (S892) is to execute the same process as the time short end process (S492, see FIG. 262) which is executed in the first special symbol jackpot determination process 9 (see FIG. 261) described above. Since it is only, it abbreviate | omits about the detailed description here.

  The first special symbol jackpot determination process 9 (see FIG. 261) and the second special symbol jackpot determination process 9 (see FIG. 265) and the second special symbol fluctuation stop process 9 (see FIG. 266) are respectively performed. 1) Perform the same change as the change contents for special symbol fluctuation stop processing 9 (see FIG. 264) (adding control processing to execute the time reduction end processing (see FIG. 262) when the time reduction end standby flag 203ha is on). And the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  As described above, in the ninth embodiment, the time saving end condition is set when the special figure fluctuation number (for example, 100 times) is set as the time reducing end condition for ending the high probability state of the normal symbol. Of the special chart fluctuation (for example, the special chart fluctuation at the 100th rotation) at which the following condition is established, and the special map fluctuation (for example, the special map fluctuation at the 101st rotation) executed first after the time saving end condition is satisfied. The start timing is made distinguishable, and the time saving state is ended based on the timing to be executed earlier among any of the timings.

  By configuring in this manner, the high probability state of the normal symbol can be set longer, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player is given a sense of discomfort.

  Further, in the ninth embodiment, as the timing at which the special figure fluctuation at the 101st rotation is executed, the timing at which the condition that can execute the special figure fluctuation at the 101st rotation is established can be determined. The time saving state is configured to end before the determination of the special symbol is performed. As a result, the time saving state is set in a range exceeding a predetermined number of times of time saving, and it is possible to reliably prevent the lottery of the special symbol from being executed in the time short state.

  In the present embodiment, among the end timing of the special figure fluctuation in which the time saving end condition is satisfied and the timing in which the special figure fluctuation is executed next to the special figure fluctuation in which the time shortening end condition is satisfied, the above is satisfied first. Although the time saving state is ended based on the timing, the present invention is not limited to this, for example, the time saving based on only the timing when the special figure fluctuation is executed next to the special figure fluctuation satisfying the time shortening end condition. It may be configured to end the state.

  With such a configuration, for example, when there is a vacant period until the special figure fluctuation at the 101st rotation is executed after the special drawing fluctuation at the 100th revolution is completed, that is, the special drawing for the 100th rotation When the demonstration screen (standby screen) is displayed after the end of the fluctuation, the time saving state can be continued even during the idle period, so that the gaming state (high probability state of the normal symbol) advantageous to the player can be further enhanced. It can be set long.

  In this case, when playing the game for passing the ball to the through gate 67 for starting the variation of the normal symbol, the ball fired by the game is the ball entering for starting the variation of the special symbol. It is preferable to configure the game area of the game board 13 so that the ball can enter the mouth. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to suppress that a game in which only the variation of the normal symbol is started is performed without starting the variation of the special symbol.

  Furthermore, when winning is made in the normal symbol discrimination (lottery), the motorized role 64a is opened, and it is configured that the ball can easily enter the ball entering means for starting the variation of the special symbol. Therefore, it is possible to suppress that the game in which only the determination (lottery) of the normal symbol is executed continues for a long time.

  In the present embodiment, as in the first embodiment described above, when the player wins a hit in the normal symbol lottery, the motorized role object 64a is opened, and the ball enters the lower first ball entrance 64b2. Although it is configured to be easy (see FIG. 2), as the ball entry port where the ball can easily enter the ball by opening the motorized accessory 64a, it is not the ball entry port for starting the variation of the special symbol Alternatively, a predetermined number of winning balls may be provided based on the fact that the ball has entered the ball.

Tenth Embodiment
The tenth embodiment will now be described with reference to FIGS. 267 to 278. FIG. Each embodiment mentioned above has two kinds of special symbols (the 1st special symbol, the 2nd special symbol), and when the lottery of each special symbol becomes a specific lottery result (for example, big hit or small hit) , A bonus game (a big hit game, a small hit game) for operating a variable winning device (for example, the first variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device 650).

  As described above, when the bonus game is executed according to the special symbol lottery, since the bonus game is executed when the lottery result is a specific lottery result, the lottery result is a specific lottery result Although it was possible to give the player a sense of satisfaction, even if the special symbol lottery is executed a plurality of times, there is a risk that the lottery result will not be a specific lottery result, and the special symbol lottery It is impossible to give any benefit to the player who executed the.

  On the other hand, in the tenth embodiment, when it is determined that the ball has entered the ball, the variable winning device (for example, the first variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device 650) is activated. A ball means (specific entrance 4640 (see FIG. 267)) is provided. In this way, by configuring the variable winning device to operate only when the ball enters the specific ball entry means, a bonus is directly awarded to the game content (the result of the ball's launch) of the player. As a result, it is possible to suppress giving a player a feeling of dissatisfaction.

  Here, the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the tenth embodiment is the same as that of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the above-described first embodiment. The electric combination 64a and the lower first entrance 64b2 are deleted, and instead of the upper first entrance 64b1, an entrance 464 is provided, and a new specified entrance 4640 and its specified entrance The difference is that a special accessory 4640a attached to 4640 and a small attachment 4650 are provided. The other configuration is the same, and the detailed description of the same configuration is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 267, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the tenth embodiment, the left area (the area on the left side of the variable display device unit 80) and the left area thereof in the gaming area formed on the game board 13 The game-related devices are concentrated in the lower area (the area under the front of the variable display unit 80) where the balls fired to flow down (the area under the front view of the variable display unit 80). It is configured to play a left-handed game.

  Specifically, a through gate 67 is provided on the upstream side of the left side area, and in the lower side area, an entrance 464, a specific entrance 4640, a small attacker 4650, and a second variable winning device 650 are provided sequentially from the top. It is done. Here, the flow of the game when the left hitting game is performed in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described.

  Most of the balls fired by the left-handed game pass through the through gate 67 and flow downward toward the lower area. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, the determination (lottery) of the normal symbol is executed based on the detection of the passage (detection by a detection switch not shown). In the present embodiment, when the player wins a normal symbol, a winning game is executed when a specific bonus 4640a described later is opened.

  Of the balls that have reached the lower region, the ball entry port 464 is disposed such that one ball enters the ball entry port 464 to twenty balls. When it is detected that the ball has entered the ball entrance 464 (detected by a detection switch not shown), a lottery of a special symbol (first special symbol) is executed based on the detection. In addition, four winning balls are awarded to the player for one entering ball. Then, the ball that has not entered the ball entry port 464 flows downward toward the specific entry port 4640, the small attacker 4650, and the second variable winning device 650 provided below the entry port 464.

  Here, the specific entrance 4640 is a special combination that can be changed into a closed state that makes it difficult to enter the ball and an open state that makes it easier to enter the ball than the closed state. 4640a is attached, and it is comprised so that the ease of entering of a ball | bowl may differ according to the variable condition of the specific symbol 4640a. The special combination 4640a is variably controlled by the variable control means (normal symbol variation processing (see S106 in FIG. 48) executed by the main control unit 110) so that the state is variable according to the lottery result of the regular symbol. When the ball is won by the lottery of the normal symbol executed based on the passage of the ball through the through gate 67, it will be in an open state where the ball is likely to enter the specified entrance 4640 Variable control is performed.

  In addition, although a detailed description will be described later, in the present embodiment, when the special character 4640a is likely to be in the open state (high probability state of the normal symbol) as the gaming state, it becomes the open state more than the high probability state of the normal symbol. It is possible to set the difficult state (normal pattern low probability state), but even if the normal symbol low probability state is set, the ball enters the specified entrance 4640 and It is configured to earn.

  Referring back to FIG. 267, the description will be continued. When the ball that has not entered the entrance 464 reaches the specified entrance 4640, and the specified combination 4640a is in the open state, the ball enters the specified entrance 4640, and the identification If the accessory 4640 a is in the closed state, it flows over the closed special accessory 4640 a toward the small attacker 4650.

  When a ball enters the specified entrance 4640, a lottery of a special symbol (first special symbol) is executed, and one winning ball is given for one winning. In the present embodiment, a maximum of four special symbol (first special symbol) lottery rights to be executed when a ball enters the specified entrance 4640 can be held.

  In the tenth embodiment, a plurality of nails are implanted on the game board 13, and the balls flowing down the game area are guided by the plurality of nails to positions where various devices in the lower area are disposed. Flow down. Also, in the lower region, a device (for example, the second variable winning device 650) provided on the lower side than the number of balls guided toward the device (for example, the entrance 464) provided on the upper side. The number of spheres directed towards) is configured to be greater.

  Specifically, among the balls fired by the left-handed game, about 4 balls are guided to a position where one ball can enter the ball entry port 464 (upper position of the ball entry port 464), of which 5 balls It is configured such that about one ball (ie, about one ball to 20 balls of the balls fired by the left hitting game) enters the ball entrance 464.

  Then, to the specific entrance 4640 and the small attachment 4650, one ball is induced to about two of the balls fired by the left hitting game. In spite of being guided to a position where the ball can enter the ball inlet 464 (position above the ball inlet 464), the specific ball inlet 4640 flows down without entering the ball inlet 464 A sphere and a sphere which could not be guided to the entrance 464 at the stage of flowing down the left region are included. Finally, the second variable winning device 650 is configured to be guided substantially all of the balls fired by the left-handed game.

  In the tenth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 267, it is also possible to play a right-handed game, and the ball fired by the right-handed game is better than the ball fired by the left-handed game. It is difficult to be guided by the ball entrance 464, the specified ball entrance 4640, and the small attacker 4650, and the second variable winning device 650 is guided at the same ratio.

  As described above, by making the ease of entering the ball into each ball entry different depending on the position at which the player launches the ball, the player can be made to play the game while competing for the skill, It is possible to suppress getting bored early.

  The present invention is not limited to the configuration of the game board 13 provided in the tenth embodiment. For example, it is easier for the small attacker 4650 to guide the ball if the right-handed game is played rather than the left-handed game. You may configure it. In this way, it is possible for the player to play a game in which the game method (left strike, right strike) can be varied according to the game result (the presence or absence of the ball entering the specific entrance 4640). Can actively play the game.

  Referring back to FIG. 267, the description will be continued. The small attachment 4650 is additionally provided with a small opening / closing door 4650a which is variable means capable of changing between a closed state which makes it difficult to enter the ball and an open state which makes it easier to enter the ball than the closed state. The ease of entering the ball differs according to the variable state of the small opening and closing door 4650a. This small opening / closing door 4650a is a specific variable control means (a specific entering process executed by the main control unit 110 (see S 196 in FIG. 278) so that the state changes when the ball enters the specific entry port 4640. It is variably controlled by). In addition, although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, when a ball enters the specified entrance 4640, the value of the counter (first hit type counter C2) that is updated at random and the game that is set The opening pattern of the small opening and closing door 4650a is configured to be different based on the state.

  Specifically, the period (open standby time) from when the ball enters the specified entrance 4640 to when the small opening / closing door 4650a is opened is made different. Thus, for example, in a gaming state (for example, a normal state) in which a period (open standby time) from when the ball enters the specific entrance 4640 to when the small opening / closing door 4650a is opened is set long It is possible to reduce the number of balls won to the small attachment 4650 in the win, and it is easy to set a short period from the ball entering the specified entrance 4640 to the opening of the small door 4650a (for example, In the latent state), it is possible to increase the number of winning balls to the small attacker 4650 per unit time.

  In the tenth embodiment, in the case where the ball has won the small attachment 4650, it is configured to give 10 winning balls to one winning ball, and the above-described entrance 464 or specific entry More balls than the ball mouth 4640 are provided. Therefore, by changing the number of ball prizes to the small attachment 4650 per unit time according to the gaming state, for example, the player receives more balls than the number of balls fired to the player by the ball achievement to the small attachment 4650. It becomes possible to give the number of balls as a winning ball.

  By configuring in this way, in addition to the game based on the drawing of the special symbol, it is possible to cause the player to play a game based on the ball entering the specific ball entry means (specific entry port 4640), The interest of the game can be improved.

  Finally, the ball that has not won the small attachment 4650 flows toward the second variable winning device 650 provided below the small attachment 4650. As in the first embodiment described above, the second variable winning device 650 is a variable device that operates when the jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery (acts during the jackpot game). In addition, since the detailed content is the same as that of 1st Embodiment mentioned above, the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted. The ball that has not won the second variable winning device 650 flows into the out port 66 formed at the lowermost position of the gaming area of the gaming board 13 and is discharged out of the pachinko machine 10.

  In the present embodiment, the ball can be shot to the right of the game area (right-handed game is possible). However, the present invention is not limited thereto. The right area may be completely eliminated so that (right-handed game) can not be performed. Further, in the tenth embodiment, all the games (from the game in the normal state) can be executed only by the left hitting game, but the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, the through gate 67 or the specific entry slot 4640 may be provided in the right area, and the game content may be varied according to the game state.

<About the contents of effects in the tenth embodiment>
Next, characteristic effects performed in the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the tenth embodiment, as in the second embodiment described above, the period (fixed period) from the stop display of the special symbol for showing that the jackpot has been won to the execution of the jackpot game is the jackpot type It is prescribed to differ according to.

  In the tenth embodiment, the gaming state (latency state) in which the small attacker 4650 is easily released is set during the confirmation period. That is, it is configured to be able to execute a game (so-called, small hit RUSH) in which the small attacker 4650 is continuously opened using the determined period of the special symbol to indicate that the jackpot has been won.

  By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute small hit RUSH before the big hit game is executed. The technical idea of executing the small hit RUSH before the jackpot game is executed is the same as that of the second embodiment described above, and hence a derivative that can be conceived based on the detailed explanation and the present technical idea. The plan and the alternative plan are the same as those of the second embodiment described above, and the description thereof is omitted.

  In the tenth embodiment, the same special symbol determination period as that of the second embodiment described above is used as the period for executing the small hit RUSH, but the present invention is not limited to this, and in each of the embodiments described above, the small You may use the period used in order to perform a hit game frequently. For example, as in the sixth embodiment described above, a period (opening period) from the start of the jackpot game to the start of the round game may be used. Furthermore, based on the lottery result of the special symbol. It may be configured to set a latent state (a high probability state of a special symbol, a low probability state of a normal symbol) as the gaming state, and may be configured to execute a small hit RUSH during the latent state.

  Referring back to FIG. 268, the description will be continued. FIG. 268 (a) is a view showing an example of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed, and FIG. 268 (b) is executed during the symbol determination period of the special symbol It is a figure showing an example of an effect screen.

  As shown in FIG. 268 (a), when the jackpot of the special symbol is won, "777" is stopped and displayed in the special view 1 display area Dm1 of the main display area Dm and "left-handed" in the guidance display area Dm3. Is displayed. In the present embodiment, the left hitting game is configured to be executed in all the game states, so "left hitting" is always displayed in the guidance display area Dm3. In the case where the same game method (left-handed) is always executed as in the present embodiment, the player does not need to change the game method, so the guidance display area Dm3 is displayed. It may be configured not to.

  Then, in the main display area Dm, a character 811 is displayed, and a comment of "Aim for RUSH" is displayed to indicate to the player that the game period for frequently opening the small attachment 4650 starts. Then, in the sub display area Ds, a comment of "chance zone entry" indicating that a gaming state advantageous to the player is set is displayed.

  In the tenth embodiment, as in the second embodiment described above, when winning a special symbol big win in a definite variation state (special symbol high probability state, normal symbol high probability state), the special winner is selected as the big hit It is configured such that the latent state (special symbol high probability state, normal symbol low probability state) is set during the symbol determination period. Then, when the gaming state is set to the latent state, an operation pattern is set in which a period (opening standby time) from when the ball enters the specific entrance 4640 until the first attacker 650 is opened is short. Since it is configured to be easy, a game (RUSH game) in which the player can increase the number of ball prizes to the small attacher 4650 per unit time is ended the special symbol determination period Run up to.

  Furthermore, in the tenth embodiment, the determination period of the special symbol is configured to be different according to the winning jackpot type. Therefore, since it is possible to extend the period in which the RUSH game can be performed if it is possible to win the jackpot type having a long fixed term of the special symbol, it is a jackpot advantageous to the player.

  Here, in each embodiment described above, whether or not the game content during the big hit game is advantageous to the player whether or not the stop display mode of the third symbol for showing that the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit It is configured to set according to whether the bonus (number of prize balls) which can be given to the player during the big hit game or the gaming state set after the big hit game is advantageous to the player For example, when the player wins a jackpot advantageous to the player, the stop display mode of the third symbol is set with the same odd number (for example, "777"), which is not advantageous for the player (unfavorable In the case of winning a large jackpot, the stop display mode of the third symbol is configured to be set by the same even number (for example, "222").

  On the other hand, in the tenth embodiment, whether or not the above-mentioned game content during the big hit game is advantageous to the player as the stop display mode of the third symbol (can be given to the player during the big hit game In addition to whether the bonus (number of winning balls) or the gaming state set after the end of the jackpot game is advantageous to the player, whether the length of the symbol determination period is advantageous to the player It is configured to set accordingly.

  By configuring in this way, by grasping the stop display mode of the third symbol, RUSH game executed before the big hit game, the big hit game, the gaming state set after the big hit game, and three game contents It is possible to play a game while predicting. In this case, for example, the period when the RUSH game is executed (the symbol determination period), the game content of the big hit game, and the game state set after the big hit game is all advantageous to the player. It is good to provide the stop display mode (for example, "VVV") of the 3rd design set only to. This makes it possible to play a game while giving the player a sense of satisfaction.

  In addition, the stop display mode of the third symbol may be configured to be varied at predetermined timings, and for example, at the time of the variation stop of the special symbol, it indicates that the lottery result of the special symbol this time is a big hit Among the stop display modes, a stop display mode (for example, "222") indicating that the player is a large jackpot disadvantageous to the player is set, and then, during the symbol determination period (during RUSH gaming), "777", during a big hit game The stop display mode of the third symbol may be varied so as to gradually indicate that the player has won a jackpot advantageous to the player as "VVV".

  By configuring in this manner, it is possible to cause the player to watch the effects displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 while expecting that the stop display mode of the third symbol is variable. Further, in the present embodiment, the stop display mode of the third symbol is set by combining the magnitudes of the plurality of benefits provided to the player based on the jackpot winning, but the present invention is not limited thereto. The magnitude may be displayed in different modes.

  For example, the type of stop display symbol (number) of the third symbol is set according to the gaming state set after the end of the big hit game, and the size of the third symbol is varied and set according to the game content during the big hit game Alternatively, the color of the third symbol may be varied and set according to the length of the symbol determination period. As a result, the player can be notified in detail of the contents of the game to be executed from now on.

  Furthermore, in the tenth embodiment, when the latent state is set as the gaming state during the symbol determination period, the efficient RUSH game is executed, but the normal state is set during the symbol determination period In the case where the jackpot is won when the gaming state is the normal state or the short time state, the inefficient RUSH game is executed. Therefore, when setting the stop display mode based on the length of the symbol determination period as the stop display mode of the third symbol, the stop display mode of the third symbol set based on the gaming state at the time of jackpot win is variable You should configure it to As a result, it is possible to inform the player of the game contents to be executed from now on in an easy-to-understand manner.

  After the display of FIG. 268 (a) is made, when the symbol determination period is entered, the display screen shown in FIG. 268 (b) is displayed. As shown in FIG. 268 (b), while the RUSH game is being executed, the main display area Dm is displayed as "in the chance zone", and a remaining period display mode for indicating the remaining period of the symbol determination period. As “Remaining time 30 seconds” is displayed. In this remaining period display mode, the number of seconds displayed is updated according to the elapsed time, and the player is notified of the remaining period of the chance zone (the symbol determination period). Further, in the sub display area Ds, a comment of “Aim for a small attacker” is displayed to indicate the game content in the chance zone (during the symbol determination period).

  In addition, the number of seconds displayed in this remaining period display mode may be set to indicate all of the remaining remaining period when entering the chance zone, or a period (seconds) shorter than the symbol determination period to be set , And may be set to add a new number of seconds to the number of seconds of the remaining period display mode displayed as time passes. In addition, it is set to show a period (number of seconds) shorter than the symbol determination period to be set, and after the set period has elapsed, the remaining period display mode is set to “? You may not know.

  Further, in the tenth embodiment, the display mode of the remaining period is set so that the remaining period of the symbol determination period is indicated by the number of seconds, but making the player grasp that the remaining period is reduced Any mode can be used, for example, it may be configured to indicate the remaining period using an animation until the character 811 is captured by the enemy, or using the period until the container filled with liquid is emptied. It may be configured to indicate the remaining period. Thus, the remaining period can be made difficult to predict by using the animation showing the process of the story, not the number of seconds.

<About the electrical configuration in the tenth embodiment>
Next, an electrical configuration in the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 269 to 273. FIG. The tenth embodiment is different from the above-described second embodiment in that the contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 and the contents of the RAM 203 are different. The other electrical configurations are the same, and the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 269 is a schematic view schematically showing the contents defined in the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110 in the tenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 269, in the tenth embodiment, the small hit random number table 202b, the small hit type selection 2 table 202ab, and the out-of-type selection table 202ad are deleted from the ROM 202 in the above-described second embodiment. , Instead of the second random number table 202c, the second random number 10 table 202ia is provided, the jackpot type selection 2 table 202aa is replaced with the jackpot type selection 10 table 202ib, and a specific entering ball operation pattern table 202ic is newly added Is different.

  The second random number 10 table 202ia is determined to be a hit when the low probability state of the normal symbol is set with respect to the second random number table 202c (see FIG. 15C) described above. The difference is that the range of the random number counter C4 is different, and the other points are the same, so detailed description will be omitted.

  Here, the contents defined in the second random number 10 table 202ia will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 270 is a schematic view schematically showing the contents defined in the second random number 10 table 202ia. As shown in FIG. 270, in this second random number 10 table 202ia, there are 231 random number values that become the hits of the normal symbol in the low probability state of the normal symbol (during the normal state, during the latent state) as the gaming state The range is “0 to 230”. Since the total number of random number values to be hit is 231 while the total number of random number values that can be taken by the second random number counter C4 is 233, the probability that the symbol will normally be hit is “231/233”.

  On the other hand, in the high probability state of the normal symbol (probable variation state, time-shortening state), there are 232 random number values that hit the normal symbol, and the range is “0 to 231”. Since the total number of random numbers to be hit is 232 while the total number of random numbers that can be taken by the second random number counter C4 is 233, the probability that the symbol will normally hit is “232/233”. As described above, in the tenth embodiment, the random number value corresponding to the normal symbol is configured to be the high probability (231/233) even for the low probability state of the normal symbol.

  By configuring in this way, even in the gaming state (normal state, latent state) in which the low probability state of the normal symbol is set, the gaming state in which the high probability state of the normal symbol is set Even in the state), it is possible to make it easy to win a hit in a lottery of normal symbols. In addition, since it is constituted so that the probability that the high probability state of the normal symbol will win a bit is slightly higher than the low probability state of the normal symbol, the high probability of the normal symbol with respect to the low probability state of the normal symbol It is configured so that the state is more advantageous. Furthermore, in the high probability state of the normal symbol than in the case where the opening pattern of the special combination 4640a executed in the winning game executed when the win is won, the winning pattern is in the low probability state of the normal symbol. Since an open pattern is set in which it is easier for the ball to enter the specific entrance 4640 if it is hit winning, the high probability state of the normal symbol is advantageous over the low probability state of the normal symbol There is. In addition, it is not the state (high probability state, low probability state) of the normal symbol in the case that the opening pattern of the specific entrance 4640 executed in the game of the normal symbol is won in the lottery of the normal symbol. It may be configured to set according to the state (high probability state, low probability state) of the normal symbol at the time of executing.

  The jackpot type selection 10 table 202ib is a data table for selecting the jackpot type when the jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery, and is similar to the jackpot type selection 2 table 202aa of the second embodiment described above. A plurality of jackpot types are defined in association with the value of the type counter C2 per unit.

  Here, the contents of the jackpot type selection 10 table 202ib will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 271 is a schematic view schematically showing the contents defined in the jackpot type selection 10 table 202ib. The same elements as the elements defined in the jackpot type selection 2 table 202aa used in the second embodiment described above (for example, the time reduction counter 203f, the special figure 1 determined time counter 203ad) are given the same reference numerals. And the detailed description is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 271, in the jackpot type selection 10 table 202ib, a plurality of jackpot types are defined in association with the value of the first punch type counter C2, and are set in the time reduction counter 203f for each jackpot type. The value to be set, the setting state of the probability change flag 203g, and the value set to the determined time counter 203ad are defined.

  Specifically, the jackpot type (jackpot A1 to jackpot A3) of the jackpot A in which 15 rounds of round games are executed, the time-shortening counter 203f regardless of the gaming state when selected (when the jackpot is won) A value of “10000” is specified to be set, and a probability change flag 203g is set to be set to ON. That is, when jackpot A (jackpot A1 to A3) is selected as the jackpot type, a definite change state (high probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol) is set until the next jackpot is won. It specifies. In the tenth embodiment, "10,000" is set as the value of the time reduction counter 203f in order to continue the high probability state of the normal symbol until winning the next big hit, but is limited to this Alternatively, for example, a flag set to on until the next jackpot is won may be used.

  Furthermore, as a symbol fixed period of special symbol, big hit A1 is specified as “5 seconds”, big hit A2 as “60 seconds”, big hit A3 as “150 seconds” is set, and the obtained first hit type The jackpot A1 is defined in the range of “0 to 19”, the jackpot A2 is defined in the range of “20 to 23”, and the jackpot A3 is defined in “24” of the value of the counter C2 (0 to 99). That is, in the tenth embodiment, the jackpot operation corresponding to the jackpot A (jackpot A1 to A3) is executed at 25% when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, and 80% of them (20/20 25) specifies that the jackpot A1, 16% (4/25) will be the jackpot A2, and 4% (1/25) will be the jackpot A3.

  That is, in the tenth embodiment, even if the player wins a jackpot in which the player's most advantageous jackpot game (15 round jackpot game) is executed, a period (symbol for stopping and displaying the lottery result on the player) When a short symbol determination period is selected as the determination period), the period in which the latent state game (RUSH game) is executed is shortened. Therefore, with respect to the drawing of the special symbol, it is possible to make the player pay attention not only to the presence or absence of the jackpot winning but also to the length of the symbol determination period, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the tenth embodiment, the symbol determination period is defined in association with the jackpot type, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a lottery for selecting the jackpot operation content (jackpot type), A lottery for selecting a symbol determination period may be performed independently. In this case, since it is possible to combine a plurality of symbol determination periods with a plurality of jackpot types, it is possible to provide playability that is difficult for the player to predict.

  Next, as with the above-described jackpot A1 to A3, jackpot B1 to B3, jackpot C1 to C3, and jackpot D1 to D3 are respectively defined.

  Specifically, when a jackpot B (jackpot B1 to jackpot B3) in which a jackpot game content (5 round game) which is more disadvantageous to the player than the jackpot A is set is selected (jackpot is won) Stipulates that the value of "10000" is set to the time reduction counter 203f when the gaming state of the game is normal state (low probability state of the normal symbol), and the value of "10" is set when the time reduction state or the probability change state It is specified that the probability change flag 203g is set to on.

  That is, if the jackpot B is won, a jackpot game which is more disadvantageous than the jackpot A is executed, but if the time saving state or the probability change state is set as the gaming state, the player is notified after the jackpot game is over. Defined to be able to provide a state in which an advantageous gaming state can be set (a gaming state in which a high probability state of a normal symbol ends with 10 special pattern fluctuations in a high probability state of a special symbol until the next jackpot) There is. Therefore, the jackpot A and the jackpot B are jackpots in which the jackpot A is more advantageous as the jackpot game content, but the jackpot B may be advantageous as the gaming state set after the jackpot end.

  Furthermore, as a symbol fixed period of special symbol, big hit B1 prescribes that “30 seconds”, big hit B2 “90 seconds”, big hit B3 “120 seconds” is set, and the first hit type acquired The big hit B1 is defined in the range of "25 to 29", the big hit B2 is defined in the range of "30 to 44", and the big hit B3 is defined in "45 to 49" of the value of the counter C2 (0 to 99) There is.

  That is, in the tenth embodiment, the jackpot operation corresponding to the jackpot B (jackpot B1 to B3) is executed at 25% when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, and 20% of them (5 / 25) specifies that the jackpot B1, 60% (15/25) will be the jackpot B2, and 20% (5/25) will be the jackpot B3. Here, when explaining the symbol determination period which can be set in the case of the jackpot A mentioned above and the symbol determination period which can be set in the case of the jackpot B, the maximum value of the symbol determination period of jackpot A is larger than the jackpot B It is specified to be longer, but the jackpot B is specified to be longer than the jackpot A, the average value of the symbol determination period being set.

  Thus, the maximum value of the symbol determination period that can be set is large, but the jackpot type (high risk high return) with a small average value and the maximum value of the symbol determination period that can be set are small, but the jackpot type with a large average value (Low risk low return), and by configuring the symbol determination period to be set based on the selected jackpot type, the symbol determination period set rather than setting the symbol determination period completely randomly. However, it can make the player think that there is some kind of rule. Thus, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of predicting a game.

  In addition, in this embodiment, although the tendency of the symbol determination period which may be set according to big distinction (big hit A-big hit C) of big hit types is varied, it does not restrict to this, big split of each big hit type ( In the jackpot A to jackpot C), a high risk high return symbol determination period selection group and a low risk low return symbol determination period selection group may be provided. Also, from among a plurality of symbol determination period selection groups in which the maximum value and the minimum value of the symbol determination period that can be set are different although the average value (expected value) of the symbol determination period that can be set is the same. The player may select a desired symbol determination period selection group, and set the symbol determination period using the symbol determination period selection group selected by the player.

  Referring back to FIG. 271, the description will be continued. As described above, in this embodiment, the probability change flag 203g is set to ON after the end of the jackpot game (big hit A1 to big hit B3), so-called probability change jackpot percentage is 50% of the whole (50/100) The remaining 50% is selected as a jackpot type in which the probability change flag 203g is set to be off after the jackpot game is over, so-called, usually a jackpot.

  Specifically, when a jackpot C (jackpot C1 to jackpot C3) in which the same jackpot game content (15 round games) as the jackpot A described above is set is selected (when a jackpot is won) A value of "50" is set to the time reduction counter 203f regardless of the gaming state, and it is specified that the probability change flag 203g is set to OFF.

  That is, when the jackpot C is won, the jackpot game which is advantageous to the player as well as the jackpot A is executed, but after the jackpot game is over, the high probability state of the special symbol is not set, and 50 time saving states Are specified to be set. Therefore, the jackpot C executes a jackpot game which is more advantageous to the player than the jackpot B described above, but as the gaming state set after the end of the jackpot, the jackpot A mentioned above is more disadvantageous than the jackpot A and jackpot B It is a type.

  Furthermore, as a symbol fixed period of special symbol, big hit C1 prescribes that “5 seconds”, big hit C2 is “60 seconds”, big hit C3 is set “150 seconds”, and the obtained first hit type The value of the counter C2 (0 to 99) defines the big hit C1 in the range of "50 to 54", the big hit C2 in the range of "55 to 64", and the big hit C3 in "65 to 74" There is.

  That is, in the tenth embodiment, the jackpot operation corresponding to the jackpot C (the jackpot C1 to C3) is executed at 25% when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, and 20% of them (5 / 25) specifies that the jackpot C1, 40% (10/25) is the jackpot C2, and 40% (10/25) is the jackpot C3. Here, the jackpot C is the same as the jackpot A described above and the kind of symbol determination period that can be set (5 seconds, 60 seconds, 150 seconds) is the same, but the selection ratio is defined to be different, as described above It is specified that the average value (expected value) of the symbol determination period which can be set more than the jackpot A is high. As a result, the jackpot C is a jackpot type which is more disadvantageous than the jackpot A in the jackpot game contents and the gaming state set after the jackpot game is over, but the jackpot for the symbol determination time when RUSH gaming is executed A jackpot type that is more advantageous than A.

  Finally, the jackpot D (jackpot D1 to jackpot D3) in which the same jackpot game content (five rounds game) as the jackpot B described above is set, the gaming state when selected (when the jackpot is won) It is specified that the value of "50" is set to the time reduction counter 203f regardless of the above, and it is specified that the probability variation flag 203g is set to OFF.

  That is, when the jackpot D is won, the jackpot game which is disadvantageous to the player is executed like the jackpot B, and after the jackpot game is finished, the game state which is disadvantageous to the player like the jackpot C is set. It is done. Therefore, the jackpot D is a jackpot type that is the most disadvantageous to the player among the jackpot types described above.

  Furthermore, as a symbol fixed period of special symbol, big hit D1 is specified as “30 seconds”, big hit D2 as “90 seconds”, big hit D3 as “120 seconds” is set, and the acquired first hit type The big hit D1 is defined in the range of “75 to 84”, the big hit D2 is defined in the range of “85 to 94”, and the big hit D3 is defined in “95 to 99” of the value of the counter C2 (0 to 99) There is.

  That is, in the tenth embodiment, the jackpot operation corresponding to the jackpot D (the jackpot D1 to D3) is performed at 25% when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, and 40% of them (10 / 25) specifies that the jackpot D1 is 40% (10/25) the jackpot D2 and 20% (8/25) the jackpot D3. Here, the jackpot D is the same as the jackpot B described above, but the kind of symbol determination period (30 seconds, 90 seconds, 120 seconds) that can be set is the same, but the selection ratio is defined to be different, as described above It is specified that the average value (expected value) of the symbol determination period that can be set than the jackpot B is lower.

  As described above, the jackpot D is a jackpot type that is most disadvantageous to the player in any of the jackpot game contents, the gaming state set after the jackpot game end, and the symbol determination time when the RUSH game is executed.

  The specific ball entry operation pattern table 202 ic is a data table in which the contents of the opening operation of the small attacker 4650 executed when a ball enters the specific entrance 4640 is defined, and the small attacker 4650 is opened. Time (opening standby time), the content of the opening operation of the small attacker 4650 is defined according to the value of the first type counter C2 and the gaming state at the time the ball enters the ball.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 272, contents defined in the specific entry motion pattern table 202ic will be described. FIG. 272 is a schematic view schematically showing the contents defined in the specific ball entry operation pattern table 202ic. As shown in FIG. 272, in the tenth embodiment, the operation content of the small attacker 4650 is the same as the operation content regardless of the gaming state, and the gaming state and the value of the first type counter C2 Accordingly, the open standby time is defined to be different.

  Specifically, as the operation content of the small attacker 4650, an opening operation in which the opening / closing door 4650a of the small attacker 4650 is opened once is set, and the opening operation reaches 1.5 seconds in the opening time, Continue until the number of ball wins reaches 10. Then, an ending period in which the opening operation is completed and the open / close door 4650a is closed is set to be set for 0.5 seconds.

  Then, the gaming state is the normal state, the first hit type counter C2 is defined in the range of “0 to 89”, “normal 1” having the open standby time of 20 seconds is defined, and in the range of “90 to 98” "Normal 2" having an open standby time of 2 seconds is defined, and "normal 3" having an open standby time of 0.5 seconds is defined as "99". Moreover, the game state is a short time state or a definite change state, and the first time type counter C2 is defined as "time short 1" with an open standby time of 10 seconds in the range of "0 to 39", "40 to 89 In the range of “2”, the open standby time is defined as 5 seconds, and in the value of “90 to 99”, the open standby time is defined as “2”. Furthermore, the game state is the latent state, the first hit type counter C2 is defined in the range of “0 to 89,” “latency 1” having the open standby time of 0.5 seconds is defined, “90 to 97 "Latent probability 2" with an open standby time of 0.2 seconds is defined in the range of "," and "Latent probability 3" with an open standby time of 2 seconds is defined as "98 to 99".

  As described above, in the tenth embodiment, the open standby time is configured to be largely different according to the gaming state, and when the normal state is set as the gaming state, the small attacker 4650 has a ball. Even when entering the ball, there is no increase in the player's ball holding, and on the other hand, when the latent state is set as the gaming state, the small attacker 4650 is frequently opened, so the player's possession You can increase the sphere.

  Next, the configuration of the RAM 203 according to the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 273 is a schematic view schematically showing the contents defined in the RAM 203 in the tenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 273, the RAM 203 according to the tenth embodiment is the second special symbol execution area 203b, the special view 2 big hit flag 203i, and the small hit with respect to the RAM 203 (see FIG. 95) according to the second embodiment described above. Flag 203k, special figure 2 variation time counter 203n, special figure 2 variation stop flag 203s, common drawing short variation flag 203t, winning counter 203u, probability variation counter 203aa, special figure 2 symbol determination in progress flag 203ac, special figure 2 determination time counter 203ae This is different in that the positive variation flag 203g, the specific entering flag 203ia, and the specific entry invalid flag 203ib are added. The other elements are the same as those of the RAM 203 of the second embodiment described above, so the same reference numerals are given and detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted. Further, since the probability change flag 203g has the same content as the RAM 203 (see FIG. 21) of the first embodiment described above, the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  The specific entering flag 203 ia is a flag for indicating that the ball has entered the specific entrance 4640, and is set to ON when it is determined that the ball has entered the specific entry 4640. It is a thing. The specific entering flag 203 ia is a ball entering the specific entrance 4640 in the specific entering processing (see S 196 in FIG. 278) executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 274) of the main controller 110. If it has been determined (S11501 in FIG. 278: Yes), it is set to ON (see S11505 in FIG. 278).

  Then, in the first special symbol jackpot determination processing 10 (see S395 in FIG. 276), it is determined whether it is set to on (see S496 in FIG. 276) and when it is determined to be on (see FIG. 276). S496: Yes), a process for forcibly removing the lottery result of the first special symbol executed this time is executed (see S412 in FIG. 276). Then, it is set to off when the specific ball entry operation is completed.

  As described above, in the tenth embodiment, the small attachment 4650 is configured to be opened by the ball entering the specific entry opening 4640, and the specific entry for opening the small attachment 4650 When the operation scenario is set, processing for forcibly disengaging the lottery result of the first special symbol so as not to be a big hit is executed. As a result, it is not possible to win the jackpot of the first special symbol while the small attacker 4650 is open, and therefore, it is possible to prevent the operation of opening the small attacker 4650 from being repeatedly executed. . Furthermore, in order to make it easy for the ball to enter the ball (open state), the variable ball entry means (small attacker 4650, second variable winning device 650), which is a state in which the ball is difficult to enter the ball at normal times (closed state). Can be suppressed from being executed simultaneously (overlapping).

  The specific ball invalidation flag 203ib is for indicating a period (specific ball invalidation period) in which an operation to open the small attacker 4650 is not performed when a ball enters the specific ball inlet 4640, and It is set to ON when the specific ball entry invalidation period is set.

  If it is determined that the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is set to ON in the first special symbol variation stop process 10 (see S296 in FIG. 277) (S801 in FIG. 277: Yes) ), Set to on (see S892 in FIG. 277). Then, in the specific entering process (S196 in FIG. 278), when the setting status is determined (S11502 in FIG. 278) and it is determined that the specific entering invalid flag 203ib is set to ON (S11502 in FIG. 278: Yes), the process (S11504 in FIG. 278) in which the specific entry action scenario is set is skipped. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the opening operation of the small attacker 4650 based on the ball entering the specific entrance 4640 during the period when the jackpot game is being executed.

<Regarding Control Processing in the Tenth Embodiment>
Here, control processing in the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the tenth embodiment, the configuration of the second special symbol is deleted from the above-described second embodiment, and the configuration of the specific entry port 4640 is added. The control process related to the second special symbol lottery (discrimination) is deleted, and the control process to be executed when the ball enters the specified entrance 4640 is different. Moreover, the control processing accompanying the difference of the control processing mentioned above is different.

  Specifically, in place of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31) of the main controller 110 in the second embodiment described above, the timer interrupt process 10 (see FIG. 274) is replaced by the special symbol variation process 2 (see FIG. 97). Instead of S154), the special symbol variation process 10 (see S195 in FIG. 275) is replaced with the first special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (see S356 in FIG. 98) and the first special symbol jackpot determination process 10 (S395 in FIG. 276) Refer to), in place of the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 2 (see S 257 in FIG. 99), the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 10 (refer to S 296 in FIG. 277) is performed. Differs in that S196) is added. The other processes are the same. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected about the same process and the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

  In addition to the above-described contents, there are cases where the specific contents of the control processing (for example, the contents of processing regarding the second special symbol variation) are changed corresponding to the configuration of the tenth embodiment, but Other than the above-described parts, the corresponding processing is simply deleted, and can be easily conceived by those skilled in the art, so the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 274, the contents of the timer interrupt process 10 executed by the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110 will be described. FIG. 274 is a flowchart showing the contents of the timer interrupt process 10 in detail. In the tenth embodiment, a subroutine of special symbol variation processing 10 (S195) is executed instead of the special symbol variation processing 2 (S154) with respect to the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 31) in the second embodiment. And the specific entering ball processing (S196) in that the subroutine is executed. The other processes are the same and thus the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  When the timer interrupt process 10 is executed, the processes of S101 to S103 are executed similarly to the above-described timer interrupt process, and then the special symbol variation process 10 (S195) is executed. The special symbol variation processing 10 (S195) is to execute the new special symbol variation and the point that the variation processing relating to the second special symbol is deleted from the above-mentioned special symbol variation processing 2 (see FIG. 97). The difference is that the processing content for determining whether it is possible is changed. The detailed contents of the special symbol variation process 10 (S195) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Referring back to FIG. 274, the description will be continued. When the special symbol variation processing 10 (S195) is finished in the timer interrupt processing 10, next, the same processing of S105 to S108 as the special symbol variation processing 2 (see FIG. 97) described above is executed, and then the specific entering ball is entered. After the processing (S196) is performed, other processing (S109) is performed, and the present processing ends.

  Here, the specific ball entry processing (S196) is a process that is executed when a ball enters the specified inlet 4640 (see FIG. 267), and it is possible to enter the ball into the specified inlet 4640. Based on the determination, it is determined whether or not the small attacker 4650 is to be released, or whether or not the current ball entry is handled effectively, and processing for setting based on the determination result is performed. Specifically, the detailed contents of the specific entering process (S196) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the contents of the special symbol variation process 10 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 275 is a flow diagram showing control contents of special symbol variation processing 10 (S195) in the tenth embodiment. When the special symbol variation process 10 (S195) is executed, first, it is determined whether the current gaming state is a big hit or a specific ball entry (S295). In the process of S295, when it is determined that the large hit medium flag 203o is set to ON, it is determined that the current large hit is in place, and it is determined that the specific entering flag 203ia is set to ON. It determines that the current is in the specific entry.

  In the process of S295, when it is determined that the current gaming state is in the middle of hitting or specific entering the ball (S295: Yes), the special figure fluctuation processing 2 of the second embodiment described above (see S154 in FIG. 97). The same processing of S202 and S203 is executed, and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S295, when it is determined that the current gaming state is not a big hit or a specific entering ball (S295: No), the special figure fluctuation processing 2 of the second embodiment described above (S154 in FIG. 97). The same processing of S204, S205, S206, and S251 is executed.

  And in the process of S251, when it is determined that the flag 203ab is not set to ON (set to OFF) during special figure 1 symbol determination, the first special symbol variation start process 10 (S297) is executed. , End this process. The first special symbol variation start process 10 (S297) is a first special symbol variation start process (S208 in FIG. 33) executed in the special symbol variation process 2 (see S154 in FIG. 97) in the second embodiment described above. 34) in that the first special symbol jackpot determination process 10 (see S395 in FIG. 276) is executed instead of the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see S306 in FIG. 34). About this 1st special symbol big hit judging processing 10 (refer to S395 of Drawing 276), since it is the same except this, detailed explanation is omitted.

  Also, in the process of S206, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203m is 0 (S206: Yes), or in the process of S251, the special figure 1 symbol determination in progress flag 203ab is set on. If it is determined (S251: Yes), the first special symbol variation stop process 10 (S296) is executed, and this process is ended.

  Next, the first special symbol jackpot determination process 10 (S395) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 276 is a flow chart showing the contents of the first special symbol jackpot determination process 10 (S395). In this first special symbol jackpot determination process 10 (S395), the current state is a high probability state of the special symbol with respect to the first special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (see S356 in FIG. 98) of the above-described second embodiment. When it is determined whether or not the probability variation flag 203g is referred to instead of the probability variation counter 203aa, and when it is determined whether or not the lottery of the first special symbol this time (jump determination) is to be executed, It differs in that it replaces the jackpot flag 203i and refers to the specific entry in-field flag 203ia. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals and the detailed description thereof will be described later.

  When the first special symbol jackpot determination processing 10 (S395) is executed, the same processing of S401 as the first special symbol jackpot determination processing 2 (see S356 in FIG. 98) of the second embodiment described above is performed first. Then, it is determined whether the probability change flag 203g is set to ON (S495). If it is determined in the process of S495 that the probability change flag 203g is set to ON, since the present is a high probability state of the special symbol, the current lottery result based on the first random number table 202a for high probability Is acquired (S403).

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the probability change flag 203g is not set to ON in the process of S495, the present is a low probability state of the special symbol, so this time based on the first random number table 202a for low probability. The lottery result is acquired (S404). Next, when the processing of S403 or S404 described above is finished, it is determined whether the specific entering flag 203ia is set to ON (S496), and it is determined that the flag is set to ON (S496: Yes), That is, when the ball enters the specific entrance 4640 and it is determined that the specific entry operation is being executed, the processing (S407 to S410) based on the determination (big hit determination) of the special symbol being executed is skipped. Then, after the processing of S412 identical to the first special symbol jackpot determination processing 2 (see S356 of FIG. 98) of the second embodiment described above is performed, the present processing is terminated.

  On the other hand, in the process of S 496, when it is determined that the specific entering flag 203 ia is not set on (is set off) (S 496: No), the first special symbol of the second embodiment described above The processing of S406 to S410 that is the same as the jackpot determination processing 2 (see S356 in FIG. 98) is executed, and the present processing ends.

  Next, contents of the first special symbol variation stop process 10 (S296) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 277 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special symbol variation stop process 10 (S 296). This first special symbol fluctuation stop process 10 (S 296) deletes the update process related to the probability variation counter 203 aa with respect to the first special symbol fluctuation stop process 2 (see S 257 in FIG. 99) of the second embodiment described above. The point that control to set the state command according to the setting situation of the hour reduction counter 203f and the probability change flag 203g was added, and the contents of the process executed when the first jackpot flag 203h is set to ON is partially changed The difference is in the

  Specifically, when the first special symbol fluctuation stop process 10 (S296) is executed, first, the same S851 as the first special symbol fluctuation stop process 2 (see S257 in FIG. 99) of the second embodiment described above. The processing of ~ S854 is executed. Also, in the process of S853, even when it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 determined time counter 203ad is not 0 (it is 1 or more) (S853: No), the first special symbol fluctuation stop of the second embodiment described above Processing (S860) is executed during the same fixed time as processing 2 (see S257 in FIG. 99).

  When the process of S 854 is finished, next, a state command according to the setting status of the hour reduction counter 203 f and the setting status of the probability variation flag 203 g is set (S 891), and then it indicates that the fixed period of the first special symbol has ended. The special figure 1 fixed period end command is set for (S858). Thereafter, it is determined whether the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is set to ON (S801), and when it is determined that the flag is set to ON (S801: Yes), the specific entry invalid flag 203ib is set to ON. (S892), a specific entering invalid command is set to indicate that the specific entering invalid flag 203ib is set to ON (S893). The voice lamp control device is set by the external output process (S2201) of the main process (see FIG. 52) of the main control unit 110 in the same manner as the command set in the other control processes of the main control unit 110. It is output to 113. The voice lamp control device 113 determines the period in which the specific entering operation is not executed even if the ball enters the specific entrance 4640 by receiving the specific entry invalid command, and the third based on the result of the determination. The display mode displayed on the display screen of the symbol display device 81 can be variably set.

  When the process of S 893 is finished, the processes of S 805 and S 807 identical to the first special symbol variation stop process 2 (see S 257 of FIG. 99) of the second embodiment described above are then executed, and this process is ended. In the present embodiment, the special view 1 jackpot flag 203h and the definite change flag 203g are set off (S894) between the process of S805 and the process of S807, but the process of S894 is the same as the process of S894. Since the target of the processing performed on the probability variation counter 203aa in the first special symbol variation stop processing 2 (see S257 in FIG. 99) of the second embodiment described above is changed to the probability variation flag 203g, the details thereof Description is omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 278, the contents of the specific ball entry process (S196) will be described. FIG. 278 is a flowchart showing the contents of the specific ball entry process (S196). This specific ball entry process (S196) is executed by the timer interrupt process 10 (see FIG. 274) which is repeatedly executed by the main controller 110 every two milliseconds, and the specific ball entry port 4640 is used. When it is determined that the ball has entered the ball, various processes are executed.

  Specifically, when the specific entering process (S196) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not there is a winning (entering) of a ball to the specific entrance 4640 (S11501). In the process of S11501, determination is performed with reference to the detection result of a detection switch (not shown) for detecting that the ball has entered the specified entrance 4640. If it is determined in the process of S11501 that there is no ball winning (entering) of the ball to the specific entrance 4640 (S11501: No), the present process is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S11501 that the ball has won (entered) the specific entrance 4640 (S11501: Yes), then it is determined whether the specific entry invalid flag 203ib is set to ON. (S11502), when it is determined that it is set to ON (S11502: No), that is, a period in which the specific entering operation based on the ball winning (entering) to the specific entrance 4640 is not executed. If there is, the process ends. In the process of S11502, when it is determined that the specific entry invalid flag 203ib is not set to ON (set to OFF) (S11502: No), next, based on the specific entry behavior pattern table 202ic , And the current specific entering pattern are determined (S11503).

  Here, the contents executed in the process of S11503 will be described. As described above with reference to FIG. 272, the specific entering ball operation pattern table 202 ic corresponds to the acquired value of the first hit type counter C 2 and the current gaming state, and a plurality of specific entering ball patterns (specific The scenario pattern of the operation is defined, and in the process of S11503, the current gaming state is read out from the gaming state information stored in the other memory area 203z of the RAM 203, and the value of the first hit type counter C2 is This acquisition determines the current entering pattern.

  When the process of S11503 is finished, next, a specific entry action scenario corresponding to the determined specific entry pattern is set (S11504), and the specific entry flag 203ia is set to ON (S11505). Then, a specific entry command to indicate that the specific entry operation scenario is set is set (S11506), and the process ends.

  As described above, in the tenth embodiment, since the specific entry port 4640 is provided in which the small attacher 4650 is opened when the ball enters the ball, the ball is sent to the player. Can make it easy to watch the flow situation of

  In addition, in the game state that is set at the time when the ball enters the specified entrance 4640, the period (waiting period) from when the ball enters the specified entrance 4640 until the small attachment 4650 is released Since the system is configured to be different according to the game state, it is possible to set a state in which the small attacker 4650 can be easily opened and a state in which the small attacker 4650 can not easily be opened. Therefore, since the player can be made interested in the currently set gaming state, the interest of the game can be improved.

  Moreover, in the tenth embodiment, as in the second embodiment described above, the game is performed during the period (symbol determination period) in which the third symbol indicating that the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit is displayed in a stopped state. It is configured to set an advantageous gaming state (latency state) that is advantageous to the player, and when the ball enters the specified entrance 4640 while this advantageous gaming state is set, Opening action is set so that the period (waiting period) from the ball entering the specific entry 4640 to the opening of the small attachment 4650 is shorter than the state in which the gaming state is set. There is.

  Thus, during the period from when the symbol (special symbol, third symbol) for displaying the lottery result is stopped to be displayed to the jackpot of the special symbol is started, that is, the player wins the jackpot. In the period from the notification of winning to the actual start of the jackpot game, it is possible to frequently execute a special game capable of opening the small attacker 4650.

  In the tenth embodiment, the gaming state in which the small attacker 4650 is easy to open during the period in which the third symbol indicating that the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit is stopped and displayed (symbol determination period) The game state (latency state) may be set so that the small attachment 4650 can be easily opened at a timing other than the above. As in the first embodiment, it may be set during the variation display of the special symbol to indicate that the jackpot has been won, or as in the sixth embodiment described above, the round game is started after the jackpot game is started. You may set to the period (the opening period of a big hit game) until it is performed. Furthermore, it may be set only to any one of the above-described periods, or may be set by combining a plurality of periods.

  Furthermore, even when the special symbol drawing result is a big hit, it is configured to execute a special game capable of opening the small attacker 4650 frequently before informing the player that the present drawing result is a big hit. good. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player predict that the big hit game will be executed after the end of the special game by the execution of the special game, so the interest of the game can be improved. .

  Moreover, when it is comprised so that a special game and a big hit game may be performed continuously like the 10th embodiment, at least one copy of the display production displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 is It is good to constitute so that it becomes a series production which straddles a special game and a big hit game. In this case, for example, information regarding the period during which the special game can be performed, ie, the length of the symbol determination period set this time, information regarding the game content (number of rounds) of the big hit game, and the game set after the big hit game is over It is good to set up the production mode of a series production mentioned above based on the information about a state. Thereby, it will be executed from now on based on the game contents (game contents of special game, game contents of big hit game) executed while the series effect is displayed, and the contents of the series effect being displayed. It becomes possible to make the player predict the contents of the game.

  Further, when the big hit game is continuously executed after the end of the special game as in the tenth embodiment, the special game and the big hit game are notified to the player as one big hit game. You may set up the production | presentation aspect. By configuring in this way, it is possible to combine the contents of the jackpot game on effect with the setting contents of the special game and the setting contents of the jackpot game, so the game contents of one jackpot game It can be set over a wide variety.

  In the tenth embodiment, a configuration is employed in which the jackpot game is executed when the finalized display period of the special symbol indicating the jackpot win ends (elapsed), but the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, the special symbol When a ball passes a specific area in a state in which a confirmation display period has elapsed, a jackpot game is configured to be executed, and it is from the elapse of a confirmation display period of a special symbol until the ball passes the specific area It may be configured to set the gaming state (latency state) in which the small attacker 4650 is easy to open during the period.

Regarding Modification of Tenth Embodiment
Here, with reference to FIG. 279, a modification of the tenth embodiment described above will be described. In this modification, a start gate 670 is provided at a position where a ball which has flowed down the left side area of the game board 13 (the left side area in a front view of the variable display unit 80) can pass through. And the point which made the arrangement position of the specific entrance 4640 and the small attacker 4650 variable. The other configuration is the same as that of the tenth embodiment, and the same configuration is denoted with the same reference numeral, and the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  In the above-described tenth embodiment, when the special symbol is won, the special symbol is variably displayed for a predetermined period set as the variation display period, and the special symbol is set as the symbol determination period after the predetermined period has elapsed. It was configured to perform a jackpot game after displaying a period stop display. On the other hand, in the present modification, after the predetermined symbol has been stopped and displayed for a specific period set as the symbol determination period after the predetermined period has elapsed, the jackpot game is executed based on the ball having passed the starting gate 670 It is composed of

  Then, in a period from when the special symbol is stopped and displayed to when the big hit game is performed, that is, a period in which the symbol determination period and the start period until the ball passes the start gate 670 after the symbol determination period has elapsed. An advantageous gaming state (latency state) that is advantageous to the player is set.

  According to this modification configured in this manner, it is possible to set an advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player for a period that is not a predetermined predetermined period. Therefore, it is possible to play the game while expecting the player to continue the advantageous gaming state for a longer time, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 279, in this modification, a ball fired for performing a special game in which the small hit attacker 4650 wins a ball, that is, a position where the ball fired by the left hitting game can pass A start gate 670 is provided on the Thereby, it is possible to suppress that the special game is performed without passing the ball to the start gate 670 during the above-described start period.

  Furthermore, in the present modification, the ball passing the starting gate 670 is the second variable winning device 650 after the ball passes the starting gate 670 and the second variable winning device 650 is opened by the big hit game. It is configured to be shorter than the time required to reach. As a result, when the ball that has passed through the starting gate 670 reaches the second variable winning device 650, the second variable winning device 650 can be opened, so that a big hit game can be played efficiently. it can.

  Incidentally, as shown in FIG. 279, in the present modification, the flow downward direction of the ball is varied by a plurality of nails implanted in the game board 13, and the flow downward direction passes through the start gate 670. In the case of being changed in the direction, since the start gate 670 is configured to pass the ball, it is difficult for the player to know how long the start period will continue, and the game area of the game board 13 Although it was possible to make the player interested in the flow of individual balls flowing down, since the flow direction of the balls is irregularly changed by a plurality of nails, the starting period continues for a long time In some cases, it sometimes ended immediately.

  Therefore, in the game area of the game board 13, the ball can be distributed regularly in the first direction and the second direction in the area where the ball can flow down to the starting gate 670. A dividing means is provided, and the sphere flowing down the other flow passage (the flow passage in the second direction) is directed toward the start gate 670 rather than the flow passage in the first direction (the flow passage in the first direction) You may comprise so that it may become easy to flow down.

  By configuring in this way, it is possible to give a predetermined regularity to the flow of balls flowing down the game area of the game board 13, so the balls pass the start gate 670 immediately during the start period. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation where the

Regarding Modification of Seventh Embodiment
Next, a modified example of the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the seventh embodiment described above, the ball is entered into the second entrance 3640 and the V winning device 650 is opened during a small hit game by one hit of the second symbol (normal symbol). The presence or absence of passage of the sphere to the specific region 650V of the inside is configured to be settable.

  On the other hand, in this modification, in addition to the configuration of the seventh embodiment described above, the ball entry into the second entrance 3640 and the small ball also by the hit game of a plurality of second symbols (normal symbols) The difference is that it is possible to set whether or not the ball has passed to a specific area 650V in the V winning device 650 which is opened during a hit game. Furthermore, the value of the second random number counter C4 that can be obtained by passing through the through gate 67 can be stored up to four at maximum. The detailed configuration and control contents for holding and storing the second random number counter C4 are the same as those in the first embodiment described above, and thus the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 280, the contents of special effects of the present modification executed by using the configuration of the present modification will be described. FIG. 280 schematically shows an example of the resurrection effect executed when the second symbol (normal symbol) is continuously won and the ball can pass through the specific area 650V in the V prize winning apparatus 650. FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 280, when the resurrection effect is executed, the character 811 is revived from the losing effect in the in-race effect described above with reference to FIG. 202 (a), and an effect of winning is executed. During this resurrection effect, an effect in which the character 811 runs wildly by skipping the rival character 860 and the goal during the race in the main display area Dm is executed. Here, the conditions under which the resurrection effect is performed will be briefly described. In this modification, a predetermined hit game is executed in a state in which the time saving state is set, and in a state in which the normal state is set immediately after that (in the next popular drawing lottery performed without opening) When a specific hit game is executed, the ball enters the second entrance 3640 by the hit game executed earlier, and the small is won in the special figure 2 lottery executed based on the entered ball During the small hit game of the ball, the ball that has flowed into the second passage 660b (see FIG. 195) by the next hit game is configured to be able to pass through the specific area 650V, and such a state occurs Possible states, that is, the result of the popular drawing lottery which is continuously executed (the result of determining in advance the common drawing prize information included in the common drawing reserve) is a specific winning result and each winning result Play when a hit game is executed based on State satisfies a predetermined condition, further, among the per game continuous, when the sphere to the second passage 660b at least the following (the second time) per game is flowed, revived effect described above is executed.

  In this manner, the player can be surprised by configuring to be able to provide a game result (a state in which the ball passes the specific area 650V during the small hitting game) advantageous to the player based on a plurality of common drawing lottery. It is possible to provide a certain game, and to suppress getting bored early in the game. Furthermore, the rendering effect can be enhanced by making the unexpected rendition (resurrection rendition) possible in response to the above-mentioned unexpected game.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 281, an electrical configuration provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 of the present modification will be described. The present modification is a modification of the seventh embodiment described above, and the basic electrical configuration is the same as that of the seventh embodiment. Here, only the configuration different from the seventh embodiment described above will be described, and the description other than that will be omitted. FIG. 281 (a) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents defined in the high probability second random number 11 table 202ja, and FIG. 281 (b) is a low probability second random number 11 table It is the model which showed the content prescribed | regulated to 202jb typically.

  As shown in FIG. 281 (a), the second random number 11 table for high probability 11 table 202ja is referred to when performing the pass / fail determination of the second symbol in the high probability state of the normal symbol, and is described above In the process (see S805 in FIG. 219) of acquiring the lottery result in the normal symbol variation process 7 (see S192 in FIG. 219) of the seventh embodiment, the gaming state currently set is the high probability state of the ordinary symbol It is referred to in some cases.

  The second high-probability second-per-random-number 11 table 202ja is different from the above-described seventh embodiment in that the second per-class (per-common-class type) is increased. Specifically, the value C of the second random number counter C4 defines the value C per common drawing in the range of "80 to 98". As for the second drawing per category A and B, the second correspondence is the same as the above-described seventh embodiment except that the corresponding range of the value of the random number counter C4 is different. Therefore, the detailed description is omitted.

  Furthermore, the selected second hit type (generally per type) is set so that the action content of the hit action executed is different according to the gaming state set at the timing when the hit action is executed. .

  The hit operation per common drawing A and per common drawing B, which are executed in the state where the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, is omitted because it is the same as the seventh embodiment described above. The hit action is 0.1 seconds for the opening period, 2.5 seconds for the opening period, and 1 second for the ending period, and one ball enters the second entrance 3640 during the opening period. A hit operation is performed when the open period ends.

  That is, in the seventh embodiment described above, the ending period is set to the time (3 seconds) or more required for the ball to pass through the second passage 660b, based on the special figure 2 variation due to one common figure While the ball which has flowed down to the second passage 660b based on other popular figures is configured not to pass through the specific area 650V during the small hit game executed, the popular figures of this modification In the hit game (hit operation) corresponding to C, the ending period is set shorter than the time required for the ball to pass through the second passage 660b (3 seconds) (0.1 seconds), and The ball that has flowed into the second passage 660b is configured to be able to pass the specific area 650V during the small hitting game based on the result of the drawing drawing.

  Specifically, when the special drawing 2 lottery is executed by the hitting operation based on the common drawing per win C, the next common drawing drawing becomes executable 0.1 seconds after the special drawing 2 drawing start, and the next When the ball enters the second ball entry port 3640 in the shortest time (1.3 seconds) in the popular A drawing by the popular drawing lottery of the current, it is executed C The ball will flow into the second passage 660b 1.4 seconds after the drawing of the special figure 2 drawing based on the above.

  In such a case, if the drawing result of the special drawing 2 lottery executed by the hit operation based on the C prize per common drawing is the small hit and the small hit game is executed, the common drawing during the small hit game It is possible to establish a state in which the ball that has flowed into the second passage 660b can pass through the specific area 650V based on the win A win.

  As described above, in the present modification, a plurality of popular figures are obtained by winning a predetermined hit type (A and B per popular figures) immediately after the specific win type (per C common prize) is won. The special state 2 lottery which is executed straddling, and the falling ball to the second passage 660b can provide the player with an advantageous gaming state (ball passing to the specific area 650V in the small hitting game) advantageous to the player. .

  The second random number 11 table 202jb for low probability is referred to when performing the pass / fail determination of the second symbol in the low probability state of the normal symbol, and the normal symbol variation processing 7 of the seventh embodiment described above In the process of obtaining the lottery result (see S 805 in FIG. 219) (see S 192 in FIG. 219), it is referred to when the currently set gaming state is the low probability state of the normal symbol.

  The low probability second hit random number 11 table 202jb is different from the seventh embodiment described above in that a common power operation pattern different from the seventh embodiment according to the second hit type (type per common drawing) is defined. There is. Specifically, the per-diagram A is defined so that the value of the second random number counter C4 is in the range of “0 to 19”. If the player wins A, and if the game state for executing the hit operation is low probability, then the opening period is 0.1 seconds, the opening period is 1 second, and the ending period is 0.1 seconds. Is defined to be implemented.

  Further, B is defined as per the second drawing, when the value of the random number counter C 4 is “20”. If you win this popular map B and the gaming state when executing the winning action is a low probability state, a winning game with an opening period of 2 seconds, an open period of 0.2 seconds, and an ending period of 3 seconds is executed It is defined that the value of the second random number counter C4 is a value of "21" and the number C of the general figures is defined. If the player wins C, and if the game state for executing the hit operation is low probability, then the game will be played with an opening period of 2 seconds, an open period of 0.2 seconds and an ending period of 3 seconds. It is prescribed to be done. And "outside" is specified in the range where the value of the second random number counter C4 is "22 to 99".

  Here, when it is elected per common drawing in the state where the low probability state of the normal symbol is set, it is electric only during the extent to which the ball can not enter the second entrance 3640 by the game. Although the bonus 3640a is configured so as not to be opened, the open period of the motorized bonus 3640a is set to be long (one second) only in a hit game based on a common figure A. When the open period of one second is set, the ball flows down on the motorized workpiece 3640a to a position facing the second passage 660b (see FIG. 198).

  Then, when the open period has passed one second, the motorized utility 3640a is closed, and the ball flows into the second passage 660b and flows downward toward the out port 66 as it is. In the normal state, since the ball does not enter the second entrance 3640, the V winning device 650 is never opened.

  As described above, in the hit game executed in the low probability state of the normal symbol, the operation pattern (common power operation pattern) of the electrically operated part 3640a is varied according to the second contact type (generally assigned type) set. Because, by making the passage where the ball flows down different, for example, it becomes possible to win a ball that has passed through a plurality of flow paths with respect to the first variable winning device 65 that is opened during a big hit game It will be possible to win multiple balls at once.

  Furthermore, in this modification, in the state where the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, the hit game based on the common figure C is executed, and the low probability state of the normal symbol is set immediately after that. When the corresponding hit game is executed, the ball which has flowed down the second passage 660b by the hit game corresponding to the hit A in the low probability state is based on the hit C per hit in the high probability state. It is configured to be able to pass the specific area 650V during the small hit game executed.

  As a result, although it is possible to execute the jackpot game based on the small hitting game despite the transition to the low probability state of the normal symbol once, it is possible to provide the player with a surprising game. While being able to do, it is possible to make the player play the game eagerly.

  Next, contents of control processing executed by main controller 110 in the present modification will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 281 is a flowchart showing through gate passage processing 11. This through gate passing process 11 is acquired when the ball passes through the through gate 67 (stored in the through gate passing process (see S107 in FIG. 49) executed by the seventh embodiment described above (stored) It differs in that the processing of discriminating (predicting) the game result in advance based on the values of various counters) is performed.

  When the through gate passage processing 11 (S157) is executed, first, the same processing of S1901 to S1905 as the through gate passage processing (see S107 of FIG. 49) executed by the seventh embodiment described above is executed, and thereafter, Based on the counter value stored by the process of S1905, the success or failure of the lottery of the normal symbol and the type per common drawing are predicted (S1951). Then, a common drawing prize information command including information indicating the predicted success or failure and the common drawing per type is set (S1952), and this processing is ended.

  The detailed contents of the processing executed in S1951 and S1952 are those in which the target of the processing of S1707 and S1708 of the start winning processing (S105 in FIG. 47) executed for the special symbol is replaced by a normal symbol. Because there is a detailed description of it is omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 283 and 284, the contents of the control processing executed by the audio lamp control device 113 in the present modification will be described. FIG. 283 is a flowchart showing the command determination process 11. This command determination process 11 is a command (not shown) for the special symbol in addition to the special symbol for the special symbol for the command determination process 7 (see S4182 in FIG. 226) executed by the seventh embodiment described above. The difference is that processing (see S12051) for determining that the general drawing winning information command has been received and processing (refer to S12052) executed when the general drawing winning information command has been received are added, otherwise Are identical. About the same element, the same numerals are attached and the detailed explanation is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 283, when it is determined that the winning information related command (winning information command, common drawing winning information command) has been received (S 12051: Yes), based on the received winning information command (general drawing winning information command) The winning information is stored in the winning information storage area 223b (S12010). Here, in the winning information storage area used in the present modification, in addition to the holding ball storing area of the special symbol, the received winning information can be stored also in the holding ball storing area of the normal symbol. Then, when the process of S12010 is finished, the general drawing effect setting process (S12052) is executed, and the present process is ended.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 284, the contents of the common drawing effect setting process (S 12052) will be described. The ordinary drawing effect setting process (S12052) determines each information stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c (see FIG. 21) based on the received ordinary drawing winning information command, and the specific condition is satisfied. If it is determined that the specific condition is satisfied, processing for specifying that the special effect is executable is executed.

  When the common drawing effect setting process (S12052) is executed, it is first determined whether the prize related information received this time is the common drawing winning information command (S13001), and if it is a common drawing winning information command, It is determined whether the information indicating C per high confidence map is included (S13002). If it is determined in the process of S13002 that the information indicating the high probability spread map C is included (S13002: Yes), the spread map C winning flag is set to ON (S13003), and the process is ended.

  The flat chart C winning flag is set to ON when information (command) indicating C per high probability flat chart is received, and is set to off when the flat chart winning information command is next received. It is In this way, it is possible to distinguish the common drawing prize information command received next to the common drawing prize showing the high probability common drawing C.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S13002 that the information indicating C per high probability diagram is not included (S13002: No), it is determined whether the information indicating A per low probability diagram is included ( S13004), when it is determined that the flag is not included (S13004: No), the drawing C winning flag is set to OFF (S13007), and the present process ends.

  If it is determined in the process of S13004 that the information indicating the low probability spread map A is included (S13004: Yes), it is determined whether the spread map C winning flag is set to ON (S13005) and turned ON. If it is determined that it is set (S13005: Yes), the special rendering enable information is set in the corresponding regular drawing prize information (S13006), the regular drawing C winning flag is set to OFF, and this processing is ended.

  Further, when it is determined in the process of S13005 that it is not set to ON (S13005: No), this process is ended as it is. In this way, it is possible to predict in advance that the low probability per drawing A will be performed next to the high probability per drawing C, and it is possible to set a special effect according to the prediction result.

  In addition, as in the present modified example, in the case of providing a benefit that is advantageous to the player across the high probability state and the low probability state of the normal symbol, for example, It is good to comprise so that the high probability state of a normal symbol may be ended based on the number of times a game is performed. As a result, the first popular drawing lottery is executed in a high probability state, and the special drawing 2 lottery is executed by the game to win a small hit. Then, the high probability state of the normal symbol is shifted to the low probability state at the timing when the small hitting game is executed.

  Since the high probability state of the normal symbol is still set at the timing when the special figure 2 lottery is executed, the next common drawing lottery is executed in the high probability state. And, after the fluctuation time at the time of winning a small hit in the drawing of the special figure 2, and after the start timing of the small hitting game to be executed, so that the winning game based on the next popular drawing lottery is executed, high Set the fluctuation time of generalization fluctuation in the probability state. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to easily execute a hit game based on the next common drawing lottery with a low probability state operation pattern.

Modification of Fourth Embodiment
Next, a modification of the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 285 to 296. In the embodiment using the technical idea of the first embodiment among the above-described embodiments, the first variation is made in a state in which a probability variation state (high probability state of special symbol, low probability state of normal symbol) is set. When the jackpot is won in the special symbol (special figure 1) lottery, the gaming state in the jackpot fluctuation is set to be the latent state, and the second special symbol (the latent state is set) By making it easy to execute the drawing of the special figure 2), the small hit game was configured to be easily performed.

  In the embodiment configured in this manner, the player can be provided with a game (so-called RUSH game) in which a small hit game is frequently generated using the period during the big hit of the special figure 1 (so-called RUSH game). It is possible to continuously provide a plurality of different bonus games (RUSH game, jackpot game) to the player, thereby enabling the player to aim for the jackpot winning more aggressively, Can improve the interest of

  Furthermore, in the first embodiment described above, the jackpot winning of the special symbol is duplicated, and it is based on having won the jackpot in the lottery of the special view 1 in order to suppress that the extra privilege is given to the player. In the lottery of special figure 2 executed during the jackpot fluctuation, it is configured not to win the jackpot. As a result, even if the special drawing 2 lottery is performed a plurality of times during the jackpot fluctuation of the special drawing 1, the jackpot of the special drawing 2 is not won. Therefore, the period until the jackpot fluctuation of the special figure 1 ends and the jackpot game is started can be set as the RUSH gaming period (the jackpot fluctuation period of the special figure 1).

  In addition, in the first embodiment described above, it is defined that the fluctuation time (60 seconds at the shortest, 600 seconds at the longest) which can be set when winning the jackpot of the special figure 1 has a width ( In the case where the jackpot of the special figure 1 is won in the state where the probability change state is set as the gaming state, see FIG. 19 (b)), that is, when the RUSH game is executed, FIG. As described above with reference, the third symbol display device 81 is configured to stop and display the effect pattern 813 for suggesting the present jackpot fluctuation period. And, when the jackpot fluctuation of the special figure 1 is started according to the fluctuation time of the special drawing 1 set this time or the type of the jackpot won, the display of the effect pattern 813 to be stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 It was comprised so that the aspect might be changed.

  In this manner, the player is made to stop and display the effect symbol 813 on the third symbol display device 81, and to indicate the length of the set special pattern fluctuation time, not the success / failure determination of the special pattern lottery, On the other hand, it was possible to give an interest by the display mode of the symbols stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and it was possible to enhance the rendering effect.

  However, in the effect of the first embodiment described above, it is executed after the end of the current RUSH gaming period or the end of RUSH gaming, at the time when the jackpot fluctuation of the special figure 1 is started (when RUSH gaming is started). In order to suggest to the player the contents of the big hit game, there is a possibility that the game intention during the RUSH game may be lowered depending on the suggested contents. Specifically, for example, a short fluctuation period (for example, 60 seconds) is set as the RUSH period (special figure 1 fluctuation period), and a jackpot type that is won is more likely to the player than other jackpot types. In the case of the type (for example, jackpot D), by grasping the display mode of the effect symbol 813 displayed in a stopped state, the jackpot win of the special figure 1 this time is a lottery result that is not very advantageous to the player It was predicted that there was a problem that the interest of the game during RUSH period would be reduced.

  Here, if the display pattern of the effect pattern 813, the length of the RUSH gaming period, and the content of the jackpot game to be executed after the RUSH gaming end are not related, the above-described problem occurs. Although it is not, it does not become an effective measure because there is no enjoyment of predicting future game development (RUSH game period or jackpot game content) based on the display pattern of the effect pattern 813.

  On the other hand, in the modified example of the fourth embodiment, based on the special figure 2 lottery executed during the variation period of the special figure 1, the lottery result of the special figure 1 during variation (variation time, jackpot gaming content The game is configured to execute a suggestion effect in which the game state (set) after the end of the jackpot game is suggested. And it is comprised so that the production | presentation aspect of suggestion production can be changed with the result (presence or absence of a win) of the special figure 2 lottery performed during the fluctuation period of the special figure 1, and the number of times.

  By configuring in this way, as the special figure 2 lottery is executed during the fluctuation period of the special figure 1, the lottery result of the special figure 1 during fluctuation can be predicted more easily. During the period, it is possible to cause the player to actively execute the special figure 2 lottery.

  Furthermore, in the modification of the fourth embodiment, as in the first embodiment described above, the RUSH game is executed by the special figure 2 lottery during the fluctuation period of the special figure 1 in which the latent state is set. Because it is configured as described above, the special figure 2 lottery can be executed more actively during the fluctuation period of the special figure 1.

  The modification of the fourth embodiment is different from the fourth embodiment using the configuration of the first embodiment described above in that part of the electrical configuration of the audio lamp control device 113 is changed, and execution The difference is in that the effect mode is changed, and the other elements are configured to be the same. The same elements will be denoted by the same reference symbols and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<About the contents of effects in the modification of the fourth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 285 and FIG. 286, the characteristic effects performed in the modification of the fourth embodiment will be described. In the modified example of the fourth embodiment, during the RUSH gaming period (during the special figure 1 jackpot variation period in which the latent state is set), based on the lottery of the special figure 2, the lottery of the special figure 1 jackpot of this time The fourth embodiment is configured to be different from the fourth embodiment described above in that the suggestion effect for suggesting the result is executed.

  In the modified example of the fourth embodiment, as the suggested effect, an effect is presented to suggest to the player the jackpot game content corresponding to the jackpot type won, and the gaming state set after the jackpot game is over. ing. And, in order to show the lottery result of the special figure 2, the display mode of the third figure which is stopped and displayed in the special figure 2 display area Dm2 of the third figure display device 81 or the combination of numerals is changed or during RUSH period By changing the effect mode of the effect during RUSH (effect to display the effect pattern 813 from the treasure box 812) indicating the result of the special figure 2 lottery, it is configured to execute the suggested effect.

  Next, an example of the actual effect content will be described. Here, 110 seconds is set as the jackpot fluctuation time of the special figure 1, a round game for 15 rounds is executed as a jackpot game, and a jackpot (a jackpot (a jackpot (a jackpot is set An example in the case of winning the 15R positive variation) will be described. FIG. 285 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed when a small hit is won during the RUSH period, and FIG. 285 (b) is displayed when the win is won during the RUSH period. It is a figure showing an example of a display screen.

  As shown in FIG. 285 (a), in the modification of the fourth embodiment, the remaining time of the current RUSH gaming period is displayed on the display screen (FIG. 7 (b)) of the first embodiment described above. It is different in that it is configured to display the remaining time display 851 to be displayed and the small hit count display 825 indicating the number of times the small hit is won during the current RUSH gaming period, and the other is the same. . About the same element (display content), the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 285 (a) shows the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 10 seconds after the start of the special view 1 fluctuation, and "100 seconds", that is, as the remaining time display 851. A value obtained by subtracting 10 seconds already elapsed from the fluctuation time of 110 seconds is displayed, and “1” indicating that the number of small hits won during the RUSH gaming period is one is displayed on the small hit number display 825. There is. In addition, since the value of the small hitting frequency display 825 is configured to be updated (one added) at the timing when the small hitting game is started, the state shown in FIG. 285 (a) is already 1 It shows the state of being won (stopped display) for the second small hit while the small hit game of the time is being executed.

  Next, the content of the effect on the suggested effect will be described with reference to FIG. 286 (b). FIG. 286 (b) shows the display screen in the case where the lottery result of the special view 2 is out. In this symbol 286 (b), “95 seconds” is displayed as the remaining time display 851. In this modification, as in the above-described first embodiment, the variation time of the special figure 1 variation is not subtracted during the period in which the small hitting game is being executed, so FIG. 286 ( In the state shown in b), the small hitting game is ended from the state shown in FIG. 286 (a) described above, and then 5 seconds have elapsed. Therefore, the value of the small hitting number display 825 is incremented by one compared to FIG. 286 (a), and “2” is displayed.

  As described above, in the modification of the fourth embodiment, the display mode (the display mode of the third symbol or the effect pattern 813) for showing the lottery result of the special figure 2 lottery performed during the RUSH gaming period is used. In this case, it is configured to indicate to the player the result of the special figure 1 lottery currently displayed in a variable manner.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 285 (b), the stop display mode of the third symbol for showing the lottery result of the special view 2 to be stopped and displayed in the special view 2 display area Dm2 as the suggestion display mode (kanji Or different from the normal display mode as the effect pattern 813 displayed from the inside of the treasure box 812 or different from the normal stop display mode (display mode shown in FIG. 285 (b)). The display mode is displayed.

  In this manner, the lottery result of the special figure 2 and the lottery result of the special figure 1 can be configured by suggesting the lottery result of the special figure 1 by using the display mode for showing the lottery result of the special figure 2. Because it is possible to discriminate in the display mode of one symbol, it is possible to make the player have an interest by the display mode of the symbol which is stopped and displayed.

  Furthermore, although the details will be described later, as the remaining period of the RUSH gaming period decreases, it is configured such that an effect mode that makes it easy to determine the lottery result of the special view 1 becomes easy to be set as a suggestion mode. Therefore, in any period during the RUSH gaming period, by executing the special figure 2 lottery, it is possible to play the game eagerly to grasp the lottery result of the special figure 1 in advance.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 286, the contents of the jackpot content suggestion effect will be described. As described above with reference to FIG. 285, in the modification of the fourth embodiment, the symbol (third symbol or effect symbol 813) for showing the result of the special figure 2 lottery performed during the RUSH gaming period. The display mode is configured to display a suggestion display mode in which the display mode is changed according to the lottery result of the special view 1 during the variable display. In addition to this, in the modification of the fourth embodiment, when the predetermined condition is satisfied based on the drawing result of the special view 2 executed during the RUSH gaming period (for example, the small hitting number of times reached 10 times) In the above case, the jackpot content suggestion effect for suggesting the lottery result of the special figure 1 is configured to be executed for a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds).

  As a result, since the player is willing to execute the special figure 2 lottery while expecting that the jackpot content suggestion effect will be executed during the RUSH gaming period, it is possible to improve the operation of the game.

  Here, specific presentation contents will be described. FIG. 286 (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display content displayed during the big hit content suggestion effect, and FIG. 286 (b) is an example of the display content where the production result of the big hit content suggestion effect is displayed FIG. In FIG. 286 (a), "10" is displayed as the small hit number display 825. Then, to inform the player that the small hit number has reached 10 times is the execution timing (establishment condition) of the big hit content suggestion effect, the display mode of the small hit number display 825 is a normal display mode ( A highlighted display mode different from that shown in FIG. 285 (b) is displayed.

  Furthermore, when the jackpot content suggestion effect is executed, the next jackpot notice 865 is displayed in the lower left portion of the main display area Dm as a notification mode for notifying the game of the outline of the effect currently being executed, and the main display area Dm In addition, three treasure chests (treasure chest 812, treasure chest 860, and treasure chest 870) are displayed. Among the three treasure boxes, as described above with reference to FIG. 285, the treasure box 812 is used to display the effect pattern 813 for showing the lottery result of the special view 2.

  Then, the treasure box 860 indicates to the player whether or not the gaming state after the next jackpot end (after the jackpot based on the special view 1 currently displayed fluctuatingly is ended) is a gaming state advantageous to the player ( It is used to notify the user, and is displayed in a display mode to which the word "OK" is attached to indicate the fact. In addition, the treasure box 870 is used to indicate (notify) to the player the contents (the number of rounds and the like) of the jackpot game to be executed next time, and a letter “R” is attached to indicate that. It is displayed in the displayed mode. As a result, even if a plurality of treasure boxes are displayed in the main display area Dm, the player can easily grasp which treasure box indicates what (informs) to provide an easy-to-understand effect. can do.

  In the sub display area Ds, a display of "in RUSH" to indicate that the RUSH gaming period is currently under, and a comment of "Open the box by the power of V" for guiding the jackpot content suggestion effect are displayed Be done. In addition, as shown in FIG. 286 (a), this jackpot content suggestion effect is executed independently of the effect (effect using the treasure box 812) for showing the lottery result of the special figure 2, During the period when this jackpot content suggestion effect is being executed, the jackpot content suggestion effect is configured to be displayed with priority (emphasis) over the effect for showing the lottery result of the special figure 2 There is. Specifically, the treasure box (treasure box 860, treasure box 870) used for the jackpot content suggestion effect is displayed in a larger display mode than the treasure box (treasure box 812) used for the effect for showing the lottery result of Toku 2 Are configured to By configuring in this manner, it is possible to easily make the player pay attention to the jackpot content suggestion effect.

  Then, when it is time to show the staging result of the jackpot content suggestion effect, as shown in FIG. 286 (b), the treasure box 860 and the treasure box 870 are opened, and a display mode indicating the contents of the next jackpot from among them is displayed. In the example shown in FIG. 286 (b), the treasure box 860 is opened and the character “Lucky” is displayed as the game state suggestion display 861, and the treasure box 870 is opened and the letters “odd number” are displayed as the round number suggestion display 871. Ru.

  In addition, a presentation result of the jackpot content suggestion presentation executed during one RUSH gaming period is displayed on the suggestion history display 880 as a history. In this modification, the execution condition of the jackpot content suggestion effect can be established multiple times during one RUSH gaming period, and the reliability of the suggestion content is increased as the number of times the jackpot content suggestion effect is executed increases. It is configured to be high (so that the player can easily grasp the actual lottery result).

  In this modification configured as described above, it is possible to provide an effect that is easy for the player to understand by displaying the staging result of the big hit content suggestion effect as a history using the suggestion history display 880. Moreover, this indication history display 880 is a display mode ("cross mark", "triangle mark", "circle mark") of a plurality of steps based on the production result of the jackpot content suggestion effect and the actual special drawing 1 lottery result. Even if the display mode indicating the stage result of the jackpot content suggestion stage is varied in order to suppress that the player gets bored early in the stage, the stage is easy to understand as the history. The results can be reported.

  In the present modification, the display mode of the suggestion history display 880 is variable according to the presentation result of one big hit content suggestion effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, for example, once. A plurality of jackpot content suggestion effects may be executed during the RUSH game period, and the suggestion history display 880 may be configured to be in a specific display mode only when each effect result is a specific combination. By configuring in this manner, even if the first jackpot content suggestion rendering is a rendering result that is disadvantageous to the player (for example, a rendering result that suggests that the number of round games is a small jackpot), the next time It is possible to play the game eagerly so that the jackpot content suggestion effect is executed.

  Although the details will be described later, the display contents (display mode) showing the presentation result of this jackpot content suggestion effect includes a strong suggestion display that the player can easily predict, and a weak suggestion display that is more difficult to predict than the strong suggestion display. Are configured to be set, and based on the lottery result of the special figure 1, the display mode of the suggestion history display 880 (the presentation result of the jackpot content suggestion effect already executed), and the number of times of execution of the jackpot content suggestion effect The selection ratio between the strong indication and the weak indication is configured to be different. Further, only when the specific condition is satisfied, an effect for confirming and notifying the next jackpot content, and an effect effect different from the suggestion for the jackpot content are executed.

  By configuring in this manner, the player who has substantially determined the next jackpot content by the already executed jackpot content suggestion staging will continue to be motivated to continue establishing the jackpot content suggestion staging condition. I can play a game.

  In this modification, the treasure box (treasure box 812) used for the effect to show the lottery result of the special figure 2 and the treasure box (treasure box 860, treasure box 870) used for the big hit content suggestion effect are configured separately However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and a single treasure box may be used to execute an effect for showing the lottery result of the special view 2 and a jackpot content indication effect. In this case, it may be configured to vary the effect mode of the big hit content indication effect so that the timing of displaying the effect pattern 813 and the timing of displaying the effect result of the big hit content indication effect are different. As a result, even if one treasure box is used, it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand effect to the player, and it is possible to make the lottery of the special figure 2 be executed more than it actually is.

  Moreover, in this modification, although it is comprised so that several elements (round game number and the game state after the end) for showing big hit content may be displayed separately as a presentation result of big hit content suggestion production, this is this However, the present invention is not limited to the above, and only one of them may be displayed as a result of one big hit content suggestion effect. In this case, the player may be configured to select which element the jackpot content suggestion effect is to be performed.

  Furthermore, in this modification, it is configured to simultaneously display the rendering results for a plurality of elements (the number of round games and the gaming state after the end) for showing the jackpot content as the staging result of the jackpot content suggestion effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be configured to be displayed with shifted timing. In this case, even if it is determined that an element which is a lottery result advantageous to the player and an element which is a lottery result which is disadvantageous to the player are determined, an element to be displayed first is determined based on the determination result. good. Specifically, it is preferable to configure so that an element that results in a lottery result advantageous to the player is displayed later. Thereby, it is possible to cause the player to play the game eagerly so that many jackpot content suggestion effects are executed.

  In addition, in the modification of the fourth embodiment, as a result of the special figure 2 lottery during one RUSH gaming period, the jackpot based on the number of times the small hit is won and the number of times the special figure 2 lottery is executed It is constituted so that the execution condition of contents suggestion production is satisfied, but, for example, it is big hit contents suggestion that the number of times that the number of winning out of the special figure 2 lottery reached a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) You may set as execution conditions of production. Thereby, even when the result of the special figure 2 lottery is a lottery result (displacement) which is disadvantageous to the player, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the game intention. In addition, the execution condition of the jackpot content suggestion effect may be set not only as a result of the special figure 2 lottery during one RUSH gaming period but also across multiple RUSH gaming periods. By configuring in this manner, even after the contents of the next jackpot game are found to be disadvantageous to the player, the willingness to become more likely to perform the jackpot content suggestion effect during the next RUSH gaming period Can play a game.

  In addition, in the modification of the fourth embodiment, it is configured to suggest a plurality of elements (the number of round games and the gaming state after the end) for showing the jackpot content as the presentation result of the jackpot content suggestion effect However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be possible to suggest a rendering result in which the plurality of elements described above are fused. In addition, the player can not grasp the remaining period of the RUSH gaming period, and as the result of the jackpot content suggestive presentation, the remaining period of the RUSH gaming period, that is, the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 1 is suggested. You may configure.

Regarding Electrical Configuration in Modification of Fourth Embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration in a modification of the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 287 to 289. The modification of the fourth embodiment is different from the above-described fourth embodiment in that the contents of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 are changed. The other points are the same as those of the fourth embodiment, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 287 (a) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the modification of the fourth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 287 (a), this embodiment is different from the fourth embodiment described above in that the suggestion mode selection table 222ja is provided and the suggestion effect selection table 222jb is provided.

  Suggestion mode selection table 222ja is the second special symbol (special figure 2) during RUSH game which is executed when the latent state is set as the gaming state during the big hit change of the first special symbol (special figure 1) Is referred to when setting the suggestion mode that suggests the lottery contents (big hit game content, gaming state set after the big hit game end) of the special figure 1 during the big hit, using the presentation mode for showing the lottery result of Data table.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 288, contents defined in the suggestion mode selection table 222ja will be described. FIG. 288 is a schematic view schematically showing the content of the suggestion mode selection table 222ja. As shown in FIG. 288, the suggestion mode selection table 222ja corresponds to the acquired value of the special figure 2 variation frequency counter 223jb, the remaining time information stored in the remaining time storage area 223p, and the value of the suggestion effect counter 223jc It is defined that a plurality of suggestion modes are selected.

  In the modified example of the fourth embodiment, as the type of the suggestion mode defined in the suggestion mode selection table 222ja, “normal” in which the suggestion mode is not set, and the suggestion content is weak, that is, the player selects the special figure 1 lottery It is defined that “indication weak” which is difficult to distinguish the lottery result (big hit content) and “indication strong” which makes it easier for the player to distinguish the lottery result (big hit content) of the special figure 1 lottery than “indication weak”. When the "normal" is selected as the suggestion mode, a normal presentation mode (see FIG. 285 (a)) is displayed as a presentation mode for showing the lottery result of the special figure 2 lottery.

  Also, in the case where “suggested weak” is selected as the suggestion mode, for example, although it is not possible for the player to specifically determine the lottery result of the special figure 1 lottery, is it a lottery result advantageous for the player? An effect aspect (see FIG. 285 (b)) of a degree which suggests whether or not it is displayed. Furthermore, when "suggested strength" is selected as the suggestion mode, for example, the suggestion mode of the degree to which the player can specifically discriminate the lottery result of the special figure 1 lottery (for example, shows the lottery result of the special figure 2) In the effect mode for display, the number of rounds executed in the winning jackpot game and the suggestion mode with identification information for indicating the gaming state set after the end of the jackpot game are displayed . As described above, in the modification of the fourth embodiment, since one type is selected from the plurality of types of suggestion modes having different degrees of suggestion using the suggestion mode selection table 222ja, the RUSH gaming period It is possible to play the game eagerly so that the suggestion mode is displayed a plurality of times.

  Describing the prescribed content for the plurality of suggested mode types described above, the value of the special figure 2 variation counter 223 jb is “1 to 5”, and the remaining time information stored in the remaining time storage area 223 p is In the case of “within 10 seconds”, “normal” is defined regardless of the range of the value of the suggestion effect counter 223 jc acquired, and when the remaining time information is “11 seconds to 90 seconds”, it is acquired "Normal" is defined in the range of "0 to 89" and "inverse weak" is defined in the range of "90 to 99" in the value of the suggestion effect counter 223jc. Then, when the remaining time information is "91 seconds or more", "normal" is defined regardless of the range of the acquired suggestion effect counter 223jc value.

  In addition, when the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation frequency counter 223 jb is “6 to 39” and the remaining time information stored in the remaining time storage area 223 p is “within 10 seconds”, the acquired suggestion effect counter "Normal" is defined in the range of "0 to 59", "indicated strength" is defined in the range of "60 to 89", and "indicated weak" is defined in the range of "90 to 99". ing. In addition, when the remaining time information is “11 seconds to 90 seconds”, “normal” is in the range of “0 to 89” and “weakly suggested” in the range of “90 to 99” for the acquired suggestion effect counter 223 jc value. "Is defined. Then, if the remaining time information is "91 seconds or more", "normal" is defined in the range of "0 to 59" or "90 to 99" for the acquired suggestion effect counter 223jc value, and "60" "Suggested weak" is specified in the range of -89 ".

  In addition, when the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation frequency counter 223jb is "40 or more" and the remaining time information stored in the remaining time storage area 223p is "within 10 seconds", the acquired suggestion effect counter The “normal” is defined in the range of “0 to 59” and the “strong indication” is defined in the range of “60 to 99” of the value of 223 jc. In addition, when the remaining time information is “11 seconds to 90 seconds”, the acquired suggestion effect counter 223 jc value is in the range of “0 to 89”, “indication weak” is in the range of “90 to 99”, and “indication” "Strong" is defined. Then, when the remaining time information is “91 seconds or more”, “indication strong” is defined regardless of the value of the acquired suggestion effect counter 223 jc value.

  As described above, in the modification of the fourth embodiment, the lottery of the special figure 1 during the jackpot variation is performed as the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation number counter 223jb increases according to the defined contents of the suggestion mode selection table 222ja described above. Since the player can easily grasp the contents, it is possible to cause the player to execute the special figure 2 lottery as much as possible.

  Furthermore, when the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation frequency counter 223 jb is “1 to 5” and the information stored in the remaining time storage area 223 p indicates that the remaining time is within 10 seconds, the suggestion mode Is configured not to be selected. In other words, when RUSH gaming is being executed, if the special drawing 2 lottery number is small and the remaining time is short, it may be considered that RUSH gaming is not actively performed, so the jackpot will be executed later In order to prevent the player from easily suggesting the content of the game, the suggestion mode is hard to be selected. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to actively execute the special figure 2 lottery so as to quickly grasp the lottery result of the special figure 1 currently changing.

  In addition, in the modification of the fourth embodiment, as the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation number counter 223jb in the RUSH gaming period increases, the suggestion aspect that the player can easily distinguish is more easily selected. ing. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to make the player play the game more aggressively.

  In the modification of the fourth embodiment, the suggestion mode is selected based on the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation number counter 223jb and the information of the remaining time storage area 223p, but is limited to this. For example, it may be configured to change the rate at which the suggestion mode is selected according to the lottery result of the special figure 1 during fluctuation. For example, a jackpot type (for example, jackpot A) which is advantageous to the player When the player wins the game, the suggestion mode may be selected more easily than when the player wins the jackpot type (for example, jackpot D) which is more disadvantageous to the player than the jackpot A. Also, in this case, when the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation number counter 223jb is equal to or less than a predetermined value (for example, 39), the proportion in which the suggestion mode is selected is made the same (including the same concept including a slight error), It is good to constitute so that the ratio by which a suggestion mode is chosen may differ, when larger than predetermined value (for example, 39). By configuring in this manner, it is possible to make the player play the game more aggressively.

  Furthermore, in this modification, the suggestion mode is displayed to suggest the contents of the next jackpot game to the player based on the display contents, but the present invention is not limited to this. In order to suggest the content of the next jackpot game to the player according to how many times the suggestion mode is displayed by varying the frequency in which the mode is displayed according to the jackpot type (jackpot game to be executed) the win is made. You may configure.

  This suggestion mode selection table 222ja is a suggestion mode setting process (FIG. 295) executed when it is determined that the latent state is set in the special view 2 variation display setting process 11 (see S5195 in FIG. 294). When the suggestion mode is selected, the display mode corresponding to the set fluctuation pattern of the special figure 2 and the selected suggestion mode type is set (see FIG. 295). See S14204). Thereby, when the fluctuation pattern of the corresponding special view 2 is out, it is suggested that the display mode of the symbol (the third design, effect pattern 813) showing that the lottery result of the special view 2 is out is selected. Since the display mode corresponding to the mode can be variably displayed, it is possible to provide the player with notification of the lottery result of the special view 2 and suggestion of the lottery result of the special view 1 at one time. it can.

  Referring back to FIG. 287 (a), the description will be continued. The suggested special effect selection table 222jb is a second special symbol (special figure 2) during RUSH game which is executed when the latent state is set as the gaming state during the big hit change of the first special symbol (special figure 1) Is referred to when setting the suggestion effect that suggests the lottery contents of the special figure 1 during the jackpot fluctuation (jackpot game content, gaming state set after the jackpot game is over) when the lottery result of satisfies the predetermined condition It is a data table.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 289, contents defined in the suggestion effect selection table 222jb will be described. FIG. 289 is a schematic view schematically showing the content of the suggestion effect selection table 222jb. As shown in FIG. 289, the suggested effect selection table 222jb is won by the lottery of the special figure 1 and the value of the acquired small hitting frequency counter 223cc, the suggested information stored in the suggested information storage area 223ja, and It is defined that a plurality of suggestion effects are selected in correspondence with information indicating the jackpot type and the value of the suggestion effect counter 223 j c.

  In the modification of the fourth embodiment, as the type of the suggestion effect defined in the suggestion effect selection table 222jb, “failure” in which the suggestion effect is not executed and the suggestion content is weak, that is, the player draws the special figure 1 lottery It is difficult for the player to find out the lottery result (big hit content) of the game, and the player is more likely to find out the lottery result (big hit content) of the special drawing 1 lottery than the “proposed weak”. "Decision" to notify the lottery result (big hit content) of the special figure 1 lottery, and "benefit effect" to be executed when the lottery result of the special figure 1 lottery has already been informed to the player, It is defined that "the pounding effect" which is the insulting effect that does not include the content.

  When it is determined that the condition for executing the suggestion effect (small hitting number of times is a multiple of 10) is established in the small hitting related process 11 (see S14574 in FIG. 292) of the suggestion effect selection table 222jb (see FIG. 292). S4753: Yes In the suggestion effect setting process (see S14001 in FIG. 293) executed, if it is determined that the remaining time of the RUSH gaming period is 5 seconds or more (S14102 in FIG. 293: Yes), the suggestion effect is executed. (S14106 in FIG. 293).

  When “Failure” is selected as the suggested effect, the suggested effect is executed (though the display screen shown in FIG. 286 (a) is displayed), but a failed effect in which the effect ends without opening the treasure boxes 860 and 870 Is executed. In other words, an effect that does not suggest the lottery result of the special drawing 1 to the player is executed. When “Indicated weak” or “Indicated strong” is selected as the suggested effect, as shown in FIG. 286 (b), the lottery result of the special figure 1 from the inside of the treasure box 860, 870 opens as the directed result A comment (playing state indication indication 861, round number indication indication 871) indicating (big hit content) appears. The content of this comment is variably set according to the suggestion effect type selected as the suggestion effect.

  Further, when “confirmed” is selected as the suggested effect, an effect is produced in which a comment notifying the lottery result of the special view 1 appears from the treasure box 860, 870 as an effect result of the suggested effect. In the present modification, “determination” is selected as the suggested effect only when the lottery result is most advantageous to the player.

  Furthermore, when “award effect” is set as the suggested effect, an effect that is difficult to see elsewhere (for example, an effect in which the character wears a special costume to bless the player) is executed. As a result, even for the player who has already grasped the contents of the next big hit during the RUSH game period, it is possible to play the game with enthusiasm in order to continuously execute the suggestive effect.

  In addition, when “the pounding effect” is set as the suggested effect, the effect result indicating the jackpot content to the player is not displayed as in the above-described failure effect, but the treasure box 860, 870 (see FIG. 286 (b) It is executed until the effect of opening). In this way, as the effect that does not display the jackpot content to the player (gase effect), the process of executing the same production mode as the effect that displays the jackpot result that indicates the jackpot content to the player By making the different cassette effect settable, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the content of the suggested effect until the end.

  In the modified example of the fourth embodiment, a memory in which a plurality of effect modes (comment contents displayed from each treasure box) are stored corresponding to the type of the suggestive effect mode selected using the suggestive effect selection table 222jb It has a means (not shown), and one of the plurality of effect modes stored in the storage means is set. As a result, it is possible to provide the player with a variety of suggestion effects more than the number of suggestion effect types defined in the suggestion effect selection table 222jb. In addition, the suggestion effect history displayed in the suggestion history display 880 of the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 displays the display mode corresponding to the type of the suggestion effect mode selected using the suggestion effect selection table 222jb Are configured to be As a result, even if a variety of suggestion effects are executed, it is possible to inform the player of the suggestion effect history in an easy-to-understand manner after the suggestion effects are executed.

  The contents of the regulations for the plurality of suggested effect types described above will be described specifically. , Suggested information is not stored in the suggested information storage area 223ja ("-"), regardless of the jackpot type of the special figure 1, the value of the suggestion effect counter 223jc is in the range of "0 to 59" “Failure” is defined, and “indication weak” is defined in the range of “60 to 99”.

  When the value of the small hit counter 223cc is "20", when the suggested information is not stored in the suggested information storage area 223ja ("-"), that is, the value of the small hit counter 223cc is "10". When "Failure" is selected in the suggestion effect performed in the case of "", the value of the suggestion effect counter 223jc is "indicated weakly" in the range of "0 to 59" regardless of the jackpot type of the special figure 1 Is defined, “indication strong” is defined in the range of “60 to 89”, and “failure” is defined in the range of “90 to 99”.

  On the other hand, when the suggested information is stored in the suggested information storage area 223ja ("Available"), that is, in the suggested effect performed when the value of the small hitting frequency counter 223cc is "10" When "weak" is selected, the jackpot type of the special figure 1 is "A" and the value of the suggestion effect counter 223jc defines "failure" in the range of "0 to 59", and "60 to 89". “Suggested strength” is defined in the range of “Failure” in the range of “90 to 99”. In addition, the jackpot type of the special figure 1 is "B to D", the value of the suggestion effect counter 223jc defines "failure" in the range of "0 to 89", and "indications" in the range of "90 to 99" "Strong" is defined.

  When the value of the small hit counter 223cc is "30", when the suggested information is not stored in the suggested information storage area 223ja ("-"), that is, the value of the small hit counter 223cc is "10". And when “failed” is selected in the suggestion effect performed in the case of “20”, the jackpot type of the special figure 1 is “A” and the value of the suggestion effect counter 223 jc is “0 to 0”. “Suggested strong” is defined in the range of “59”, and “suggested weak” is defined in the range of “60 to 99”. Moreover, the jackpot classification of the special figure 1 is "B-D", and the value of the suggestion effect counter 223jc is "indicated weak" in the range of "0 to 99".

  On the other hand, when "suggested weak" (present and weak) is stored as the suggested information in the suggested information storage area 223ja, regardless of the jackpot type of the special figure 1, the value of the suggestion effect counter 223jc is "0 "Suggested strength" is defined in the range of "-59", and "failure" is defined in the range of "60-99". In addition, when “indication strong” (high, strong) is stored in the suggested information storage area 223ja as suggested information, the jackpot type of the special figure 1 is “A, B”, and the suggestion effect counter 223 jc In the range of “0 to 59”, “failure” is defined, in the range of “60 to 89”, “confirmed” is defined, and in the range of “90 to 99”, “failure” is defined. Further, when the jackpot type of the special figure 1 is "C, D", "failure" is defined regardless of the value of the suggestion effect counter 223jc.

  Then, when the value of the small hitting frequency counter 223 cc is “40” or more and is a multiple of 10, “confirmed” is stored as the suggested information in the suggested information storage area 223 ja, and If the jackpot type in FIG. 1 is "A, B", "benefit effect" is specified in the range of the suggested effect "0 to 99", and for all other cases, "browse effect" is specified. It is done.

  In the modification of the fourth embodiment, the execution condition of the effect is indicated as the condition that the value of the small hitting frequency counter 223 cc has become a predetermined value (multiple of 10), but other conditions may be used as the execution condition of the effect. You may set it. Moreover, in this modification, it is comprised so that execution can be carried out several times during one RUSH game period, and it is comprised so that the suggestion effect whose suggestion degree is lower than the suggestion effect performed in the past is not performed. As a result, the player can enjoy the suggestive effect to the end.

  Next, the contents of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 according to the modification of the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 287 (b). FIG. 287 (b) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the modification of the fourth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 287 (b), the fourth embodiment described above in that the suggested information storage area 223ja, the special figure 2 variation frequency counter 223jb, the suggested effect counter 223jc, and the suggested in-progress flag 223jd are provided. It is different from the form.

  The suggested information storage area 223ja is a data area for temporarily storing the content of the executed suggested effect (see FIG. 286), and the suggested effect stored during one RUSH gaming period A history can be stored. In the suggested information storage area 223ja, information indicating the suggested rendering mode selected in the suggested rendering setting process (see S14001 in FIG. 293) is stored (S14108 in FIG. 293), and when the next suggested rendering mode is selected The information stored in is read out (S14104 in FIG. 293). Then, the stored information is cleared at the timing when the RUSH game ends (the timing when the big hit game starts) (see S4692 in FIG. 291). Further, the suggestion history display 880 is displayed based on the information stored in the suggested information storage area 223ja.

  The special figure 2 fluctuation number counter 223jb is a counter for measuring the fluctuation number (lottery number) of the second special symbol (special figure 2) executed during the RUSH gaming period, and the fluctuation display setting for the special figure 2 In the process 11 (see S5195 in FIG. 294), when it is determined that the latent state is set (S5303 in FIG. 294: Yes), the value of the counter is updated by 1 (see S5393 in FIG. 294). The value of the special figure 2 fluctuation number counter 223jb is referred to when setting the suggestion mode showing the lottery result of the special figure 1 during fluctuation using the effect mode for showing the lottery result of the special figure 2 (FIG. 295) See S14201). Then, the value of the counter is cleared at the timing when the RUSH game ends (the timing when the big hit game starts) (see S4691 in FIG. 291).

  The suggestion effect counter 223jc is a counter that is referred to when selecting the indication mode and the indication effect described above, and is repeatedly updated in the range of 0 to 99. Although illustration is omitted, the main processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is updated by one each time the main processing is executed. The detailed configuration is the same as that of the effect counter 223h described above, and thus the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  The suggestive effect-in-progress flag 223jd is a flag for indicating that the suggestive effect is being executed, and is set to on while the suggestive effect is being executed. The suggestion effect in-progress flag 223jd is set to ON when the suggestion effect setting process (see S14001 in FIG. 293) is performed (S14109 in FIG. 293). Then, it is referred to in the special view 2 variation display setting process 11 (see S5195 in FIG. 294) (see S5391 in FIG. 294). Here, when it is determined that the suggestion effect is being performed (S5391 in FIG. 294: Yes), a special display variation pattern command for performing the variation effect of the special figure 2 is set in parallel with the suggestion effect (see FIG. See 294, S5394). When the display variation pattern command is set, the variation rendering of the aspect shown in FIG. 286 (a rendering having a rendering effect lower than that of the suggested rendering) is performed. Then, in the liquid crystal effect execution management process 11 (see S4160 in FIG. 296), when it is determined that it is the timing to end the suggested effect (S14302: Yes), it is set to off (see S14303 in FIG. 296).

Regarding Control Processing in Modification of Fourth Embodiment>
Next, control processing in the modification of the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the modification of the fourth embodiment, the command determination process 11 (see FIG. 290) is substituted for the control process of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment described above instead of the command determination process 4 (see S4182 in FIG. 152). S14182) is replaced with the jackpot related processing (see S4502 in FIG. 64) and the jackpot related processing 11 (see S4592 in FIG. 291) is replaced with the small hit related processing 4 (see S4574 in FIG. 156). 11 (refer to S14574 in FIG. 292) is replaced with the special display 2 variation display setting processing 4 (refer to S5175 in FIG. 160) to perform special display 2 variation display setting processing 11 (refer to S5195 in FIG. 294). Point that the liquid crystal effect execution management process 11 (see S4160 in FIG. 296) is executed instead of the management process (see S4110 in FIG. 59), suggestive effect A constant processing (see S14001 in FIG. 293), with the difference that adding the suggested mode setting process (see S5392 of FIG. 295). The other processes are the same. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected about the same process and the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 290, the command determination processing 11 (S14182) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the modification of the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 290 is a flowchart showing the contents of command determination processing 11 (S14182). The command determination process 11 (S14182) determines that the hit related command has been received from the main control device 110 in the process of S4215, as opposed to the command determination process 4 (see S4182 in FIG. 152) in the fourth embodiment described above. In this case (S4215: Yes), it is different in that the hit related processing 11 (S14574) is executed instead of the hit related processing (S4216). The other processes are the same as the command determination process 4 (S4182) in the fourth embodiment, and thus the detailed description will be omitted.

  In addition, the perch-related process 11 executed in S14574 is a jackpot instead of the jackpot-related process (see S4502 in FIG. 64) executed when the jackpot-related command is received with respect to the above-described perch-related process (S4216). It differs in that the small hit related process 11 (S14574 in FIG. 292) is executed instead of the related process 11 (S4592 in FIG. 291) to the small hit related process 4 (see S4574 in FIG. 156). Detailed description is omitted because they are identical.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 291, per-related processing which is one processing in command determination processing 11 (see S14182 in FIG. 290) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the modification of the fourth embodiment. The jackpot related process 11 (see S4592 in FIG. 291) executed in 11 (see S14574) will be described. FIG. 291 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot related process 11 (S4592). The jackpot related process 11 (S4592) is different from the jackpot related process (S4502 in FIG. 64) in the fourth embodiment described above in that the contents of the process executed when the jackpot start command is received is changed. Otherwise, the same process is performed. Detailed descriptions of the elements of the same processing content are omitted.

  When the jackpot related process 11 (S4592) is executed, it is first determined whether the jackpot start command has been received (S4601), and if it is determined that the jackpot start command has been received (S4601: Yes), the display jackpot start The command is set (S4602), and then the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation number counter 223jb is cleared (S4691), the information stored in the suggested information storage area 223ja (of the suggestion effect executed during the RUSH gaming period) The history information is cleared (S4692), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the big hit start command has not been received in the processing of S4601 (S4601: No), the same processing of S4603 to S4613 as the above-described big hit related processing (S4502 of FIG. 64) is executed. End the process.

  That is, in the jackpot related process 11 (S4592), at the start timing of the jackpot, a process of initializing each parameter temporarily stored during the RUSH game executed before the jackpot start is executed. Thereby, even if RUSH game is executed multiple times, it can be reliably suppressed that the effect mode in the RUSH game is set based on the information on the past RUSH game.

  In the modification of the fourth embodiment, since the RUSH game is executed during the jackpot fluctuation of the special view 1, the end of the RUSH game and the start of the jackpot game have the same timing. The initialization process of each parameter temporarily stored in RUSH game is set as the start timing of the big hit game, but it is not limited to this, and the judgment means to judge that the RUSH game has ended is provided, and the judgment means When it is determined that the RUSH game has ended, the initialization process of each parameter may be executed. In addition, since the condition that RUSH game can be executed is the case where the latent state is set as the gaming state, it is determined that the discrimination result of the gaming state discriminating means for discriminating the current gaming state is not the latent state In the case of RUSH game, it may be configured to execute an initialization process of each parameter temporarily stored.

  Furthermore, in the modification of the fourth embodiment, the initialization process of each parameter is executed each time one RUSH game is ended, but the RUSH game is performed again within a predetermined period after the jackpot game. When executed, the information (values) of each parameter may be continuously updated. In this way, it is possible to cause the game to be played eagerly so that the RUSH game is repeated several times. In this case, after the end of the jackpot game, there is provided an elapsed period determination means for determining whether or not a predetermined period (for example, a period until the number of times the special drawing lottery has been executed 30 times) has elapsed. When it is determined that the predetermined period has elapsed, the initialization process of each parameter may be executed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 292, per-related processing which is one processing in command determination processing 11 (see S14182 in FIG. 290) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the modification of the fourth embodiment. The small hitting related process 11 (see S14574 in FIG. 292) executed in 11 (see S14574) will be described. FIG. 292 is a flowchart showing the contents of the small hitting related process 11 (S14574). The small hit related process 11 (S14574) is different from the small hit related process 4 (S4574 in FIG. 156) in the fourth embodiment described above in that the contents of the process executed when the small hit start command is received is changed. The same processing is performed except for the points. Detailed descriptions of the elements of the same processing content are omitted.

  When the small hit related process 11 (S14574) is executed, it is first determined whether the small hit start command has been received (S4701), and if it is determined that the small hit start command has been received (S4701: Yes), The same processing of S4741 to S4753 as the small hitting related processing 4 of the fourth embodiment (refer to S4574 in FIG. 156) is executed, and it is determined that the value of the small hitting frequency counter 223cc is a multiple of 10 in the processing of S4753. If it is (S4753: Yes), the suggestion effect setting process is executed (S14001). Thereafter, a display small hitting start command is set (S4702), and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4701 that the small hitting start command has not been received (S4701: No), the same S4703 as the small hitting related process 4 (see S4574 in FIG. 156) of the fourth embodiment described above. The processing of S4710 is executed, and the present processing ends.

  The suggested effect setting process executed in the process of S14001 is a process for setting an effect mode of the suggested effect. That is, the process of S4753 described above is a determination unit that determines whether an execution condition for executing the suggested effect is satisfied. In this modification, it is set that the value of the small hitting frequency counter 223 cc is a predetermined value (value of multiple of 10) as an execution condition for executing the suggested effect, but other elements are set as the execution condition It may be set, for example, even if it is set as the execution condition that the number of times of the special figure 2 lottery performed while the latent state is set becomes a predetermined value (for example, a value of multiple of 20) good. In this case, the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation number counter 223jb may be read and determined.

  Further, in the present modification, since the suggestion effect is set based on the number of times of small hits won during the latent state (during the RUSH gaming period), the small hitting related processing 11 (S14574) is the suggestion effect setting Although the processing (S14001) is configured to be performed, when the execution condition of the suggestion effect is changed, the corresponding processing may be configured to have the suggestion effect setting processing. Furthermore, in the case of setting a plurality of execution conditions of the suggestion effect, when one suggestion effect execution condition is satisfied, another suggestion effect execution condition is within a predetermined period (for example, the number of times of drawing of the special figure 2 is 5 times It is preferable to provide a limiting means for limiting the establishment of the signal within the period until it reaches 30 seconds or for 30 seconds. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to suppress that a plurality of different suggestion effect execution conditions are established in a short period of time and the suggestion effect is frequently generated. In addition, when providing the above-mentioned restriction means, it is good to change the production mode of suggestion production based on the formation order of a plurality of suggestion production execution conditions. As a result, since the player can be made interested not only by the suggestion effect being executed but also by which suggestion effect execution condition is established, the effect can be further enhanced. .

  In addition, as an execution condition of the suggestion effect performed during the RUSH game period, the cumulative number of the number of times of lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2), the number of small hitting wins and the number of out winnings In addition to the cumulative value condition that can be established when the arrival is reached, a continuous winning condition may be established which can be established when the number of consecutive winners of the departure has reached a predetermined value (for example, 5 times). Furthermore, an operation condition may be provided that is satisfied when a specific operation is performed on the operation means (frame button 22) operable by the player. As a result, the player can be made to actively operate the operation means during the RUSH game period, so that the willingness to participate in the game can be enhanced. In addition, the condition for executing the suggested effect may be established based on the game result other than the special figure 2 lottery which is executed during the RUSH game period, for example, the number of balls entered in the ball entrance is predetermined When the number has been reached or the number of reserved memories has reached the upper limit, the balls (so-called over winning balls) that have entered the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 reach a predetermined number. In this case, the condition for executing the suggested effect may be established.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 293, the contents of the suggestion effect setting process (S14001 in FIG. 293) executed in the small hitting related process 11 (see S14574 in FIG. 292) will be described. FIG. 293 is a flowchart showing the contents of the suggested effect setting process (S14001). In the suggested effect setting process, a process for setting an effect mode of the suggested effect performed during the RUSH game period is executed.

  When the suggestion effect setting process (S14001) is executed, first, the time information stored in the remaining time storage area 223p, that is, the remaining time of the RUSH gaming period is acquired (S14101), and the acquired time information is 5 seconds. It is determined whether a longer time is indicated (S14102). Here, in the modification of the fourth embodiment, it is configured such that the suggestion effect of 5 seconds is executed. Therefore, in the process of S14102, if it is determined that the remaining period of the RUSH gaming period is 5 seconds or less, the RUSH gaming period ends at the end timing of the suggested rendering, so a new suggested rendering is not executed. It is configured as follows.

  In the present modification, the time of the suggested effect is fixed to 5 seconds, but without being limited to this, the suggested effect of a plurality of effect times may be configured to be executed. In this case, the effect time of the suggestion effect to be executed first is determined, and then it is determined whether or not the remaining period of the RUSH gaming period is longer than the determined effect time, and the suggestion effect is executed based on the determination result It may be configured to determine the presence or absence of In addition, the remaining period of the RUSH gaming period may be determined first, and the suggestion effect may be set from among the effect time that can be executed within the remaining period.

  In the process of S14102, when it is determined that the remaining time is 5 seconds or less (S14102: No), this process ends because there is no period in which the suggestion effect can be executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the remaining time is longer than 5 seconds (S14102: Yes), the value of the small hitting frequency counter 223cc is read next (S14103), and the information stored in the suggested information storage area 223ja ( Information indicating the type of the suggested effect already executed during this RUSH gaming period) is read (S14104), and then the lottery result of the currently executing special figure 1 lottery stored in the prize information storage area 223b is shown Information (information indicating the jackpot type) is acquired (S14105).

  Next, based on each information acquired (read out) in the processing of S14103 to S14105, the effect mode of the suggested effect to be executed this time is selected using the suggested effect selection table 222jb (S14106), and the selected effect mode is selected. A corresponding indication suggestion effect command for display is set (S14107). Here, in this modification, a plurality of effect modes are set for the suggested effect modes selected in the process of S14106, and the process of S14107 corresponds to the selected effect mode. From the plurality of effect modes, a suggestive effect command for display corresponding to one effect mode is set (S14107).

  Then, when the process of S14107 is finished, the information indicating the selected presentation effect mode is stored in the suggested information storage area 223ja (S14108), the flag during presentation effect 223jd is set to ON (S14109), and this process is ended. Do.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 294, the contents of the special view 2 variation display setting process 11 (S5195) will be described. FIG. 294 is a flow chart showing the contents of variation display setting processing 11 (S5195) for Special Drawing 2. The special view 2 variation display setting process 11 (S5195) is a process for setting a variation effect corresponding to the variation pattern of the special figure 2 and is set for the special diagram 2 of the fourth embodiment described above. A point of adding a process of setting a display variation pattern command when a suggestion effect is being performed and a process of setting a suggestion mode during the RUSH gaming period to the process 4 (S5175 of FIG. 160) Are different, and otherwise the same. About the same processing content, the same numerals are attached and the detailed explanation is omitted.

  When the variation display setting process 11 (S5195) for the special figure 2 is executed, first, S5301 to S5351 identical to the variation display setting process 4 for the special figure 2 of the fourth embodiment described above (S5175 in FIG. 160). Execute the process Then, when the process of S5351 ends, it is determined whether the flag 223jd during suggestion effect is set to ON (S5391). If it is determined in the process of S5391 that the flag 223jd during suggested effect is not set on (set to off), that is, if it is determined that the suggested effect is not executed (S5391: No), The same processing of S5352 as the special display 2 variation display setting processing 4 (S5175 in FIG. 160) of the fourth embodiment described above is executed, and the processing shifts to the processing of S5392.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S5391 that the flag 223jd during suggestion is set to ON (S5391: Yes), the second special symbol (special drawing (special drawing) is selected based on the extracted fluctuation pattern and latent mode 2) The indication effect during display latent variation variation pattern command for display 2) is set (S5394), and the process shifts to the processing of S5393. That is, in the latent state, the variation effect of the special view 2 is set to be different depending on whether the suggestion effect is being performed or not. Specifically, when the suggestion effect is not executed, the fluctuation effect of the special view 2 is executed using the entire main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 285 (a)). On the other hand, when the suggested rendering is being performed, the majority of the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 is used to perform the suggested rendering in order to emphasize the suggested rendering, and the remaining portion is used. The fluctuation effect shown in FIG. 2 is executed (see FIG. 286 (a)).

  By configuring in this manner, it is possible to inform the player of the effects to be most noticed in an easy-to-understand manner. In the present modification, as described above, the display command set by the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to be different based on the presence or absence of the suggestion effect execution, but the present invention is not limited thereto. The same display command is set, and the area for displaying the fluctuation effect of the special view 2 is changed based on the display command received by the display control device 114 and the presence or absence of the execution of the suggested effect Also good. Thereby, when changing only the display position (the size of the display mode) without changing the contents of the change effect of the special view 2 according to the presence or absence of the suggested effect, the control load of the audio lamp control device 113 It can be reduced easily.

  When the process of S5352 ends, the suggestion mode setting process (S5392) is executed, then the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation number counter 223jb is incremented by 1 (S5393), and this process is ended. In the process of S5392, a process for setting a suggestion mode for suggesting the result of the special figure 1 lottery under execution (during variation) is executed using the special figure 2 variation production of this time.

  In the present modification, as described above, the suggestion mode setting process (S5392) is not performed when the flag 223jd during suggestion effect is set to ON. That is, during the period in which the effect that suggests the lottery result (big hit content) of the special figure 1 is executed by the suggested effect, the variation result of the special figure 2 is used to suggest the lottery result (big hit content) of the special figure 1 It is configured that the effect is not performed. As a result, it is possible to suppress that a plurality of suggested effects occur simultaneously and provide an effect that is difficult for the player to understand.

  Next, contents of the suggestion mode setting process (S5392) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 295 is a flowchart showing the contents of the suggestion mode setting process (S5392). When the suggestion mode setting process (S5392) is executed, first, the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation number counter 223jb is read (S14201), and the information stored in the remaining time storage area 223p (the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 1 is Information) is selected (S14202), and based on the counter value read out in the process of S14201 and the stored information read out in the process of S14202, the present presentation mode is selected using the suggestion mode selection table 222ja (S14203) ). Then, a display command corresponding to the set variation pattern command and the selected presentation mode is set (S14204), and the process ends.

  By configuring in this way, it is possible to set the suggestion mode for suggesting the lottery result of the special figure 1 by using the variation effect of the special figure 2 when setting the variation effect of the special figure 2. It is possible to notify (suggest) a plurality of pieces of information (lottery result of special figure 2 and lottery result of special figure 1) in one variation effect to the player, and make the player pay attention to the variation effect it can. In addition, in the modification of the 4th embodiment of the present invention, the indication aspect (refer FIG. 285 (b)) which changes the display aspect of the production | presentation pattern 813 as a suggestion aspect using the fluctuation production of the special figure 2 or Although the stop display mode for showing the result of the special figure 2 lottery such as the suggestion mode (refer to FIG. 285 (b)) for changing the display mode is used, the invention is not limited to this, and the suggestion in the variable display mode is suggested An aspect may be set. For example, when the third symbol is variably displayed, the color of the background can be varied to make it possible to suggest the lottery result of the special figure 1 or the display mode of the treasure box 812 in which the effect pattern 813 is stored is variable. The lottery result of the special figure 1 may be suggested by making it possible. Further, not only the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81, but also the voice output device 226 provided in the pachinko machine 10 and the lamp display device 227 can be used to suggest the lottery result of the special view 1 You may. Specifically, the sound output during the period in which the variable display of Special Figure 2 is being performed is varied, or the light emission mode of the lamp is varied during the period in which the variable display of Special Figure 2 is being performed. By doing this, the lottery result of the special figure 1 may be suggested.

  Next, contents of the liquid crystal effect execution management process 11 (S4160) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 296 is a flowchart showing the contents of the liquid crystal effect execution management process 11 (S4160). In the liquid crystal effect execution management process 11 (S4160), a suggestive effect is generated with respect to the liquid crystal effect execution management process (S4110) executed in the main process (see FIG. 59) of the sound lamp control device 113 of the fourth embodiment described above. This embodiment is different in that a process for determining whether or not it is in the execution period of is added, and the other is the same.

  The liquid crystal effect execution management process (see S4110 in FIG. 59) described above will be briefly described. For always determining the effect period of each effect set in the sound lamp control device 113 and the update period of the effect being executed. Processing is to be performed. Specifically, the timekeeping means (timer) possessed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 and the scenario of the set effect (the effect scenario being executed) are constantly managed, and the effect being executed is ended. A process for managing the timing and the timing of switching the effect mode is executed.

  When the liquid crystal effect execution management process 11 (S4160) is executed, first, it is determined whether the flag 223jd during suggestion is set to ON (S14301), and when it is determined to be set to OFF (S14301: No), the process proceeds to S14304. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S14301 that the flag during presentation suggestion 223jd is set to ON (S14301: Yes), it is determined whether the present is the end timing of the suggestion effect (S14302). If it is determined in the process of S14302 that the suggested effect end timing is reached (S14302: Yes), the flag 232jd during the suggested effect is set to OFF (S14303), and the process proceeds to S14304. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S14302 that it is not the suggested effect end timing (S14302: No), the process of S14303 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S14304. In the process of S14304, other liquid crystal effect execution management is executed (S14304), and this process is ended.

  Describing the process of S14302, in the modification of the fourth embodiment, the 5-second suggestion effect is executed, and the elapsed time from the timing when the suggestion effect is executed is the voice lamp control device It measures using the time measurement means which MPU221 of 113 has, and determination is performed based on the measurement result. It should be noted that processing other than the processing described above may be processing capable of determining the end timing of the suggested effect, for example, a value corresponding to 5 seconds in the counting means capable of counting the rendering time when the suggested effect is executed. , And may be configured to determine the end timing of the suggested effect when the value of the counting means becomes a value indicating that 5 seconds have elapsed.

  As described above, in the modification of the fourth embodiment, the variation is made based on the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) executed during the variation of the first special symbol (special figure 1). Since the suggestion effect for suggesting (informing) the player the lottery result of the special figure 1 is executable, it is possible to make the player predict the lottery result of the special figure 1 in advance. . Therefore, the rendering effect can be enhanced.

  Moreover, since it is comprised so that the above-mentioned suggestion production may be performed using the fluctuation production for showing the lottery result of the special figure 2, the lottery result of the special figure 2 and the lottery result of the special figure 1 may be 1 production. Since it is possible to suggest (inform) the player at, it is possible to enhance the rendering effect.

  In addition, since the suggestion effect is executed when the lottery result of the special figure 2 satisfies the predetermined condition, it is possible to make the player actively perform the special figure 2 lottery. In the modification of the fourth embodiment, since the suggestion effect is more easily performed as the lottery of the special view 2 is performed, the player's willingness to play can be further enhanced.

  That is, in the modified example of the fourth embodiment, the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) executed during the change of the first special symbol (special figure 1) suggests the lottery result of the special figure 1 It is configured to have both the role of establishing the execution condition of the suggestion effect and the role of performing the suggestion effect. As a result, it is possible to make the player interested in whether the suggestion effect using the variation display of the special view 2 is executed or the suggestion effect different from the variation display of the special view 2 is executed.

  Furthermore, in the modified example of the fourth embodiment, as the presentation aspect of the suggestion effect, the suggestion effect (indication strength) in which the player can easily predict the lottery result of the special figure 1 and the lottery of the special figure 1 Since it is possible to set at least a suggestive effect (indicative weak) which is hard to predict the result, it is possible to focus on the effect mode of the suggestive effect. Moreover, in the modification of the 4th embodiment of this invention, it is comprised so that execution of two or more suggestion effects can be performed in one special figure fluctuation period, The lottery of the special figure 1 is carried out, so that the frequency | count of execution of suggestion effects increases. It is configured to be easy to set a suggestive effect (strong suggestion) that is easy to predict the result. Thereby, it is possible to cause the player to play the game eagerly so that more suggestion effects are executed.

  In addition, in the modification of the 4th embodiment of this invention, although it is comprised so that the above-mentioned suggestion effect may be performed based on the special figure 2 lottery in the special figure 1 fluctuation, the plural lottery which can be performed simultaneously is used. If, for example, the special effect (the second symbol) may be executed based on the drawing of the normal symbol (the second symbol) during the special figure 1 fluctuation, the special symbol (the first symbol) may be executed. The suggestion effect for suggesting the lottery result of the normal symbol may be executed based on the lottery of 1 symbol). Further, it may be configured to execute the suggestion effect for suggesting the lottery result of the special figure 1 or the special figure 2 based on the normal symbol lottery while the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are simultaneously changing.

  The modification of the fourth embodiment is configured to suggest the contents of the jackpot elected based on the special figure 2 lottery during the jackpot variation in which the lottery of the special figure 1 is elected as the jackpot. In addition to the above, the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 1 may be indicated. Moreover, in the modification of the 4th embodiment of the present invention, when one of the special symbols among the plurality of special symbols wins the jackpot (including during the fluctuation of the jackpot win), the lottery of the other special symbol is performed. It is configured not to win a jackpot. Therefore, the special figure 2 lottery performed during the special figure 1 big hit fluctuation does not win the big hit, so even if it suggests the lottery result (big hit content) of the special figure 1, the jackpot game different from the suggested contents It is possible to suppress a situation in which (the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot won in the special figure 2 lottery) is executed.

  In the modification of the fourth embodiment, although the suggestion effect is performed based on the special figure 2 lottery executed during the special figure 1 fluctuation winning the jackpot, the present invention is not limited to this. The suggestion effect may be executed based on the special figure 2 lottery performed during the special figure 1 fluctuation in which the jackpot is not won. As a result, it is possible to make the player think that the special figure 1 in motion is winning the jackpot by executing the suggestion effect.

  Further, in the modification of the fourth embodiment, as in the fourth embodiment described above, when the jackpot is won in the state where the probability change state is set, the latent state is set during the jackpot fluctuation, and the special view It is comprised so that the lottery of 2 may become easy to be performed. As a result, since the special figure 2 lottery can be executed more frequently during the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation, it is possible to easily provide the player with the suggested effect. In addition, since it becomes easy to win a small hit different from the big hit in the special figure 2 lottery in the state where the latent state is set, it is possible to make the special figure 2 lottery more active.

  In the modified example of the fourth embodiment, the jackpot game of the special figure 1 is suggestive effect for suggesting the lottery result of the special figure 1 based on the special figure 2 lottery performed during the jackpot fluctuation of the special figure 1 Although it is configured to be performed before the start, the suggestion effect may be performed in a period other than this. For example, the technology of the present modification is applied to the sixth embodiment described above, The lottery result of the special figure 1 (the jackpot game content or the gaming state set after the big hit game may be over) may be suggested based on the special figure 2 lottery executed during the jackpot game of.

  Moreover, in the modification of the 4th embodiment of this invention, although it is comprised so that suggestion production | presentation may be performed based on a special figure 2 lottery only during the big hit change of special figure 1, it does not restrict to this, special figure 1 It may be configured to execute the suggestion effect based on the special figure 2 lottery performed during the out-of-range fluctuation of. Thereby, when the suggestion effect is executed, it is possible to entertain the player whether or not the special figure 1 lottery that is fluctuating is a big hit.

  In the modification of the fourth embodiment described above, the suggested effects for suggesting the lottery result of the special figure 1 based on the special figure 2 lottery performed during the special figure 1 fluctuation are added to the fourth embodiment. Although an example is shown, the suggestion effect used in the modification of the fourth embodiment may be configured to be added to the other embodiments described above, for example, to be added to the third embodiment. You may configure it.

  In the third embodiment, after the big hit, a definite change state (special symbol high probability state, normal symbol high probability state) is set, and a predetermined transition condition (big hit, When a small hit is won and the fourth draw of the special symbol is established, the latent condition (high probability state of the special symbol, low probability state of the ordinary symbol) is determined under predetermined termination conditions (the fourth drawing of the special symbol) Is configured to be set for a period of time until the stop display is established.

  When executing the above-described suggestion effect in the third embodiment configured as described above, the special view 2 of the special view 1 lottery performed during the special view 1 change in which the latent state is set is selected. Not only the lottery result but also a suggestion effect that suggests an opportunity (transition condition) in which the latent state is set may be executed.

  That is, in the third embodiment, a plurality of transition conditions in which the latent state is set are defined, and the period in which the latent state is set is different according to the transition condition that is satisfied. The specific content is described above with reference to FIG. 112, and thus the description thereof is omitted. Furthermore, according to the configuration used in the third embodiment, the transition to the current latent state to the player is made until the special view 1 fluctuation for which the transition condition to the latent state is satisfied is stopped and displayed. It was not possible to report what the opportunity was.

  Therefore, by adding the suggested effects described using the modification of the fourth embodiment to the configuration of the third embodiment, the special figure 1 transition condition to the latent state is satisfied during the fluctuation It becomes possible to suggest the lottery result of the special figure 1 during fluctuation based on the executed special figure 2 lottery. By configuring in this manner, it is possible for the player to predict the transition opportunity to the current latent state by viewing the suggestion effect to be executed.

  That is, it is possible to set a first gaming state (for example, a latent state) which is advantageous to the player as a gaming state, and a second gaming state (for example, a probability change state) which is more disadvantageous than the first gaming state. When the transition condition of is satisfied, it is possible to shift from the second gaming state to the first gaming state, and the special figure 2 fluctuation executed during the special figure 1 fluctuation when the first gaming state is set Based on the (lottery), it is preferable to be able to execute a suggestion effect for suggesting to the player what transition condition the current first gaming state is to be set to.

  In the modification of the fourth embodiment described above, the small hit game (RUSH game) is frequently executed by executing the drawing of the special figure 2 during the big hit fluctuation (during RUSH gaming period) of the special figure 1 In a configuration capable of giving a prize ball to a player without executing a big hit game, the lottery result of the special figure 1 based on the drawing of the special figure 2 (big hit game content, gaming state after big hit game end, special figure (1) Since it is configured to be able to execute the suggestion effect that suggests the remaining change time (1) of the change, it is possible to make the special figure 2 lottery during the RUSH gaming period have a plurality of meanings. Specifically, a lottery result advantageous to the player as a lottery result of the special figure 1 during fluctuation while letting the small figure win for obtaining the prize ball expected by the special figure 2 lottery executed during the RUSH gaming period It can be expected that a suggestive effect suggesting that it is performed will be performed.

  When configured in this manner, for example, when one of the plurality of meanings in the special figure 2 lottery has an meaning to be disadvantageous to the player, the other is controlled to be an advantage to be advantageous to the player. good. Specifically, for example, it is possible to set a small hit (for example, small hit A) whose fluctuation time is long as a result of the special drawing 2 lottery and a small hit (small hit B) whose fluctuation time is shorter than that small hit A. Do. In this case, in order to execute many small hitting games within the limited period of the RUSH gaming period, a lot of lottery results having a short fluctuation time need to be selected as a lottery result of the special figure 2. That is, when the player wins the above-described small hit A, the lottery result is more disadvantageous to the player than when the player wins the small hit B.

  In such a case, it is preferable to configure the suggestion effect to be more easily performed when the small jackpot A is won than the small jackpot B is won. Thereby, when it becomes a result of the special figure 2 lottery which becomes disadvantageous to the player, it is possible to easily provide another added value (recommended effect), and the game willingness of the player is significantly reduced. Can be suppressed.

  In addition to the above-described example, for example, the first small hit game and the first small hit game, which are advantageous to the player as a game mode of the small hit game executed when the small hit is won, and the player To enable setting of a second small hitting game in which the small hitting game which is disadvantageous to the player is executed, and to make it possible to provide another added value (recommended effect) when winning the small hitting game which is disadvantageous to the player May be configured to

Eleventh Embodiment
Next, a pachinko machine 10 according to the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the first embodiment described above, in the state in which the probability variation state (high probability state of special symbol, low probability state of normal symbol) is set, when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) The game state in the jackpot fluctuation is considered to be the latent state, and the small hitting game is configured to be easily executed when the latent state is set.

  On the other hand, in the eleventh embodiment, and when the time saving state of the normal symbol ends earlier (when the number of time reduction ends) in the definite variation state, and in the case of winning a big hit, an advantageous latency state It is supposed to be a transition to In addition, in the gaming state other than the latent state, even if it is a big hit, the percentage in which the latent state is set is configured to be extremely low probability (for example, 5%), so other games Most of the transition from the state to the latent state is the case where the time saving state of the normal symbol is finished in the positive change state.

  Further, in the eleventh embodiment, the case in which the probability change jackpot is won again in the relatively short time state or the probability change state is set after the end of the jackpot, as compared to the case in which the probability change jackpot is won in the disadvantageous normal state. In the definite variation state, the termination condition of the time saving state is easily established (the small number of time reductions is easily set). As a result, even if it is possible to end the time saving state of the normal symbol (that is, it is not possible to shift to the latent state), even if it is won in the probability variation jackpot, it shifts to the latent state Since the possibility of becoming easy increases, it is possible to further improve the player's expectation for the latent state. Thus, the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  The pachinko machine 10 according to the eleventh embodiment is different from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in the configuration in that the configuration of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 in the main control unit 110 is partially changed, The configuration of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 in the voice lamp control device 113 is partially changed, the control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is partially modified, and the voice lamp control device 113 The control processing executed by the MPU 221 is partially changed. The other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control apparatus 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 are described. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in one embodiment. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as the first embodiment, and the illustration and the description thereof will be omitted.

  First, the gaming state in the eleventh embodiment will be briefly described. Although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 306, in the eleventh embodiment, four types of gaming states are provided. That is, a normal state most disadvantageous to the player, a short time state having a higher degree of advantage than the normal state, a probability change state having a higher degree of advantage than the short time state, and a latent state most advantageous to the player are provided. ing.

  As in the first embodiment, in the short time condition (the special symbol special variation condition and the normal symbol time short condition), the motorized accessory 64a attached to the lower first ball entry port 64b2 is easily opened, and the lower first condition is obtained. Since it becomes easy to enter the ball entrance 64b2, by performing the left hitting game, it is possible to efficiently execute the drawing of the first special symbol in comparison with the normal state. That is, since the number of game balls to be fired and the number of award balls to be paid out based on entering the lower first ball entrance 64b 2 etc. become substantially the same, the first special symbol without reducing the number of holding balls Form an advantageous state that can be made to run the lottery. Moreover, in addition to becoming a time saving state of a normal symbol, the probability changing state (the time changing state of a special symbol and the time saving state of a normal symbol) is higher than the time saving state because the probability of becoming a big hit in the drawing of the special symbol is high. It is further advantageous. Moreover, in the latent state (the special symbol's definite variation and the normal symbol's normal condition), the variation time when the second special symbol's lottery is executed becomes significantly shorter than the other gaming conditions (10 minutes → When one second of the special symbol lottery is executed on 1 second, it is a small hit (a kind of disconnection) with high probability (59/60), and the first specified winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 is predetermined The game ball is moved to the first specified winning hole 65a only by aiming at the second entrance 640 and executing the right-handed game, since the game is opened for a period and becomes a lottery result in which an opportunity to obtain a winning ball is given). It becomes an extremely advantageous gaming state where it is possible to enter frequently and keep winning the prize ball.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 297 to FIG. 301, the characteristic interest effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the eleventh embodiment will be described. As described above, in the eleventh embodiment, when the time saving state ends in the relatively advantageous probability changing state, the configuration is shifted to the most advantageous latent state. For this reason, in the definite change state, the transition to the latent state is made by falling out in the drawing of the special symbol continuously for a set number of time reductions rather than becoming the big hit in the drawing of the special symbol. It is possible to provide novel gameplay that makes you expect more strongly. So, in this 11th embodiment, when it transfers to a definite change state, it is set as the structure which performs the effect which suggests the number of remaining lottery numbers until it transfers to a latent state by display effect. As a result, when the game machine shifts to the definite change state, only by checking the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to check the indication of the remaining number of times of drawing until the game machine shifts to the latent state. Convenience can be improved.

  First, with reference to FIG. 297 (a), in the eleventh embodiment, a display mode of an ending effect to be executed in the ending period of the jackpot game in which a definite change state or a short time state is set after the jackpot ends will be described. As shown in FIG. 297 (a), when the ending effect in the eleventh embodiment is executed, with respect to the upper central portion (above the character 811 imitating a rabbit) in the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, A display area HR1 is formed in which the words "If you break through up to three rivers RUSH determined!" Are displayed. With this display content, it is possible to easily make the player understand that the transition to the RUSH (latency state) is determined by the character 811 breaking through the river up to three. The other display contents are the same as the display contents of the ending effect in the first embodiment (see FIG. 6A), and thus the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In the eleventh embodiment, there is also provided a jackpot type (big hit A11, big hit H11) that shifts to the latent state (RUSH) directly after the big hit ends. Although illustration is omitted, in the case of the jackpot type, the entry of a latent state (RUSH) rush is notified in the ending period.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 297 (b) to FIG. 299, the display effects performed during the time reduction state of the normal symbol in the eleventh embodiment (that is, between the positive change state or the time reduction state) will be described. . The details will be described later, but while the time saving state of the normal symbol is set, the time saving state of the normal symbol is ended every time a special symbol drawing of a specified number of times (25 times or 15 times) is executed. Whether the player moves to the most advantageous latent state, or the normal symbol time-out state is ended and shifts to the most disadvantageous normal state, or the normal symbol time-out state continues (is maintained) The effect to suggest (inform) is executed. That is, according to whether or not the character 811 breaks through the river, a river breakthrough effect (see FIGS. 298 and 299) capable of indicating (informing) the gaming state after the end of the fluctuation is executed. Note that the cycle in which the river breakthrough effect is executed is set to the number of changes that may cause the time saving state to end. That is, when the jackpot occurs in the normal state and the definite variation state or the time saving state of the normal symbol is set, any of 25 times, 50 times, or 75 times is set. In the case of the probability change state or the time reduction state, a jackpot occurs, and when the probability change state is set, the number of time reductions is set to 10 times, 25 times, or 40 times. By executing the river breakthrough effect every time the number of times the time saving state may end is reached, it is expected that the transition to the latent state will be notified each time the river breakthrough effect is executed. Can be done. Thus, the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  First, with reference to FIG. 297 (b), an effect mode (display mode) before the river breakthrough effect is performed will be described. As shown in FIG. 297 (b), on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, an effect of running the character 811 in the right direction in a front view is executed until the river breakthrough effect is executed. In addition, a horizontally long substantially rectangular display area HR2 is formed in the right direction of the character 811 in a front view. In this display area HR2, characters (display mode) indicating (suggesting) the number of lottery times of the remaining special symbols until the character 811 reaches the next river are displayed. Note that FIG. 297 (b) exemplifies a state in which the characters “the remaining 20 times to the first river” are displayed. The display contents make it easy for the player to understand that it is a chance to shift to an advantageous latent state by continuously falling out over another 20 special symbol lotterys. Can. The other display contents are the same as the chance zone mode (see FIG. 6B) in the first embodiment, and thus the detailed description thereof is omitted. Here, the "chance zone" in the eleventh embodiment indicates a state during which the time saving state of the normal symbol is set.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 298 (a), the display content at the start of the river breakthrough effect will be described. FIG. 298 (a) is a diagram showing a display screen of the third symbol display device 81 at the start of the river breakthrough effect. As shown in FIG. 298 (a), when the river breakthrough effect is started, an effect of finding the river image KG in which the character 811 imitates the river is executed. In addition, the characters “Arrive at the first river !! Jump over the river !!” are displayed on the display area HR1 formed (displayed) in the upper part of the display screen. By these display contents, it can be easily understood that there is a possibility that the time saving state of the normal symbol may end (that is, the number of times of time saving may elapse) in the variation. That is, it is possible to make the player understand that there is a possibility of shifting to an advantageous latent state and a possibility of shifting to a disadvantageous normal state. Therefore, it is possible to play a game paying attention to the river breakthrough effect.

  FIG. 298 (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode in the case where the river is successfully broken and the continuation of the time saving state (chance zone) of the normal symbol is notified in the river breakthrough effect. As shown in FIG. 298 (b), when success is notified by the river breakthrough effect, the character 811 jumps and effects to land on the opposite side of the river image KG are executed. Further, as shown in FIG. 298 (b), a signboard image 815 imitating a signboard is displayed at the point beyond the river (on the opposite bank). The signboard image 815 is displayed to indicate (inform) a benefit by the character 811 jumping over (breaking through) the river image KG. FIG. 298 (b) exemplifies a case where the character "continuation" is displayed, which indicates that the time saving state of the normal symbol continues (the number of time saving remains) after the next variable display. Further, in accordance with the display of the signboard image 815, the characters “1st river breakthrough !! chance zone continuation !!” are displayed on the display area HR1 formed in the upper center of the screen. By these display contents, it is possible to easily make the player understand that the time saving state of the normal symbol continues the next variable display transition. Therefore, by continuing the disconnection until the next river breakthrough effect, it is possible to play the game while having a sense of purpose to get a chance to shift to the latent state, thereby improving the interest of the player in the game It can be done. In addition, when the time saving state of the normal symbol continues, the lottery result of the special symbol is out. Therefore, in the small area Dm1 for displaying the lottery result of the first special symbol, the third symbol (for example, the combination of "8", "1", and "5") of the combination indicating the deviation is displayed.

  It should be noted that, after the character 811 succeeds in jumping over the river image KG, a time lag (for example, 1) occurs until the signboard image 815 is displayed (that is, a benefit for breaking the river is suggested). ) Is configured to occur. As a result, the player can be expected to be notified of transition to the latent state (RUSH) as a benefit by jumping over the river image 811 during this one second. Therefore, it is possible to strongly expect notification of the latent state for at least one second each time the breakthrough event is successfully produced, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  FIG. 299 (a) is a display when the river is successfully broken through and the transition to the latent state (RUSH) (in which the time saving state of the normal symbol is ended in the positive change state) is notified in the river breakthrough production It is the figure which showed an example of the aspect. As shown in FIG. 299 (a), even when the transition to the latent state is notified, the character 811 is the same as when the continuation of the time saving state of the normal symbol is notified (see FIG. 298 (b)). An effect of jumping over the river image KG and landing on the opposite bank is executed. On the other hand, when the transition to the latent state is notified, the word "RUSH" is displayed on the signboard image 815, and the first river breakthrough !! RUSH for the display area HR1. The word "Pushing!" Is displayed. In addition, the character displayed in the small area Dm3 is switched to "right-handed", and the display content of the sub display area Ds is switched to the display content "RUSH rush! Right-handed !!". By these display contents, it is possible to easily make the player understand that it has shifted to the most advantageous latent state (RUSH) and that it is possible to play the right-handed game.

  FIG. 299 (b) shows an example of the display mode in the event that the river has failed to break through in the river breakthrough effect, and the transition to the normal state (the time reduction state of the normal symbol being ended in the time reduction state) is notified FIG. As shown in FIG. 299 (b), when the transition to the normal state is notified, the character 811 jumps to the opposite side of the river image KG, but can not jump over the river image KG, and the river image KG An effect of falling towards is performed. In addition, the characters "Breakthrough failure ... Chance zone end ..." are displayed in the display area HR1, and the characters "Chance zone end !!" are displayed in the sub display area Ds. Ru. By these display contents, it is possible to easily make the player understand that it has shifted to the normal state which is disadvantageous.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 300, in the eleventh embodiment, a game is performed in the case where the chance zone is set after the big hit ends (that is, the probability change state or the time saving state is set as the game state after the big hit ends). The state and transition of the presentation mode will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 300 (a), transition of the gaming state and the effect mode when the jackpot C11 is won in the normal state will be described. In addition, although the details will be described later with reference to FIG. 303, the jackpot C11 is a jackpot in which the gaming state after the jackpot end is set to a definite change state, and the number of time saving is 50 and the number of definite changes is 100. It is a type. In other words, if you lose the special symbol lottery 50 times in a row after the big hit ends, then, unless the jackpot is won, it is an advantageous latency state until the special symbol lottery is executed 100 times after the big hit end Type of jackpot.

  As shown in FIG. 300 (a), when the jackpot C11 is won in the normal state, the time saving state of the normal symbol continues until 50 lotterys of the special symbol are executed after the end of the jackpot, and the 50th special At the timing when the lottery of the symbol is executed, the time saving state of the normal symbol is ended and the normal state of the normal symbol is set. In addition, on the other hand, the definite variation state of the special symbol continues even if the drawing of the special symbol is executed 50 times or more (up to the time until the drawing of the special symbol is executed 100 times). On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 300 (a), as the effect mode, a river breakthrough effect in which continuation is notified during the execution of the variable display based on the execution of the 24th lottery of the special symbol (FIG. 298) (B) is executed, and during the variable display based on the execution of the 49th special symbol lottery, the river breakthrough effect in which the transition to the latent state is notified (see FIG. 299 (a) ) Is executed. Then, after that, RUSH effect indicating that it is in the latent state is executed in the same display mode as the first embodiment (see FIG. 7B). In addition, when the number of times of time saving becomes the probability variation big hit (big hit D11) set to 25 times, the transition to the latent state is notified by the first river breakthrough effect. On the other hand, when the number of hourly reductions is set to 75 times, the continuation of the time reduction state (chance zone) of the normal symbol is reported in the first and second river breakthrough effects when it becomes the large change B11 The transition to the latent state is notified in the second time the river breakthrough effect (the river breakthrough effect performed in the variable display based on the 74th special symbol lottery being executed).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 300 (b), transition of the gaming state and the effect mode when the jackpot F11 is won in the normal state will be described. Here, the jackpot F11 is a jackpot type in which the gaming state after the jackpot end is set to the time saving state, and the number of time saving is set to 50 times. That is, it is a jackpot of the type which will be in a disadvantageous normal state when it comes off in the lottery of a special symbol continuously 50 times after the jackpot end.

  As shown in FIG. 300 (b), when the jackpot F11 is won in the normal state, the time saving state of the normal symbol continues until 50 lotterys of the special symbol are executed after the jackpot ends, and the 50th special At the timing when the lottery of the symbol is executed, the time saving state of the normal symbol is ended and the normal state of the normal symbol is set. Moreover, the state of the special symbol maintains the low probability state of the special symbol from the end of the jackpot. Therefore, the gaming state shifts to the normal state by executing the 50th lottery of special symbols after the big hit end. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 300 (b), as the effect mode, a river breakthrough effect in which continuation is reported during the execution of the variable display based on the execution of the 24th special symbol lottery (FIG. 298) (B) is executed, and during the execution of the variable display based on the execution of the 49th special symbol lottery, the river breakthrough effect (see FIG. 299 (b)) of the aspect in which the breakthrough of the river fails. It is performed and the transition to the normal state is informed. Then, after that, the normal effect for the normal state is executed. In addition, when the number of times of time saving is set to 25 times and it becomes a regular big hit (big hit G11), the transition to the normal state is notified by the first river breakthrough effect. On the other hand, when the number of time savings is set to 75 times the regular big hit (big hit E11), the continuation of the time saving state (chance zone) of the normal symbol is reported in the first and second river breakthrough effects, 3 The transition to the normal state is notified in the second time of the river breakthrough effect (the river breakthrough effect executed in the variable display based on the 74th lottery of the special symbol being executed).

  As described above, in the eleventh embodiment, when the gaming state after the big hit ends is set to the definite change state or the short time state, every time the number of times of variation that the short time state of the normal symbol may end is reached, By executing the breakthrough effect, whether the time saving state of the normal symbol continues or the time saving state of the normal symbol ends and shifts to the latent state, the time saving state of the normal symbol ends and the transition to the normal state It is configured to notify periodically (every 25 times or 15 times of the drawing of the special symbol). By configuring in this way, while the chance zone (time saving state of the normal symbol) is set, the player is allowed to play the game for one enjoyment that the next river breakthrough effect will be executed. Can. In addition, it is possible to realize a novel game characteristic that wants to be continuously removed in a special symbol lottery at least until the next river breakthrough effect. Thus, the interest of the player in the game can be improved. Furthermore, by adopting a configuration that may shift to the normal state by failing in the river breakthrough production, continuation of the time saving state is reported in the river breakthrough production (transition to the latent status even though it breaks through the river) Even if it does not, it can be made to think that the normal condition is better than being notified. That is, even if the latent state is not notified, it is possible to suppress discouragement of the player.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 301, a small hitting effect that can be executed in the latent state in the eleventh embodiment will be described. Here, in the eleventh embodiment, a plurality of effects having different modes are provided as small hitting effects, and when the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed, the lottery of the first special symbol during fluctuation It is performed to suggest a result. In the latent state, as the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed, the time saving state of the normal symbol is ended mainly in the positive variation where the holding balls of the first special symbol are easily stored, the first special It is a case where it shifts to the latent state in the state of possessing the holding ball of the symbol. In this case, while the variable display based on the holding ball of the first special symbol held is being executed, the game ball enters the second entrance 640 and the variable display of the first special symbol and The variable display of the second special symbol is executed in an overlapping manner. The small hitting effect in the case where it becomes a small hit in the lottery of the second special symbol, it is possible to suggest the lottery result of the first special symbol.

  FIG. 301 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of a small hitting effect (small hitting effect for high expectation) which suggests that the lottery result of the first special symbol is highly likely to be a big hit. When small hitting effect for high expectation is executed, as shown in FIG. 301, compared to the effect pattern 813 in the normal small hitting effect (see FIG. 7 (b)) effect pattern 816 of the flashy display aspect compared to Is displayed. In this effect pattern 816, as shown in FIG. 301, the character color “V” for indicating a small hit is set to a character color (yellow) different from the character color (black color) in the effect pattern 813 and “ The effect around the letter "V" looks fancy. These display modes make it possible for the player to easily understand that a small hitting effect different from the normal small hitting effect (see FIG. 7 (b)) has been executed, and thus becomes a big hit. It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation for things.

  Although illustration is omitted, in the eleventh embodiment, in addition to the normal small hitting effect (small hitting effect for low expectation) and the small hitting effect for high expectation, the degree of expectation is medium. The small hit production of (small hit production for medium expectation) is also provided. By configuring in this manner, the second special symbol is displayed in a period in which the first special symbol fluctuation display and the second special symbol fluctuation display overlap each other, such as immediately after the transition to the latent state, etc. It is possible to realize novel playability that predicts the lottery result of the first special symbol by the type of the small hitting effect of the. Thus, the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  Here, conventionally, every time a lottery result of a special symbol is executed, a gaming machine is widely known which executes variable display effect of a symbol for indicating the lottery result. In the related-art gaming machine, the interest of the player is improved by executing various types of interest effects that suggest the lottery result of the special symbol while the variable display effect of the symbol is being executed. However, in the gaming machine of the specification that can execute a plurality of variable displays simultaneously, while focusing on the effect mode associated with one of the variable displays, there is a problem that the effect mode in the other variable display effect is overlooked There was a point. In particular, in a game machine of a type in which one variable display is displayed in a mode that is easier to view than the other, it becomes difficult to confirm the presentation mode in the other (the less visible side) variable display. If the jackpot is started while the player is not paying attention, there is a problem that the player may be confused.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the eleventh embodiment, the variable display of the second special symbol mainly executed in the latent state is given priority over the variable display of the first special symbol which is difficult to be executed ( When the variation display of the first special symbol is being executed together while displaying it in an easy manner), the drawing of the first special symbol by the small hitting effect of the second special symbol (representation aspect accompanying the variation display) It has a configuration that suggests the results. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to confirm the expectation of becoming a jackpot in the lottery of the first special symbol only by paying attention to the effect mode accompanying the variable display of the second special symbol. Therefore, the convenience of the player can be improved.

  In the eleventh embodiment, the display mode in the small hitting effect of the second special symbol is configured to indicate the expectation that the lottery result of the first special symbol simultaneously executed is a big hit, but It is not limited. For example, the lottery result of the first special symbol may be suggested by the effect mode of the effect to be executed during the variable display of the second special symbol. In addition, for example, as a configuration that suggests (informs) an expectation that the lottery result of the first special symbol or the lottery result of the second special symbol becomes a big hit by the display mode of the variation display of the normal symbol in the second symbol display device. Good. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suggest to the player the result of the variable display effect on the hard-to-see side only by confirming the variable display effect on the easy-to-see side, thus realizing a more easy-to-understand effect can do. Therefore, the convenience of the player can be improved.

Electrical Configuration of Eleventh Embodiment
Next, the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 according to the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 302 to 304. The ROM 202 in the eleventh embodiment differs from the configuration of the ROM 202 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 15A) in the first per random number table 202a, the small per random number table 202b, and the second mode. The difference is that the prescribed content of the jackpot type selection table 202d and the prescribed content of the fluctuation pattern selection table 202f are partially changed. The other configuration is the same as the configuration of the main controller 110 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 15A), and thus the detailed description thereof will be described later.

  First, with reference to FIG. 302 (a), the details of the first random number table 202a provided in the ROM 202 in the eleventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 302 (a) shows the defined contents of the first random number table 202a. The first hit random number table 202a in the eleventh embodiment is, similarly to the first hit random number table 202a (see FIG. 15A) in the first embodiment, in the drawing of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, It is a data table in which a random value (determination value) determined to be a hit in each gaming state is set.

  As shown in FIG. 302 (a), the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 302 (a)) in the eleventh embodiment is a random value (counter value) determined to be a big hit in the low probability state of the special symbol ), While two of “7, 8” are defined, 8 as “0 to 7” as random number value (counter value) determined to be a big hit in the high probability state (probability change state) of the special symbol The random number value of is specified. Therefore, in the eleventh embodiment, the jackpot probability in the low probability state of the special symbol is 1/240 (2/480), and the jackpot probability in the definite variation state of the special symbol is 1/60 (1/480).

  Next, the small hitting random number table 202b in the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 302 (b). FIG. 302 (b) shows the specified contents of the small hitting random number table 202b in the eleventh embodiment. Similar to the small hit random number table 202b in the first embodiment (see FIG. 15B), the small hit random number table 202b is set with random number values (counter values) determined to be small hits in the special symbol lottery. Table. As shown in FIG. 302 (b), in the small hitting random number table 202 b in the eleventh embodiment, a random value to be a small hitting is not defined for the lottery of the first special symbol. That is, in the lottery of the first special symbol will not win a small hit. On the other hand, 472 random numbers (counter values) of "8 to 479" are defined in association with the second special symbol lottery. Therefore, in the 11th embodiment, when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed, it becomes a small hit with the probability of 59/60 (472/480). That is, in the eleventh embodiment, when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed in the latent state, the jackpot or the jackpot occurs. Therefore, the degree of advantage of the latent state can be further enhanced.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 303, the details of the jackpot type selection table 202d in the eleventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 303 is a diagram showing defined contents of the jackpot type selection table 202d. In the jackpot type selection table 202d in the eleventh embodiment, as in the jackpot type selection table 202d (see FIG. 16A) in the first embodiment, the judgment value for determining the jackpot type is for each special symbol type Is a data table stored in

  As shown in FIG. 303, in the jackpot type selection table 202d in the eleventh embodiment, seven jackpot types of "jackpot A11" to "jackpot G11" as jackpot types of the first special symbol (special figure 1) Is defined. On the other hand, as a jackpot type of the second special symbol, three jackpot types of "jackpot H11" to "jackpot J11" are defined.

  As shown in FIG. 303, as the jackpot type of the first special symbol (special figure 1), "big jack A11" is used as the jackpot type for the first hit type counter C2 with the value of "0 to 4". It is defined in association with it. In this "big hit A11", the number of rounds of the big hit is 8 rounds, and after the big hit end is a big hit (8 round positive variation big hit) of the type set to the definite variation state of the special symbol. It should be noted that whether or not the time saving state of the normal symbol is set is variable depending on the gaming state at the time of the big hit. More specifically, when the "big hit A11" is won in the normal state, the time saving state, and the definite variation state, the time saving state of the normal symbol is not set (0 is set to the value of the time saving counter 203f). That is, when the "big hit A11" is won in the normal state, the short time state, and the definite change state, the state shifts to the most advantageous latent state. Under the present circumstances, since the number of definite variations is set to 100 times (100 is set to the probable variation counter 203j), at the maximum, from the end of "big hit A11" until the drawing of 100 special symbols is executed In the meantime, an advantageous latent state continues. On the other hand, if the player wins the "big hit A11" in the latent state, the time reduction number is set to 50 (50 is set to the value of the time reduction counter 203f), so after the big hit the lottery of the special symbol is maximum Until it is executed 50 times, it becomes a relatively advantageous probability variation state. Therefore, when the "big hit A11" is won in the gaming state other than the latent state, it is the most advantageous jackpot type in terms of the gaming state. On the other hand, when winning in the latent state, it becomes a jackpot type relatively advantageous in terms of gaming state (convenient than the jackpot type for which the latent state is set, but advantageous over the jackpot type for which the time saving state is set Become).

  Among the 100 random number values (counter values) that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, there are five random number values (counter values) associated with "big hit A11", so the lottery of the first special symbol The rate at which "big hit A11" is determined is 5% (5/100) in the case of a big hit.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 303, "big hit B11" is defined as the big hit type in association with the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "5 to 14". In this "big hit B11", the number of rounds of the big hit is eight rounds, and the big hit after the big hit is a big hit (8 round probability big hit) of the type set to the definite variation state of the special symbol. In the normal state, when the "big hit B11" is won, while the time reduction number is set to 75 times, when the "big hit B11" is won in the time reduction state and the probability change state, the time reduction number is set to 40 times Be done. That is, when the "big hit B11" is won in the normal state, the short time state, and the definite change state, the state shifts to a relatively advantageous positive change state. On the other hand, when the "big hit B11" is won in the latent state, since the number of time saving is set to 0, the gaming state after the big hit is the most advantageous latent state. Therefore, when the "big hit B11" is won in the gaming state other than the latent state, it becomes a relatively advantageous jackpot type in terms of the gaming state. On the other hand, when winning in the latent state, it becomes the most advantageous jackpot type in terms of gaming state.

  Among the 100 random number values (counter values) that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, there are 10 random number values (counter values) associated with the "big hit B11", so the drawing of the first special symbol When the jackpot is hit, the rate at which "jackpot B11" is determined is 10% (10/100).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 303, "big hit C11" is defined as the big hit type in association with the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "15 to 69". In this "big hit C11", the number of rounds of the big hit is eight rounds, and after the big hit end is a big hit (8 round probability big hit) of the type set to the definite variation state of the special symbol. In the normal state, when the "big hit C11" is won, while the time reduction number is set to 50 times, when the "big hit C11" is won in the time reduction state and the probability change state, the time reduction number is set to 25 times Be done. That is, since a smaller number of time reductions are set than in the case of winning the "big hit B11" in the above three gaming states, it is easier to shift to the latent state (normally the game is continuous until the time reduction state is over Easier to do). Therefore, in the normal state, the short time state, and the definite change state, the "big hit C11" is a jackpot type that is more advantageous than the "big hit B11". On the other hand, when the "big hit B11" is won in the latent state, since the number of time saving is set to 0, the gaming state after the big hit is the most advantageous latent state. Therefore, the "big hit C11" is the jackpot type that is the most advantageous in terms of the gaming state when winning in the latent state.

  Among the 100 random number values (counter values) that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, there are 55 random value values (counter values) associated with the "big hit C11", so the lottery of the first special symbol In the case of a jackpot, the rate at which "jackpot C11" is determined is 55% (55/100).

  Moreover, as shown in FIG. 303, the "big hit D11" is defined as the big hit type in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 of "70 to 79". In this "big hit D11", the number of rounds of the big hit is 8 rounds, and the big hit after the big hit is a big hit (8 round true variation big hit) of the type set to the definite variation state of the special symbol. In the normal state, when the "big hit D11" is won, while the time reduction number is set to 25 times, when the "big hit D11" is won in the time reduction state and the probability change state, the time reduction number is set to 10 times Be done. That is, in the above three game states, the time reduction is set to a smaller number of times than in the case of winning the "big hit B11" or "big hit C11", so it becomes easy to shift to the latent state (time saving state of normal symbol ends) Makes it easy to make the disconnection continuous). Therefore, in the normal state, the short time state, and the definite variation state, the "big hit D11" is a jackpot type that is more advantageous than the "big hit B11" or the "big hit C11". On the other hand, in the case of winning the "big hit D11" in the latent state, since the time reduction number is set to 0, the gaming state after the big hit is the most advantageous latent state. Therefore, the "big hit D11" is the jackpot type that is the most advantageous in terms of the gaming state when winning in the latent state.

  Among the 100 random number values (counter values) that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, there are 10 random number values (counter values) associated with the "big hit D11", so the lottery of the first special symbol The rate at which the "big hit D11" is determined is 10% (2/100) when the big hit is made.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 303, the “big hit E11” is defined as the big hit type in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 of “80, 81”. In this "big hit E11", the number of rounds of the big hit is eight rounds, and after the big hit end is a big hit (8 rounds big hit) of the type set to the low probability state of the special symbol. It should be noted that when the "big hit E11" is won in the normal state, the time reduction number is set to 75 times, while the time reduction number is set when the "big hit E11" is won in the time reduction state, the probability change state, and the latent state. It is set to 100 times. The time saving state is a kind of jackpot type which is disadvantageous for the player because the time saving state only shifts to the normal state (there is no transition to the advantageous latency state) even after the number of times of time saving.

  Among the 100 random number values (counter values) that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, there are two random number values (counter values) associated with the "big hit E11", so the lottery of the first special symbol When the jackpot is hit, the rate at which the "jackpot E11" is determined is 2% (2/100).

  Also, as shown in FIG. 303, the "big hit F11" is defined as the big hit type in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 of "82 to 98". In this "big hit F11", the number of rounds of the big hit is 8 rounds, and after the big hit end is a big hit (8 rounds big hit) of the type set to the low probability state of the special symbol. It should be noted that if the "big hit F11" is won in the normal state, while the time reduction number is set to 50 times, if the "big hit F11" is won in the time reduction state, the probability change state, and the latent state, the time reduction number is It is set to 100 times. Therefore, the "big hit F11" is a big hit type that is more disadvantageous than the "big hit E11" in the normal state, and is a big hit of the same degree of advantage as the "big hit E11" in the short time state, the definite change state, and the latent state. .

  Among the 100 random number values (counter values) that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, there are 17 random number values (counter values) associated with the "big hit F11", so the lottery of the first special symbol In the case of a jackpot, the rate at which "jackpot F11" is determined is 17% (17/100).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 303, the “big hit G11” is defined as the big hit type in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 of “99”. In this "big hit G11", the number of rounds of the big hit is 8 rounds, and after the big hit end is a big hit (8 rounds big hit) of the type set to the low probability state of the special symbol. It should be noted that when the "big hit G11" is won in the normal state, while the time reduction number is set to 25 times, when the "big hit G11" is won in the time reduction state, the probability change state, and the latent state, the time reduction number is It is set to 100 times. Therefore, "big hit G11" is a big hit type that is more disadvantageous than "big hit E11" or "big hit F11" in the normal state, and "big hit E11" or "big hit F11" in the time saving state, the probability changing state, and the latent state. The jackpot of the same degree of advantage.

  Among the 100 random number values (counter values) that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, one random number value (counter value) is associated with the "big hit G11", so the lottery of the first special symbol In the case of a jackpot, the rate at which "jackpot G11" is determined is 1% (1/100).

  As described above, in the eleventh embodiment, as a jackpot of the first special symbol, a probability change jackpot in which 75 times, 50 times, and 25 times of the time reduction are set when winning in the normal state as a jackpot of the first special symbol (“big hit B11” A "big hit D11") and a regular big hit ("big hit E11" to "big hit G11") in which 75 times, 50 times, and 25 times of time reduction are set are provided. That is, the timing at which the time saving state of the normal symbol ends is configured as three patterns of 75 times, 50 times, and 25 times after the big hit end. By configuring in this way, transition to the latent state every time when the drawing of the special symbol of 25 times, 50 times and 75 times is executed after the time saving state of the normal symbol is set Can be expected. Thus, the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  Further, in the eleventh embodiment, the ratio of jackpots for which the number of time-savings is set to 25 is usually very low (1%) in the distribution of jackpots. As a result, it is difficult to determine the jackpot type most disadvantageous to the player (there is little possibility of shifting to the latent state due to the small number of time reductions), so it is possible to suppress the player from becoming too disadvantageous. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's motivation for the game. In addition, the ratio of the normal jackpot (jackpot E11) in which the number of time saving is set to 75 times is also configured to be relatively low (2%). As a result, it is possible to improve the sense of expectation for the probability change state at the time when the number of time reductions exceeds 50 times (that is, when the continuation is notified in the second river breakthrough effect). Therefore, even if the transition to the latent state is not notified in the second river breakthrough production (that is, even if the continuation is informed), the expectation for the next (that is, the third time) river breakthrough production is It can be improved.

  Further, in the eleventh embodiment, in the time saving state or the probability changing state, when winning in a probability changing jackpot (that is, consecutive) is less than that in the normal state when it is a large hitting (that is, a so-called first hitting). The configuration is such that the time saving number is set. That is, it is configured that it is easier to establish the termination condition of the time saving state of the ordinary symbol when the probability changing big win in the time saving state or the probability changing state is won than in winning the probability changing big hit in the normal state. In other words, it is configured to be more likely to shift to the latent state if one wins a probability change jackpot during the time saving state of the normal symbol. As a result, the player can have a sense of approaching the latent state as the jackpot is won in the time saving state of the normal symbol, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved. .

  In addition, when it is normally elected in the time saving state or the probability variation state, 100 times is set as the number of time saving times regardless of the big hit type. In this way, it is possible to increase the degree of advantage in the case of a normal jackpot which is disadvantageous in the time saving state or the probability changing state (that is, it does not shift to the latent state even if the ending condition of the time saving state of the symbol is satisfied). Therefore, even when becoming a big hit, even if it becomes a big hit, it is possible to increase the degree of advantage in the case where so-called twins occur rather than the so-called first hit, so twins occur This can further improve the player's sense of expectation in the case where

  Moreover, as shown in FIG. 303, as the jackpot type of the second special symbol (special figure 1), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "big hit H11 as a big hit type" with respect to the range of "0 to 74". Are defined in association with each other. In this "big hit H11", the number of rounds of the big hit is 16 rounds, and the big hit after the big hit is a big hit (16 round positive variation big hit) of the type set to the definite variation state of the special symbol. In the non-latency state, when the "big hit H11" is won, while the time reduction number is set to 100 times, when the "lump hit H11" is won in the latent state, the time reduction number is 0 times It is set. In other words, if you win the "big hit H11" in a gaming state other than the latent state, while the gaming state after the big hit is set to a definite change state, if you win the "big hit H11" in the latent state, after the big hit The game state of is set to the latent state.

  Among the 100 random number values (counter values) that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, there are 75 random number values (counter values) associated with the "big hit H11", so the lottery for the second special symbol When the jackpot is hit, the rate at which "jackpot H11" is determined is 75% (75/100).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 303, "big hit I11" is defined as the big hit type in association with the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "75 to 79". In this "big hit I11", the number of rounds of the big hit is 16 rounds, and the big hit after the big hit is a big hit (16 round positive variation big hit) of the type set to the definite variation state of the special symbol. In the non-latency state, when the "big hit I11" is won, while the time reduction number is set to 100 times, in the latency state, if the "big hit I11" is won, the time reduction number is 50 times. It is set. That is, when the "big hit I11" is won, the gaming state after the big hit is set to the definite change state regardless of the playing state at the time of winning.

  Since there are five random number values (counter values) associated with the "big hit I11" among the 100 random number values (counter values) that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the lottery of the second special symbol The rate at which "big hit H11" is determined is 5% (5/100) when the big hit is made.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 303, "big hit J11" is defined as the big hit type in association with the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "80 to 99". In this "big hit J11", the number of rounds of the big hit is 16 rounds, and after the big hit end is the big hit (16 rounds big hit) of the type set to the low probability state of the special symbol. In the non-latency state, when the "big hit J11" is won, while the time reduction number is set to 0 times, in the latent state, when the "big hit J11" is won, the time reduction number is 100 times. It is set. That is, when winning in "big hit J11" in the gaming state other than the latent state, after the big hit is set to the normal state while after winning in the latent state is "gaming J11", the gaming state after the big hit ends The time saving state is set.

  Among the 100 random number values (counter values) that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, there are 20 random number values (counter values) associated with the "big hit J11", so the lottery of the second special symbol When the jackpot is hit, the rate at which "jackpot J11" is determined is 20% (20/100).

  As described above, in the eleventh embodiment, when a jackpot occurs in the second special symbol drawing in the gaming state other than the latent state, the gaming state after the jackpot is relatively disadvantageously configured. . This is intended to suppress the irregular game method in which the right-handed game is performed and the lottery of the second special symbol is executed even though the game is not in the latent state. That is, in the jackpot of the second special symbol won in a gaming state other than the latent state, if the same gaming state as the latent state is set, the lottery of the second special symbol is intentionally made by hitting the right. Depending on the game method to be executed by the player, the transition to the most advantageous latent state will be made at a high rate of 75%, which will be excessively advantageous for the player. On the other hand, in the eleventh embodiment, even if the player makes a big hit in the gaming state where the left-handed game should be performed, there is no possibility of shifting to the latent state (ie, the time reduction As the definite change condition is ended at the same time, the definite change condition is set, or the most disadvantageous normal condition is set, so it is more disadvantageous for the player to win the jackpot in the second special symbol lottery . Therefore, it is possible to suppress the irregular game method in which the right hitting is performed in the gaming state where the left hitting game should be performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 304, details of the fluctuation pattern selection table 202f in the eleventh embodiment will be described. This variation pattern selection table 202f determines the variation pattern (variation time) of the variation display from the value (random number value) of the variation type counter CS1 as in the variation pattern selection table 202f (see FIG. 17) in the first embodiment. It is a data table for In the eleventh embodiment, in the fluctuation pattern selection table 202f, the prescribed contents of the time reduction / probability change table 202f2 and the latency confirmation table 202f3 are partially changed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 304 (a), the time-shortening / probability-variation table 202f2 in the eleventh embodiment is different from the time-shortening / probability table 202f2 (see FIG. 19 (a)) in the first embodiment, When the first special symbol is hit, the variation time is shortened (10 seconds to 20 seconds). In addition, as a fluctuation pattern at the time of the first special symbol deviation, a fluctuation time of 1 second, a fluctuation of 10 seconds, a middle fluctuation, and a fluctuation time of 15 seconds of super fluctuation are provided. There is. As a result, it is possible to improve the gaming efficiency in the time saving state or the probability changing state, and to diversify the fluctuation pattern at the time of disconnection. Further, since the average variation time is shorter than the normal state (see FIG. 18), it is possible to improve the gaming efficiency in the gaming state in which the time saving state of the normal symbol is set. In addition, about the fluctuation pattern of a 2nd special symbol, it is comprised so that 60 seconds may be set irrespective of a lottery result similarly to 1st Embodiment. As a result, since the gaming efficiency can be deteriorated when right hitting is performed in a short time state or a definite changing state where left hitting game should be performed, anomalous to perform right hitting game in gaming state where left hitting game should be performed It is possible to suppress the gaming method.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 304 (b), the variation pattern (variation time) of the first special symbol in the latency table 202f3j in the eleventh embodiment is the same as the time reduction / probability variation table 202f2. On the other hand, for the variation pattern of the second special symbol, a variation pattern of one second is set regardless of the lottery result. Therefore, when the game shifts to the latent state and the right-handed game is played, the small hitting game is executed at relatively short intervals (about one second intervals), so that the first specified winning opening 65a is frequently opened. , You can win the prize ball frequently. Thus, the player's degree of advantage in the latent state can be improved.

  As described above, in the eleventh embodiment, in the latent state, the jackpot probability increases, and the first specified winning opening 65a is opened at an interval of one second, which is a very advantageous gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to make the player play a game with one goal being to shift to the latent state. Thus, the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 305, the configuration of the RAM 203 provided in the main control device 110 in the eleventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 305 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203 in the eleventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 305, in the configuration of the RAM 203 in the eleventh embodiment, a probability variation counter 203ja is added instead of the probability variation flag 203g with respect to the configuration (see FIG. 21) of the RAM 203 in the first embodiment. There is a difference in points.

  The probability variation counter 203 ja is a counter for counting the number of lottery times of the remaining special symbols until termination of the probability variation state of the special symbol. If the value of the probability variation counter 203ja is 1 or more, it indicates that the special symbol is in the probability variation state, and if the value is 0, it indicates that the special symbol is in the low probability status. The probability change counter 203ja has an initial value set to 0, and the value is set to 0 when the jackpot is won. Then, if the winning jackpot is a probability variation jackpot, 100 is set as a value at the end of the probability variation jackpot. In addition, while the value of the probability variation counter 203ja is 1 or more, the value is updated by being decremented by 1 each time a special symbol lottery is newly executed (see S623 in FIG. 310). When a lottery of special symbols is executed, the value of the probability variation counter 203ja is referred to to determine whether or not it is a probability variation state, and a table for making a jackpot determination (first random number for high probability time random number A table or one of the first random number tables for low probability times is selected.

  Next, a method of state transition of the pachinko machine 10 realized by performing control based on various tables defined in the ROM 202 and various flags and counters provided in the RAM 203 will be described with reference to FIG. 306. explain. FIG. 306 is a view showing a method of state transition of the pachinko machine 10 in the eleventh embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 306, the pachinko machine 10 of the eleventh embodiment is roughly classified into four gaming states. That is, the normal state shown at the top of FIG. 306, the positive variation shown at the center left of FIG. 306, the short time shown at the center right of FIG. 306, and the latent state shown at the bottom of FIG. It is provided.

  The normal state, as described above, indicates the low probability state of the special symbol and the normal state of the normal symbol, the probability of becoming a big hit is low, and the electric character 64a is difficult to be released 1) It is difficult for the player to enter the ball slot 64b2. Also, as described above, the definite change state indicates that the special symbol is in a special change state, and the normal symbol is in a short time state, and the jackpot probability is high, and by performing a left-handed game, the lower first ball entry slot Since the gaming ball frequently enters 64 (the motorized character 64a is frequently opened), the gaming state is relatively advantageous to the player. In addition, the time saving state indicates the low probability state of the special symbol and the time saving state of the normal symbol, and although the jackpot probability is low, by performing the left hitting game, the same as the probability changing state, the first Since the game ball frequently enters the ball entrance 640, a game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state is formed. Furthermore, as described above, the latent state indicates that the special symbol is in a definite variation state and the normal symbol is in the normal state, and the jackpot probability is high and the second special symbol lottery is executed. The fluctuation time to be set is significantly shorter than the other three gaming states (60 seconds → 1 second), so making the right-hand game allows the lottery of the second special symbol to be executed efficiently Can. And, as described above, in the second special symbol lottery, the player wins a small hit with a high probability (59/60) and the first specified winning opening 64a is opened, so just by playing a right-handed game, The game ball frequently enters the second entrance 640 and the first specified winning opening 64a to form an extremely advantageous game state in which a large number of winning balls can be obtained without going through a jackpot. Thus, the latent state is the most advantageous game state for the player.

  As shown at the top of FIG. 306, there is a possibility that transition from the normal state to another state is made only when the jackpot occurs. Specifically, as shown in the upper part of FIG. 306, when the jackpot A11 which is the jackpot of the first special symbol and is determined by the proportion of 5% as the jackpot type is selected (decided), the latency after the jackpot end Move to the definite state. Therefore, since the jackpot A11 directly shifts to the most advantageous latent state, the jackpot A11 is a jackpot of the type that is most pleasing to the player in the normal state. In addition, it becomes the jackpot of the first special symbol, and if any of jackpots B11 to D11 determined at a rate of 75% is selected (decided) as a jackpot type, it becomes a relatively advantageous probability change state after the jackpot end. Transition. Furthermore, it becomes a big hit of the first special symbol, and when any of the big hit E11 to G11 determined at a rate of 20% as the big hit type is selected, it shifts to the time saving state after the big hit ends. In addition, as described above, when the probability change state and the time reduction state are set as the game state after the big hit end, it is configured that it becomes difficult to recognize which game state is set (any game state) However, the river breakthrough effect is executed at the same timing). Therefore, it is possible to play a game paying attention to the result of the river breakthrough effect.

  Also, as shown on the center left side of FIG. 306, there is a possibility of transition to another gaming state from the definite change state to another state also when the time saving state of the normal symbol is finished as well as when the big hit is reached. is there. Specifically, when a jackpot A11 which is determined to be a jackpot in the probability change state and which is determined at a rate of 5% is selected, a transition to an advantageous latent state is made after the jackpot end. In addition, when the jackpot E11 to G11 determined at a rate of 20% is selected, the gaming state after the jackpot end is set to the short time state. On the other hand, if the time saving state of the normal symbol is finished before winning the jackpot, it shifts to the most advantageous latent state. On the other hand, when it becomes either of the jackpot B11 to D11 determined by the ratio of 75% as the jackpot type of the first special symbol, the gaming state after the jackpot end is again set to the definite change state ( Loop over the conviction state). In other words, in the definite change state, even if the jackpot is won, the transition to the advantageous latency state is made only with a low probability (5% rate), so it is better for the player to pass the time-saving number for latency. It can be felt that it is easy to shift to the state. Therefore, it is possible to realize the novel game characteristic that the disconnection is expected to continue for the set number of times. In addition, as described above, the transition is based on having won the probability change jackpot in the probability change state or the time saving state rather than the probability change state shifted based on having won the probability change jackpot in the normal state (the first change after the first hit). It is configured such that the average value of the set number of times of time reduction is smaller in the case of the positive change state (the positive change state after transition). That is, while the average of the number of time-savings set at the first hit is 50 times, the average of the number of time-savings set at the time of occurrence is 25 times. Therefore, since it is easier to cause the time reduction to occur more frequently at the time of occurrence of consecutive houses, even if the jackpot is won before the time reduction occurs in the definite change state, even if the positive change state is looped, Since it is highly possible that the time reduction number (small number of times reduction number) which is easy to shift to the latent state is set, it is possible to alleviate the discouragement of the player. Thus, the player's motivation for the game can be suppressed from being lowered.

  Also, as shown on the center right side of FIG. 306, there is a possibility that transition to the other game state may be made also from the time saving state to another state when the time saving state of the normal symbol is finished besides the big hit. is there. Specifically, if a jackpot A11, which is determined to be 5%, is selected as a jackpot in the short time state, it shifts to an advantageous latent state after the jackpot end. In addition, when the jackpot B11 to D11 determined at a rate of 75% is selected, the gaming state after the jackpot end is set to the probability change state. On the other hand, if the time saving state of the normal symbol ends before winning the jackpot, it shifts to the most disadvantageous normal state. On the other hand, when it becomes either of the jackpot E11 to G11 determined by the ratio of 20% as the jackpot type of the first special symbol, the gaming state after the jackpot end is set again in the time saving state ( Loop time saving state). That is, in the time saving state, since it shifts to the disadvantageous normal state even if the number of times of the normal symbol has passed, it is more advantageous to win the jackpot. In addition, as described above, it is difficult to distinguish from the contents of the effects, etc. whether the time reduction state of the normal symbol is set or the positive change state is set, so the time reduction state is set. In the meantime, it can be expected that it is a definite change state. That is, it can be expected that the number of time-saving times of the normal symbol will elapse. Thus, the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  Also, as shown in the lower part of FIG. 306, from the latent state to another state, there may be a transition to another gaming state also when the number of definite variations has passed, in addition to when the jackpot is reached. Specifically, in the latent state, when the jackpot of the second special symbol is a big hit, and a big hit I11 determined at a rate of 5% is selected, the state is shifted to the positive change state after the big hit ends. In addition, when the jackpot J11 determined at a rate of 20% is selected, the gaming state after the jackpot end is set to the short time state. On the other hand, if the number of definite variations ends before winning the jackpot, it shifts to the most disadvantageous normal state. On the other hand, when it becomes the jackpot H11 determined at a rate of 75% when it becomes the jackpot in the second special symbol lottery, the gaming state after the jackpot end is set to the latent state again ( Loop the latent state). That is, in the latent state, by winning the jackpot before the number of definite variations elapses, it is possible to loop the advantageous latent state at a high rate (proportion of 75%), so after transitioning to the latent state Can play the game while expecting to be a big hit.

  As described above, in the eleventh embodiment, while it is possible to realize the game property which is expected to be continuous in the definite change state, the game property which is expected to be a big hit in the latent state is realized. can do. Thus, the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  Next, the configuration of the ROM 222 provided in the audio lamp control device 113 in the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 307 (a). FIG. 307 (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 222 in the eleventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 307 (a), the configuration of the ROM 222 in the eleventh embodiment is different from the configuration (see FIG. 22 (a)) of the ROM 222 in the first embodiment on the small hit effect selection table 222ja and the winnings. The difference is that a sound selection table 222jb is added.

  The small hitting effect selection table 222ja is a data table that is referred to in order to select the type of the small hitting effect during execution of the small hitting game when a small hit is won in the second special symbol lottery. As described above, when the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are executed in an overlapping manner (simultaneously), such as immediately after the transition to the latent state, this small hitting effect is Depending on the type, it is possible to suggest the lottery result of the first special symbol. The details of the small hitting effect selection table 222ja will be described later with reference to FIG. 308 (a).

  The winning sound selection table 222jb is a data table that is referred to in order to select a winning sound to be output when a winning on the specific winning opening 65a is detected during execution of the small hitting game. In the eleventh embodiment, the lottery result of the first special symbol can be suggested (notified) also by the winning sound output during the small hitting game. As a result, the player can be made to play the game paying attention not only to the small hit effect but also to the winning sound, so that the interest of the player in the game can be improved. The details of the winning sound selection table 222jb will be described later with reference to FIG. 308 (b).

  Next, details of the above-mentioned small hitting effect selection table 222ja will be described with reference to FIG. 308 (a). FIG. 308 (a) shows the defined content of this small hitting effect selection table 222ja. As shown in FIG. 308 (a), in the small hitting effect selection table 222ja, the type of winning information of the first special symbol (data stored in the storage area corresponding to the first special symbol in the winning information storage area 223b The range of the counter value of the effect counter (effect lottery counter) 223h and the effect mode of the small hitting effect are defined in association with each type of.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 308 (a), when data indicating a big hit is stored in the execution area as the winning information of the first special symbol (ie, the variation of the first special symbol being executed) In the case where the display is a big hit), the normal effect mode (see FIG. 7B) is defined in association with the range of “0 to 69” of the value of the effect counter 223 h, “70 to 89” With respect to the range of, the presentation mode for the middle expectation is defined in association, and the presentation mode for the high expectation (see FIG. 301) is defined in association with the range of “90 to 99”. There is. Therefore, 70% (70/100) and 20% of the proportions in which the normal performance mode, the performance mode for middle expectation, and the performance mode for high expectation are selected during the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol, respectively (20/100), and 10% (10/100).

  Also, as shown in FIG. 308 (a), when the data indicating the big hit is stored in the area other than the execution area as the winning information of the first special symbol (the big hit is included in the holding ball of the first special symbol) And when the data indicating the super fluctuation is stored in the execution area (the fluctuation display of the first special symbol being executed is out of the super fluctuation), the value of the effect counter 223h is “0 to 84”. With respect to the range of, the normal effect mode (refer to FIG. 7 (b)) is defined in association with the range of “85 to 97”, and the effect mode for middle expectation degree is defined in association with An effect mode for high expectation (see FIG. 301) is defined in association with the range of “98, 99”. Therefore, when a big hit is included in the holding ball of the first special symbol, or when the out-of-the-spot super fluctuation of the first special symbol is being executed, the normal presentation mode, the presentation mode for middle expectation, and the high The proportions in which the presentation mode for the expectation is selected are 85% (85/100), 13% (13/100), and 2% (2/100), respectively. That is, the selection ratio of the stage for the high expectation and the mode for the middle expectation is decreased and the selection for the normal mode is increased as compared with the case where the first special symbol is in the jackpot variation. It is done. Therefore, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed at the time when the presentation mode for high expectation or the presentation mode for middle expectation is executed, the variable display of the first special symbol indicates a big hit. It is possible to make the expectation of being a fluctuating display more strongly. Therefore, it is possible to play the game paying attention to the small hitting effect.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 308 (a), when there is neither the execution of the jackpot variation of the first special symbol nor the execution of the outlier super fluctuation, and the jackpot of the first special symbol is not included in the jackpot The normal effect aspect (refer FIG.7 (b)) is matched with respect to the range of "0-94" of the value of the production counter 223h, and it prescribes | regulates with respect to the range of "95-98." The mode of presentation for the middle expectation is defined in association, and the mode of presentation for the high expectation (see FIG. 301) is defined in association with "99". Therefore, even when the jackpot variation of the first special symbol is not being executed, the out-of-order super fluctuation is not being executed, and when the jackpot of the first special symbol is not included, the normal presentation mode, middle expectation The proportions in which the presentation mode for high expectation and the presentation mode for high expectation are selected are 95% (95/100), 4% (4/100), and 1% (1/100), respectively. That is, the selection ratio of the presentation mode for the high expectation and the middle expectation than in the case where the jackpot fluctuation or the outlier super fluctuation of the first special symbol is being executed, or the jackpot is included in the hold. Is selected so as to increase the selection ratio of the normal effect mode. Therefore, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed at the time when the presentation aspect for high expectation or the presentation aspect for middle expectation is executed, and when the holding ball of the first special symbol exists, The game can be played in anticipation that the running variable display is a jackpot or the jackpot is included in the hold. Therefore, since it is possible to realize the game characteristic that predicts the lottery result of the first special symbol from the effect mode of the small hitting effect for every small hit in the second special symbol lottery, it is possible for the player to enjoy the game It can be improved.

  Here, conventionally, every time a lottery result of a special symbol is executed, a gaming machine is widely known which executes variable display effect of a symbol for indicating the lottery result. In the related-art gaming machine, the interest of the player is improved by executing various types of interest effects that suggest the lottery result of the special symbol while the variable display effect of the symbol is being executed. However, in the gaming machine of the specification that can execute a plurality of variable displays simultaneously, while focusing on the effect mode associated with one of the variable displays, there is a problem that the effect mode in the other variable display effect is overlooked There was a point. In particular, in a game machine of a type in which one variable display is displayed in a mode that is easier to view than the other, it becomes difficult to confirm the presentation mode in the other (the less visible side) variable display. If the jackpot is started while the player is not paying attention, there is a problem that the player may be confused.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the eleventh embodiment, the variable display of the second special symbol mainly executed in the latent state is given priority over the variable display of the first special symbol which is difficult to be executed ( When the variation display of the first special symbol is being executed together while displaying it in an easy manner), the drawing of the first special symbol by the small hitting effect of the second special symbol (representation aspect accompanying the variation display) It has a configuration that suggests the results. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to confirm the expectation of becoming a jackpot in the lottery of the first special symbol only by paying attention to the effect mode accompanying the variable display of the second special symbol. Therefore, the convenience of the player can be improved.

  In the eleventh embodiment, the display mode in the small hitting effect of the second special symbol is configured to indicate the expectation that the lottery result of the first special symbol simultaneously executed is a big hit, but It is not limited. For example, the lottery result of the first special symbol may be suggested by the effect mode of the effect to be executed during the variable display of the second special symbol. In addition, for example, as a configuration that suggests (informs) an expectation that the lottery result of the first special symbol or the lottery result of the second special symbol becomes a big hit by the display mode of the variation display of the normal symbol in the second symbol display device. Good. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suggest to the player the result of the variable display effect on the hard-to-see side only by confirming the variable display effect on the easy-to-see side, thus realizing a more easy-to-understand effect can do. Therefore, the convenience of the player can be improved.

  Next, details of the winning sound selection table 222jb will be described with reference to FIG. 308 (b). As described above, the winning sound selection table 222jb is a data table to be referred to for selecting a winning sound to be output when a winning on the specific winning opening 65a is detected during execution of the small hitting game. As shown in FIG. 308 (b), in the winning sound selection table 222jb, the effect counter for each of the types of winning information in the execution area of the first special symbol (the variation type of the variation display of the first special symbol in execution). The range of the counter value of (the effect lottery counter) 223h and the type of the winning sound (one of the three types of the normal sound, the chance sound, and the determined sound) are defined in association with each other. The normal sound is composed of relatively short and plain voice (for example, the sound of "Chalin"), and the chance sound is longer than the normal sound and that of the loud voice (for example, "Jakine") The determined sound is composed of the most loud voice (for example, a voice called "dockern") among the three types. Although the details will be described later, the determination sound is a special voice that is output only when the gaming ball enters (winning) the first specified winning opening 65a during the jackpot fluctuation.

  As shown in FIG. 308 (b), when the jackpot variation of the first special symbol is being executed, the normal sound is used as a winning sound for the range of the effect lottery counter 223h of "0 to 79". The chance sound is defined as the winning sound in association with the range of "80 to 98", and the definite sound is defined as the winning sound in association with "99". Therefore, when the winning of the first specified winning opening 65a is detected during execution of the jackpot variation of the first special symbol, the ratio that the normal sound, the chance sound, and the determined sound are output is 80%, 19%, respectively. And 1%. As mentioned above, definitive sounds are special sounds that are only selected during the execution of a jackpot variation. Therefore, when the determination sound is output, it is possible to give the player great pleasure. Thus, the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 308 (b), when out-of-focus super fluctuation of the first special symbol is being executed, the value of the effect lottery counter 223h is a winning sound for the range of “0 to 89”. The normal sound is defined in association with each other, and the chance sound is defined in association with the range of "90 to 99" as the winning sound. On the other hand, the value of the effect counter 223h is not associated with the determined sound. Therefore, when the winning of the first specified winning opening 65a is detected during execution of the first special symbol out-of-the-spot super fluctuation, the ratio of the normal sound, the chance sound, and the determined sound being output is 90% and 10%, respectively. , And 0%. That is, the rate at which the chance sound is output is reduced (approximately half) and the rate at which the normal sound is output is increased as compared to the case of the jackpot fluctuation. And there is no possibility that a definite sound will be output.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 308 (b), when the execution of the jackpot variation of the first special symbol is not performed nor the execution of the outlier super variation, the value of the effect lottery counter 223h is in the range of "0 to 94". The normal sound is defined as the winning sound in association with each other, and the chance sound is defined as the winning sound in the range of “95 to 99”. On the other hand, the value of the effect counter 223h is not associated with the determined sound. Therefore, when the winning of the first specific winning opening 65a is detected during the execution of the first special symbol out-of-the-spot super fluctuation, the ratio of the normal sound, the chance sound, and the determined sound being output is 95% and 5%, respectively. , And 0%. That is, the output ratio of the chance sound is further decreased and the output ratio of the normal sound is further increased, as compared to the case where the out-of-order super fluctuation is being performed. Therefore, when the chance sound is output, it is possible to improve the expectation for the execution of the jackpot fluctuation. In addition, since the determination sound is output to determine that the jackpot variation is being performed, it is possible to bring great pleasure to the player. Therefore, since it is possible to play the game paying attention not only to the small hit effect but also to the winning sound outputted during the small hit game, it is possible to further improve the interest of the player in the game.

  Next, the details of the RAM 223 provided in the audio lamp control device 113 in the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 307 (b). FIG. 307 (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223 in the eleventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 307 (b), the configuration of the RAM 223 in the eleventh embodiment is the variation frequency counter 223ja and the first hit flag with respect to the configuration of the RAM 223 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 22 (b)). The difference is that 223 jb is added.

  The fluctuation number counter 223ja is a counter for counting the fluctuation number (lottery number) of the special symbol. The variation number counter 223ja has an initial value set to 0, and is incremented by one each time the variation display effect start timing is reached (that is, each time a variation pattern command is received from main controller 110). And updated (see S5121 and S5125 in FIG. 314). Also, it is reset to 0 at the end of the big hit (see S4422 in FIG. 312). In the gaming state (probable variation state, time saving state) in which the time saving state of the normal symbol is set, it is determined whether or not the river breakthrough effect can be performed with reference to the value of the fluctuation number counter 223ja (S5132 and S5133 in FIG. 315). reference).

  The first hit flag 223jb is a flag indicating whether or not the time saving state of the normal symbol set after the first hit. If this first hit flag is on, it means that it is during the time saving state of the normal symbol set after the first hit, and if it is off, it means that it is not the time saving state after the first hit. In the time saving state of the normal symbol, the first hit flag 223jb is referred to each time the start timing of the variation display effect of the special symbol, and whether it is a time saving state after the first hit, or in the time saving state after the consecutive villa occurrence It is determined whether there is any. Then, in the case of the time saving state after the first hit, the river breakthrough effect is set at the start of the fluctuation display of the 24th, 49th and 74th times after the big hit end (see S5132 in FIG. 315). On the other hand, in the case of a time-saving state after the occurrence of consecutive houses, the river breakthrough effect is set at the start of the variable display of 9, 24 and 39 times (S 5133 in FIG. 315). This is, as described above, the number of times that the time saving state of the normal symbol may end in the time shortening state of the normal symbol set after the first hit and the time shortening state of the normal symbol being set after the series (special This is because the number of lottery times of symbols is different.

Regarding Control Processing of Main Controller in Eleventh Embodiment
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 according to the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 309 to 311. First, with reference to FIG. 309, the first special symbol jackpot determination process 12 (S321) in the eleventh embodiment will be described. The first special symbol jackpot determination process 12 (S321) is a process that is executed instead of the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 34) in the first embodiment, and the first special symbol in the first embodiment Similar to the jackpot determination process (see FIG. 34), based on the gaming state set based on the value of the first random number counter C1 shifted to the execution area of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, It is a process for executing the jackpot determination of whether or not the jackpot.

  In the first special symbol jackpot determination process 12 (see FIG. 309) in the eleventh embodiment, control content is changed by providing the probability variation counter 203 ja in place of the probability variation flag 203 g in the first embodiment. More specifically, in the processing of S401, S403 to S410, and S412 in the first special symbol jackpot determination process 12 (see FIG. 309) in the eleventh embodiment, the first special symbol jackpot in the first embodiment is respectively generated. The same processing as each processing of S401, S403 to S410, and S412 in the determination processing (see FIG. 34) is executed. Further, in the first special symbol big hit determination process 12 (see FIG. 309) in the eleventh embodiment, when the process of S401 ends, the value of the probability variation counter 203ja is a value larger than 0 (ie, a value of 1 or more). If it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203ja is larger than 0 (S421: Yes), the process proceeds to S403. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S421 that the value of the probability variation counter 203ja is 0 (S421: No), the process proceeds to S404.

  In addition, although illustration was abbreviate | omitted, the same change is given to control content also about the 2nd special symbol big hit determination processing (refer FIG. 40).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 310, the details of the gaming state update process 12 (S322) in the eleventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 310 is a flowchart showing the game state update process 12 (S322) in the eleventh embodiment. This game state update process 12 (S322) is a process that is executed instead of the game state update process (see FIG. 36) in the first embodiment, and the game state update process (see FIG. 36) in the first embodiment Similarly, the processing is for updating the state of the pachinko machine 10 by updating various flags and counters indicating the state of the pachinko machine 10.

  In the gaming state update process 12 (S322) in the eleventh embodiment, the control content is changed by providing the probability variation counter 203ja in place of the probability variation flag 203g in the first embodiment. More specifically, in each processing of S601 to S604, S606, and S607 in the gaming state update processing 12 (S322) in the eleventh embodiment, the gaming state update processing in the first embodiment (see FIG. 36). The same processing as each processing of S601 to S604, S606, and S607 is executed.

  Further, in the gaming state update process 12 (see FIG. 310) in the eleventh embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S604 that the value of the time reduction counter 203f is a value larger than 0 (S604: Yes) It is determined whether or not the value of the counter 203ja is greater than 0 (S621). If it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203ja is greater than 0 (S621: Yes), the process proceeds to S606. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203ja is 0 (S621: No), the process proceeds to S607.

  Further, in the gaming state update process 12 (see FIG. 310) in the eleventh embodiment, when the process of S606 or S607 ends, next, it is determined whether or not the value of the probability variation counter 203ja is a value larger than 0. (S622), when it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203ja is a value greater than 0 (ie, a value of 1 or more) (S622: Yes), next, the value of the probability variation counter 203ja is decremented by 1 and updated (S623), the remaining certainty variation number command indicating the value of the probability variation counter 203ja after the update is set (S624). When the process of S624 is completed, it is then determined whether or not the value of the probability variation counter 203ja updated in the process of S623 has become 0 (S625), and it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203ja has become 0 ( S625: Yes) A state command indicating that the state has shifted to the normal state is set (S626), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203ja is 0 in the processing of S622 (S622: No) and when it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203ja is not 0 in the processing of S625. Ends the process as it is.

  Next, details of the second winning process 12 (S 2521) in the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 311 is a flow chart showing the second winning process 12 (S 2521) in the eleventh embodiment. The second winning process 12 (S2521) is a process that is executed instead of the second winning process (see FIG. 57) in the first embodiment, and the second winning process (see FIG. 57) in the first embodiment Similarly, it is a process for performing control corresponding to the winning of the first specified winning opening 65a detected during the execution of the small hitting game.

  Of the second winning process 12 (see FIG. 311) in the eleventh embodiment, in each of the processes of S2701 to S2707, each process of S2701 to S2707 in the second winning process (see FIG. 57) in the first embodiment and The same process is performed. In addition, in the second winning process 12 (see FIG. 311) in the eleventh embodiment, when the process of S2704 is finished, the voice lamp control that the winning of the first specified winning opening 65a is detected during execution of the small hitting game A small hit winning command for notifying the device 113 is set (S2711), and the process proceeds to S2705.

  The small hit winning command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S2201) of the main process (see FIG. 52) executed by the MPU 201, voice lamp control It is sent to the device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the small hitting winning command, it refers to the winning information of the first special symbol and the value of the effect counter 223h, and wins from the winning sound selection table 222jb (see FIG. 308 (b)). Select a sound and set the selected winning sound output. As a result, the result of the variable display of the first special symbol can be suggested by the type of the winning sound every time a winning to the first specified winning opening 65a occurs in the small hitting game of the second special symbol. Thus, the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

<About control processing of voice lamp control device in eleventh embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 312 to 316. First, referring to FIG. 312, state command processing 12 (S4231) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the eleventh embodiment will be described. The state command process 12 (S4231) in the eleventh embodiment is a process executed instead of the state command process (see FIG. 62) in the first embodiment, and the state command process (see FIG. 62) in the first embodiment. Is the process for setting the current gaming state in the state setting area 223 j based on the state command output from the main control device 110.

  Of the status command processing 12 (see FIG. 312) in the eleventh embodiment, S4401 to S4406 in the status command processing (see FIG. 62) in the first embodiment are respectively performed in the processing of S4401 to S4406, S4410, and S4411. The same processing as each processing of S4410 and S4411 is executed. Further, in the state command processing 12 (see FIG. 312) in the eleventh embodiment, when the process of S4401 ends, then, whether or not the current state command is a state command for indicating the gaming state after the big hit ends Is determined (S4421), and when it is determined that the command is a state command for indicating the gaming state after the big hit ends (S4421: Yes), the value of the fluctuation number counter 223ja is reset to 0 (S4422).

  When the process of S4422 is completed, it is next determined whether the gaming state at the time of jackpot win (the gaming state determined in the process of S4401) is the normal state (S4423) and the gaming state at the jackpot win is the normal state. When it is determined that (S4423: Yes), the first hit flag 223jb is set to ON (S4424), and the process proceeds to S4436. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4423 that the gaming state at the time of the big hit is not the normal state (S4423: No), the first hit flag 223jb is set to OFF (S4425), and the process proceeds to S4426. .

  In the process of S4426 executed after the process of S4424 or S4425, a value corresponding to the gaming state notified by the state command is set in the state setting area 223j (S4426), and the process proceeds to S4402. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4421 that the state command received this time is not the state command for indicating the gaming state after the big hit (S4421: No), the processes of S4422 to S4426 are skipped, The process shifts to step S4402.

  By executing this state command processing 12 (see FIG. 312), whether the jackpot is the first hit (the jackpot won in the normal state) or the consecutive villa (the jackpot won in the gaming state other than the normal state) In response, the first hit flag 223 j b can be appropriately updated. Therefore, the river breakthrough effect (see FIG. 298, FIG. 299) can be executed at an appropriate timing (the number of changes that may cause the time saving state of the normal symbol to end).

  Next, the details of the small hitting relevant process 12 (S 4521) in the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 313 is a flowchart showing the small hitting relevant process 12 (S 4521) in the eleventh embodiment. This small hit related process 12 (S 4521) is a process that is executed instead of the small hit related process (see FIG. 65) in the first embodiment, and the small hit related process (see FIG. 65) in the first embodiment. Similarly, it is a process for executing control according to the type of command related to the small hit.

  Of the small hitting related processes 12 (see FIG. 313) in the eleventh embodiment, the processes of S4701 to S4710 respectively include the processes of S4701 to S4710 in the small hitting related process (see FIG. 65) in the first embodiment. The same process is performed. In the small hitting related process 12 (see FIG. 313) in the eleventh embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S4701 that the small hitting start command has not been received from the main control device 110 (S4701: No), Next, it is judged whether or not the small hitting prize command has been received (S4721), and if it is judged that the small hitting prize command has been received (S4721: Yes), then the prize sound selection table 222jb (FIG. 308 (b) Refer to) (S4722), select the winning sound corresponding to the data of the execution area of the first special symbol in the winning information storage area 223b and the value of the effect counter 223h, and set the output (S4723) ), End this processing.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4721 that the small hit winning command has not been received (S4721: No), the process proceeds to S4703.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 314, the variable display setting process 12 (S4121) in the eleventh embodiment will be described. The variation display setting process 12 (S4121) is a process that is executed instead of the variation display setting process (see FIG. 69) in the first embodiment, and the variation display setting process (see FIG. 69) in the first embodiment. Similarly, to display the variation display effect in the third symbol display device 81, based on the first or special figure 2 variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, the display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol Is a process for setting a variation pattern command for use and transmitting the command to the display control device 114.

  Among the variable display setting process 12 (see FIG. 314) in the eleventh embodiment, the variable display setting process in the first embodiment (see FIG. 69) in each process of S5101, S5102, S5106 to S5108, and S5110 to S5113. The same processing as each processing of S5101, S5102, S5106 to S5108, and S5110 to S5113) is executed. In the variable display setting process 11 (see FIG. 314) in the eleventh embodiment, if it is determined that the special view 1 change start flag 223d is on in the process of S5101 (S5101: Yes), then the change is made. The value of the number counter 223ja is updated by adding 1 (S5121), and the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223d is set to OFF (S5102).

  When the process of S5102 ends, it is then determined whether the current time is a time saving state of a normal symbol (S5122). In the process of S5122, it is determined whether the data set (stored) in the state setting area 223j is data indicating either a positive change state or a short time state. In the process of S5122, when it is determined that the time saving state of the normal symbol is determined (S5122: Yes), the time setting effect execution processing for setting the effect mode (for example, river breakthrough effect) in the time reducing state of the normal symbol is executed Then, the process proceeds to step S5106. Details of the effect setting process (S5123) during the short time will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S5122 that the time saving state of the normal symbol is not determined (S5122: No), the display of the first special symbol showing the variation display mode according to the variation pattern extracted from the variation pattern command A fluctuation pattern command is set (S5124), and the process proceeds to S5106.

  Also, in the variation display setting process 12 (see FIG. 314) in the eleventh embodiment, if it is determined that the special figure 2 variation start flag 223e is on in the process of S5107 (S5107: Yes), then variation The value of the number counter 223ja is updated by adding 1 (S5125), and the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223e is set to OFF (S5108). Next, in place of the variation display setting process for special view 2 (see FIG. 71) in the first embodiment, the variation display setting process 12 for special view 2 is executed (S5126), and the process proceeds to S5110. The details of the variation display setting process 12 (S5126) for the special figure 2 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 315, the details of the above-described time-shortening effect setting process (S5123) will be described. At this time, during the short time effect setting process (S5123), as described above, is a process for setting the effect mode in the time saving state of the normal symbol. At this time, when the effect setting process (S5123) is executed, it is first determined whether the first hit flag 223jb is on (S5131), and if it is determined that the first hit flag 223jb is on (S5131) : Yes) Next, it is determined whether the value of the fluctuation number counter 223ja is any value among 24, 49, and 74 (that is, it is the execution timing of the river breakthrough effect after the first hit) (S5132). If it is determined in the process of S5132 that the value of the fluctuation number counter 223jb is any one of 24, 49, and 74 (S5132: Yes), a process for setting an effect mode of the river breakthrough effect (S5134-S) Each processing of S5137 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5132 that the value of the fluctuation number counter 223jb is different from any of 24, 49, and 74 (S5132: No), it means that it is not the execution timing of the river breakthrough effect. In order to do this, the process (for each process of S5134 to S5137) for setting the rendering aspect of the river breakthrough effect is skipped, and the process proceeds to S5139.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5131 that the first hit flag 223jb is off (S5131: No), is the value of the fluctuation number counter 223ja any one of 9, 24, and 39? In other words, it is determined whether or not it is the execution timing of the river breakthrough effect after the generation of the consecutive villas (S5133). When it is determined in the process of S5133 that the value of the fluctuation number counter 223ja is any value among 9, 24, and 39 (that is, it is the execution timing of the river breakthrough effect after the occurrence of consecutive villas) (S5133: Yes), the processing for setting the rendering mode of the river breakthrough effect (the processing of each of S 5134 to S 5137) is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5133 that the value of the fluctuation number counter 223ja is not any value of 9, 24, or 39 (that is, it is not the execution timing of the river breakthrough effect after the occurrence of consecutive villas) (S5133: No), the process (each process of S5134-S5137) for setting the production | presentation aspect of a river breakthrough production is skipped, and a process is transfered to S5139.

  In the process for setting the effect mode of the river breakthrough effect (each process of S5134 to S5137), first, it is determined whether or not the remaining short number of times is 1 (S5134), and the remaining short number of times is not 1 (2 If it is determined that the above is the case (S5134: No), the execution of the river breakthrough effect is determined (S5135) in a mode (see FIG. 298 (b)) indicating continuation of the chance zone (S5135), and the process proceeds to S5139. Do. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5134 that the remaining number of short times is 1 (S5134: Yes), it is then determined whether the current gaming state is a definite change state (S5136). In the process of S5136, when it is determined that the gaming state is a definite change state (S5136: Yes), it means that transition to the latent state is made at the start of the next change, so the river breakthrough of the aspect of notifying RUSH rush The execution of the effect (see FIG. 299 (a)) is determined (S5137), and the process proceeds to S5139. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5136 that it is not a definite change state (that is, it is a short time state) (S5136: No), it means that transition to the normal state is started at the start of the next fluctuation. The execution of the river breakthrough effect (see FIG. 299 (b)) in a mode that fails to break through is determined (S5138), and the process proceeds to S5139. In the process of S5139, a variation pattern command for display of the first special symbol is set based on the variation pattern extracted from the variation pattern command (S5139), and the present process is ended.

  By executing the effect setting process (see FIG. 315) during this short time, while the time saving state of the normal symbol is set, the river breakthrough effect is executed every time the number of times the time saving state may end is reached can do.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 316, the details of the special view 2 variation display setting process 12 (S5126) described above will be described. This special view 2 variation display setting process 12 (S5126) is a process that is executed instead of the special view 2 variation display setting process (see FIG. 71) in the first embodiment, and the special view in the first embodiment Similar to the variable display setting process for 2 (see FIG. 71), this is a process for setting the variable display mode of the second special symbol.

  In the processes of S5301 to S5303 and S5309 in the variation display setting process 12 for special view 2 in the eleventh embodiment (see FIG. 316), the variation display setting process for special view 2 in the first embodiment (FIG. The same processes as those in S5301 to S5303 and S5309 (see 71) are executed. In the special display 2 variation display setting process 12 (see FIG. 316) in the eleventh embodiment, if it is determined in the process of S5303 that the current gaming state is the latent state (S5303: Yes), then Then, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the second special symbol this time is a small hit (S5311). If it is determined in the process of S5311 that the lottery result is a small hit (S5311: Yes), the small hit effect selection table 222ja (see FIG. 308A) is read (S5312), and the winning information storage area 223b is displayed. The effect mode corresponding to the data corresponding to the first special symbol and the value of the effect counter 223h is specified (S5313). Next, a variation pattern command for display of a second special symbol indicating the specified effect mode is set (S5314), and the present process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5311 that the current lottery result is not a small hit (S5311: No), the process proceeds to S5309.

  By executing the variation display setting process 12 (see FIG. 316) for the special view 2, each time it becomes a small winning in the second special symbol lottery, it is being executed by the effect mode of the variable display effect showing the small hitting Or, it is possible to suggest the lottery result of the first special symbol held. Thus, the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the eleventh embodiment is configured to shift to the latent state when the number of time passes in the definite change state. In the under-probability state, the player wins a small hit with high probability, and the first specified winning opening 65a is frequently opened (the opportunity to obtain a winning ball is frequently obtained), and the case of a big hit is compared. Since the same state is repeated (looped) at a very high rate, a very advantageous game state is formed for the player. For this reason, in the definite change state, it is possible to realize a novel game characteristic in which the game is performed with one goal of shifting to the latent state by allowing the time reduction number of the normal symbol to elapse, so It can improve the interest. Further, in the eleventh embodiment, the probability change jackpot is won in the probability change state or the time saving state rather than the probability change state (the probability change state shifted after the first hit) shifted based on winning the probability change jackpot in the normal state. It is configured such that the average value of the set number of times of time reduction is smaller in the case of the probability change state (the probability change state shifted after the occurrence of continuous units) shifted based on that. That is, the transition condition to the latent state is more easily established in the definite variation state set at the time of occurrence of consecutive units than in the definite variation state set at the first hit (the deviation is continuously made over the set number of time intervals) To make it easy). Therefore, since it is easier to cause the time reduction to occur more frequently at the time of occurrence of consecutive houses, even if the jackpot is won before the time reduction occurs in the definite change state, even if the positive change state is looped, Since it is highly possible that the time reduction number (small number of times reduction number) which is easy to shift to the latent state is set, it is possible to alleviate the discouragement of the player. Thus, the player's motivation for the game can be suppressed from being lowered.

  Further, in the eleventh embodiment, when the gaming state after the big hit is set to a probability change state or a time reduction state, the river breakthrough effect is generated each time the number of times that the time reduction state of the normal symbol may end is reached. Does the time saving state of the normal symbol continue, or the time saving state of the normal symbol ends and shifts to the latent state, or does the time saving state of the normal symbol end and shifts to the normal state Is periodically notified (every 25 times or 15 times for the special symbol lottery). By configuring in this way, while the chance zone (time saving state of the normal symbol) is set, the player is allowed to play the game for one enjoyment that the next river breakthrough effect will be executed. Can. In addition, it is possible to realize a novel game characteristic that wants to be continuously removed in a special symbol lottery at least until the next river breakthrough effect. Thus, the interest of the player in the game can be improved. Furthermore, by adopting a configuration that may shift to the normal state by failing in the river breakthrough production, continuation of the time saving state is reported in the river breakthrough production (transition to the latent status even though it breaks through the river) Even if it does not, it can be made to think that the normal condition is better than being notified. That is, even if the latent state is not notified, it is possible to suppress discouragement of the player.

  In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 in the eleventh embodiment, the effect mode during the small hitting variation of the second special symbol, and is output when the winning of the first specified winning opening 65a is detected during execution of the small hitting game Depending on the type of the winning sound, it is possible to indicate the degree of expectation that the result of the other special figure fluctuation (the fluctuation display of the first special symbol) becomes the jackpot. Here, conventionally, every time a lottery result of a special symbol is executed, a gaming machine is widely known which executes variable display effect of a symbol for indicating the lottery result. In the related-art gaming machine, the interest of the player is improved by executing various types of interest effects that suggest the lottery result of the special symbol while the variable display effect of the symbol is being executed. However, in the gaming machine of the specification that can execute a plurality of variable displays simultaneously, while focusing on the effect mode associated with one of the variable displays, there is a problem that the effect mode in the other variable display effect is overlooked There was a point. In particular, in a game machine of a type in which one variable display is displayed in a mode that is easier to view than the other, it becomes difficult to confirm the presentation mode in the other (the less visible side) variable display. If the jackpot is started while the player is not paying attention, there is a problem that the player may be confused. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the eleventh embodiment, the variable display of the second special symbol mainly executed in the latent state is given priority over the variable display of the first special symbol which is difficult to be executed ( When the variation display of the first special symbol is being executed together while displaying it in an easy manner), the drawing of the first special symbol by the small hitting effect of the second special symbol (representation aspect accompanying the variation display) It has a configuration that suggests the results. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to confirm the expectation of becoming a jackpot in the lottery of the first special symbol only by paying attention to the effect mode accompanying the variable display of the second special symbol. Therefore, the convenience of the player can be improved.

  In the eleventh embodiment, the display mode in the small hitting effect of the second special symbol is configured to indicate the expectation that the lottery result of the first special symbol simultaneously executed is a big hit, but It is not limited. For example, the lottery result of the first special symbol may be suggested by the effect mode of the effect to be executed during the variable display of the second special symbol. In addition, for example, as a configuration that suggests (informs) an expectation that the lottery result of the first special symbol or the lottery result of the second special symbol becomes a big hit by the display mode of the variation display of the normal symbol in the second symbol display device. Good. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suggest to the player the result of the variable display effect on the hard-to-see side only by confirming the variable display effect on the easy-to-see side, thus realizing a more easy-to-understand effect can do. Therefore, the convenience of the player can be improved.

  In the eleventh embodiment, the number of probability variations is 100, but the number of probability variations is not limited to 100 and may be set arbitrarily. By reducing the number of definite variations, the degree of advantage for the player is reduced, so that the gambling can be suppressed. On the other hand, by increasing the number of probability variations, it is possible to further increase the degree of advantage in the most advantageous latent state, and therefore, it is possible to play the game with greater expectation for shifting to the latent state. Can. In addition, the number of time savings can be determined arbitrarily as well. By reducing the number of time reductions, it is easy to shift from the probability change state to the latent state, so it can be made more advantageous for the player, and by increasing the number of time reductions, it is difficult to shift to the latent state It is possible to reduce euphoria.

  In the eleventh embodiment, it is easy to shift to the latent state depending on whether it is the first hit (the jackpot won in the normal state) or after the occurrence of consecutive homes (the jackpot won in the state other than the normal state). (The easiness of establishment of the termination condition of the time saving state of the normal symbol) is configured to be different, but it is not limited to this. For example, the number of time-savings set after the end of the big hit may be reduced as the number of consecutive runs increases. As a result, even if the player can not shift to the latent state, the player can be made to feel as if the player is approaching the latent state each time the home runs, so the player's It can improve the interest. In the eleventh embodiment, when the jackpot of the first special symbol is a jackpot, "jackpot A11" is determined at a rate of 5%, and an advantageous latent state is set after the jackpot end. In this sense, even in the configuration of the eleventh embodiment described above, it can be said that the possibility of shifting to the latent state becomes higher as the number of consecutive units increases.

  In the eleventh embodiment, when the small win in the second special symbol lottery in the latent state, it was configured to perform a production that suggests the degree of expectation for being in the jackpot variation of the first special symbol However, it is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured to indicate the degree of expectation which is the jackpot type to shift to the latent state. As a result, the sense of expectation for continuation of the advantageous latent state can be improved, so that the interest of the player in the game can be improved. Further, it may be configured (indicated) during the change effect of the second special symbol that the expectation for the jackpot is not included in the suspension at the time of transition to the latent state. That is, although the state has shifted to the latent state, if the jackpot in the first special symbol lottery is reached, the latent state is ended relatively early, which may cause the player to be disappointed. Therefore, the player may feel that he does not want to win the jackpot of the first special symbol in the latent state. Therefore, by making the configuration that suggests that the jackpot is not included in the hold, it is possible to make the player understand that the latent state is not ended in at least the jackpot of the first special symbol. It can be expected that the latent condition lasts for a long time. Thus, the interest of the player in the game can be improved. Furthermore, the degree of expectation (pinch degree) for being a pinch that usually wins a large jackpot in the lottery of the first special symbol in the latent state in the contrary state during the variation production of the second special symbol (and during the small hit game) It may be configured to notify (suggest). By configuring in this way, when an effect with a high degree of pinching is performed, it is possible to play a game while giving a sense of tension, so it is possible to make the game sharper. In this case, when a small hit game of a specific type is started in the lottery of the second special symbol, it may be possible to forcibly stop the variation display of the first special symbol. That is, it may be possible to extend the life of the latent state by converting the jackpot into a normal state. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to give the player a great sense of relief by performing the small hitting game of the specific type after the effect with a high degree of pinching is performed. Thus, the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

Twelfth Embodiment
Next, a pachinko machine 10 according to a twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 317 to 339. In the pachinko machine 10 in the eleventh embodiment described above, the latent state is configured as an advantageous gaming state in which the lottery of the second special symbol is easy to be executed and the small hitting game is frequently executed. In addition, by making the transition to the latent state a lot when the time saving state of the normal symbol is finished in the positive change state, it is expected that the disconnection is continuous over the number of times set in the positive change state. It was configured to be able to realize the novel playability to let you.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 in the twelfth embodiment, the normal state is configured as an advantageous gaming state in which the lottery of the second special symbol is easy to be executed and the small hitting game is frequently executed, and the latent state Was configured as the most disadvantageous gaming state. Then, by terminating the number of times of probability variation in the latent state, it is configured to shift to the most advantageous normal state. That is, in the twelfth embodiment, it is possible to shift from the most disadvantageous gaming state directly to the most advantageous gaming state without going through the jackpot. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to play a game with one goal of causing the number of definite variations to elapse in the most disadvantageous latent state.

  The pachinko machine 10 according to the twelfth embodiment differs from the pachinko machine 10 according to the eleventh embodiment in configuration in that the board configuration of the game board 13 is partially changed, and the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 The configuration of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 is partially modified, and the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is partially modified. And the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is partially changed. The other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control apparatus 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 are described. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the 11th embodiment. Hereinafter, the same components as those of the eleventh embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and the description thereof will be omitted.

  First, the gaming state in the twelfth embodiment is briefly described. As described above, in the twelfth embodiment, the normal mode is configured as the most advantageous gaming state, and the latent state is configured as the most disadvantageous gaming state. Further, the time saving state or the probability changing state is configured as a gaming state having a higher degree of advantage than the latent state. In the description of the transition, the advantageous normal state will be referred to as the "continuous mode", since it adopts a special specification that the normal state is advantageous. In addition, the disadvantageous latent state is referred to as a "normal mode", and the relatively advantageous definite change state and the short time state are referred to as a "chance mode A" and a "chance mode B", respectively.

  Next, the board configuration of the game board 13 according to the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 317. As shown in FIG. 317, the board configuration of the gaming board 13 in the twelfth embodiment is the same as the board configuration (see FIG. 2) of the gaming board 13 in the above-described eleventh embodiment (and the first embodiment) The upper first ball entrance 64b1 and the lower first ball entrance 64b2 are deleted, and instead, a central first ball entrance 64c is provided. Further, below the central first entrance 64c, there is provided a small attacker 4650 which is opened when it becomes a small hit in the drawing of the first special symbol. In addition, since this small attacker 4650 is surrounded by the nail and the center first prize hole 64c on the right and left and above, it becomes extremely difficult to enter the game ball in the small hit opening period of the first special symbol. . In the 12th embodiment of the present invention, the small ball of the first special symbol is provided because the gaming ball enters the second ball entry port 640 in a state other than the continuous mode, and the second special symbol is long. This is because it is mounted for the purpose of forcibly ending the long fluctuation when the fluctuation has been performed, and is not for acquiring a winning ball. That is, even if the second special symbol is fluctuating long, it is configured to win a small hit with high probability (475/480) when the first special symbol lottery is executed, so a small hit Triggered by the start of the second special symbol that has been long can be forced to stop at the stop symbol of the departure. Therefore, even if the player enters the second entrance 640 in the game mode other than the continuous play mode and long variation of the second special symbol is started, it is easily long by returning to the left hitting game. You can end the fluctuation.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 317, on the right side of the variable display device unit 80 in the game board 13, a second entrance (through gate) 67 and a first right entrance provided downstream of the through gate 67 Right electric entry 64ra capable of opening and closing the upper surface of the first right ball inlet 64r and the top face of the right electric attachment 64ra while the right electric attachment 64ra is closed And a second ball entry port 640 provided at a position where the game ball having passed through the ball can enter the ball. As shown in FIG. 317, the flow-down path of the game ball is such that only the game ball passing through the through gate 67 can be reached to the second entrance 640 while the right motorized accessory 64ra is closed. Is set. In other words, even if you hit the right in the time saving state of the normal symbol that the right electric character 64ra is likely to be opened, almost all the game balls that have passed through the through gate 67 enter the first right ball entrance 64r. Since the ball is thrown, the game ball can not be made to enter the second ball entry port 640. By configuring in this way, it is possible to configure so that it is possible to proceed with the game by the right-handed game even in the probability change state (chance mode A) or the time saving state (chance mode B).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 317, in the gaming board 13 according to the twelfth embodiment, the second variable winning device 650 is deleted, and only the first variable winning device 65 is provided. Thereby, when it becomes a big hit and a small hit of the second special symbol, it is configured to open the first variable winning device 65 in any case. That is, chance mode A or chance mode B in which the time saving state of the normal pattern is set, the most advantageous continuous mode in which a small hit occurs frequently by entering the game ball into the second entrance 640, and In the jackpot state, it is possible to progress by all right strike. In other words, all states other than the most disadvantageous game state (latency state) for the player (a state advantageous for the player in any way) are configured to be allowed to proceed with all right-handed. As a result, it is possible to divide the right-handed game into the advantageous state and the left-handed game as the disadvantageous state, so that it is possible to realize a more easy-to-understand game characteristic for the player.

  In addition, since the normal state of the normal symbol is set during the execution of the jackpot game, if you try to win the prize ball by entering the first specified winning opening 65a during the jackpot and perform a right-handed game, almost, Four or more gaming balls enter the second entrance 640 and the number of holding balls becomes the upper limit value. Thereby, after the end of the jackpot game, fluctuation of the second special symbol is almost started. However, as described above, by executing the lottery of the first special symbol, it becomes a small hit with a high probability, and it is possible to forcibly end the variation display of the second special symbol and to end it, so after the big hit end Even if the game state other than the normal state is set as the game state of and the variable display of the second special symbol is started, the game can be advanced without any problem.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 318 to FIG. 320, various interesting effects according to the twelfth embodiment will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 318, an example of the effect mode in the normal mode (in the latent state) will be described. As described above, in the twelfth embodiment, by passing the number of definite variations in the latent state, the direct transition to the most advantageous continuous mode (normal state) is performed. Therefore, in the normal mode, an effect aiming at the latent state is executed. Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 318 (a), an effect of a character 811 imitating a rabbit climbing a rock is executed. In addition, in the display area HR1 formed above the character 811 for climbing a rock, the letters “Aim for the top !!” are displayed, and in the display area HR2 formed on the right of the character 811, the normal mode Display content is displayed that indicates the remaining number of changes until the end of (the number of definite changes elapses). In the example of FIG. 318 (a), the case where the character "remaining 50 m" is displayed with respect to display area HR2 is illustrated. The remaining meter display up to the top is subtracted by 1 m each time the variable display is executed, so that the remaining meter (distance) to the top is switched to the continuous mode to the player. It can be easily understood that the remaining number of changes before transition.

  FIG. 318 (b) is a diagram showing an example of display content in the case where the number of times of definite variation has elapsed in the normal mode (discontinuously occurred over 100 definite variations of the latent state). As shown in FIG. 318 (b), when the number of definite variations elapses and transition to the continuous mode is made, an effect that the character 811 reaches the top of the rock mountain is executed, and the display area HR1 The words "Arrive !!" In addition, the characters "remaining 0 m" are displayed in the display area HR2. By these display contents, it can be easily understood that the player has shifted to the continuous mode.

  FIG. 319 (a) shows the state (before preparation for winning a small hit in the second special symbol lottery) until it is possible to actually obtain a winning ball after shifting to the continuous mode. State) is shown. As shown in FIG. 319 (a), in the preparation state, the character "right-handed" is displayed in the small area Dm3, and "right-handed RUSH is started with right-handed !!" for the display area HR1. Is displayed. In addition, the characters "in preparation for RUSH" are displayed in the sub display area Ds. With these display contents, it is possible to easily make the player understand that the player can enter the RUSH state where he can get the prize ball by performing a right strike.

  As shown in FIG. 319 (a), when the mode is shifted to the continuous mode, the small area Dm1 is switched to the display area for performing the variable display of the second special symbol. That is, in the twelfth embodiment, the small area Dm1 is configured as a display area for displaying the variation display of the special symbol on the side mainly executed in each gaming state. In addition, small area Dm2 for displaying the fluctuation display of the other special symbol is a display area relatively smaller than small area Dm1 on the lower right side of sub display area Ds (in a mode in which it is difficult for the player to see) )Is displayed. Thereby, the variation display of the special symbol on the side to be mainly executed can be visually recognized only by confirming only the small area Dm1 regardless of the gaming state, and the convenience of the player can be improved. Further, the small area Dm1 can be focused on by displaying the variable display on the side different from the side mainly performed in a mode in which it is difficult to visually recognize. That is, it is possible to easily make the player understand which is the change display mainly performed. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with easy-to-understand game characteristics.

  FIG. 319 (b) shows an example of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 in the case where the game ball enters the second entrance 640 in the preparation state and the small winning is won in the second special symbol lottery. FIG. As shown in FIG. 319 (b), when the player enters the second ball entrance 640 in the preparation state and wins a small hit in the second special symbol lottery, “RUSH starts for the display area HR1! The characters “RUSH rush !!” are displayed in the sub display area Ds while the characters “” are displayed. In addition, the treasure box 812 is enlarged and displayed in the central portion of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. With these display contents, it is possible to easily make the player understand that the state (RUSH) capable of winning a prize ball has been started in the continuous play mode. As a result, it is possible to realize game characteristics that are easy for the player to understand.

  In the twelfth embodiment, the probability of winning a small hit in the second special symbol lottery is configured to be 1⁄2. That is, even if the game ball enters the second ball entry port 640, the possibility of mere detachment is relatively high (it will be detached with a probability of about 1/2). In the twelfth embodiment, the preparation state is configured to be continued as it is when the lottery for the second special symbol is lost in the preparation state. In other words, it is configured that the RUSH start is not notified until the player wins the small hit and it is possible to actually obtain the winning ball. As a result, even though the RUSH start is notified, the player can not be dissatisfied with the situation where the winning balls can not be obtained.

  Further, in the twelfth embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which, when a jackpot occurs in one of the special symbol lottery, control is performed so that the lottery of the other special symbol performed during the execution of the jackpot variation is forcibly removed. ing. Therefore, when transitioning from the normal mode to the continuous mode, the first special symbol holding ball exists, and the variation display of the first special symbol started simultaneously with the start of the continuous mode is a big hit , While the jackpot variation is being executed, it will always fall out in the lottery of the second special symbol. That is, when the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is started at the time of transition to the preparation state, the right-handed game is continuously performed, and even if the lottery of the second special symbol is continuously executed, the game is removed. Is continuous (does not win in the small hit), the preparation state will be long (during the end of the big hit fluctuation). As described above, since the small hitting probability of the second special symbol is 1/2, the sense of expectation that the jackpot variation of the first special symbol is being executed can be improved as the disconnection continues in the preparation state. More specifically, for example, in the preparation state, the possibility that the disengagement continues four times or more is about 6%, and the possibility that the detachment is six times or more is about 1%. Therefore, even if the player loses the second special symbol in the preparation state, the player's sense of expectation for the jackpot can be improved, so that the interest of the player in the preparation state can be further improved. .

  In the twelfth embodiment, the probability of becoming a small hit is set to 1/2 in the lottery of the second special symbol, but it is not limited to this, and the small hitting probability may be determined arbitrarily . For example, if the small hitting probability is high, and the second special symbol lottery is executed, as in the eleventh embodiment, it is configured to be a small hitting (for example, with a probability of 59/60) It is also good. When configured in this way, it is possible to improve the sense of expectation for the first special symbol in fluctuation to be a big hit if deviation occurs even once in the preparation state, so that the second special symbol deviates in the preparation state. The player's interest in the event of becoming Also, the higher the probability of a small hit, the shorter the preparation state tends to be (the average number of lottery times from the transition to the continuous mode to the winning of the small hit is smaller), so after shifting to the continuous mode The period until securing balls can be shortened by the winning balls. That is, since it is possible to give the player a winning ball faster, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game. On the other hand, the small hitting probability may be lowered, and it may be configured to be easily detached during the preparation state. Since it becomes easy to carry out detachment | deletion by comprising in this way, the sense of expectation for being in the jackpot fluctuation of the 1st special symbol can be held more frequently. Thus, the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 320, the temporal change of the effect mode before and after the preparation state (before and after the RUSH start) in the twelfth embodiment will be described. First, referring to FIG. 320 (a), the holding ball of the first special symbol is off at the time of transition from the normal mode to the continuous mode, and twice in the drawing of the second special symbol in the preparation mode. A time-dependent change of the presentation mode in the case where it becomes a small hit in the third drawing of the second special symbol, will be out continuously.

  As shown in FIG. 320 (a), in the twelfth embodiment, when the 99th special symbol lottery is executed in the normal mode (the latent state in which the number of 100 probability changes is set), as described above, An effect (see FIG. 318 (b)) to reach the top of the rock is executed. Then, while the variable display of the special symbol of the 100th time is started, the display mode (refer to FIG. 319 (a)) indicating the preparation state is switched, and notification is given to perform the right-handed game. When the gaming ball is made to enter the second entrance 640 by right hitting during this preparation state, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in the small area Dm1. And, as shown in FIG. 320, during the second variation of the second special symbol out of the change, display indicating the preparation state is continued, the third change of the second special symbol (small hit variation) is started At this point, the display mode (see FIG. 319 (b)) indicating RUSH inrush is set. In addition, at the start of the small hitting game, the out-of-range fluctuation of the first special symbol that has been fluctuating is forcibly stopped and displayed. After that, the RUSH display is continued until the continuous mode ends. In the twelfth embodiment, since the continuous mode is set to the normal state (the low probability state of the special symbol and the normal state of the normal symbol), an advantageous continuous mode is effective unless a jackpot is won. continue. Therefore, it is possible to realize novel game characteristics in which a game is played with the expectation that the player will not win the jackpot, as long as the lottery number is as long as possible.

  Next, referring to FIG. 320 (b), the time lapse of the effect mode in the case where the holding ball of the first special symbol at the time of transition from the normal mode to the continuous mode is the lottery result corresponding to "big hit D12". Explain the change. Here, the “big hit D12” is a big hit of the type in which the time saving state is set to two times after the big hit ends. In other words, it is a big hit of the type to shift to the continuous mode, and it is relatively easy to shift to the continuous mode (game Good for the elderly) In the twelfth embodiment, the transition to the continuous mode is notified only when the variable display corresponding to "big hit D12" is started at the time of transition to the continuous mode, and the other first special When the jackpot of the symbol (which is relatively difficult to shift to the continuous mode) is suspended, the configuration is such that it is notified of the jackpot winning without notifying the transition to the continuous mode. As a result, even though the mode is switched to the continuous mode, it is possible to suppress the continuous mode being ended without winning once in a small hit, and discourage the player from being discouraged.

  As shown in FIG. 320 (b), when transitioning to the continuous mode and variation display of the first special symbol corresponding to "big hit D12" is started, the second started during execution of the big hit variation The variation display of the special symbol is all off. Therefore, while the jackpot variation is being executed, the disconnection is continued, so that the continuation of the disconnection improves the expectation for the player to be executed the jackpot variation of the first special symbol. It can be done. In the twelfth embodiment, when the jackpot is won in the drawing of the first special symbol in the consecutive mode, the fluctuation time of 10 seconds is set. On the other hand, when it comes off in the second special symbol lottery, the fluctuation time of 1 second is set with high probability. Therefore, when the period from the transition to the continuous shooting mode until the game ball enters the second entrance 640 and the engine for displaying the lottery result of the second special symbol are added, the jackpot changes During (10 seconds), the variable display of the second special symbol around 5 times can be executed. In the lottery of the second special symbol in the state that is not in the jackpot variation of the first special symbol, the probability of being out of 5 consecutive times is low (about 3%), so by consecutive detachment, the jackpot of the first special symbol It is possible to strengthen the player's conviction that it is in motion. Thus, the interest of the player in the preparation state can be improved.

<Electrical configuration in the twelfth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 321 (a), the configuration of the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110 in the present twelfth embodiment will be described. FIG. 321 (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 202 in the twelfth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 321 (a), the configuration of the ROM 202 in the twelfth embodiment is a variation pattern scenario with respect to the configuration (see FIG. 14) of the ROM 202 in the eleventh embodiment (and the first embodiment) described above. The difference is that table 202ka is added. Further, the ROM 202 in the twelfth embodiment differs in that a part of the first random number table 202a, a part of the small random number table 202b, and a part of the variation pattern selection table 202f are changed. doing.

  The variation pattern scenario table 202ka is a data table referred to in order to select a table for determining a variation pattern from the variation pattern selection table 202f. When a special symbol lottery is executed, the variation pattern scenario table 202ka is referred to, one variation pattern table is selected from the variation pattern selection table 202f, and a variation pattern is determined based on the selected variation pattern table. Be done. The details of the fluctuation pattern scenario table 202ka will be described later with reference to FIG. 322 (b).

  First, the configuration of the first random number table 202a defined (stored) in the ROM 202 in the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 321 (b). FIG. 321 (b) is a diagram showing the definition contents of the first random number table 202 a in the twelfth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 321 (b), in the first hit random number table 202a in the twelfth embodiment, as a random value (counter value) determined to be a big hit in the low probability state of the special symbol, "0 to 3" Four random number values (counter values) are defined. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 321 (b), five random numbers (0 to 4) (counter values) are defined as random number values (counter values) determined to be a big hit in the high probability state of the special symbol. ing.

  Therefore, the probability of becoming a big hit when the lottery of the special symbol is executed in the low probability state of the special symbol is 1/120 (4/480), while the lottery of the special symbol is in the high probability state of the special symbol. The probability of being a big hit if executed is 1/96 (5/480). The modification of the jackpot probability in the twelfth embodiment is intended to suppress that the continuous mode becomes excessively advantageous and that the normal mode becomes excessively disadvantageous for the player. . That is, when the jackpot probability in the low probability state of the special symbol is low (for example, in the case of 1/240 same as the eleventh embodiment), once it shifts to the continuous mode, it is difficult to end the continuous mode. As a result, the game becomes overly advantageous to the player, which may be disadvantageous to the hole. Also, if the jackpot probability in the high probability state of the special symbol is high (for example, in the case of 1/60 the same as the eleventh embodiment), the number of definite variations is allowed to elapse in the normal mode (over 100 lotterys of special symbol Since the possibility of falling off continuously decreases, the possibility of transition to the continuous mode becomes extremely low. As a result, there is a possibility that the player will be overly disadvantaged, and there is a possibility that the game with the pachinko machine 10 may be avoided. Therefore, in the twelfth embodiment, the jackpot probability in the low probability state of the special symbol is increased to suppress excessive advantage when transitioning to the continuous mode, and the high probability state of the special symbol The jackpot probability in the is reduced to prevent the normal mode from becoming excessively disadvantageous.

  Next, details of the small hitting random number table 202b in the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 322 (a). FIG. 322 is a diagram showing defined contents of the small hitting random number table 202 b in the twelfth embodiment. In the small hitting random number table 202b in this twelfth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 322 (a), as a random value (counter value) judged to be a small hitting by the lottery of the first special symbol, There are 475 random numbers defined. On the other hand, 240 random numbers “240 to 479” are defined as random numbers (counter values) determined to be small hits in the second special symbol lottery.

  That is, in the twelfth embodiment, when the lottery of the first special symbol is executed, the player wins a small hit with high probability (probability of 475/480). This is, as described above, when the game ball enters the second ball entry port 640 in a state other than the continuous mode, and the second special symbol has undergone long fluctuation, the long fluctuation This is to force termination. That is, when the long variation of the second special symbol is executed, by performing the lottery of the first special symbol, it becomes almost a small hit and stops at the start of the small hit and deviates the long variation of the second special symbol It can be displayed. Therefore, even if the player enters the second entrance 640 in the game mode other than the continuous play mode and long variation of the second special symbol is started, it is easily long by returning to the left hitting game. You can end the fluctuation.

  Further, by setting the small hitting probability of the second special symbol to 1/2 (240/480), the lottery of the second special symbol in the preparation state is configured to be out at a relatively high rate. As a result, if the disconnection is continued in the preparation state, the small hit is forcedly set off by the fact that the jackpot variation of the first special symbol is executed if the lottery of the second special symbol has come to an end It can make it hard to understand what is being done. Therefore, the novel game characteristic that the jackpot expectation degree of the special symbol on the other side (that is, the first special symbol) is higher can be realized as the disconnection of the second special symbol in the preparation state continues. Thus, the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  Next, details of the fluctuation pattern scenario table 202ka in the twelfth embodiment will be described. FIG. 322 (b) is a diagram showing the definition contents of the fluctuation pattern scenario table 202ka in the twelfth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 322 (b), the variation pattern scenario table 202ka shows the correspondence between the number of lottery times of the special symbol after the big hit end (or after clearing the RAM) and the selected variation pattern for each previous big hit type. Is defined.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 322 (b), for the case where the previous jackpot type is a probability variation jackpot, the probability variation / latency for the range of 1 to 99 times of drawing numbers of the special symbol is The table 202f11 for definite start is associated and specified. The details of the probability variation / latency start table 202f11 will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, the RUSH table 202f14 is defined in association with the range where the number of times of drawing is 100 or more. Although the details will be described later with reference to FIG. 326 (b), when the variation pattern is selected with reference to the RUSH table 202f14, a short variation time (1 second or 10 seconds) as a variation pattern of the second special symbol The variation pattern of seconds) is selected. Therefore, only by playing the right-handed game, the lottery of the second special symbol is continuously executed in a short period, and an advantageous state of winning a small hit with high probability (1/2) is formed.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 322 (b), for the case where the previous jackpot type is normally a jackpot, the table 202f12 for the time-saving start time for the range of 1 to 99 times the number of drawing times of the special symbol. Are defined in association with each other. The details of the short start table 202f12 will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, the RUSH table 202f14 (see FIG. 326 (b)) is defined in association with the range where the number of times of drawing is 100 or more.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 322 (b), in a state where the jackpot has not been won once (so-called, after clearing the RAM), the number of drawing times of the special symbol is in the range of 1 to 99 times. The normal start table 202f13 is defined in association with one another. The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 326 (a), but the normal start table 202f13 has a relatively long fluctuation time regardless of the lottery result when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed ( 60 sec) long fluctuation is set. As a result, when the pachinko machine 10 is initialized by performing the RAM clear and the normal state is set, it is possible to suppress the state being the same as the continuous state mode advantageous to the player. In other words, similar to a general gaming machine, when initialization is performed, the player can be set in a disadvantageous state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being in a state advantageous to the player immediately after the initialization and causing an unexpected disadvantage to the hole. On the other hand, the RUSH table 202f14 (see FIG. 326 (b)) is defined in association with the range where the number of lottery times of the special symbol is 100 times or more. Therefore, even after the pachinko machine 10 is initialized, the same operation as the normal mode (the operation to shift to the continuous mode by being continuously removed in the special symbol drawing of 100 times) except for the jackpot probability is made be able to. Therefore, since the state after the initialization becomes excessively disadvantageous for the player and it is possible to suppress the player from avoiding the game by the pachinko machine 10, the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved. .

  In the fourteenth embodiment, as to whether or not it is in a state after the RAM clear (initialization), for example, whether or not the RAM 203 has been won by one or more jackpots after the RAM clear. It is comprised so that discrimination | determination is possible by providing the flag (initial winning completion flag) which shows whether or not it is. If the initial winning completion flag is off, it is determined that the normal state after initialization, and if the number of changes is within the range of 1 to 99 times, the normal start table 202f13 is referred to and 100 times In the above range, the fluctuation pattern scenario in which the RUSH table 202f14 is referred to is set. On the other hand, since the first-winning flag is set to ON by winning the jackpot, it is controlled so as to set a scenario in which the normal start table 202f13 is not referred to.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 323, details of the jackpot type selection table 202d in the present twelfth embodiment will be described. FIG. 323 is a diagram showing defined contents of the jackpot type selection table 202 d in the twelfth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 323, in the twelfth embodiment, six jackpot types of “big jack A12” to “big jack F12” are defined as jackpot types of the first special symbol. Also, as the jackpot type of the second special symbol, two jackpot types of "big hit G12" and "big hit I12" are defined.

  As shown in FIG. 323, as the jackpot type of the first special symbol (special figure 1), "big jack A12" as the jackpot type for the first hit type counter C2 with respect to the range of "0 to 4". It is defined in association with it. In this "big hit A12", the number of rounds of the big hit is 8 rounds, and after the big hit end is a big hit (8 round probability variation big hit) of the type set to chance mode A (probability variation state). This chance mode A is continued until a lottery of a maximum of 100 special symbols is executed after the jackpot ends, and when 100 times elapse, the mode is shifted to the continuous mode. Therefore, "big hit A12" becomes a relatively advantageous big hit type in terms of gaming state after the big hit ends.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 323, “big hit B12” is defined as the big hit type in association with the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “5 to 49”. In this "big hit B12", the number of rounds of the big hit is 2 rounds, and the big hit of the type that is set to the normal mode (latency state) or chance mode A (probability state) after the big hit end (2 round probability variation big hit) It is. More specifically, when the "big hit B12" is won in the normal mode or the continuous mode, while after the big hit is set to the disadvantageous normal mode, "big hit B12" in the time saving state or the definite change state If it does, the after jackpot end is set to the relatively advantageous chance mode A. Therefore, “big hit B12” is relatively advantageous when winning in the chance mode A or the chance mode B, but relatively disadvantageous in the normal mode or the continuous mode.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 323, "big hit C12" is defined as the big hit type in association with the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "50 to 69". This "big hit C12" is a big hit (2 round probability variation big hit) of the type in which the number of rounds of the big hit is 2 rounds and the big hit end is set to the most disadvantageous normal mode (latency state). That is, the "big hit C12" is a jackpot type that is most disadvantageous in terms of the gaming state.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 323, when the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "70", "big hit D12" is defined as being a big hit type. In this "big hit D12", the number of rounds of the big hit is 8 rounds, and after the big hit end is a big hit (8 rounds big hit) of the type set to chance mode B (time reduction state). This chance mode B is ended when the drawing of the special symbol twice is performed after the end of the jackpot (the number of time saving is set to 2). That is, the game mode is switched to the continuous mode by being dropped out of the special symbol lottery twice in a row at maximum, so it is an advantageous jackpot type that is extremely easy to shift to the continuous mode.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 323, when the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “71 to 74”, “big hit E12” is defined as being a big hit type. In this "big hit E12", the number of rounds of the big hit is 2 rounds, and after the big hit end is a big hit (2 round normally big hit) of the type set to chance mode B (time reduction state). The chance mode B is set 50 times when winning the "big hit E12" in the normal mode or the latent mode, while it is set 25 times when winning the "big hit E12" in the time saving state or the probability changing state. Be done. The chance mode B is advantageous for the player because the chance of winning is lower than that of the chance mode A, and the mode shifts to the continuous mode by setting the number of time-lapse times.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 323, when the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "75 to 99", "big hit F12" is defined in association with the big hit type. In this "big hit F12", the number of rounds of the big hit is 2 rounds, and after the big hit end is a type of big hit (2 round normally hit) which is set to chance mode B (time reduction state). The time reduction number of the chance mode B set after the end of the “big hit F12” is set to a number larger than the time reduction number of the chance mode B set after the end of the “big hit E12”. Therefore, the chance mode B after the end of the "big hit F12" is in a disadvantageous state in which it is difficult to cause the number of time-savings to elapse.

  On the other hand, as the jackpot type of the second special symbol (special figure 2), "big jack G12" as the jackpot type is defined in association with the range of "0 to 69" in the first hit type counter C2 value. ing. This "big hit G12" is a big hit (8 round probability variation big hit) of a type in which the number of rounds of the big hit is 8 rounds and after the big hit end is set to 100 chance mode A (probability variation state). Further, "big hit I12" is defined as the big hit type in association with the range of "70 to 99" as the value of the first hit type counter C2. This "big hit I12" is a big hit (8 rounds big hit) of the type in which the number of rounds of the big hit is 8 rounds and the big hit end is set to 2 chance modes B (time reduction state). As described above, it is extremely easy to make two time passes, while it is relatively difficult to come off continuously over 100 positive changes, so the "big hit I12" However, it can be said that it is a jackpot of the type (that is, advantageous type) that is easier to shift to the continuous mode than the "big hit G12".

  As described above, in the twelfth embodiment, at least two time-shortening times are set without providing a normal big-hit having a time-shortening number of 0 (a big hit that shifts directly to the continuous mode after the big end). . By not setting the gaming state directly after the big hit to the normal state, it is possible to suppress the same state as in the case where the pachinko machine 10 is initialized. That is, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol becomes long, and it becomes a disadvantageous state (a fluctuation pattern is determined with reference to the normal start table 202d13 to be described later to be described later) in which the game must be advanced by left hitting The fluctuation pattern can be determined with reference to the short start time table 202f12 while suppressing the problem. That is, it can be configured to shift to the RUSH state immediately when the number of time savings elapses. Therefore, a jackpot type substantially equivalent to direct transition to the continuous mode while suppressing the state at the time of initialization of the pachinko machine 10 from becoming excessively advantageous for the player Type) can be provided. In addition, during execution of the big hit game, because it becomes a low probability state of the normal symbol, as a result it becomes a state where the right motorized role 64ra is difficult to open, as a result the gaming ball frequently to the second ball entry 640 during the big hit game Enter the ball. That is, the lottery of the second special symbol is executed simultaneously with the end of the jackpot game, and the long variation of the second special symbol is started. Therefore, when two times are set as the number of times of time reduction, the first number of times of time reduction is digested simultaneously with the end of the jackpot. By entering the gaming ball into the right first ball entrance 64r by right-handed during the long change of this second special symbol, it becomes a small hit with high probability, and it deviates from the long change of the second special symbol It can be forced to end. Therefore, when two time saving times are set, it is possible to shift to the continuous mode by substantially only generating one start winning after the big hit ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 324, the details of the above-mentioned table 202f11 for the probability variation / latency start time will be described. FIG. 324 is a diagram showing defined contents of the table 202f11 for probability variation / latency start time. As shown in FIG. 324, in the table 202f11 for probability variation / latency start time, the correspondence between the gaming state at the time of executing the lottery of the special symbol and the variation pattern which can be selected is prescribed for each type of the special symbol. It is done. More specifically, a longer fluctuation time is selected as the fluctuation time of the first special symbol in the latent state (normal mode) than in the probability changing state (chance mode A). Thereby, in the normal mode in which the left-handed game is played, the variation display mode can be diversified, while in the chance mode A, the gaming efficiency can be improved.

  On the other hand, with regard to the second special symbol, regardless of the variation type and the gaming state, a long variation of 60 seconds is set, which causes the gaming efficiency to be significantly changed when the second special symbol is varied in the gaming state other than the consecutive mode. In the state other than the continuous mode, it is possible to suppress the abnormal game method in which the game ball is fired by aiming at the second ball entry port 640.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 325, the details of the above-described short start time table 202f12 will be described. FIG. 325 is a diagram showing the defined contents of the time reduction start table 202f12. As shown in FIG. 325, when the short start time table 202f12 is referred to select the variation pattern of the first special symbol, in the short time state (chance mode B), it is relatively short (1 to 20 seconds) ) Is selected. Thereby, the gaming efficiency in the chance mode B can be improved. On the other hand, in the normal state (i.e. after a short number of passes), a very short (0.1 or 10 seconds) variation time is selected. As a result, after the big hit end is set to the short time state, and after the time reduction number has passed (after transition to the continuous mode), if the first special symbol holding ball remains, the holding ball is held in a very short time Is digested.

  On the other hand, with regard to the second special symbol, regardless of the variation type, a long variation of 60 seconds is set while the time saving state continues, and a short variation time of 10 seconds or 1 second after the time saving status has elapsed It is set. As a result, it is possible to suppress the unusual game method in which the game ball is fired by aiming at the second ball entry port 640 in the game state other than the continuous play mode. In addition, after shifting to the continuous mode, it is possible to form an extremely advantageous state in which the lottery of the second special symbol and the small hitting game are repeated in a short time. Therefore, since it is possible to cause the game to be played with the goal of causing the time reduction number to elapse, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  Next, the details of the normal start table 202f13 described above will be described with reference to FIG. 326 (a). FIG. 326 (a) is a diagram showing defined contents of the time reduction start table 202f13. As shown in FIG. 326 (a), when the normal start table 202f13 is referred to select the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol, a relatively long fluctuation time (7 seconds to 90 seconds) is selected . Therefore, the variation display mode can be diversified in the state in which the left-handed game should be performed as in the latent state.

  On the other hand, for the second special symbol, a long fluctuation of 60 seconds is set regardless of the fluctuation type. As a result, it is possible to suppress the unusual game method in which the game ball is fired by aiming at the second ball entry port 640 in the game state other than the continuous play mode.

  Next, the details of the RUSH table 202f14 described above will be described with reference to FIG. 326 (b). FIG. 326 (b) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the RUSH table 202f14. As shown in FIG. 326 (b), when the RUSH table 202f13 is referred to select the variation pattern of the first special symbol, a very short (0.1 second or 10 seconds) variation time is selected . Also, when the RUSH table 202f14 is referenced to select the variation pattern of the second special symbol, a short (1 second or 10 seconds) variation time is selected. This makes it possible to further enhance the degree of advantage after transitioning to the RUSH state (continuous mode).

  Next, a method of state transition of the pachinko machine 10 realized by performing control based on various tables defined in the ROM 202 and various flags and counters provided in the RAM 203 will be described with reference to FIG. 327. explain. FIG. 327 is a diagram showing a method of state transition of the pachinko machine 10 in the twelfth embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 327, the pachinko machine 10 of the twelfth embodiment is roughly classified into four modes (playing states). That is, the normal mode (latency state) shown at the top of FIG. 327, the chance mode A (positive change state) shown at the center left of FIG. 327, and the chance mode B (time reduction state) shown at the center right of FIG. And the continuous mode (normal state) shown at the bottom of FIG. 327.

  The normal mode, as described above, indicates that the special symbol is in a certain variation state and the normal symbol is in the normal state, and the probability of becoming a jackpot is high, and the right motorized character 64ra is difficult to open (the game ball is the right 1) It is difficult for the player to enter the ball slot 64r), which is the most disadvantageous gaming state for the player. In addition, as described above, chance mode A indicates that the special symbol is in a definite variation state and the normal symbol is in a short time state, and the jackpot probability is high, and the right first game is played by playing a right-handed game. Since the gaming ball frequently enters the mouth 64r (the motorized accessory 64ra is frequently opened), the gaming state is relatively advantageous to the player. In addition, chance mode B indicates the low probability state of the special symbol and the time reduction state of the normal symbol, and although the jackpot probability is low, by performing a right-handed game, like the probability change state, the right Since the game ball frequently enters the 1 ball entrance 640r, a game state that is more advantageous to the player than in the normal mode is formed. Furthermore, as described above, the continuous mode indicates the low probability state of the special symbol and the normal state of the normal symbol, and the fluctuation time set when the second special symbol lottery is executed Because it becomes significantly shorter than the other three gaming states (60 seconds → 1 second), it is possible to efficiently execute the lottery of the second special symbol by playing the right-handed game. And, as described above, in the second special symbol lottery, the player wins a small hit with a high probability (1/2) and the first specified winning opening 64a is opened, so just by playing a right-handed game, The game ball frequently enters the second entrance 640 and the first specified winning opening 64a to form an extremely advantageous game state in which a large number of winning balls can be obtained without going through a jackpot. Thus, the continuous mode is the most advantageous game mode for the player.

  As shown in the upper part of FIG. 327, there is a possibility that transition from the normal mode to another state may occur when a jackpot occurs and when the prescribed number of definite variations has elapsed. Specifically, as shown in the upper part of FIG. 327, the jackpot of the first special symbol becomes a jackpot, and when jackpot A12 determined at a rate of 5% as a jackpot type is selected (decided), chances after jackpot end Transition to mode A. In addition, it becomes the jackpot of the first special symbol, and if any of jackpot D12 to F12 determined at a rate of 30% is selected (decided) as a jackpot type, to chance mode B relatively advantageous after the jackpot end And transition. Furthermore, after the normal mode has been set, transition to the most advantageous continuous mode is made (without a big hit) by passing a prescribed number of definite variations (100 times). On the other hand, when the jackpot B12 or the jackpot C12 determined to be the jackpot type of the first special symbol and determined at a rate of 65% as the jackpot type is determined, the normal mode is set again after the jackpot end. Therefore, in the normal mode, it is more advantageous to pass the prescribed number of definite variations rather than becoming a big hit, so that the player can be expected to continue losing the prescribed number of times. . Thus, the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  As shown on the center left side of FIG. 327, there is a possibility of transition from the chance mode A (probability change state) to another state when it is a big hit and when the prescribed number of times of change occurs. Specifically, as shown on the center left side of FIG. 327, when the jackpot of the first special symbol is selected and any of jackpots D12 to F12 determined at a rate of 30% as a jackpot type is selected (decided) After the jackpot ends, the mode shifts to the relatively advantageous chance mode B. Further, after the chance mode A is set, by shifting the defined number of times of lottery (100 times), the mode is directly shifted to the most advantageous consecutive mode (the number of definite variations and the number of time savings are terminated at the same timing) ). In addition, when the jackpot C12 determined to be a jackpot of the first special symbol and determined as a jackpot type of 20% is determined, the normal mode is set after the jackpot end. On the other hand, when either the jackpot A12 or jackpot B12 determined as a jackpot type and the jackpot type is determined as a jackpot type of the first special symbol is selected (decided), to chance mode A again after the jackpot end And transition (loop Chance mode A). Therefore, in chance mode A, even if it becomes a big hit, it will be difficult to shift to the disadvantageous normal mode (the rate at which chance mode A is set will be high). Even if the player is won (cannot be shifted to the continuous mode), the player can be prevented from being discouraged. In the chance mode A, as in the normal mode, since the jackpot probability is relatively high (1/96), it is relatively difficult to cause the probability variation number to elapse. Therefore, in the chance mode A, since it is possible to realize the game characteristics that expect both of winning a jackpot and continuous disconnection, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  In addition, as shown on the center right side of FIG. 327, there is a possibility that transition from the chance mode B (probability change state) to another state may occur when a jackpot occurs and when a prescribed number of time passes. Specifically, as shown on the center right side of FIG. 327, when the jackpot A12 or B12, which is the jackpot of the first special symbol and is determined by the proportion of 50% as the jackpot type, is selected (decided) In the event, the game mode shifts to the relatively advantageous chance mode A after the jackpot ends. Furthermore, after chance mode A is set, transition to the most advantageous continuous mode is made directly by passing a prescribed number of short times (one of 2, 25, 50 and 100 times). . Moreover, it becomes a big hit of a 1st special symbol, and when a big hit C12 determined by a ratio of 20% is determined as a big hit type, a disadvantageous normal mode is set after the big hit end. On the other hand, when either the jackpot A12 or jackpot B12 determined as a jackpot type becomes a jackpot of the first special symbol and determined as a percentage of 30% is selected (decided), after the jackpot end, it is again to chance mode B And transition (loop Chance mode B). Therefore, in the chance mode B, as in the chance mode A, it becomes difficult to shift to the disadvantageous normal mode even if the jackpot is achieved (the rate at which the chance mode A is set becomes high), so the number of time saving passes Even if the player wins a jackpot (cannot be shifted to the continuous mode) before the player does, the player can be prevented from being discouraged. In addition, in chance mode B, since the jackpot probability is relatively low and the number of times of 50 times or less may be set as the number of time saving times, compared with chance mode A or the normal mode, directly through the jackpot There is a high possibility of transition to the continuous mode. Therefore, since the player can be made to feel that there is a high possibility of shifting to the continuous mode at the time of transition to the chance mode B, the player's expectation for the continuous mode can be improved.

  Further, as shown in the lower part of FIG. 327, there is a possibility of transition from the continuous mode (normal state) to another state only when the jackpot is achieved. Specifically, as shown in the lower part of FIG. 327, when the jackpot G12 determined to be the jackpot of the second special symbol and determined at a rate of 70% as the jackpot type is selected (decided), comparison is made after the jackpot end Transition to a chance mode A that is Moreover, it becomes a big hit of the second special symbol, and when a big hit I12 determined at a rate of 30% is determined as a big hit type, chance mode is easier to shift to continuous mode than chance mode A after the big hit ends. Move to B. In the case of a big hit I12, two times are set as the number of times, so when chance mode B is set after the big hit I12, the number of times is shortened and the mode is switched to the continuous mode again. It can be migrated. Therefore, it can be said that the jackpot I12 is a jackpot type that is more advantageous than the jackpot G12. As described above, in the consecutive mode, the variation time of the second special symbol is significantly shorter than that of the other modes, and the second special symbol lottery has a small probability with a high probability (1/2 probability) Because it becomes a hit, just by playing a right-handed game, the lottery of the second special symbol based on entering the ball to the second entrance 640 and during the small hitting period (during the opening period of the first specified winning opening 65a) The winning of the first specified winning combination opening 65a can be generated frequently. Therefore, until the jackpot in the second special symbol lottery, it is possible to continue to acquire the prize ball based on entering the first specified winning hole 65a (ie, only by continuing the right strike a large number of prizes) To create a very advantageous playing state that can get a ball. In addition, as mentioned above, since it is set as a structure where long fluctuation (60 seconds) is set as fluctuation time of the 2nd special symbol about the normal state which shifts based on having initialized the pachinko machine 10, with the normal mode Similarly, it creates an adverse gaming condition. As a result, by initializing the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to suppress the player from becoming excessively advantageous and to give an unexpected disadvantage to the hole.

  As described above, in the twelfth embodiment, four modes (playing state) of the normal mode, the chance mode A, the chance mode B, and the continuous mode are exchanged. As a result, since the game characteristics change every time the mode is changed, it is possible to make the game clearer. Thus, the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 328, the configuration of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the present twelfth embodiment will be described. FIG. 328 is a block diagram showing a configuration of the RAM 223 in the twelfth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 328, the RAM 223 in the twelfth embodiment is different from the configuration of the RAM 223 in the eleventh embodiment (see FIG. 307 (b)) in that a winning flag 223ka, a preparation state flag 223kb and RUSH The difference is that a middle flag 223 kc is added.

  The winning flag 223ka is a flag indicating whether or not the jackpot has been won one or more times since the power of the pachinko machine 10 has been turned on. If this winning flag 223ka is on, it means that the jackpot has been won one or more times after the power is turned on, if it is off, that the jackpot has not been won once even after the power is turned on Means If the gaming state is the normal state at the start of the fluctuation, the state of the won flag 223ka is referred to, and if the flag is off, the normal state after power on (that is, the second special symbol fluctuation pattern is long It is determined that the fluctuation is set in an adverse state) and the effect for the normal mode is executed (while the number of special drawing lottery times is less than 100 times), while the effect for the continuous mode is performed if it is on Run.

  The preparation state flag 223 kb is a flag for indicating whether or not the preparation state is set. If it is on, it means that it is in the preparation state (see FIG. 319 (a)). If it is off, it is in the preparation state I mean not. In the normal state, this preparation state flag 223 kb is referred to, and it is judged whether the preparation state has already been ended (switched to the display in RUSH) or not, and the preparation state presentation is executed, or Decide if you want to perform the RUSH state production.

  The RUSH middle flag 223 kc is a flag for indicating whether or not the continuous mode is on, which means that the continuous mode is on when it is on, and it is not the continuous mode if it is off. In the normal state, the flag 223 kb in the preparation state and the flag 223 kc in the RUSH are referred to, and it is determined which of the state presentation modes is to be set.

  The ceiling effect execution flag 223kd is executed when the probability variation number or the time reduction number is 1 and the effect of the effect mode in which the character 811 reaches the top of the rocky mountain (the effect of reaching the top) is being executed. Is a flag indicating If this ceiling effect executing flag 223kd is on, it means that the top reaching effect (see FIG. 318 (b)) is being executed, and if it is off, it means that the top reaching effect is not being executed. Do. By setting the symbol stop timing when the ceiling effect execution flag 223 kd is on, the mode is shifted to the continuous mode to be in a preparation state.

<About control processing of main controller in 12th embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 according to the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 329 to 333. First, with reference to FIG. 329, details of the first special symbol jackpot determination processing 13 (S331) in the twelfth embodiment will be described. FIG. 329 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol jackpot determination process 13 (S331) in the twelfth embodiment. The first special symbol jackpot determination processing 13 (S331) is a process that is executed instead of the first special symbol jackpot determination processing 12 (see FIG. 309) in the eleventh embodiment, and the first special symbol in the eleventh embodiment Based on the value of the first random number counter C1 shifted to the execution area of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, based on the gaming state set similarly to the symbol jackpot determination processing 12 (see FIG. 309) Is a process for executing a jackpot determination of whether or not a jackpot.

  Of the first special symbol jackpot determination processing 13 (see FIG. 329) in the twelfth embodiment, the processing of S401, S403 to S410, S412, and S421 is the first special symbol jackpot determination processing in the eleventh embodiment. The same process as each process of S401, S403 to S410, S412, and S421 of 12 (see FIG. 309) is executed.

  In addition, in the first special symbol jackpot determination process 13 (see FIG. 329) in the twelfth embodiment, when it is determined that the lottery result of the first special symbol this time is not a big hit in the process of S406, It is determined whether or not the player is elected, and the special figure 1 deviation variation process for executing the process corresponding to the determination result is executed (S431), and this process is ended. The special figure 1 deviation fluctuation process (S431) will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 330 is a flowchart showing the special figure 1 deviation change process (S431). In this special figure 1 deviation change processing (S431), first, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the first special symbol is a small hit (S3111), and when it is determined that the lottery result is a small hit (S3111: Yes ), Set the special figure 1 small hitting flag to show that the small hitting of the first special symbol is changing (S3112), and then set the drawing result of the first special symbol to the small hitting (S3113) ). Then, a small hit symbol is set as a first special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 (S3114), and this processing is ended.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S3111 that the lottery result of the first special symbol is not a small hit (that is, it is out) (S3111: No), the first symbol display device 37 is displayed first As a special symbol, an off symbol is set (S3115), and this processing is ended. This special figure 1 out-of-variation variation process (see FIG. 330) is a control process that is added as a result of being configured to be able to win a small hit when the first special symbol lottery is missed.

  Next, details of the first special symbol variation pattern selection processing 13 (S332) in the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The first special symbol variation pattern selection processing 13 (S332) in this twelfth embodiment is executed instead of the first special symbol variation pattern selection processing (see FIG. 35) in the eleventh embodiment (and the first embodiment). And the variation type stored in the execution area of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, as in the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 35). This is a process for selecting a fluctuation pattern based on the value of the counter CS1.

  Of the first special symbol variation pattern selection processing 13 (see FIG. 331) in this twelfth embodiment, the respective processing of S501 to S503 and S505 to S509 are respectively the eleventh in the eleventh embodiment (and the first embodiment) The same processing as each processing of S501 to S503 and S505 to S509 of 1 special symbol variation pattern selection processing (see FIG. 35) is executed. Further, in the special symbol variation pattern selection process 13 (see FIG. 331) in the twelfth embodiment, when the process of S503 is finished, next, the variation pattern scenario table 202ka (see FIG. 322 (b)) is read out. The variation pattern selection table corresponding to the previous jackpot type and the number of times of special drawing lottery is read out (S521). Specifically, if the previous jackpot is a probability change jackpot and the number of special drawing lottery times is 99 times or less, the latency / probability start table 202f11 (see FIG. 324) is read as a fluctuation pattern selection table, If the previous jackpot is normally a jackpot and the number of special drawing lottery times is 99 or less, the time-saving start table 202f12 (see FIG. 325) is read as a fluctuation pattern selection table. Further, after the pachinko machine 10 is initialized, if it has not won a big hit even once, and the number of special drawing lottery times is 99 times or less, the table 202f13 for normal start as a fluctuation pattern selection table (FIG. a) Read out). On the other hand, when the number of special drawing lottery times is 100 or more, the RUSH table 202f14 (see FIG. 326 (b)) is read as a variation pattern selection table regardless of the type of the previous big hit. When the process of S521 ends, the process proceeds to S505.

  By executing the first special symbol variation pattern selection processing 13 (see FIG. 331), it is possible to select a variation pattern with reference to the variation pattern selection table according to the previous jackpot type and the special drawing lottery number. Therefore, fluctuation patterns can be diversified. In addition, the degree of advantage is made different between the normal state set based on the initialization for the pachinko machine 10 and the normal state shifted from another obtained gaming state, and after initialization, it is different from the general gaming machine Similarly, while it can be set to a state disadvantageous to the player, it is possible to form the normal state shifted through other game states as the game state most advantageous to the player. In addition, although illustration was omitted, also in the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 42), the variation pattern scenario table 202ka is referred to similarly (that is, the previous big hit type, the number of special figure lottery numbers, And the variation pattern selection table is read out.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 332, the details of the first special symbol variation stop process 13 (S221) in the twelfth embodiment will be described. The first special symbol fluctuation stop process 13 (S221) is a process that is executed instead of the first special symbol fluctuation stop process (see FIG. 38) in the eleventh embodiment (and the first embodiment), and is the first process. Similar to the special symbol variation stop process (see FIG. 38), this is a process for setting the stop display of the first special symbol.

  Of the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 13 (see FIG. 332) in this twelfth embodiment, in each processing of S801 to S809, the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing in the eleventh embodiment (and the first embodiment) The same process as each process of S801 to S809 (see FIG. 38) is executed. In the first special symbol fluctuation stop process 13 (see FIG. 332) in the twelfth embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S801 that the special view 1 jackpot flag 203h is off (S801: No), (1) A special figure 1 off stop process is executed to set a stop symbol for the removal of the special symbol (S 821), and this process is ended. The details of the special figure 1 disconnection stop process (S821) will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 333 is a flowchart showing the special view 1 off stop processing (S821). In this special view 1 off stop process (S 821), it is determined whether the special view 1 small hit flag is on (S 3211), and the special view 1 small hit flag is determined to be on (S 3211: Yes) shows that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203s is set to ON (S3212) and the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203s is set to ON (that is, the forced stop of the second special symbol is set) The special figure 2 fluctuation stop command for setting is set (S3213). Next, the second special symbol is removed in the first symbol display device 37, and the symbol display is stopped and displayed (S3214), and a small hit scenario corresponding to the small hit type of this time is set (S3215). Then, the special figure 1 small hitting flag is set to OFF (S3216), and the small hitting middle flag 203p is set to ON (S3217), and this processing is ended. On the other hand, in the process of S3211, when it is determined that the special figure 1 small hit flag is off (S3211), there is no possibility to forcibly stop the variation display of the second special symbol or the possibility to start small hit Therefore, the process ends.

  By executing this special view 1 off stop process (refer to FIG. 333), when winning a small hit in the first special symbol lottery, simultaneously with the stop of the small hit symbol, the second special symbol of the variation display is removed Can be forced to stop display. Therefore, in the state where the long variation of the second special symbol is being executed, the long variation of the second special symbol can be forcibly terminated only by executing the lottery of the first special symbol and winning a small hit.

<About control processing of voice lamp control device in a 12th embodiment>
Next, various control processing executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 334 to 339. First, with reference to FIG. 334, the variable display setting process 13 (S4121) in the present twelfth embodiment will be described. The variable display setting process 13 (S4121) is a process executed in place of the variable display setting process 12 (see FIG. 314) in the eleventh embodiment, and the variable display setting process 12 (see FIG. 314) in the eleventh embodiment. In the same manner as in the third symbol display device 81, based on the first or second special pattern 2 variation pattern command received from the main controller 110, to display the first special symbol or the second special symbol Is a process for setting the display variation pattern command and transmitting the command to the display control device 114.

  In each processing of S5101, S5102, S5106 to S5108, S5110 to S5113, S5121, and S5125 among the fluctuation display setting processing 13 (see FIG. 334) in the twelfth embodiment, the fluctuation display setting processing in the eleventh embodiment The same processing as each processing of S5101, S5102, S5106-S5108, S5110-S5113, S5121 and S5125 of 12 (see FIG. 314) is executed. Further, in the variable display setting process 13 (see FIG. 334) in the twelfth embodiment, when the process of S5102 is ended, next, an effect mode according to the change type of the first special symbol notified by the change pattern command is set. The effect mode setting process for performing the process is executed (S5141), and the process proceeds to S5106. Details of the effect mode setting process (S5141) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Further, in the variable display setting process 13 (see FIG. 334) in the twelfth embodiment, when the process of S5108 ends, next, in the variable display setting process 12 for special view 2 in the eleventh embodiment (see FIG. 316). Instead, the special view 2 variation display setting process 13 is executed (S5142), and the process proceeds to S5110. The details of the variation display setting process 13 (S5142) for the special figure 2 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Further, in the variable display setting process 13 (see FIG. 334) in the twelfth embodiment, when the process of S5113 ends, next, the preparation state setting process for setting the preparation state (see FIG. 319 (a)) is performed. Then (S5143), the process ends. The details of the preparation state setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the details of the effect mode setting process (S5141) described above will be described. As described above, this effect mode setting process (S5141) is a process for setting an effect mode according to the change type of the first special symbol notified by the change pattern command. In the effect mode setting process (S5141), first, it is determined whether or not the normal state (continuous mode) is selected (S13101), and if it is determined that the normal state is not (S13101: No), then the time saving state It is determined whether (chance mode B) or not (S13102). In the process of S13102, when it is determined that the time saving state is not present (S1302: No), it means that the latent state (normal mode) or the probability changing state (chance mode A), and 100 times of number of probability changes Since this means that there is no possibility of shifting to the continuous mode unless it is made to occur, it is next determined whether the value of the fluctuation number counter 223ja is 99 (S13103).

  In the process of S13103, when it is determined that the value of the fluctuation number counter 223ja is 99 (S13103: Yes), a ceiling effect for selecting the effect mode of the last variable display effect before shifting to the continuous mode The setting process is executed (S13104), and the process proceeds to S13111. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S13102 that the gaming state is the short time state (S13102: Yes), it is then determined whether the remaining short time is 1 or not (S13105), and the remaining short time is 1 If it is, the same process as the ceiling effect setting process (S13104) described above is executed (S13110), and the process proceeds to S13111. On the other hand, in the process of S13105, when it is determined that the remaining number of shorts is not 1 (S13105: No), and in the process of S13103, when it is determined that the value of the fluctuation number counter 223ja is not 99 (S13103: No) Since there is no possibility of shifting to the continuous mode, the rendering mode corresponding to the variation type indicated by the variation pattern command is determined (S13106), and the process proceeds to S13111.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S13101 that the current gaming state is the normal state (S13101: Yes), then it is determined whether the winning completion flag 223ka is on or not (S13107). If it is determined that the done flag 223ka is on (S13107), a normal effect setting process for setting the effect mode for the normal state is executed (S13108), and the process proceeds to S13111. The details of the normal effect setting process (S13108) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the winning flag 223ka is off in the process of S13107 (S13107: No), it is then determined whether the value of the fluctuation number counter 223ja is 99 (S13109). If it is determined that the value of the number counter 223ja is 99 (S13109), the ceiling effect setting process (S13110) is executed, and the process proceeds to S13111. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S13109 that the value of the fluctuation number counter 223ja is not 99 (S13109: No), the process proceeds to S13108.

  In the process of S13111 executed after any one of S13104, S13106, S13108, and S13110, the display variation pattern command indicating the effect mode determined in any of S13104, S13106, S13108, and S13110 is set. Then (S13111), the process ends.

  Next, the details of the ceiling effect setting process (S13104, S13110) described above will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 336. As shown in FIG. 336, in the ceiling effect setting process (S4131), first, the data of the execution area corresponding to the first special symbol in the winning information storage area 223b is read (S13201), and the data of the read execution area It is determined whether or not the data corresponds to the big hit (S13202), and when it is determined that it is the big hit (S13202: Yes), the presentation mode (for notifying the big hit) corresponding to the variation type indicated by the variation pattern command The effect mode of is determined (S13203), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S13202, when it is determined that the data read out from the execution area is not the data showing the big hit (S13202: No), next, the first hold of the special symbol in the winning information storage area 223b The data of one area is read (S13204), and it is determined whether the read data of the reserved first area is data corresponding to a big hit. That is, it is determined whether or not the jackpot is won immediately after the shift to the continuous mode. In the process of S13205, if it is determined that the data of the reserved first area is a big hit (S13205: Yes), then it is data indicating a big hit D12 (ie, after the big hit is completed in a relatively short time (2 If it is determined whether or not it is a jackpot type to shift to consecutive villa mode) (S13206), and it is determined that it is not jackpot D12 (S13206: No) , The jackpot of the production mode of the presentation time which added 10 seconds (that is, the fluctuation time of the jackpot fluctuation in consecutive mode) to the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display to be executed this time (that is, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol for 2 times The striding jackpot effect) is determined (S13207), and the process ends. That is, in the twelfth embodiment, when it is determined that the big hit fluctuation of the big hit type other than the big hit D12 is started immediately after the start of the continuous mode by the prefetching, the transition to the continuous mode (see FIG. 318 (b) The presentation mode is performed as if the jackpot was won immediately before the continuous mode, without notifying the player. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling disappointed with the jackpot being started without having to enjoy the small hitting game once, even though the mode has been shifted to the continuous mode. can do.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S13205 that the data of the reserved first area of the first special symbol is not the data indicating a big hit (S13205: No), and the process of S13206, the data of the reserved first area is a big hit D12 If it is determined that the data is indicative of (S13206: Yes), the effect mode (see FIG. 318 (b)) for the character 811 to reach the top of the rock is determined (S13208), and the ceiling effect executing flag 223kd is turned on. Is set (S13209), and the process ends.

  By performing this ceiling effect setting process (refer to FIG. 336), the preliminary reading result of the lottery result of the first special symbol at the time of transitioning to the continuous mode (normal state) In accordance with the above, it is possible to preferably set whether or not to execute the peak reaching effect (see FIG. 318 (b)).

  Next, with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 338, the details of the special view 2 variable display setting process 13 (S5143) described above will be described. As described above, the special view 2 variation display setting process 13 (S5143) is a process that is executed instead of the special view 2 variation display setting process 12 (see FIG. 316) in the eleventh embodiment. When the variation display setting process 13 (refer to FIG. 316) for the special figure 2 is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the RUSH flag 223kc is on (S13401), and the RUSH flag 223kc is off If it is determined (S13401: No), then the variation display mode of the second special symbol corresponding to the variation type indicated by the variation pattern command is determined (S13402), and this processing is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S13401 that the RUSH flag 223kc is on (S13401: Yes), it is then determined whether the preparation status flag 223 kb is on (S13403), and the configuration status If it is determined that the middle flag 223 kb is off (S13403: No), this means that the preparation state is ended in the continuous mode, so for the continuous mode corresponding to the variation type indicated by the variation pattern command The presentation mode is determined (S13404), and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S13403 that the flag 223 kb during preparation is on (that is, it is during preparation) (S13403: Yes), then the variation pattern of small hit is notified by the variation pattern command. If it is determined that the variation type of small hitting has been notified (S13405: Yes), the flag in preparation state 223kb is set off (S13406), the effect of the variation display effect of this time As an aspect, an effect aspect (see FIG. 319 (b)) for notifying of RUSH rush is determined (S13407), and this processing is ended.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S13405 that the variation type is not a small hit (S13405: No), this means that the preparation state continues at least until the variation ends, so the variation pattern The presentation mode for the preparation state corresponding to the variation type indicated by the command is determined (S13408), and this processing is ended.

  By executing the variation display setting process 13 (see FIG. 338) for the special figure 2, the situation when the lottery of the second special symbol is performed (in the preparation state or in the state in which the RUSH rush has been notified) Depending on whether there is a state or a state other than the continuous mode, it is possible to execute the rendering of an appropriate aspect.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 339, details of the above-described preparation state setting process (S5144) will be described. The preparation state setting process (S5144) is a process for setting the preparation state (see FIG. 319 (a)) as described above. In this preparation state setting process (S5144), first, it is determined whether or not the ceiling rendering in-progress flag 223kd is on (S13501), and if it is determined to be off (S13501: No), transition to the preparation state Since there is no possibility of causing this process, the present process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S13501 that the ceiling rendering in-progress flag 223kd is on (S13501: Yes), the ceiling rendering in-progress flag 223kd is set off (S13502), and the display mode under RUSH preparation ( The setting shown in FIG. 319 (a) is set (S13503). Then, the flag RUSH 223 kc and the preparation state flag 223 kb are both set to ON (S 13504), and the process ends.

  By executing this preparation state setting process (see FIG. 339), it is possible to set the display mode of the preparation state from the time of transition to the continuous mode.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the twelfth embodiment, the lottery for the second special symbol is easy to be executed in the normal state, and the small hitting game is frequently executed as an advantageous gaming state (continuously mode). Configured and configured the latent condition as the most unfavorable normal mode. Then, by terminating the number of definite variations in the normal mode, it is configured to shift to the most advantageous continuous mode. In other words, it is possible to shift from the most disadvantageous gaming state directly to the most advantageous gaming state without going through the jackpot. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to play a game with one goal of causing the number of definite variations to elapse in the most disadvantageous normal mode (latency state).

  Here, conventionally, a gaming machine is known which shifts to a relatively advantageous normal state by setting the latent state to the most disadvantageous gaming state and ending the number of definite variations in the latent state. However, in such a conventional game machine, it is easier to provide an advantageous time saving state after the big hit if the big hit in the normal state is more successful than the big hit in the latent state. The normal condition is configured to be advantageous, and while staying in the normal condition (that is, while winning the jackpot), the holding ball forms a disadvantageous condition that tends to decrease It was a thing. In other words, even if the number of definite variations elapses in the latent state and the state shifts to the normal state, it does not become advantageous for the player at that time, and further, since it is necessary to win the big hit, the big hit from the latent state There is a problem that even if the player directly shifts to the normal state without intervention, the player does not have a sense of satisfaction and it is difficult to improve the player's interest.

  On the other hand, in the twelfth embodiment, the configuration is such that the mode is shifted directly to the most advantageous continuous mode (normal state) by terminating (evolving) the number of definite variations in the disadvantageous normal mode (latency state). did. That is, even if the jackpot is not won, it is configured to shift to an advantageous state in which it is possible to easily continuously acquire the winning balls intermittently only by continuing the right-handed game. By configuring in this way, when it is possible to end the number of definite variations, it is possible to make the player have a greater sense of satisfaction or achievement, thereby improving the player's interest in the game. Can.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the twelfth embodiment, the normal state set by initializing the pachinko machine 10 and the normal state transitioned by ending the number of probability variations or the number of time reductions in other gaming states. Thus, the degree of advantage of the player is made different. That is, different fluctuation pattern selection tables are referred to in the normal state set by initialization and the normal state shifted through another gaming state (a fluctuation pattern scenario corresponding to the gaming state set after the big hit ends (Refer to the variation pattern selection table based on the above). By configuring in this manner, the normal state set by initializing the pachinko machine 10 while forming the normal state shifted through another gaming state as the gaming state that is most advantageous to the player, It can be formed as a gaming state which is disadvantageous to the player. In other words, similar to a general gaming machine, since it can be set to a disadvantageous state for the player when the initialization is performed, it will be in the state advantageous to the player from immediately after the initialization, It is possible to suppress the occurrence of unexpected disadvantages. Further, in the twelfth embodiment, even in the normal state shifted after the initialization, when the number of lottery times of the special symbol reaches 100 times or more, the state most advantageous to the player is formed. ing. Therefore, even after the pachinko machine 10 is initialized, the same operation as the normal mode (the operation to shift to the continuous mode by being continuously removed in the special symbol drawing of 100 times) except for the jackpot probability is made be able to. Therefore, since the state after the initialization becomes excessively disadvantageous for the player and it is possible to suppress the player from avoiding the game by the pachinko machine 10, the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved. .

  Moreover, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the twelfth embodiment, it is configured to notify as a preparation state the period from the shift to the continuous mode to the first winning of a small win in the second special symbol lottery, When it becomes a situation where it is possible to obtain a winning ball (i.e., when the small hitting fluctuation is started), it is reported that it is in the advantageous state (RUSH state). By configuring in this manner, it is possible to prevent the player from having a sense of dissatisfaction because the situation where the winning balls can not be acquired despite the notification of the RUSH state continues for a long time. Furthermore, in the twelfth embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which, when a jackpot occurs in the drawing of one of the special symbols, control is performed so that the drawing of the other special symbol performed during the execution of the jackpot variation is forcibly removed. ing. Therefore, when transitioning from the normal mode to the continuous mode, the first special symbol holding ball exists, and the variation display of the first special symbol started simultaneously with the start of the continuous mode is a big hit , While the jackpot variation is being executed, it will always fall out in the lottery of the second special symbol. That is, when the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is started at the time of transition to the preparation state, the right-handed game is continuously performed, and even if the lottery of the second special symbol is continuously executed, the game is removed. Is continuous (does not win in the small hit), the preparation state will be long (during the end of the big hit fluctuation). As a result, it is possible to realize the novel game characteristic that the expectation that the jackpot variation of the first special symbol is being executed can be improved as the disconnection continues in the preparation state.

  In the twelfth embodiment, the probability of becoming a small hit is set to 1/2 in the lottery of the second special symbol, but it is not limited to this, and the small hitting probability may be determined arbitrarily . For example, if the small hitting probability is high, and the second special symbol lottery is executed, as in the eleventh embodiment, it is configured to be a small hitting (for example, with a probability of 59/60) It is also good. When configured in this way, it is possible to improve the sense of expectation for the first special symbol in fluctuation to be a big hit if deviation occurs even once in the preparation state, so that the second special symbol deviates in the preparation state. The player's interest in the event of becoming Also, the higher the probability of a small hit, the shorter the preparation state tends to be (the average number of lottery times from the transition to the continuous mode to the winning of the small hit is smaller), so after shifting to the continuous mode The period until securing balls can be shortened by the winning balls. That is, since it is possible to give the player a winning ball faster, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game. On the other hand, the small hitting probability may be lowered, and it may be configured to be easily detached during the preparation state. Since it becomes easy to carry out detachment | deletion by comprising in this way, the sense of expectation for being in the jackpot fluctuation of the 1st special symbol can be held more frequently. Thus, the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the twelfth embodiment, basically, the configuration is such that the mode is shifted to the continuous mode when the number of definite variations or the number of time reductions is completed, but the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, after the jackpot ends, a jackpot of the type in which the direct connection mode is set may be provided. In this case, when the jackpot of the type for which the direct connection mode is set is won, the RUSH table 202f14 may be referred to immediately after the jackpot ends. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide a jackpot of the type that shifts directly to the continuous shooting mode after the jackpot end, while suppressing an advantage after initialization of the pachinko machine 10 becomes excessive. The game can be played by paying attention to the jackpot type. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest of the player in the game. In addition, as a transition condition to the continuous mode, for example, when the probability change state is won again in a certain number of times (for example, five times) in a continuous state, the game state after the big hit end is forced to normal state It may be set to That is, a so-called probability variation limit function may be mounted. By configuring in this manner, even if the odd normal mode is won in a continual odd mode, it is possible to have a feeling as if approaching to the continuous mode, so the player's motivation for the game Can be enhanced.

  In the twelfth embodiment, a dedicated variation pattern table is referred to in the initial state so that the initial state of the pachinko machine 10 does not become excessively advantageous. It may be configured to be in the mode. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to make the player think that he / she wants to start playing with the pachinko machine 10 immediately after the opening of the hall in expectation of being initialized, so the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be increased. It can be improved.

  In the twelfth embodiment, the degree of expectation that is a big hit in the lottery of the first special symbol increases as the disconnection continues in the lottery of the second special symbol during the preparation state, but In addition to this, it may be configured to execute an effect that indicates the number of consecutive disconnections during the preparation state (that is, indicates the degree of expectation that the first special symbol is fluttering). Specifically, for example, the configuration may be such that the background color on the display screen in the preparation state changes from blue to green to red to iridescent colors every time the deviance continues twice. With such a configuration, it can be easily understood that the player who does not know the use of the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment is better as the second special symbol continues to be released. As a result, it is possible to realize game characteristics that are easy for the player to understand.

13th Embodiment
Next, with reference to FIGS. 340 to 344, a pachinko machine 10 according to a thirteenth embodiment will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 in the twelfth embodiment described above, the normal state is an advantageous gaming state in which the second special symbol lottery is easily performed and the small hitting game is frequently performed, while the latent state is It is configured to be the gaming state that is most disadvantageous to the player. In addition, it is expected that the deviation will continue over the number of definite variations set in the disadvantageous latent condition by assuming that the number of definite variations in the latent condition ends in many cases of transition to the normal condition. It was configured to be able to realize the novel playability to let you.

  On the other hand, in the thirteenth embodiment, two gaming states, the latent state and the normal state, are configured as an advantageous gaming state in which the small hitting game is frequently executed, while the probability changing state and the time saving state are It constitutes as a game state which becomes disadvantageous for the person. As a result, since it is possible to set an advantage while the time saving state is set, which is advantageous in a general gaming machine, and to set an advantage without the time saving state, the time saving state ends. It is possible to realize innovative gameplay in which the player wishes to play a game.

  The pachinko machine 10 in the thirteenth embodiment differs from the pachinko machine 10 in the twelfth embodiment in that the board configuration of the game board 13 is the board configuration of the game board 13 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 2) In that the configuration of the ROM 202 of the main control unit 110 is partially changed, and that the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 is partially changed. is there. The other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control apparatus 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 are the twelfth It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, the same components as those of the twelfth embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and the description thereof will be omitted.

  First, the mode in the thirteenth embodiment will be briefly described. In the thirteenth embodiment, the normal state is configured as the most advantageous state, and the latent state is also configured as the game state advantageous to the player although the degree of advantage is lower than the normal state. On the other hand, the probability change state and the time saving state are configured as a disadvantageous game state in which the game should be progressed by the left strike game. It should be noted that since it is easier to shift to the most advantageous normal state if the time reduction state is easier than the definite change state, it can be said that the time reduction state is more advantageous for the player. In the thirteenth embodiment, the most disadvantageous certainty state is referred to as a normal mode, the short time state is referred to as a chance mode, and the latent state advantageous to the player is referred to as a continuous mode A, and the player The most favorable normal state for the camera is referred to as a continuous mode B. In the normal state set based on the initialization of the pachinko machine 10, as in the twelfth embodiment described above, only the long variation is selected when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed. Left handed form a disadvantageous state where it is necessary to play the game.

<Electrical configuration in the thirteenth embodiment>
First, the ROM 202 provided in the main control apparatus 110 according to the thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 340 to 342. Here, the ROM 202 in the thirteenth embodiment is the same as the ROM 202 in the twelfth embodiment except for the defined contents of the first random number table 202a, the defined contents of the second random number table 202c, and the jackpot type selection table 202d. The prescribed content and the prescribed content of the fluctuation pattern selection table 202f are partially changed. First, the configuration of the first random number table 202a defined (stored) in the ROM 202 in the twelfth embodiment of the thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 238 (a). FIG. 321 (b) describes the first hit random number table 202 a in the twelfth embodiment.

  FIG. 340 (a) shows the defined contents of the first random number table 202a. As shown in FIG. 340 (a), in the first hit random number table 202a in the thirteenth embodiment, as a random value (counter value) determined to be a big hit in the low probability state of the special symbol, "0 to 3" Four random number values (counter values) are defined. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 340 (a), eight random numbers (0 to 7) (counter values) are defined as random number values (counter values) determined to be a big hit in the high probability state of the special symbol. ing.

  Therefore, the probability of becoming a big hit when the lottery of the special symbol is executed in the low probability state of the special symbol is 1/120 (4/480), while the lottery of the special symbol is in the high probability state of the special symbol. The probability of being a big hit if executed is 1/60 (8/480). The change of the jackpot probability in the thirteenth embodiment is performed to further enhance the superiority of the normal state. That is, by configuring the jackpot to be easily won in the latent state, the latent state is difficult to continue for a long time. Therefore, since it is possible to play the game with a stronger expectation of shifting to the normal state in which the small winning state frequently wins easily, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  Next, details of the second random number table 202c in the thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 340 (b). FIG. 340 (b) is a diagram showing the definition contents of the second random number table 202c in the thirteenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 340 (b), in the second random number table 202c in the thirteenth embodiment, “0” as a random number value (counter value) determined to be a normal symbol hit in the low probability state of the normal symbol Is defined. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 340 (b), two random number values (counter values) of “0, 1” are used as random number values (counter values) determined to be a hit of an ordinary symbol in the time saving state of an ordinary symbol. It is prescribed.

  That is, in the thirteenth embodiment, even in the time saving state of the normal symbol, it is configured so that the normal symbol can be hit only with a low probability. As a result, even if the left hitting game is performed in the time saving state or the probability changing state, the electric role item 64a is difficult to be released, so the game ball hardly enters the lower first ball entry port 64b2. Therefore, it is necessary to execute the drawing of the first special symbol by causing the game ball to enter the upper first ball entrance 64b1 by the left-handed game, so the probability change state or the time saving state is disadvantageous in that the holding ball easily decreases. It becomes a good gaming state.

  Next, the details of the jackpot type selection table 202d in the thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 341 is a diagram showing defined contents of the jackpot type selection table 202d in the thirteenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 341, in the thirteenth embodiment, seven jackpot types of “big jack A13” to “big jack G13” are defined as jackpot types of the first special symbol. In addition, as the jackpot type of the second special symbol, three jackpot types of "big hit H13" to "big hit J13" are defined.

  As shown in FIG. 341, as the jackpot type of the first special symbol (special figure 1), "big jack A13" as the jackpot type for the range of the first hit type counter C2 is "0 to 4" It is defined in association with it. In this "big hit A13", the number of rounds of the big hit is 8 rounds, and after the big hit end is a big hit (8 round probability variation big hit) of the type set in the continuous mode A (latency state). As described above, since the consecutive mode A is a gaming state in which the small hit game is frequently executed only by performing a right hit, the "big hit A13" is compared in terms of the game state after the big hit ends. Jackpot type is

  Further, as shown in FIG. 341, “big hit B13” is defined as the big hit type in association with the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “5 to 9”. In this "big hit B13", the number of rounds of the big hit is eight rounds, and the big hit after the big hit is a type of big hit (2-round probability variation big hit) set in the most disadvantageous normal mode (probability variation state). In addition, since the number of time saving times set after the end of “big hit B13” is set to 25 times, it is relatively easy to end the time saving counts. By terminating the time saving number, the continuous mode A is set until the definite variation number (100 times) ends thereafter.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 341, “big hit C13” is defined as the big hit type in association with the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “10 to 29”. This "big hit C13" is a type of big hit (2 round probability variation big hit) in which the number of rounds of the hit is 2 rounds and the jackpot end is set to the most disadvantageous normal mode (probability state). In the normal mode after the "big hit C13" is finished, since the number of time saving is set to 50, it is more difficult to shift to the continuous mode A than "big hit B13". Therefore, "big hit C13" is a big hit of the type that is more disadvantageous than "big hit B13".

  Further, as shown in FIG. 341, when the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "30 to 74", "big hit D13" is defined in association with the big hit type. In this "big hit D13", the number of rounds of the big hit is 2 rounds, and after the big hit end is a big hit (2 round probability variation big hit) of the type set to the normal mode (probability variation state). In the normal mode after the "big hit D13" is finished, since the number of time saving is set to 75, it is more difficult to shift to the continuous mode A than "big hit C13". Therefore, "the jackpot D13" is a jackpot of a type that is more disadvantageous than "the jackpot B13" or "the jackpot C13".

  Further, as shown in FIG. 341, when the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "75", "big hit E13" is specified as the big hit type in association with it. In this "big hit E13", the number of rounds of the big hit is eight rounds, and after the big hit end is a big hit (8 rounds usually big hit) of the type set to chance mode (time saving state). In the chance mode to be set after the "big hit E13" is finished, since the number of time saving is set to 2 times, it is extremely easy to end the number of time saving. Since the transition to the most advantageous continuous mode B (normal state) is made when the number of shorting times ends in the chance mode, the "big hit E13" is the most advantageous jackpot among the jackpot types of the first special symbol.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 341, when the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “76 to 80”, “big hit F13” is defined as being a big hit type. In this "big hit F13", the number of rounds of the big hit is 2 rounds, and after the big hit end is the big hit (2 round normal big hit) of the type which is set to chance mode (time saving state). In addition, since the time reduction number of the chance mode set after completion | finish of "big hit F13" is set to 50 times, it will become difficult to shift to continuous mode B rather than "big hit E13." Therefore, "big hit F13" is a big hit of the kind which is more disadvantageous than "big hit E13". In addition, since it shifts directly to the most advantageous continuous mode B by ending the time-saving number of times in the chance mode with a low jackpot probability, the mode shifts to the normal mode from "big hit B13" to "big hit D13". It can be said that it is an advantage (it is easy to shift to continuous mode B) jackpot type. Moreover, it can be said that it is more disadvantageous than “big hit B13” to “big hit D13” if focusing only on the point that the big hit probability becomes low.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 341, when the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “81 to 99”, “big hit G13” is defined in association with the big hit type. In this "big hit G13", the number of rounds of the big hit is 2 rounds, and after the big hit end is the big hit (2 round normal big hit) of the type which is set to chance mode (time saving state). In addition, since the time reduction number of the chance mode set after the end of "big hit G13" is set to 75 times, it becomes more difficult to shift to the continuous mode B than "big hit E13" or "big hit F13" . Therefore, "the jackpot G13" is a jackpot of the type which is more disadvantageous than the "jackpot E13" or the "jacket F13".

  On the other hand, as the jackpot type of the second special symbol (special figure 2), "big hit H13" as the big hit type is defined in association with the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "0 to 24" ing. In this "big hit H13", the number of rounds of the big hit is eight rounds, and the gaming state after the big hit is a big hit (8 round probability variation big hit) of the type set to continuous mode A or normal mode. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 341, when winning a "big hit H13" in continuous mode B (normal state), after the big hit is set to continuous mode A (latency state), When the "big hit H13" is won in the normal mode (probable change state), the chance mode (time reduction state), and the continuous mode A (latency state), the after-big-hit end is set to the normal mode.

  Further, "big hit I13" is defined as the big hit type in association with the range of the first hit type counter C2 of "25 to 74". In this "big hit I13", the number of rounds of the big hit is eight rounds, and the gaming state after the big hit is a big hit (8 round probability variation big hit) of the type set to continuous mode A or normal mode. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 341, when winning a "big hit H13" in continuous mode A (latency state) or continuous mode B (normal state), after the big hit ends continuous mode A (latent If the "big hit H13" is won in the normal mode (positive change state) or the chance mode (short time state) while being set to the definite state), the end of the big hit is set to the normal mode.

  Further, "big hit J13" is defined as the big hit type in association with the range of the first hit type counter C2 of "75 to 99". In this "big hit J13", the number of rounds of the big hit is eight rounds, and the gaming state after the big hit is a big hit (8 rounds usually big hit) of the type set in the chance mode. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 341, when winning in "big hit J13" in the continuous mode B, two times are set as the time reduction number, so an advantageous state in which the time reduction number is easily ended is formed . When the jackpot J13 is won in the continuous mode A, 75 times are set as the time reduction number, and when the jackpot J13 is won in the normal mode or the chance mode, 100 times is set as the time reduction number.

  In the normal mode or chance mode, if you get a big win in the second special symbol lottery, to set 100 times as the number of time saving is the second entry by the right-handed game in the gaming state that should play the left-handed game This is to control the irregular game method for aiming the ball mouth 640. As described above, in the thirteenth embodiment, while the time saving state of the normal symbol is set, the gaming state disadvantageous to the player is formed. Therefore, in the normal mode or chance mode, when it becomes a big hit in the lottery of the second special symbol, it is anomalous to the player by configuring the time saving state of the disadvantageous normal symbol to be long (100 times). Can make you think that you do not want to Therefore, it is possible to suppress the unusual game method of performing the right-handed game in the gaming state in which the left-handed game should be performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 342, the table 202f11 for probability variation / latency start time in the thirteenth embodiment will be described. The table 202f11 for probability change / latency start in the thirteenth embodiment is a lottery for the first special symbol in the latent state with respect to the table 202f11 (see FIG. 324) for the probability change / latency start in the twelfth embodiment. As the variation pattern to be selected when is executed, only the variation pattern with a short variation time (0.1 seconds or 10 seconds) is selected, and the lottery of the second special symbol is executed in the latent state The difference is that only fluctuation patterns having a short fluctuation time (1 second or 10 seconds) are selected as fluctuation patterns to be selected. In this change, while the latent state in the twelfth embodiment is the normal mode disadvantageous to the player, the latent state in the thirteenth embodiment is configured as the continuous mode A which is advantageous for the player. It is due to the fact that

  Next, a method of state transition of the pachinko machine 10 realized by performing control based on various tables defined in the ROM 202 and various flags and counters provided in the RAM 203 will be described with reference to FIG. explain. FIG. 343 is a diagram showing a method of state transition of the pachinko machine 10 in the thirteenth embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 343, the pachinko machine 10 of the thirteenth embodiment is roughly classified into four modes (playing states). That is, the normal mode (positive change state) shown at the top of FIG. 343, the chance mode (short time state) shown at the center of FIG. 343, and the continuous mode A (latency state) shown at the lower left of FIG. , And a continuous mode B (normal state) shown on the lower right side of FIG. 343.

  The normal mode, as described above, indicates that the special symbol is in a definite variation state and the normal symbol is in a short time state, and the probability of becoming a jackpot is high, and the motorized role 64a is more easily released than the normal state of the normal symbol. However, the probability of being released is a low probability, and the gaming ball hardly enters the lower first entrance 64b 2. Therefore, since it is necessary to advance the game by causing the game ball to enter the first upper ball entrance 64b1 in the left-handed game, the game state disadvantageous to the player is formed. In addition, chance mode, as mentioned above, indicates the low probability state of the special symbol, and the time saving state of the normal symbol, and although it is necessary to advance the game by the left strike game as in the normal mode, usually Since it is easier to shift to the most advantageous continuous mode A than the mode, the game state is more advantageous than the normal mode. In addition, the continuous pattern mode A indicates that the special symbol is in a definite variation state and the normal symbol is in a normal state, and by performing a right-handed game, an advantageous gaming state in which a small hit game is frequently executed Form. Also, the continuous mode A indicates the low probability state of the special symbol and the normal state of the normal symbol, and, like the continuous mode A, a very advantageous game in which a small hit game is frequently executed. Form a state.

  As shown in the upper part of FIG. 343, there is a possibility that transition from the normal mode to another state may occur when a jackpot occurs and when the prescribed number of definite variations has elapsed. Specifically, as shown in the upper part of FIG. 343, when the jackpot A13 determined to be the jackpot of the first special symbol and determined at a rate of 5% as the jackpot type is selected (decided), the train is continued after the jackpot end Shift to Chuang mode A. In addition, it becomes the jackpot of the first special symbol, and if any of jackpots E13 to G13 determined at a rate of 25% is selected (decided) as a jackpot type, it will be a comparatively advantageous chance mode after the jackpot end. Transition. Furthermore, after the normal mode is set, the mode is shifted directly (without a big hit) to the continuous mode A, which is advantageous for the player, by allowing the prescribed number of definite variations (100 times) to elapse. On the other hand, when the jackpot B13 to C13 determined to be the jackpot of the first special symbol and determined at a rate of 70% as the jackpot type is determined, the normal mode is set again after the jackpot end. Therefore, in the normal mode, it is more advantageous to pass the prescribed number of definite variations rather than becoming a big hit, so that the player can be expected to continue losing the prescribed number of times. . Thus, the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In addition, as shown in the center of FIG. 343, there is a possibility that transition from the chance mode to another state may occur when a jackpot occurs and when a prescribed number of time passes. Specifically, as shown in the center of FIG. 343, when the jackpot A13 determined to be the jackpot of the first special symbol and determined at a rate of 5% as the jackpot type is selected (decided), the train is continued after the jackpot end Shift to Chuang mode A. In addition, it becomes the big hit of the first special symbol, when either of big hit B13-D13 which is decided with ratio of 70% as the big hit classification is selected (decided), it moves to the disadvantageous normal mode after the big hit end . Furthermore, after the chance mode is set, by passing a prescribed number of short times (two times, 25 times, 50 times, 75 times, or 100 times), it is possible to go to the most advantageous continuous action mode B for the player. And transition directly (without the jackpot). On the other hand, when the jackpot E13 to G13 determined to be a jackpot of the first special symbol and determined as a jackpot type of 25% is determined, the chance mode is set again after the jackpot end. Therefore, in the chance mode, even if the jackpot is reached, the rate of falling to the current state or the disadvantageous normal mode becomes extremely high, so it is more advantageous to pass the specified number of times than the jackpot. It is easy to become. As a result, it is possible to make the player expect the disconnection to continue over the prescribed number of times, and it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  Further, as shown on the lower left side of FIG. 343, there is a possibility that transition from the continuous mode A to another state may occur when a big hit occurs and when the prescribed number of definite variations elapses. Specifically, as shown on the lower left side of FIG. 343, when the jackpot H13 which is the jackpot of the second special symbol and is determined by the proportion of 25% as the jackpot type is selected (decided), after the jackpot end Transition to the disadvantageous normal mode. In addition, it becomes the big hit of the 2nd special design, when big hit J13 which is decided with ratio of 25% is selected as the big hit type (decision), it moves to the disadvantageous chance mode after the big hit end. Furthermore, after the continuous mode A is set, by passing a prescribed number of definite variations (100 times after the end of the previous big hit), the direct mode to the continuous mode B that is most advantageous for the player is directly performed (without using the big hit). )Transition. On the other hand, if the jackpot of the second special symbol is determined and the jackpot I13 determined at a rate of 50% is determined as the jackpot type, the consecutive villa mode A is set again after the jackpot end. Therefore, in the continuous mode A, in addition to being able to obtain a prize ball while staying in the continuous mode, it becomes easier for the player to loop the relatively same mode when becoming a big hit, which is advantageous for the player. It becomes. Furthermore, if it is possible to make the number of definite variations pass, it shifts to the most advantageous continuous mode B, so that it is advantageous for the player to have an advantage for the player even if the jackpot is reached or not (small hit) continues. Form.

  In addition, as shown in the lower right of FIG. 343, there is a possibility that transition from the continuous mode B to another state may be made only when the jackpot is reached. Specifically, as shown on the lower right side of FIG. 343, when the jackpot H13, I13 decided to be a jackpot of the second special symbol and determined at a rate of 75% as a jackpot type is selected (decision), the jackpot After the end, the mode shifts to the continuous mode A which is advantageous to the player. On the other hand, when the jackpot J13 of the second special symbol is determined and the jackpot J13 determined at a rate of 25% is determined as the jackpot type, the chance mode is set after the jackpot end. In the chance mode to be set after the end of the jackpot J13, since the time reduction number is set to 2 times, it is possible to shift the mode to the continuous reduction mode B by substantially ending the time reduction number. Therefore, the jackpot type is more pleasing to the player than the jackpots H13 and I13 that shift to the continuous mode A. As described above, in the continuous mode B, in addition to being able to obtain a prize ball while staying in the continuous mode, there is a possibility that the player shifts to the normal mode which is disadvantageous to the player if a jackpot occurs. Because it is not, it is very advantageous for the player.

<Control Processing of Main Control Device in Thirteenth Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 344, control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110 in the thirteenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 344 is a flowchart showing normal symbol variation processing 14 (S121) in the thirteenth embodiment. This normal symbol variation processing 14 (S121) is a process executed in place of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 48) in the twelfth embodiment (and the first embodiment), and the normal symbol variation in the twelfth embodiment Similar to the processing (see FIG. 48), processing for displaying on the second symbol display device (not shown) and processing for passing the ball in the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 are performed It is a process for

  Of the ordinary symbol variation processing 14 (see FIG. 344) in the thirteenth embodiment, the twelfth execution is carried out in each processing of S1801, S1802, S1804, S1807 to S1810, S1812, S1814, S1816 to S1818, S1821, and S1823 respectively. S1801, S1802, S1804, S1807 to S1810, S1812, S1814, S1816 to S1818, S1821 and S1823 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 48) in the form (and the first embodiment) are executed. Be done.

  Moreover, in the normal symbol variation processing 14 (see FIG. 344) in the thirteenth embodiment, when the processing of S1810 or S1812 is finished, next, 60 seconds is set as the variation time of the normal symbol (S1831), Transfer to S1814. That is, in the thirteenth embodiment, a long fluctuation time is set regardless of the lottery result of the normal symbol or the gaming state. Therefore, even in the definite variation state or the time saving state in which the time saving state of the normal symbol is set, it is possible to reduce the chance that the electric combination 64a is opened.

  Further, in the normal symbol variation processing 14 (see FIG. 344) in the thirteenth embodiment, when it is determined that the time symbol is not in the normal symbol state in the processing of S1821 (S1821: No), the motorized part 64a is opened. The time and number of times are set to “0.1 seconds × 1 time” (S1832), and the process proceeds to S1823. On the other hand, in the process of S1821, when it is determined that the time saving state of the normal symbol is in progress (S1821: Yes), the opening time and the number of motorized role objects 64a are set to "0.2 seconds x 1 time" (S1833), the process proceeds to S1823. As described above, in the thirteenth embodiment, even in the time-saving state of the normal symbol, the variation time of the normal symbol is long (60 seconds), and the opening time of the motorized character 64a is short. It is possible to make it difficult for the gaming ball to enter the first ball entrance 64b2. Therefore, the gaming state in which the time saving state of the normal symbol is set can be set to a disadvantageous state for the player.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the thirteenth embodiment, the two gaming states, the latent state and the normal state, are configured as an advantageous gaming state in which the small hitting game is frequently executed. Here, conventionally, by executing the lottery of the second special symbol in the latent state, it is configured to win a small hit with high probability, the gaming machine in which the latent state is more advantageous than the probability variation state Has been proposed. In other words, there has been proposed a gaming machine equipped with an advantageous state (so-called small hit RUSH function) capable of obtaining a winning ball without winning a jackpot. However, in such a conventional game machine, even if it shifts to an advantageous state other than the latent state such as a probability change state, if it does not shift to the latent state (small hit RUSH state), a sense of satisfaction for the player It was difficult to hold On the other hand, in the thirteenth embodiment, two types of states having different degrees of advantage are provided as the so-called small per-piece RUSH states, and the small per-piece RUSH state (continuous mode A) having a relatively low degree of advantage It was set up to migrate relatively easily. By configuring in this manner, since it is possible to form the pachinko machine 10 capable of relatively freely experiencing the small hit RUSH state, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

Modification of the thirteenth embodiment
Next, a modification of the thirteenth embodiment described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 345 and 346. In the above-described thirteenth embodiment, the lottery of the second special symbol having a high probability of winning in a small hit is easy to be executed (the variation time of the second special symbol) in the gaming state in the latent state and the normal state. It formed as an advantageous state. That is, small hit of the second special symbol frequently occurs only by continuously hitting the right, and the first specified winning opening 65a is frequently opened, so that the winning ball can be won even if the jackpot is not won. It is configured to form an advantageous state that can be acquired continuously (intermittently).

  On the other hand, in the modification of the thirteenth embodiment, a small hit of the first special symbol frequently occurs by playing a game aiming at the first entrance 64b1 by left-handed game, and the small hit By playing the game by aiming at the second entry port 640 by an advantageous state (latency state) where it is easy to enter the game ball into the second specified winning opening 650a opened during the game, A configuration in which small hits of the second special symbol frequently occur, and an advantageous state (normal state) in which the game ball can easily enter the second specified winning opening 650a opened during the small hit game And That is, by performing the left-handed game, by performing the right-handed game with the advantageous state (latency state) in which the winning balls can be intermittently (continuously) obtained without winning the jackpot. There are two types of advantageous states (normal states) in which winning balls can be obtained intermittently (continuously) without winning a jackpot. Also, by configuring the first special symbol small hit probability (for example, 1/5) to be lower than the second special symbol small hit probability (for example, 59/60), the normal state It is configured to be in a more advantageous state in which it is easier to obtain a winning ball than in a latent state.

  The pachinko machine 10 according to the modification of the thirteenth embodiment differs from the pachinko machine 10 according to the thirteenth embodiment in configuration in that the small hitting probability is changed, and the opening / closing control of the motorized accessory 64aj is changed And the point that the board configuration of the game board 13 is changed. With reference to FIG. 345 and FIG. 346, the board structure of the game board 13 of this modification is demonstrated.

  As shown in FIG. 345, the gaming board 13 in the present modification is provided with the motorized part 64aj instead of the motorized part 64a provided concomitantly with the lower first ball entrance 64b2. Drinking is different. In the same manner as the motorized accessory 64a in the thirteenth embodiment (and the first embodiment), the motorized accessory 64aj is normally in a closed state where the game ball can not easily enter the lower first ball entry port 64b2. An open state (second state) in which the game ball is more likely to enter the lower first ball entry port 64b2 compared to the closed state when the first state is formed and a hit is made in the normal symbol lottery. Form Although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 346, in the present modification, even if the open state is set, the game ball does not enter the lower first ball entry port 64b 2 substantially. In addition, in this modification, when it becomes a big hit, and when it becomes a small hit in the lottery of the second special symbol, it is configured to open the first specified winning opening 65a, the lottery of the first special symbol The second specified winning opening 650a is configured to be opened when the player wins a small hit.

  Next, the correspondence between the state of the motorized role piece 640aj and the flow-down path of the gaming ball will be described with reference to FIG. First, with reference to FIG. 346 (a), the flow-down path of the gaming ball in the state where the motorized accessory 64aj is closed will be described. As shown in FIG. 346 (a), with the motorized symbol 64aj closed, the game ball that has flowed down from above toward the motorized symbol 64aj collides (interferences) with the motorized symbol 64aj and the path The second variable winning device is changed (changed), flowing down to the right side of the second variable winning device 650 (path Ka1), or by collision (interference) with the electric role item 64aj to change the path. It does not flow toward 650 (path Ka2) or directly to the second variable winning device 650 (path Ka3) without colliding (interfering) with the motorized component 64aj. That is, in the state where the motorized accessory 64aj is closed, although it can not enter the lower first ball entrance 64b2, it becomes relatively easy to reach the second variable winning device 650. Therefore, in the latent state in which the normal state of the normal symbol is set (the electric character 64aj is hard to be released), the lottery of the first special symbol is executed by playing the left hitting game, and the probability of 1/5 When the second specified winning opening 650a is opened, it becomes possible to relatively easily enter the game ball into the second specified winning opening 650a. It should be noted that when the second special symbol lottery is executed in the latent state, the long fluctuation is set regardless of the lottery result, so there is little merit for the player even if the right strike is continued (( Although small wins will be won, the interval between small hits will be long, so it will be difficult to obtain a winning ball).

  Further, FIG. 346 (b) is a diagram showing the flow-down path of the gaming ball in a state where the motorized accessory 64aj is opened. As shown in FIG. 346 (b), in the state where the motorized character 64aj is opened, the game ball which has flowed down from above the motorized character 64aj collides (interferences) with the motorized character 64aj to cause the flow-down path. Even if it is changed, it is less likely to be reflected in the direction of the second variable winning device 650 (paths Kb1, Kb2). In addition, since the area of the region formed between the motorized part 64aj and the lower first ball entry port 64b2 becomes wider by opening the motorized part 64aj, interference with the nail or the like lowers the first part. The game ball is relatively easy to enter the ball entrance 64b2 (for example, a ratio of about one ball to 200 balls). In addition, it is configured as a state where it is difficult for the game ball to enter the ball, as compared with the time saving state of the normal symbol in the other embodiments, simply because it is easier to enter the ball compared to the closed state. Therefore, in the definite variation state or the time saving state in which the time saving state of the normal symbol is set, it is difficult for the gaming ball to enter the lower first ball entry port 64b2 or the second specified winning opening 650a, so the first special symbol Even if the second specified winning opening 650a is opened with a probability of 1/5 each time the lottery is executed, the disadvantageous state that the game ball can not enter the second specified winning opening 650a. Form In this modification, in the time-saving state of the normal symbol, a fluctuation time of 0.1 seconds is set each time the game ball passes through gate 67, and it is a hit with high probability (for example, 232/233), In the case of a hit, the motorized jack 64aj is opened for 2.5 seconds. That is, by performing the left strike game, it becomes an operation of repeating the variation of 0.1 seconds and the release of 2.5 seconds. In other words, the motorized role item 64aj is almost in the open state. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the game ball from entering the second specified entry port 650a in the time saving state or the probability changing state.

  As described above, in the modification of the thirteenth embodiment, the second specified winning opening 650a is closed by the electrically operated part 64aj that is opened when the normal symbol is hit, so that the time saving state or the probability changing state Even if they hit the left side and became a small hit, it was made difficult to obtain a prize ball. Thereby, only when the player hits the left in the normal state of the normal symbol (the state where the electric character 64aj is difficult to be released) and becomes a small hit in the drawing of the first special symbol, the game to the second specified winning opening 650a It is possible to form an advantageous state in which the ball is easy to enter. That is, by performing left strike in the latent state, a relatively advantageous state is formed. Therefore, it is possible to create an advantageous state in which winning balls are easily obtained by hitting the left and an advantageous state in which winning balls are easily obtained by hitting the right, so that the gaming method can be diversified. Thus, the interest of the player in the game can be improved. Further, in this modification, the degree of advantage is made different between the latent state in which it is easy to obtain the winning ball by hitting the left and the normal state in which it is easy to obtain the winning ball by hitting the right. Make up). As a result, since the game can be clearly displayed, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  In this modification, the probability of becoming a small winning of the second special symbol higher than the probability of becoming a small hitting of the first special symbol is higher than the latent state where the lottery of the first special symbol is mainly executed The second special symbol lottery is mainly configured to be executed in the normal state is advantageous, but it is not limited thereto. Instead of making the small hitting probability different according to the type of special symbol, or in addition, for example, the small hit of the first special symbol, in the small hit game of one time than the small hit of the second special symbol By configuring so that the number of game balls that can be won can be reduced easily, it may be configured such that the normal state in which the second special symbol lottery is mainly executed is advantageous. In addition, in place of or in addition to these, the number of winning balls based on entering the second specified winning opening 650a which is opened when the first special symbol becomes a small hit, the small symbol of the second special symbol By making it less than the number of winning balls based on entering the first specified winning opening 65a, which is opened when it becomes, the second special symbol lottery will be more advantageous in the normal state where the lottery is mainly executed You may configure it. By applying these modifications, the degree of advantage can be varied more multilaterally, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  In the thirteenth embodiment and its modification, the normal state is configured to be advantageous over the latent state, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the latent state may be configured to be advantageous over the normal state.

Fourteenth Embodiment
Next, with reference to FIGS. 347 to 341, a pachinko machine 10 according to a fourteenth embodiment will be described. In the above-described thirteenth embodiment, in the two game states of the normal state and the latent state, it is configured to form an advantageous state in which it is easy to obtain a winning ball by small hitting. Also, by setting the degree of advantage between the normal state and the latent state to be different, and by configuring the normal state to be more advantageous than the latent state, the game property with sharpening is realized.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourteenth embodiment, as in the first embodiment and the like, only the latent state is configured as an advantageous gaming state in which it is easy to obtain a winning ball by a small hit. Further, in the fourteenth embodiment, the degree of advantage (the easiness of winning a prize ball) is variable according to the number of times of drawing the special symbol executed in the latent state. More specifically, as the latent state, the most advantageous state (latent state A) in which the drawing of the second special symbol with a high probability of winning in a small hit (for example, the probability of 59/60) is easily performed; Two types of states with a low degree of advantage (for example, 1/5 probability) that the lottery of the first special symbol with a low probability of winning in the small win condition (latency state B) It is possible to switch. Thereby, even in the advantageous latent state in which the small hitting game is easy to be executed, the degree of advantage can be further changed, so that the interest of the player in playing the game can be further improved.

  The pachinko machine 10 according to the fourteenth embodiment is different from the pachinko machine 10 according to the thirteenth embodiment in configuration in that the board configuration of the game board 13 is partially changed, and the main control device 110 The configuration of the ROM 202 is partially changed, and the other configuration is the same as the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the thirteenth embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the thirteenth embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and the description thereof will be omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 347, the board configuration of the game board 13 in the fourteenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 347 is a front view of the game board 13 in the fourteenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 347, the game board 13 according to the fourteenth embodiment has a first upper ball entry with respect to the configuration (see FIG. 2) of the game board 13 according to the thirteenth embodiment (and the first embodiment). Instead of the second ball inlet 64b, a central first ball inlet 64c accompanied by a central motorized part 64ca is provided instead of the first ball inlet 64b2 and the lower first ball inlet 64b2. And the arrangement of the second variable winning device 650, which is opened when the jackpot or the first special symbol becomes a small hit, is moved to the right of the board, and the game is launched by a left strike The point where the upper left side is closed by a plurality of nails is changed so that it is difficult for the ball to enter the ball. The second variable winning device 650 has changed the layout because it wins a small hit with a relatively high probability (1/5 probability) by the lottery of the first special symbol, the game state (a This is for the purpose of preventing the game ball from entering the second variable winning device 650 in the gaming state other than the confirmed state and becoming advantageous for the player.

  The motorized accessory 64ca attached to the central first ball entrance 64c is opened when it comes to a normal symbol hit, like the motorized accessory 64a in the thirteenth embodiment. For this reason, since the game ball easily enters the central first ball entrance 64c in the short time state or the positive change state in which the time saving state of the normal symbol is set, it becomes difficult to consume the holding ball. Therefore, in the time saving state or the probability changing state, the gaming efficiency is improved, which is advantageous for the player.

  The sorting apparatus 6400D is configured to be capable of sorting (into the ball) one of the first ball entrance 6400D1 and the second ball entrance 6400D2 provided inside the gaming ball having entered the ball. There is. The first ball entrance 6400D1, like the central first ball entrance 64c, is configured as a ball entrance serving as a trigger for drawing a first special symbol. On the other hand, the second ball entrance 6400D2 is configured as a ball entrance serving as a trigger for the lottery of the second special symbol. In addition, as shown in FIG. 347, the sorting device 6400D receives the entered gaming ball, and the received gaming ball is either the first entry slot 6400D1 or the second entry slot 6400D2. A distribution member 6400Da is provided to allow the fluid to flow down. Receiving members capable of receiving the balls flowing down from above are provided on the left and right of the distributing member 6400Da. The distributing member 6400Da has an arrangement in which the right receiving portion comes directly below the opening of the distributing device 6400D (the position where the game ball can enter the ball), and the receiving portion on the left is the opening of the distributing device 6400D There are two possible arrangements with the arrangement coming directly below. FIG. 347 exemplifies the arrangement in which the right receiving part is directly below the opening.

  When the game ball entered into the distribution device 6400D through the opening is received by the right receiving unit while the receiving unit on the right side is disposed directly below the opening, the game is performed. As a result of the weight of the ball turning the distributing member 6400a clockwise about the axis 6400Db as the axis of rotation, the receiving part on the left side is disposed directly below the opening. In addition, since the receiving part on the right side is inclined in the lower right direction in the front view by the rotation, the gaming ball rolls along the inclination and as a result, flows downward in the lower right direction of the distributing member 6400Da. That is, it flows down in the direction of the second ball entrance 6400D2, and enters the second ball entrance 6400D2.

  On the other hand, when the game ball entered into the distribution device 6400D is received by the left receiving unit while the receiving unit on the left side is disposed directly below the opening, the weight of the game ball is received. As a result, the distributing member 6400Da rotates counterclockwise with the shaft 6400Db as the rotation axis, so that the receiving portion on the right side is disposed directly below the opening. In addition, since the receiving part on the left side is inclined in the lower left direction in the front view by the rotation, the gaming ball rolls along the inclination, and as a result, it flows down in the lower left direction of the distributing member 6400Da. That is, it flows down in the direction of the first ball entrance 6400D1, and enters the first ball entrance 6400D1. Therefore, whenever the game ball enters the sorting device 6400D, the ball can be alternately distributed to the first entrance 6400D1 and the second entrance 6400D2.

  Although details will be described later, in the fourteenth embodiment, in the latent state, the variation time of the first special symbol is likely to be shorter (the small hit of the first special symbol is started during the variation of the second special symbol) Is likely to cause an event that the second special symbol fluctuates and is forcibly stopped, and the second special symbol's fluctuation time is likely to be shorter (first condition) By the small hit of the second special symbol being started during the fluctuation of the special symbol, it is easy for the event that the fluctuation of the first special symbol is out and forced to stop is likely to occur) the state with (latency state A) It is assumed that the state of the subject is set. That is, in the latent state, the state of mainly executing the lottery of the first special symbol winning with small probability with 1/5 probability, and the lottery with the second special symbol winning with small probability of 59/60 mainly It was set as the structure which provides two types of states with the state to perform. Accordingly, the variable display on the game board 13 is configured to be able to execute both the drawing of the first special symbol and the drawing of the second special symbol simply by performing a right strike in the latent state. A distribution device 6400D capable of distributing game balls alternately to the first entrance 6400D1 and the second entrance 6400D2 in the right area of the device unit 80 is provided.

<Electrical configuration in the fourteenth embodiment>
Next, the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 348 to 352. Here, the configuration of the jackpot type selection table 202d, the variation pattern selection table 202f, and the variation pattern scenario table 202ka in the ROM 202 in the fourteenth embodiment is partially changed from the configuration of the ROM 202 in the thirteenth embodiment. They differ in that they The other configuration is the same as that of the ROM 202 in the thirteenth embodiment, and thus the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 348, details of the fluctuation pattern scenario table 202ka in the fourteenth embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 348, in the variation pattern scenario table 202ka in the fourteenth embodiment, when the previous jackpot type is the jackpot A14 or G14, the number of drawing times of the special symbol is in the range of 1 to 99 times. As a variation pattern selection table, a probability variation A table 202f21 is defined in association with one another. Although the details will be described later with reference to FIG. 350, the high probability A table 202f21 is one of the tables which can be referred to while the high probability status of the special symbol is set, and this table is referred to in the low probability status And while forming the most advantageous state that small hit game of the second special symbol is easy to be executed, when this table is referred in the positive change state, the left hitting is higher in gaming efficiency than the right hitting Create a relatively advantageous gaming state. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 348, a table 202f23 for normal use is defined as a variation pattern selection table in a range where the number of times of drawing the special symbol is 100 or more. Although the details will be described later with reference to FIG. 352, when the normal table 202f23 is referred to, by executing right-handed in the normal state, the gaming efficiency is extremely deteriorated.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 348, when the previous jackpot type is any of jackpots B14, D14, and F14, the number of drawing times of the special symbol is for the range of 1 to 99 times, and it is a table B for probability change 202 f 22 are defined in association with each other. This B table 202f22 for probability variation is one of the tables that can be referred to while the probability variation status of the special symbol is set, and when the table is referred in the latent status, the small hit game of the first special symbol Forms an advantageous state in which it is easy to be executed, but when the table is referred to in the probability change state, a leftward strike rather than a rightward strike forms a relatively advantageous gaming state in which the gaming efficiency is higher. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 348, a table 202f23 for general use (see FIG. 352) is defined as a variation pattern selection table in association with a range where the number of lottery times of special symbols is 100 times or more. .

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 348, when the previous jackpot type is a jackpot C14, the B table 202f22 (see FIG. 351) for probability variation corresponds to the range where the number of drawing times of the special symbol is 1 to 24 times. In addition, the probability variation A table 202f21 (see FIG. 350) is defined in association with the range of 25 times to 99 times. This B table 202f22 for probability variation is one of the tables that can be referred to while the probability variation status of the special symbol is set, and when the table is referred in the latent status, the small hit game of the first special symbol Forms an advantageous state in which it is easy to be executed, but when the table is referred to in the probability change state, a leftward strike rather than a rightward strike forms a relatively advantageous gaming state in which the gaming efficiency is higher. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 348, a table 202f23 for general use (see FIG. 352) is defined as a variation pattern selection table in association with a range where the number of lottery times of special symbols is 100 times or more. .

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 348, when the previous jackpot type is normally a jackpot, a table 202f23 for normal (see FIG. 352) is defined in association with the special symbol regardless of the number of times of drawing. There is.

  As described above, in the fourteenth embodiment, the latent state is determined according to whether the probability change A table 202f21 is referred to or the probability change B table 202f22 is referred (that is, according to the previous jackpot type). In this case, the degree of advantage is changed. That is, in the latent state, a state (latency state B) in which the small hitting game based on the drawing of the first special symbol is relatively low with a relatively low degree of advantage (latent state B), and the small hitting game based on the drawing of the second special symbol is Two types of states can be formed: a state that is easy to execute (latency state A). As a result, since it is possible to form more states in which the degree of advantage of the player is different, it is possible to diversify the game and to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  Next, the details of the jackpot type selection table 202d according to the fourteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 349 is a diagram showing defined contents of the jackpot type selection table 202d.

  As shown in FIG. 349, in the fourteenth embodiment, five jackpot types of “big jack A14” to “big jack E14” are defined as jackpot types of the first special symbol. Also, as the jackpot type of the second special symbol, three jackpot types of "big hit F14" ~ "big hit H14" are defined.

  As shown in FIG. 349, as the jackpot type of the first special symbol (special figure 1), "big jack A14" as the jackpot type for the first hit type counter C2 with respect to the range of "0 to 4" It is defined in association with it. In this "big hit A14", the number of rounds of the big hit is 8 rounds, and the type after the big hit is set to the most advantageous latent state A (the low probability state where the small hit game of the second special symbol is easy to be executed) The jackpot of the (8 round probability variation jackpot). Since the latent state A is the most advantageous gaming state, the "big hit A14" is the most profitable jackpot type in terms of the gaming state after the end of the big hit.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 349, “big hit B14” is defined as the big hit type in association with the range of the value of the first hit type counter C2 of “5 to 19”. In this "big hit B14", the number of rounds of the big hit is eight rounds, and when winning in the gaming state other than the latent state, the state after the big hit is set to a relatively advantageous probability changing state, but the latent state When the player wins in, the jackpot end is the jackpot (8 round probability variation jackpot) of the type set to the latent status B (the advantageous state that the small hit game of the first special symbol is easy to be executed). In addition, when a definite change state is set after the end of "big hit B14", it will be in the latent state B until the definite change number (100 times) is ended by making the time reduction number pass (end). .

  Further, as shown in FIG. 349, "big hit C14" is defined as the big hit type in association with the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "10 to 29". In this "big hit C14", the number of rounds of the big hit is eight rounds, and when winning in the gaming state other than the latent state, the state after the big hit is set to a relatively advantageous probability change state, but the latent state When the player wins in, the jackpot end is the jackpot (8 round probability variation jackpot) of the type set to the latent state A (the most advantageous state in which the small hit game of the second special symbol is easy to be executed). In addition, after the "big hit C14" ends, the lottery of the special symbol is executed 25 times, thereby shifting from the latent state A to the latent state B with a low degree of advantage (see FIG. 348). In addition, when a definite change state is set after the end of "big hit B14", the latency state B is reached until the definite change number (100 times) is ended by allowing the time reduction number to elapse (end). .

  Further, as shown in FIG. 349, "big hit D14" is defined as the big hit type in association with the range of the value of the first hit type counter C2 of "70 to 79". In this "big hit D14", the number of rounds of the big hit is eight rounds, and when winning in the gaming state other than the latent state, the state after the big hit is set to a relatively advantageous probability change state, but the latent state When the player wins in, the jackpot end is the jackpot (8 round probability variation jackpot) of the type set to the latent status B (the advantageous state that the small hit game of the first special symbol is easy to be executed). In addition, when a definite change state is set after the end of "big hit D14", it will be in the latent state B until the definite change number (100 times) is ended by allowing the time reduction number to elapse (end). . Here, in the case of winning the "big hit D14" in gaming state other than the latent state, since the probability variation number smaller than "big hit B14" or "big hit C14" is set, transition to a more advantageous latent state It is possible for the player to have a strong sense of expectation for doing things. Thus, the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 349, "big hit E14" is defined as the big hit type in association with the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "80 to 99". In this "big hit E14", the number of rounds of the big hit is eight rounds, and after the big hit end is a big hit (8 rounds big hit) of the type set to 100 time-shortened states. Since the time saving state in the fourteenth embodiment is more disadvantageous than the probability changing state, the "big hit E14" is the most disadvantageous jackpot among the jackpot types of the first special symbol.

  On the other hand, as the jackpot type of the second special symbol (special figure 2), the "big hit F14" is defined as the big hit type in relation to the range of "0 to 4" of the first hit type counter C2 value. ing. In this "big hit F14", the number of rounds of the big hit is 16 rounds, and when winning in the gaming state other than the latent state, the state after the big hit is set to a relatively advantageous probability change state, but the latent state If the player wins in, the jackpot end is the jackpot (16 round probability variation jackpot) of the type set to the latent state B (the advantageous state that the small hit game of the first special symbol is easy to be executed). In addition, since the definite variation state set after completion | finish of "big hit F14" is set 100 times as a time-saving frequency | count, the definite variation state of a special symbol is also complete | finished simultaneously with completion | finish of time-saving number. Therefore, there is no possibility of shifting to the advantageous latent state when winning the "big hit F14" in the gaming state other than the latent state. This is intended to suppress irregular game methods in which a right-handed game is performed in a game state other than the latent state.

  Further, "big hit G14" is defined as the big hit type in association with the range of the first hit type counter C2 of "5 to 79". In this "big hit G14", the number of rounds of the big hit is 16 rounds, and when winning in the gaming state other than the latent state, the state after the big hit is set to a relatively advantageous probability change state, but the latent state When the player wins in, the jackpot end is the jackpot (16 round probability variation jackpot) of the type set to the latent state A (the most advantageous state in which the small hit game of the second special symbol is easy to be executed). In addition, since the probability change state set after the end of "big hit G14" is set 100 times as the number of time reductions, as with "big hit F14", it is anomalous to perform right-handed play in gaming states other than the latent state It is possible to suppress the gaming method.

  Furthermore, "big hit H14" is defined as the big hit type in association with the range of "80 to 99" as the value of the first hit type counter C2. In this "big hit H14", the number of rounds of the big hit is 16 rounds, and when winning in the gaming state other than the latent state, after the big hit is set to the most disadvantageous normal state, but in the latent state If the jackpot is won, the jackpot is the type of jackpot (16 rounds usually jackpot) that is set to the short time state. It should be noted that when winning a "big hit H14" in the gaming state other than the latent state, to set the most disadvantageous normal state is a suppression to the extraordinary gaming method of performing a right-handed strike in the gaming state other than the latent state In order to

  Next, with reference to FIG. 350, the details of the probability variation A table 202f21 in the fourteenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 350 is a diagram showing the definition contents of the probability variation A table 202f21. As shown in FIG. 350, in the probability variation A table 202f21, the correspondence between the gaming state at the time of executing the lottery of the special symbol and the variation pattern which can be selected is defined for each type of the special symbol. More specifically, when the number of holding balls of the second special symbol is 0 in the definite variation state, the variation time of the first special symbol is shorter than when the number of holding balls of the second special symbol is 1 or more. Become. Further, in the latent state, only the long variation of the first special symbol is selected as in the case where the holding ball of the second special symbol is one or more in the definite variation state.

  On the other hand, with regard to the second special symbol, while the long fluctuation of 600 seconds is set regardless of the lottery result in the case of the definite variation state, the short fluctuation time of 0.1 second to 1 second is in the case of the latent state. It is set. As a result, when the game ball enters the sorting device 6400D continuously by hitting the right in the definite change state, the game ball is alternately distributed to the first ball entrance 6400D1 and the second ball entrance 6400D2. The second special symbol has a holding ball of one or more, and the variation time of the first special symbol and the variation time of the second special symbol also become long, and the gaming efficiency becomes extremely poor. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the irregular game method in which the right strike is performed in the definite change state. On the other hand, if you hit the right in the latent state, the ball enters the first entrance 6400D1 and the second entrance 6400D2 alternately, so immediately after the start of the right, the first special symbol is displayed as a change. And the variation display of the second special symbol are executed in an overlapping manner. However, as shown in FIG. 350, in the latent state, while the long variation of the first special symbol is set, the variation time of the second special symbol is 1 second or less, so the right-handed game continues. The second special symbol lottery can be executed at a higher frequency than the first special symbol lottery. That is, it forms an advantageous state in which only small hits of the second special symbol are continuously won. Therefore, the latent state A that is most advantageous to the player is formed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 351, the details of the probability variation B table 202f22 in the fourteenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 351 is a diagram showing the definition contents of the probability variation B table 202f22. As shown in FIG. 351, in the probability variation B table 202f22, the variation pattern selected in the probability variation state is configured to be exactly the same as the probability variation A table 202f21 (see FIG. 350). As a result, when the game ball enters the sorting device 6400D continuously in a definite change state in which a scenario in which a change pattern is determined with reference to the table B for 202 As in the case where the A table 202f21 is referred to, the game balls are alternately distributed to the first entrance 6400D1 and the second entrance 6400D2, and as a result, the number of holding balls for the second special symbol becomes one or more, The variation time of the first special symbol and the variation time of the second special symbol also become long, and the gaming efficiency becomes extremely poor. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the irregular game method in which the right strike is performed in the definite change state.

  Also, in the latent state, while the variation time of the first special symbol is 1 second or less, as the variation time of the second special symbol, the long variation of 600 seconds is set regardless of the lottery result of the second special symbol Be done. As a result, when right hitting is performed in the latent state, the fluctuation display of one second or less of the first special symbol and the long variation of the second special symbol are executed in duplicate, so that the right hitting game is continued. By doing, it is possible to execute the drawing of the first special symbol more frequently than the drawing of the second special symbol. That is, an advantageous state (latency state B) in which the player wins continuously only for the small hit of the first special symbol is formed. In addition, while the probability of becoming a small winning in the lottery of the first special symbol is 1/5, the probability of becoming a small winning in the lottery of the second special symbol is 59/60, so the latent state B is The frequency with which the small hitting game is executed becomes lower than the latent state A. That is, the latent state B forms a state in which the degree of advantage is lower than the latent state A. Therefore, in the latent state, it is advantageous for the player to determine the fluctuation pattern with reference to the probability variation A table 202f21 (see FIG. 350).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 352, details of the ordinary table 202f23 in the fourteenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 352 is a diagram showing the definition contents of the normal table 202f23. As shown in FIG. 352, the normal table 202f23 is configured to select the same variation time as the variation pattern selected in the probability variation state. That is, by executing the lottery of the first special symbol by left-handed, while the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation time of 20 seconds or less is set, in the normal state, the time saving state, and the definite variation state, all right-handed As a result of the game balls being distributed alternately to the first entrance 6400D1 and the second entrance 6400D2, and as a result, the number of holding balls for the second special symbol becomes 1 or more, and the variation of the first special symbol The time and the fluctuation time of the second special symbol also become long, and the gaming efficiency becomes extremely poor. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the irregular game method in which the right hitting is performed in the state other than the latent state.

  Next, a method of state transition of the pachinko machine 10 realized by performing control based on various tables defined in the ROM 202 and various flags and counters provided in the RAM 203 will be described with reference to FIG. explain. FIG. 341 is a diagram showing a method of state transition of the pachinko machine 10 in the fourteenth embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 341, the pachinko machine 10 of the fourteenth embodiment is roughly divided into five states. That is, the normal state shown in the upper left of FIG. 341, the short time shown in the upper right of FIG. 341, the positive variation state shown in the center of FIG. 341, and the latent state B shown in the lower left of FIG. , And the latent state A shown on the lower right side of FIG. 341.

  The normal state indicates the low probability state of the special symbol and the normal state of the normal symbol, and the probability of becoming a jackpot is low (1/240), and the most disadvantageous gaming state in which the electric character 64a is difficult to open Form In addition, the time saving state indicates the low probability state of the special symbol and the time saving state of the normal symbol, and the electric winning part 64a of one with a low probability of becoming a big hit is easy to be released. By striking, it is possible to form a relatively advantageous gaming state in which the player can play the game without reducing the holding balls. In addition, the definite change state indicates that the special symbol is special change and the normal symbol is short, and the probability of becoming a big hit is high (1/80), and the electric character 64a is easily released, so the left strike By forming a game state that is more advantageous than the short time state can be played without reducing the holding ball. In addition, the latent state A and the latent state B indicate that the special symbol is in a definite variation state and the normal symbol is in the normal state, and the probability of becoming a jackpot is high (1/80), and the electric role 64a It is a gaming state where it is difficult to release In the latent state B, the small hitting game of the first special symbol becomes easy to be executed by right hitting, so to the second specified winning opening 650a where it is possible to enter the game ball by right hitting. The game ball is entered relatively frequently (every time the first special symbol lottery is executed about five times) to form an advantageous state in which a winning ball can be obtained. On the other hand, in the latent state A, as described above, since the small hitting game of the second special symbol becomes easy to be executed by performing the right hitting, the first specific winning which can cause the game ball to enter by the right hitting The state is more advantageous than the latent state B in which the player can enter the mouth 65a frequently (approximately, every time the second special symbol lottery is executed) and can obtain a prize ball.

  As shown in the upper part of FIG. 341, the transition from the normal state to another state may be made only when the jackpot occurs. Specifically, as shown on the upper left side of FIG. 341, when the jackpot A14 which is the jackpot of the first special symbol and is determined by the proportion of 5% as the jackpot type is selected (decided), after the jackpot end Transition to the most favorable latent state A. In addition, it becomes the jackpot of the first special symbol, and if any of jackpots B14 to D14 determined at a rate of 75% as a jackpot type is selected (decided), it becomes a relatively advantageous probability change state after the jackpot end. Transition. Furthermore, when the big hit E14 which becomes the big hit of the 1st special symbol and is decided with the ratio of 20% as the big hit type is selected (decided), it shifts to the time saving state after the big hit end. Therefore, in the normal state, winning the jackpot always shifts to an advantageous state as compared to the normal state, so that it is possible to play a game expecting to be the jackpot.

  Further, as shown in the upper right side of FIG. 341, there is a possibility that transition from the time saving state to another state may be made also when the time saving number ends, in addition to the case of a big hit. Specifically, as shown on the upper right side of FIG. 341, when the jackpot A14 which is the jackpot of the first special symbol and is determined by the proportion of 5% as the jackpot type is selected (decided), after the jackpot end Transition to the most favorable latent state A. In addition, it becomes the jackpot of the first special symbol, and if any of jackpots B14 to D14 determined at a rate of 75% as a jackpot type is selected (decided), it becomes a relatively advantageous probability change state after the jackpot end. Transition. Furthermore, after the time saving state is set, by transitioning (terminating) the specified number of times (100 times), the system directly shifts to the normal state most disadvantageous to the player (without passing the jackpot). On the other hand, when the jackpot E14 determined to be a jackpot of the first special symbol and determined as a jackpot type of 20% is determined, the time saving state is set again after the jackpot end. Therefore, in the time saving state, when it is a big hit, it shifts to the gaming state having a higher degree of advantage, or at least the current gaming state (time saving state) is maintained, while the time saving ends If it does, since it shifts to the disadvantageous normal state, it is possible to play the game expecting to win a jackpot before the time saving state ends.

  In addition, as shown in the center of FIG. 341, there is a possibility that transition from a positive change state to another state may occur when a big hit occurs and when a prescribed number of time passes. Specifically, as shown in the center of FIG. 341, when the jackpot E14 which is the jackpot of the first special symbol and the jackpot E14 determined by the proportion of 20% is selected (decided) as the jackpot type, the definite variation after the jackpot end Transition to a shorter time than the state. In addition, when the jackpot A14 which is the jackpot of the first special symbol and is determined at a rate of 5% is selected (decided) as the jackpot type, transition to the most advantageous latent state B after the jackpot end is made. Furthermore, after the definite change state is set, by passing a prescribed number of short times (10 times, 25 times, or 50 times), the player can directly enter continuous mode A, which is relatively advantageous to the player (without passing the jackpot). To). On the other hand, when one of the jackpots B14 to D14 determined to be the jackpot of the first special symbol and determined as a jackpot type of 75% is determined, the probability change state is set again after the jackpot end. Therefore, in the positive change state, the rate of transition to the advantageous state is lower (5% proportion) when the jackpot is achieved, but the completion of the short time state ensures that the latent state is more advantageous. As a result, it is possible to realize novel playability that strongly expects the time saving state to end.

  In addition, as shown in the lower left of FIG. 341, transition from the latent state B to another state proceeds not only when the jackpot is hit, but also when the prescribed number of surety changes (100 times after the jackpot end) ends. there is a possibility. Specifically, as shown in the lower left of FIG. 341, when the jackpot A14 and C14 decided to be the jackpot of the first special symbol and determined at a rate of 55% as the jackpot type is selected (decided), the jackpot Transition to the most favorable latent state B after the end. Moreover, it becomes a big hit of a 1st special symbol, and when big hit E14 decided by a ratio of 20% as a big hit type is selected (decided), it shifts to a disadvantageous time saving state after the big hit end. In addition, when the number of definite variations (100 times after the end of the big hit) ends, the state shifts to the most disadvantageous normal state. On the other hand, when jackpot B14 and D14 decided as a jackpot type and the jackpot type determined at a rate of 25% is selected (decided), the latent condition B is set again after the jackpot is finished. Ru. For this reason, in the latent state B, it is possible to realize the game characteristics that the jackpot is expected to be won before the number of definite variations ends and the state shifts to the most disadvantageous normal state.

  Also, as shown on the lower right side of FIG. 341, transition from the latent state A to another state proceeds not only when the jackpot is hit, but also when the prescribed number of surety changes (100 times after the jackpot end) ends. there is a possibility. Specifically, as shown on the lower right side of FIG. 341, when the jackpot F14 which is the second special symbol jackpot and the jackpot F14 determined by the proportion of 5% is selected (decided) as the jackpot type, after the jackpot end A transition to the latent state A with a relatively low degree of advantage is made. Moreover, it becomes a big hit of a 2nd special symbol, and when big hit H14 determined by the ratio of 20% as a big hit type is selected (decided), it shifts to a disadvantageous time saving state after the big hit end. In addition, when the number of definite variations (100 times after the end of the big hit) ends, the state shifts to the most disadvantageous normal state. On the other hand, when the jackpot G14 determined to be the jackpot of the first special symbol and determined at a rate of 75% as the jackpot type is selected (decided), the latent state A is set again after the jackpot end. For this reason, in the latent state A, it is highly probable that the latent state A with the most advantageous status is high by winning the jackpot before the number of definite variations ends and the state shifts to the most disadvantageous normal state. Form a highly advantageous game state that loops at a rate of 75%.

  As described above, in the fourteenth embodiment, two types of games, the latent state A and the latent state B, are used as advantageous states in which it is possible to obtain a prize ball without going through a big hit by a small hit game. It was set as the structure which provides a state. These states are both composed of latent states (special pattern special variation state and normal pattern normal state), and the variation pattern scenario is different to be biased to the second special symbol drawing having a high probability of small hitting A latent state A to be executed (biased) and a latent state B to be executed biased (biased) to the drawing of the first special symbol having a low probability of small hitting are configured. By configuring in this way, it is possible to realize different gaming characteristics (playability that can acquire more winning balls and playing characteristics that is difficult to obtain winning balls) in one latent state. Can improve the interest of Further, unlike the above-described thirteenth embodiment, since the latent state can be set to the most advantageous gaming state and the normal state can be formed to the most disadvantageous gaming state, the transition is made when the pachinko machine 10 is initialized. It is not necessary to make any control different between the state and the normal state transitioning through other gaming states. Therefore, the processing load of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

  In the fourteenth embodiment, the normal state is configured as the most disadvantageous gaming state, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as in the thirteenth embodiment, the normal state may be configured as one of the advantageous states in which the small hit game is easy to be performed. That is, in addition to the latent state A and the latent state B, the normal state may be advantageous to the player. By configuring in this way, the number of advantageous states increases, and it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  In the fourteenth embodiment, long fluctuation is always set as the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol when the holding ball of the second special symbol is 1 or more in the state other than the latent state, but It is not limited to this. For example, when switching from right-handed gaming to left-handed gaming, such as immediately after the end of a big hit, or when the number of probability variations has passed in a latent state, etc. Even if the number of balls held for the second special symbol is 1 or more, the long variation may not be set (a variation time of 20 seconds or less may be set). That is, when the fluctuation display performed the first time after the big hit end and the 100th execution after the big hit end is the fluctuation display of the first special symbol as the fluctuation pattern scenario, regardless of the status of the holding ball as the fluctuation pattern. It may be configured to set a scenario in which a variation time of 20 seconds or less is selected. In this case, the variation time of the second special symbol is extremely short (for example, 0.1 seconds) within 5 times after the big hit end and within 100 times to 105 times after the big hit end. May. By configuring in this way, it is possible to set the holding ball of the second special symbol to 0 after the end of the first special symbol after the big hit, so the regular game method is Even though it has been done, it is possible to prevent the first special symbol and the second special symbol from being in a disadvantageous state in which the long variation is performed.

  In the fourteenth embodiment, when the number of holding balls of the second special symbol is 1 or more in the non-latent state, the variation time of the first special symbol is extended to thereby cause the non-latent state. Although the game efficiency in the case of performing the right-handed game in the gaming state is deteriorated, and the configuration is intended to suppress abnormal game methods in which the right-handed game is performed in the state other than the latent state, but it is not limited thereto. . For example, in a state other than the latent state, the first special symbol may be configured to perform a long fluctuation when the total number of holding balls is five or more. In a state other than the latent state, when the normal gaming method (left-handed game) is performed, only the holding balls of the first special symbol are stored, so the number of holding balls is at most four. On the other hand, if you play an unusual game method to hit the right in the game state other than the latent state, as a result of the game ball entering the first ball entrance 6400D1 and the second ball entrance 6400D2 alternately, The holding ball exceeds 5 pieces. Therefore, by continuing to hit the right, since the first special symbol and the second special symbol form a very disadvantageous gaming state in which the long fluctuation is long, the irregular game in which the right hitting is performed in the gaming state other than the latent state It is possible to control the method. In addition, seemingly, when the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is started, the right hitting is stopped, and by the method of resuming the right hitting when the fluctuation of the first special symbol is finished, the number of holding balls will be 4 or less It seems that the method of adjusting and playing is realized. However, when this method is performed, as the number of times of drawing the first special symbol increases, the holding ball of the second special symbol performing long variation regardless of the drawing result or the number of holding balls increases, so the first special symbol The holding ball is almost in the four state when the lottery is performed four times. Therefore, since the first special symbol also becomes long fluctuation after that, the gaming efficiency is significantly reduced and an adverse state is formed. As a result, it is possible to suppress abnormal game methods in which a right-handed strike is performed in a state other than the latent state.

  In the fourteenth embodiment, by increasing the probability of becoming a small hit of the second special symbol rather than the probability of becoming a small hit of the first special symbol, the latent state B in which the lottery of the first special symbol is mainly executed In addition, although the latent condition A where the second special symbol lottery is mainly executed is configured to be advantageous, the present invention is not limited to this. Instead of making the small hitting probability different according to the type of special symbol, or in addition, for example, the small hit of the first special symbol, in the small hit game of one time than the small hit of the second special symbol By configuring so that the number of game balls that can be won can be reduced easily, it may be configured such that the state of latency A in which the second special symbol lottery is mainly executed becomes more advantageous. . In addition, in place of or in addition to these, the number of winning balls based on entering the second specified winning opening 650a which is opened when the first special symbol becomes a small hit, the small symbol of the second special symbol By making it less than the number of winning balls based on entering the first specified winning opening 65a that is opened when it becomes a, it is considered that the latent state A where the second special symbol lottery is mainly executed is advantageous It may be configured to be By applying these modifications, the degree of advantage can be varied more multilaterally, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

The fifteenth embodiment
Next, a pachinko machine 10 according to a fifteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 354 to 359. In the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment described above, in a state in which a probability variation state (a high probability status of a special symbol, a low probability status of an ordinary symbol) is set, a probability variation state (special symbol) When the jackpot is won by the first special symbol (special figure 1) lottery in the state where the high probability state of the normal symbol, the low probability state of the normal symbol) is set, the gaming state in the jackpot variation is latently determined (It was configured to be an advantageous state that small hit game is easy to be executed). Further, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the eleventh embodiment described above, when the number of time reductions ends earlier than the number of probability variations in the probability variation status, the probability variation status changes to the latent status (small hit game is easily executed). And had a configuration to migrate.

  On the other hand, in the fifteenth embodiment, when the jackpot is won by the lottery of the first special symbol in the definite variation state, the lottery of the second special symbol is executed during the execution of the jackpot variation, thereby reducing the number of times It is configured to be able to make a transition to a latent state during execution of the jackpot fluctuation. That is, even during the execution of the jackpot variation, it has become possible to form an advantageous state in which the small hit game is easy to be executed. In addition, by adopting the same state transition as in the eleventh embodiment, the gaming state after the big hit is more likely to be advantageous in the latent state than in the probability changing state. Thereby, in the case where the remaining time until the end of the jackpot variation is slight (when the jackpot game is started with hardly being able to carry out the small hit game even if the small hit game becomes easy to be executed) Even if there is, the player can be made to think that it is desired to end the time saving number. Therefore, during the execution of the jackpot variation, it is possible to realize the game characteristics of actively executing the lottery of the second special symbol.

  The pachinko machine 10 according to the fifteenth embodiment is different from the pachinko machine 10 according to the eleventh embodiment in configuration in that the board configuration of the game board 13 is partially changed, and the main control device 110 The configuration of the ROM 202 is partially changed. The other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control apparatus 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 are the eleventh embodiment. It is identical to the pachinko machine 10 in form. Hereinafter, the same components as those of the eleventh embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and the description thereof will be omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 354 and FIG. 355, the board configuration of the game board 13 in the fifteenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 354 is a front view schematically showing a configuration of the game board 13 in the fifteenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 354, the gaming board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the present fifteenth embodiment is the right area (right-handed gaming machine 13) with respect to the gaming board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the eleventh embodiment described above. The difference is in that the configuration of the area where the ball fired by it flows down is different. Moreover, it differs in the point which replaced with upper 1st ball entrance 64b1 and lower 1st ball entrance 64b2, and provided center 1st ball entrance 64c.

  As shown in FIG. 354, in the right area of the game board 13, the ball path ZK1 where the game balls can flow down (pass) is formed, and the through gate 67 and the variable winning device 1650 are sequentially from the upstream side of the ball path ZK1. The second ball entry port 640 with which the electric role thing 640a accompanies, the small hitting variable winning a prize device 2650 which is opened in the small hitting game is arranged. Further, above the second ball entry port 640, the first right ball entry port 64r, which is a lottery trigger for the first special symbol when the game ball enters the ball, is provided. In addition, the game ball which has flowed down the ball path ZK1 is a position where it is difficult for the game ball rolled along the ball path ZK1 to enter the right first ball entrance 64r (the ball path ZK1 and other game balls repel (interference It is provided in the position which can enter the ball only). Therefore, 90% or more of the right-handed game balls enter the second entrance 640 or pass through the second entrance 640 to the small hit variable winning device 2650 or the exit 66. Hit the ball. The ratio of gaming balls entering the right first ball entrance 64r is approximately 1 in 20.

  The variable winning device 1650 disposed in the ball path ZK1 is a device that opens and closes in accordance with a predetermined opening scenario when a big win is won in a special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) lottery. An open / close door 1650f that changes between a specific winning opening 1650a, an open state where the ball can enter the specific winning opening 1650a, and a closed state where entering the ball is more difficult (impossible) than the open state. And 15 balls are paid out as winning balls every time one ball enters during the big hit game.

  The second entrance 640 has an opening formed to cut out a part of the lower surface of the ball flow of the ball path ZK1, and each ball enters one ball as a winning ball. It is configured to be paid out balls. Moreover, it is comprised so that it may become a trigger of the lottery (variation) of a 2nd special symbol similarly to the 1st control example mentioned above. The opening of the second ball entry port 640 is covered by the electric part 640a, and the electric part 640a can not enter the ball more easily than in the open state where the ball can enter and the open state. It is configured such that the ease of entering the ball can be made different by variably controlling it in the closed state where it becomes possible.

  In the state (closed state) in which the opening part of the second ball entry port 640 is covered with the electric accessory 640a (closed state), the ball flowing down the ball path ZK1 passes on the electric accessory 640a to the downstream side of the ball path ZK1. And is configured to flow down. That is, the game ball flowing downstream of the second entrance 640 in the ball path ZK1 is a game ball that did not enter the second entrance 640 (it was not possible).

  The ball flowing downstream of the second entrance 640 in the ball path ZK1 reaches the small hit variable winning device 2650. This small hitting variable winning device 2650 is composed of a small hitting winning opening 2650a and an open / close door 2650f for covering the opening of the small hitting winning opening 2650a, and the small hitting winning opening 2650a has a ball path. It has an opening formed to cut out a part of the ball flow lower surface of ZK1, and it is configured so that 10 balls will be paid out as a prize ball every time one ball enters. .

  This small hit variable winning device 2650 is an open operation during a small hit game which is executed when a small hit is won in a special symbol (second special symbol) lottery, and the open / close door 2650f is predetermined. By causing the ball to open in the open scenario, the ball can be variably controlled to an open state in which the ball can enter and a closed state in which the ball is more difficult to enter than the open state. In the fifteenth embodiment, similarly to the above-described eleventh embodiment, when a lottery of the second special symbol is executed, it is configured to win a small hit with high probability (for example, 59/60) .

  In the closed state in which the open / close door 2650f is closing the small hitting winning opening 2650a, the ball which has flowed down the ball path ZK1 is configured to pass through the upper surface of the open / close door 2650f and flow downward toward the out port 66 . The upper surface (ball passage surface) of the open / close door 2650f is provided with a delay means for delaying the flow of the ball, and it is constructed such that it takes one second for the ball to pass over the open / close door 2650f. . By providing this delay means, it is possible to secure the necessary ball passage time in a smaller space. Although detailed description is omitted, in the fifteenth embodiment, opening and closing is performed so as to be a ball passage having a high frictional resistance (coefficient of friction) (higher frictional resistance than the other ball passage surfaces of the ball passage ZK1) as a delay means. On the upper surface of the door 2650f, an uneven portion in which a ball can ride is formed.

  In addition, as a delay means, a ball delay passage (for example, a passage in which a ball path is in a zigzag shape) is formed by devising the structure of the ball passage surface, or a ball delay passage is created by devising the material of the ball passage surface. Or anything that slows the transit time for the sphere to pass through the given section.

  Furthermore, the ball fired by the left-handed game (game aiming at the left area (left area) of the variable display device unit 80) enters each winning hole (ball entrance) provided in the above-mentioned ball path ZK1. A nail is implanted below the gaming board 13 (below and to the right of the first ball entry port 64) as a regulating member (regulating means) for regulating the foreshortening. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide the player with different games for the right-handed game and the left-handed game, so it is possible to provide the player with a game that does not come bored (hard to get bored). .

  Next, the details of the sphere flow in the right area in the fifteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 355 (a) is a schematic view schematically showing the ball flow in the state where the time saving state or the probability changing state is set as the gaming state, and FIG. 355 (b) is the latent state setting as the gaming state It is the model which showed the ball | bowl flow in the state currently being carried out typically.

  The ball passage ZK1 of the game board 13 according to the fifteenth embodiment is the ball passing time from the through gate 67 to the second ball inlet 640 (by the time the ball having passed the through gate 67 reaches the second ball inlet 640) The time required is 0.5 seconds. In addition, the ball passing time on the motorized accessory 640a covering the second ball entry port 640 (the time required for the ball to pass (flow) from the upstream end to the downstream end of the motorized accessory 640a) is 1 second. doing.

  Although the detailed description will be described later, in the fifteenth embodiment, when the high probability state (short time state, definite change state) of the normal symbol is set as the gaming state, the variation time of the normal symbol is 0.1 seconds The time is set to be approximately 0.4 seconds, that is, a time shorter than the ball passing time from the through gate 67 to the second entrance 640. Further, when the player wins the winning by the lottery of the normal symbol, the opening operation of 0.2 seconds is configured to be performed twice with the closing period of 0.8 seconds interposed. That is, it is configured to execute the opening operation in which the closing period is set to be shorter than the time (one second) in which the ball passes over the motorized accessory 640a.

  Therefore, as shown in FIG. 355 (a), most balls enter the second ball entry port 640 when a right-handed game is played when the time saving state is set as the gaming state. Furthermore, in the fifteenth embodiment, since the variation time of the normal symbol is set in a time less than half of the ball passing time (0.5 seconds) from the through gate 67 to the second ball entrance 640, Even if a lottery in which the result of the lottery is missed is performed once, the ball that caused the lottery of the missed lottery may be entered into the second entrance 640 by winning in the next lottery. it can.

  On the other hand, when the low probability state (normal state, latent state) of the normal symbol is set as the gaming state, the variation time of the normal symbol is 3 to 5 seconds, that is, the second entrance from the through gate 67 A time longer than the ball passing time up to 640 (0.5 seconds) is set. Further, when the winning is made in the lottery of the normal symbol, the opening operation of 0.04 seconds is executed once. In other words, the ball can enter the second entrance 640 only for 0.04 seconds for a period of 3 to 5 seconds.

  Therefore, as shown in FIG. 355 (b), most balls do not enter the second ball entry port 640 when a right-handed game is played when the latent state is set as the gaming state. The ball will flow down toward the small hit winning device 2650. In the fifteenth embodiment, the time taken for the ball to pass on the motorized part 640a is one second, and the ball is fired one shot every 0.6 seconds. Since the player continuously plays a right-handed game, one ball always stays on the motorized role 640 a.

  By configuring in this way, it is possible to cause the ball to enter the second ball entry port 640 with certainty and to execute the second special symbol lottery, when the player wins a hit in the normal symbol lottery, so right It is possible to suppress occurrence of a situation where the lottery of the second special symbol is not executed in the gaming state (certainly changing state, time saving state, latent state) in which the hit game is executed. As described above, when the second special symbol lottery is executed, in order to win a small hit with high probability, in the latent state, the game ball to the second ball entry 640 at intervals of 3 to 5 seconds It is possible to cause the game ball to enter the small hit winning device 2650 and to obtain a winning ball while making it possible. That is, the small hit game is frequently executed by the lottery of the second special symbol, and an advantageous state in which a winning ball based on the small hit can be frequently obtained is formed. On the other hand, in the time saving state or the probability changing state, since almost all the game balls hit to the right enter the second entrance 640 (or the first right entrance 64r), the small hitting game is executed frequently However, it becomes extremely difficult to cause the game balls to reach the small hit winning device 2650 during the execution period of the small hit game. Therefore, in the definite change state or the time saving state, the game ball can be efficiently put into the second entry port 640 (or the right first entry port 64r) only because the game ball can be efficiently entered. The degree of advantage is lower than in the solid state (it becomes difficult to obtain a winning ball).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 356, various operations which are characteristic operations in the fifteenth embodiment, and when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol during the definite variation state, will be described. FIG. 356 is a timing chart schematically showing the contents of the fluctuation display effect executed corresponding to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 and the special symbol fluctuation state in the fifteenth embodiment. Here, the playability of the pachinko machine 10 of the fifteenth embodiment will be briefly described. The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is, similarly to the above embodiments, a variable display (dynamic display) for showing the lottery result of the first special symbol and a variable display for showing the lottery result of the second special symbol. It is possible to execute (dynamic display) and simultaneously (in parallel).

  As shown in FIG. 356, in the positive variation state, the chance zone display (see FIG. 297 (b)) is set as the effect mode. In addition, during the definite change state, as described above, most of the game balls fired by hitting the right enter the second entrance 640 and rarely (for example, 1 in 20) right Enter the first ball entrance 64r. Therefore, during the definite change state, the number of time savings is basically reduced by the lottery of the second special symbol being executed. In addition, if it becomes a big hit in the lottery of the second special symbol during the definite change state, as in the 11th embodiment described above, the positive change state is looped at a ratio of about 75%, and a short time state at a ratio of 20% It is configured to shift to (fall). In other words, even if the jackpot in the definite change state is low, the possibility of transition to the advantageous latent state is low, so the number of time saving ends rather than the jackpot as in the eleventh embodiment ) Can be played more strongly expecting. In addition, even if the game ball enters the right first ball entrance 64r and the lottery of the first special symbol is executed, it does not win a small hit, but in the positive change state, as described above, Since it is extremely difficult to make the game ball enter the small hit winning device 2650, it is possible to reduce time and work by overlapping (simultaneously) the change of the first special symbol and the change of the second special symbol. It is possible to give the player the impression that the number of times can be subtracted more. Therefore, in the definite change state, as the game ball enters the first right ball entrance 64r, the player can be made to have an impression that the player is approaching the latent state, so the player's game Can improve the interest for

  And, in the state where the definite change state (high probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol) is set, when the number of time reduction ends, as mentioned above, it shifts to a more advantageous latent state, and frequently The small hit game of the second special symbol is executed, and forms a very advantageous state where it is possible to easily win the gaming ball to the small hit winning device 2650. In the latent state, when the lottery of the first special symbol is executed, the player does not win a small hit, so the player is given the impression that the remaining number of definite variations is wasted by one uselessly. It can be turned. Therefore, in the definite change state, it is possible to realize the game property that the game ball is expected to want to enter more balls into the first right ball entrance 64r, while in the latent state, the first right ball entrance 64r is It is possible to realize the playability which is expected that the game ball does not enter. That is, according to the gaming state, it is possible to realize the novel game characteristic that it is possible to switch the role of the first right ball entrance 64r (whether or not it is preferable to enter the ball). .

  Further, in the fifteenth embodiment, the variation display of the second special symbol is made even in the time saving state or the probability changing state by making the opening control of the motorized accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 different for each gaming state. It was mainly configured to be executed. That is, as in the eleventh embodiment described above, the second special symbol lottery is executed even if the first special symbol lottery is executed without setting the long variation of the second special symbol in the time saving state or the probability variation state. Even if it was, it comprised so that comparatively short fluctuation time might be set. As a result, in the definite change state, the time-saving number is reduced by the lottery of the second special symbol, and the game property aiming at the most advantageous latent state is realized. By adopting this configuration, it is possible to realize the game characteristic of digesting the number of time-saving times of the second special symbol during execution of the jackpot variation of the first special symbol.

  As shown in FIG. 356, in the state where the probability change state is set as the game state, it is easy to execute the lottery of the second special symbol by right-handed game, and a relatively low ratio (for example, of the launched game balls It becomes the gaming state where the lottery of the first special symbol is also executed at a ratio of 1/20. That is, since the high probability state of the normal symbol is set in the definite change state, the electric role object 640a is easily opened, the game ball easily enters the second ball entry port 640, and the small hit A game state in which the game ball is difficult to enter into the winning device 2650 is formed. In this definite change state, when a jackpot occurs in the lottery of the first special symbol, as shown in FIG. 356, during the jackpot variation, only the lottery of the second special symbol is executed by right hitting. In the fifteenth embodiment, a long variation for 600 seconds is executed when a big hit is made in the lottery of the first special symbol in the definite variation state. During the jackpot variation in this definite variation state, the variation display of the first special symbol is interrupted each time the second special symbol lottery results in a small hit. As a result, while the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed, it is possible to execute a plurality of second lottery of the second special symbol. In other words, while the jackpot variation of the first special symbol is being executed, it is possible to perform the variation display of the second special symbol for the remaining number of time savings. In this case, since the jackpot of the first special symbol is changing (special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is on), there is no chance that the jackpot will be won in duplicate in the lottery of the second special symbol (the lottery result is out or Small hit). Therefore, while the long variation of the first special symbol is being executed, there is no possibility that the probability variation state or the time saving state will be set by the jackpot of the second special symbol. As a result, each time a lottery of the second special symbol is executed, it becomes a very advantageous state where it is possible to reliably subtract the number of time-savings. In addition, 90% or more of the second special symbol fluctuation time is set to one second fluctuation time, so by continuing to execute right hitting during the first special symbol long fluctuation, long fluctuation Regardless of the number of times at the beginning of the period, approximately the number of times can be ended during a long variation. In addition, during execution of the jackpot fluctuation (long fluctuation) of the first special symbol, super chance zone effect (see FIG. 357) described later is executed. That is, by performing the right strike and ending the number of shorting times, an effect mode for indicating transition to an advantageous latent state is executed.

  As shown in FIG. 356, during the execution of the super-chance zone effect (ie, during the jackpot change of the first special symbol in the definite change state), the lottery of the second special symbol is performed until the time reduction number passes (ends) When executed, the gaming state is changed from the probable state to the latent state. That is, from the state in which it is difficult for the game ball to reach the small winning prize device 2650, the state shifts to a state in which the game ball can easily reach the small hitting prize device 2650. Therefore, until the jackpot is started, it is possible to enjoy the advantageous game capable of winning the small hitting game frequently and acquiring the winning balls based on the winning to the small hitting winning device 2650. Thus, the interest of the player in the game can be improved. After shifting to the latent state, the RUSH effect (see FIG. 7B) is executed as in the first embodiment and the like. Furthermore, since the jackpot is started after becoming the latent state, it is possible to set the gaming state (the number of times of time saving) after the jackpot end with reference to the latent state. In other words, since it becomes possible to treat as a big hit in the latent state in which the rate of looping the same state is high (75% rate is set again after the big hit is finished), the end of the big hit It can be configured to be highly likely to continue the latent state later. Therefore, when super chance zone effect is started, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game. In addition, it is difficult to enter the ball into the right first ball entrance 64r even if you hit the right if you hit a jackpot in the second special symbol lottery, and also the fluctuation time of the jackpot fluctuation of the second special symbol Since it is short, it will be difficult to digest the remaining number of times by the lottery of the first special symbol. Therefore, during the jackpot fluctuation of the second special symbol, the normal jackpot effect is executed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 357, characteristic effects in the fifteenth embodiment will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 357 (a), super chance zone effect will be described. This super-chance zone effect is an effect to be executed during the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol in the probability change state. When this super-chance zone effect is executed, an effect of finding the ginseng images NG1 to NG3 in which the character 811 imitates a carrot is executed, and "Ginseng found !! Eat up !!" for the display area HR1. Is displayed. In addition, characters "remaining 15" are displayed in the display area HR2. Furthermore, in the sub display area Ds, the characters “super chance zone rush !!” are displayed. With these display contents, it can be easily understood that the character 811 is more advantageous for the player by fully consuming the carrots shown in the carrot image. In the fifteenth embodiment, after the extra chance zone effect is started, an effect in which the character 811 eats one carrot at a time is executed each time the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. This makes it possible for the player to easily understand that the remaining number of time savings and the remaining number of carrots are linked (synchronized). In other words, eating up all the carrots makes it easy to understand the transition to the latent condition. Therefore, it is possible to realize an effect aspect that is easy for the player to understand.

  In the case where the character 811 can eat carrots (when the number of time cuts has ended) before the jackpot variation of the first special symbol ends in the definite change state, as shown in FIG. 357, the display region HR1 On the other hand, the characters "complete eating !! RUSH start !!" are displayed, and the characters "remaining 0" are displayed in the display area HR2. In addition, the characters "RUSH rush !!" are displayed in the sub display area Ds. With these display contents, it is possible to easily make the player understand that the most advantageous latent state (RUSH state) has entered (transitioned).

  In the fifteenth embodiment, as the extra chance zone effect, the effect that the character 811 eats one carrot at a time for each variation is configured to be able to suggest the remaining number of times of drawing until the latent state is reached. However, it is not limited to this. The embodiment is not limited to the present embodiment as long as it can indicate the remaining number of times, and for example, as in the twelfth embodiment, the height of climbing the rock (remaining distance to the top) suggests the remaining number of shortings It may be configured to

  In the fifteenth embodiment, as the super-chance zone effect, an effect that indicates the remaining number of times of drawing until the end of time reduction is performed is performed, but instead of or in addition to this, the first special symbol An effect (for example, a countdown display of the remaining time, etc.) may be performed to indicate the remaining time until the jackpot fluctuation ends. By configuring in this way, it is possible to cause the player to play the right-handed game more seriously, in an attempt to end the number of shortings before the suggested remaining time has elapsed, thus improving the player's interest in the game It can be done.

<Electrical configuration in the fifteenth embodiment>
Next, the configuration of the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110 according to the fifteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 358 and 359. First, with reference to FIG. 358, the details of the second random number table 202c in the fifteenth embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 358, in the second random number table 202c in the fifteenth embodiment, as a random value (counter value) determined to be a hit of a normal symbol in a low probability state of a normal symbol, “0 to 230” 230 random number values (counter values) are defined. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 358, 231 random number values (counter values) of "0 to 231" are defined as random number values (counter values) determined to be a hit of normal symbols in the time saving state of normal symbols. There is.

  That is, in the fifteenth embodiment, each time it passes through the through gate 67, it is configured so as to substantially hit the regular symbol both in the time-short state of the regular symbol and in the normal state of the regular symbol. As a result, even when a right-handed game is performed in a time saving state or a probability changing state, and also when a right-handed game is performed in a latent state, the motorized role piece 640a attached to the second ball entry port 640 is opened and the second A state capable of entering the ball into the ball entry port 640 can be formed. In addition, as described above, in the time saving state or the probability changing state, the variation time of the normal symbol becomes short and the opening time becomes long while in the latent state, the variation time of the normal symbol becomes long and the opening time becomes short. . Thereby, in the time saving state or the probability changing state, it is possible to cause almost all the game balls reaching the second ball entry port 640 to enter the second ball entry port 640. On the other hand, in the latent state, since the game ball easily passes through the second ball entrance 640 while the second ball entrance 640 is closed, the game ball enters the small winning prize device 2650. It becomes easy to do. Therefore, it is possible to form a more advantageous state for the player than the time saving state or the probability changing state.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 359 (a), the time reduction / probability change table 202f2 in the fifteenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 359 (a) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the time reduction / probability change table 202f2. As shown in FIG. 359 (a), the time reduction / probability change table 202f2 in the fifteenth embodiment becomes a big hit in the lottery of the first special symbol, regardless of the value of the change type counter CS1, a per second of 600 seconds While the variation is set, if it is out in the first special symbol lottery, the out-of-middle variation for 10 seconds is set. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 359 (a), relatively short variation patterns of 1 to 20 seconds are defined in association with each other as variation patterns of the second special symbol. Thereby, if it becomes a big hit in the lottery of the first special symbol in the definite variation state, it becomes possible to continuously execute only the lottery of the second special symbol by continuing the right strike. Therefore, by performing the right strike continuously in the definite variation state, it is possible to draw the lottery of the second special symbol at relatively short intervals, and to digest the time-saving number. Thus, it is possible to easily shift to the most advantageous latent state during the execution of the jackpot variation.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 359 (b), the latency table 202f3 in the fifteenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 359 (b) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the latent determination table 202f3. As shown in FIG. 359 (b), the second table 202f3 for latent confirmation in the present fifteenth embodiment has the second variation for 600 seconds set as the variation time of the first special symbol regardless of the lottery result, A relatively short fluctuation time of 20 seconds or less is defined as the fluctuation time of the special symbol. Therefore, a more advantageous gaming state in which the lottery of the second special symbol is easier to be executed than the latent state or the probability changing state is formed. That is, since only the small hit game of the second special symbol is executed, and the opportunity to enter the small hit winning device 2650 is increased, the number of definite variations ends or until the large hit, right A game state in which it is possible to keep winning many balls by hitting is formed.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifteenth embodiment, the right hitting in the definite variation state and the short time state suppresses the arrival of the gaming ball to the small hitting winning device 2650, while the second In order to facilitate the drawing of the special symbols, the board configuration and the control of the motorized role piece 640a in the short time state are configured. On the other hand, in the latent state, by performing a right strike, it is configured to form an advantageous gaming state in which the game ball enters the second ball entrance 640 and the small hitting winning device 2650 in a well-balanced manner. . That is, in the gaming state other than the normal state, the game is progressed by executing the lottery of the second special symbol mainly, while the game ball to the small winning prize device 2650 in the state other than the latent state Is configured to suppress entering the ball. By configuring in this manner, in the gaming state other than the normal state, it is possible to realize an easy-to-understand game characteristic that the game is advanced by the lottery of the second special symbol.

  Moreover, in the pachinko machine 10 in the fifteenth embodiment, when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol in the probability variation state, by executing the lottery of the second special symbol during the execution of the jackpot variation, The number of times was subtracted, and it was configured to be able to shift to the latent state during execution of the jackpot variation. That is, even during the execution of the jackpot variation, it has become possible to form an advantageous state in which the small hit game is easy to be executed. Furthermore, when it becomes a big hit in the lottery of the first special symbol by being able to digest the short time state and shift to the latent state during execution of the big hit variation, it becomes the latent state It is easy to start a big hit from. That is, since the gaming state after the big hit ends can be set with reference to the latent state, the possibility of the latent state being continued can be increased even after the big end. . This achieves an extremely special and innovative game characteristic of continuing to hit the right even during the jackpot fluctuation aiming to end the clocking frequency during the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol regardless of the number of remaining times of the time saving state. can do. Thus, the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the fifteenth embodiment, the variation pattern is determined with reference to the common variation pattern selection table (time shortening / probability variation table 202f2) in the time saving state and the definite variation state, but the configuration is limited to this. Absent. For example, in the case of the time saving state, the variation time may be shortened when the first special symbol lottery results in a big hit. This is because there is no merit for the player even if the number of times reduced is reduced in the time-saving state.

  In the fifteenth embodiment, only the long fluctuation of 600 seconds is set when the jackpot in the lottery of the first special symbol in the definite variation state is achieved, but the present invention is not limited thereto, and an arbitrary fluctuation time is set You may The shorter the fluctuation time, the greater the possibility that the jackpot will start before the time reduction is ended even if the lottery of the second special symbol is continuously executed during the definite change state, so the first special When the jackpot variation of the symbol is executed (when the super-chance zone effect is started), it is possible to play the game while feeling tense. Thus, the interest of the player in the game can be improved. On the other hand, the longer the fluctuation time of the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is, the easier it is to end the number of shortings during the jackpot fluctuation, so when the super chance zone is started, while feeling a sense of security I can play a game. Thus, the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

<Modification of Eleventh Embodiment>
Next, a modification of the above-described eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the eleventh embodiment described above, the river breakthrough effect (see FIG. 298 and FIG. 299) is executed each time the number of lottery times is reached where the time reduction number may elapse (end). In addition to this, in the present modification, the river breakthrough effect is executed even as an effect that suggests that the jackpot has been won during the chance zone (the time saving state of the normal symbol). In addition, at the start of the river breakthrough effect, it is configured to notify in advance a benefit (reward) that can be provided to the player when the river breaks. As a result, it is possible to give the player a more diverse sense of expectation.

  First, with reference to FIG. 360 (a), the display mode at the start of the river breakthrough effect in this modification will be described. FIG. 360 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode in the river breakthrough effect performed in the number of times of drawing where the time saving may end. As shown in FIG. 360 (a), in the river breakthrough effect in this modification, the display area HR1 displays the benefit (reward) to be given to the player when the river is breached in the current river breakthrough effect. To be configured. In the example of FIG. 360 (a), it is illustrated that it is notified that RUSH is given as a benefit (transition to the latent state) by succeeding in breaking through the river. That is, the display area HR1 shows a state in which the characters "The first river is reached! With this display content, it is possible to make the player understand that rushing into RUSH by breaking through the river, so that it is possible to play the game paying more attention to the result of the river breakthrough presentation. Unexpectedly, for example, suggestion contents such as "continue on breakthrough! Finish on fall ...", and suggestion contents such as "big hit on breakthrough! End on fall ..." are provided. There is. As described above, by giving variations to the suggested content, it is possible to make the player's expectation for the breakthrough game effect different according to the suggested content. For example, in the case of a display content such as "Breakthrough RUSH! Finish by fall ...", a large difference occurs in the degree of advantage between the break and fall cases, so that breakout is more strongly expected. Can. In addition, in the case of the display content such as "Take a big hit in the breakthrough! End in a drop ...", either the jackpot happened accidentally or the time-saving number ends at the timing when the time-saving number may end Because of that, it can be felt that the possibility of being a jackpot is low. Therefore, even if the time saving state ends, the shock can be mitigated. Furthermore, by performing the effect of breaking through the river in this display mode, it is possible to give the player a great surprise and pleasure. Thus, the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the present modification, as described above, the river breakthrough effect can be executed even when there is no possibility that the time saving state ends. That is, it is configured such that the river breakthrough effect is executed in a part of the case of the jackpot and the case of the disconnection (for example, 1/100 of the case of the disconnection). The display mode in this case will be described with reference to FIG. 360 (b). FIG. 360 (b) is a diagram showing a display mode in the river breakthrough effect that is executed in the case of a jackpot and in the case of a part of the gap. As shown in FIG. 360 (b), when there is no possibility that the number of time reductions will end, a river image KG of a mode thinner than that of a normal river breakthrough effect is displayed. In addition, for the display area HR1, the characters “Ogawa found! Jump and hit or continue!” Are displayed. With these display contents, it is possible to easily make the player recognize that it is determined to break through the river itself. In the case of the jackpot, the jackpot is informed at the time of breakthrough of the river, while in the case of the outfall, the continuation is informed.

  As described above, in this modification, even when a big hit occurs in the chance zone, the big hit is notified by the river breakthrough effect. By configuring in this way, it is possible to give a sense of unity to the presentation in the chance zone. Therefore, it is possible to realize an effect aspect that is easier for the player to understand. Moreover, in this modification, it is set as the structure which alert | reports beforehand the privilege (reward) provided when it breaks through a river at the time of the start of a river breakthrough production. By configuring in this manner, since the player's sense of expectation for the river breakthrough effect can be varied according to the content of the benefit, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

  In addition, it may be configured to be able to suggest the type of jackpot in the case of jackpot and time-shortening number set after the jackpot end in the case of jackpot at the start of the river breakthrough effect executed in the case of jackpot or out. More specifically, for example, four "white, green and red" character colors are provided as a "big hit" character color, and in the case of white, the possibility of jackpot is high, and in the case of green, the possibility of positive variation jackpot If red is high, it may be a probability hit, and the possibility of a small number of times (0 or 10) may be high (i.e., it may be easy to shift to the latent state). By configuring in this manner, when green characters and red characters are displayed, it is possible to play a game with greater expectation that the jackpot will be notified, thereby improving the interest of the player in the game be able to.

  In each of the above embodiments, each time the value (N) of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d is updated in the main control device 110 (that is, each time it is increased or decreased), the number of balls held command is Is transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the audio lamp control unit 113, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, only when the value (N) of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d is increased in the main control device 110, the holding number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113. In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to decrease the value of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223b by one when the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received. As a result, the number of times the main controller 110 transmits the number-of-holds command to the voice lamp control device 113 and the number of times the voice lamp control device 113 receives the number-of-holds command can be reduced. The control load on the audio lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

  In each of the above embodiments, the winnings to the first entrance 64 and the passing of the through gate 67 are each held up to four times at maximum, but the maximum number of holding balls is limited to four times Alternatively, the number may be set to three or less, or five or more (for example, eight). In addition, the number of balls in the variable display based on winning on the first entrance 64, the number of areas divided into four or a part of the third symbol display device 81 by the number of balls It may be displayed in a different mode (for example, color or lighting pattern), and a light emitting member such as a lamp is provided separately from the first symbol display device 37, and the number of holding balls is notified by the light emitting member You may configure it.

  Further, as shown in the above embodiments, the variable display, which is a kind of dynamic display, is not limited to the one in which the symbols as identification information are scrolled in the vertical direction on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, The symbol may be moved and displayed along a predetermined path such as the longitudinal direction or L-shape. In addition, the dynamic display of identification information is not limited to the variable display of symbols, and, for example, one or more characters may be displayed in various ways along with the symbols or in addition to the symbols, or may be displayed in various ways. It also includes the effect display etc. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

  In each embodiment mentioned above, although the 3rd symbol display for showing a player the lottery result of each symbol is performed by one display means (3rd symbol display device 81), it uses composition of other than that. For example, among the third symbols, different display means may be provided for the display means for displaying the main symbol displayed emphatically to the player and the display means for displaying the subordinate symbol. Moreover, you may use structures other than a liquid crystal display as a structure of a display means.

  In each embodiment described above, in the gaming state (time reduction state) that is advantageous to the player, a right-handed game aiming at the right area of the gaming board 13 is executed, and in the normal gaming state, the left area of the gaming board 13 It is configured to execute the left-handed game aiming at the left-handed game, but it is sufficient if the aiming area of the game board 13 is made different according to the game state, and the left-handed game is executed during the time saving state You may make the game run right. Further, while aiming at the same area, the game in different gaming states may be configured to be executable.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the frame buttons 22 and 23 are used to determine that the operating means has been operated by pressing the player as the operating means that can be operated by the player. The operation means may be configured as a lever that can be operated by tilting the player left and right or back and forth, or that the player is operated with contact or proximity. A touch sensor type operation means that can be determined, a wireless type operation means that can be determined to be operated by transmitting a predetermined radio wave, or the like may be used. Also, each of the movable valve 750, the storage device (the first storage device 770, the second storage device 771), the second frame button (release button) 22b (1022b, 1122b), and the third frame button (release button) 22c. The operation control may be partially or entirely performed by the audio lamp control device 113 instead of the main control device 110.

  In each embodiment mentioned above, sound lamp control device 113 performs processing for setting the display mode in the production performed using the display screen of the 3rd symbol display 81, and a game (lottery) itself is a sound lamp. Although the main control device 110 different from the control device 113 is configured to execute, without being limited thereto, processing for executing a game (lottery) and the result of the game (lottery) are displayed as effects The processing for this may be configured to be executed by the same control device. With such a configuration, it is possible to execute a plurality of different processes by one control device.

  The present invention may be implemented on a type of pachinko machine or the like different from the above-described embodiments. For example, a pachinko machine (common name, two-time, three-time, and so on) in which the jackpot expected value can be increased until the jackpot state occurs a plurality of times (for example, two times, three times) including the jackpot once May be implemented as In addition, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game in which a predetermined game value is given to the player, as a prerequisite to winning a ball in a predetermined area. In addition, it is possible to have the winning device which possesses special territory such as V zone and to execute to the pachinko machine which becomes special game state as a necessary condition to make the special territory win the ball. Further, the pachinko machine may be implemented as a pachinko machine that is provided with a plurality of combinations of probabilities related to the jackpot lottery (generally referred to as setting), and the setting can be changed on the game shop side. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, various game machines may be implemented, such as arelapachis, ball balls, slot machines, and so-called game machines in which so-called pachinko machines and slot machines are fused.

  In addition, as a pachinko machine provided with a plurality of stages of setting, any combination of jackpot probability (combination of jackpot probability in low probability state and jackpot probability in positive change state) in any of plural stages (for example, 6 stages) Although what can be set to is mentioned as a representative example, it is not restricted to this. As a pachinko machine that can change the proportion of each jackpot symbol (each jackpot type) determined in the case of jackpot, for example, instead of or in combination with the jackpot probability, according to the setting May be That is, the rate at which the jackpot of the type advantageous to the player is determined may be varied according to the setting, or the rate at which the jackpot of the type disadvantageous to the player may be varied. More specifically, for example, the rate at which a large number of rounds (for example, 16 rounds) is determined is varied depending on the setting, or the small number of rounds (for example, two rounds) is determined It is also possible to vary the degree of advantage for each setting by varying the ratio according to the setting. In addition, for example, the ratio in which the jackpot to which a large number of short time (for example, 100 times) is given after the big jack end is determined is varied according to the setting, or the small jack (for example, 0 times) is given The rate at which is determined may be varied according to the setting. Furthermore, after the jackpot ends, the rate at which the jackpot is determined to shift (or is easy to shift) to an advantageous gaming state (for example, a probability change state) can be varied according to the setting, or the disadvantageous gaming state (eg, normal state) Depending on the setting, the rate at which the jackpot is determined (or is easy to shift) may be changed. In addition, a jackpot type may be provided in which the proportion determined only in a specific setting is significantly high (which is hardly determined in other settings). Specifically, for example, the setting is configured to be settable in six stages from 1 to 6, and the most advantageous setting is set as setting 6. And in setting 6, while the number of rounds is determined the number of rounds of six rounds at a rate of 2% when becoming a big hit, in other settings only six rounds of jackpots are determined at a rate of 0.01% It is good also as composition. By configuring in this way, when the jackpot ends in six rounds, the possibility of being the most advantageous setting 6 is extremely high, so the player is made to play by paying attention to the number of rounds of the jackpot be able to. Also, instead of or in addition to this, for example, in setting 6, the ratio of becoming the jackpot type to which 66 times of time reduction may be given after the jackpot end may be configured to be higher than other settings. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to play a game paying attention to the number of times the time saving state ends. In addition, instead of or in addition to these, for example, during the execution of the jackpot game jackpot type in which the big winning opening (or prizes inside the big winning mouth etc) operates with an operation pattern different from other jackpot types A configuration may be provided, and the jackpot type may be configured to be easily determined in a specific setting (a ratio to be determined is increased). Also, in the case of changing the combination of jackpot probability according to the setting, in the low probability state, the jackpot probability is increased as the setting is more advantageous to the player, while in the probability change state, the jackpot is set in a disadvantageous setting for the player. It is good also as composition which makes a jackpot probability high so that it exists. In this configuration, in particular, in the definite change state, the more the number of drawing special symbols, the easier it is to increase the number of balls (the number of prize balls to be paid out tends to be larger than the number of game balls fired) It is effective in the gaming machine. More specifically, for example, by applying to a game machine of a type that lasts until the probability change state wins the next big win, and in the probability change state is a small hit type with high probability, the advantage of high setting is achieved The sex can be further enhanced. That is, if the probability of becoming a big hit in the probability change state is low, the number of lottery times until the next big hit is likely to be large, so there are many chances to obtain a winning ball as a small hit. Therefore, in the definite change state, it becomes easier for the player to obtain more prize balls until the next big hit.

  Furthermore, in the above embodiments, two types of special symbols, the first special symbol and the second special symbol, are used as a plurality of special symbol types, but the type of the special symbol is not limited to this, and three or more The special symbol type of may be used, or only one special symbol type may be used. Moreover, in each embodiment mentioned above, the game property in which a lottery (fluctuation) is performed according to the rule in which several special symbols were predetermined, and the game property in which a lottery (fluctuation) is independently performed were demonstrated. However, each of the game characteristics described in the embodiments may be replaced or combined.

  In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where the coin is inserted and the symbol effective line is determined, and the symbol is stopped and determined by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, as a basic concept of the slot machine, “a display device is provided which displays the identification information after displaying the identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information in a variable manner, and is derived from the operation of the starting operation means (for example, operation lever) The variable display of identification information is started, and the variable display of identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player, as a prerequisite that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific one. In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. An example is given.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device is provided which variably displays a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols and then displays the symbols, and is provided with a handle for ball launch. Not included. In this case, after the injection of a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the variation of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button or By the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game for giving a predetermined game value to the player is generated as a necessary condition that the determined symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol. Is a lot of balls being dispensed to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only balls can be handled as gaming value in the gaming hall, so the gaming value is found in the current gaming hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and the restriction on the installation location of gaming machines.

  All or a part of the embodiments described above and each control example may be combined.

  Hereinafter, the concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be described.

<Feature A group> (Possible to hit small during a special feature change)
A first determination means capable of executing a first determination, a first display means for displaying first identification information for indicating a determination result by the first determination means, and the first identification information on the first display means Dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the first identification information by the dynamic display means, and dynamic display period setting means for setting a dynamic display period for dynamically displaying the first identification information; A second determination means, a second display means for displaying second identification information for indicating a determination result by the second determination means, and a second display means for indicating a first determination result specific to the first display means (1) When the identification information is displayed, the first benefit game is executed, and when the second identification information for indicating a specific second determination result is displayed on the second display means, the second benefit game A gaming machine having a bonus game executing means for executing There is a gaming state setting means capable of setting a first gaming state that makes the second determination easier to be executed than a single determination, and a second gaming state that makes the first determination easier to perform than the second determination. The gaming state setting unit is capable of setting the first gaming state in the dynamic display period in which the first identification information is dynamically displayed when a predetermined condition is satisfied. A game machine A1 characterized by.

  Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when the game ball enters the starting opening provided on the gaming board surface, the success or failure of the game is lottery, and if the lottery result is a hit, the player An advantageous bonus game has been executed. Furthermore, there has been proposed a gaming machine which sets an advantageous gaming state (probable change state) which is advantageous to the player during a period until the next jackpot is won after the end of the bonus game according to the lottery result (e.g. 2012-217766). By the way, in the above-described gaming machine, a period during which an advantageous gaming state advantageous to a player is set is changed by a lottery performed after the advantageous gaming state is set, that is, executed during the advantageous gaming state If the winning game is immediately won by the next lottery, the period in which the advantageous gaming state is set becomes short, and the winning game is not immediately won by the lottery executed during the advantageous gaming state, the advantageous gaming state The period for which is set becomes longer. As described above, there is a problem that the period in which the advantageous gaming state to be provided to the player is set differs depending on the result of the lottery performed after the advantageous gaming state is set. Furthermore, in the case of a gaming machine having a game characteristic of giving a bonus to the player in a period in which the advantageous gaming state is set, there is a problem that the bonus given to the player is largely different. An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine in which the interest of the game is further improved.

  According to the gaming machine A1, since it is possible to set the second determination to the first gaming state in which the second determination is easily performed during the period in which the first determination is dynamically displayed, the length of the period in which the first gaming state is set Can be set in advance. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine A1, the second determination means is configured to determine the specific second determination result with a probability higher than the probability that the first determination means determines the specific first determination result. A game machine A2 characterized by being a game.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine A1, the following effects are exerted. That is, rather than the first benefit game executed based on the determination result of the first determination by the first determination means, the second benefit game executed based on the determination result of the second determination by the second determination means is executed This makes it possible to make the first gaming state more advantageous to the player than the second gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to play the game in hope of setting the first gaming state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In the game machine A1 or A2, a first ball entry means capable of entering game balls, a second ball entry means different from the first ball entry means, the first ball entry means, and the second ball entry means The third ball entering means different from the means, the first state capable of guiding the gaming ball to the second ball entering means, and the third ball entering the second ball entering means being more difficult than the first state The first determination means is based on the game ball entering the first ball entering means or the second ball entering means; The second determination means is configured to be able to execute the second determination based on the game ball entering the third ball entering means, and in the second gaming state, A gaming machine characterized in that the variable means is controlled to be easily changed to the first state than the first gaming state. 3.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A1 or A2, the following effects are exerted. That is, it is possible to make the first determination more difficult in the first gaming state than in the second gaming state. Therefore, in the state in which the first gaming state is set, it is possible to easily perform the game in which the ball is inserted into the third ball entry means, and it is possible to provide the player an easy-to-understand game. .

  In the gaming machine A3, after the first bonus game is executed, a high probability that the probability of being determined to be the specific first determination result by the first determination may be set to be a high probability higher than normal. It has setting means, and when the high probability is set by the high probability setting means, the gaming state setting means is displayed by the first identification information for indicating the specific first determination result. A gaming machine A4 characterized by setting the first gaming state based on the start of the dynamic display of the first identification information.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine A3, the following effects are exerted. That is, when the high probability is set by the high probability setting means, the dynamic display of the first identification information to be displayed by the first identification information for indicating the specific first determination result by the first determination Since the first gaming state is set based on the start, the process until the first gaming state is set can be set in stages. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to make it easy for the player to continuously play the game.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A4, the second bonus game is characterized in that fewer benefits can be given to the player than the first bonus game. Machine A5.

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines A1 to A4, the following effects are exerted. That is, in the second bonus game, since the bonus that can be given to the player is set smaller than that of the first bonus game, the bonus is excessively given to the player while the first gaming state is set. There is an effect that it can control giving.

<Feature B group> (game content and special one, special two set at once)
A first determination means capable of executing a first determination, a first display means for displaying first identification information for indicating a determination result by the first determination means, and the first identification information on the first display means First dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the first identification information, first dynamic display period determination means for determining the period in which the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means, and the second determination A second determination means capable of executing the second determination means, a second display means for displaying second identification information for indicating the determination result by the second determination means, and dynamically displaying the second identification information on the second display means Second dynamic display means for displaying, second dynamic display period determining means for determining a period during which the second identification information is dynamically displayed by the second dynamic display means, and identification to the first display means When the first identification information for indicating a first determination result of A bonus game execution means for executing a second bonus game when the bonus game is executed and the second identification information for displaying a specific second determination result is displayed on the second display means A period determination unit configured to determine a dynamic display period in which the first identification information to be displayed by the first identification information for indicating the first specific determination result is dynamically displayed in the gaming machine; The effect determining means for determining an effect corresponding to the dynamic display of the second identification information performed during the dynamic display period determined by the period determining means, and the effect determined by the effect determining means A game machine B1 having an effect execution means to be executed.

  Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when the game ball enters the starting opening provided on the gaming board surface, the success or failure of the game is lottery, and if the lottery result is a hit, the player An advantageous bonus game has been executed. Furthermore, there has been proposed a gaming machine which sets an advantageous gaming state (probable change state) which is advantageous to the player during a period until the next jackpot is won after the end of the bonus game according to the lottery result (e.g. 2012-217766). By the way, in the above-described gaming machine, a period during which an advantageous gaming state advantageous to a player is set is changed by a lottery performed after the advantageous gaming state is set, that is, executed during the advantageous gaming state If the winning game is immediately won by the next lottery, the period in which the advantageous gaming state is set becomes short, and the winning game is not immediately won by the lottery executed during the advantageous gaming state, the advantageous gaming state The period for which is set becomes longer. As described above, there is a problem that the period in which the advantageous gaming state to be provided to the player is set differs depending on the result of the lottery performed after the advantageous gaming state is set. Furthermore, in the case of a gaming machine having a game characteristic of giving a bonus to the player in a period in which the advantageous gaming state is set, there is a problem that the bonus given to the player is largely different. An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine in which the interest of the game is further improved.

  According to the gaming machine B1, since the effect corresponding to the dynamic display of the second identification information performed during the dynamic display period determined by the period determination unit is determined by the effect determination unit, the first identification information Since the effect corresponding to the dynamic display of the second identification information can be executed in association with the dynamic display period, providing the player with the pleasure of predicting the future game based on the effect to be executed. And the effect of improving the interest of the game.

  In the gaming machine B1, the effect determining means determines the effect based on the dynamic display period determined by the period determining means and the game content of the first benefit game. Feature game machine B2.

  According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine B1, the dynamic display period of the first identification information being executed and the first bonus game by grasping the effect executed by the effect executing means It is possible to predict the content. Therefore, since the player can be made to pay attention to the effect, the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

  In the gaming machine B1 or B2, a first gaming state in which the second determination is easier to be executed than the first determination, and a second gaming state in which the first determination is easier to be executed than the second determination The game state setting means has a settable game state setting means, and the game state setting means dynamically displays the first identification information to be displayed by the first identification information for indicating the specific first determination result. A game machine B3 characterized by executing the first gaming state during a dynamic display period.

  According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B1 or B2, the following effects are exerted. That is, since the first gaming state is set during the dynamic display of the first identification information corresponding to the determination result that the first bonus game is to be executed, the period until the first bonus game is executed is It is possible to use the game to aim for the second bonus game. Further, since the period in which the first gaming state is set can be predicted by grasping the effect executed by the effect executing means, it is possible to actively play the game during the first gaming state effective.

  In the gaming machine B2 or B3, the first bonus game is usually the first bonus game as the first bonus game to be executed by the bonus game executing means, and the small first bonus game has fewer benefits to be given to the player than the normal first bonus game. And the first dynamic game period setting means is capable of determining a first period and a second period longer than the first period. The effect determining means is configured to execute the small first bonus game by the bonus game executing means and the second period determined by the period determining means, the normal mode by the bonus game executing means. (1) A game machine B4 characterized in that an effect in the same manner is determined in a case where a bonus game is executed and the first period is determined by the period determination means.

  According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B2 or B3, when the effect determining means is a combination of two elements having different advantageous states for determining the effect content, the effect determining means has the same mode. Since the effect is determined, by grasping the content of the effect executed by the effect executing means, it is possible to make the player predict a plurality of future gaming situations. Then, it is possible to gradually increase the accuracy of the prediction depending on the degree of progress of the first gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to make the player more enjoyable to predict and to improve the interest of the game.

  In the gaming machine B4, the effect determining means determines a specific effect when the normal first bonus game is executed by the bonus game executing means and the second period is determined by the period determining means. A game machine B5 characterized by being a game.

  According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B4, the following effects are exerted. That is, by executing the specific effect, it is possible to notify the player that the most advantageous game content has been set, so that the player can be given a sense of superiority.

<Feature C group> (Push notification)
A first determination means capable of executing a first determination, a first display means for displaying first identification information for indicating a determination result by the first determination means, and the first identification information on the first display means First dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the first identification information, first dynamic display period determination means for determining the period in which the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means, and the second determination A second determination means capable of executing the second determination means, a second display means for displaying second identification information for indicating the determination result by the second determination means, and dynamically displaying the second identification information on the second display means Second dynamic display means for displaying, second dynamic display period determining means for determining a period during which the second identification information is dynamically displayed by the second dynamic display means, and identification to the first display means When the first identification information for indicating a first determination result of A bonus game execution means for executing a second bonus game when the bonus game is executed and the second identification information for displaying a specific second determination result is displayed on the second display means In the gaming machine, it is possible to set a first gaming state in which the second determination is easier to be executed than the first determination and a second gaming state in which the first determination is easier to be executed than the second determination. When the first gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means and the gaming state setting means, it is played that the first gaming state is set based on the situation in the dynamic display of the second identification information A game machine C1 comprising: notification timing determination means for determining a notification timing for notifying a notification mode for showing to a person.

  Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when the game ball enters the starting opening provided on the gaming board surface, the success or failure of the game is lottery, and if the lottery result is a hit, the player An advantageous bonus game has been executed. Furthermore, according to the lottery result, the advantageous gaming state (probable change state) that is advantageous to the player is set during the period until the next big hit after the end of the bonus game, and the player is informed that the gaming state has changed The game machine which performs the production | presentation effect was proposed (for example, Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2012-217766). By the way, since the above-mentioned gaming machine is configured to execute an effect notifying that effect based on the fact that the advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player is set, for example, the advantageous gaming state is set Even if it is in the state where it is not possible to execute a new lottery, it is reported that the game playing state is set, which gives the player an unpleasant feeling. was there. An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine in which the interest of the game is further improved.

  According to the gaming machine C1, the notification timing for notifying that the first gaming state where the second determination is easily performed is set can be determined based on the dynamic display situation of the second identification information. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress giving the player an unpleasant feeling at the notification timing for notifying that the first gaming state has been set.

  In the gaming machine C1, the second dynamic display means can dynamically display the second identification information in a state where the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means. A game machine C2 characterized in that the game state setting means sets the first game state based on the result of the first determination by the first determination means.

  According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine C1, the following effects are exerted. That is, when the first gaming state set based on the determination result of the first determination means to be executed separately from the second determination means is notified, notification is made based on the situation in the dynamic display of the second identification information The timing is determined. Therefore, it is possible to combine the first identification information and the second identification information that can be dynamically displayed at the same time to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game.

  The gaming machine C2 includes dynamic display determination means for determining whether the second identification information is dynamically displayed at the time when the first gaming state is set, and the notification timing determination means is configured to When it is determined by the intentional display discrimination means that the second identification information is not dynamically displayed, the notification timing is determined based on the time when the first gaming state is set. A gaming machine C3.

  According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C2, the following effects are exerted. That is, when it is possible to execute the second determination immediately after the first gaming state is set, it is immediately notified that the first gaming state has been set. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to allow the player to play the game in the first gaming state for a longer time.

  In the gaming machine C2 or C3, when the notification timing determination unit determines that the second identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display determination unit, the dynamic display of the second identification information is ended. A gaming machine C4 characterized in that the notification timing is determined based on the timing at which the game is performed.

  According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C2 or C3, the following effects are exerted. That is, even if the first gaming state is set, it is not notified that the first gaming state has been set during the period in which the second determination can not be performed, and the second determination can be performed. In this case, it is informed that the first gaming state has been set. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the problem that the second determination can not be performed despite the notification that the first gaming state has been set, and to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game. It has the effect of being able to

  The gaming machine C4 has a remaining period determining means for determining a period from the timing when the dynamic display of the second identification information ends to the end of the first gaming state based on the determination result by the remaining period determining means. A game machine C5 having a notice determination means for determining whether or not the notice timing is determined by the notice timing determination means.

  According to the gaming machine C5, whether or not to determine the notification timing is determined based on a period in which the second determination can be performed in the first gaming state, so for example, the second determination in the first gaming state When the executable period has become extremely short, it is possible not to inform the player that the first gaming state has been set. Therefore, despite notifying the player that the first gaming state has been set, it is possible to prevent the first gaming state from ending in a short period and giving the player an unpleasant feeling. It has the effect of being able to

<Feature D group> (big hit and discard, small hit and pause due to simultaneous fluctuation)
A first determination means capable of executing a first determination, a first display means for displaying first identification information for indicating a determination result by the first determination means, and the first identification information on the first display means Is displayed for a predetermined period of time, a second determination means capable of executing the second determination, and second identification information for indicating a determination result by the second determination means is displayed (2) display means, second dynamic display means for causing the second display means to dynamically display the second identification information for a predetermined period, and the first for displaying a first determination result specific to the first display means When the identification information is displayed, the first benefit game is executed, and when the second identification information for indicating a specific second determination result is displayed on the second display means, the second benefit game is executed. A bonus game execution means to execute, and a plurality of bonus contents of the content of the second bonus game In the gaming machine having a second bonus game type setting unit to set the second identification mode, the second dynamic display unit is in a state where the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display unit. The second identification information can be dynamically displayed, and the second identification information indicating the specific second determination result is stopped and displayed by the second dynamic display means; A game having stop control means for executing stop control on the dynamic display by the first dynamic display means based on the content of the privilege set by the second bonus game type setting means Machine D1.

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines have a game characteristic (so-called simultaneous variation type) in which a plurality of lotterys are simultaneously executed. In the gaming machine having such a game characteristic, when the lottery result of one lottery is a hit, a bonus game which is advantageous to the player is executed, and the other lottery games being executed are forced to be executed. It has been proposed to end the problem (for example, JP 2005-319221 A). By the way, regardless of the type of bonus game, the above-described gaming machine forcibly stops and displays another lottery based on stop display of the lottery result for executing the bonus game. Had the problem of giving discomfort to people. An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine in which the interest of the game is further improved.

  According to the gaming machine D1, since the stop control content for the first dynamic display can be set according to the content of the second benefit game to be executed, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable. It has the effect of being able to

  In the gaming machine D1, the stop control means forcibly displays the dynamic display by the first dynamic display means with the first identification information indicating a determination result different from the specific first determination result. A game machine D2 capable of executing temporary stop control of stopping measurement of a period dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means until a predetermined restart condition is satisfied.

  According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine D1, the following effects are exerted. That is, depending on the content of the second bonus game to be executed, it is possible to set whether to forcibly stop or temporarily stop the dynamic display by the first dynamic display means. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being given an excessive benefit, and by executing a bonus game to which a small bonus is given, the bonus game to which a large bonus is given is destroyed. Has the effect of being able to

  In the gaming machine D1 or D2, the second benefit game type setting means can set the first benefit type and the second benefit type that is more advantageous to the player than the first benefit type, and the stop A game machine D3 characterized in that the control means executes the forced stop control when the second special type is set by the second bonus game type setting means.

  According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D1 or D2, the following effects are exerted. That is, when the second benefit type advantageous to the player is set, the dynamic display can be forcibly stopped by the first dynamic display means, and therefore, an extra benefit is given to the player. Has the effect of being able to suppress

  In the gaming machine D3, when the determination result of the first determination means is the specific first determination result, the dynamic display performed by the first dynamic display means ends, and the specific first determination It has invalidating means for invalidating the setting of the second benefit type by the second benefit game type setting means until the first identification information for indicating the result is displayed on the first display means A gaming machine D4 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine D3, the following effects are exerted. That is, when the determination result of the first determination means is a specific first determination result, the setting of the second benefit type is invalidated by the invalidation means during the dynamic display. Therefore, it can be suppressed that the first benefit game and the second benefit game in which the second benefit type is set are continuously executed, and that an extra benefit is given to the player. There is an effect that it can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine D3 or D4, the second benefit game type setting unit sets the first benefit type and the second benefit type on the basis of the determination result of the second determination unit, and A game machine D5 characterized in that the first benefit type is set more easily than the second benefit type.

  According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D3 or D4, the following effects are exerted. That is, since the first benefit type is more easily set than the second benefit type, it is possible to suppress the player from being given an excessive benefit even if the second benefit game is executed a lot. There is.

<Other thought 1> (The latent state can be set before and after the jackpot game)
A first determination means capable of executing a first determination, a first display means for displaying first identification information for indicating a determination result by the first determination means, and the first identification information on the first display means A second determination means capable of executing the second determination, and a second display means for displaying second identification information for indicating the determination result by the second determination means When the first identification information for indicating the specific first determination result is displayed on the first display means, the first bonus game is executed, and the specific second determination result is displayed on the second display means In the gaming machine having a bonus game executing means for executing a second bonus game when the second identification information for indicating is displayed, the second determination is made easier to be executed than the first determination. The first determination is executed rather than the first gaming state and the second determination Game state setting means capable of setting the second game state to be selected, the game state setting means dynamically displaying the first identification information when a predetermined first condition is satisfied Game machine characterized in that the first gaming state is set in a period, and the first gaming state is set after the first benefit game is ended, when a predetermined second condition is satisfied. E1.

  Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when the game ball enters the starting opening provided on the gaming board surface, the success or failure of the game is lottery, and if the lottery result is a hit, the player An advantageous bonus game has been executed. Furthermore, there has been proposed a gaming machine which sets an advantageous gaming state (probable change state) which is advantageous to the player during a period until the next jackpot is won after the end of the bonus game according to the lottery result (e.g. 2012-217766). By the way, in the above-described gaming machine, a period during which an advantageous gaming state advantageous to a player is set is changed by a lottery performed after the advantageous gaming state is set, that is, executed during the advantageous gaming state If the winning game is immediately won by the next lottery, the period in which the advantageous gaming state is set becomes short, and the winning game is not immediately won by the lottery executed during the advantageous gaming state, the advantageous gaming state The period for which is set becomes longer. As described above, there is a problem that the period in which the advantageous gaming state to be provided to the player is set differs depending on the result of the lottery performed after the advantageous gaming state is set. Furthermore, in the case of a gaming machine having a game characteristic of giving a bonus to the player in a period in which the advantageous gaming state is set, there is a problem that the bonus given to the player is largely different. An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine in which the interest of the game is further improved.

  According to the gaming machine E1, since the timing at which the first gaming state is set can be divided before and after the first bonus game, it is possible to provide the player with a surprising game. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

<Feature G group> (small hit RUSH during the symbol determination period)
A first determination means capable of executing a first determination, a first display means for displaying first identification information for indicating a determination result by the first determination means, and the first identification information on the first display means Second display means for setting the stop display period for displaying the first identification information by means of the first stop display means for displaying the first identification information, and the second determination capable of executing the second determination. Means, a second display means for displaying second identification information for indicating the determination result by the second determination means, and the first identification information for indicating a first determination result specific to the first display means When 1 is displayed, the first benefit game is executed, and when the second identification information for indicating a specific second determination result is displayed on the second display means, the second benefit game is executed. In a gaming machine having a bonus game execution means, A game state setting means capable of setting a first gaming state in which the second determination is easier to be executed than in the first determination, and a second gaming state in which the first determination is easier to be executed than the second determination The gaming state setting means is capable of setting the first gaming state in the stop display period in which the first identification information is stopped and displayed when a predetermined condition is satisfied. A game machine G1 characterized by.

  Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when the game ball enters the starting opening provided on the gaming board surface, the success or failure of the game is lottery, and if the lottery result is a hit, the player An advantageous bonus game has been executed. Furthermore, there has been proposed a gaming machine which sets an advantageous gaming state (probable change state) which is advantageous to the player during a period until the next jackpot is won after the end of the bonus game according to the lottery result (e.g. 2012-217766). By the way, in the above-described gaming machine, a period during which an advantageous gaming state advantageous to a player is set is changed by a lottery performed after the advantageous gaming state is set, that is, executed during the advantageous gaming state If the winning game is immediately won by the next lottery, the period in which the advantageous gaming state is set becomes short, and the winning game is not immediately won by the lottery executed during the advantageous gaming state, the advantageous gaming state The period for which is set is long. That is, there is a problem that the period in which the advantageous gaming state is set is different according to the result of the lottery performed after the advantageous gaming state is set. Furthermore, in the case of a gaming machine having a game characteristic of giving a bonus to the player in a period in which the advantageous gaming state is set, there is a problem that the bonus given to the player is largely different. An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine in which the interest of the game is further improved.

  According to the gaming machine G1, since the stop display period can be preset as the period in which the first gaming state is set, there is an effect that the period in which the first gaming state is executed can be properly managed. . In addition, since the first gaming state is set during the period when the identification information for indicating the determination result of the first determination is stopped and displayed, the game content after the end of the first gaming state is given to the player in advance. It can be made to grasp. By configuring in this way, for example, when the first gaming state is set in a state where a specific determination result is displayed as the determination result of the first determination, after the first gaming state is ended, It is possible to grasp in advance that the first benefit game is performed. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine G1, a gaming machine G2 characterized in that the pause display period setting means sets a pause display period of a different length based on the determination result of the first determination means.

  According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine G1, the stop display period is set based on the determination result of the first determination means. Therefore, based on the determination result of the first determination means, the first benefit game The presence or absence of execution of and the length of the stop display period are determined. Therefore, the player can be made to pay more attention to the determination result of the first determination means. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine G2, when the determination result of the first determination means is the specific first determination result, the stop display period setting means has a longer stop display than in the case other than the specific first determination result. A game machine G3 characterized in that a period is easily set.

  According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine G2, when the determination result of the first determination means is a specific first determination result, a longer stop display period than in the cases other than the specific first determination result. Can be set, so that it is possible to execute the first gaming state in which a longer period is set. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine G2 or G3, when the determination result of the first determination means is the specific first determination result, the stop display period setting means can set stop display periods of different lengths. A gaming machine G4 characterized by being.

  According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G2 or G3, even in the case of the specific first determination result, the length of the stop display period can be made different. Therefore, even in the case of the specific first determination result, since the period in which the first gaming state is set is different, the player is enthusiastically played to set the longer first gaming state to the player. It has the effect of being able to

  In any one of the gaming machines G1 to G4, the second determination means determines the specific second determination result with a probability higher than the probability that the first determination means determines the specific first determination result. A gaming machine G5 characterized in that

  According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines G1 to G4, the following effects are exerted. That is, rather than the first benefit game executed based on the determination result of the first determination by the first determination means, the second benefit game executed based on the determination result of the second determination by the second determination means is executed This makes it possible to make the first gaming state more advantageous to the player than the second gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to play the game in hope of setting the first gaming state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

<Feature H group> (small hit RUSH in the big hit when the time change end change)
First determination means capable of executing the first determination, first display means for displaying first identification information for indicating the determination result by the first determination means, and second determination means capable of performing the second determination And second display means for displaying second identification information for indicating a determination result by the second determination means, and the first identification information for indicating a first determination result specific to the first display means. When displayed, the first bonus game is executed, and the second bonus game is executed when the second identification information for displaying a specific second determination result is displayed on the second display means. In a gaming machine having game execution means, a first gaming state that makes the second determination easier to be executed than the first determination, and a second that makes the first determination easier to execute than the second determination A game state setting unit capable of setting a game state; The setting means is capable of setting the first gaming state during a first period in which the second determination can be performed when the first predetermined condition and the second predetermined condition are both satisfied. A game machine H1 characterized by

  Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when the game ball enters the starting opening provided on the gaming board surface, the success or failure of the game is lottery, and if the lottery result is a hit, the player An advantageous bonus game has been executed. Furthermore, there has been proposed a gaming machine which sets an advantageous gaming state (probable change state) which is advantageous to the player during a period until the next jackpot is won after the end of the bonus game according to the lottery result (e.g. 2012-217766). By the way, in the above-described gaming machine, whether or not the advantageous gaming state which is advantageous to the player is set is set by only one lottery result, so the process until the advantageous gaming state is set is given to the player There was a problem that it was not possible to play a game while entertaining. An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine in which the interest of the game is further improved.

  According to the gaming machine H1, since the first gaming state can be set for the first period when both the first predetermined condition and the second predetermined condition are satisfied, the second determination is made during the first gaming state. Can be performed reliably. Therefore, it is possible to suppress occurrence of a situation where the first gaming state is ended without the second determination being executed despite the setting of the first gaming state, giving the player a dissatisfaction. There can be no game provided.

  The gaming machine H1 has a first determination number counting means capable of measuring the number of the first determinations executed by the first determination means, and the first determination number measured by the first determination number counting means A gaming machine H2 characterized in that the first predetermined condition is satisfied when the number of times reaches a predetermined number of times.

  According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine H1, since the first predetermined condition is satisfied when the number of first determinations reaches a predetermined number, the first determination by the first determination means is executed By this, it is possible to reliably advance the game content toward the establishment of the first predetermined condition. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the state in which the first predetermined condition is not satisfied when the player plays a game for a long time, and to suppress the player from feeling uncomfortable.

  In the game machine H1 or H2, when the determination result of the first determination means is the specific first determination result, the second predetermined condition is satisfied.

  According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine H1 or H2, when the determination result of the first determination means is a specific first determination result, the second predetermined condition is satisfied, so the player can understand There is an effect that an easy game can be provided.

  In the gaming machine H2 or H3, the gaming state setting means sets the first gaming state even when the first predetermined condition or the second predetermined condition is satisfied, and the gaming state setting means is When the first gaming state is set based on the establishment of the first predetermined condition, the first gaming state is set during a second period in which the second determination is difficult to execute. A game machine H4 characterized by being.

  According to the gaming machine H4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H2 or H3, when only the first predetermined condition is satisfied, the first gaming state is set only during the second period in which it is difficult to execute the second determination. Thereby, it is possible to set the first gaming state set when only the first predetermined condition is satisfied to the gaming state in which the player is disadvantaged. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to cause the player to actively play the game so that both the first predetermined condition and the second predetermined condition are satisfied.

  In the gaming machine H4, when the first gaming state is set based on the satisfaction of the second predetermined condition, the gaming state setting means is shorter than the first period, and A gaming machine H5 characterized in that the first gaming state is set during a third period longer than two periods.

  According to the gaming machine H5, when only the second predetermined condition is established in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine H4, the first gaming state is set during the third period, so that the first predetermined condition is set. There is an effect that it is possible to play the game eagerly to establish the second predetermined condition first.

<Features I group> (small hitting RUSH rush expectation degree variable with time saving)
First determination means capable of executing the first determination, first display means for displaying first identification information for indicating the determination result by the first determination means, and second determination means capable of performing the second determination And second display means for displaying second identification information for indicating a determination result by the second determination means, and the first identification information for indicating a first determination result specific to the first display means. When displayed, the first bonus game is executed, and the second bonus game is executed when the second identification information for displaying a specific second determination result is displayed on the second display means. It is possible to set a game execution means, a first gaming state in which the second determination is easier to be executed than the first determination, and a second gaming state in which the first determination is easier to be executed than the second determination. Game machine having the above game state setting means; The means is capable of setting a third gaming state, in which the first gaming state is more easily set than the second gaming state, for a predetermined period, and a first period as the period in which the third gaming state is set The third game state period setting means capable of setting a second period longer than the first period, and the first period set by the third game state period setting means is the second period. The game machine I1 is characterized in that the first gaming state is set more easily than the setting of the game machine I1.

  Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when the game ball enters the starting opening provided on the gaming board surface, the success or failure of the game is lottery, and if the lottery result is a hit, the player An advantageous bonus game has been executed. Furthermore, a gaming machine has been proposed that can play a game in which a plurality of gaming states are gradually shifted according to the lottery result, and can set an advantageous gaming state (latency state) that is advantageous to the player (for example, JP-A-2015-058267). By the way, since the gaming machine described above has a single ease of setting of the advantageous gaming state in the gaming state (semi-preferential gaming state) in which the advantageous gaming state is easily set, it aims to set the advantageous gaming state There was a problem that the content of the game played was monotonous. An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine in which the interest of the game is further improved.

  According to the gaming machine I1, by varying the period for setting the third gaming state in which the first gaming state is easily set, the degree of expectation that the first gaming state is set in the state where the third gaming state is set Can be different. Therefore, the player can be made interested in the setting contents of the third gaming state, so the player is motivated to play the game even in the game process until the first gaming state is set. There is an effect that it can be done.

  The gaming machine I1 has a passage judging means for judging the lapse of the predetermined period set by the third game state period setting means, and the game state setting device is in accordance with the passage of the predetermined period by the passage judging means. A gaming machine I2 characterized in that the first gaming state is set on the basis of the satisfaction of a first setting condition established in the case of determining.

  According to the gaming machine I2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine I1, the first gaming state is set when the period in which the third gaming state is set has elapsed, so an easy-to-understand game can be provided. It has the effect of

  In the gaming machine I1 or I2, the gaming state setting means is in a state where the third gaming state is set, and the first determination result by the first determination means is the specific first determination result. A gaming machine I3 characterized in that the first gaming state is set based on the establishment of a second setting condition established.

  According to the gaming machine I3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine I1 or I2, even when the third gaming state in which the first setting condition is difficult to be established, that is, the third gaming state for a long period is set, The first gaming state can be set based on the determination result of the first determination means during the third gaming state. Therefore, depending on the period of the third gaming state to be set, different transition conditions can be aimed for causing the first gaming state to be set, so the gaming intention is determined by the length of the period of the third gaming state to be set. It can suppress that it falls.

  In the gaming machine I2 or I3, the third gaming state period setting means can set a third period which is longer than the second period, and the progress judging means judges the lapse of the third period. In this case, the gaming machine I4 is characterized by having condition limiting means for preventing the first setting condition from being established.

  According to the gaming machine I4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine I1 or I2, the first setting condition is not satisfied by the condition limiting means when the third period has elapsed, and the first gaming state is set. Can be surely limited. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress providing the player with an excessively advantageous state.

  In any one of the gaming machines I2 to I4, it has a first gaming state period setting means for setting a period during which the first gaming state is set, and the first gaming state period setting means is performed by the progress judging means. A game machine characterized in that a period in which the first gaming state is set is set to be longer when it is determined that the first period has elapsed than when it is determined that the second period has elapsed. I5.

  According to the gaming machine I5, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the gaming machines I2 to I4, the first period, which is determined to have passed the second period, is longer than the first period, which is determined to have passed the second period. The gaming state is set. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be made to gaze at the determination result of the progress determination means.

<Feature J group> (small hit surely RUSH for a predetermined period)
A first determination means capable of performing a first determination, a first display means for displaying first identification information for indicating a determination result by the first determination means, and a second determination capable of performing the second determination Means, a second display means for displaying second identification information for indicating the determination result by the second determination means, and the first identification information for indicating a first determination result specific to the first display means When 1 is displayed, the first benefit game is executed, and when the second identification information for indicating a specific second determination result is displayed on the second display means, the second benefit game is executed. In a gaming machine having a bonus game execution means, a first gaming state that makes the second determination easier to be executed than the first determination, and a second that makes the first determination easier to be executed than the second determination 2 game state setting means which can set the game state Advantage period setting means for setting an advantage period in which the first gaming state can be set continuously by the setting means, and first end condition which is satisfied when the advantage period set by the advantage period setting means has elapsed, Alternatively, there is an end means for ending the first gaming state when a second end condition different from the first end condition is satisfied, and the second end condition when a predetermined continuation condition is satisfied. A game machine J1 having end restriction means for restricting establishment of

  Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when the game ball enters the starting opening provided on the gaming board surface, the success or failure of the game is lottery, and if the lottery result is a hit, the player An advantageous bonus game has been executed. Furthermore, a gaming machine has been proposed that can play a game in which a plurality of gaming states are gradually shifted according to the lottery result, and can set an advantageous gaming state (latency state) that is advantageous to the player (for example, JP-A-2015-058267). By the way, in the above-described gaming machine, the period in which the advantageous gaming state is set is changed based on the lottery result executed during the advantageous gaming state, so the advantageous gaming state is provided to the player for a predetermined period. There is a problem that, despite having set the advantageous gaming state with difficulty, the advantageous gaming state is ended in a short period of time, and the gaming intention is lowered. An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine in which the interest of the game is further improved.

  According to the gaming machine J1, when the predetermined continuation condition is satisfied, the completion restricting means can restrict the establishment of the second end condition. Therefore, the first gaming state can be continuously set during the advantageous period set by the advantageous period setting means, and there is an effect that the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  In the gaming machine J1, the gaming state setting means can set an advantageous first gaming state in which the predetermined continuation condition can be established and a disadvantageous first gaming state in which the predetermined continuation condition can not be established. A game machine J2 characterized by being a game.

  According to the gaming machine J2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine J1, the advantageous first gaming state and the disadvantageous first gaming state can be set by the gaming state setting means. There is an effect that it is possible to cause the player to actively play the game so that the first gaming state is set.

  In the game machine J1 or J2, when the result of the first determination of the first determination means is the specific first determination result, the predetermined continuation condition is satisfied. J3.

  According to the gaming machine J3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine J1 or J2, when the determination result of the first determination means is a specific first determination result, a predetermined continuation condition is satisfied, so the first determination means There is an effect that it is possible to cause the player to play the game with enthusiasm so that the determination result of becomes the specific first determination result.

  A gaming machine J4 characterized in that the gaming machine J2 or J3 has notifying means for notifying that the advantageous first gaming state is set.

  According to the gaming machine J4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine J2 or J3, the notification means reports that the advantageous first gaming state is set, so it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game. It has the effect of

  In any one of the game machines J2 to J4, the game machine further comprises determination means for determining that the establishment condition of the second end condition is established during the period in which the advantageous first game state is set, and A game machine J5 having second notification means for notifying that the satisfaction condition of the second end condition is satisfied based on the determination result.

  According to the gaming machine J5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines J2 to J4, the second notification means that the satisfaction condition of the second termination condition is satisfied during the period in which the advantageous first gaming state is set. If it is assumed that the first gaming state set this time is not the advantageous first gaming state but the disadvantageous first gaming state, the first gaming state is ended or not. It can be determined by the player. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can feel the superiority of the advantageous first game state currently set.

<Feature K group> (during the time saving state, there is provided a period during which the number of times reduced is not subtracted)
A first determination means capable of executing a first determination, a first display means for displaying first identification information for indicating a determination result by the first determination means, and the first identification information on the first display means A first dynamic display means for dynamically displaying a first period during a predetermined first period, and the first judgment when the first identification information for indicating a specific first judgment result is displayed on the first display means; Playing state setting means capable of setting an advantageous gaming state for a predetermined period to be executed, period measuring means for measuring a period of the advantageous gaming state set by the gaming state setting means, and the predetermined period measuring means A termination means for terminating the advantageous gaming state when a period is measured, and a measurement limiting means for limiting measurement of the period of the advantageous gaming state by the period measuring means when a predetermined restriction condition is established; Having Gaming machine K1, characterized in that.

  Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when the game ball enters the starting opening provided on the gaming board surface, the success or failure of the game is lottery, and if the lottery result is a hit, the player An advantageous bonus game has been executed. Furthermore, there has been proposed a gaming machine which sets an advantageous gaming state (time-saving state) which is advantageous to the player during a period until the next jackpot is won after the end of the bonus game according to the lottery result (e.g. 2012-217766). By the way, since the above-mentioned gaming machine is configured to set a period until the number of times of drawing becomes a predetermined number as a period in which an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player is set, the advantageous gaming state is set. Period could be easily predicted. An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine in which the interest of the game is further improved.

  According to the gaming machine K1, since the measurement of the predetermined period in which the advantageous gaming state is set can be limited by the measurement restriction means, the period in which the advantageous gaming state is set can be extended. As a result, it is possible to provide the player with a surprising game, and to improve the interest of the game.

  In the gaming machine K1, a second determination means capable of performing a second determination, a second display means for displaying second identification information for indicating a determination result by the second determination means, and a second display means A second dynamic display unit for dynamically displaying the second identification information for a predetermined second period, and the first identification information for indicating a specific first determination result on the first display unit Bonus game executing means for executing a second bonus game when the first bonus game is executed and the second identification information for indicating a specific second determination result is displayed on the second display means; And, while the first identification information is displayed dynamically by the first dynamic display means, the second identification information can be displayed dynamically by the second dynamic display means And the determination result of the second determination means is the specific second determination result Gaming machine K2, characterized in that the case, in which the predetermined limit condition is satisfied.

  According to the gaming machine K2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine K1, the second determination means is configured to allow the second identification information to be displayed dynamically while the first identification information is displayed dynamically. When the determination result of is a specific second determination result, a predetermined restriction condition is satisfied. Thereby, the first determination by the first determination means can be executed in a state in which the measurement of the period of the advantageous gaming state is limited. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine K2, while the dynamic display corresponding to the specific second determination result is being executed by the second dynamic display means, the measurement restriction means is in the advantageous gaming state by the period measurement means. A gaming machine K3 characterized by limiting measurement of a period.

  According to the gaming machine K3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine K1, while the dynamic display corresponding to the specific second determination result is being executed by the second dynamic display means, measurement of the period of the advantageous gaming state Is limited. Therefore, the first determination by the first determination means can be executed in a state in which the measurement of the period of the advantageous gaming state is limited. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  One of the gaming machines K1 to K3 is characterized in that it has notification means for notifying that measurement of the period of the advantageous gaming state by the period measurement means is restricted by the measurement restriction means. Game machine K4.

  According to the gaming machine K4, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines K1 to K3, the notification means reports that the measurement limitation means limits the measurement of the period, so that the game is easy for the player to understand There is an effect that it can be provided.

<Feature L group> (small hit RUSH with different end conditions)
First determination means capable of executing the first determination, first display means for displaying first identification information for indicating the determination result by the first determination means, and second determination means capable of performing the second determination And second display means for displaying second identification information for indicating a determination result by the second determination means, and the first identification information for indicating a first determination result specific to the first display means. When displayed, the first bonus game is executed, and the second bonus game is executed when the second identification information for displaying a specific second determination result is displayed on the second display means. In a gaming machine having game execution means, a first gaming state that makes the second determination easier to be executed than the first determination, and a second that makes the first determination easier to execute than the second determination A game state setting unit capable of setting a game state; The setting means sets the first gaming state when a predetermined first condition is satisfied, or when a second condition different from the first condition is satisfied, and the first condition is satisfied. In the case where the first gaming state is set based on that the second condition is established, the first gaming state is more likely to be continued than when the first gaming state is set based on what has been done A gaming machine L1 characterized by being one.

  Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when the game ball enters the starting opening provided on the gaming board surface, the success or failure of the game is lottery, and if the lottery result is a hit, the player An advantageous bonus game has been executed. Furthermore, a gaming machine has been proposed that can play a game in which a plurality of gaming states are gradually shifted according to the lottery result, and can set an advantageous gaming state (latency state) that is advantageous to the player (for example, JP-A-2015-058267). By the way, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, since the termination condition of the advantageous gaming state is single, the continuity of the set advantageous gaming state can not be changed differently, and it is possible for the player in the advantageous gaming state There is a problem that the game to be provided becomes monotonous, and the game will decline. An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine in which the interest of the game is further improved.

  According to the gaming machine L1, the first gaming state can be set by the gaming state setting means, since it is possible to set the first gaming state which is likely to be set continuously and the first gaming state which is difficult to set continuously. Even after being played, it is possible to play the game while expecting the first gaming state to continue for a long time, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In the gaming machine L1, the gaming state setting means sets a gaming state different from the first gaming state when a predetermined ending condition is satisfied in the state where the first gaming state is set, The predetermined end is set in the case of setting the first gaming state based on the establishment of the second condition than in the case of setting the first gaming state based on the establishment of the first condition. A game machine L2 characterized in that the condition is not easily established.

  According to the gaming machine L2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine L1, the first condition is established based on the establishment of the second condition than when the first gaming state is set based on the establishment of the first condition. When the gaming state is set, the first gaming state can be made more difficult to end. Therefore, since it is possible to set the first gaming state which is easy to end and the first gaming state which is hard to end for the player, the first difficult to end even after the first gaming state is set. It is possible to play the game while wishing that the game state is set, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  The gaming machine L2 includes end condition setting means capable of setting a first end condition and a second end condition different from the first end condition as the predetermined end condition, and the second condition is satisfied. Game machine L3 characterized in that the first end condition is not satisfied when the first gaming state is set based on the above.

  According to the gaming machine L3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine L2, when the first gaming state is set based on the satisfaction of the second condition, the first ending condition is not satisfied, so it is difficult to end. The first gaming state can be executed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to cause the player to play the game eagerly to establish the second condition.

  In the game machine L3, the end condition setting means sets the second end condition when the determination result of the first determination means is the specific first determination result. L4.

  According to the gaming machine L4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine L3, the second end condition is set when the determination result of the first determination means is a specific first determination result. As a result, when the first gaming state is ended based on the establishment of the second ending condition, a bonus game can be provided. Therefore, since the player can be given a benefit even when the first gaming state is ended, there is an effect that the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  A gaming machine L5 having notification means for notifying that the first gaming state has been set based on the satisfaction of the second condition in the gaming machine L3 or L4.

  According to the gaming machine L5, the notification means notifies that the first end condition is not satisfied, so that the player can be made to play safely.

<Feature M group> (set special term high definite fall invalid period)
A first determination means capable of performing a first determination, a first display means for displaying first identification information for indicating a determination result by the first determination means, and a first determination specific to the first display means When the first identification information for indicating the result is displayed, the bonus game executing means for executing the first bonus game and the first judging means when the predetermined setting condition is satisfied In a gaming machine having gaming state setting means capable of setting an advantageous gaming state in which the result of the first judgment is likely to be the specific first judgment result more than the ordinary gaming state, the advantageous game state by the gaming state setting means In the state where is set, when the predetermined transition condition is satisfied, the game state transition means for transitioning the gaming state from the advantageous gaming state to the normal gaming state, and restricting the establishment of the predetermined transition condition Transfer Gaming machine M1, characterized in that those having a condition limiting means.

  Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when the game ball enters the starting opening provided on the gaming board surface, the success or failure of the game is lottery, and if the lottery result is a hit, the player An advantageous bonus game has been executed. Furthermore, according to the lottery result, it is configured to set an advantageous gaming state (probable change state) which is advantageous to the player during a period until the next jackpot is won after the end of the bonus game, and additionally, a predetermined lottery There has been proposed a gaming machine that ends the advantageous gaming state when winning in the fall lottery). (For example, Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2013-152). By the way, since the gaming machine described above is configured such that the falling lottery is executed based on the execution of the game winning lottery, the player has a sense of crisis that the advantageous gaming state is always ended. There is a problem that it is impossible to play with peace of mind. In the above-described gaming machine, it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine in which a player can play with peace of mind and the interest of the game is improved.

  According to the gaming machine M1, since the transition condition restriction means can restrict transition of the gaming state from the advantageous gaming state to the normal gaming state, the gaming state is shifted from the advantageous gaming state to the normal gaming state Not playing period can be set. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a period in which the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  In the gaming machine M1, the first determination means executes the first determination when a predetermined first determination condition is satisfied, and the first determination means performs the first determination when the predetermined first determination condition is satisfied. A special determination means capable of executing a special determination different from the one determination, and that the predetermined transition condition is satisfied when the determination result by the special determination means is a specific special determination result The game machine M2 which features.

  According to the gaming machine M2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine M1, when the first determination condition is satisfied, the special determination is executed, and the predetermined transition condition is obtained when the determination result is a specific special determination result. Is established. Therefore, since the determination by the first determination means and the determination of the special determination means can be set in association with each other, it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand game.

  In the gaming machine M1, when the determination result of the first determination means is a specific second determination result different from the specific first determination result, a second benefit game different from the first benefit game is executed A second bonus game execution means, and a variable ball entry means variably operated to an open state in which the game ball can enter the inside when the second bonus game is executed by the second bonus game execution means; A variable control means for controlling the variable movement of the variable ball entering means, wherein the variable ball entering means is provided with a specific area through which the game ball can pass, and The game machine M3 characterized in that the predetermined transition condition is satisfied when it passes.

  According to the gaming machine M3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine M1, when the gaming ball passes through the specific area, a predetermined transition condition is established. Therefore, since the transition condition can be established at a timing different from the determination timing of the first determination means, it is possible to provide the player with a game having a surprising property. In addition, since it is possible to determine whether or not the transition condition is satisfied based on the game result of whether or not the player shoots the game ball, it is possible to increase the player's willingness to participate.

  In the gaming machine M3, the variable control means is a first variable control in which a ball entering the variable ball entering means is likely to pass through the specific area, and a variable resistance means is more difficult to pass through the specific area than the first variable control 2 variable control, and the game machine M4 characterized in that it can be set.

  According to the gaming machine M4, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine M3, the first variable control in which the ball entering the variable ball entry means easily passes the specific area by the variable control means, and the second variable control which is difficult to pass And the player can be provided with a surprising game. In addition, since it is possible to determine whether or not the transition condition is satisfied based on the game result of whether or not the player shoots the game ball, it is possible to increase the player's willingness to participate.

  A gaming machine M5 characterized in that the gaming machine M4 has a notifying means for notifying that the second variable control is set by the variable control means.

  According to the gaming machine M5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine M4, the notification means reports that the second variable control is set, so that the player can be provided with an easy-to-understand game. is there.

<Feature N group> (small hit game selection of game)
A first determination means capable of executing a first determination, a first display means for displaying first identification information for indicating a determination result by the first determination means, and a first determination specific to the first display means A special game executing means for executing a first special game when the first identification information for indicating a result is displayed, and a specification that the determination result of the first determination means is different from the specific first determination result The second benefit game is executed by a second benefit game execution unit that executes a second benefit game different from the first benefit game, and the second benefit game execution unit executes the second benefit game execution unit. In this case, it has variable ball entering means variably operated to an open state where the gaming ball can enter the inside, and variable control means for controlling the variable motion of the variable ball entering means, A specific area where game balls can pass is provided inside the variable ball entry means Gaming machine N1, wherein said when a certain region game ball passes through, and has a game state setting means capable of setting a disadvantage playing state disadvantageous to the player.

  Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when the game ball enters the starting opening provided on the gaming board surface, the success or failure of the game is lottery, and if the lottery result is a hit, the player There has been proposed a gaming machine capable of setting an advantageous gaming state which is advantageous to a player when a bonus game which is advantageous is executed and a game ball passes a specific area during the bonus game (for example, JP-A 2013-152). In the above-described gaming machine, since the advantageous gaming state is set by the game ball passing through the specific area, it is made to watch closely whether the game ball passes through the specific area. An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine in which the interest of the game is further improved.

  According to the gaming machine N1, since the disadvantaged gaming state is set when the gaming ball passes through the specific area, there is an effect that it is possible to provide the player with novel playing characteristics.

  In the gaming machine N1, the variable control means is a first variable control in which a ball entering the variable ball entering means is likely to pass through the specific area, and a variable resistance means is more difficult to pass through the specific area than the first variable control. 2 variable control, and the gaming machine N2 characterized in that it can be set.

  According to the gaming machine N2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine N1, the first variable control in which the ball entering the variable ball entry means easily passes the specific area by the variable control means, and the first variable control Since either of the second variable control that does not easily pass the specific area is set, the launched game ball can pass through the specific area when the game ball is fired according to the contents of the variable control to be executed. Sex can be different. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of deciding whether or not to shoot the game ball.

  In the gaming machine N2, the second bonus game executed by the second bonus game execution means has a notification means capable of notifying that the second variable control is set by the variable control means. A game machine N3 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine N3, the notification means reports that the second variable control is set, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine N2, so when deciding whether to let the player shoot the gaming ball or not Can provide useful information. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of deciding whether or not to shoot the game ball.

  In any one of the gaming machine N1 to the gaming machine N3, the detection means for detecting that the game ball has passed through the specific area, and invalidation means for invalidating the detection result by the detection means, the invalidation means A game machine N4 characterized in that the detection result by the detection means is invalidated based on the determination result of the first determination means.

  According to the gaming machine N4, in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines N1 to N3, the detection result by the detection means can be invalidated by the invalid means, so that the player can play the game with peace of mind It has the effect of

  In the gaming machine N4, the measuring means for measuring the number of gaming balls detected by the detecting means and the measurement results of the measuring means during the period in which the detection result by the detecting means is invalidated by the invalidating means. And a measurement result notifying means for notifying information based on the game machine N5.

  According to the gaming machine N5, the information based on the measurement result of the measuring means is notified by the measurement result notifying means during the period in which the detection result by the detecting means is invalidated in addition to the effect of the gaming machine N4. The player can grasp the number detected by the detection means during the period. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can easily feel superiority.

<Feature O group> (completion of time saving based on the previously established condition among multiple conditions)
A first determination means capable of executing a first determination, a first display means for displaying first identification information for indicating a determination result by the first determination means, and the first identification information on the first display means And a first dynamic display means for dynamically displaying a first bonus game when the first identification information for indicating a specific first determination result on the first display means is stopped and displayed. A game execution means, a first gaming state in which the first determination is easy to be executed, a second gaming state in which the first determination is more difficult to be executed than the first gaming state, and a settable game state setting means The gaming machine having the ending means for ending the first gaming state when a predetermined first ending condition is satisfied, or when a second ending condition different from the first ending condition is satisfied. And the termination means comprises the first termination condition and the second termination condition. Gaming machine O1, characterized in that the conditions of, but to terminate the first game state based on the end condition is satisfied first.

  Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when the game ball enters the starting opening provided on the gaming board surface, the success or failure of the game is lottery, and if the lottery result is a hit, the player An advantageous bonus game has been executed. Furthermore, a gaming machine capable of simultaneously changing the first special symbol and the second special symbol has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-12907). By the way, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, since the subtraction of the period in which the advantageous gaming state (time reduction state) which is advantageous to the player is set becomes the variation start timing of the special symbol, the advantageous gaming state should be set to the maximum. There is a problem in that the player can feel uncomfortable. An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine in which the interest of the game is further improved.

  According to the gaming machine O1, the first ending condition and the second ending condition are provided as the conditions for ending the first gaming state, and the first gaming state is ended when any ending condition is ended. There is an effect that the first gaming state can be reliably ended.

  In the gaming machine O1, a second determination means capable of performing a second determination, a second display means for displaying second identification information for indicating a determination result by the second determination means, and a second display means The second dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the second identification information for a predetermined second period, and the bonus game execution means is for indicating a specific second determination result to the second display means The second bonus game is executed when the second identification information is displayed, and the second motion is performed while the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means. The second identification information can be dynamically displayed by the dynamic display unit, and the first end condition is satisfied by execution of the first determination unit, and the second determination unit is executed. In particular, that the second end condition is satisfied. Game machine O2 to.

  According to the gaming machine O2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine O1, the first termination condition is satisfied based on the first determination by the first determination unit, and the second termination condition is based on the second determination by the second determination unit It is a gaming machine capable of dynamically displaying the second identification information by the second dynamic display means while the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means. However, there is an effect that the first gaming state can be properly ended.

  In the gaming machine O2, a first execution frequency measurement means for measuring the execution frequency of the first determination means, a second execution frequency measurement means for measuring the execution frequency of the second determination means, and the first execution frequency measurement means Of the measurement result of the second execution number measurement means, the summation means for summing up, and the number of execution times of the first determination means as a first period in which the first gaming state is continuously set A first period setting means for setting a predetermined number of times obtained by summing the number of times of execution of the second determination means, and the execution of the dynamic display corresponding to the case where the number of times of execution of the first determination means is the predetermined number of times The second determination unit performs the second determination in a state in which the state determination unit determines that the dynamic display is being performed. The second decision is made Gaming machine O3, characterized in that than be one in which to establish the second end condition before.

  According to the game O3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine O2, the second termination condition can be met even during dynamic display where the first termination condition can be met, so that the first gaming state can be appropriately performed. Has the effect of being able to

  In the gaming machine O3, as the first end condition, the number of times of execution of the first determination means is the above after the dynamic display corresponding to the case where the number of times of execution of the first determination means becomes the predetermined number. A game machine O4 characterized by being established at any time until the first determination corresponding to the case where the number of times exceeds the predetermined number of times is executed.

  According to the gaming machine O4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine O3, the first end condition is the first determination after the dynamic display corresponding to the case where the number of times of execution of the first determination means becomes a predetermined number The first predetermined period can be set to be long, since the condition is satisfied until the first determination corresponding to the case where the number of executions of the means is greater than the predetermined number is performed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress giving the player an unpleasant feeling.

  The third determination means capable of performing the third determination in the gaming machine O4, the third display means for displaying the third identification information for indicating the determination result by the third determination means, and the third display means A third dynamic display unit for dynamically displaying the third identification information, and a third benefit when the third identification information for indicating a specific third determination result on the third display unit is stopped and displayed A third bonus game execution means for executing a game is provided, and the third determination means sets the second gaming state when the first gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means. A game machine O5 characterized in that it is easier to be executed than when it is

  According to the gaming machine O5, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine O4, the first gaming state is set because the third determination means is configured to be easily executed when the first gaming state is set. By lengthening the time period, it is possible to lengthen the time period during which the third determination means becomes easy to execute. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress giving the player an unpleasant feeling.

<Feature P group> (special figure change even during the opening period of the jackpot game)
First determination means capable of executing the first determination, first display means for displaying first identification information for indicating the determination result by the first determination means, and second determination means capable of performing the second determination And second display means for displaying second identification information for indicating a determination result by the second determination means, and the first identification information for indicating a first determination result specific to the first display means. The second bonus game is executed based on the fact that the first bonus game is executed on the basis of the display, and the second identification information for indicating the specific second determination result is displayed on the second display means. A bonus game execution means for executing a game, and the second determination means determines the second determination during a specific first period of the period during which the first bonus game is being executed. And the second determination is performed in a second period different from the first period. Gaming machine P1, characterized in that those without.

  Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when the game ball enters the starting opening provided on the gaming board surface, the success or failure of the game is lottery, and if the lottery result is a hit, the player An advantageous bonus game has been executed. Further, a gaming machine has been proposed in which a plurality of special symbol types can be provided and the plurality of special symbols can be simultaneously changed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-226399). By the way, although the above-mentioned gaming machine was made to make a player draw lots efficiently by changing a plurality of special symbols at the same time, the other special symbol is selected when a win is made in one of the special symbols. There is a problem that if the lottery efficiency is lowered, the gaming intention is lowered because the fluctuation of the is not executed. In the above-described gaming machine, it is an object to provide a gaming machine which suppresses the decline in the gaming intention and improves the interest of the game.

  According to the gaming machine P1, since the second determination can be performed while the first bonus game is being performed, more determinations can be made to the player. Therefore, there is an effect that the gaming efficiency can be enhanced.

  In the gaming machine P1, a variable ball entry means which can be changed to a first state in which the game ball can enter the ball and a second state in which the ball entry of the game ball is more difficult than in the first state; And a variable control means for variably controlling the variable ball entering means to the first state and the second state when the game is executed, the variable ball entering means being in the second state by the variable control means. The game machine P2 is characterized in that the first period is a variable period.

  According to the gaming machine P2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine P1, the following effects are exerted. That is, since the second determination is executed using a period in which the game ball can not enter the variable ball entry means during the period in which the first bonus game is being executed, the game result of the first bonus game is known The second determination can be performed without making it difficult. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide the gaming machine easy to understand for the player.

  In the gaming machine P1 or P2, as the second determination result, the second determination means is more effective for the player than the advantageous second benefit game executed based on the advantageous second determination result and the advantageous second determination result. It is possible to discriminate between the disadvantageous second determination result in which the disadvantageous second benefit game to be disadvantageous is executed, and the determination result of the second determining means executed during the first benefit game is the advantageous second determination A game machine P3 characterized in that it comprises discrimination / determination means for limiting what results.

  According to the gaming machine P3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine P1 or P2, the following effects are exerted. That is, since the second determination performed during the first bonus game is limited by the determination limiting means so that the determination result is not the advantageous second determination result, the player is given extra benefits to the player excessively. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of the Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be provided with a proper game.

  The gaming machine P3 is characterized in that it has variable restriction means for restricting the variable means to change from the second state to the first state by the variable control means during the disadvantageous second bonus game. Game machine P4.

  According to the gaming machine P4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine P3, the following effects are exerted. That is, it is limited by the variable limiting means that the first bonus game is changed to the first state while the disadvantageous second bonus game is being executed based on the determination result of the second determining means. it can. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the provision of a confusing game by executing a plurality of bonus games in duplicate.

  In the gaming machine P4, when the variable restriction means restricts the variable of the first bonus game to the first state, the variable of the first bonus game is changed to the first state. The game machine P5 which features.

  According to the gaming machine P5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine P4, even if the variable restriction means restricts the first bonus game from being changed to the first state, the first state in the first bonus game is Since the length of the period is not variable, it is possible to make the player play with peace of mind. In addition, while the second period of the first benefit game is set, there is an effect that it is possible to play the game eagerly to perform the second determination to the end.

  In any one of the gaming machines P2 to P5, the variable control means variably controls the variable ball entering means to be in the second state when the first bonus game is executed, at least A game machine P6 characterized in that a period from when the first bonus game is executed until the variable ball entry means becomes the first state is the first period.

  According to the gaming machine P6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines P2 to P5, the following effects are exerted. That is, since the second determination can be performed immediately after the first bonus game is performed, the second determination can be performed continuously from the period before the first bonus game is performed. Thereby, the second determination can be executed during the first benefit game without giving a sense of discomfort to the player.

  In the gaming machine P6, the second dynamic display setting means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the judgment result of the second judgment means for a predetermined period, and the first period differs as the first bonus game. A plurality of first bonus game setting means capable of setting the first bonus game, and the bonus game awarding means grants the first bonus game set by the first bonus game setting means The first bonus game setting means is longer than at least a period during which the identification information for indicating the determination result of the second determination means set by the second dynamic display setting means is dynamically displayed. A first bonus game in which a first period is set and a first bonus game in which the first period is set shorter than a period in which identification information for indicating the determination result of the second determination means is dynamically displayed are set And can also be set Gaming machine P7, characterized in that it.

  According to the gaming machine P7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine P6, the following effects are exerted. That is, when the first bonus game is set by the first bonus game setting means, it becomes possible to execute the second bonus game based on the determination by the second determination means during the first period, and the first reduction can be made. When the bonus game is set, it can be configured such that it becomes difficult to execute the second bonus game based on the determination by the second determination means during the first period. Therefore, since it is possible to give the player an interest in the first period in which it is difficult to give the player an interest during the bonus game, it is possible to prevent the player from being bored with the game at an early stage. effective.

  The game machine according to any one of the game machines P1 to P7 has second dynamic display setting means for dynamically displaying the identification information for indicating a judgment result of the second judgment means for a predetermined period, and the first bonus game is executed. A gaming machine P8 having forcible stop means for forcibly stopping and displaying the identification information for indicating the determination result of the second determination means being dynamically displayed.

  According to the gaming machine P8, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines P1 to P7, the following effects are exerted. That is, when the first bonus game is executed, the dynamic display of the identification information for indicating the determination result of the second determination means is forcibly stopped and displayed, so a new dynamic display is performed during the first period. Can be easier to get started. Therefore, it is possible to easily provide the player with the determination by the second determination means executed during the first period, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  One of the gaming machines P1 to P8 has a specific area through which gaming balls can pass, and the bonus game providing means indicates that the determination result of the first determination means is the specific first determination result The first bonus game is awarded when a game ball passes through the specific area in a state in which the identification information for display is stopped and displayed, and the second determination means determines the determination of the first determination means. After the identification information for indicating that the result is the specific first determination result is stopped and displayed, the period until the gaming ball passes through the specific area is also during the first period as the second period. A game machine P9 characterized in that the determination is performed.

<Derivation of feature Pa group> (small hit RUSH using special charge starting port)
Determination means capable of performing determination, display means for displaying identification information for indicating the determination result by the determination means, and predetermined identification information for indicating a specific determination result on the display means From the first state in which the game ball is difficult to enter based on the benefit game execution means for executing the benefit game and the fact that the benefit game is performed by the benefit game execution means The variable ball entering means is changed to the second state by the bonus game executing means after the predetermined identification information is displayed after the variable ball entering means is changed to the second state in which the game ball is more likely to enter the ball. And a special game execution means capable of executing a special game to change the variable entering means to the second state before being changed.

  Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when the game ball enters the starting opening provided on the gaming board surface, the success or failure of the game is lottery, and if the lottery result is a hit, the player An advantageous bonus game has been executed. Further, a gaming machine has been proposed in which a plurality of special symbol types can be provided and the plurality of special symbols can be simultaneously changed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-226399). By the way, although the above-mentioned gaming machine was made to make a player draw lots efficiently by changing a plurality of special symbols at the same time, in any game, it is possible for the player unless the winning is won by the drawing. Since the bonus game can not be awarded, there is a problem that the interest of the game is reduced. An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine in which the interest of the game is improved.

  According to the gaming machine Pa1, since the special game execution means can change the variable entrance means to the second state by the bonus game execution means until the variable entrance means is changed to the second state. The player can be provided with a surprising game. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine Pa1, from the first state in which the game ball is difficult to enter the ball based on the ball entering means capable of entering the ball and the ball entering the ball in the ball entering means, the game ball than the first state Has a second variable ball entering means which is variable to a second state in which the player easily enters the ball, and the special game executing means is based on the game ball entering the second variable ball entering means. A game machine Pa2 characterized by performing a special game.

  According to the gaming machine Pa2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine Pa1, the following effects are exerted. That is, since the special game is executed by causing the second variable ball entry means to enter the game ball, it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand game to the player.

  The gaming machine Pa2 has special game setting means for setting the contents of the special game executed by the special game execution means, and the special game setting means is such that the game ball enters the second variable ball entering means Game machine characterized by setting one special game from among a plurality of special games having different preparation periods until the variable ball entering means changes to the second state after that. Pa3.

  According to the gaming machine Pa3, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine Pa2, the following effects are exerted. That is, depending on the special game to be executed, it is possible to make the preparation period different from when the game ball enters the second variable ball entry means until the variable ball entry means is changed to the second state. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to play a game while expecting a special game with a short preparation period to be performed.

  The gaming machine Pa3 has a game state setting means capable of setting a first game state and a second game state different from the first game state, and the special game setting means is configured by the game state setting means. A gaming machine Pa4 characterized in that when the first gaming state is set, it is easier to set a bonus game in which the preparation period is shorter than when the second gaming state is set.

  According to the gaming machine Pa4, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine Pa3, the following effects are exerted. That is, since the short preparation period is easily set when the first gaming state is set, concentrated special games can be executed in the period in which the first gaming state is set, and the game is It has the effect of being able to improve the interest.

  In the gaming machine Pa4, the gaming state setting means sets the first gaming state based on the determination result by the determination means being the specific determination result. .

  According to the gaming machine Pa5, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine Pa4, the following effects are exerted. That is, since the presence or absence of the bonus game and the setting of the gaming state are executed based on the determination result of the determination means, there is an effect that the player can be interested in the determination result of the determination means .

  The gaming machine Pa5 has standby period setting means for setting a standby period until the special game is performed after the predetermined judgment result is displayed on the display means, and the special game setting means A gaming machine Pa6 for setting the special game in which the preparation period shorter than the standby period is set when the first gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means;

  According to the gaming machine Pa6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine Pa5, the following effects are exerted. That is, when the first gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means, the special game in which the preparation period shorter than the standby period is set is set, so that the special game can be surely executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

<Feature Q group> (derived from P group)
First determination means capable of executing the first determination, first display means for displaying first identification information for indicating the determination result by the first determination means, and second determination means capable of performing the second determination And second display means for displaying second identification information for indicating a determination result by the second determination means, and the first identification information for indicating a first determination result specific to the first display means. The second bonus game is executed based on the fact that the first bonus game is executed on the basis of the display, and the second identification information for indicating the specific second determination result is displayed on the second display means. In the gaming machine having a bonus game executing means for executing the second game, the second judging means carries out the second judgment during a specific first period of the period during which the first bonus game is being executed. Execute, and execute the second determination in a second period different from the first period Gaming machine Q1, characterized in that those without.

  Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when the game ball enters the starting opening provided on the gaming board surface, the success or failure of the game is lottery, and if the lottery result is a hit, the player An advantageous bonus game has been executed. Further, a gaming machine has been proposed in which a plurality of special symbol types can be provided and the plurality of special symbols can be simultaneously changed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-226399). By the way, although the above-mentioned gaming machine was made to make a player draw lots efficiently by changing a plurality of special symbols at the same time, in any game, it is possible for the player unless the winning is won by the drawing. Since the bonus game can not be awarded, there is a problem that the interest of the game is reduced. An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine in which the interest of the game is improved.

<Feature R group> (V prize ratio is made different according to the fluctuation time of the special figure.)
Discrimination means for performing discrimination when discrimination conditions are satisfied, dynamic display means for causing the display means to dynamically display identification information for indicating the result of the discrimination by the discrimination means, and the dynamic display means Dynamic display period setting means for setting a dynamic display period for dynamic display of the identification information, and awarding a bonus game based on stop display of the identification information indicating the first determination result on the display means The game ball enters the ball based on the fact that identification information indicating a second discrimination result different from the first discrimination result is displayed on the display means as a result of discrimination by the bonus game giving means and the discrimination means. It has a variable ball entry means that can be changed from the difficult first state to a second state that is easy to enter the ball, and a specific area through which the game ball entered into the variable ball entry means can pass, The means is the specific area Also when the game ball passes, it grants the aforementioned privilege game, as the aforementioned dynamic indicatory period setting expedient, as the aforementioned dynamic indicatory period, the 1st period and the 2nd period which is longer than that 1st period Can be set, and setting the second period rather than setting the first period makes it easier for the game ball to pass through the specific area. .

  Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when the game ball enters the starting opening provided on the gaming board surface, the success or failure of the game is lottery, and if the lottery result is a hit, the player An advantageous bonus game has been executed. Furthermore, when the lottery result is a specific lottery result, a gaming machine has been proposed in which a special game is executed and a bonus game is executed even when a ball passes a specific area during the specific game (for example, JP-A-2012-192067). By the way, since the above-described gaming machine is capable of executing a bonus game at a plurality of occasions, it has been possible to improve the interest of the game, but depending on the type of the specific game to be executed Since the passage ratio of the ball is varied, the lottery result greatly affects the subsequent game contents, and the interest of the game is reduced. An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine in which the interest of the game is improved.

  According to the gaming machine R1, the ease of passing the gaming ball to the specific area can be made different depending on the dynamic display period set by the dynamic display period setting means. Without this, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the timing when the identification information for indicating the determination result is stopped and displayed. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine R1, period group storage means having a plurality of period groups in which a plurality of dynamic display periods which can be set by the dynamic display period setting means are defined, and a plurality of period group storage means Period selecting means for selecting one period group from the period groups, and the dynamic display period setting means is defined in the one period group selected by the period group selecting means One dynamic display period is set out of a plurality of dynamic display periods, and the period group storage means corresponds to the first period group and the second period than the first period group. A game machine R2 having at least a second period group including a large number of the dynamic display periods.

  According to the gaming machine R2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine R1, the following effects are exerted. That is, when the second period group in which the second period is easily set is set, the second period can be set more easily than in the case where the first period group is set. While the group is set, there is an effect that it is possible to make the player play an advantageous game in peace.

  The gaming machine R2 has gaming state setting means capable of setting a first gaming state and a second gaming state different from the first gaming state as the gaming state, and the period group selecting means sets the gaming state A gaming machine R3 characterized in that the period group is selected according to the gaming state set by means.

  According to the gaming machine R3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine R2, the following effects are exerted. That is, since the period group is set according to the gaming state, once the second period group advantageous to the player is set, the second period group is set until a different gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means. The two period group will continue. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be made to play the game with confidence.

  In the gaming machine R3, in a state in which the second period group is set, the dynamic display period setting unit is configured to receive the first determination result and the second determination result as a result of determination by the determination unit. A gaming machine R4 characterized in that a special dynamic display period can be set based on the fact that identification information indicating a different third discrimination result is stopped and displayed on the display means.

  According to the gaming machine R4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine R3, the following effects are exerted. That is, the player knows that the currently set period group is the second period group advantageous to the player by the dynamic display period set when the determination result of the determination means is the third determination result. It can be done. Therefore, even if the discrimination result of the discrimination means is a discrimination result in which the bonus game can not be executed, the player can be made to have an interest, and the interest of the game can be improved.

<Feature S group> (derived from R)
Discrimination means for performing discrimination when discrimination conditions are satisfied, dynamic display means for causing the display means to dynamically display identification information for indicating the result of the discrimination by the discrimination means, and the dynamic display means Dynamic display period setting means for setting a dynamic display period for dynamic display of the identification information, and awarding a bonus game based on stop display of the identification information indicating the first determination result on the display means The game ball enters the ball based on the fact that identification information indicating a second discrimination result different from the first discrimination result is displayed on the display means as a result of discrimination by the bonus game giving means and the discrimination means. It has a variable ball entry means that can be changed from the difficult first state to a second state that is easy to enter the ball, and a specific area through which the game ball entered into the variable ball entry means can pass, The means is the specific area Also when the game ball passes, it grants the aforementioned privilege game, as the aforementioned dynamic indicatory period setting expedient, as the aforementioned dynamic indicatory period, the 1st period and the 2nd period which is longer than that 1st period Can be set, and setting the second period rather than setting the first period makes it easier for the game ball to pass through the specific area. .

  Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when the game ball enters the starting opening provided on the gaming board surface, the success or failure of the game is lottery, and if the lottery result is a hit, the player An advantageous bonus game has been executed. Furthermore, when the lottery result is a specific lottery result, a gaming machine has been proposed in which a special game is executed and a bonus game is executed even when a ball passes a specific area during the specific game (for example, JP-A-2012-192067). By the way, since the above-described gaming machine is capable of executing a bonus game at a plurality of occasions, it has been possible to improve the interest of the game, but depending on the type of the specific game to be executed Since the passage ratio of the ball is varied, the lottery result greatly affects the subsequent game contents, and the interest of the game is reduced. An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine in which the interest of the game is improved.

<Feature T group> (1 type 2 types 3 times loop)
Discrimination means for performing discrimination when discrimination conditions are satisfied, display means for displaying discrimination information indicating discrimination results by the discrimination means, and the above-mentioned discrimination for showing the first discrimination result as the discrimination result on the display means A bonus game awarding means for awarding a bonus game advantageous to a player when information is stopped and displayed, and a first gaming state after the bonus game awarded by the bonus game awarding means is ended, Game state setting means capable of setting a second game state in which the bonus game is more easily awarded than in the first game state, and a third game state in which the bonus game is less easily awarded than the first game state; A period in which the game ball can pass through the specific area based on the fact that identification information indicating a second discrimination result different from the first discrimination result is stopped and displayed on the display means as a result of discrimination by the discrimination means The bonus game giving means gives the bonus game even when the game ball passes through the specific area, and the second game machine is the second game machine. When a bonus game is awarded while the gaming state is set, either the first gaming state or the second gaming state is set to the gaming state rather than the third gaming state after the bonus game is over. A game machine T1 characterized by being easily set by means.

  Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when the game ball enters the starting opening provided on the gaming board surface, the success or failure of the game is lottery, and if the lottery result is a hit, the player An advantageous bonus game has been executed. Furthermore, when the lottery result is a specific lottery result, the specific game is executed, and the bonus game is executed even when the ball passes the specific area during the specific game, and the ball passes the specific area. A gaming machine capable of setting an easy gaming state has been proposed (for example, JP-A-2012-192067). By the way, since the above-described gaming machine is capable of executing a bonus game at a plurality of occasions, it is possible to improve the interest of the game, but the gaming state in which the ball easily passes through the specific area is There is a problem that the game may end immediately and the interest of the game may be reduced. An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine in which the interest of the game is improved.

  According to the gaming machine T1, when the second gaming state is set, the third gaming state is not set when the next bonus game is awarded, so it becomes easy to be awarded the bonus game one after another. Can. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to play the game with ease in a state where the bonus game is easily given to the player.

  In the gaming machine T1, the gaming state setting unit sets the first gaming state in a state in which the first gaming state is set more than the case where the bonus game is given in a state in which the second gaming state is set. A game machine T2 characterized in that it is easier to set the third gaming state after the end of the bonus game when the bonus game is awarded.

  According to the gaming machine T2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine T2, the following effects are exerted. That is, when the first gaming state is set, the third gaming state is easily set based on the provision of the bonus game, so that the gaming state advantageous to the player is set for a long time. Can be suppressed. Thus, it is possible to provide the player with a proper game.

  In the gaming machine T1 or T2, in the bonus game, the gaming state setting means is provided with a first bonus game to be awarded based on the determination result of the determination means being a specific determination result, and the specific area. Among the second bonus game awarded based on the passage of the game ball, the gaming state set according to the type of the bonus game awarded by the bonus game awarding means is made different. A gaming machine T3.

  According to the gaming machine T3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine T2 or T3, the following effects are exerted. That is, since the gaming state to be set can be differentiated between when the first bonus game is awarded and when the second bonus game is awarded, which type of bonus game is executed for the player. You can be interested in what you did. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine T3, in the state where the second gaming state is set, the gaming state setting means is more advantageous for the player to which the second bonus game is awarded than to the first bonus game. Game machine T4 characterized by making it easy to set the game state.

  According to the gaming machine T4, when the second gaming state is set, it is possible to cause the player to play the game with enthusiasm so that the second benefit game is provided. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine T3 or T4, in the state where the first gaming state is set, the gaming state setting means is a player who is given the first bonus game than the second bonus game is given. A game machine T5 characterized by making it easy to set an advantageous game state.

  According to the gaming machine T5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine T3 or T4, the following effects are exerted. That is, when the first gaming state is set, it is possible to cause the player to play the game with enthusiasm so as to be awarded the first benefit game. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

<Feature U group> (derived from T group)
Discrimination means for performing discrimination when the discrimination condition is satisfied, display means for displaying identification information indicating the discrimination result by the discrimination means, and the identification information for displaying the specific discrimination result on the display means being stopped and displayed If the bonus game giving means for giving a bonus game which is advantageous to the player, and the bonus game given by the bonus game giving means is over, the first gaming state and the first gaming state A game state setting means capable of setting a second gaming state to which the bonus game is easy to be granted and a third gaming state to which the bonus game is less likely to be awarded than the first game state, and a result of discrimination by the discrimination means From the first state in which the game ball is difficult to enter the ball to the second state in which it is easy to enter the ball based on the stop display of the identification information indicating the second determination result different from the first determination result. And variable The game player has a variable ball entry means capable of playing the ball and a specific area through which the game ball entered into the variable ball entry means can pass, and the bonus game giving means is also used when the game ball passes through the specific area. The bonus game is given, and when the bonus game is given in the state where the second gaming state is set, the gaming state setting means sets the first gaming state after the bonus game is over. A game machine U1 characterized in that any one of the second game state is easily set.

<Feature V group> (small variation RUSH without simultaneous change)
The first ball entering means capable of entering the game ball, the first judging means capable of executing the first judgment based on the ball entering the first ball entering means, and the judgment result by the first judging means The game ball enters the second ball entering means, and the second ball entering means allows the game ball to enter the ball first, and the game ball enters the second ball entering means Acquisition means for acquiring information on the basis of the information, second discrimination means capable of executing the second discrimination based on the information acquired by the acquisition means, and second for indicating the discrimination result by the second discrimination means Second dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information on the display means; storage means capable of storing the information acquired by the acquisition means until the determination by the second determination means is performed; The second identification information for indicating the specific second determination result on the display means is Second bonus game giving means for giving an execution of the second bonus game when the stop display is given, limiting means for limiting the game ball entering the second ball entering means, and the above specific to the display means And a first benefit game execution means for executing a first benefit game capable of executing at least the release of the restriction means when the first identification information for indicating a first determination result is stopped and displayed. A game machine V1 characterized by

  Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when the game ball enters the starting opening provided on the gaming board surface, the success or failure of the game is lottery, and if the lottery result is a hit, the player An advantageous bonus game has been executed. Furthermore, there has been proposed a gaming machine which sets an advantageous gaming state (time saving state) in which a ball can easily enter a specific ball entrance after the end of the bonus game according to the lottery result (for example, JP 2012-217766A) Gazette). By the way, since the above-mentioned gaming machine can always easily enter a ball into a specific ball entry port during the advantageous gaming state, there is a problem that the game gets bored early. An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine in which the interest of the game is further improved.

  According to the gaming machine V1, since it is possible to cause the ball to enter the ball only while the bonus game or the special bonus game is given, the bonus game or the special bonus game is given. In the non-operating state, there is an effect that the storage in the storage means can be limited.

  In the gaming machine V1, a second ball entering means capable of entering the game ball, a first position permitting entry of the game ball to the second ball entering means, and an entry of the game ball from the first position A variable member that can be changed to a second position that restricts a ball, and the variable member is variably controlled when the bonus game or the special bonus game is executed, The gaming machine V2 characterized in that the restriction means positions the variable member at the first position, and the restriction release means positions the variable member at the second position.

  According to the gaming machine V2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine V1, the following effects are exerted. That is, the ease of entering the ball into the ball entry means can be varied according to the variable situation of the variable member executed in the bonus game or the special bonus game, so that the bonus game or A ball can be made to enter the ball entering means in synchronization with the special benefit game. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to improve the playability during the bonus game or the special bonus game.

  In the gaming machine V1 or V2, it is easier to release the restriction by the restriction means by the restriction cancellation means when the special bonus game is performed than when the bonus game is performed. Gaming machine V3.

  According to the gaming machine V3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine V1 or V2, the following effects are exerted. That is, according to the type of game in which the variable member is made variable, the ease of entering the ball into the ball entry means can be varied, thereby improving the playability during the bonus game or the special bonus game. It has the effect of being able to

  In the gaming machine V3, a gaming machine V4 characterized in that the bonus game is more difficult to be executed than the special bonus game.

  According to the gaming machine V4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine V3, the following effects are exerted. That is, although the bonus game is less likely to be executed than the special bonus game, the ball can be made easier to enter the ball entering means during the game. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to aim for the bonus game to be executed with the effect that the operation of the game can be enhanced.

<Feature W group> (The ability to make the establishment of a plurality of game conditions variable with the character product movement pattern)
The determination means capable of performing the determination, the variable means capable of changing from the first state to the second state when the determination result by the determination means is a specific determination result, and the variable operation content of the variable means are set Variable operation setting means, and variable control means for controlling the variable means based on the variable operation contents set by the variable operation setting means, the variable control means comprising: (1) When the variable action content is set, the variable means is variably controlled such that the first benefit is more easily given than the second benefit different from the first benefit, and the variable action setting means When the second variable operation content different from the first variable operation content is set by this, the variable means is variably controlled such that the second benefit is more easily provided than the first benefit. Gaming machine W1, wherein.

  Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when the game ball enters the starting opening provided on the gaming board surface, the success or failure of the game is lottery, and if the lottery result is a hit, the player An advantageous bonus game has been executed. Furthermore, there has been proposed a gaming machine which sets an advantageous gaming state (time reduction state) in which a specific electric combination is easy to change after completion of the bonus game according to the lottery result (for example, JP 2012-217766) . By the way, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, the privilege which can be given to the player by always operating the electric combination is always the same, and further, by making the variable operation contents of the electric combination different, one privilege is given Since it is a goal to be able to set the easy to be made state and the hard to be made state, there is a problem that the game gets bored early. An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine in which the interest of the game is further improved.

  According to the gaming machine W1, since it is possible to make the provided benefit different based on the movable operation content set by the movable operation setting means, it is possible to make the player watch the variable situation of the variable means It has the effect of

  In the gaming machine W1, an end condition setting means for setting a plurality of end conditions, a condition determination means for determining establishment of the plurality of end conditions set by the end condition setting means, and the end conditions by the condition determination means And a variable control end means for ending variable control of the variable means by the variable control means when it is determined that the following condition is satisfied, based on the fact that a specific end condition is satisfied among the plurality of end conditions. When the variable control end means ends the variable control, a special state in which the first benefit and the second benefit are easily given is set.

  According to the gaming machine W2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine W1, the following effects are exerted. That is, when the specific end condition is satisfied, the special state is set, so that the player can play the game eagerly so that the specific end condition is satisfied. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine W2, the second discriminating means capable of performing the second discrimination based on the ball entering means and the fact that the gaming ball has entered the ball entering means, and the result of discrimination by the second discriminating means is specified. A gaming machine W3 comprising: a bonus game execution means capable of executing a bonus game when it is a second determination result, wherein the first bonus is to execute the second determination.

  According to the gaming machine W3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine W2, the following effects are exerted. That is, since the second determination that can execute the bonus game is given as the first bonus, it is expected that the player is set to the first variable operation content to which the first bonus is easily awarded. Can play a game while playing. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine W3, when the bonus game is executed by the bonus game execution means, the first state in which the game ball is difficult to enter is changed to the second state in which the game is easier to enter than the first state. A game machine W4 having an operable variable ball entry means, wherein the second benefit is a game ball entering the variable ball entry means.

  According to the gaming machine W4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine W3, the following effects are exerted. That is, when the bonus game is being executed, it is possible to play the game while expecting that the second variable operation content to which the second bonus is easily given is set. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In any one of the gaming machines W2 to W4, the ending condition setting means sets that the first benefit is given as the specific ending condition.

  According to the gaming machine W5, in addition to the effects exerted on any of the gaming machines W2 to W4, the following effects are exerted. That is, it is possible to cause the player to play the game eagerly while expecting that the first benefit is given so that the special state is set. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

<Features X group> (can pass through during a hit game)
Discrimination condition fulfillment means for establishing discrimination conditions based on the first ball entering means capable of entering game balls, and the above-mentioned discrimination conditions being satisfied based on the fact that the game balls entered the first ball entering means Discrimination means capable of performing discrimination when the condition is satisfied, bonus game granting means for granting a bonus game based on the fact that the discrimination result by the discrimination means is a particular discrimination result, and the bonus game granting means Passing means that allows the game ball to pass while the bonus game is awarded, determination means that can perform a determination based on the passage of the game ball through the passing means, and the determination result that the determination result is specific And the variable means is variably controlled from the first position to the second position based on the fact that the game ball is inserted when the variable means becomes the second position than when it is the first position. The second entering ball which becomes easy to ball Has a stage, the said discrimination condition is satisfied means, the gaming machine wherein the game balls in the second ball entrance means in which to establish the discrimination condition even when the ball entrance X1.

  In the gaming machine X1, the second entering means is provided at a position where the ball having passed through the passing means can enter.

  In the gaming machine X2, a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the determination result by the determination means, and a dynamic display period for setting a period for dynamically displaying the identification information by the dynamic display means Setting means for setting the dynamic display period, the first period during which the ball passing through the passage means can enter the second ball entering means, and the first period during which the ball enters the ball; A game machine X3 characterized in that at least a difficult second period can be set.

  In the gaming machine X3, a gaming machine X4 characterized in that the first period is longer than the second period.

<Features Y group> (advantage popular figure ending
A determination means for performing determination and a period determination means for determining a period for notifying the determination result by the determination means, the notification result for indicating a specific determination result being notified The gaming machine to be in an advantageous state advantageous to the player based on the setting means having setting means for setting a setting period until the next judgment by the judgment means becomes executable after the advantageous state is ended, the setting The game machine Y1 is characterized by at least a first setting period and a second setting period which is more advantageous to the player than the first setting period.

  Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when the game ball enters the starting opening provided on the gaming board surface, the success or failure of the game is lottery, and if the lottery result is a hit, the player An advantageous bonus game has been executed. (For example, JP, 2013-226399, A). By the way, there is a problem that the game becomes monotonous and the game gets bored prematurely because the period until the hit game etc. which is advantageous to the player is executed becomes long. It has been demanded that the player can enjoy even in the period until the hit game is executed, and that the problem of getting bored early in the game is suppressed. An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing getting bored early in a game.

  According to the gaming machine Y1, when the advantageous state is set, the player can be expected to set the second setting period, and the problem that the player gets bored with the game early can be suppressed. effective.

  The gaming machine Y1 has a first flow passage through which gaming balls can pass when the game machine Y1 is in the advantageous state, and when the second setting period is set, the first flow passage is moved to the first flow passage. A gaming machine Y2 characterized in that the gaming ball is configured to be more likely to flow down than when a setting period is set.

  According to the gaming machine Y2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine Y1, when the second setting period is set, the gaming ball can easily flow down to the first flow path, and the second setting period is There is an effect that it can be expected to be set more.

  In the second setting period of the gaming machine Y1 or Y2, when the determination result by the determination means next to the advantageous state is the specific determination result and the advantageous state is obtained, the process proceeds to the first flow path. A gaming machine Y3 characterized by being set in a period in which the benefit is easily given by passing the gaming ball.

  According to the gaming machine Y3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine Y1 or Y2, by setting the second setting period, it is possible to enhance the value to the next advantageous state being set, and the advantageous state is It has the effect of being able to increase the expectation of being set.

  In any one of the gaming machines Y1 to Y3, a specific ball entry means disposed at a position where the gaming ball having flowed down the first flow path is possible, and at least a part of the benefit being given by the gaming ball entering the ball And state setting means for setting a first state in which the game ball can enter the ball in the specific ball entering means, and a second state in which ball entering is more difficult than the first state, A game machine Y4 characterized in that the second setting period is a period in which the game ball can reach the specific ball entry means during the period in which the first state is set.

  According to the gaming machine Y4, in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines Y1 to Y3, by setting the second setting period, it is easy for the gaming ball to reach the specific ball entry means As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to further increase the sense of expectation for the second set period to be set.

  In the gaming machine Y4, a ball entering means capable of entering the game ball by entering the advantageous state, and a specific judging means for executing a specific judgment based on the game ball entering the ball entering means Period determining means for determining a variable period for changing a period until the specific ball entering means is set to the first state based on the specific determination being performed by the specific determining means; A game machine Y5, characterized in that the period determination means is configured to be able to determine a period advantageous to the player even when the second set period is not set.

  According to the gaming machine Y5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine Y4, the period advantageous to the player is determined even when the second setting period is not set by the period determining means, which is advantageous for the player This can increase the number of states, and can suppress the problem that the player gets bored with the game early.

<Feature β group derivation> (Advantage per regular interval spread figure)
The determination means for performing the determination, the period determination means for determining the period for notifying the determination result by the determination means, and the notification to the player based on the notification result for indicating the specific determination result Advantageous state setting means for setting an advantageous state to be advantageous until a predetermined condition is satisfied, and a first flow path through which the game ball can pass when the advantageous state is set by the advantageous state setting means, And the first flow path is set to have a high probability of being able to pass when the interval at which the advantageous state is set is the first interval. Game machine β1.

  Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when the game ball enters the starting opening provided on the gaming board surface, the success or failure of the game is lottery, and if the lottery result is a hit, the player An advantageous bonus game has been executed. (For example, JP, 2013-226399, A). By the way, there has been a demand for a gaming machine which further enhances the interest of the game. An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine in which the interest of gaming is improved.

  According to the gaming machine β1, since the probability that it is possible to pass through the first flow path when the interval for setting the advantageous state is the first interval is set high, the next after the advantageous state is executed There is an effect that it is possible to give an interest to the interval to be executed and to improve the interest of the game.

  In the gaming machine β1, a ball entering means capable of entering the game ball, a first position for guiding the game ball to the ball entering means, and a second position causing difficulty in the ball entering the ball entering means A game machine β2 comprising: variable variable means, wherein the advantageous state setting means variably changes the variable means to the first position as the advantageous state.

  According to the gaming machine β2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine β2, the advantageous state is set by the variable means being changed to the first position, so that the advantageous state can be easily understood. .

  In the gaming machine β2, when the advantageous state is set, the advantageous state setting means cancels the setting of the advantageous state based on the predetermined number of game balls having entered the ball entering means. And the game ball rolling on the predetermined range of the variable means is guided to the first flow path when the setting of the advantageous state is released. Machine β3.

  According to the gaming machine β3, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine β2, the gaming ball on the variable means can be made to have an interest even when the advantageous state is canceled, and expectation is also given to the cancellation of the advantageous state It has the effect of being able to have it.

  In any one of the gaming machines β1 to β3, there is disposed a specific area where the gaming ball guided to the first flow path can enter, and a first state where the gaming ball can enter the specific area. And state variable means in which the game ball is made to be in the second state where it is more difficult to enter the game ball than the ball insertion state, and before the lapse period of the game ball to flow down the first flow path. A first variable control that changes to the second state after changing the state changing unit to the first state, and a variable that changes the state changing unit to the first state during a period when the flow-down period elapses A variable control means for performing at least one of the second variable control and the second variable control.

  According to the gaming machine β4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines β1 to β3, it is possible to expect the second variable control to be executed by the variable control means, and an effect that the interest of the game can be improved is there.

<Features Z group> (Attack below the General Electric)
The ball entering means capable of entering the game ball, the judging means capable of executing the judgment based on the ball entering the ball entering means, and the identification information for indicating the judgment result of the judgment means A dynamic display means for dynamically displaying on the screen, and a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game which is advantageous to the player when the identification information for indicating a specific determination result is stopped and displayed on the display means A variable condition that can be changed to a first state that facilitates game ball entry into the ball entry means, and a second state in which game sphere entry is made more difficult than the first state, and specific conditions A game machine having variable control means for changing the variable means from the second state to the first state based on the establishment of the variable state, the variable means being in the first state Is guided to the variable means by the presence of the first ball entry hand Before entering the ball, the specific flow path in which the gaming ball which has flowed down can be entered by being changed to the second state, and the specific area in which the gaming ball which has flowed down the specific flow path can enter; , And the bonus game execution means executes the bonus game in which the ball entry state in which the game ball can enter into the specific area is set until the end condition is satisfied. Machine Z1.

  Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when the game ball enters the starting opening provided on the gaming board surface, the success or failure of the game is lottery, and if the lottery result is a hit, the player An advantageous bonus game has been executed. (For example, JP, 2013-226399, A). By the way, there has been a demand for a gaming machine which further enhances the interest of the game. An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine in which the interest of gaming is improved.

  According to the gaming machine Z1, the game ball can not be made to enter the specific flow path even to the game ball which could not be entered into the ball entry means by the variable means, and the game can be played, and the fun of the game Has the effect of improving

  The gaming machine Z1 has a dynamic display period determining means for determining a dynamic display period when starting dynamic display of the identification information, and the dynamic display determined by the dynamic display period determining means The period has at least an advantageous dynamic display period in which the game ball can easily enter the specific area and a disadvantageous dynamic display period in which it is difficult to enter the specific area. Feature game machine Z2.

  According to the gaming machine Z2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine Z1, the player can be made interested in the dynamic display period of the identification information, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  The gaming machine Z1 or Z2 is characterized in that the bonus game execution means starts executing the setting of the ball entering state according to a certain rule on the specific area based on the start of execution of the bonus game. Game machine Z3.

  According to the gaming machine Z3, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine Z1 or Z2, the specific area is set to the entering state according to a certain rule based on the start of execution of the bonus game, and therefore fairness to the player It has the effect of keeping the sex constant.

<Feature AA group> (Effect based on special figure 2 change)
The ball entering means capable of entering the game ball, the judging means capable of executing the judgment based on the ball entering the ball entering means, and the identification information for indicating the judgment result of the judgment means Dynamic display means for dynamically displaying on the screen, dynamic display period determination means for determining a dynamic display period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, and determination results specific to the display means In a gaming machine having a specific ball entry means that enables the game ball to enter until the termination condition is satisfied when the identification information for indicating is stopped and displayed, the ball enters the specific ball entry means A detection means capable of detecting a game ball flowing down a flow path to be enabled; and an effect execution means capable of executing an effect during the dynamic display period, the effect execution means comprising the detection means At least part of the effect based on the detection result by Gaming machine AA1, characterized in that in which row.

  Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when the game ball enters the starting opening provided on the gaming board surface, the success or failure of the game is lottery, and if the lottery result is a hit, the player An advantageous bonus game has been executed. Furthermore, when notifying the lottery result, the player can have high expectation for the lottery result by notifying the player of the lottery result after executing the effect suggesting the lottery result for a predetermined period. A gaming machine has been proposed. (For example, JP, 2013-226399, A). By the way, since the effect is executed based on the lottery result determined in advance, the effect tends to be constant, the game becomes monotonous, and the player gets bored with the game early. An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a player from getting bored with a game early.

  According to the gaming machine AA1, the game ball detected by the detection means is detected by the game means flowing down the flow passage which enables the player to enter the specific ball entering means, and at least a part of the effect being executed is executed based on the detection result. Therefore, not only the dynamic display of the identification information but also the effect being executed can be made variable by the flow of the game ball, the interest of the game is improved, and the player gets bored with the game early There is an effect that the problem can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine AA1, in the dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determining means, at least a first dynamic display period in which game balls are set to easily enter the specific ball entering means is set. A game machine AA2 characterized in that the effect execution means executes a specific effect with at least one condition that the first dynamic display period is determined.

  According to the gaming machine AA2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine AA1, the specific effect is executed on the condition that the first dynamic display period advantageous to the player is determined as at least one condition. By carrying out, there is an effect that it can be expected that the first dynamic display period is determined.

  In the gaming machine AA2, even when the first dynamic display period is determined, the effect execution means does not detect the game ball by the detection means during the specific detection period, A game machine AA3 characterized by performing different effects.

  According to the gaming machine AA3, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine AA2, even when the first dynamic display period is determined, when the game ball is not detected by the detection means in the specific detection period, the specific effect Is not executed, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a defect that the execution of the specific effect is performed wastefully and the expectation to the specific effect is lowered.

  In any one of the gaming machines AA1 to AA3, the specific entering means is provided with a specific area through which the entered game ball can pass, and based on passing through the specific area, the special game is performed. A setting for execution is executed. A game machine AA4 characterized in that

  According to the gaming machine AA4, in addition to the effects played by any of the gaming machines AA1 to AA3, the gaming ball passes through the specific area by the game ball entering the specific ball entry means and the bonus game is executed The effect is that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In gaming machine AA4, variable means that can be changed into a first state that facilitates the entry of gaming balls into the ball entry means, and a second state in which the entry of gaming balls is more difficult than the first state. And variable control means for changing the variable means from the second state to the first state based on the establishment of the specific condition, the flow path comprising the variable means Is guided to the variable means by being in the first state, and is changed to the second state before entering the first ball entering means so that the game balls that flowed down can flow in A game machine AA5 characterized by being.

  According to the gaming machine AA5, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine AA4, by making the variable means variable, it is expected that the game balls that did not enter the ball entering means are expected to flow into the flow path. Effect of improving the interest of the game.

  In the gaming machine AA5, the specific entering means is configured to facilitate passage of the gaming ball which has flowed down and entered the flow path into the specific area. .

  According to the gaming machine AA6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AA5, by flowing down the flow path, the degree of expectation for passing through the specific area can be increased, and the interest of the game can be improved.

<Characteristics AB group> (Puden non-winning balls can win special power)
A first ball entering means capable of entering a game ball, a first judging means capable of executing a first judgment based on the game ball entering the first ball entering means, and the first judgment means The first dynamic display means capable of causing the display means to dynamically display the first identification information for indicating the determination result for a predetermined period, and the first state in which the game ball can enter and the first state thereof than the first state The first variable ball entering means can be changed to the second state where it is difficult to enter the ball, and the first variable ball entering means can be selected as the second variable ball entering means when the determination result by the first determination means is a specific determination result. First variable control means for changing from the state to the first state, a first guideway capable of guiding the game ball to the first variable ball entering means, and a second for which the game ball can enter the ball Second discrimination means capable of executing second discrimination based on the ball entering means and the fact that the game ball has entered the second ball entering means A second dynamic display means capable of causing the display means to dynamically display second identification information for indicating a judgment result by the second judgment means, the game being provided in the first guiding path; A second variable ball entry means that can be changed to a first state in which the ball can enter the ball and a second state in which it is more difficult to enter the ball than the first state, and the discrimination result by the second discrimination means A second variable control means for changing the second variable ball entering means from the second state to the first state, the first variable ball entering means comprising A game machine AB1 characterized in that the game ball having flowed down the first induction passage can enter the ball without entering the second variable entry means.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a game symbol is executed for a first symbol and a second starting winning opening where variable display is executed for a predetermined period based on the winning of the gaming ball to the first starting winning opening. There is a second pattern in which the variable display is executed for a predetermined period based on the pattern, and each pattern can be simultaneously changed. In such a gaming machine, when a predetermined lottery result (for example, a small hit) is obtained as a lottery result of the second symbol, a small bonus game (for example, a small hit game) which can give a small bonus to the player There are those which are configured to be executed, and in which the gaming state in which the second symbol lottery is easy to be executed and the gaming state which is difficult to be executed can be set. (For example, Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2015-39398).

  In such a conventional type gaming machine, by varying the length of the fluctuation time of the second symbol, it is possible to set the gaming state in which the lottery of the second symbol is easy to be executed and the gaming state which is difficult to be executed. Since the small bonus game is configured to be set to the gaming state in which the small bonus game is easy to be executed and the difficult gaming state to be played, for example, in the state where the lottery of the second symbol is easy to be performed There is a problem that it is not possible to make detailed settings such as making the amount of bonus different, and the interest of the game is reduced. It aims at solving the problem etc. which were illustrated above.

  According to the gaming machine AB, the number of gaming balls reaching the first variable ball entry means can be varied in accordance with the status of the second variable means, so that the number of balls reaching the first variable ball entry means is (2) It becomes possible to adjust according to the control contents of the variable means. As a result, the amount of benefit given to the player in the game in which the first variable ball entry means is operated to open can be adjusted, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine AB1, a game state setting means capable of setting a first game state and a second game state different from the first game state, and the second identification information executed by the second dynamic display means The dynamic display period setting means capable of setting the dynamic display period of the different time periods, and the dynamic display period setting means sets the first gaming state by the gaming state setting means A game machine AB2 characterized by making it easier to set a longer dynamic display period than when the second gaming state is set.

  According to the gaming machine AB2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine AB1, the following effects are exerted. That is, the dynamic display period of the second dynamic display means can be varied according to the set gaming state. Furthermore, when the first gaming state is set, a dynamic display period longer than when the second gaming state is set can be easily set. Therefore, since the period in which the ball can not enter the second variable ball entry means can be extended, the ball can be made easy to reach the first variable ball entry means, and the interest of the game can be improved. It has the effect of being able to

  In the gaming machine AB2, the second variable entering means has at least an opening through which the game ball can enter and an opening / closing member for opening / closing the opening, and the opening / closing member is the opening In the state in which the unit is closed, the upper surface of the open / close lid member is configured to form a part of the first guide path, and the dynamic display period setting unit is configured to set the first display state by the game state setting unit. A gaming machine AB3 characterized by making it easy to set a dynamic display period longer than a passing time for a game ball to pass through the upper surface of the open / close lid member when a gaming state is set.

  According to the gaming machine AB3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine AB2 described above, the following effects are exerted. That is, when the first gaming state is set, the ball can surely reach the first variable ball entry means. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  The gaming machine AB2 or AB3 has variable pattern setting means capable of setting a variable pattern variably controlled by the second variable control means among a plurality of different variable patterns, and the variable pattern setting means comprises the gaming state When the first gaming state is set by the setting means, a variable pattern is set in which the period during which the second variable entering means is in the second state is longer than when the second gaming state is set. A game machine AB4 characterized by being a game machine.

  According to the gaming machine AB4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine AB2 or AB3, the following effects are exerted. That is, when the first gaming state is set, a variable pattern is set in which the period during which the second variable entering means is in the second state is longer than when the second gaming state is set, so (1) The gaming state can be made more advantageous to the player. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

<Characteristic AC group> (Indicates the special figure 1 lottery result based on the special figure 2 lottery during special figure 1 fluctuation)
The first discrimination means capable of executing the first discrimination, the first dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the first discrimination information for indicating the discrimination result by the first discrimination means, and the first discrimination information A second dynamic display for dynamically displaying, for a predetermined period, second identification information for indicating a determination result by the first display unit to be displayed, a second determination unit capable of executing the second determination, and the second determination unit Means, a second display means for displaying the second identification information, and a stop display of the first identification information for indicating a specific first determination result on the first display means. 1 bonus game execution means for executing a second bonus game based on the fact that the second identification information for executing a special game is executed and the second display means is stopped and displayed The first identification information is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means And suggestive effect executing means capable of executing a suggestive effect for suggesting the discrimination result of the first discrimination means based on the fact that the discrimination of the second discrimination means is executed during the operation. A game machine AC1 characterized by

  Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when the game ball enters the starting opening provided on the gaming board surface, the success or failure of the game is lottery, and if the lottery result is a hit, the player An advantageous bonus game has been executed. Furthermore, a gaming machine capable of simultaneously changing the first special symbol and the second special symbol has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-12907). By the way, the above-mentioned gaming machine executes a variation effect dedicated to the first special symbol in order to suggest the lottery result of the first special symbol, and dedicated to the second special symbol in order to suggest the lottery result of the second special symbol Since it is configured to execute the fluctuation effect, the game using one special symbol lottery and the game using the other special symbol lottery become independent, and both the special symbol lottery is executed vigorously There was a problem that the motivation to try was reduced. In addition, when a plurality of special symbols are changing at the same time, there is a problem that the player is notified of the lottery result of each special symbol incomprehensiblely. In addition, since the independent variable effects are performed for each special symbol, there is a problem that an effect without a sense of unity is performed. In the above-described gaming machine, it is an object to provide a gaming machine in which the interest of the game is further improved by providing the player with an indication effect for suggesting a lottery result of each special symbol in an easily understandable manner.

  According to the gaming machine AC1, the determination result of the first determination means is suggested based on the determination of the second determination means executed while the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means. Since the suggestion effect for the purpose is executed, it is possible to play the game eagerly to make the player execute the discrimination of the second discrimination means in order to grasp the discrimination result of the first discrimination means in advance. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the game machine AC1, the suggested effect execution means executes the suggested effect when the determination result of the first determination means is the specific first determination result. .

  According to the gaming machine AC2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine AC1, the following effects can be achieved. That is, since the suggested effect is executed when the determination result of the first determination means is the specific first determination result, the effect of the suggested effect can be enhanced.

  In the gaming machine AC2, from when it is determined by the first determination means that it is the specific first determination result, until the first identification information for indicating the specific first determination result is stopped and displayed A gaming machine AC3 having limiting means for limiting the determination result of the second determination means to be the specific second determination result.

  According to the gaming machine AC3, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine AC2, the following effects can be achieved. That is, when the determination result of the first determination means is the specific first determination result, the determination by the second determination means is limited by the limitation means to be the specific second determination result, so the process is executed. It is possible to suppress that a bonus game different from the content of the suggestion effect is executed. Therefore, it is possible to increase the reliability of the suggested rendering, and to enhance the rendering effect.

  A gaming machine AC4 characterized in that, in the gaming machine AC1 or AC3, the suggestion effect executing means executes the suggestion effect by using a display mode of the second identification information.

  According to the gaming machine AC4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines AC1 to AC3, the following effects can be achieved. That is, since the suggestion effect is executed using the display mode of the second identification information, the player can check the determination result of the second determination means only by looking at the display mode of the second identification information. It is possible to predict the discrimination result of the discrimination means. As a result, the player pays attention to the second identification information, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In any one of the gaming machines AC1 to AC4, tallying means for tallying the judgment results of the second judging means, and condition satisfaction judging means for judging the establishment of the execution condition on the basis of the judgment results tallyed by the tallying means A game machine AC5 characterized in that the suggestion effect performing means executes the suggestion effect when it is determined by the condition satisfaction determining means that the execution condition is fulfilled.

  According to the gaming machine AC5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines AC1 to AC4, the following effects can be achieved. That is, since the determination result of the second determination means is totaled and the suggestion effect is executed when the total result satisfies the execution condition, the player is actively played to fulfill the execution condition You can Therefore, there is an effect that the operation of the game can be improved.

  In any one of the gaming machines AC1 to AC5, there is provided an effect mode setting means for setting an effect mode of the suggestion effect to be executed by the indication effect executing means, wherein the effect mode setting means comprises a first indication mode and its first 1) A game machine AC6 characterized in that it is possible to set a second suggestion mode that suggests that the determination result of the first determination means is incomprehensible rather than a suggestion mode.

  According to the gaming machine AC6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines AC1 to AC5, the following effects can be achieved. That is, the suggested effect that is easy to understand and the suggestive effect that is hard to understand are executed by the effect mode set by the effect mode setting means. Thereby, it is possible to suppress that the discrimination result of the first discrimination means is easily grasped by one suggestion effect. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to play the game eagerly to execute the suggested effect a plurality of times.

  The gaming machine AC6 has a count measurement means for measuring the number of times of execution of the suggestion effect executed by the suggestion effect execution means, and the effect mode setting means performs the suggestion effect measured by the number measurement means. A game machine AC7 characterized in that the first suggestion mode is easier to set when the number of times is a specific number of times greater than the predetermined number of times, compared to the case where the number of times is a predetermined number of times.

  According to the gaming machine AC7, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine AC6, the following effects can be achieved. That is, as the number of times the suggested effect has been executed is increased, the suggested effect is executed by the player in an easy-to-understand manner, so that there is an effect that it is possible to play the game eagerly to execute the suggested effect a plurality of times.

<Features BA group> (The more advantageous the number of consecutive first advantageous states, the easier it is to set the more advantageous second advantageous state)
Discrimination means for performing discrimination based on establishment of discrimination conditions, and bonus game execution means for performing a bonus game advantageous to the player based on the discrimination result of the discrimination means becoming a specific discrimination result, As the gaming state after the end of the bonus game, there are a first gaming state, a second gaming state more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state, and a third more advantageous to the player than the second gaming state The first gaming state setting means capable of setting one gaming state out of a plurality of gaming states including at least a gaming state, and that a specific condition predetermined in the second gaming state is established And second game state setting means for setting the game state to the third game state, and the specific condition is set based on the fact that the bonus game has been executed during the first game state. The second game state that has been Also, the second game state set based on execution of the bonus game during the second game state is configured to be more easily established. Game machine BA1.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is one that shifts to the winning state when the result of the lottery performed based on the winning of the gaming ball to the starting winning opening is a win. Some of such gaming machines are provided with a plurality of types of per-classes having different numbers of rounds, and some are trying to improve the persuasiveness by varying the game value that can be acquired (for example, , Patent Document 1: Patent No. 2514417).

  Further, among the above-described conventional game machines, there are also machines that can be configured to be able to change the game state after the end of the hit state according to the type of the hit, and after the hit state is ended There are also those aiming to improve the interest in Furthermore, in the above-described conventional gaming machines, a relatively advantageous gaming state is set after the winning state is over, and the relatively advantageous gaming state has been continuously removed in a specified number of lotterys In some cases, there is also a transition to a more advantageous state.

  However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, the transition condition from the relatively advantageous gaming state to the more advantageous gaming state is fixed regardless of the situation at the time when the relatively advantageous gaming state is achieved. There is a problem that it is difficult to improve the player's sense of expectation at the time when the game state is set to a highly advantageous gaming state, and it is difficult to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine BA1, it is advantageous for the player based on the determination means that executes the determination based on the establishment of the determination condition and that the determination result of the determination means is a specific determination result. A bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game, a first gaming state, and a second gaming state more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state as a gaming state after the end of the bonus game, and a second First gaming state setting means capable of setting one gaming state out of a plurality of gaming states including at least a third gaming state advantageous to the player than the gaming state; and in the second gaming state And second game state setting means for setting the game state to the third game state based on the establishment of a predetermined specific condition, the specific condition being the condition during the first game state. Based on the bonus game being executed The second gaming state set based on execution of the bonus game during the second gaming state is configured to be more easily established than the second gaming state set to It is

  This makes it easier to shift to the third gaming state in addition to being advantageous over the first gaming state when in the second gaming state, thereby improving the player's sense of expectation for the third gaming state be able to. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  In the gaming machine BA1, the specific condition is a game after the end of the bonus game than when the second gaming state is set based on the fact that the bonus game is executed during the first gaming state. A gaming machine BA2 characterized in that it is configured to be more easily established when the second gaming state is set continuously for a specific number of times or more.

  According to the gaming machine BA2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine BA1, the second condition is set based on the fact that the bonus game is executed during the first gaming state. The second gaming state is more easily established when the second gaming state is set continuously more than a specific number of times as the gaming state after the end of the bonus game. Even if the bonus game is executed without the specific condition being established, the expectation for the third gaming state can be further improved. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  In the gaming machine BA1 or BA2, when the second gaming state is set based on the fact that the bonus game is executed during the first gaming state, the second gaming state setting means is the second one. The third gaming state is set based on the fact that the discrimination result of the discriminator is different from the specific discrimination result, continuously for the first predetermined number of times in the gaming state In the second gaming state, the second gaming state setting means sets the second gaming state continuously for a specific number of times or more as the gaming state after the end of the bonus game. The third gaming state is set based on the fact that the determination result of the determination means has become a separation determination result different from the specific determination result continuously over a second number which is less than the first number. With what Game machine BA3 characterized by Rukoto.

  According to the gaming machine BA3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine BA1 or BA2, the second gaming state setting means performs the second gaming based on the fact that the bonus game is executed during the first gaming state. When the state is set, the determination result of the determination means is a separation determination result different from the specific determination result continuously for a first predetermined number of times in the second gaming state. The third gaming state is set based on the second gaming state setting means, the second gaming state is continuously set a specific number of times or more as the gaming state after the end of the bonus game. In the second game state, the determination result of the determination means is a separate determination result different from the specific determination result continuously for a second number of times less than the first number in the second gaming state. On the basis of the, It is for setting the serial third gaming state.

  In this way, in the second gaming state, it is possible to realize a novel game characteristic of expecting the continuous out determination result rather than the specific determination result, thereby improving the interest of the player in the game It has the effect of being able to

  In any of the gaming machines BA1 to BA3, a ball entering means capable of entering a game ball, and a privilege giving means for providing a predetermined benefit based on the game ball entering the ball entering means, Variable means which can be changed to a first position where the game ball can enter the ball to the writing ball means, and a second position where the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first position, and the discrimination result of the discrimination means Variable game execution means for executing a variable game in which the variable means is varied from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period based on the second determination result different from the specific determination result. And the third gaming state is configured such that the variable game is easier to be executed than the second gaming state.

  According to the gaming machine BA4, in addition to the effects played by any of the gaming machines BA1 to BA3, the predetermined number is based on the entering means capable of entering the gaming ball and the entering of the gaming ball to the entering means. Of the game ball can be entered into the ball entry means, and the second position in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first position. And the variable means is variable from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period based on the determination result of the determination means being a second determination result different from the specific determination result. Variable game execution means for executing the variable game to be played, and the third game state is configured such that the variable game can be more easily performed than the second game state.

  As a result, in the third gaming state, the chances of entering the game ball into the ball entry means increase, so that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine BA4, the determination means makes a determination based on the establishment of a second determination condition different from the first determination means for performing the determination based on the establishment of the first determination condition and the first determination condition. A second determination unit configured to execute the second determination unit such that the determination by the second determination unit has a higher probability of the second determination result than the determination by the first determination unit. A gaming machine BA5 characterized in that the third gaming state is configured such that the second determination condition is more easily established than the other gaming states.

  According to the gaming machine BA5, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine BA4, the discrimination means is different from a first discrimination means for performing discrimination based on establishment of a first discrimination condition, and the first discrimination condition At least a second discrimination means for performing discrimination based on establishment of a second discrimination condition, wherein the discrimination by the second discrimination means is more than the discrimination by the first discrimination means. (2) The probability of the determination result being high is configured, and the third gaming state is configured such that the second determination condition is more easily established than the other gaming states. It is.

  Thereby, in the third gaming state, there is an effect that it is possible to play a game paying attention to the determination result of the second determination means.

  In any of game machine BA1 to game machine BA5, the first ball entering means capable of entering game balls, the second ball entering means different from the first ball entering means, and the first ball entering means A third variable means capable of changing the third position where the gaming ball can enter and the fourth position where the gaming ball is more difficult to enter than the third position, and the first determination condition Is established based on the game ball entering the first ball entry means, and the second determination condition is based on the game ball entering the second ball entry means Game machine BA6 characterized by being established.

  According to the gaming machine BA6, in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines BA1 to BA5, the first ball entry means capable of entering the game ball, and the second ball entry means different from the first ball entry means Second variable means that can be changed to a third position where the gaming ball can enter the first ball entry means, and a fourth position where the gaming ball is more difficult to enter than the third position , And the first determination condition is satisfied based on the game ball entering the first ball entry means, and the second determination condition is for the second ball entry means It is established based on the game ball entering the ball.

  As a result, since the variable position of the second variable means can be focused on, there is an effect that it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  In the gaming machine BA6, the second gaming state is configured such that the second variable means is more easily changed to the third position than the first gaming state and the third gaming state. A game machine BA7 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine BA7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BA6, the second variable means is changed to the third position than the first gaming state and the third gaming state. Since it is configured to be easy, there is an effect that it is possible to improve the degree of advantage of the second gaming state.

  In the gaming machine BA6 or BA7, the passage means through which the game ball can pass, the passage judgment means for executing the judgment based on the passage of the game ball through the passage means, and the judgment result of the passage judgment means of the third And a variable control means for changing the second variable means in a predetermined variable pattern based on the judgment result, and the passage judgment means performs the judgment in the second gaming state. When the determination is performed in the first gaming state and the third gaming state, the third determination results in the first probability, and the third determination results in the second probability lower than the first probability. A game machine BA8 characterized in that it results.

  According to the gaming machine BA8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BA6 or BA7, passing means through which the game ball can pass, and passage judging means for executing judgment based on the passage of the game ball through the passing means And a variable control means for changing the second variable means in a predetermined variable pattern based on the determination result of the passage determination means being the third determination result, the passage determination means comprising: (2) When the discrimination is executed in the gaming state, the third discrimination result is obtained with the first probability, and when the discrimination is executed in the first gaming state and the third gaming state, from the first probability The third determination result is also obtained with a low second probability.

  As a result, since it is possible to play a game paying attention to the determination result of the passage determination means, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

<Feature BB group> (The result of the dynamic display is suggested in the effect for notifying the contents different from the result at least)
Based on the first determination means for performing determination based on the establishment of the first determination condition and the determination result of the first determination means being a specific determination result, a bonus game advantageous to the player is executed. Based on the establishment of a second determination condition different from the first effect execution means for performing a first effect for indicating the determination result of the first determination means, and the first determination condition. And a second effect execution means capable of executing a second effect for indicating the determination result of the second determination means, overlapping with the first effect, When the first effect and the second effect are executed in an overlapping manner by executing the second effect, the second effect execution means indicates the first effect indicated by the first effect in the second effect. Execute a specific presentation mode that can indicate the judgment result of the first judgment means Gaming machine BB1, wherein those that are configured ability.

  In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when the game ball enters the starting opening provided on the game board surface, the success or failure of the game is drawn, and it is advantageous for the player if the result of the drawing is a hit. There is one that runs a hit game. Further, among such conventional game machines, a game machine capable of simultaneously changing the first special symbol and the second special symbol has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-12907). By the way, the above-mentioned gaming machine executes a variation effect dedicated to the first special symbol in order to suggest the lottery result of the first special symbol, and dedicated to the second special symbol in order to suggest the lottery result of the second special symbol Since it is configured to execute the fluctuation effect, the game using one special symbol lottery and the game using the other special symbol lottery become independent, and both the special symbol lottery is executed vigorously There was a problem that the motivation to try was reduced. In addition, when a plurality of special symbols are changing at the same time, there is a problem that the player is notified of the lottery result of each special symbol incomprehensiblely. In addition, there is a problem that it is not possible to suitably execute the effect since the independent variable effects are executed for each special symbol.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine BB1, based on the fact that the first discrimination means for performing discrimination based on the establishment of the first discrimination condition and the discrimination result of the first discrimination means is a specific discrimination result. A bonus game executing means for executing a bonus game advantageous to the player, a first effect executing means for executing a first effect for indicating the determination result of the first determining means, and the first determination condition It is possible to execute a second determination unit that executes determination based on the establishment of a different second determination condition, and a second effect for indicating the determination result of the second determination unit, overlapping with the first effect. And a second effect execution unit, wherein the second effect execution unit executes the second effect to execute the first effect and the second effect in an overlapping manner. In the effect, the discrimination result of the first discrimination means indicated by the first effect It is what is configured to be able to execute certain representation embodiment capable suggested.

  Thereby, not only the determination result of the second determination means but also the determination result of the first determination means can be suggested by the second effect, so that there is an effect that a more suitable effect aspect can be realized.

  In the gaming machine BB1, the second effect execution means is configured to be able to execute the specific effect aspect in the second effect before the determination result of the first determination means is indicated by the first effect. Game machine BB2 characterized in that

  According to the gaming machine BB2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine BB1, the second effect execution means performs the second effect before the determination result of the first determination means is indicated by the first effect. Since the specific effect mode is configured to be executable, it is possible to confirm the determination result of the first determination means by confirming the second effect without confirming the first effect to the end. Therefore, there is an effect that the convenience of the player can be improved.

  The gaming machine BB1 or BB2 includes a first ball entering means capable of entering a game ball and a second ball entering means different from the first ball entering means, wherein the first discrimination condition is the first discriminant condition 1 is satisfied based on the game ball entering the ball entering means, and the second determination condition is satisfied based on the game ball entering the second ball entering means A game machine BB3 characterized by being a game.

  According to the gaming machine BB3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine BB1 or BB2, the gaming machine BB3 is provided with a first ball entry means capable of entering a game ball and a second ball entry means different from the first ball entry means. The first determination condition is established based on the game ball having entered the first ball entry means, and the second determination condition is played to the second ball entry means It is established based on the ball entering the ball.

  As a result, since it is possible to play a game paying attention to the first ball entering means and the second ball entering means, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  In any one of gaming machines BB1 to BB3, a variable ball entry means that can be changed to a first state in which the gaming ball can enter the ball and a second state in which the gaming ball is more difficult to enter than the first state. And a bonus giving means for giving a predetermined bonus based on the game ball entering the variable ball entering means, and a second judgment result of the second judgment means different from the specific judgment result. A variable game executing means for executing a variable game in which the variable entering means is changed from the second state to the first state for a predetermined period based on the determination result, and the second effect The execution means is configured to be able to suggest the specific effect mode in the second effect executed based on the determination result of the second determination means being the second determination result. A gaming machine BB4 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine BB4, in addition to the effects played by any of the gaming machines BB1 to BB3, the first state in which the gaming ball can enter and the second state in which the gaming ball is more difficult to enter than the first state In the state, the variable ball entering means that can be changed, the bonus giving means that grants a predetermined bonus based on the game ball entering the variable ball entering means, and the determination result of the second determining means A variable game for executing a variable game in which the variable ball entering means is changed from the second state to the first state for a predetermined period based on the second judgment result different from the specific judgment result. Execution means, and the second effect execution means performs the specific effect in the second effect executed based on the determination result of the second determination means becoming the second determination result It is configured to be able to suggest an aspect.

  As a result, it is possible to play the game in anticipation that the determination result of the second determination means will be the second determination result.

  In the gaming machine BB4, as the gaming state after the end of the bonus game, the first gaming state in which the discrimination of the first discrimination means is easy to be executed and the discrimination of the second discrimination means are easier to be executed than the first gaming state The gaming state setting means for setting one gaming state out of a plurality of gaming states including at least a second gaming state, and based on the fact that a specific condition set in advance in the first gaming state is established. A game state change unit configured to change the state from the first game state to the second game state;

  According to the gaming machine BB5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BB4, as the gaming state after the end of the bonus game, the first gaming state in which the discrimination of the first discrimination means is easy to be executed and the first gaming state Game state setting means for setting one game state out of a plurality of game states including at least a second game state in which the judgment of the second judgment means is easy to be executed, and predetermined in the first game state Game state changing means for changing the game state from the first game state to the second game state based on the satisfaction of the specific condition.

  In this way, in the first gaming state, it is possible to play the game expecting that the specific condition is established, so that it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  In game machine BB1 or BB2, variable ball entry means that can be changed into a first state in which the game ball can enter the ball and a second state in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first state A bonus granting means for granting a predetermined bonus based on the game ball entering the ball entering means, and the second judging means is configured to enter the game ball into the variable ball entering means It is determined whether or not the second effect is configured to output a predetermined voice based on the game ball entering the variable ball entry means. The gaming machine BB6 to be.

  According to the gaming machine BB6, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine BB1 or BB2, the first state in which the gaming ball can enter and the second state in which the gaming ball is more difficult to enter than the first state. And a second awarding means for giving a predetermined benefit based on the game ball entering the variable entering means. It is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the ball means, and the second effect is an effect that outputs a predetermined sound based on the game ball having entered the variable ball entry means. It is composed of

  As a result, since it is possible to execute an auditory presentation by voice, there is an effect that it is possible to further improve the player's interest in the game.

  In any of the gaming machines BB1 to BB6, the first effect mode and the first effect mode for indicating the specific determination result more than the first effect mode is executed in the specific effect mode. A game machine BB7 at least including a second effect mode in which the ratio to be executed by the second effect execution means is high.

  According to the gaming machine BB7, in any one of the gaming machines BB1 to BB6, the first effect mode and the first effect mode for indicating a specific determination result of the specific effect than the first effect mode in the specific effect mode Since at least the second effect mode in which the ratio to be executed by the second effect executing means is high when the second effect mode is executed is included, the second effect mode is executed in the second effect. It can make you expect more strongly. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  In the gaming machine BB7, in the specific effect mode, a third effect mode that can be executed by the second effect execution means only when the first effect for indicating the specific determination result is executed. A gaming machine BB8 characterized by at least being included.

  According to the gaming machine BB8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine BB7, the second effect is performed only when the first effect for indicating the specific determination result is executed in the specific effect mode. Since at least the third effect mode that can be executed by the execution means is included, when the third effect mode is executed, it is possible to bring greater joy to the player. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  In any one of the gaming machines BB1 to BB8, the second effect is executed in a mode that is more easily viewed by the player than the first effect for at least a predetermined period. BB9.

  According to the gaming machine BB9, in addition to the effects played by any of the gaming machines BB1 to BB8, the second effect is executed in a mode that is more easily viewed by the player than the first effect for at least a predetermined period. Therefore, by confirming the second effect that is easy to view, it is possible to confirm both the determination result of the second determination means and the determination result of the first determination means. Therefore, there is an effect that the convenience of the player can be improved.

<Characteristics BC group> (Directly transition to an advantageous state based on the establishment of a specific condition different from a jackpot in an adverse state)
Discrimination means for performing discrimination based on establishment of discrimination conditions, benefit game execution means for performing a bonus game advantageous to the player based on the discrimination result of the discrimination means becoming a specific discrimination result, and game Second game state setting means for setting a second game state advantageous to the player based on establishment of at least a specific setting condition different from the execution of the bonus game during the first game state disadvantageous to the player A gaming machine comprising: acquired game execution means for executing an acquired game in which a player can acquire a predetermined benefit each time a predetermined specific condition is satisfied in the second gaming state. BC1.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is one that shifts to the winning state when the result of the lottery performed based on the winning of the gaming ball to the starting winning opening is a win. Some of such gaming machines are provided with a plurality of types of per-classes having different numbers of rounds, and some are trying to improve the persuasiveness by varying the game value that can be acquired (for example, , Patent Document 1: Patent No. 2514417).

  Further, among the above-described conventional game machines, there are also machines that can be configured to be able to change the game state after the end of the hit state according to the type of the hit, and after the hit state is ended There are also those aiming to improve the interest in Furthermore, in the above-described conventional gaming machines, a relatively advantageous gaming state is set after the winning state is over, and the relatively advantageous gaming state has been continuously removed in a specified number of lotterys In some cases, there is also a transition to a more advantageous state.

  However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, it is difficult to shift to a more advantageous gaming state unless it is shifted to a relatively advantageous gaming state, so the interest in a disadvantageous gaming state is improved. There was a problem that it was difficult to do it.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine BC1, according to the determination means for performing the determination based on the establishment of the determination condition, and the advantage advantageous to the player based on the determination result of the determination means becomes a specific determination result A second game advantageous to the player based on establishment of at least a specific setting condition different from the execution of the bonus game, between the bonus game execution means for executing the game and the first game state disadvantageous to the player. Second game state setting means for setting a state, and acquired game execution means for executing an acquired game in which a player can acquire a predetermined privilege each time a predetermined specific condition is satisfied in the second game state And.

  As a result, since it is possible to cause the player to play the game in an adverse first game state in expectation of the establishment of the specific setting condition, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  In the gaming machine BC1, it is difficult to enter the game ball from the first position where the game ball can enter the ball, the first position where the game ball can enter the ball, and the first position. The variable game apparatus according to the present invention comprises: variable means which can be changed to a second position; and benefit granting means for granting the predetermined benefit based on the game ball entering the ball entering means; The variable means determines the second game from the second position for a predetermined period as the winning game, on the assumption that the determination result of the determination means is a second determination result different from the specific determination result as the establishment of the specific condition A game machine BC2 characterized by being controlled to be variable to one position.

  According to the gaming machine BC2, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine BC1, the ball entering means capable of entering the game ball, the first position where the game ball can enter the ball to the ball entering means, and the first A bonus giving means for giving the predetermined benefit based on the variable means being variable to the second position where the game ball is difficult to enter than the position, and the game ball entering the ball entering means And the acquired game execution means sets the variable means as the acquired game, assuming that the determination result of the determination means is a second determination result different from the specific determination result, as the establishment of the specific condition. Is controlled so as to change from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period.

  Thereby, in the second gaming state, since it is possible to play the game paying attention to whether or not the game ball enters the ball entering means, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game There is.

  In the gaming machine BC2, when the acquired game is executed at least in the second gaming state, the second gaming state is maintained even after the execution of the acquired game is finished. Game machine BC3.

  According to the gaming machine BC3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine BC2, the second gaming state is at least after the execution of the acquired game is finished when the acquired game is executed in the second gaming state. Since it is maintained, it is possible to further enhance the degree of advantage of the second gaming state. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  The gaming machine BC2 or BC3 is provided with a first ball entering means capable of entering the game ball and a second ball entering means different from the first ball entering means, and the discrimination condition is the first ball entering condition. At least a first determination condition established based on the game ball entering the means, and a second determination condition established based on the game ball entering the second ball entry means. In the determination performed based on the establishment of the second determination condition, the probability of the second determination result is higher than the determination performed based on the establishment of the first determination condition. In the first gaming state, when the determination is executed based on the establishment of the second determination condition, the determination result is more difficult to be output than in the second gaming state. A game machine BC4 characterized in that it is configured.

  According to the gaming machine BC4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine BC2 or BC3, the gaming machine includes a first ball entering means capable of entering a game ball and a second ball entering means different from the first ball entering means. The determination condition is based on the first determination condition established based on the game ball entering the first ball entry means and the game sphere entering the second ball entry means. A second determination condition is satisfied, and the determination performed based on the establishment of the second determination condition is more than the determination performed based on the establishment of the first determination condition. The probability that the second determination result is obtained is configured to be high, and the first game state is determined when the determination is performed based on the establishment of the second determination condition. The determination result is configured to be more difficult to output than the state.

  As a result, since the degree of advantage in the second gaming state can be further improved, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  In any one of the gaming machines BC1 to BC4, the second gaming state is characterized by being maintained in the same gaming state at least until the discrimination result of the discrimination means becomes the specific discrimination result. To be a game machine BC5.

  According to the gaming machine BC5, in addition to the effects played by any of the gaming machines BC1 to BC4, the second gaming state is the same game at least until the determination result of the determination means becomes the specific determination result Since the state is maintained, in the second gaming state, there is an effect that it is possible to realize novel game characteristics that are expected to be not a specific determination result.

  In the gaming machine BC5, a gaming machine BC6 characterized in that the second gaming state has a lower probability of being the specific determination result than the first gaming state.

  According to the gaming machine BC6, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine BC5, the second gaming state has a lower probability of being the specific determination result than the first gaming state, so the degree of advantage in the second gaming state Has the effect of being able to

  The gaming machine BC5 or BC6 is provided with initialization means for initializing the setting of the gaming machine, and the second gaming state is constituted by the gaming state set when the initialization by the initialization means is performed. Game machine BC7 characterized in that

  According to the gaming machine BC7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BC5 or BC6, the gaming machine BC7 is provided with initialization means for initializing the setting of the gaming machine, and in the second gaming state, the initialization by the initialization means is performed. The game is configured in the game state that is set when the

  As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a very special game characteristic different from that of a general game machine in which the game state set by the initialization becomes advantageous.

  In the gaming machine BC7, the acquired game is executed from when the second gaming state is set based on the initialization performed by the initialization unit until the predetermined specific condition is established. A gaming machine BC8 characterized in that the game machine is provided with a limiting means for making it difficult for the user to do so.

  According to the gaming machine BC8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BC7, the specific condition set in advance is set after the second gaming state is set based on the initialization performed by the initialization unit. Since the limitation means is set to limit the acquired game to be difficult to be executed until the establishment of the game, it is possible to suppress an advantage during the initialization. Therefore, it is advantageous for the player to be excessively advantageous after the initialization and to suppress the disadvantage of the hole.

  In the gaming machine BC8, it is difficult to enter the game ball from the first position where the game ball can enter the ball, the first position where the game ball can enter the ball, and the first position. The variable game apparatus according to the present invention comprises: variable means which can be changed to a second position; and benefit granting means for granting the predetermined benefit based on the game ball entering the ball entering means; The variable means determines the second game from the second position for a predetermined period as the winning game, on the assumption that the determination result of the determination means is a second determination result different from the specific determination result as the establishment of the specific condition. Control is performed so as to be variable to one position, and the restriction means determines that the period from when the discrimination result of the discrimination means becomes the second discrimination result until the acquisition game starts is the above More than if no restrictions were imposed Gaming machine BC9, characterized by controlling the Kunar so.

  According to the gaming machine BC9, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine BC8, the ball entering means capable of entering the game ball, the first position where the game ball can enter the ball to the ball entering means, and the first A bonus giving means for giving the predetermined benefit based on the variable means being variable to the second position where the game ball is difficult to enter than the position, and the game ball entering the ball entering means And the acquired game execution means sets the variable means as the acquired game, assuming that the determination result of the determination means is a second determination result different from the specific determination result, as the establishment of the specific condition. Is controlled so as to be variable from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period, and the restriction means acquires the acquisition after the judgment result of the judgment means becomes the second judgment result. The period until the game is started is Limit is controlled to be longer than if not done.

  As a result, the advantage of the second gaming state after initialization can be lowered.

<Characteristics BD group> (Different degrees of advantage are differentiated between the normal state at the time of RBAM check and the normal state transferred by another trigger)
The first state setting means capable of setting the gaming state to the predetermined first gaming state based on the initialization of the setting of the gaming machine, and the predetermined specific at least different from the power-on to the gaming machine The first gaming state is set by the second state setting means for setting one gaming state out of a plurality of gaming states including at least the first gaming state based on establishment of the setting condition, and the first state setting means Based on the setting, the specific element relating to the degree of advantage is set to a predetermined degree of advantage or less, and the specific state is set based on the setting of the first gaming state by the second state setting means. And a specific element setting unit configured to set an element to be higher than the specific degree of advantage.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is one that shifts to the winning state when the result of the lottery performed based on the winning of the gaming ball to the starting winning opening is a win. Some of such gaming machines are provided with a plurality of types of per-classes having different numbers of rounds, and some are trying to improve the persuasiveness by varying the game value that can be acquired (for example, , Patent Document 1: Patent No. 2514417).

  Further, among the above-described conventional game machines, there are also machines that can be configured to be able to change the game state after the end of the hit state according to the type of the hit, and after the hit state is ended There are also those aiming to improve the interest in Furthermore, a novel game having a configuration in which a gaming state having a lower degree of advantage than the gaming state (so-called, normal state) set when initializing the setting of the gaming machine is provided in such conventional gaming machines. There is also sex.

  However, in such a conventional game machine, if the degree of advantage of the gaming state after initialization is increased in order to realize novel playability, the initialization will be excessively advantageous to the player. As a result, there is a risk that the game machine will be difficult to initialize for the hall.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine BD1, based on the initialization of the setting of the gaming machine, the first state setting means capable of setting the gaming state to the predetermined first gaming state, and the power supply to the gaming machine Second state setting means for setting one gaming state out of a plurality of gaming states including at least the first gaming state based on establishment of at least a predetermined specific setting condition different from insertion; Based on the setting of the first gaming state by the 1 state setting means, the specific element relating to the advantage degree is set to a predetermined advantageous degree or less, and the first game state is set by the second state setting means. And a specific element setting unit configured to set the specific element to be higher than the specific degree of advantage based on the setting of

  As a result, since it is possible to cause the game to be performed in anticipation of the setting of the first gaming state by the second state setting means, rather than the first state setting means, to cause the player to have fun with the game. Has the effect of

  In the gaming machine BD1, the specific element setting unit is configured to set the specific element based on satisfaction of a predetermined setting condition set in advance during the first gaming state set by the first state setting unit. The game machine BD2 is set to be higher than the specific degree of advantage.

  According to the gaming machine BD2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine BD1, the specific element setting means sets a specific setting condition predetermined during the first gaming state set by the first state setting means. Since the specific element is set to be higher than the specific degree of advantage based on the establishment, it is possible to play a game expecting that a specific setting condition is established. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  In the game machine BD1 or BD2, it is difficult to enter the game ball from the first means where the game ball can enter the ball, the first position where the game ball can enter to the ball means, and the first position. The second position, which is variable, variable means that can be changed, privilege giving means for giving a predetermined privilege based on the game ball entering the ball entering means, and determination based on the establishment of the determination condition A variable game in which the variable means is changed from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period of time based on the determination means performing the step and the determination result of the determination means becoming a specific determination result A game machine BD3 comprising: variable game execution means, wherein the specific element setting means, as the specific element, changes the ease with which the variable game can be executed.

  According to the gaming machine BD3, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine BD1 or BD2, a ball entering means capable of entering the game ball, a first position where the game ball can enter the ball to the ball entering means, and The second position where the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first position, the variable means capable of being changed, and the privilege giving a predetermined benefit based on the game ball entering the ball means. Means, the determination means for performing the determination based on the establishment of the determination condition, and the variable means for the predetermined period from the second position based on the determination result of the determination means becoming a specific determination result A variable game execution means for executing a variable game which is variable to one position, and the specific element setting means, as the specific element, changes the ease of execution of the variable game.

  This makes it possible to vary the ease with which the variable game can be performed in the first gaming state, and therefore it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  In the gaming machine BD3, a display means capable of displaying identification information, a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information indicating the discrimination result of the discrimination means on the display means, and the display by the dynamic display means Dynamic display period determination means for determining a dynamic display period in dynamic display of identification information, wherein the specific element setting means sets the first gaming state by the first state setting means Based on the control, the dynamic display period determining means is controlled to easily set a period longer than the first period predetermined by the dynamic display period determining means, and the first gaming state is set by the second state setting means. The game machine BD4 is controlled based on the above to make it easy to set a period shorter than the first period.

  According to the gaming machine BD4, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine BD3, the display means capable of displaying identification information and the dynamic display for causing the display means to dynamically display the identification information indicating the determination result of the determination means Display means; and dynamic display period determination means for determining a dynamic display period in dynamic display of the identification information by the dynamic display means, the specific element setting means including the first state setting means Based on the setting of the first gaming state, control is performed so that a period of a length longer than the first period predetermined by the dynamic display period determining means is easily set, and the second state setting Based on the setting of the first gaming state by the means, control is performed such that a period shorter than the first period is easily set.

  Thereby, in the first gaming state, there is an effect that the degree of advantage can be changed more reliably.

  The gaming machine BD4 includes a first ball entry means capable of entering a game ball and a second ball entry means different from the first ball entry means, and the determination condition is to the first ball entry means And at least a first determination condition established based on entering the ball and a second determination condition established based on having entered the second entering means, The determination means determines the specific determination result when the determination is performed based on the establishment of the second determination condition than when the determination is performed based on the establishment of the first determination condition. The specific element setting means is configured to establish the second determination condition based on the setting of the first gaming state by the first state setting means. Dynamic display of the identification information performed based on The second determination condition is controlled such that a period longer than the first period is easily set as the display period, and the first gaming state is set by the second state setting unit. Control is performed such that a period shorter than the first period is easily set as a dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the identification information performed based on the establishment of Game machine BD5.

  According to the gaming machine BD5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine BD4, the gaming machine BD5 is provided with a first ball entry means capable of entering a game ball and a second ball entry means different from the first ball entry means, The discrimination condition is a first discrimination condition established based on having entered the first ball entry means, and a second discrimination condition established based on having entered the second ball entry means, The determination means is configured to perform the determination based on the establishment of the second determination condition than the case where the determination is performed based on the establishment of the first determination condition. Is configured to have a higher probability of being the specific determination result, and the specific element setting unit is configured to set the first gaming state by the first state setting unit. Are executed based on the establishment of the second determination condition. A period longer than the first period is controlled to be easily set as the dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the identification information, and the first gaming state is set by the second state setting means. A period shorter than the first period may be easily set as a dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the identification information to be executed based on the establishment of the second determination condition. It is to control.

  Thereby, the advantage degree can be made different by making the execution intervals of the determination of the second determination means different.

  In the gaming machine BD5, based on the determination result of the determination means becoming a predetermined second determination result, a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game advantageous to the player, and an end of the bonus game As the gaming state in the later, the specific element is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state set to the specific degree of advantage or less, and the specific element is set to be higher than the specific degree of advantage The game state setting means for setting one game state out of a plurality of game states including at least a second game state which is more disadvantageous to the player than the first game state, and the second state setting means A gaming machine BD6, wherein the first gaming state is set by setting that the specific setting condition is satisfied that a predetermined change condition is satisfied in a state where a gaming state is set.

  According to the gaming machine BD6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine BD5, a bonus game advantageous to the player is executed based on the fact that the discrimination result of the discrimination means is the second discrimination result defined in advance. As the gaming state after the end of the bonus game execution means and the bonus game, the specific element is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state set to the specific degree of advantage or less, and the specific element is Game state setting means for setting one game state out of a plurality of game states including at least a second game state which is more disadvantageous to the player than the first game state set higher than the specific degree of advantage; The second state setting means sets the first gaming state by setting that a predetermined change condition is satisfied in a state in which the second gaming state is set, as the specific setting condition is satisfied.

  In this way, in the second gaming state, it is possible to play the game expecting that the predetermined change condition is established, so that it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  In the gaming machine BD6, the first gaming state is characterized in that the probability that the discrimination result of the discrimination means is the second discrimination result is lower than that of the second gaming state. The gaming machine BD7.

  According to the gaming machine BD7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine BD6, in the first gaming state, the probability that the discrimination result of the discrimination means is the second discrimination result is lower than in the second gaming state. In the first gaming state, although the determination result of the determining means is low, it is possible to realize novel game characteristics that it is advantageous to be set by the second state setting means. effective.

  In the gaming machine BD6 or BD7, the specific element setting means performs dynamic display of the identification information to be executed based on the establishment of the second determination condition based on the setting of the second gaming state. A game machine BD8, which is controlled to easily set a period longer than the first period as a target display period.

  According to the gaming machine BD8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine BD6 or BD7, the specific element setting unit is executed based on the establishment of the second determination condition based on the setting of the second gaming state. Since the control is performed so that a period longer than the first period is easily set as the dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the identification information, the second determination condition is hard to be established in the second gaming state It has the effect of being able to

<Features BE group> (Perform specific effects from the transition to small hit RUSH to the start of small hit fluctuation)
The ball entering means capable of entering the game ball, the first position where the game ball can enter the ball entering means, and the second position where the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first position The variable means may perform the predetermined period based on the fact that the determination result of the determination means becomes a specific determination result based on the variable means being variable, the determination means performing the determination based on the establishment of the determination condition, and In a gaming machine provided with variable game execution means for executing a variable game that is variable from the 2nd position to the first position, the first game state in which the variable game is difficult to be executed based on the establishment of a specific setting condition And game state setting means for setting one game state out of a plurality of game states including at least a second game state in which the variable game is easier to be executed than the first game state, and the game state setting The second gaming state is set by the means After the first effect is executed by the first effect execution means for executing the first effect based on the first effect execution means, the determination result of the determination means becomes the specific determination result And second effect executing means for executing a second effect of an effect aspect different from the first effect, the game machine BE1 comprising:

  Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, gaming machines provided with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device are known. In this conventional game machine, a variable display of symbols is performed on the display device, and the symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination, whereby a jackpot game advantageous to the player is given. In addition, various images such as characters and landscapes are displayed on the display device in addition to the symbols, and the interest of the game is improved by executing various kinds of interest effects (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-325886) Gazette).

  In addition, among such conventional gaming machines, in a predetermined gaming state, a presentation mode (preparation presentation mode) indicating that the advantageous situation for the player is close, and the player during the execution of the preparation presentation mode When there is an advantageous situation for the user, there is also something that can be performed to indicate the advantageous situation.

  However, in such a conventional game machine, even if the preparation effect mode is executed, the player only wants the advantage situation effect to be executed quickly, and the execution period of the preparation effect mode becomes long. There is a problem in that there is a risk of losing the interest of the player.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine BE1, the ball entering means capable of entering the game ball, the first position where the game ball can enter the ball entering means, and the game ball than the first position Based on the fact that the discrimination result of the discrimination means performing discrimination based on the establishment of the discrimination condition and the discrimination result of the discrimination means being the specific discrimination result , The variable means includes variable game execution means for executing a variable game that is changed from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period, and based on the establishment of a specific setting condition, Set one game state out of a plurality of game states including at least a first game state in which the variable game is difficult to be executed and a second game state in which the variable game is easier to be executed than the first game state Game state setting means and the game state setting means A first effect executing means for executing a first effect based on the setting of the second gaming state, and a judgment result of the judging means after the first effect is executed by the first effect executing means And second effect execution means for executing a second effect of an effect aspect different from the first effect based on the fact that the second determination result is the specific determination result.

  As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  In the gaming machine BE1, based on the display means capable of displaying the identification information and the determination result of the determination means being the second determination result different from the specific determination result, a bonus game advantageous to the player is performed. A bonus game executing means to be executed, and a dynamic display executing means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the discrimination result of the discrimination means, wherein the discrimination condition is a first discrimination condition and its first discrimination A second determination condition different from the condition, and the dynamic display means dynamically displays the identification information based on establishment of the first determination condition, and the second determination condition And the dynamic display of the identification information based on the establishment of the above can be performed in an overlapping manner, and the gaming machine is configured to perform the first determination condition and the second determination condition. Judgment based on the establishment of one of the judgment conditions Is executed based on the fact that the other discrimination condition is satisfied during the dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the identification information for at least indicating the second discrimination result when the second discrimination result is obtained. A gaming machine BE2 comprising: discrimination result control means for controlling so as to be outlier discrimination results different from any of the specific discrimination result and the second discrimination result.

  According to the gaming machine BE2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BE1, the display means capable of displaying the identification information and the discrimination result of the discrimination means is the second discrimination result different from the specific discrimination result. A bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game advantageous to the player, and a dynamic display execution means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the discrimination result of the discrimination means, wherein the discrimination condition is A first determination condition and a second determination condition different from the first determination condition, and the dynamic display means is configured to determine the identification information based on establishment of the first determination condition Dynamic display of the identification information and dynamic display of the identification information based on the establishment of the second determination condition, and the gaming machine is configured to perform the first determination The condition and the second determination condition When the second determination result is obtained by determination based on the establishment of one of the determination conditions, the other determination condition at least during the dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the identification information for indicating the second determination result And a determination result control unit configured to perform control so as to be an out-of-range determination result different from any of the specific determination result and the second determination result.

  As a result, it is possible to suppress duplicate bonus game being executed between the determination based on the establishment of the first determination condition and the determination based on the establishment of the second determination condition.

  In the gaming machine BE2, the second gaming state is configured such that discrimination based on establishment of the second discrimination condition is easier to be executed than in the first gaming state, and the second discrimination condition The determination performed based on the establishment of the second feature is configured to be any of the determination result among the specific determination result, the second determination result, and the deviation determination result. Game machine BE3.

  According to the gaming machine BE3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine BE2, the second gaming state is configured to be more easily determined based on the establishment of the second determination condition than the first gaming state. The determination performed based on the establishment of the second determination condition is one of the specific determination result, the second determination result, and the deviation determination result. Is configured as.

  Thereby, there is an effect that it can be expected that a specific determination result will be obtained in the second gaming state.

  The gaming machine BE3 includes gaming state change means for changing the gaming state to the second gaming state based on the establishment of at least a specific condition different from the execution of the bonus game in the first gaming state. A game machine BE4 characterized by.

  According to the gaming machine BE4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine BE3, in the first gaming state, the gaming state is the second gaming state based on establishment of at least a specific condition different from that of executing the bonus game. Since the gaming state changing means for changing to the state is provided, it is possible to play a game expecting that the specific condition is established. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  In the gaming machine BE4, the bonus game is not executed from when the first gaming state is set until the determination by the determination means having the predetermined number of times is executed. Game machine BE5 characterized in that the game state is changed to the second game state.

  According to the gaming machine BE5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine BE4, the determination by the determination means of the predetermined number of times determined in advance is executed after the first gaming state is set in the gaming state changing means. Since the game state is changed to the second game state when the bonus game is not executed until then, it is novel that in the first game state, the game is played in the expectation that the bonus game will not be performed. There is an effect that the game can be realized.

  In the gaming machine BE5, the first gaming state is configured to be the second discrimination result with a first probability when the discrimination by the discrimination means is executed, and the second gaming state is The second determination result is obtained with a second probability lower than the first probability when the determination by the determination means is executed, and the gaming state change means is configured to If the bonus game is not executed between the time when the gaming state is set and the determination by the determination means of a predetermined number of times is executed, the second determination result by the determination by the determination means A gaming machine BE6 characterized in that the gaming state is changed to the second gaming state by varying the probability of becoming the first probability to the second probability.

  According to the gaming machine BE6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BE5, the first gaming state is configured to be the second discrimination result with a first probability when the discrimination by the discrimination means is executed. The second game state is configured to be the second determination result at a second probability lower than the first probability when the determination by the determination means is executed. The gaming state changing means does not execute the special game from the time when the first gaming state is set until the determination by the determining means of a predetermined number of times is executed. The game state is changed to the second game state by changing the probability of the second judgment result from the first probability to the second probability in the judgment by the judgment means.

  As a result, it is possible to realize novel game characteristics in which it is advantageous for the probability that the second determination result is low to be advantageous, so that it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  In any one of the gaming machines BE1 to BE6, the gaming state is set to the second gaming state on the basis of the initialization means for initializing the setting of the gaming machine and the fact that the initialization is executed by the initialization means In the second game state set by the initialization time setting means and the initialization time setting means, the variable game is less likely to be executed than the second game state set by the game state setting means And limiting means for limiting the game machine to the game machine BE7.

  According to the gaming machine BE7, in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines BE1 to BE6, based on the initialization means initializing the setting of the gaming machine and the fact that the initialization is executed by the initialization means The initialization setting means for setting the gaming state to the second gaming state, and the second gaming state set by the gaming state setting means in the second gaming state set by the initialization setting means Also, there is provided restriction means for restricting the variable game to be difficult to be executed.

  As a result, it is possible to realize an extremely special and innovative game characteristic that the same gaming state as the state after initialization can be made advantageous while suppressing that the state after initialization becomes too advantageous.

<Feature BF group> (multiple small hit RUSH states with different degrees of advantage)
The ball entering means where the game ball can enter the ball, the first position where the game ball can enter the ball into the ball means, and the second position where the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first position Variable variable means, privilege giving means for giving a predetermined privilege based on the game ball entering the ball entering means, and discrimination means for performing discrimination based on establishment of discrimination conditions, and The bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game advantageous to the player based on the determination result of the determination means being the first determination result, and the determination result of the determination means is different from the first determination result Variable game execution means for executing a variable game in which the variable means is changed from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period based on the second determination result, and establishment of a predetermined setting condition Based on the first state and the variable game than the first state A state setting unit capable of setting one state out of a plurality of states including a second state that is easy to be executed and a third state that is more advantageous to the player than the second state. A game machine BF1 characterized by.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is one that shifts to the winning state when the result of the lottery performed based on the winning of the gaming ball to the starting winning opening is a win. Some of such gaming machines are provided with a plurality of types of per-classes having different numbers of rounds, and some are trying to improve the persuasiveness by varying the game value that can be acquired (for example, , Patent Document 1: Patent No. 2514417).

  Further, among the above-described conventional game machines, there are also machines that can be configured to be able to change the game state after the end of the hit state according to the type of the hit, and after the hit state is ended There are also those aiming to improve the interest in Furthermore, among the above-described conventional game machines, as an advantageous state, a state in which a so-called small hit game is easy to be executed and it becomes possible to obtain a game value even without being hit is provided. There are also those that are aiming to further improve interest.

  However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, when the small hitting game is shifted to an advantageous state in which the game is easy to be executed, the subsequent games become mere monotonous ones merely continuing to obtain the game value. There is a problem that it becomes difficult to improve the interest of people.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine BF1, the ball entering means capable of entering the game ball, the first position where the game ball can enter the ball to the ball entering means, and the game ball than the first position In the second position where it is difficult to enter the ball, benefit giving means for providing a predetermined benefit based on the game ball entering the ball entering means, and the establishment of the determination condition Discrimination means for performing discrimination based on the above, benefit game execution means for performing a bonus game advantageous to the player based on the discrimination result of the discrimination means becoming the first discrimination result, and discrimination of the discrimination means A variable game is executed to execute a variable game in which the variable means is changed from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period based on the second determination result different from the first determination result. The game execution means and the first state based on the establishment of the predetermined setting conditions Setting one state out of a plurality of states including a second state in which the variable game is easier to be executed than the first state, and a third state advantageous to the player than the second state And means for setting possible states.

  As a result, since it is possible to play a game expecting to be in the second state or the third state, there is an effect that it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  In the gaming machine BF1, at least the state at the time when the second determination result is obtained is maintained even after the end of the variable game executed based on the fact that the second determination result is obtained. A game machine BF2 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine BF2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine BF1, the variable game executed based on the second discrimination result when the second discrimination result is obtained. Since it is maintained at least even after the end of the variable game can be executed a plurality of times in the second state. Therefore, there is an effect that the degree of advantage of the second state can be improved.

  In the gaming machine BF1 or BF2, the third state is a state in which the variable game is easier to be executed than the second state.

  According to the gaming machine BF3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine BF1 or BF2, the variable game is easier to be executed than the second state, so that the advantage of the third state can be further improved. effective.

  In the gaming machine BF3, the determination means performs determination based on establishment of a first determination condition that is different from the first determination means that performs determination based on establishment of a first determination condition, and the first determination condition. And the second state is such that the first determination condition is more easily established than the second determination condition, The third state is such that the second determination condition is more easily established than the first determination condition, and the determination by the second determination means is more than the determination by the first determination means. A game machine BF4 characterized in that the probability of the second determination result is high.

  According to the gaming machine BF4, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine BF3, the discriminating means is different from the first discriminating means for performing discrimination based on the establishment of the first discriminating condition, and the first discriminating condition At least a second determination unit configured to execute determination based on establishment of a second determination condition, and the second state is the first determination condition more than the second determination condition. In the third state, the second determination condition is more easily established than the first determination condition, and the determination by the first determination means is more likely to be established. Also, the determination by the second determination means is configured to have a higher probability of the second determination result.

  As a result, the game can be played with greater expectation that the second determination condition is satisfied.

  In any one of the gaming machines BF1 to BF4, the state setting means sets one of the plurality of states as a game state after the execution of the bonus game by the bonus game execution means is finished. In the second state, the probability of the specific discrimination result is higher than the probability of the specific discrimination result in the third state. Feature game machine BF5.

  According to the gaming machine BF5, in addition to the effects played by any of the gaming machines BF1 to BF4, the state setting means sets the plurality of game states after the bonus game execution means finishes executing the bonus game. It is possible to set one of the states, and the probability of the specific determination result in the second state is higher than the probability of the specific determination result in the third state. It is configured as follows.

  As a result, since the third state has a lower probability of being a specific determination result, the advantageous third state can be configured to be easily continued longer. Therefore, when the third state is set, there is an effect that the player can be more satisfied.

  In the gaming machine BF5, the first ball entering means capable of entering the game ball, the second ball entering means different from the first ball entering means, and the ball being capable of entering the first ball entering means A second variable means capable of changing to a third position, and a fourth position at which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the third position, and the determination means includes the first ball entry means Alternatively, the determination is performed based on the game ball entering the second ball entry means, and the second state and the third state are more variable than the first state. A game machine BF6 characterized in that the means is configured to be difficult to change to the third position.

  According to the gaming machine BF6, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine BF5, the first entering means capable of entering the game ball, the second entering means different from the first entering means, and the first entering The game machine comprises a third position where the game ball can enter the ball means and a fourth position which can be changed to a fourth position where the game ball is more difficult to enter than the third position, The determination means executes the determination based on the game ball entering the first ball entering means or the second ball entering means, and the second state and the third state The second variable means is configured to be less likely to be changed to the third position than the first state.

  As a result, it is possible to realize a novel game characteristic that it is more advantageous for the second variable means to be more difficult to be changed than to be easily changed to the third position.

  In the gaming machine BF4, as a gaming state after execution of the bonus game is completed, from among a plurality of gaming states including at least a first gaming state and a second gaming state more advantageous than the first gaming state A game state setting means for setting a game state of 1 is provided, and the state setting means sets the first state based on the setting of the first game state, and the second game state is set. Game machine BF7, which sets one of the second state and the third state based on the above.

  According to the gaming machine BF7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine BF4, as the gaming state after the execution of the bonus game is completed, the first gaming state and the second gaming state more advantageous than the first gaming state The gaming state setting means for setting one gaming state out of a plurality of gaming states including at least the, The state setting means sets the first state based on the setting of the first gaming state Further, one of the second state and the third state is set based on the setting of the second gaming state.

  Thereby, as the second gaming state, it is possible to provide a second gaming state in which the second state is set and a second gaming state in which the third state is set. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to realize a novel game characteristic that the degree of advantage is variable despite the same game state.

<Feature BG group> (the advantage is varied by subtracting the number of time savings during execution of the jackpot variation)
Discrimination means for performing discrimination based on establishment of discrimination conditions, and bonus game execution means for performing bonus game advantageous to the player based on the determination result of the discrimination means becoming a specific discrimination result, and identification A gaming machine according to a first aspect of the present invention, comprising: display means capable of displaying information; and dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information for indicating the determination result of the determination means in the display means. The first gaming state setting means for setting the first gaming state based on the establishment of the first setting condition, and the above-mentioned based on the fact that a second predetermined setting condition is established in the first gaming state. And a second game state setting unit configured to set a second game state different in degree of advantage from the first game state, wherein the second setting condition is movement of the identification information for indicating the specific determination result. Dynamic display Gaming machine BG1, characterized in that it is capable of at least satisfied.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is one that shifts to the winning state when the result of the lottery performed based on the winning of the gaming ball to the starting winning opening is a win. Some of such gaming machines are provided with a plurality of types of per-classes having different numbers of rounds, and some are trying to improve the persuasiveness by varying the game value that can be acquired (for example, , Patent Document 1: Patent No. 2514417).

  Further, among the above-described conventional game machines, there are also machines that can be configured to be able to change the game state after the end of the hit state according to the type of the hit, and after the hit state is ended There are also those aiming to improve the interest in

  However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, even if it is set to an advantageous gaming state, winning a win results in the possibility of shifting from the advantageous state to the disadvantageous state, which is advantageous. There is a problem that it is difficult to improve the player's interest when it hits in the state.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine BG1, according to the determination means for performing the determination based on the establishment of the determination condition, and the advantage advantageous to the player based on the determination result of the determination means being a specific determination result A bonus game executing means for executing a game, a display means capable of displaying identification information, and a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information for indicating the determination result of the determination means in the display means First gaming state setting means for setting a first gaming state based on the establishment of a predetermined first setting condition, and a second predetermined game predetermined in the first gaming state And second game state setting means for setting a second game state different in degree of advantage from the first game state based on establishment of the setting condition, wherein the second setting condition is the specific one. In order to show the judgment result It is capable of at least met during dynamic display of the execution of the identification information.

  As a result, even while the dynamic display of identification information for indicating a specific determination result is being performed, it is possible to play a game expecting that the second setting condition is satisfied. It has the effect of being able to improve the interest.

  In the gaming machine BG1, the determination means performs determination based on establishment of a first determination condition that is different from the first determination means that executes determination based on establishment of a first determination condition, and the first determination condition. A second determination means for performing the second action, and the first dynamic display means dynamically displays the first identification information for indicating the determination result of the first determination means. At least a dynamic display means, and a second dynamic display means for dynamically displaying second identification information for indicating the determination result of the second determination means, and the second setting condition In the first gaming state, while the dynamic display of the identification information for indicating the specific determination result is performed by the first dynamic display means, the determination by the second determining means is performed Conditions that can be satisfied based on Gaming machine BG2, wherein those that are configured.

  According to the gaming machine BG2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine BG1, the discrimination means is different from first discrimination means for performing discrimination based on establishment of the first discrimination condition, and the first discrimination condition At least a second determination unit configured to execute determination based on establishment of a second determination condition, and the dynamic display unit is configured to display the determination result of the first determination unit. 1) at least a first dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information; and a second dynamic display means for dynamically displaying second identification information for indicating a determination result of the second determination means The second setting condition is that while the dynamic display of the identification information for indicating the specific determination result is being performed by the first dynamic display means in the first gaming state The discrimination by the second discrimination means is executed Are those composed of conditions that may hold based on the.

  Thus, while the dynamic display of the identification information for indicating the specific determination result is executed, it is possible to realize the novel game characteristic that the determination by the second determination means is actively performed, so that the player can There is an effect that the interest to the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine BG2, after the first gaming state is set, the second setting condition is determined by the determining means by a predetermined number of times which is determined in advance, before the bonus game is performed. A game machine BG3 characterized by being established based on what has been done.

  According to the gaming machine BG3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine BG2, the second setting condition is set in advance before the bonus game is performed after the first gaming state is set. Since the determination is made based on the execution of the determination by the determination means of the specific number of times, the determination by the determination means of the specific number of times is performed while the dynamic display of identification information for indicating a specific determination result is being performed. Has the effect of being able to realize a novel game characteristic that aims to end.

  In the gaming machine BG2 or BG3, the first dynamic display means has a length of a predetermined period or more as a dynamic display of the identification information for indicating the specific determination result in the first gaming state. Performing the dynamic display of the identification information of the dynamic display period, and the second dynamic display means is shorter than the specific period as the dynamic display of the identification information in the first gaming state A game machine BG4 characterized by performing dynamic display of the identification information of a dynamic display period of a length.

  According to the gaming machine BG4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine BG2 or BG3, the first dynamic display means serves as a dynamic display of the identification information for indicating the specific determination result in the first gaming state. Performing dynamic display of the identification information of a dynamic display period having a length equal to or longer than a predetermined specific period, and the second dynamic display unit is configured to perform the identification display of the identification information in the first gaming state As the dynamic display, the dynamic display of the identification information of the dynamic display period having a length shorter than the specific period is performed.

  Thereby, in the first gaming state, when the dynamic display of identification information for indicating a specific determination result is executed by the first dynamic display means, the dynamic display by the second dynamic display means is more Since many executions can be performed, there is an effect that the second gaming state can be easily set.

  In any of the gaming machines BG1 to BG4, the ball entering means capable of entering the game ball, the first position where the game ball can enter the ball into the ball entering means, and the game ball than the first position Variable means that can be changed to a second position where it is difficult to enter the ball, benefit giving means for providing a predetermined benefit based on the game ball entering the ball entering means, and discrimination of the discriminating means A variable game execution that executes a variable game in which the variable means is changed from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period based on the second judgment result that is different from the specific judgment result. A game machine BG5 characterized in that the second game state is easier to execute the variable game than the first game state.

  According to the gaming machine BG5, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines BG1 to BG4, the ball entering means capable of entering the game ball, and the first position where the game ball can enter the ball to the ball entering means, The second position where game balls are more difficult to enter than the first position, and variable means that can be changed, and the privilege is awarded based on the fact that the game balls enter the ball means The variable means is varied from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period based on the means and the determination result of the determination means being a second determination result different from the specific determination result A variable game execution means for executing a variable game is provided, and in the second game state, the variable game is easier to be executed than in the first game state.

  As a result, since it is possible to form a state in which the variable game is easy to be executed while the dynamic display of identification information for showing a specific determination result is being performed, the variable game can be performed until the bonus game is performed. It has the effect of being able to entertain.

  In any one of gaming machines BG1 to BG5, a bonus for setting any one of a plurality of gaming states including at least the first gaming state and the second gaming state as a gaming state after the end of the bonus game. The after-game setting means includes the after-game setting means, and the one when the bonus game is performed in the second game state is performed by the after-fund game setting means than when the bonus game is performed in the first game state. A gaming machine BG6 characterized in that the second gaming state is easily set.

  According to the gaming machine BG6, in addition to the effects played by any of the gaming machines BG1 to BG5, a plurality including at least the first gaming state and the second gaming state as gaming states after the end of the bonus game. A bonus game after setting means for setting any one of the game states, and the bonus game is executed in the second gaming state than when the bonus game is executed in the first gaming state The second gaming state is configured to be more easily set by the post bonus game setting means.

  Thereby, by shifting to the second gaming state before the bonus game is executed, the second gaming state is easily set even after the end of the bonus game, and therefore, the identification information for indicating the specific determination result While the dynamic display is being executed, it is possible to realize novel game characteristics that allow the determination by the second determination means to be executed more positively.

  In any one of the gaming machines described above, the gaming machine is a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the slot machine, “a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and subsequently displaying the identification information is provided, and the operation of the starting operation means (for example, operation lever) The dynamic display of the identification information is started as a result, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or when the predetermined time elapses. It is a gaming machine provided with a special gaming state generation means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, as a necessary condition that the final identification information of is a specific identification information. In this case, the game medium may be a coin, a medal or the like as a representative example.

  In any one of the gaming machines described above, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine, and a gaming machine γ2. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operating handle, and in response to the operation of the operating handle, the ball is fired to a predetermined game area, and the ball is at an operating opening arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operation opening), identification information dynamically displayed on the display means may be determined and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when the special game state occurs, the variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable the ball to be won, and the value according to the number of winnings There is a case where a value (including not only prize balls but also data etc. written to a magnetic card) is given.

  In any one of the gaming machines described above, a gaming machine γ3 characterized in that the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and subsequently displaying identification information, and for starting operation means (for example, operation lever) Fluctuation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. A special game state generation means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, provided that the finalized identification information upon stopping is the specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium and the identification information In order to start the dynamic display of the game, a predetermined number of balls are required, and when a special gaming state occurs, a large number of balls are paid out.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
64c Central first ball entrance (part of the first ball entry means)
64r Right first ball entrance (part of the first ball entry means)
640 2nd ball entrance (2nd ball entry means)
65a 1st specified winning opening (ball entry means, variable means)
111 Payout control device (benefit granting means)
S406 Part of the discrimination means S408 Part of the bonus game execution means S602 Second game state setting means S1006 Part of the discrimination means S1008 Part of the bonus game execution means S1101 Part of the discrimination means S1103 Acquisition game execution means

Claims (5)

Discrimination means for executing discrimination based on establishment of discrimination conditions;
Bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game advantageous to the player based on the determination result of the determination means being a specific determination result;
Second game state setting means for setting a second game state advantageous to the player based on establishment of at least a specific setting condition different from the execution of the bonus game during the first game state disadvantageous to the player When,
A gaming machine comprising: acquired game execution means for executing an acquired game in which a player can acquire a predetermined benefit each time a predetermined specific condition is satisfied in the second gaming state. Entry means that can enter the game ball,
Variable means that can be changed to a first position where the game ball can enter the ball into the ball entry means, and a second position where the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first position;
And a bonus granting means for granting the predetermined bonus based on the game ball having entered the ball entering means;
The acquired game execution means determines that the variable means has the above-mentioned acquired game as the acquired game for a predetermined period, assuming that the determination result of the determination means is a second determination result different from the specific determination result as the establishment of the specific condition. 2. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein control is made to vary from the second position to the first position.   The second gaming state according to claim 2, wherein the second gaming state is maintained even after the execution of the winning game is finished, when the winning game is executed at least in the second gaming state. Gaming machine. A first ball entry means capable of entering game balls, and a second ball entry means different from the first ball entry means;
The determination condition is established based on the first determination condition established based on the game ball having entered the first ball entry means and the game sphere having entered the second ball entry means. And at least a second determination condition that
The determination performed based on the establishment of the second determination condition is configured such that the probability of the second determination result being higher than the determination performed based on the establishment of the first determination condition. And
The first gaming state is characterized in that when the determination is executed based on the establishment of the second determination condition, the determination result is less likely to be output than the second gaming state. The game machine of claim 2 or 3.   The second gaming state according to any one of claims 1 to 4, wherein the second gaming state is maintained in the same gaming state at least until the determination result of the determination means becomes the specific determination result. The gaming machine described in.

Images